Relion 670 series

Line distance protection REL670 ANSI

Technical reference manual

Document ID: 1MRK506312-UUS

Issued: February 2015
Revision: C
Product version: 1.2

Copyright 2012 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party,
nor used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and
may be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or
product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
ABB Inc.
1021 Main Campus Drive
Raleigh, NC 27606, USA
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8

ABB Inc.
3450 Harvester Road
Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365, menu option #8

ABB Mexico S.A. de C.V.

Paseo de las Americas No. 31 Lomas Verdes 3a secc.
53125, Naucalpan, Estado De Mexico, MEXICO
Phone: (+1) 440-585-7804, menu option #8

Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or
product description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties.
All persons responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must
satisfy themselves that each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including
that any applicable safety or other operational requirements are complied with. In
particular, any risks in applications where a system failure and/or product failure would
create a risk for harm to property or persons (including but not limited to personal
injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the person or entity applying the
equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to ensure that all measures
are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be
completely ruled out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to
notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no
event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use
of this manual or the application of the equipment.

Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for
use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This
conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product
standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product
standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The product is
designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and
ANSI C37.90.

Table of contents

Table of contents
Section 1

Introduction..........................................................................33
Introduction to the technical reference manual.......................................33
About the complete set of manuals for an IED..................................33
About the technical reference manual...............................................34
This manual.......................................................................................35
Introduction...................................................................................35
Principle of operation....................................................................35
Input and output signals...............................................................39
Function block..............................................................................39
Setting parameters.......................................................................40
Technical data..............................................................................40
Intended audience.............................................................................40
Related documents............................................................................40
Revision notes...................................................................................41

Section 2

Analog inputs.......................................................................43
Introduction.............................................................................................43
Operation principle..................................................................................43
Function block.........................................................................................44
Setting parameters.................................................................................45

Section 3

Local HMI............................................................................53
Human machine interface ......................................................................53
Medium size graphic HMI.......................................................................54
Medium..............................................................................................54
Design................................................................................................54
Keypad....................................................................................................56
LED.........................................................................................................57
Introduction........................................................................................57
Status indication LEDs......................................................................57
Indication LEDs.................................................................................58
Local HMI related functions....................................................................59
Introduction........................................................................................59
General setting parameters...............................................................59
Status LEDs.......................................................................................59
Design..........................................................................................59
1

Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Function block..............................................................................60
Input and output signals...............................................................60
Indication LEDs.................................................................................60
Introduction...................................................................................60
Design..........................................................................................61
Function block..............................................................................69
Input and output signals...............................................................69
Setting parameters.......................................................................70

Section 4

Basic IED functions.............................................................73

Authorization...........................................................................................73
Principle of operation.........................................................................73
Authorization handling in the IED.................................................75
Self supervision with internal event list...................................................76
Introduction........................................................................................76
Principle of operation.........................................................................76
Internal signals.............................................................................78
Run-time model............................................................................80
Function block...................................................................................81
Output signals....................................................................................81
Setting parameters............................................................................81
Technical data...................................................................................81
Time synchronization..............................................................................82
Introduction........................................................................................82
Principle of operation.........................................................................82
General concepts.........................................................................82
Real-time clock (RTC) operation..................................................85
Synchronization alternatives.........................................................86
Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization...........................89
Function block...................................................................................89
Output signals....................................................................................90
Setting parameters............................................................................90
Technical data...................................................................................93
Parameter setting groups.......................................................................93
Introduction........................................................................................93
Principle of operation.........................................................................93
Function block...................................................................................94
Input and output signals....................................................................95
Setting parameters............................................................................95
ChangeLock function CHNGLCK...........................................................96

2
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Introduction........................................................................................96
Principle of operation.........................................................................96
Function block...................................................................................97
Input and output signals....................................................................97
Setting parameters............................................................................97
Test mode functionality TEST.................................................................97
Introduction........................................................................................97
Principle of operation.........................................................................98
Function block.................................................................................100
Input and output signals..................................................................100
Setting parameters..........................................................................100
IED identifiers.......................................................................................101
Introduction......................................................................................101
Setting parameters..........................................................................101
Product information...............................................................................101
Introduction......................................................................................101
Setting parameters..........................................................................102
Factory defined settings..................................................................102
Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI.....................................................102
Introduction......................................................................................102
Principle of operation.......................................................................103
Function block.................................................................................103
Input and output signals..................................................................103
Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ................................................104
Introduction......................................................................................104
Principle of operation.......................................................................104
Function block.................................................................................105
Input and output signals..................................................................105
Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI........................................................105
Introduction......................................................................................105
Principle of operation.......................................................................106
Function block.................................................................................106
Input and output signals..................................................................106
Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI....................................................107
Introduction......................................................................................107
Principle of operation.......................................................................107
Frequency values............................................................................107
Function block.................................................................................109
Input and output signals..................................................................109
Setting parameters..........................................................................110
3
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM....................................................112

Introduction......................................................................................112
Principle of operation.......................................................................112
Function block.................................................................................113
Input and output signals..................................................................113
Setting parameters..........................................................................113
Authority status ATHSTAT....................................................................114
Introduction......................................................................................114
Principle of operation.......................................................................114
Function block.................................................................................115
Output signals..................................................................................115
Setting parameters..........................................................................115
Denial of service DOS..........................................................................115
Introduction......................................................................................115
Principle of operation.......................................................................115
Function blocks................................................................................116
Signals.............................................................................................116
Settings............................................................................................117

Section 5

Differential protection........................................................119
1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF (87).....................119
Identification....................................................................................119
Introduction......................................................................................119
Principle of operation.......................................................................119
Logic diagram.............................................................................120
Function block.................................................................................120
Input and output signals..................................................................121
Setting parameters..........................................................................121
Technical data.................................................................................121

Section 6

Impedance protection .......................................................123

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS
(21), ZMQAPDIS (21), ZDRDIR (21D)..................................................123
Identification....................................................................................123
Introduction(21)...............................................................................123
Principle of operation.......................................................................124
Full scheme measurement.........................................................124
Impedance characteristic............................................................125
Minimum operating current.........................................................129
Measuring principles...................................................................130

4
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Directional impedance element for quadrilateral

characteristics.............................................................................132
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................135
Function block.................................................................................139
Input and output signals..................................................................140
Setting parameters..........................................................................142
Technical data.................................................................................144
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines ZMCPDIS (21), ZMCAPDIS (21), ZDSRDIR
(21D).....................................................................................................145
Introduction......................................................................................145
Principle of operation.......................................................................146
Full scheme measurement.........................................................146
Impedance characteristic............................................................147
Minimum operating current.........................................................151
Measuring principles...................................................................152
Directionality for series compensation........................................154
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................157
Function block.................................................................................161
Input and output signals..................................................................162
Setting parameters..........................................................................164
Technical data.................................................................................168
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle
FDPSPDIS (21)....................................................................................168
Identification....................................................................................168
Introduction......................................................................................168
Principle of operation.......................................................................169
Phase-to-ground fault.................................................................171
Phase-to-phase fault..................................................................173
Three-phase faults......................................................................175
Load encroachment....................................................................175
Minimum operate currents..........................................................180
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................181
Function block.................................................................................186
Input and output signals..................................................................186
Setting parameters..........................................................................187
Technical data.................................................................................189
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS
(21).......................................................................................................189
Introduction......................................................................................189
Principle of operation.......................................................................191
5
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Full scheme measurement.........................................................191

Impedance characteristic............................................................191
Basic operation characteristics...................................................192
Theory of operation....................................................................194
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................204
Function block.................................................................................207
Input and output signals..................................................................208
Setting parameters..........................................................................209
Technical data.................................................................................210
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults
ZMMPDIS (21), ZMMAPDIS (21).........................................................211
Introduction......................................................................................211
Principle of operation.......................................................................212
Full scheme measurement.........................................................212
Impedance characteristic............................................................213
Minimum operating current.........................................................215
Measuring principles...................................................................216
Directional lines..........................................................................218
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................220
Function block.................................................................................223
Input and output signals..................................................................223
Setting parameters..........................................................................225
Technical data.................................................................................226
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic and
additional distance protection directional function for earth faults
ZDMRDIR (21D), ZDARDIR.................................................................226
Introduction......................................................................................227
Principle of operation.......................................................................227
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR (21D).........................................................................227
Additional distance protection directional function for ground
faults ZDARDIR..........................................................................230
Function block.................................................................................232
Input and output signals..................................................................233
Setting parameters..........................................................................234
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC......................................235
Introduction......................................................................................235
Principle of operation.......................................................................235
Fault inception detection.............................................................235
Function block.................................................................................237
Input and output signals..................................................................237
6
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Setting parameters..........................................................................238
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS
(21).......................................................................................................238
Introduction......................................................................................238
Principle of operation.......................................................................239
The phase selection function......................................................239
Function block.................................................................................251
Input and output signals..................................................................252
Setting parameters..........................................................................252
Technical data.................................................................................253
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings ZMRPDIS (21), ZMRAPDIS (21) and ZDRDIR (21D).............253
Introduction......................................................................................254
Principle of operation.......................................................................255
Full scheme measurement.........................................................255
Impedance characteristic............................................................256
Minimum operating current.........................................................260
Measuring principles...................................................................260
Directional impedance element for quadrilateral
characteristics.............................................................................263
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................266
Function block.................................................................................270
Input and output signals..................................................................271
Setting parameters..........................................................................273
Technical data.................................................................................275
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
FRPSPDIS (21)....................................................................................276
Introduction......................................................................................276
Principle of operation.......................................................................276
Phase-to-ground fault.................................................................279
Phase-to-phase fault..................................................................281
Three-phase faults......................................................................282
Load encroachment....................................................................283
Minimum operate currents..........................................................288
Simplified logic diagrams............................................................289
Function block.................................................................................294
Input and output signals..................................................................294
Setting parameters..........................................................................295
Technical data.................................................................................296
Power swing detection ZMRPSB (68)..................................................297
7
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Introduction......................................................................................297
Principle of operation.......................................................................297
Resistive reach in forward direction............................................299
Resistive reach in reverse direction............................................299
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction........................300
Basic detection logic...................................................................300
Operating and inhibit conditions.................................................302
Function block.................................................................................303
Input and output signals..................................................................304
Setting parameters..........................................................................304
Technical data.................................................................................305
Power swing logic ZMRPSL ................................................................306
Introduction......................................................................................306
Principle of operation.......................................................................306
Communication and tripping logic..............................................306
Blocking logic..............................................................................308
Function block.................................................................................309
Input and output signals..................................................................309
Setting parameters..........................................................................310
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)......................................................310
Introduction......................................................................................310
Principle of operation.......................................................................311
Function block.................................................................................316
Input and output signals..................................................................316
Setting parameters..........................................................................317
Technical data.................................................................................318
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based
ZCVPSOF ............................................................................................318
Introduction......................................................................................318
Principle of operation.......................................................................319
Function block.................................................................................321
Input and output signals..................................................................321
Setting parameters..........................................................................321
Technical data.................................................................................322
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ.........................................................322
Introduction......................................................................................322
Principle of operation.......................................................................323
Function block.................................................................................325
Input and output signals..................................................................326
Setting parameters..........................................................................326
8
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Section 7

Current protection..............................................................329
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
PHPIOC (50).........................................................................................329
Introduction......................................................................................329
Principle of operation.......................................................................329
Function block.................................................................................330
Input and output signals..................................................................330
Setting parameters..........................................................................331
Technical data.................................................................................331
Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC (51/67).................331
Introduction......................................................................................332
Principle of operation.......................................................................332
Function block.................................................................................338
Input and output signals..................................................................338
Setting parameters..........................................................................340
Technical data.................................................................................346
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N).............346
Introduction......................................................................................347
Principle of operation.......................................................................347
Function block.................................................................................347
Input and output signals..................................................................348
Setting parameters..........................................................................348
Technical data.................................................................................348
Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero, negative sequence
direction EF4PTOC (51N/67N).............................................................349
Introduction......................................................................................349
Principle of operation.......................................................................350
Operating quantity within the function........................................350
Internal polarizing.......................................................................351
External polarizing for ground-fault function...............................353
Base quantities within the protection..........................................354
Internal ground-fault protection structure....................................354
Four residual overcurrent steps..................................................354
Directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison function...................................................................355
Second harmonic blocking element............................................358
Switch on to fault feature............................................................360
Function block.................................................................................363
Input and output signals..................................................................364
9

Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Setting parameters..........................................................................365
Technical data.................................................................................370
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection NS4PTOC (46I2)..................................................................371
Introduction......................................................................................371
Principle of operation.......................................................................372
Operating quantity within the function........................................372
Internal polarizing facility of the function.....................................373
External polarizing for negative sequence function....................374
Base quantities within the function.............................................374
Internal negative sequence protection structure.........................374
Four negative sequence overcurrent stages..............................374
Directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison function...................................................................376
Function block.................................................................................379
Input and output signals..................................................................379
Setting parameters..........................................................................380
Technical data.................................................................................385
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection
SDEPSDE (67N)...................................................................................386
Introduction......................................................................................386
Principle of operation.......................................................................388
Function inputs...........................................................................388
Function block.................................................................................395
Input and output signals..................................................................395
Setting parameters..........................................................................396
Technical data.................................................................................398
Thermal overload protection, one time constant LPTTR......................399
Introduction......................................................................................399
Principle of operation.......................................................................400
Function block.................................................................................404
Input and output signals..................................................................404
Setting parameters..........................................................................405
Technical data.................................................................................406
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF)..........................................406
Introduction......................................................................................407
Operation principle..........................................................................407
Function block.................................................................................410
Input and output signals..................................................................410
Setting parameters..........................................................................411
10
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Technical data.................................................................................411
Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB).....................................................412
Introduction......................................................................................412
Principle of operation.......................................................................412
Function block.................................................................................413
Input and output signals..................................................................414
Setting parameters..........................................................................414
Technical data.................................................................................415
Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD (52PD).....................................415
Introduction......................................................................................415
Principle of operation.......................................................................416
Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker.........................418
Unsymmetrical current detection................................................418
Function block.................................................................................419
Input and output signals..................................................................419
Setting parameters..........................................................................420
Technical data.................................................................................420
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)..............................420
Introduction......................................................................................421
Principle of operation.......................................................................422
Low pass filtering........................................................................424
Calibration of analog inputs........................................................424
Function block.................................................................................426
Input and output signals..................................................................426
Setting parameters..........................................................................427
Technical data.................................................................................428
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)................................428
Introduction......................................................................................428
Principle of operation.......................................................................429
Low pass filtering........................................................................432
Calibration of analog inputs........................................................432
Function block.................................................................................434
Input and output signals..................................................................434
Setting parameters..........................................................................435
Technical data.................................................................................436
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46).............................................436
Introduction......................................................................................436
Principle of operation.......................................................................437
Function block.................................................................................438
Input and output signals..................................................................438
11
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Setting parameters..........................................................................439
Technical data.................................................................................439

Section 8

Voltage protection.............................................................441
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)................................441
Introduction......................................................................................441
Principle of operation.......................................................................441
Measurement principle...............................................................442
Time delay..................................................................................442
Blocking......................................................................................448
Design........................................................................................449
Function block.................................................................................451
Input and output signals..................................................................451
Setting parameters..........................................................................452
Technical data.................................................................................454
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59).................................455
Introduction......................................................................................455
Principle of operation.......................................................................455
Measurement principle...............................................................456
Time delay..................................................................................457
Blocking......................................................................................462
Design........................................................................................462
Function block.................................................................................464
Input and output signals..................................................................464
Setting parameters..........................................................................465
Technical data.................................................................................467
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)...............468
Introduction......................................................................................468
Principle of operation.......................................................................468
Measurement principle...............................................................469
Time delay..................................................................................469
Blocking......................................................................................474
Design........................................................................................474
Function block.................................................................................475
Input and output signals..................................................................476
Setting parameters..........................................................................476
Technical data.................................................................................478
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)............................................479
Introduction......................................................................................479
Principle of operation.......................................................................479

12
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Measured voltage.......................................................................482
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.............................483
Cooling.......................................................................................487
Overexcitation protection function measurands.........................487
Overexcitation alarm...................................................................488
Logic diagram.............................................................................489
Function block.................................................................................489
Input and output signals..................................................................490
Setting parameters..........................................................................490
Technical data.................................................................................491
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60).....................................492
Introduction......................................................................................492
Principle of operation.......................................................................492
Function block.................................................................................494
Input and output signals..................................................................494
Setting parameters..........................................................................495
Technical data.................................................................................495
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)..................................................496
Introduction......................................................................................496
Principle of operation.......................................................................496
Function block.................................................................................497
Input and output signals..................................................................498
Setting parameters..........................................................................498
Technical data.................................................................................499

Section 9

Frequency protection.........................................................501
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81).............................................501
Introduction......................................................................................501
Principle of operation.......................................................................501
Measurement principle...............................................................502
Time delay..................................................................................502
Voltage dependent time delay....................................................503
Blocking......................................................................................504
Design........................................................................................504
Function block.................................................................................505
Input and output signals..................................................................505
Setting parameters..........................................................................506
Technical data.................................................................................507
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)...............................................507
Introduction......................................................................................508
13

Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Principle of operation.......................................................................508
Measurement principle...............................................................508
Time delay..................................................................................508
Blocking......................................................................................509
Design........................................................................................509
Function block.................................................................................510
Input and output signals..................................................................510
Setting parameters..........................................................................511
Technical data.................................................................................511
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)............................511
Introduction......................................................................................512
Principle of operation.......................................................................512
Measurement principle...............................................................512
Time delay..................................................................................513
Blocking......................................................................................513
Design........................................................................................513
Function block.................................................................................515
Input and output signals..................................................................515
Setting parameters..........................................................................515
Technical data.................................................................................516

Section 10 Multipurpose protection.....................................................517

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC................................517
Introduction......................................................................................517
Principle of operation.......................................................................517
Measured quantities within CVGAPC.........................................517
Base quantities for CVGAPC function........................................520
Built-in overcurrent protection steps...........................................520
Built-in undercurrent protection steps.........................................526
Built-in overvoltage protection steps...........................................527
Built-in undervoltage protection steps........................................527
Logic diagram.............................................................................527
Function block.................................................................................533
Input and output signals..................................................................534
Setting parameters..........................................................................535
Technical data.................................................................................543

Section 11 Secondary system supervision..........................................547

Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87)............................................547
Introduction......................................................................................547
Principle of operation.......................................................................547
14
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Function block.................................................................................549
Input and output signals..................................................................549
Setting parameters..........................................................................550
Technical data.................................................................................550
Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF......................................................550
Introduction......................................................................................551
Principle of operation.......................................................................551
Zero and negative sequence detection......................................551
Delta current and delta voltage detection...................................555
Dead line detection.....................................................................557
Main logic...................................................................................557
Function block.................................................................................561
Input and output signals..................................................................561
Setting parameters..........................................................................562
Technical data.................................................................................563

Section 12 Control...............................................................................565
Synchronism check, energizing check, and synchronizing
SESRSYN (25).....................................................................................565
Introduction......................................................................................565
Principle of operation.......................................................................566
Basic functionality.......................................................................566
Logic diagrams...........................................................................566
Function block.................................................................................576
Input and output signals..................................................................577
Setting parameters..........................................................................579
Technical data.................................................................................582
Autorecloser SMBRREC (79)...............................................................583
Introduction......................................................................................583
Principle of operation.......................................................................583
Logic Diagrams...........................................................................583
Auto-reclosing operation Disabled and Enabled........................584
Auto-reclosing mode selection...................................................584
Initiate auto-reclosing and conditions for initiation of a
reclosing cycle............................................................................584
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1......................586
Long trip signal...........................................................................587
Time sequence diagrams...........................................................593
Function block.................................................................................598
Input and output signals..................................................................598
15
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Setting parameters..........................................................................600
Technical data.................................................................................602
Apparatus control APC.........................................................................602
Introduction......................................................................................602
Principle of operation.......................................................................603
Error handling..................................................................................603
Bay control QCBAY.........................................................................605
Introduction.................................................................................605
Principle of operation..................................................................605
Function block............................................................................607
Input and output signals.............................................................607
Setting parameters.....................................................................608
Local/Remote switch LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL............................608
Introduction.................................................................................608
Principle of operation..................................................................608
Function block............................................................................610
Input and output signals.............................................................610
Setting parameters.....................................................................611
Switch controller SCSWI..................................................................612
Introduction.................................................................................612
Principle of operation..................................................................612
Function block............................................................................617
Input and output signals.............................................................617
Setting parameters.....................................................................619
Circuit breaker SXCBR....................................................................619
Introduction.................................................................................619
Principle of operation..................................................................620
Function block............................................................................624
Input and output signals.............................................................624
Setting parameters.....................................................................625
Circuit switch SXSWI.......................................................................625
Introduction.................................................................................625
Principle of operation..................................................................626
Function block............................................................................630
Input and output signals.............................................................630
Setting parameters.....................................................................631
Bay reserve QCRSV........................................................................631
Introduction.................................................................................631
Principle of operation..................................................................632
Function block............................................................................634
16
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Input and output signals.............................................................635

Setting parameters.....................................................................636
Reservation input RESIN.................................................................636
Introduction.................................................................................636
Principle of operation..................................................................636
Function block............................................................................638
Input and output signals.............................................................639
Setting parameters.....................................................................640
Interlocking (3)......................................................................................640
Introduction......................................................................................640
Principle of operation.......................................................................641
Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3)...........................................644
Introduction.................................................................................644
Logic diagram.............................................................................645
Function block............................................................................645
Input and output signals.............................................................645
Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3).......................646
Introduction.................................................................................646
Function block............................................................................646
Logic diagram.............................................................................647
Input and output signals.............................................................647
Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)...........................647
Introduction.................................................................................647
Function block............................................................................648
Logic diagram.............................................................................649
Input and output signals.............................................................650
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3)..................652
Introduction.................................................................................652
Function block............................................................................652
Logic diagram.............................................................................653
Input and output signals.............................................................654
Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3)..................................654
Introduction.................................................................................655
Function block............................................................................656
Logic diagram.............................................................................657
Input and output signals.............................................................659
Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)........................662
Introduction.................................................................................662
Function blocks...........................................................................664
Logic diagrams...........................................................................666
17
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Input and output signals.............................................................671

Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3).............................................675
Introduction.................................................................................676
Function block............................................................................677
Logic diagrams...........................................................................679
Input and output signals ............................................................682
Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)............................................686
Introduction.................................................................................686
Function block............................................................................688
Logic diagram.............................................................................689
Input and output signals.............................................................694
Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)..............................697
Introduction.................................................................................697
Function block............................................................................698
Logic diagram.............................................................................699
Input and output signals.............................................................701
Position evaluation POS_EVAL.......................................................703
Introduction.................................................................................703
Logic diagram.............................................................................703
Function block............................................................................703
Input and output signals.............................................................703
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation
SLGGIO................................................................................................704
Introduction......................................................................................704
Principle of operation.......................................................................704
Functionality and behaviour .......................................................706
Graphical display........................................................................706
Function block.................................................................................708
Input and output signals..................................................................708
Setting parameters..........................................................................710
Selector mini switch VSGGIO...............................................................710
Introduction......................................................................................710
Principle of operation.......................................................................710
Function block.................................................................................711
Input and output signals..................................................................712
Setting parameters..........................................................................712
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions DPGGIO...................712
Introduction......................................................................................713
Principle of operation.......................................................................713
Function block.................................................................................713
18
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Input and output signals..................................................................713

Settings............................................................................................714
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO...............................714
Introduction......................................................................................714
Principle of operation.......................................................................714
Function block.................................................................................715
Input and output signals..................................................................715
Setting parameters..........................................................................716
AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS................716
Introduction......................................................................................717
Principle of operation.......................................................................717
Function block.................................................................................718
Input and output signals..................................................................718
Setting parameters..........................................................................719
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD..........................................735
Introduction......................................................................................735
Principle of operation.......................................................................735
Function block.................................................................................736
Input and output signals..................................................................736
Setting parameters..........................................................................737

Section 13 Scheme communication....................................................739

Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent
protection ZCPSCH(85)........................................................................739
Introduction......................................................................................739
Principle of operation.......................................................................740
Blocking scheme........................................................................740
Permissive underreaching scheme............................................740
Permissive overreaching scheme...............................................741
Unblocking scheme....................................................................741
Intertrip scheme..........................................................................742
Simplified logic diagram..............................................................742
Function block.................................................................................744
Input and output signals..................................................................744
Setting parameters..........................................................................745
Technical data.................................................................................745
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance
protection ZC1PPSCH (85)..................................................................746
Introduction......................................................................................746
Principle of operation.......................................................................746
19
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Blocking scheme........................................................................747
Permissive underreach scheme.................................................748
Permissive overreach scheme...................................................748
Unblocking scheme....................................................................748
Intertrip scheme..........................................................................749
Simplified logic diagram..............................................................749
Function block.................................................................................751
Input and output signals..................................................................751
Setting parameters..........................................................................753
Technical data.................................................................................753
Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection 3-phase
ZCRWPSCH (85)..................................................................................753
Introduction......................................................................................754
Principle of operation.......................................................................754
Current reversal logic.................................................................754
Weak-end infeed logic................................................................755
Function block.................................................................................756
Input and output signals..................................................................756
Setting parameters..........................................................................757
Technical data.................................................................................758
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPLAL.....................................................758
Introduction......................................................................................758
Principle of operation.......................................................................758
Zone extension...........................................................................758
Loss-of-Load acceleration..........................................................759
Function block.................................................................................760
Input and output signals..................................................................760
Setting parameters..........................................................................761
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECPSCH (85).......................................................................................761
Introduction......................................................................................761
Principle of operation.......................................................................762
Blocking scheme........................................................................762
Permissive under/overreaching scheme....................................763
Unblocking scheme....................................................................765
Function block.................................................................................766
Input and output signals..................................................................766
Setting parameters..........................................................................767
Technical data.................................................................................767

20
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual

overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH (85).............................................767
Introduction......................................................................................768
Principle of operation.......................................................................768
Directional comparison logic function.........................................768
Fault current reversal logic.........................................................769
Weak-end infeed logic................................................................769
Function block.................................................................................771
Input and output signals..................................................................771
Setting parameters..........................................................................772
Technical data.................................................................................772
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated
communication ZC1WPSCH (85).........................................................772
Introduction......................................................................................773
Principle of operation.......................................................................773
Current reversal logic ................................................................773
Function block.................................................................................775
Input and output signals..................................................................776
Setting parameters..........................................................................777
Technical data.................................................................................777
Direct transfer trip logic.........................................................................778
Introduction......................................................................................778
Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC
(37_55).............................................................................................779
Introduction.................................................................................780
Principle of operation..................................................................780
Function block............................................................................782
Input and output signals.............................................................782
Setting parameters.....................................................................783
Technical data............................................................................784
Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC
(59_27).............................................................................................784
Introduction.................................................................................784
Principle of operation..................................................................785
Function block............................................................................787
Input and output signals.............................................................787
Setting parameters.....................................................................788
Technical data............................................................................789
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC (51)....................789
Introduction.................................................................................790
21
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Principle of operation..................................................................790
Function block............................................................................791
Input and output signals.............................................................791
Setting parameters.....................................................................791
Technical data............................................................................792
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC (94).............................................792
Introduction.................................................................................792
Principle of operation..................................................................792
Function block............................................................................793
Input and output signals.............................................................793
Setting parameters.....................................................................794
Technical data............................................................................794
Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV (47)..........794
Introduction.................................................................................794
Principle of operation..................................................................795
Function block............................................................................795
Input and output signals.............................................................795
Setting parameters.....................................................................796
Technical data............................................................................796
Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV (59N)..............796
Introduction.................................................................................796
Principle of operation..................................................................797
Function block............................................................................797
Input and output signals.............................................................797
Setting parameters.....................................................................798
Technical data............................................................................798
Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC (46)..........798
Introduction.................................................................................798
Principle of operation..................................................................799
Function block............................................................................799
Input and output signals.............................................................799
Setting parameters.....................................................................800
Technical data............................................................................800
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC (51N)..............800
Introduction.................................................................................801
Principle of operation..................................................................801
Function block............................................................................801
Input and output signals.............................................................801
Setting parameters.....................................................................802
Technical data............................................................................802
22
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC (51)......................................802

Introduction.................................................................................802
Principle of operation..................................................................803
Function block............................................................................803
Input and output signals.............................................................803
Setting parameters.....................................................................804
Technical data............................................................................804
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC (37)....................................805
Introduction.................................................................................805
Principle of operation..................................................................805
Function block............................................................................805
Input and output signals.............................................................806
Setting parameters.....................................................................806
Technical data............................................................................807

Section 14 Logic..................................................................................809
Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94)..............................................................809
Introduction......................................................................................809
Principle of operation.......................................................................809
Logic diagram.............................................................................811
Function block.................................................................................815
Input and output signals..................................................................816
Setting parameters..........................................................................817
Technical data.................................................................................817
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO..................................................................817
Introduction......................................................................................818
Principle of operation.......................................................................818
Function block.................................................................................820
Input and output signals..................................................................820
Setting parameters..........................................................................821
Configurable logic blocks......................................................................822
Introduction......................................................................................822
Inverter function block INV..............................................................823
OR function block OR......................................................................823
AND function block AND.................................................................824
Timer function block TIMER............................................................824
Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER........................................825
Exclusive OR function block XOR...................................................826
Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY.........................................826
Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY.......................827
23
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY.......................828

Controllable gate function block GATE............................................829
Settable timer function block TIMERSET........................................830
Technical data.................................................................................830
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN...................................................831
Principle of operation.......................................................................831
Function block.................................................................................832
Input and output signals..................................................................832
Setting parameters..........................................................................832
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I.................................................833
Introduction......................................................................................833
Operation principle..........................................................................833
Function block.................................................................................834
Input and output signals..................................................................834
Setting parameters..........................................................................835
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation
B16IFCVI..............................................................................................835
Introduction......................................................................................835
Operation principle..........................................................................836
Function block.................................................................................837
Input and output signals..................................................................837
Setting parameters..........................................................................838
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16.................................................838
Introduction......................................................................................838
Operation principle..........................................................................838
Function block.................................................................................840
Input and output signals..................................................................840
Setting parameters..........................................................................841
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
IB16FCVB.............................................................................................841
Introduction......................................................................................841
Operation principle..........................................................................841
Function block.................................................................................843
Input and output signals..................................................................843
Setting parameters..........................................................................844

Section 15 Monitoring..........................................................................845
Measurements......................................................................................845
Introduction......................................................................................846
Principle of operation.......................................................................847
24
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Measurement supervision..........................................................847
Measurements CVMMXN...........................................................851
Phase current measurement CMMXU........................................856
Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements
VMMXU, VNMMXU....................................................................857
Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI,
CMSQI........................................................................................857
Function block.................................................................................857
Input and output signals..................................................................859
Setting parameters..........................................................................863
Technical data.................................................................................876
Event counter CNTGGIO......................................................................878
Identification....................................................................................878
Introduction......................................................................................878
Principle of operation.......................................................................879
Reporting....................................................................................879
Design........................................................................................879
Function block.................................................................................880
Input signals....................................................................................880
Setting parameters..........................................................................881
Technical data.................................................................................881
Event function EVENT..........................................................................881
Introduction......................................................................................881
Principle of operation.......................................................................881
Function block.................................................................................883
Input and output signals..................................................................883
Setting parameters..........................................................................884
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP...........................................886
Introduction......................................................................................886
Principle of operation.......................................................................887
Function block.................................................................................887
Input and output signals..................................................................888
Setting parameters..........................................................................889
Fault locator LMBRFLO........................................................................889
Introduction......................................................................................889
Principle of operation.......................................................................890
Measuring Principle....................................................................890
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault...........891
The non-compensated impedance model..................................895
IEC 60870-5-103........................................................................895
25
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Function block.................................................................................895
Input and output signals..................................................................896
Setting parameters..........................................................................896
Technical data.................................................................................897
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP......................................897
Introduction......................................................................................898
Principle of operation.......................................................................898
Function block.................................................................................898
Input and output signals..................................................................899
Disturbance report DRPRDRE.............................................................899
Introduction......................................................................................899
Principle of operation.......................................................................900
Function block.................................................................................908
Input and output signals..................................................................909
Setting parameters..........................................................................911
Technical data.................................................................................921
Sequential of events.............................................................................921
Introduction......................................................................................921
Principle of operation.......................................................................921
Function block.................................................................................922
Input signals....................................................................................922
Technical data.................................................................................922
Indications.............................................................................................923
Introduction......................................................................................923
Principle of operation.......................................................................923
Function block.................................................................................924
Input signals....................................................................................924
Technical data.................................................................................924
Event recorder .....................................................................................924
Introduction......................................................................................924
Principle of operation.......................................................................925
Function block.................................................................................925
Input signals....................................................................................925
Technical data.................................................................................926
Trip value recorder................................................................................926
Introduction......................................................................................926
Principle of operation.......................................................................926
Function block.................................................................................927
Input signals....................................................................................927
Technical data.................................................................................927
26
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Disturbance recorder............................................................................927
Introduction......................................................................................927
Principle of operation.......................................................................928
Memory and storage...................................................................929
IEC 60870-5-103........................................................................930
Function block.................................................................................931
Input and output signals..................................................................931
Setting parameters..........................................................................931
Technical data.................................................................................931

Section 16 Metering............................................................................933
Pulse-counter logic PCGGIO................................................................933
Introduction......................................................................................933
Principle of operation.......................................................................933
Function block.................................................................................936
Input and output signals..................................................................936
Setting parameters..........................................................................937
Technical data.................................................................................937
Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR......937
Introduction......................................................................................938
Principle of operation.......................................................................938
Function block.................................................................................939
Input and output signals..................................................................939
Setting parameters..........................................................................940

Section 17 Station communication......................................................943

Overview...............................................................................................943
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol...............................................943
Introduction......................................................................................943
Setting parameters..........................................................................944
Technical data.................................................................................944
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO,
SP16GGIO.......................................................................................944
Introduction.................................................................................944
Principle of operation..................................................................944
Function block............................................................................945
Input and output signals.............................................................945
Setting parameters.....................................................................946
IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO.............946
Principle of operation..................................................................946
Function block............................................................................946
27
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Input and output signals.............................................................947

Setting parameters.....................................................................947
IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication....................947
Introduction.................................................................................948
Principle of operation..................................................................948
Function block............................................................................950
Output signals.............................................................................950
Setting parameters.....................................................................950
IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol...........................................950
Introduction......................................................................................950
Principle of operation.......................................................................950
Consequence on accuracy for power measurement functions
when using signals from IEC 61850-9-2LE communication............954
Function block.................................................................................955
Output signals..................................................................................955
Setting parameters..........................................................................956
Technical data.................................................................................956
LON communication protocol...............................................................956
Introduction......................................................................................956
Principle of operation.......................................................................957
Setting parameters..........................................................................976
Technical data.................................................................................976
SPA communication protocol................................................................976
Introduction......................................................................................976
Principle of operation.......................................................................977
Communication ports..................................................................985
Design..............................................................................................985
Setting parameters..........................................................................986
Technical data.................................................................................986
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol...........................................986
Introduction......................................................................................986
Principle of operation.......................................................................987
General.......................................................................................987
Communication ports..................................................................997
Function block.................................................................................997
Input and output signals................................................................1000
Setting parameters........................................................................1005
Technical data...............................................................................1008
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEINTLKRCV.............................................................................1009
28
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Function block...............................................................................1009
Input and output signals................................................................1010
Setting parameters........................................................................1011
Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV..............................................1012
Function block...............................................................................1012
Input and output signals................................................................1012
Setting parameters........................................................................1013
Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV,
MULTICMDSND.................................................................................1014
Introduction....................................................................................1014
Principle of operation.....................................................................1014
Design...........................................................................................1015
General.....................................................................................1015
Function block...............................................................................1015
Input and output signals................................................................1016
Setting parameters........................................................................1018

Section 18 Remote communication...................................................1019

Binary signal transfer..........................................................................1019
Introduction....................................................................................1019
Principle of operation.....................................................................1019
Function block...............................................................................1021
Input and output signals................................................................1022
Setting parameters........................................................................1023
Transmission of analog data from LDCM LDCMTransmit..................1026
Function block...............................................................................1026
Input and output signals................................................................1027

Section 19 IED hardware..................................................................1029

Overview.............................................................................................1029
Variants of case and local HMI display size..................................1029
Case from the rear side.................................................................1031
Hardware modules..............................................................................1035
Overview........................................................................................1035
Combined backplane module (CBM).............................................1036
Introduction...............................................................................1036
Functionality.............................................................................1037
Design......................................................................................1037
Universal backplane module (UBM)..............................................1039
Introduction...............................................................................1039
Functionality.............................................................................1039
29
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Design......................................................................................1039
Numeric processing module (NUM)..............................................1041
Introduction...............................................................................1041
Functionality.............................................................................1042
Block diagram...........................................................................1043
Power supply module (PSM).........................................................1043
Introduction...............................................................................1043
Design......................................................................................1044
Technical data..........................................................................1044
Local human-machine interface (Local HMI).................................1044
Transformer input module (TRM)..................................................1045
Introduction...............................................................................1045
Design......................................................................................1045
Technical data..........................................................................1045
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
(ADM) ...........................................................................................1046
Introduction...............................................................................1046
Design......................................................................................1047
Binary input module (BIM).............................................................1049
Introduction...............................................................................1049
Design......................................................................................1049
Technical data..........................................................................1053
Binary output modules (BOM).......................................................1054
Introduction...............................................................................1054
Design......................................................................................1054
Technical data..........................................................................1055
Static binary output module (SOM)...............................................1056
Introduction...............................................................................1056
Design......................................................................................1056
Technical data..........................................................................1058
Binary input/output module (IOM)..................................................1060
Introduction...............................................................................1060
Design......................................................................................1060
Technical data..........................................................................1062
mA input module (MIM).................................................................1064
Introduction...............................................................................1064
Design......................................................................................1065
Technical data..........................................................................1066
Serial and LON communication module (SLM) ............................1067
Introduction...............................................................................1067
30
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Design......................................................................................1067
Technical data..........................................................................1068
Galvanic RS485 communication module.......................................1069
Introduction...............................................................................1069
Design......................................................................................1069
Technical data..........................................................................1071
Optical ethernet module (OEM).....................................................1071
Introduction...............................................................................1071
Functionality.............................................................................1071
Design......................................................................................1071
Technical data..........................................................................1072
Line data communication module (LDCM)....................................1073
Introduction...............................................................................1073
Design......................................................................................1073
Technical data..........................................................................1074
Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)..................1075
Introduction...............................................................................1075
Design......................................................................................1076
Functionality.............................................................................1078
Technical data..........................................................................1078
GPS time synchronization module (GTM).....................................1079
Introduction...............................................................................1079
Design......................................................................................1079
Technical data..........................................................................1080
GPS antenna.................................................................................1080
Introduction...............................................................................1080
Design......................................................................................1080
Technical data..........................................................................1082
IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B.................................1082
Introduction...............................................................................1082
Design......................................................................................1082
Technical data..........................................................................1084
Dimensions.........................................................................................1085
Case without rear cover.................................................................1085
Case with rear cover......................................................................1087
Flush mounting dimensions...........................................................1089
Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions.......................................1090
Wall mounting dimensions.............................................................1092
External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection....1092
Mounting alternatives..........................................................................1094
31
Technical reference manual

Table of contents

Flush mounting..............................................................................1094
Overview...................................................................................1094
Mounting procedure for flush mounting....................................1095
19 panel rack mounting................................................................1096
Overview...................................................................................1096
Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting.....................1097
Wall mounting................................................................................1098
Overview...................................................................................1098
Mounting procedure for wall mounting.....................................1098
How to reach the rear side of the IED......................................1099
Side-by-side 19 rack mounting.....................................................1100
Overview...................................................................................1100
Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting................1100
IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case.................1101
Side-by-side flush mounting..........................................................1101
Overview...................................................................................1101
Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting................1102
Technical data....................................................................................1103
Enclosure.......................................................................................1103
Connection system........................................................................1103
Influencing factors.........................................................................1104
Type tests according to standard..................................................1105

Section 20 Labels..............................................................................1109
Labels on IED.....................................................................................1109

Section 21 Connection diagrams......................................................1113

Section 22 Inverse time characteristics.............................................1129
Application..........................................................................................1129
Principle of operation..........................................................................1132
Mode of operation..........................................................................1132
Inverse characteristics........................................................................1138

Section 23 Glossary..........................................................................1165

32
Technical reference manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 1

Introduction

About this chapter

This chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and provides
information necessary to understand the contents of the manual.

1.1

Introduction to the technical reference manual

1.1.1

About the complete set of manuals for an IED

Decommissioning
deinstalling & disposal

Maintenance

Operation

Commissioning

Installing

Engineering

Planning & purchase

The users manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:

Engineeringmanual
Installation and
Commissioning manual
Operators manual
Application manual
Technical reference
manual
IEC09000744-1-en.vsd
IEC09000744 V1 EN

The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelines

and setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used to
find out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. The
manual should also be used when calculating settings.
33
Technical reference manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK506312-UUS C

The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionality

descriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals,
setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical reference
manual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on how to
install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as a reference
during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical and electrical
installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting and configuration as
well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. The chapters are organized
in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/section numbers) in which the
protection IED should be installed and commissioned.
The Operators Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection
IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operators manual can
be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and measured
network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.
The Engineering Manual (EM) contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs
using the different tools in PCM600. The manual provides instructions on how to set
up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also
recommends a sequence for engineering of protection and control functions, LHMI
functions as well as communication engineering for IEC 61850 and DNP3.

1.1.2

About the technical reference manual

The following chapters are included in the technical reference manual.

Local HMI describes the control panel on the IED and explains display
characteristics, control keys and various local HMI features.
Basic IED functions presents functions for all protection types that are included in
all IEDs, for example, time synchronization, self supervision with event list, test
mode and other general functions.
Impedance protection describes functions for distance zones with their
quadrilateral characteristics, phase selection with load encroachment, power swing
detection and similar.
Current protection describes functions, for example, over current protection,
breaker failure protection and pole discordance.
Voltage protection describes functions for under voltage and over voltage
protection and residual over voltage protection.
Frequency protection describes functions for over frequency, under frequency and
rate of change of frequency protection.
Multipurpose protection describes the general protection function for current and
voltage.

34
Technical reference manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK506312-UUS C

1.1.3

Secondary system supervision describes current based functions for current circuit
supervision and fuse failure supervision.
Control describes control functions, for example, synchronization and energizing
check and other product specific functions.
Scheme communication describes functions related to current reversal and weak
end infeed logic.
Logic describes trip logic and related functions.
Monitoring describes measurement related functions that are used to provide data
regarding relevant quantities, events and faults, for example.
Metering describes pulse counter logic.
Station communication describes Ethernet based communication in general,
including the use of IEC 61850 and horizontal communication via GOOSE.
Remote communication describes binary and analog signal transfer, and the
associated hardware.
Hardware describes the IED and its components.
Connection diagrams provides terminal wiring diagrams and information
regarding connections to and from the IED.
Inverse time characteristics describes and explains inverse time delay, inverse
time curves and their effects.
Glossary is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB technical
documentation.

This manual
The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (where
applicable). The different sections are outlined below.

1.1.3.1

Introduction
Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.

1.1.3.2

Principle of operation
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and
measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.

Logic diagrams

Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered by
dashed lines.
Signal names
Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes.
The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for the

35
Technical reference manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK506312-UUS C

corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the particular
signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in figure 4 is
as follows:

BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from the
under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).

Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand side.
Settings are not displayed.
Input and output signals
In a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch the
outer border of the diagram.
Input and output signals can be configured using the ACT tool. They can be connected
to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs. Examples
of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals are TRIP,
START, STL1, STL2, STL3.
Setting parameters
Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting
parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their values
are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the symbolic value
specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes. Their logical
values correspond automatically to the selected setting value.
Internal signals
Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately 2 mm from the frame
edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the suffix -int is
added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues, see figure 1.

36
Technical reference manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK506312-UUS C

BLKTR
TEST
TEST
AND

Block TUV=Yes

OR

BLOCK-int.

BLOCK
VTSU
BLOCK-int.
PU_V_A

AND

BLOCK-int.
AND

PU_V_B
BLOCK-int.

AND

PU_V_C

OR

AND

0-t
0

TRIP
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C

xx04000375_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000375 V1 EN

Figure 1:

Logic diagram example with -int signals

External signals
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram
have the suffix -cont., see figure 2 and figure 3.

37
Technical reference manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK506312-UUS C

AB
BC
CA
AG
BG
CG

STZMPP-cont.

OR

PHSEL

PUND_AB-cont.

AND

PUND_BC-cont.

AND

PUND_CA-cont.

AND

PUND_AG-cont.

AND

PUND_BG-cont.

AND

PUND_CG-cont.

AND

PUND_GND-cont.

OR

OR
LOVBZ
1--BLOCK

PU_ND

AND

OR

BLK-cont.
xx04000376_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000376 V1 EN

Figure 2:

STND_AG-cont.

Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal

or

STND_BG-cont.
AND

STND_CG-cont.
STND_AB-cont.

or

AND

STND_BC-cont.
STND_CA-cont.

AND

or
or

AND

PU_A

15 ms
PU_B

15 ms
PU_C

15 ms
PICKUP

15 ms

BLK-cont.
Xx04000377_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000377 V1 EN

Figure 3:

Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal

38
Technical reference manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK506312-UUS C

1.1.3.3

Input and output signals

Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of two
columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column
contains the description of the signal.

1.1.3.4

Function block
Each function block is illustrated graphically.
Input signals are always on the left hand side and output signals on the right hand side.
Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available. These are
supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme and are therefore
depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described in the
settings table.

The ^ character in front of an input or output signal name in the function block
symbol given for a function, indicates that the user can set a signal name of their
own in PCM600.
The * character after an input or output signal name in the function block symbol
given for a function, indicates that the signal must be connected to another
function block in the application configuration to achieve a valid application
configuration.
IEC 61850 - 8 -1
Logical Node

Mandatory
signal (*)

Inputs

Outputs
PCGGIO
BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE*
RS_CNT

User defined
name (^)

INVALID
RESTART
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
^SCAL_VAL
en05000511-1-en.vsd

Diagram
Number
IEC05000511 V2 EN

Figure 4:

Example of a function block

39
Technical reference manual

Section 1
Introduction
1.1.3.5

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function in
question.

1.1.3.6

Technical data
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function or
hardware described.

1.1.4

Intended audience
General
This manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel,
who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in
normal service.

Requirements
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,
protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in the
protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a basic
knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.

1.1.5

Related documents

Documents related to REL670

Identity number

Operators manual

1MRK 506 313-UUS

Installation and commissioning manual

1MRK 506 314-UUS

Technical reference manual

1MRK 506 312-UUS

Application manual

1MRK 506 315-UUS

Product guide customized

1MRK 506 316-BUS

Product guide pre-configured

1MRK 506 317-BUS

Sample specification

SA2005-001282

Connection and Installation components

1MRK 513 003-BEN

Test system, COMBITEST

1MRK 512 001-BEN

Accessories for 670 series IEDs

1MRK 514 012-BEN

670 series SPA and signal list

1MRK 500 092-WUS

Table continues on next page

40
Technical reference manual

Section 1
Introduction

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC 61850 Data objects list for 670 series

1MRK 500 091-WUS

Engineering manual 670 series

1MRK 511 240-UUS

Communication set-up for Relion 670 series

1MRK 505 260-UEN

More information can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation.

1.1.6

Revision notes
Revision

Description

Minor corrections made

Maintenance updates, PR corrections

Maintenance updates, PR corrections

41
Technical reference manual

42

Section 2
Analog inputs

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 2

Analog inputs

2.1

Introduction
Analog input channels must be configured and set properly to get correct measurement
results and correct protection operations. For power measuring and all directional and
differential functions the directions of the input currents must be defined properly.
Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system quantities. Setting
values are in primary quantities as well and it is important to set the data about the
connected current and voltage transformers properly.
A reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channels phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and all other angle
information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing and
commissioning of the IED the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing
and service values reading.
The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input
module (TRM) type.

2.2

Operation principle
The direction of a current depends on the connection of the CT. The main CTs are
typically star (WYE) connected and can be connected with the Star (WYE) point to the
object or from the object. This information must be set in the IED.
The convention of the directionality is defined as follows:

Positive value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction into
the object.
Negative value of current or power means that the quantity has the direction out
from the object.

For directional functions the directional conventions are defined as follows (see figure
5)

43
Technical reference manual

Section 2
Analog inputs

1MRK506312-UUS C

Forward means direction into the object.

Reverse means direction out from the object.
Definition of direction
for directional functions

Definition of direction
for directional functions

Reverse

Forward

Forward

Reverse

Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object

e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is
positive when flowing
towards the object

Set parameter
CT_WyePoint
Correct Setting is
"ToObject"

Set parameter
CT_WyePoint
Correct Setting is
"FromObject"

en05000456_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000456 V1 EN

Figure 5:

Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

If the settings of the primary CT is right, that is CTStarPoint set as FromObject or

ToObject according to the plant condition, then a positive quantity always flows
towards the protected object, and a Forward direction always looks towards the
protected object.
The settings of the IED is performed in primary values. The ratios of the main CTs and
VTs are therefore basic data for the IED. The user has to set the rated secondary and
primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs to provide the IED with their rated
ratios.
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under Main menu/
Hardware/Analog modules in the Parameter Settings tool.

2.3

Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The
signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in the
configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can
be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED and used
internally in the configuration.

44
Technical reference manual

Section 2
Analog inputs

1MRK506312-UUS C

2.4

Setting parameters
Dependent on ordered IED type.

Table 1:

AISVBAS Non group settings (basic)

Name
PhaseAngleRef

Values (Range)
TRM40-Ch1
TRM40-Ch2
TRM40-Ch3
TRM40-Ch4
TRM40-Ch5
TRM40-Ch6
TRM40-Ch7
TRM40-Ch8
TRM40-Ch9
TRM40-Ch10
TRM40-Ch11
TRM40-Ch12
TRM41-Ch1
TRM41-Ch2
TRM41-Ch3
TRM41-Ch4
TRM41-Ch5
TRM41-Ch6
TRM41-Ch7
TRM41-Ch8
TRM41-Ch9
TRM41-Ch10
TRM41-Ch11
TRM41-Ch12
MU1-IA
MU1-IB
MU1-IC
MU1-I0
MU1- VA
MU1- VB
MU1-VC
MU1-V0
MU2-IA
MU2-IB
MU2-IC
MU2-I0
MU2-VA
MU2-VB
MU2-VC
MU2-V0
MU3-IA
MU3-IB
MU3-IC
MU3-I0
MU3-VB
MU2-VB
MU3-VC
MU3-V0

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
TRM40-Ch1

Description
Reference channel for phase angle
presentation

45
Technical reference manual

Section 2
Analog inputs

Table 2:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

TRM_12I Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CT_WyePoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint7

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec7

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim7

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint8

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec8

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim8

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint9

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec9

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim9

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint10

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec10

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

Table continues on next page

46
Technical reference manual

Section 2
Analog inputs

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CTprim10

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint11

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec11

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim11

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint12

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec12

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim12

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

Table 3:

TRM_6I_6U Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CT_WyePoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

VTsec7

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim7

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec8

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

Table continues on next page

47
Technical reference manual

Section 2
Analog inputs
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

VTprim8

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec9

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim9

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec10

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim10

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec11

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim11

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec12

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim12

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

Step

Default

Table 4:

TRM_6I Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

Description

CT_WyePoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

48
Technical reference manual

Section 2
Analog inputs

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 5:

TRM_7I_5U Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CT_WyePoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint7

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec7

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim7

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

VTsec8

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim8

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec9

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim9

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec10

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim10

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec11

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim11

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec12

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim12

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

49
Technical reference manual

Section 2
Analog inputs

Table 6:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

TRM_9I_3U Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CT_WyePoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec1

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim1

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec2

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim2

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec3

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim3

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec4

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim4

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint5

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec5

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim5

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint6

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec6

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim6

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint7

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec7

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim7

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint8

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec8

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim8

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

CT_WyePoint9

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CTsec9

1 - 10

Rated CT secondary current

CTprim9

1 - 99999

3000

Rated CT primary current

VTsec10

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim10

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec11

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

Table continues on next page

50
Technical reference manual

Section 2
Analog inputs

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

VTprim11

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Description
Rated VT primary voltage

VTsec12

0.001 - 999.999

0.001

110.000

Rated VT secondary voltage

VTprim12

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated VT primary voltage

51
Technical reference manual

52

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 3

Local HMI

About this chapter

This chapter describes the structure and use of local HMI, which is the control panel at
the IED.

3.1

Human machine interface

The local human machine interface is available in a medium sized model. Up to 12
single line diagram pages can be defined, depending on the product capability.
The local HMI is divided into zones with different functionality.

Status indication LEDs.

Alarm indication LEDs, which consist of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with user
printable label. All LEDs are configurable from PCM600.
Liquid crystal display (LCD).
Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for
selection between local and remote control and reset.
Isolated RJ45 communication port.

53
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC07000077 V1 EN

Figure 6:

Medium graphic HMI, 15 controllable objects

3.2

Medium size graphic HMI

3.2.1

Medium
The following case sizes can be equipped with the medium size LCD:

1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19

This is a fully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 4.7 x 3.5 inches. It has 28
lines with up to 40 characters per line. To display the single line diagram, this LCD is
required.

3.2.2

Design
The different parts of the medium size local HMI are shown in figure 7. The local HMI
exists in an IEC version and in an ANSI version. The difference is on the keypad
operation buttons and the yellow LED designation.

54
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC07000077-CALLOUT V1 EN

Figure 7:

Medium size graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs

2 LCD
3 Indication LEDs
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad

55
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

3.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Keypad
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look and
feel in all IEDs. LCD screens and other details may differ but the way the keys
function is identical.

IEC06000531 V1 EN

Figure 8:

The HMI keypad.

Table 7 describes the HMI keys that are used to operate the IED.
Table 7:
Key

HMI keys on the front of the IED

Function
Press to close or energize a breaker or disconnector.

IEC06000532 V1 EN

Press to open a breaker or disconnector.

IEC06000533 V1 EN

Press to open two sub menus: Key operation and IED information.
IEC05000103 V1 EN

Press to clear entries, cancel commands or edit.

IEC05000104 V1 EN

Press to open the main menu and to move to the default screen.
IEC05000105 V1 EN

Table continues on next page

56
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

Key

Function
Press to set the IED in local or remote control mode.

IEC05000106 V1 EN

Press to open the reset screen.

IEC05000107 V1 EN

Press to start the editing mode and confirm setting changes, when in editing mode.
IEC05000108 V1 EN

Press to navigate forward between screens and move right in editing mode.
IEC05000109 V1 EN

Press to navigate backwards between screens and move left in editing mode.
IEC05000110 V1 EN

Press to move up in the single line diagram and in the menu tree.
IEC05000111 V1 EN

Press to move down in the single line diagram and in the menu tree.
IEC05000112 V1 EN

3.4

LED

3.4.1

Introduction
The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that events
may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to something
that has occurred and needs some sort of action.

3.4.2

Status indication LEDs

The three LEDs above the LCD provide information as shown in the table below.
LED Indication

Information

Green:
Steady

In service

Flashing

Internal failure

Dark

No power supply

Yellow:
Steady

Dist. rep. triggered

Table continues on next page

57
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

LED Indication
Flashing

Information
Terminal in test mode

Red:
Steady

3.4.3

Trip command issued

Indication LEDs
The LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in 670 series. Its main
purpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications or
alarm signals.
Alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs are located on the right hand
side of the front panel. Alarm LEDs are located on the right of the LCD screen and
show steady or flashing light.

Steady light indicates normal operation.

Flashing light indicates alarm.

Alarm LEDs can be configured in PCM600 and depend on the binary logic. Therefore
they can not be configured on the local HMI.
Typical examples of alarm LEDs

Bay controller failure

CB close blocked
Interlocking bypassed
SF6 Gas refill
Position error
CB spring charge alarm
Oil temperature alarm
Thermal overload trip

The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been established
between the IED and a computer.
The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or
remote control of the IED is active.

58
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

3.5

Local HMI related functions

3.5.1

Introduction
The local HMI can be adapted to the application configuration and to user preferences.

3.5.2
Table 8:

Function block LocalHMI

Function block LEDGEN
Setting parameters

General setting parameters

SCREEN Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Language

English
OptionalLanguage

English

Local HMI language

DisplayTimeout

10 - 120

Min

10

60

Local HMI display timeout

AutoRepeat

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Activation of auto-repeat (On) or not (Off)

ContrastLevel

-10 - 20

Contrast level for display

DefaultScreen

0-0

Default screen

EvListSrtOrder

Latest on top
Oldest on top

Latest on top

Sort order of event list

SymbolFont

IEC
ANSI

IEC

Symbol font for Single Line Diagram

3.5.3

Status LEDs

3.5.3.1

Design
The function block LocalHMI controls and supplies information about the status of the
status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of local HMI are configured with
PCM600.
The function block can be used if any of the signals are required in a configuration logic.
See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.

59
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI
3.5.3.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
LocalHMI
RSTLEDS

HMI-ON
RED-S
YELLOW-S
YELLOW-F
RSTPULSE
LEDSRST
ANSI05000773-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000773 V2 EN

Figure 9:

3.5.3.3

LocalHMI function block

Input and output signals

Table 9:
Name
RSTLEDS

Table 10:
Name

LocalHMI Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Input to reset the LCD-HMI LEDs

LocalHMI Output signals

Type

Description

HMI-ON

BOOLEAN

Backlight of the LCD display is active

RED-S

BOOLEAN

Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady

YELLOW-S

BOOLEAN

Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady

YELLOW-F

BOOLEAN

Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing

RSTPULSE

BOOLEAN

A reset pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCDHMI are cleared

LEDSRST

BOOLEAN

Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not ON

3.5.4

Indication LEDs

3.5.4.1

Introduction
The function block LEDGEN controls and supplies information about the status of the
indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LEDGEN are configured with
PCM600. The input signal for each LED is selected individually with the Signal
Matrix Tool in PCM600.

LEDs (number 16) for trip indications are red.

LEDs (number 715) for pickup indications are yellow.

60
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

Each indication LED on the local HMI can be set individually to operate in six
different sequences

Two sequences operate as follow type.

Four sequences operate as latch type.

Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as a protection

indication system, either in collecting or restarting mode, with reset
functionality.
Two of the latching sequence types are intended to be used as signaling
system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.

The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flashing (-F). See the technical reference
manual for more information.

3.5.4.2

Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED in
some of the modes of LEDGEN. The latest LED picture appears immediately after the
IED is successfully restarted.

Operating modes

Collecting mode

LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated

continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is suitable
when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

Re-starting mode

In the re-starting mode of operation each new pickup resets all previous
active LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance.
Only LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6
(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A
disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated
input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset

From local HMI

Active indications can be acknowledged or reset manually. Manual

acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a common
signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is positive
edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledged or reset is performed
61

Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

via the reset button and menus on the local HMI. See the operator's manual
for more information.

From function input

Active indications can also be acknowledged or reset from an input, RESET,

to the function. This input can, for example, be configured to a binary input
operated from an external push button. The function is positive edge
triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button is
continuously pressed, the acknowledgment or reset only affects indications
active at the moment when the button is first pressed.

Automatic reset

Automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-starting
mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When automatic
reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting indications will be
indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequences

The operating sequences can be of type Follow or Latched.

For the Follow type the LED follows the input signal completely.
For the Latched type each LED latches to the corresponding input signal until it is
reset.

Figure 10 show the function of available sequences that are selectable for each LED
separately.

The acknowledgment or reset function is not applicable for sequence 1 and 2

(Follow type).
Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only working in
collecting mode.
Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and collecting mode.
Sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting mode.

The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady and F = Flashing.
At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected
sequence diagrams.
In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics as shown in figure 10.

62
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

= No indication

= Steady light

= Flash
en05000506.vsd

IEC05000506 V1 EN

Figure 10:

Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input signals.
It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of the other
LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal

LED
IEC01000228_2_en.vsd
IEC01000228 V2 EN

Figure 11:

Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.
Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal, the
indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the signal
is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it gets a
steady light.
Activating
signal

LED

Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
IEC01000231 V1 EN

Figure 12:

Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

63

Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.
Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation of
the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to
sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the
reset that is, immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal

LED

Reset
IEC01000235_2_en.vsd
IEC01000235 V2 EN

Figure 13:

Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, that is, immediately after the positive
edge of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active
signals is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its
operation of LEDs set for other sequences.
Definition of a disturbance
A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated
until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs
set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and some
signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does not
restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all signals
have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown in figure
14.

64
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

From
disturbance
length control
per LED
set to
sequence 6

OR

OR

AND

OR

New
disturbance

tRestart
0
0-100s

AND
OR

AND

en01000237_ansi.vsd
ANSI01000237 V1 EN

Figure 14:

Activation of new disturbance

In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each
LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition of
a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i diagram in
figure 15.
Activating signal

To LED

AND
0-tMax
0

To disturbance
length control

en05000507_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000507 V1 EN

Figure 15:

Length control of activating signals

Timing diagram for sequence 6

Figure 16 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.

65
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset

IEC01000239_2-en.vsd

IEC01000239 V2 EN

Figure 16:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance

Figure 17 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has elapsed.

66
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

Disturbance
tRestart

Disturbance
tRestart

Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000240_2_en.vsd
IEC01000240 V2 EN

Figure 17:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances

Figure 18 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

67
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000241_2_en.vsd
IEC01000241 V2 EN

Figure 18:

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications within same

disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 19 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

68
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

Disturbance
tRestart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2

LED 1

LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
IEC01000242_2_en.vsd
IEC01000242 V2 EN

Figure 19:

3.5.4.3

Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset

Function block
LEDGEN
BLOCK
RESET
LEDTEST

NEWIND
ACK

IEC05000508_2_en.vsd
IEC05000508 V2 EN

Figure 20:

3.5.4.4

LEDGEN function block

Input and output signals

Table 11:
Name

LEDGEN Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Input to block the operation of the LED-unit

RESET

BOOLEAN

Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LEDunit

LEDTEST

BOOLEAN

Input for external LED test

69
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 12:

LEDGEN Output signals

Name

3.5.4.5
Table 13:
Name

Type

Description

NEWIND

BOOLEAN

A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs

ACK

BOOLEAN

A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged

Setting parameters
LEDGEN Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation mode for the LED function

tRestart

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.0

Defines the disturbance length

tMax

0.0 - 100.0

0.1

0.0

Maximum time for the definition of a

disturbance

SeqTypeLED1

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 1

SeqTypeLED2

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 2

SeqTypeLED3

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 3

SeqTypeLED4

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 4

SeqTypeLED5

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 5

Table continues on next page

70
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SeqTypeLED6

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 6

SeqTypeLED7

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 7

SeqTypeLED8

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

sequence type for LED 8

SeqTypeLED9

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 9

SeqTypeLED10

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 10

SeqTypeLED11

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 11

SeqTypeLED12

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 12

Table continues on next page

71
Technical reference manual

Section 3
Local HMI
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SeqTypeLED13

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 13

SeqTypeLED14

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 14

SeqTypeLED15

Follow-S
Follow-F
LatchedAck-F-S
LatchedAck-S-F
LatchedColl-S
LatchedReset-S

Follow-S

Sequence type for LED 15

72
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 4

Basic IED functions

About this chapter

This chapter presents functions that are basic to all 670 series IEDs. Typical functions
in this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.

4.1

Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools that are
accessing the IED are protected, by means of authorization handling. The authorization
handling of the IED and the PCM600 is implemented at both access points to the IED:

4.1.1

local, through the local HMI

remote, through the communication ports

Principle of operation
There are different levels (or types) of users that can access or operate different areas
of the IED and tools functionality. The pre-defined user types are given in Table 14.
Be sure that the user logged on to the IED has the access required when
writing particular data to the IED from PCM600.
The meaning of the legends used in the table:

R= Read
W= Write
- = No access rights

73
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

Table 14:

1MRK506312-UUS C

Pre-defined user types

Access rights

Guest

Super User

SPA Guest

System
Operator

Protection
Engineer

Design
Engineer

User
Administrator

Basic setting possibilities (change

setting group, control settings, limit
supervision)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Advanced setting possibilities (for

example protection settings)

R/W

R/W

R/W

Basic control possibilities (process

control, no bypass)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Advanced control possibilities (process

control including interlock trigg)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Basic command handling (for example

clear LEDs, manual trigg)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Advanced command handling (for

example clear disturbance record)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Basic configuration possibilities (I/Oconfiguration in SMT)

R/W

R/W

R/W

Advanced configuration possibilities

(application configuration including
SMT, GDE and CMT)

R/W

R/W

R/W

File loading (database loading from

XML-file)

R/W

R/W

R/W

File dumping (database dumping to

XML-file)

R/W

R/W

R/W

File transfer (FTP file transfer)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

File transfer (limited) (FTP file transfer)

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

File Transfer (SPA File Transfer)

R/W

R/W

Database access for normal user

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

User administration (user management

FTP File Transfer)

R/W

R/W

User administration (user management

SPA File Transfer)

R/W

The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the IED User Management
within PCM600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the local HMI on the IED,
there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on local HMI.
Only characters A - Z, a - z and 0 - 9 should be used in user names and
passwords.
The maximum of characters in a password is 18.

74
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

At least one user must be included in the UserAdministrator group to be

able to write users, created in PCM600, to IED.

4.1.1.1

Authorization handling in the IED

At delivery the default user is the SuperUser. No Log on is required to operate the IED
until a user has been created with the IED User Management..
Once a user is created and downloaded to the IED, that user can perform a Log on,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will display a message box: No user
defined!
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Main
menu/Settings/General Settings/HMI/Screen/Display Timeout) elapses, the IED
returns to Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60
minutes at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the IED User Management and downloaded
into the IED, then, when a user intentionally attempts a Log on or when the user
attempts to perform an operation that is password protected, the Log on window will
appear.
The cursor is focused on the User identity field, so upon pressing the E key, the user
can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the up and down
arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the E key again.
When it comes to password, upon pressing the E key, the following character will
show up: $. The user must scroll for every letter in the password. After all the letters
are introduced (passwords are case sensitive) choose OK and press the E key again.
If everything is alright at a voluntary Log on, the local HMI returns to the
Authorization screen. If the Log on is OK, when required to change for example a
password protected setting, the local HMI returns to the actual setting folder. If the Log
on has failed, then the Log on window opens again, until either the user makes it right
or presses Cancel.

75
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

4.2

Self supervision with internal event list

4.2.1

Introduction
Self supervision with internal event list function listens and reacts to internal system
events, generated by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal
events are saved in an internal event list.

4.2.2

Principle of operation
The self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

Normal micro-processor watchdog function.

Checking of digitized measuring signals.
Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision function status can be monitored from the local HMI, from the
Event Viewer in PCM600 or from a SMS/SCS system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the selfsupervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under Main
menu/Diagnostics/Internal events or Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/General.
The information from the self-supervision function is also available in the Event
Viewer in PCM600.
A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarm
contact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function of this
output relay is an OR-function between the INT-FAIL signal see figure 22 and a
couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 21

76
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Power supply fault

Watchdog
TX overflow
Master resp.
Supply fault

Power supply
module

Fault

I/O nodes

Fault
AND

ReBoot I/O
INTERNAL
FAIL
Internal Fail (CPU)

Fault

CEM

I/O nodes = BIM, BOM, IOM

xxxx = Inverted signal
en04000520_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000520 V1 EN

Figure 21:

Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact

IO fail

OR

IO stopped

Set
Reset

IO started

e.g. BIM 1 Error

e.g. IOM2 Error

e.g. IO (n) Error

OR

Internal
FAIL

OR

LON ERROR
FTF fatal error

OR

Watchdog

NUMFAIL

RTE fatal error

RTE Appl-fail
RTE OK

OR

Reset

IEC61850 not ready

RTCERROR

Internal
WARN

Set

OR

RTCERROR

Set

RTC OK

Reset

TIMESYNCHERROR
Time reset

OR

Set
Reset

SYNCH OK
Settings changed

NUMWARNING

TIMESYNCHERROR
SETCHGD

1 second pulse
en04000519-1.vsd

IEC04000519 V2 EN

Figure 22:

Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block

77
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Some signals are available from the INTERRSIG function block. The signals from this
function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system. The signals
from the INTERRSIG function block can also be connected to binary outputs for
signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions if
required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module in
the Signal Matrix tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained from
the time synchronization block TIMEINTERRSIG.

4.2.2.1

Internal signals
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the
IED. As they provide information about the internal status of the IED, they are also
called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups.

Standard signals are always presented in the IED, see Table 15.
Hardware dependent internal signals are collected depending on the hardware
configuration, see Table 16.

Explanations of internal signals are listed in Table 17.

Table 15:

Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal

Description

FAIL

Internal Fail status

WARNING

Internal Warning status

NUMFAIL

CPU module Fail status

NUMWARNING

CPU module Warning status

RTCERROR

Real Time Clock status

TIMESYNCHERROR

Time Synchronization status

RTEERROR

Runtime Execution Error status

IEC61850ERROR

IEC 61850 Error status

WATCHDOG

SW Watchdog Error status

LMDERROR

LON/Mip Device Error status

APPERROR

Runtime Application Error status

SETCHGD

Settings changed

SETGRPCHGD

Setting groups changed

FTFERROR

Fault Tolerant Filesystem status

78
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 16:

Self-supervision's hardware dependent internal signals

Card

Name of signal

Description

PSM

PSM-Error

Power Supply Module Error status

ADOne

ADOne-Error

Analog In Module Error status

BIM

BIM-Error

Binary In Module Error status

BOM

BOM-Error

Binary Out Module Error status

IOM

IOM-Error

In/Out Module Error status

MIM

MIM-Error

Millampere Input Module Error status

LDCM

LDCM-Error

Line Differential Communication Error status

Table 17:

Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal

Reasons for activation

FAIL

This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal

signals are active; NUMFAIL, LMDERROR, WATCHDOG,
APPERROR, RTEERROR, FTFERROR, or any of the HW
dependent signals

WARNING

This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal

signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR,
TIMESYNCHERROR

NUMFAIL

This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal

signals are active; WATCHDOG, APPERROR, RTEERROR,
FTFERROR

NUMWARNING

This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal

signals are active; RTCERROR, IEC61850ERROR

RTCERROR

This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with the real
time clock.

TIMESYNCHERROR

This signal will be active when the source of the time synchronization
is lost, or when the time system has to make a time reset.

RTEERROR

This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do some

actions with the application threads. The actions can be loading of
settings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups,
loading or unloading of application threads.

IEC61850ERROR

This signal will be active if the IEC 61850 stack did not succeed in
some actions like reading IEC 61850 configuration, startup, for
example

WATCHDOG

This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under too
heavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systems background
task is used for the measurements.

LMDERROR

LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable error state.

APPERROR

This signal will be active if one or more of the application threads are
not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states can be
CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, for example

Table continues on next page

79
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name of signal

4.2.2.2

Reasons for activation

SETCHGD

This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if
any settings are changed.

SETGRPCHGD

This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event list if
any setting groups are changed.

FTFERROR

This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup file
are corrupted and can not be recovered.

Run-time model
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see Figure 23.
ADx
ADx_Low
x1
u1
x2

ADx_High

ADx
Controller

x1
u1
x2

IEC05000296-3-en.vsd
IEC05000296 V3 EN

Figure 23:

Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the IED.

The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converter(s) with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the A/D converters under normal
conditions where the signals from the two A/D converters should be identical. An
alarm is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it
improves the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.
The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controller
function. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the input
signals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is the
validation part that checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.
Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU, that
is the signal that has the most suitable signal level, the ADx_LO or the 16 times higher
ADx_HI.

80
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison of
the two A/D converter channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will
be informed and an alarm will be given for A/D converter failure.
The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.

4.2.3

Function block

IEC09000787 V1 EN

Figure 24:

4.2.4

INTERRSIG function block

Output signals
Table 18:

INTERRSIG Output signals

Name

4.2.5

Type

Description

FAIL

BOOLEAN

Internal fail

WARNING

BOOLEAN

Internal warning

CPUFAIL

BOOLEAN

CPU fail

CPUWARN

BOOLEAN

CPU warning

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

4.2.6

Technical data
Table 19:

Self supervision with internal event list

Data

Value

Recording manner

Continuous, event controlled

List size

40 events, first in-first out

81
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

4.3

Time synchronization

4.3.1

Introduction
The time synchronization source selector is used to select a common source of absolute
time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it possible to
compare event and disturbance data between all IEDs in a station automation system.
A common source shall be used for IED and merging unit when IEC 61850-9-2LE
process bus communication is used.
Micro SCADA OPC server should not be used as a time
synchronization source.

4.3.2

Principle of operation

4.3.2.1

General concepts
Time definitions

The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the time
the clock is intended to have. Clock accuracy indicates the increase in error, that is, the
time gained or lost by the clock. A disciplined clock knows its own faults and tries to
compensate for them.

Design of the time system (clock synchronization)

The time system is based on a software clock, which can be adjusted from external
time sources and a hardware clock. The protection and control modules will be timed
from a hardware clock, which runs independently from the software clock. See figure 25

82
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

External
Synchronization
sources

Time tagging and general synchronisation

Off
LON
SPA
Min. pulse
GPS
SNTP
DNP

Communication

TimeRegulator
(Setting,
see
technical
reference
manual)

Events

Protection
and control
functions

SW-time
Connected when GPS-time is
used for differential protection

IRIG-B
PPS

Off
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS

TimeRegulator
(fast or slow)

Synchronization for differential protection

(ECHO-mode or GPS)
HW-time

A/D
converter

Diff.communication

Transducers*
*IEC 61850-9-2
IEC08000287-2-en.vsd

IEC08000287 V2 EN

Figure 25:

Design of time system (clock synchronization)

All time tagging is performed by the software clock. When for example a status signal
is changed in the protection system with the function based on free running hardware
clock, the event is time tagged by the software clock when it reaches the event
recorder. Thus the hardware clock can run independently.
The echo mode for the differential protection is based on the hardware clock. Thus,
there is no need to synchronize the hardware clock and the software clock.
The synchronization of the hardware clock and the software clock is necessary only
when GPS or IRIG B 00X with optical fibre, IEEE 1344 is used for differential
protection. The two clock systems are synchronized by a special clock synchronization
unit with two modes, fast and slow. A special feature, an automatic fast clock time
regulator is used. The automatic fast mode makes the synchronization time as short as
possible during start up or at interruptions/disturbances in the GPS timing. The setting
fast or slow is also available on the local HMI.
If a GPS clock is used for 670 series IEDs other than line differential RED670, the
hardware and software clocks are not synchronized
83
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Fast clock synchronization mode

At startup and after interruptions in the GPS or IRIG B time signal, the clock deviation
between the GPS time and the internal differential time system can be substantial. A
new startup is also required after for example maintenance of the auxiliary voltage system.
When the time difference is >16s, the differential function is blocked and the time
regulator for the hardware clock automatically uses a fast mode to synchronize the
clock systems. The time adjustment is made with an exponential function, that is, big
time adjustment steps in the beginning, then smaller steps until a time deviation
between the GPS time and the differential time system of >16s has been reached.
Then the differential function is enabled and the synchronization remains in fast mode
or switches to slow mode, depending on the setting.

Slow clock synchronization mode

During normal service, a setting with slow synchronization mode is normally used,
which prevents the hardware clock to make too big time steps, >16s, emanating from
the differential protection requirement of correct timing.

Synchronization principle

From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure. A

function is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower levels.

Synchronization from
a higher level

Function

Optional synchronization of
modules at a lower level

IEC09000342-1-en.vsd
IEC09000342 V1 EN

Figure 26:

Synchronization principle

A function is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronization

messages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of the
synchronization decreases as well. A function can have several potential sources of
synchronization, with different maximum errors. This gives the function the possibility

84
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock after this
source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as:

4.3.2.2

The maximum error of the last used synchronization message

The time since the last used synchronization message
The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the function.

Real-time clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in real-time clock (RTC) with a resolution of one second. The
clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2038.

Real-time clock at power off

During power off, the system time in the IED is kept by a capacitor-backed real-time
clock that will provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off,
the time in the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time
the time will be lost completely.

Real-time clock at startup

Time synchronization startup procedure

The first message that contains the full time (as for instance LON, SNTP and GPS)
gives an accurate time to the IED. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three
things happens with each of the coming synchronization messages configured as fine:

If the synchronization message, which is similar to the other messages, has an

offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used directly for
synchronization, that is, for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero offset at the
next coming time message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a spike-filter in the IED removes this time-message.
If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter does not act and the offset in the
synchronization message is compared to a threshold that defaults to 100
milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a safe
state and the clock is set to the correct time. If the offset is lower than the
threshold, the clock is adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is removed. With an
adjustment of 1000 ppm, it takes 100 seconds or 1.7 minutes to remove an offset
of 100 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse are only used for initial setting of the
time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal time and
only an offset of more than 10 seconds resets the time.

85
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Rate accuracy

In the IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is 100 ppm but if the IED is synchronized for
a while, the rate accuracy is approximately 1 ppm if the surrounding temperature is
constant. Normally, it takes 20 minutes to reach full accuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sources

All synchronization interfaces has a time-out and a configured interface must receive
time-messages regularly in order not to give an error signal (TSYNCERR). Normally,
the time-out is set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if
more than one message is lost, a TSYNCERR is given.

4.3.2.3

Synchronization alternatives
Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. The
synchronization message is applied:

via any of the communication ports of the IED as a telegram message including
date and time
as a minute pulse connected to a binary input
via GPS

The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time in the IEDs.

Synchronization via SNTP

SNTP provides a ping-pong method of synchronization. A message is sent from an

IED to an SNTP server, and the SNTP server returns the message after filling in a
reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernet
network that connects IEDs together in an IEC 61850 network. For SNTP to operate
properly, there must be an SNTP server present, preferably in the same station. The
SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that gives +/- 1 ms accuracy for binary
inputs. The IED itself can be set as an SNTP-time server.
SNTP server requirements
The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at
least equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server
software. The SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable
source like GPS, or local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without
synchronization as primary or secondary server in a redundant configuration is not
recommended.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)

On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages are sent.

86
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, that
is, year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).

Synchronization via Built-in-GPS

The built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from the global
positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronization Module
(GTM).

Synchronization via binary input

The IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can be generated
from, for example station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized
from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation. Both
positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signal is also considered
as a fine time synchronization signal.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED.
The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substation
and if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minute
pulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minute
pulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in the IED.
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As
only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after
the last flank.
Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.
Pulse data:

Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.

Pulse length (b):

Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.

Maximum pulse length is optional.

Magnitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

87
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

a
b

c
en05000251.vsd
IEC05000251 V1 EN

Figure 27:

Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounce occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The
next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, for example, it is exactly 60 seconds between the
pulses, contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without
effecting the system. If contact bounce occurs more than 50 ms, for example, it is less
than 59950 ms between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute
pulse will not be accepted.
Binary synchronization example
An IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to a
binary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minute
pulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse is that
it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse is not
used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spike filter.
The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that the fourth
minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the time in
the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC backup
still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for instance for
an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the internal clock. If
the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected. The second pulse
will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will either synchronize
the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time, if the time offset is
small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to a safe state before the
time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its destination within 1.7 minutes.

88
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Synchronization via IRIG-B

IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The B in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there numbers stating
if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG-B module, one galvanic BNC
connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via the
galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the galvanic
interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a number in the range
of 1-7.
00 means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B
module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. 12 means that a 1 kHz modulation is
used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector.
If the x in 00x or 12x is 4, 5, 6 or 7, the time message from IRIG-B contains
information of the year. If x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, the information contains only the time
within the year, and year information has to come from PCM600 or local HMI.
The IRIG-B module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by IRIG-B
clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of the time-zone.
It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG-B
module. In this case, send also the local time in the messages, as this local time plus
the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times.

4.3.2.4

Process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE synchronization

For the time synchronization of the process bus communication (IEC 61850-9-2LE
protocol) an optical PPS or IRIG-B signal can be used. This signal should emanate
from either an external GPS clock, or from the merging unit.
An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG-B module.

4.3.3

Function block
TIMEERR
TSYNCERR
RTCERR
IEC05000425-2-en.vsd
IEC05000425 V2 EN

Figure 28:

TIMEERR function block

89
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions
4.3.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Output signals
Table 20:

TIMEERR Output signals

Name

4.3.5

Type

Description

TSYNCERR

BOOLEAN

Time synchronization error

RTCERR

BOOLEAN

Real time clock error

Setting parameters
Path in the local HMI is located under Main menu/Setting/Time
Path in PCM600 is located under Main menu/Settings/Time/Synchronization

Table 21:
Name

TIMESYNCHGEN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CoarseSyncSrc

Disabled
SPA
LON
SNTP
DNP

Disabled

Coarse time synchronization source

FineSyncSource

Disabled
SPA
LON
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS

Disabled

Fine time synchronization source

SyncMaster

Disabled
SNTP-Server

Disabled

Activate IED as synchronization master

TimeAdjustRate

Slow
Fast

Fast

Adjust rate for time synchronization

HWSyncSrc

Disabled
GPS
IRIG-B
PPS

Disabled

Hardware time synchronization source

AppSynch

NoSynch
Synch

NoSynch

Time synchronization mode for application

SyncAccLevel

Class T5 (1us)
Class T4 (4us)
Unspecified

Unspecified

Wanted time synchronization accuracy

90
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 22:

SYNCHBIN Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ModulePosition

3 - 16

Hardware position of IO module for time

synchronization

BinaryInput

1 - 16

Binary input number for time synchronization

BinDetection

PositiveEdge
NegativeEdge

PositiveEdge

Positive or negative edge detection

Table 23:

SYNCHSNTP Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ServerIP-Add

0 - 18

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Server IP-address

RedServIP-Add

0 - 18

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Redundant server IP-address

Table 24:

DSTBEGIN Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MonthInYear

January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December

March

Month in year when daylight time starts

DayInWeek

Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time starts

WeekInMonth

Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth

Last

Week in month when daylight time starts

UTCTimeOfDay

0 - 172800

3600

UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight

time starts

91
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

Table 25:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

DSTEND Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MonthInYear

January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December

October

Month in year when daylight time ends

DayInWeek

Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday

Sunday

Day in week when daylight time ends

WeekInMonth

Last
First
Second
Third
Fourth

Last

Week in month when daylight time ends

UTCTimeOfDay

0 - 172800

3600

UTC Time of day in seconds when daylight

time ends

Table 26:
Name
NoHalfHourUTC

Table 27:
Name

TIMEZONE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
-24 - 24

Unit
-

Step
1

Default
0

Description
Number of half-hours from UTC

SYNCHIRIG-B Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SynchType

BNC
Opto

Opto

Type of synchronization

TimeDomain

LocalTime
UTC

LocalTime

Time domain

Encoding

IRIG-B
1344
1344TZ

IRIG-B

Type of encoding

TimeZoneAs1344

MinusTZ
PlusTZ

PlusTZ

Time zone as in 1344 standard

92
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

4.3.6

Technical data
Table 28:

Time synchronization, time tagging

Function

Value

Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values

1 ms

Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse

synchronization), events and sampled measurement values

1.0 ms typically

Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement

values

1.0 ms typically

4.4

Parameter setting groups

4.4.1

Introduction
Use the six different groups of settings to optimize the IED operation for different
power system conditions. Creating and switching between fine-tuned setting sets,
either from the local HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable
IED that can cope with a variety of power system scenarios.

4.4.2

Principle of operation
Parameter setting groups ActiveGroup function has six functional inputs, each
corresponding to one of the setting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these
inputs changes the active setting group. Seven functional output signals are available
for configuration purposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is
always available.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ActiveGroup function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this PCM600 must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group
two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal GRP_CHGD is sending a pulse.
93

Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.
ACTIVATE GROUP 6
ACTIVATE GROUP 5
ACTIVATE GROUP 4
ACTIVATE GROUP 3
ACTIVATE GROUP 2
ACTIVATE GROUP 1

+RL2

IOx-Bly1
IOx-Bly2
IOx-Bly3
IOx-Bly4

ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2

GRP2

ACTGRP3

GRP3

ACTGRP4

GRP4

IOx-Bly5

ACTGRP5

GRP5

IOx-Bly6

ACTGRP6

GRP6
GRP_CHGD

ANSI05000119-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000119 V2 EN

Figure 29:

Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.
SETGRPS function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will
be shown on the Parameter Setting Tool.

4.4.3

Function block
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1
GRP1
ACTGRP2
GRP2
ACTGRP3
GRP3
ACTGRP4
GRP4
ACTGRP5
GRP5
ACTGRP6
GRP6
GRP_CHGD
ANSI05000433-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000433 V2 EN

Figure 30:

ActiveGroup function block

94
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

SETGRPS
MAXSETGR
IEC05000716_2_en.vsd
IEC05000716 V2 EN

Figure 31:

4.4.4

SETGRPS function block

Input and output signals

Table 29:

ActiveGroup Input signals

Name

Type
BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 1 as active

ACTGRP2

BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 2 as active

ACTGRP3

BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 3 as active

ACTGRP4

BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 4 as active

ACTGRP5

BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 5 as active

ACTGRP6

BOOLEAN

Selects setting group 6 as active

ActiveGroup Output signals

Name

Table 31:

Description

ACTGRP1

Table 30:

4.4.5

Default

Type

Description

GRP1

BOOLEAN

Setting group 1 is active

GRP2

BOOLEAN

Setting group 2 is active

GRP3

BOOLEAN

Setting group 3 is active

GRP4

BOOLEAN

Setting group 4 is active

GRP5

BOOLEAN

Setting group 5 is active

GRP6

BOOLEAN

Setting group 6 is active

GRP_CHGD

BOOLEAN

Pulse when setting changed

Setting parameters
ActiveGroup Non group settings (basic)

Name
t

Values (Range)
0.0 - 10.0

Unit

Step

0.1

Default
1.0

Description
Pulse length of pulse when setting changed

95
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

Table 32:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

SETGRPS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ActiveSetGrp

SettingGroup1
SettingGroup2
SettingGroup3
SettingGroup4
SettingGroup5
SettingGroup6

SettingGroup1

ActiveSettingGroup

MAXSETGR

1-6

No

Max number of setting groups 1-6

4.5

ChangeLock function CHNGLCK

4.5.1

Introduction
Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is used to block further changes to the IED
configuration and settings once the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to
block inadvertent IED configuration changes beyond a certain point in time.

4.5.2

Principle of operation
The Change lock function (CHNGLCK) is configured using ACT.
The function, when activated, will still allow the following changes of the IED state
that does not involve reconfiguring of the IED:

Monitoring
Reading events
Resetting events
Reading disturbance data
Clear disturbances
Reset LEDs
Reset counters and other runtime component states
Control operations
Set system time
Enter and exit from test mode
Change of active setting group

The binary input signal LOCK controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT:

96
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Binary input

4.5.3

Function

Activated

Deactivated

Function block
CHNGLCK
LOCK
IEC09000946-1-en.vsd
IEC09000946 V1 EN

Figure 32:

4.5.4

CHNGLCK function block

Input and output signals

Table 33:

CHNGLCK Input signals

Name

Type

LOCK

4.5.5
Table 34:

BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Parameter change lock

Setting parameters
CHNGLCK Non group settings (basic)

Name
Operation

Values (Range)
LockHMI and Com
LockHMI,
EnableCom
EnableHMI,
LockCom

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
LockHMI and Com

4.6

Test mode functionality TEST

4.6.1

Introduction

Description
Operation mode of change lock

When the Test mode functionality TESTMODE is activated, all the functions in the
IED are automatically blocked. It is then possible to unblock every function(s)
individually from the local HMI to perform required tests.
When leaving TESTMODE, all blockings are removed and the IED resumes normal
operation. However, if during TESTMODE operation, power is removed and later
97
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

restored, the IED will remain in TESTMODE with the same protection functions
blocked or unblocked as before the power was removed. All testing will be done with
actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus
mistakes are avoided.

4.6.2

Principle of operation
Put the IED into test mode to test functions in the IED. Set the IED in test mode by

configuration, activating the input SIGNAL on the function block TESTMODE.

setting TestMode to Enabled in the local HMI, under Main menu/TEST/IED test
mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE of the function block TESTMODE is
activated. The other outputs of the function block TESTMODE shows the cause of the
"Test mode: Enabled" state input from configuration (OUTPUT output is activated)
or setting from local HMI (SETTING output is activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow PICKUP LED will flash and all functions are
blocked. Any function can be unblocked individually regarding functionality and event
signalling.
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings from
the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (output
ACTIVE is activated), see example in figure 33. When leaving the test mode, that is
entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled and everything is set to normal
operation. All testing will be done with actually set and configured values within the
IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes are possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.
When a binary input is used to set the IED in test mode and a
parameter, that requires restart of the application, is changed, the IED
will re-enter test mode and all functions will be blocked, also functions
that were unblocked before the change. During the re-entering to test
mode, all functions will be temporarily unblocked for a short time,
which might lead to unwanted operations. This is only valid if the IED
is put in TEST mode by a binary input, not by local HMI.
The TESTMODE function block might be used to automatically block functions when
a test handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact
98
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

29-30) or an FT switch finger can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to
the TESTMODE function block.
Each of the functions includes the blocking from the TESTMODE function block. A
typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 33.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus to
prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events, for example during a
maintenance test.

Disconnection

Normal voltage
Pickup1
Pickup2

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1

tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min

IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000466 V1 EN

Figure 33:

Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protection function.

99
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions
4.6.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
TESTMODE
INPUT

ACTIVE
OUTPUT
SETTING
NOEVENT

IEC09000219-1.vsd
IEC09000219 V1 EN

Figure 34:

4.6.4

TESTMODE function block

Input and output signals

Table 35:

TESTMODE Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

BOOLEAN

Table 36:

Table 37:
Name

Description
Sets terminal in test mode when active

TESTMODE Output signals

Name

4.6.5

Default

Type

Description

ACTIVE

BOOLEAN

IED in test mode when active

OUTPUT

BOOLEAN

Test input is active

SETTING

BOOLEAN

Test mode setting is (Enabled) or not (Disabled)

NOEVENT

BOOLEAN

Event disabled during testmode

Setting parameters
TESTMODE Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TestMode

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Test mode in operation (Enabled) or not

(Disabled)

EventDisable

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Event disable during testmode

CmdTestBit

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Command bit for test required or not during

testmode

100
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

4.7

IED identifiers

4.7.1

Introduction
IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED
in the system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

4.7.2
Table 38:

Setting parameters
TERMINALID Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

StationName

0 - 18

Station name

Station name

StationNumber

0 - 99999

Station number

ObjectName

0 - 18

Object name

Object name

ObjectNumber

0 - 99999

Object number

UnitName

0 - 18

Unit name

Unit name

UnitNumber

0 - 99999

Unit number

4.8

Product information

4.8.1

Introduction
The Product identifiers function identifies the IED. The function has seven pre-set,
settings that are unchangeable but nevertheless very important:

IEDProdType
ProductDef
FirmwareVer
SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate

The settings are visible on the local HMI , under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiers

101
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).

4.8.2

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

4.8.3

Factory defined settings

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very
helpful in the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different
Substation Automation Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be
changed by the customer. They can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local
HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/Product identifiers
The following identifiers are available:

IEDProdType

FirmwareVer

Describes the firmware version. Example: 1.4.51

Firmware versions numbers are running independently from the release
production numbers. For every release numbers (like 1.5.0.17) there can be
one or more firmware versions, depending on the small issues corrected in
between releases.

IEDMainFunType

Describes the type of the IED (like REL, REC or RET). Example: REL670

Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128

(meaning line protection).

SerialNo
OrderingNo
ProductionDate

4.9

Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI

4.9.1

Introduction
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see

102
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are brought in for
one IED configuration.

4.9.2

Principle of operation
The Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI) function , see figure 35, receives its inputs
from the real (hardware) binary inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and makes
them available to the rest of the configuration via its outputs, BI1 to BI10. The inputs
and outputs, as well as the whole block, can be given a user defined name. These
names will be represented in SMT as information which signals shall be connected
between physical IO and SMBI function. The input/output user defined name will also
appear on the respective output/input signal.

4.9.3

Function block
SMBI
^VIN1
^VIN2
^VIN3
^VIN4
^VIN5
^VIN6
^VIN7
^VIN8
^VIN9
^VIN10

^BI1
^BI2
^BI3
^BI4
^BI5
^BI6
^BI7
^BI8
^BI9
^BI10
IEC05000434-2-en.vsd

IEC05000434 V2 EN

Figure 35:

4.9.4

SMBI function block

Input and output signals

Table 39:
Name

SMBI Input signals

Type

Default

Description

VIn1

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

VIn2

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

VIn3

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

VIn4

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

VIn5

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

VIn6

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

VIn7

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

VIn8

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

VIn9

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

VIn10

BOOLEAN

SMT Connect input

103
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 40:

SMBI Output signals

Name

Type

Description

BI1

BOOLEAN

Binary input 1

BI2

BOOLEAN

Binary input 2

BI3

BOOLEAN

Binary input 3

BI4

BOOLEAN

Binary input 4

BI5

BOOLEAN

Binary input 5

BI6

BOOLEAN

Binary input 6

BI7

BOOLEAN

Binary input 7

BI8

BOOLEAN

Binary input 8

BI9

BOOLEAN

Binary input 9

BI10

BOOLEAN

Binary input 10

4.10

Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO

4.10.1

Introduction
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see
the application manual to get information about how binary inputs are sent from one
IED configuration.

4.10.2

Principle of operation
The Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO) function , see figure 36, receives logical
signal from the IED configuration, which is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs,
via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). The inputs in SMBO are BO1 to BO10 and they, as
well as the whole function block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT
as information which signals shall be connected between physical IO and the SMBO.
It is important that SMBO inputs are connected when SMBOs are
connected to physical outputs through the Signal Matrix Tool. If
SMBOs are connected (in SMT) but their inputs not, all the
physical outputs will be set by default. This might cause
malfunction of primary equipment and/or injury to personnel.

104
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

4.10.3

Function block
SMBO
BO1
BO2
BO3
BO4
BO5
BO6
BO7
BO8
BO9
BO10

^BO1
^BO2
^BO3
^BO4
^BO5
^BO6
^BO7
^BO8
^BO9
^BO10
IEC05000439-2-en.vsd

IEC05000439 V2 EN

Figure 36:

4.10.4

SMBO function block

Input and output signals

Table 41:

SMBO Input signals

Name

Type

Default

Description

BO1

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO2

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO3

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO4

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO5

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO6

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO7

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO8

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO9

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool

BO10

BOOLEAN

Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool

4.11

Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI

4.11.1

Introduction
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function is used within the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), see
the application manual to get information about how milliamp (mA) inputs are brought
in for one IED configuration.

105
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions
4.11.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Principle of operation
The Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI) function, see figure 37, receives its inputs
from the real (hardware) mA inputs via the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), and makes
them available to the rest of the configuration via its analog outputs, named AI1 to
AI6. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can be tag-named. These tags will be
represented in SMT.
The outputs on SMMI are normally connected to the IEC61850 generic
communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function for further use of the mA signals.

4.11.3

Function block
SMMI
^VIN1
^VIN2
^VIN3
^VIN4
^VIN5
^VIN6

AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AI5
AI6
IEC05000440-2-en.vsd

IEC05000440 V2 EN

Figure 37:

4.11.4

SMMI function block

Input and output signals

Table 42:
Name

SMMI Input signals

Type

Default

Description

VIn1

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

VIn2

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

VIn3

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

VIn4

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

VIn5

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

VIn6

REAL

SMT connected milliampere input

Table 43:
Name

SMMI Output signals

Type

Description

AI1

REAL

Analog milliampere input 1

AI2

REAL

Analog milliampere input 2

AI3

REAL

Analog milliampere input 3

Table continues on next page

106
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Description

AI4

REAL

Analog milliampere input 4

AI5

REAL

Analog milliampere input 5

AI6

REAL

Analog milliampere input 6

4.12

Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI

4.12.1

Introduction
Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor
function, processes the analog signals connected to it and gives information about all
aspects of the analog signals connected, like the RMS value, phase angle, frequency,
harmonic content, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by
the respective functions in ACT (for example protection, measurement or monitoring).
The SMAI function is used within PCM600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix
tool or the Application Configuration tool.

4.12.2

Principle of operation
Every Signal matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI) can receive four analog signals
(three phases and one neutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 39 and
figure 40. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signals
acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. 244 values
in total). The BLOCK input will reset all outputs to 0.
The output signal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the, in SMT, connected input to
GRPx_A, GRPxB, GRPxC and GRPx_N, x=1-12. AIN is always the neutral current,
calculated residual sum or the signal connected to GRPx_N. Note that function block
will always calculate the residual sum of current/voltage if the input is not connected in
SMT. Applications with a few exceptions shall always be connected to AI3P.

4.12.3

Frequency values
The frequency functions includes a functionality based on level of positive sequence
voltage, IntBlockLevel, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If
positive sequence voltage is lower than IntBlockLevel the function is blocked.
IntBlockLevel, is set in % of VBase/3

107
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph at least two of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B
and GRPx_C must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage. If
SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and
GRPx_C must be connected in order to calculate positive sequence voltage.
If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is PhPh the user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPx_A, GRPx_B and
GRPx_C to the same voltage input as shown in figure 38 to make SMAI calculating a
positive sequence voltage (that is input voltage/3).

IEC10000060-1-en.vsd
IEC10000060 V1 EN

Figure 38:

Connection example

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting

ConnectionType is Ph-N. If only one phase-ground voltage is available,
the same type of connection can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType
setting must still be Ph-Ph and this has to be accounted for when
setting IntBlockLevel. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N and the
same voltage is connected to all three SMAI inputs, the positive
sequence voltage will be zero and the frequency functions will not
work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used
for Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF, 81), Underfrequency
protection (SAPTUF, 81) and Rate-of-change frequency protection
(SAPFRC, 81) due to that all other information except frequency and
positive sequence voltage might be wrongly calculated.

108
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

4.12.4

Function block
SMAI1
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
^GRP1_A
^GRP1_B
^GRP1_C
^GRP1_N
TYPE

SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
ANSI05000705-1-en.vsd

ANSI05000705 V1 EN

Figure 39:

SMAI1 function block

SMAI2

BLOCK
^GRP2_A
^GRP2_B
^GRP2_C
^GRP2_N
TYPE

AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN
ANSI07000130-1-en.vsd

ANSI07000130 V1 EN

Figure 40:

4.12.5

SMAI2 function block

Input and output signals

Table 44:
Name

SMAI1 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block group 1

DFTSPFC

REAL

20.0

Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for

DFT calculation

GRP1_A

STRING

Sample input to be used for group 1 phase A

calculations

GRP1_B

STRING

Sample input to be used for group 1 phase B

calculations

GRP1_C

STRING

Sample input to be used for group 1 phase C

calculations

GRP1_N

STRING

Sample input to be used for group 1 residual

calculations

109
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 45:
Name

Type

Description

SPFCOUT

REAL

Number of samples per fundamental cycle from

internal DFT reference function

AI3P

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 3-phase group

AI1

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 1

AI2

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 2

AI3

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 3

AI4

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 4

AIN

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

Table 46:
Name

SMAI2 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block group 2

GRP2_A

STRING

Sample input to be used for group 2 phase A

calculations

GRP2_B

STRING

Sample input to be used for group 2 phase B

calculations

GRP2_C

STRING

Sample input to be used for group 2 phase C

calculations

GRP2_N

STRING

Sample input to be used for group 2 residual

calculations

Table 47:
Name

4.12.6

SMAI1 Output signals

SMAI2 Output signals

Type

Description

AI3P

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 3-phase group

AI1

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 1

AI2

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 2

AI3

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 3

AI4

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 4

AIN

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder

Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value
InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available. Internal nominal
frequency DFT reference is then the reference.

110
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 48:

SMAI1 Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DFTRefExtOut

InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference for external output

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

ConnectionType

Ph-N
Ph-Ph

Ph-N

Input connection type

TYPE

1-2

Ch

1=Voltage, 2=Current

Table 49:

SMAI1 Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Negation

Disabled
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N

Disabled

Negation

MinValFreqMeas

5 - 200

10

Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

111
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 50:

SMAI2 Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

ConnectionType

Ph-N
Ph-Ph

Ph-N

Input connection type

TYPE

1-2

Ch

1=Voltage, 2=Current

Table 51:
Name

SMAI2 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Negation

Disabled
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N

Disabled

Negation

MinValFreqMeas

5 - 200

10

Limit for frequency calculation in % of VBase

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

4.13

Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM

4.13.1

Introduction
Summation block 3 phase function 3PHSUM is used to get the sum of two sets of threephase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

4.13.2

Principle of operation
Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM receives the three-phase signals from Signal
matrix for analog inputs function (SMAI). In the same way, the BLOCK input will
reset all the outputs of the function to 0.

112
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

4.13.3

Function block
3PHSUM
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
G1AI3P*
G2AI3P*

AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
IEC05000441-2-en.vsd

IEC05000441 V2 EN

Figure 41:

4.13.4

Input and output signals

Table 52:
Name

3PHSUM Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block

DFTSPFC

REAL

Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for

DFT calculation

G1AI3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input 3-phase group

G2AI3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input 3-phase group

Table 53:
Name

4.13.5

3PHSUM function block

3PHSUM Output signals

Type

Description

AI3P

GROUP SIGNAL

Group analog input 3-phase group

AI1

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 1 analog input

AI2

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 2 analog input

AI3

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 3 analog input

AI4

GROUP SIGNAL

Group 4 analog input

Setting parameters
Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value
InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

113
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

Table 54:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

3PHSUM Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SummationType

Group1+Group2
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-(Group1+Group2)

Group1+Group2

Summation type

DFTReference

InternalDFTRef
AdDFTRefCh1
External DFT ref

InternalDFTRef

DFT reference

Table 55:
Name

3PHSUM Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FreqMeasMinVal

5 - 200

10

Magnitude limit for frequency calculation in %

of Vbase

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

4.14

Authority status ATHSTAT

4.14.1

Introduction
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block for user log-on
activity.

4.14.2

Principle of operation
Authority status (ATHSTAT) function informs about two events related to the IED and
the user authorization:

the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

Whenever one of the two events occurs, the corresponding output (USRBLKED or
LOGGEDON) is activated. The output can for example, be connected on Event
(EVENT) function block for LON/SPA.The signals are also available on IEC 61850
station bus.

114
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

4.14.3

Function block
ATHSTAT
USRBLKED
LOGGEDON
IEC06000503-2-en.vsd
IEC06000503 V2 EN

Figure 42:

4.14.4

ATHSTAT function block

Output signals
Table 56:

ATHSTAT Output signals

Name

4.14.5

Type

Description

USRBLKED

BOOLEAN

At least one user is blocked by invalid password

LOGGEDON

BOOLEAN

At least one user is logged on

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

4.15

Denial of service DOS

4.15.1

Introduction
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSOEMAB and DOSOEMCD) are
designed to limit overload on the IED produced by heavy Ethernet network traffic. The
communication facilities must not be allowed to compromise the primary functionality
of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota controlled so that too heavy
network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for instance be the result
of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

4.15.2

Principle of operation
The Denial of service functions (DOSFRNT, DOSOEMAB and DOSOEMCD)
measures the IED load from communication and, if necessary, limit it for not
jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection functionality due to high CPU load. The
function has the following outputs:

115
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

4.15.3

LINKUP indicates the Ethernet link status

WARNING indicates that communication (frame rate) is higher than normal
ALARM indicates that the IED limits communication

Function blocks
DOSFRNT
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000749-1-en.vsd
IEC09000749 V1 EN

Figure 43:

DOSFRNT function block

DOSOEMAB
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000750-1-en.vsd
IEC09000750 V1 EN

Figure 44:

DOSOEMAB function block

DOSOEMCD
LINKUP
WARNING
ALARM
IEC09000751-1-en.vsd
IEC09000751 V1 EN

Figure 45:

4.15.4

DOSOEMCD function block

Signals
Table 57:
Name

DOSFRNT Output signals

Type

Description

LINKUP

BOOLEAN

Ethernet link status

WARNING

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than normal state

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than throttle state

116
Technical reference manual

Section 4
Basic IED functions

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 58:
Name

Type

Description

LINKUP

BOOLEAN

Ethernet link status

WARNING

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than normal state

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Table 59:
Name

4.15.5

DOSOEMAB Output signals

DOSOEMCD Output signals

Type

Description

LINKUP

BOOLEAN

Ethernet link status

WARNING

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than normal state

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Frame rate is higher than throttle state

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

117
Technical reference manual

118

Section 5
Differential protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 5

Differential protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used in
differential protection.

5.1

1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

(87)

5.1.1

Identification
Function description

1Ph High impedance differential

protection

IEC 61850
identification

HZPDIF

IEC 60617
identification

Id

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

87

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN

5.1.2

Introduction
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF, 87) function can be used
when the involved CTs have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing
characteristics. It utilizes an external CT current summation by wiring, a series resistor,
and a voltage dependent resistor which are mounted externally connected to the IED.
HZPDIF (87) can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars. Six single phase function
blocks are available to allow application for two three-phase zones busbar protection.

5.1.3

Principle of operation
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection (HZPDIF, 87) function is based on
one current input with external stabilizing resistor and voltage dependent resistor.
Three functions can be used to provide a three phase differential protection function.
The stabilizing resistor value is calculated from the IED function operating value V
119

Technical reference manual

Section 5
Differential protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

TripPickup calculated to achieve through fault stability. The supplied stabilizing

resistor has a link to allow setting of the correct resistance value .
See the application manual for operating voltage and sensitivity calculation.

5.1.3.1

Logic diagram
The logic diagram shows the operation principles for the 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF (87), see figure 46. It is a simple one step IED
function with an additional lower alarm level. By activating inputs, the HZPDIF (87)
function can either be blocked completely, or only the trip output.

AlarmPickup
0-tAlarm
0

AlarmPickup
0.03s
0

en05000301_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000301 V1 EN

Figure 46:

5.1.4

Logic diagram for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF

(87)

Function block
HZPDIF (87)
ISI*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
ALARM
MEASVOLT
ANSI05000363-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000363 V2 EN

Figure 47:

HZPDIF (87) function block

120
Technical reference manual

Section 5
Differential protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

5.1.5

Input and output signals

Table 60:

HZPDIF (87) Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

HZPDIF (87) Output signals

Name

Table 62:

Description

ISI

Table 61:

5.1.6

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm signal

MEASVOLT

REAL

Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side

Setting parameters
HZPDIF (87) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

AlarmPickup

2 - 500

10

Alarm voltage level on CT secondary

tAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Time delay to activate alarm

TripPickup

5 - 900

100

Pickup voltage level in volts on CT secondary

side

R series

10 - 20000

ohm

250

Value of series resistor in Ohms

5.1.7

Technical data
Table 63:

HZPDIF (87)technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage

(20-400) V
I=V/R

1.0% of In

Reset ratio

>95%

Maximum continuous
power

V>Pickup2/SeriesResistor

Operate time

10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd

Reset time

105 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Vd

Critical impulse time

2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Vd

200 W

121
Technical reference manual

122

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 6

Impedance protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes distance protection and associated functions. It includes
function blocks, logic diagrams and data tables with information about distance
protection, automatic switch onto fault, weak end in-feed and other associated
functions. Quadrilateral characteristics are also covered.

6.1

Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic

ZMQPDIS (21), ZMQAPDIS (21), ZDRDIR (21D)

6.1.1

Identification
Function description
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral
characteristic (zone 1)

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMQPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral

characteristic (zone 2-5)

ZMQAPDIS

Directional impedance quadrilateral

ZDRDIR

21

S00346 V1 EN

21D

Z<->
IEC09000167 V1 EN

6.1.2

Introduction(21)
The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three fault
loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground faults for each
of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive
reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer connected to
overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.

123
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

ZMQPDIS (21) together with Phase selection with load encroachment FDPSPDIS (21)
has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high
resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure48.
X
Forward
operation

R
Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 48:

Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection

with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS (21) activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built-in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single-phase autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone 1 at load
exporting end at phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate independently of each other in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines, and so on.

6.1.3

Principle of operation

6.1.3.1

Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that each fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults for
forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.

124
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Figure 49 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five, impedancemeasuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and variant.
A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 1

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 2

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 3

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 4

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 5

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 6

ANSI05000458-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000458 V2 EN

Figure 49:

The different measuring loops at phase-to-ground fault and phase-tophase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct
voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs
like one independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

6.1.3.2

Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended
for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, threephase faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 50 and figure 51. The phase-to-ground
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per phase reach.

125
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X (Ohm/loop)
RFPG

R1+Rn

RFPG

Xn =

X1+Xn

Rn =

jn
RFPG

jn

X0-X1
3
R0-R1
3

R (Ohm/loop)

RFPG

X1+Xn

RFPG

R1+Rn

RFPG
ANSI05000661-3-en.vsd

ANSI05000661 V3 EN

Figure 50:

Characteristic for phase-to-ground measuring, ohm/loop domain

126
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

RFPP

(Ohm/phase)

R1

RFPP

X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG
1RVPG
-X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
--1X
11FWPE
XX
-X
X00PE
0PE
PG
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3
3 3

X1

R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP

RFPP

X1

RFPP
2

R1

RFPP
2

IEC11000428-1-en.vsd

IEC11000428 V1 EN

Figure 51:

Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 52. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

127
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

VA

Ip

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A

Phase-to-ground
element

RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0

VA
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase A-B

IN

(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IA

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase
element A-B
RFPP

IB

(Arc resistance)

VB
R1 + j X1

VA
Three-phase
fault

IA

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

Phase-to-phase
element A-C

IC
VC
ANSI05000181_2_en.vsd

ANSI05000181 V2 EN

Figure 52:

Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 52 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPG and RFPP are the eventual
fault resistances in the faulty place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 52, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction
through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in
figure 53. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for forward

128
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

and reverse direction (there are different forward and reverse settings - Zx and ZxRev
respectively, where x = 1 - 5). Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.
X

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 53:

6.1.3.3

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS,21)
is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phaseto-ground loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents.
IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS
value of the vector sum of the three-phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop AB (BC or CA) is blocked if IAB (BC or CA) < IMinPUPP.
All three current limits IMinPUPG, IMinOpIR and IMinPUPP are
automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to
operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir = Reverse.

129
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.1.3.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 1 (example for a phase A
to phase B fault).
Zapp =

VA - VB
IA - IB
(Equation 1)

EQUATION1545 V1 EN

Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-ground
faults (example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 2.
Z app =

V_A
I _ A + IN KN
(Equation 2)

EQUATION1546 V1 EN

Where:
V_A, I_A and IN

are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED

KN is defined as:

KN =

Z0 - Z1
3 Z1

EQUATION-2105 V1 EN

Z 0 = R0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V1 EN

Z1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V1 EN

Where
R0

is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach

X0

is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach

R1

is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach

X1

is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

130
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach
along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.
The formula given in equation 2 is only valid for radial feeder application without load.
When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-ground fault, conventional
distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end.
The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such
applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from
the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the
loop impedance according to equation 3,
V =R i +

Di

w0 Dt
(Equation 3)

EQUATION1547 V1 EN

in complex notation, or:

Re (V ) = R Re (I ) +

X
w0

D Re (I )
Dt
(Equation 4)

EQUATION1548 V1 EN

Im (V ) = R Im (I ) +
EQUATION1549 V1 EN

X
w0

D Im (I )
Dt
(Equation 5)

with

131
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 6)

EQUATION356 V1 EN

where:
Re

designates the real component of current and voltage,

Im

designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and

f0

designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rmmeasured resistance from the equation for the real value of
the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for
the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Rm =

Im (V) D Re (I) - Re (V) Dlm(I)

D Re (I) lm(I) - Dlm(I) Re (I)
(Equation 7)

EQUATION1550 V1 EN

X m = w0 D t

Re (V) lm(I) - lm(V ) Re (I)

D Re (I) lm(I) - Dlm(I) Re (I)
(Equation 8)

EQUATION1551 V1 EN

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

6.1.3.5

Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral
function ZDRDIR (21D). Equation 9 and equation 10 are used to classify that the fault
is in forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg
EQUATION1552 V2 EN

0.8 V 1L1 + 0.2 V 1L1 M

I L1

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 9)

132
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

For the AB element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

- ArgDir < arg

0.8 V 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 V 1L1 L 2 M

I L1 L 2

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 10)

EQUATION1553 V2 EN

where:
AngDir

is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees) and

AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 115 degrees, see figure 54.
V1A

is positive sequence phase voltage in phase A

V1AM

is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A

IA

is phase current in phase A

V1AB

is voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

V1ABM

is memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

IAB

is current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (as shown in figure 54). It should not be changed unless system studies
have shown the necessity.
ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output
STDIRCND.
STDIR=

FWD_A*1+FWD_B*2+FWD_C*4+FWD_AB*8+
+FWD_BC*16+FWD_CA*32+REV_A*64+REV_B*128+REV_C*256+
+REV_AB*512+REV_BC*1024+REV_CA*2048

133
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

AngNegRes

AngDir

en05000722_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000722 V1 EN

Figure 54:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in

Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR (21D)

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds 5%
of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100ms the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

134
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.1.3.6

Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-ground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. The phase-tophase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical
signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.
Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 55.

Two types of function block, ZMQPDIS (21) and ZMQAPDIS (21), are used in the
IED. ZMQPDIS (21) is used for zone 1 and ZMQAPDIS (21) for zone 2 - 5.
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FDPSPDIS (21) within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input
signal PHSEL is connected to FDPSPDIS (21) function output PHSELZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be configured to the
STDIR output on ZDRDIR (21D) function.

135
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

PUZMPP

OR

PHSEL

NDIR_AB

AB

AND

BC

AND

CA

AND

NDIR_CA

AG

AND

NDIR_A

BG

AND

NDIR_B

CG

AND

NDIR_BC

NDIR_C
STNDPE

OR

OR
LOVBZ
BLOCK

AND

OR
BLOCFUNC

PHPUND
BLK
ANSI99000557-1-en.vsd

ANSI99000557 V2 EN

Figure 55:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL, external start

condition

Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 56.

136
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

NDIR_A

OR

NDIR_B
NIDR_C
NDIR_AB

OR

AND

0
15ms

AND

0
15ms

AND

0
15ms

AND

0
15ms

NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA

OR
OR

PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PICKUP

BLK
ANSI09000889-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000889 V1 EN

Figure 56:

Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 57.

137
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

NDIR_A
DIR_A

AND

AND

NDIR_C
DIR_C

AND

NDIR_AB
DIR_AB

AND

NDIR_BC
DIR_BC

AND

NDIR_CA
DIR_CA

PU_ZMPG

OR

NDIR_B
DIR_B

OR

OR

OR

AND

0
15 ms

AND

0
15 ms

AND

0
15 ms

AND

PU_A

PU_B

PU_C

PU_ZMPP

OR
BLK

OR

AND

PICKUP

0
15 ms

ANSI09000888-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000888 V2 EN

Figure 57:

Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 58.

138
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Timer tPP=enable
PUZMPP

tPP

AND

BLKFUNC

0-tPP
0

OR

Timer tPG=enable
PUZMPG

OR

tPG
0-tPG
0

AND

AND

BLKTR
BLK

AND

OR

AND
0
15 ms

TRIP

PU_A

AND

TR_A

PU_B

AND

TR_B

PU_C

AND

TR_C

ANSI09000887-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000887 V2 EN

Figure 58:

6.1.4

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

Function block
ZMQPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI06000256-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000256 V2 EN

Figure 59:

ZMQPDIS (21) function block

139
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

ZMQAPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI09000884-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000884 V1 EN

Figure 60:

ZMQAPDIS (21) function block (zone 2 - 5)

ZDRDIR

I3P*
U3P*

STDIRCND

IEC10000007-1-en.vsd
IEC10000007 V1 EN

Figure 61:

6.1.5

ZDRDIR (21D) function block

Input and output signals

Table 64:
Name

ZMQPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

LOVBZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

PHSEL

INTEGER

Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase

selector

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 65:
Name

ZMQPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop

Table continues on next page

140
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Description

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

PHPUND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected

phase or loop

Table 66:
Name

ZMQAPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

LOVBZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

PHSEL

INTEGER

Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase

selector

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 67:
Name

ZMQAPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

PHPUND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected

phase or loop

Table 68:
Name

ZDRDIR (21D) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

group connection for current abs 2

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

group connection for voltage abs 2

141
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 69:

ZDRDIR (21D) Output signals

Name

Type

STDIRCND

6.1.6

Description

INTEGER

Binary coded directional information per measuring loop

Setting parameters
Signals and settings for ZMQPDIS are valid for zone 1 while signals
and settings for ZMQAPDIS are valid for zone 2 - 5

Table 70:
Name

ZMQPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current, i.e. rated current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage

OperationDir

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

R1

0.01 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

X0

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

R0

0.01 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle

RFPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph

RFPG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G

OperationPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhasePhase loops

Timer tPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhaseGround loops

Timer tPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-G

Table continues on next page

142
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IMinPUPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

IMinPUPG

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

IMinOpIR

5 - 1000

%IB

Minimum operate residual current for PhaseGround loops

Table 71:

ZMQAPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current, i.e. rated current

Vbase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage

OperationDir

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

R1

0.01 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

X0

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

R0

0.01 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle

RFPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph

RFPG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G

OperationPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhasePhase loops

Timer tPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhaseGround loops

Timer tPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-G

IMinPUPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

IMinPUPG

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

143
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

Table 72:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

ZDRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current level

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level

IMinPUPP

5 - 30

%IB

10

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

IMinPUPG

5 - 30

%IB

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

AngNegRes

90 - 175

Deg

115

Angle of blinder in second quadrant for

forward direction

AngDir

5 - 45

Deg

15

Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward

direction

6.1.7

Technical data
Table 73:

ZMQPDIS (21) Technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

Max 5 with selectable

direction

Minimum operate residual

current, zone 1

(5-1000)% of IBase

Minimum operate current, phaseto-phase and phase-to-ground

(10-1000)% of IBase

Positive sequence reactance

(0.10-3000.00) /
phase

Positive sequence resistance

(0.01-1000.00) /
phase

Zero sequence reactance

(0.10-9000.00) /
phase

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Zero sequence resistance

(0.01-3000.00) /
phase

Fault resistance, phase-toground

(0.10-9000.00) /loop

Fault resistance, phase-to-phase

(0.10-3000.00) /loop

Dynamic overreach

<5% at 85 degrees
measured with CVTs
and 0.5<SIR<30

Impedance zone timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time

24 ms typically

Reset ratio

105% typically

Reset time

30 ms typically

144
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.2

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic

for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS (21),
ZMCAPDIS (21), ZDSRDIR (21D)
Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral

characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 1)

ZMCPDIS

Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral

characteristic for series compensated
lines (zone 2-5)

ZMCAPDIS

Directional impedance quadrilateral,

including series compensation

ZDSRDIR

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

21

S00346 V1 EN

21D

Z<->
IEC09000167 V1 EN

6.2.1

Introduction
The line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection with three fault
loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground fault for each
of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach
give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
Quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMCPDIS (21) function has functionality for load encroachment which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines.

145
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X
Forward
operation

R
Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 62:

Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load encroachment

function activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the quadrilateral function prevents
overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to ground-faults on heavily
loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

6.2.2

Principle of operation

6.2.2.1

Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that ground fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults for
forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 63 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones.

146
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 1

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 2

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 3

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 4

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 5

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 6

ANSI05000458-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000458 V2 EN

Figure 63:

The different measuring loops at phase-to-ground fault and phase-tophase fault

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct
voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs
like one independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

6.2.2.2

Impedance characteristic
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines
(ZMCPDIS, 21) include six impedance measuring loops; three intended for phase-toground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, three-phase faults.
The distance measuring zone operates according to the non-directional impedance
characteristics presented in figure 64 and figure 65. The phase-to-ground characteristic
is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase characteristic presents
the per-phase reach.

147
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X (Ohm/loop)

R1PG+RNFw
RFRvPG

XNFw =

RFFwPG

X 0 PG - X 1FwPG
3

PG- 1RVPG
X 1RvPG
XX00PE
1XRVPE
XNRV
= XXNFw

XNRV XNRv
==
3
3

X 1FwPG

XX0 PE
- X-1X
FWPE
0 PG
1FWPG
XNFW
XNFW==
3R
3 0 PG - R1PG

X1FwPG+XNFw

jN

jN

RNFw =

R (Ohm/loop)
RFRvPG

RFFwPG

X1RvPG+XNRv

jN
RFRvPG

RFFwPG
ANSI09000625-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000625 V1 EN

Figure 64:

Characteristic for the phase-to-ground measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain

148
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

RFRvPP

(Ohm/phase)

R1PP

RFFwPP

X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
X
0
PE
--1X
11FWPE
X
0
PE
X 0 PG X
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3 33

X1FwPP

j
jN
RFRvPP

RFFwPP

j
R (Ohm/phase)

X1RvPP

jN
RFRvPP

RFFwPP

IEC09000632-1-en.vsd

IEC09000632 V1 EN

Figure 65:

Characteristic for the phase-to-phase measuring loops

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 66. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

149
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

VA

Ip

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A

Phase-to-ground
element

RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0

VA
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase A-B

IN

(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IA

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase
element A-B
RFPP

IB

(Arc resistance)

VB
R1 + j X1

VA
Three-phase
fault

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

IA

Phase-to-phase
element A-C

IC
VC
ANSI05000181_2_en.vsd

ANSI05000181 V2 EN

Figure 66:

Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 66 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPG and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 66, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone may be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction
through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in
figure 67. It may be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is
symmetric, forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both
directions.

150
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 67:

6.2.2.3

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines (ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS, 21) is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phaseto-ground loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents.
IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS
value of the vector sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop AB (BC or CA) is blocked if IAB (BC or CA)< IMinPUPP.
All three current limits IMinPUPG, IMinOpIR and IMinPUPP are
automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to
operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.

151
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.2.2.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 11 (example
for a phase A to phase B fault).
Zapp =

VA - VB
IA - IB
(Equation 11)

EQUATION1545 V1 EN

Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase.
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner to ph-g faults
(example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 12.
Z app =

V_A
I _ A + IN KN
(Equation 12)

EQUATION1546 V1 EN

Where:
V_A, I_A and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN

KN =

is defined as:

Z0 - Z1
3 Z1

EQUATION-2105 V1 EN

Z 0 = R0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V1 EN

Z1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V1 EN

Where
R0

is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach

X0

is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach

R1

is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach

X1

is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

152
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the IED point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.
The formula given in equation 12 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-ground fault, conventional
distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end.
IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from
the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the
loop impedance according to equation 13,
V =R i +

Di

w0 Dt
(Equation 13)

EQUATION1547 V1 EN

in complex notation, or:

Re (V ) = R Re (I ) +

X
w0

D Re (I )
Dt
(Equation 14)

EQUATION1548 V1 EN

Im (V ) = R Im (I ) +
EQUATION1549 V1 EN

X
w0

D Im (I )
Dt
(Equation 15)

with

153
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 16)

EQUATION356 V1 EN

where:
Re

designates the real component of current and voltage,

Im

designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and

f0

designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for
the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Rm =

Im (V) D Re (I) - Re (V) Dlm(I)

D Re (I) lm(I) - Dlm(I) Re (I)
(Equation 17)

EQUATION1550 V1 EN

X m = w0 D t

Re (V) lm(I) - lm(V ) Re (I)

D Re (I) lm(I) - Dlm(I) Re (I)

EQUATION1551 V1 EN

(Equation 18)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

6.2.2.5

Directionality for series compensation

In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing
voltage is performed by an under voltage control. In case of series compensated line, a
voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the memory must
be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory control can not be used
in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series compensated network the polarizing
quantity and memory are controlled by an impedance measurement criterion.

154
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The polarizing voltage is a memorized positive sequence voltage. The memory is

continuously synchronized via a positive sequence filter. The memory is starting to run
freely instantaneously when a voltage change is detected in any phase. A nondirectional impedance measurement is used to detect a fault and identify the faulty
phase or phases.
At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases are
disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms.
The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault
frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the accuracy of
the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network is at a three
phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition can only be
predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition.
In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can not
be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The achieved
direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is blocked and kept
until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored until the fault is cleared).
This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional
measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three phase
fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of the
polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited to 100
ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance measurement to
control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to cover (with some
margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal.
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral,
including series compensation (ZDSRDIR,21D) function. Equation 19 and equation 20
are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and
phase-to-phase fault.
- AngDir < a n g

V 1AM
< AngNeg Re s
IA

EQUATION2005 V2 EN

(Equation 19)

For the AB element, the equation in forward direction is according to:

155
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

- AngDir < a n g

V 1ABM
< AngNeg Re s
I AB
(Equation 20)

EQUATION2007 V2 EN

where:

AngDir

is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees) and

AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 115 degrees, see figure 68.
V1AM

is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A

IA

is phase current in phase A

V1ABM

is memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

IAB

is current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively, see figure 68, and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.
ZDSRDIR (21D) generates a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on
the evaluation where FWD_A=1 adds 1, REV_A=1 adds 2, FWD_B=1 adds 4.
X

AngNegRes

AngDir

en05000722_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000722 V1 EN

Figure 68:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

156
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

6.2.2.6

Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phase-toground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. The phase-tophase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical
signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.
Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 69.

Two types of function block, ZMCPDIS (21) and ZMCAPDIS (21), are used in the
IED. ZMCPDIS (21) is used for zone 1 and ZMCAPDIS (21) for zone 2 - 5.
The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to Phase selection with load enchroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic (FDPSPDIS, 21) function output PHSELZ.
The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant
signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of OperationDir. It must be
configured to the STDIR output on Directional impedance quadrilateral, including
series compensation (ZDSRDIR, 21D) function.

157
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

PUZMPP

OR

PHSEL

NDIR_AB

AB

AND

BC

AND

CA

AND

NDIR_CA

AG

AND

NDIR_A

BG

AND

NDIR_B

CG

AND

NDIR_BC

NDIR_C
STNDPE

OR

OR
LOVBZ
BLOCK

PHPUND

AND

OR

BLK

BLOCFUNC

ANSI99000557-1-en.vsd
ANSI99000557 V2 EN

Figure 69:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL

Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 70.

158
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

NDIR_A

OR

NDIR_B
AND

NIDR_C
NDIR_AB

OR

AND

PU_A
PU_B

NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA

AND

OR
OR

AND

PU_C
PICKUP

BLK
en00000488-1_ansi.vsd
ANSI00000488 V2 EN

Figure 70:

Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 71.

159
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

NDIR_A
DIR_A

AND

AND

NDIR_C
DIR_C

AND

NDIR_AB
DIR_AB

AND

NDIR_BC
DIR_BC

AND

NDIR_CA
DIR_CA

PU_ZMPG

OR

NDIR_B
DIR_B

OR

OR

OR

AND

0
15 ms

AND

0
15 ms

AND

0
15 ms

AND

PU_A

PU_B

PU_C

PU_ZMPP

OR
BLK

OR

AND

PICKUP

0
15 ms

ANSI09000888-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000888 V2 EN

Figure 71:

Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 72.

160
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Timer tPP=enable
PUZMPP

tPP

AND

BLKFUNC

0-tPP
0

OR

Timer tPG=enable
PUZMPG

OR

tPG
0-tPG
0

AND

AND

BLKTR
BLK

AND

OR

AND
TRIP

0
15 ms

PU_A

AND

TR_A

PU_B

AND

TR_B

PU_C

AND

TR_C

ANSI09000887-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000887 V2 EN

Figure 72:

6.2.3

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

Function block
ZMCPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI07000036-2-en.vsd

ANSI07000036 V2 EN

Figure 73:

ZMCPDIS (21) function block

161
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

ZMCAPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
LOVBZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI09000890-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000890 V1 EN

Figure 74:

ZMCAPDIS (21) function block

ZDSRDIR (21D)
I3P*
V3P*

PUFW
PUREV
STDIRCND
ANSI07000035-2-en.vsd

ANSI07000035 V2 EN

Figure 75:

6.2.4

ZDSRDIR (21D) function block

Input and output signals

Input and output signals is shown for zone 1, zone 2 - 5 are equal.

Table 74:
Name

ZMCPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

LOVBZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

PHSEL

INTEGER

Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase

selector

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

162
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 75:
Name

ZMCPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

PHPUND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected

phase or loop

Table 76:
Name

ZMCAPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

LOVBZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

PHSEL

INTEGER

Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase

selector

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 77:
Name

ZMCAPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

PHPUND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected

phase or loop

163
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 78:

ZDSRDIR (21D) Input signals

Name

Type

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for current

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection for voltage

Table 79:

ZDSRDIR (21D) Output signals

Name

6.2.5

Default

Type

Description

PUFW

BOOLEAN

Pickup in forward direction

PUREV

BOOLEAN

Pickup in reverse direction

STDIRCND

INTEGER

Binary coded directional information per measuring loop

Setting parameters
Settings for ZMCPDIS (21) are valid for zone 1, while settings for
ZMCAPDIS (21) are valid for zone 2 - 5

Table 80:
Name

ZMCPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current, i.e. rated current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage

OperationDir

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

OperationPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhasePhase loops

X1FwPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

forward

R1PP

0.01 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

RFltFwdPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

X1RvPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

reverse

RFltRevPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse

Timer tPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-Ph

Table continues on next page

164
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhaseGround loops

X1FwPG

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G,

forward

R1PG

0.01 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-G

X0PG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G

R0PG

0.01 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

47.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle, Ph-G

RFltFwdPG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward

X1RvPG

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G,

reverse

RFltRevPG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse

Timer tPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-G

IMinPUPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

IMinPUPG

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

IMinOpIR

5 - 1000

%IB

Minimum operate residual current for PhaseGround loops

Table 81:

Step

Default

Description

ZMCAPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current, i.e. rated current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage

OperationDir

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

OperationPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhasePhase loops

X1FwPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

forward

R1PP

0.01 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

RFltFwdPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

Table continues on next page

165
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
Name

Step

Default

X1RvPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

reverse

RFltRevPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse

Timer tPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhaseGround loops

X1FwPG

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G,

forward

R1PG

0.01 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-G

X0PG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G

R0PG

0.01 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

47.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle, Ph-G

RFltFwdPG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward

X1RvPG

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G,

reverse

RFltRevPG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse

Timer tPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-G

IMinPUPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

IMinPUPG

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

Table 82:
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Description

ZDSRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OperationSC

NoSeriesComp
SeriesComp

SeriesComp

Special directional criteria for voltage reversal

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current level

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level

IMinPUPG

5 - 30

%IB

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

IMinPUPP

5 - 30

%IB

10

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

AngNegRes

90 - 175

Deg

130

Angle of blinder in second quadrant for

forward direction

AngDir

5 - 45

Deg

15

Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward

direction

Table continues on next page

166
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

3I0Enable_PG

10 - 100

%IPh

20

3I0 pickup for releasing phase-to-ground

measuring loops

3I0BLK_PP

10 - 100

%IPh

40

3I0 limit for disabling phase-to-phase

measuring loops

OperationLdCh

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation of load discrimination characteristic

RLdFwd

1.00 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Forward resistive reach for the load

impedance area

RldRev

1.00 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Reverse resistive reach for the load

impedance area

LdAngle

5 - 70

Deg

30

Load angle determining the load impedance

area

X1FwPP

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

forward

R1PP

0.10 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

7.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

RFltFwdPP

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

X1RvPP

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-Ph,

reverse

RFltRevPP

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse

X1FwPG

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G,

forward

R1PG

0.10 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

7.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-G

X0FwPG

0.50 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G,

forward

R0PG

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

20.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle, Ph-G

RFltFwdPG

1.00 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward

X1RvPG

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach, Ph-G,

reverse

X0RvPG

0.50 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G,

reverse

RFltRevPG

1.00 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse

167
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.2.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 83:

ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS (21)Technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

Max 5 with selectable direction

Minimum operate residual

current, zone 1

(5-1000)% of IBase

Minimum operate current, phasephase and phase-ground

(10-1000)% of IBase

Positive sequence reactance

(0.10-3000.00) /phase

Positive sequence resistance

(0.10-1000.00) /phase

Zero sequence reactance

(0.01-9000.00) /phase

Zero sequence resistance

(0.01-3000.00) /phase

Fault resistance, phase-ground

(0.10-9000.00) /loop

Fault resistance, phase-phase

(0.10-3000.00) /loop

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees

Dynamic overreach

<5% at 85 degrees measured

with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30

Impedance zone timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time

24 ms typically

Reset ratio

105% typically

Reset time

30 ms typically

6.3

Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed

angle FDPSPDIS (21)

6.3.1

Identification
Function description
Phase selection with load
encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

FDPSPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

6.3.2

Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and reinforcement of

168
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get permission to build new
power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault,
so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in
this matter.Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS is
designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance function dependent
on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS (21) has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive
setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the
load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important information
about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously
measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set
values.

6.3.3

Principle of operation
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection with
load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic FDPSPDIS (21) includes six impedance
measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phaseto-phase faults as well as for three-phase faults.
The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the
combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of
faults.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously
measure three phase currents and the residual current, and compare them with the set
values. The current signals are filtered by Fourier's recursive filter, and separate trip
counter prevents too high overreaching of the measuring elements.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FDPSPDIS (21) uses information
from the directional function to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or reverse
direction.
The pickup condition PHSELZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

169
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1.
2.
3.

1MRK506312-UUS C

Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without ground
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The current pickup condition DLECND is based on the following criteria:

1.
2.
3.

Residual current criteria

No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load
area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by
the minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The DLECND output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the

distance zones directional function. There are outputs from FDPSPDIS (21) that
indicate whether a pickup is in forward or reverse direction or non-directional, for
example FWD_A, REV_A and NDIR_A.
These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FDPSPDIS (21) function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 76.
X

60

60

R
60

R
60

Non-directional (ND)

Forward (FWD)

Reverse (REV)
en05000668_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000668 V1 EN

Figure 76:

Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of

Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic
FDPSPDIS (21)

170
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment").
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming
from the directional function . It shall be connected to the STDIR output on ZDRDIR,
directional measuring block. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND
on the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.
The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR=

FWD_A*1+FWD_B*2+FWD_C*4+FWD_AB*8+
+FWD_BC*16+FWD_CA*32+REV_A*64+REV_B*128+REV_C*256+
+REV_AB*512+REV_BC*1024+REV_CA*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have pickup in forward
direction in phase A. If the binary code is 3 then we have pickup in forward direction
in phase A and B, binary code 192 means pickup in reverse direction in phase L1 and
L2A and B etc.
The PHSELZ or DLECND output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded
information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault loop
in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the PHSEL input on the
ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
PHSEL = AG*1+BG*2+CG*4+AB*8+BC*16+CA*32

6.3.3.1

Phase-to-ground fault
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase
selection with load encroachment function FDPSPDIS (21).

ZPHSn =

VA( B , C )
IA( B , C )

EQUATION1554 V1 EN

(Equation 21)

where:
n

corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

171
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The characteristic for FDPSPDIS (21) function at phase-to-ground fault is according to

figure 77. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 60.
The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the ground-return path
defined according to equation 22 and equation 23.
RN =

R0 - R1
3
(Equation 22)

EQUATION1256 V1 EN

XN =

X 0 - X1
3
(Equation 23)

EQUATION1257 V1 EN

X (ohm/loop)
Kr(X1+XN)
RFItRevPG

RFItFwdPG

X1+XN
RFItFwdPG

R (Ohm/loop)

RFItRevPG

60 deg

60 deg

X1+XN
Kr =

1
tan(60 deg)

RFItFwdPG

RFItRevPG

Kr(X1+XN)
en06000396_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000396 V1 EN

Figure 77:

Characteristic of FDPSPDIS (21) for phase-to-ground fault (setting

parameters in italic), ohm/loop domain (directional lines are drawn as
"line-dot-dot-line")

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 24
and equation 25.

172
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

3 I0 0.5 IMinPUPG
(Equation 24)

EQUATION2108-ANSI V1 EN

3 I0

3I 0 Enable _ PG
100

Iph max
(Equation 25)

EQUATION1812-ANSI V1 EN

where:

IMinPUPG

is the minimum operation current for forward zones

3I0Enable_PG is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-toground fault loops (in %).
Iphmax

6.3.3.2

is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FDPSPDIS (21) will be
according to equation 26.
ZPHS =

Vm - Vn
-2 In

EQUATION1813-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 26)

Vm is the leading phase voltage, Vn the lagging phase voltage and In the phase current
in the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 78.

173
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X (W /
0.5RFltRevPP

phase)

0.5RFltFwdPP
KrX1

X1

0.5RFltFwdPP
60 deg

R (W /

phase)

60 deg
0.5RFltRevPP

X1
Kr =

1
tan(60 deg)

KrX1
0.5RFltRevPP

0.5RFltFwdPP
ANSI05000670-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000670 V2 EN

Figure 78:

The operation characteristics for FDPSPDIS (21) at phase-to-phase

fault (setting parameters in italic, directional lines drawn as "line-dot-dotline"), ohm/phase domain

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-ground fault, there are current conditions
that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are
according to equation 27 or equation 28.
< IMinPUPG

3I 0

(Equation 27)

EQUATION2109-ANSI V1 EN

3I 0 <

INBlockPP
100

Iph max

(Equation 28)

EQUATION2110-ANSI V1 EN

where:

IMinPUPG

is the minimum operation current for ground measuring loops,

3I0BLK_PP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and

Iphmax

is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

174
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.3.3.3

Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 26, equation 27 and equation 28 are used to release the operation
of the function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all
directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-clockwise.
The characteristic is shown in figure 79.
X (ohm/phase)
4 X1
3
90 deg
0.5RFltFwdPPK3
X1K3

2 RFltFwdPP
3

R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFltRevPPK3

K3 =

2
3

30 deg

ANSI05000671-4-en.vsd
ANSI05000671 V4 EN

Figure 79:

6.3.3.4

The characteristic of FDPSPDIS (21) for three-phase fault (setting

parameters in italic)

Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based on
the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
175

Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 80. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the
sector is the same in all four quadrants.
X

RLdFwd
LdAngle

LdAngle

LdAngle

RLdRev

LdAngle

en05000196_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000196 V1 EN

Figure 80:

Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FDPSPDIS (21) function. When output
signal PHSELZ is selected, the characteristic for FDPSPDIS (21) (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic (see figure 81, left illustration).
When output signal DLECND is selected, the operation characteristic will be as the
right illustration in figure 81. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum
operation current and the distance measuring zones.

176
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

PHSELZ

DLECND
ANSI10000099-1-en.vsd

ANSI10000099 V1 EN

Figure 81:

Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode

when load encroachment is activated

When FDPSPDIS (21) is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 82. The figure shows a distance
measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area is highlighted
in black.

177
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic
R
Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN

Figure 82:

Operating characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment

is activated

Figure 82 is valid for phase-to-ground. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the
operate area is transformed according to figure 83. Notice in particular what happens
with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone. Due to the 30degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 90 degrees instead of
the original 60 degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at
the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis.
Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load encroachment
characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.

178
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X (W /

phase)

Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone

Distance measuring zone

R (W /

phase)

IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
IEC09000049 V1 EN

Figure 83:

Operating characteristic for FDPSPDIS (21) in forward direction for

three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 84. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as
the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time
the characteristic will "shrink" by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv reach, which
is valid at load or three-phase fault.

179
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN

Figure 84:

Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the quadrilateral
characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected by a fault
between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant
one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four should not be a
problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

6.3.3.5

Minimum operate currents

The operation of the Phase selection with load encroachment function (FDPSPDIS, 21)
is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop n is blocked if In<IMinPUPG, where In is the RMS value of
the current in phase n (A or B or C).
The phase-to-phase loop mn is blocked if (2In<IMinPUPP).

180
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.3.3.6

Simplified logic diagrams

Figure 85 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-toground operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and
logic circuits, when only a phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase measurement is
available within the IED.

Load encroachment block

3 I 0 0.5 IMinPUPG

3I 0

3 I 0 Enable _ PG
100

IRELPG
0
15ms

AND

Iphmax

Bool to
integer

BLOCK

3I 0 < IMinPUPG

AND
AND

3I 0 <

3 I 0 BLK _ PP
100

STPG

10ms
0

0
20ms

0
15ms

AND

DLECND

STPP
IRELPP

Iph max
ANSI09000149-2-en.vsd

ANSI09000149 V2 EN

Figure 85:

Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground operating conditions (residual

current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A DLECND

output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and
current criteria, refer to figure 85. This signal can be configured to STCND functional
input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring elements and their phase related
pickup and tripping signals.
Figure 86 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective
signals NDIR_A (B or C). Internal signals ZMn and ZMmn (m and n change between
A, B and C according to the phase) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each
separate loop measuring element, that is, within the characteristic.

181
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

INDIR_A
INDIR_B
INDIR_3

OR

0
15 ms

OR

0
15 ms

OR

0
15 ms

OR

0
15 ms

PHSEL_G

IRELPG
ZMA
ZMB
ZMC
ZMAB
ZMBC3
ZMCA
IRELPP

AND
AND
AND

AND
AND

PHSEL_A

PHSEL_B

PHSEL_C

INDIR_AB
INDIR_BC

AND

INDIR_CA
OR

0
15 ms

PHSEL_PP

ANSI00000545-3-en.vsd
ANSI00000545 V3 EN

Figure 86:

Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 88 and figure 87. The directional criteria appears as a
condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for
simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations.
Internal signals DFWn and DFWnm present the corresponding directional signals for
measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW (figure 88) represents the
forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 87) represents the reverse
direction. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal
processor.
Figure 87 presents additionally a composition of a PHSELZ output signal, which is
created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured
to PHSEL functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring
elements and their phase related pickup and tripping signals.

182
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

INDIR_A
DRV_A

AND

INDIR_AB
DRV_AB

AND

OR

15 ms
t

REV_A

OR

15 ms
t

REV_G

OR

15 ms
t

REV_B

INDIR_CA
DRV_CA

AND

INDIR_B
DRV_B

AND

INDIR_AB
AND
INDIR_BC
DRV_BC

INDIR_A
INDIR_B
INDIR_C
INDIR_AB
INDIR_BC
INDIR_CA

AND

INDIR_C
DRV_C

AND

INDIR_BC

Bool to
integer

PHSELZ

15 ms
AND

OR

INDIR_CA
AND

15 ms
OR

REV_C

REV_PP

ANSI00000546-2-en.vsd
ANSI00000546 V2 EN

Figure 87:

Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

183
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

AND
INDIR_A
DFW_A

AND

AND

OR

INDIR_AB
DFW_AB

AND

OR

INDIR_CA
DFW_CA

OR
AND

FWD_IPH

0
15 ms

FWD_A

0
15 ms

FWD_G

0
15 ms

FWD_B

0
15 ms

FWD_2PH

0
15 ms

FWD_C

0
15 ms

FWD_3PH

AND

INDIR_AB
AND

OR

INDIR_BC
DFW_BC

0
15 ms

AND

AND

INDIR_B
DFW_B

15 ms
0

AND
AND

OR

15 ms
0

INDIR_C
DFW_C

AND

AND

INDIR_BC
AND

OR

INDIR_CA

AND
AND

OR

FWD_PP

0
15 ms

ANSI05000201-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000201 V3 EN

Figure 88:

Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

Figure 89 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and PICKUP, where
internal signals NDIR_PP, FWD_PP and REV_PP are the equivalent to internal signals
NDIR_G, FWD_G and REV_G, but for the phase-to-phase loops.

184
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

TimerPP=Enable

tPP
t

AND
OR

TimerPG=Enable

tPG
t

AND

AND
OR

TRIP

AND

NDIR_PP
FWD_PP

OR

REV_PP
OR

NDIR_G
FWD_G

RI

OR

REV_G
ANSI08000441-2-en.vsd
ANSI08000441 V2 EN

Figure 89:

TRIP and PICKUP signal logic

185
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.3.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
FDPSPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
DIRCND

TRIP
BFI
FWD_A
FWD_B
FWD_C
FWD_G
REV_A
REV_B
REV_C
REV_G
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
NDIR_G
FWD_1PH
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT
PHSELZ
DLECND
ANSI10000047-1-en.vsd

ANSI10000047 V1 EN

Figure 90:

6.3.5

FDPSPDIS (21) function block

Input and output signals

Table 84:
Name

FDPSPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 85:
Name

FDPSPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip by pilot communication scheme logic

BFI

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or loop

FWD_A

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phaseA - forward direction

FWD_B

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase B - forward direction

FWD_C

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase C - forward direction

FWD_G

BOOLEAN

Ground fault detected in forward direction

REV_A

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase A- reverse direction

Table continues on next page

186
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

6.3.6
Table 86:

Type

Description

REV_B

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase B - reverse direction

REV_C

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase C - reverse direction

REV_G

BOOLEAN

Ground fault detected in reverse direction

NDIR_A

BOOLEAN

Non directional fault detected in Phase A

NDIR_B

BOOLEAN

Non directional fault detected in Phase B

NDIR_C

BOOLEAN

Non directional fault detected in Phase C

NDIR_G

BOOLEAN

Non directional phase-to-ground fault detected

FWD_1PH

BOOLEAN

Single phase-to-ground fault in forward direction

FWD_2PH

BOOLEAN

Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction

FWD_3PH

BOOLEAN

Three phase fault in forward direction

PHG_FLT

BOOLEAN

Release condition to enable phase-ground measuring

elements

PHPH_FLT

BOOLEAN

Release condition to enable phase-phase measuring

elements

PHSELZ

INTEGER

Start condition (Z< with LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

DLECND

INTEGER

Start condition (only LE and 3I0 E/F detection)

Setting parameters
FDPSPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current, i.e. rated current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.01

400.00

Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage

3I0BLK_PP

10 - 100

%IPh

40

3I0 limit for disabling phase-to-phase

measuring loops

3I0Enable_PG

10 - 100

%IPh

20

3I0 pickup for releasing phase-to-ground

measuring loops

RLdFwd

1.00 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Forward resistive reach for the load

impedance area

RldRev

1.00 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Reverse resistive reach for the load

impedance area

LdAngle

5 - 70

Deg

30

Load angle determining the load impedance

area

X1

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

X0

0.50 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

RFltFwdPP

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

RFltRevPP

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse

RFltFwdPG

1.00 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward

Table continues on next page

187
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
Name

Step

Default

RFltRevPG

1.00 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse

IMinPUPP

5 - 500

%IB

10

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

IMinPUPG

5 - 500

%IB

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

Table 87:
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Description

FDPSPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OperationZ<

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation of impedance based measurement

OperationI>

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation of current based measurement

IPh>

10 - 2500

%IB

120

Start value for phase over-current element

Pickup_N

10 - 2500

%IB

20

Start value for trip from 3I0 over-current

element

TimerPP

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph

TimerPE

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Time delay to trip, Ph-E

188
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.3.7

Technical data
Table 88:

FDPSPDIS (21) technical data

Function

6.4

Range or value

Accuracy

Minimum operate current

(5-500)% of IBase

Reactive reach, positive

sequence

(0.503000.00) /phase

Resistive reach, positive

sequence

(0.101000.00) /phase

Reactive reach, zero sequence

(0.509000.00) /phase

Resistive reach, zero sequence

(0.503000.00) /phase

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees

Fault resistance, phase-toground faults, forward and

reverse

(1.009000.00) /loop

Fault resistance, phase-tophase faults, forward and reverse

(0.503000.00) /loop

Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle

(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees

Reset ratio

105% typically

Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic

ZMHPDIS (21)
Function description

Full-scheme distance protection, mho

characteristic

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617 identification

ZMHPDIS

ANSI/IEEE
C37.2 device
number
21

S00346 V1 EN

6.4.1

Introduction
The numerical mho line distance protection is a, up to five zone full scheme protection
for back-up detection of short circuit and ground faults. The full scheme technique
provides back-up protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low requirement
on remote end communication. The five zones have fully independent measuring and
settings, which gives high flexibility for all types of lines.
189

Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection of
heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is
one-, two- and/or three-pole.
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching at phase-toground faults on heavily loaded power lines, see figure 91.
jX

Operation area

Operation area

Operation area

No operation area

No operation area

en07000117.vsd
IEC07000117 V1 EN

Figure 91:

Load encroachment influence on the offset mho characteristic

The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode (offset). This makes them suitable,
together with different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and
cables in complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines
and so on.
The possibility to use the phase-to-ground quadrilateral impedance characteristic
together with the mho characteristic increases the possibility to overcome eventual lack
of sensitivity of the mho element due to the shaping of the curve at remote end faults.
The integrated control and monitoring functions offer effective solutions for operating
and monitoring all types of transmission and sub-transmission lines.

190
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.4.2

Principle of operation

6.4.2.1

Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that each fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults are
executed in parallel.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a phase selector element to select correct voltages and
current depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection function with six measuring elements.

6.4.2.2

Impedance characteristic
The distance function consists of five instances. Each instance can be selected to be
either forward or reverse with positive sequence polarized mho characteristic
alternatively self polarized offset mho characteristics with reverse offset. The operating
characteristic is in accordance to figure 92 where zone 5 is selected offset mho.
jx
X
Mho, zone4
Mho, zone3
Zs=0
Mho, zone2
R

Mho, zone1

Zs=Z1

Zs=2Z1

Offset mho, zone5

IEC09000143_2_en.vsd
IEC09000143 V2 EN

Figure 92:

Mho, offset mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the mho characteristic

191
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead
of crossing the origin as for the mho to the left of figure 92, which is only valid where
the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates of the
negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown to the right of
figure 92.
The polarization quantities used for the mho circle are 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion
of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading
and mild power swing conditions.
The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cuts off a section of
the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting
parameter LoadEnchMode to Enabled. Enabling of the load encroachment function
increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the load
impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the Faulty phase
identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS (21), where also
the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load encroachment from
FMPSPDIS (21) to the zone measurement is given in binary format to the input signal
LDCND.

6.4.2.3

Basic operation characteristics

Each impedance zone can be switched OnEnabled and OffDisabled by the setting
parameter Operation.
Each zone can also be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the
parameter DirModeSel.
The operation for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase fault can be individually
switched Enabled and Disabled by the setting parameter OpModePG and OpModePP.
For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible
to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this
mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering is
also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set to
Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced.
The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3
elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either
because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these
elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally.
The offset Mho characteristic can be set in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by the
setting parameter OffsetMhoDir. When Forward or Reverse is selected a directional

192
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

line is introduced. Information about the directional line is given from the directional
element and given to the measuring element as binary coded signal to the input DIRCND.
The zone reach for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault is set individually in
polar coordinates.
The impedance is set by the parameters ZPG and ZPP and the corresponding angles by
the parameters ZAngPG and ZAngPP.
Compensation for ground-return path for faults involving ground is done by setting the
parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the ground-return
path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPG.
KNMag =

Z0-Z1
3 Z1
(Equation 29)

EQUATION1579 V1 EN

KNAng = ang

Z 0 - Z1
3 Z1

EQUATION1807-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 30)

where
Z0

is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in /phase

Z1

is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in /phase

The phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase measuring loops can be time delayed

individually by setting the parameter tPG and tPP respectively. To release the time
delay, the operation mode for the timers, OpModetPG and OpModetPP, has to be set to
On. This is also the case for instantaneous operation.
The operate timers triggering input can be selected by setting the parameter
ZnTimerSel. The parameter ZnTimerSel can be set to:

Timers seperated: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the

respective measuring loop start signals.
Timers linked: Start of any of the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase loops will
trigger both the phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase timers.
Internal start: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the
INTRNST input.
Start from PhSel: The phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by
the DIRCND, STCND, LDCND inputs. Each of the three inputs consist binary
193

Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

status information related to the six measuring loops. Hence if any of the
measuring loop status is High, then the timers will be triggered.
External start: Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase timers are triggered by the
EXTNST input.

The function can be blocked in the following ways:

activating of input BLOCK blocks the whole function

activating of the input BLKZ (fuse failure) blocks all output signals
activating of the input BLKZMTD blocks the delta based algorithm
activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the high speed part of the algorithm for
high SIR values
activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals
activating the input BLKPG blocks the phase-to-ground fault loop outputs
activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs

The activation of input signal BLKZ can be made by external fuse failure function or
from the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both
cases the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input
BLKZ in the Mho distance function block (ZMHPDIS, 21)
The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected
by ZSMGAPC to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall be connected to
the BLKZMTD output signal of ZSMGAPC function.
At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built-in
resonance circuit in the CVT, which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The
input BLKHSIR shall be connected to the output signal HSIR on ZSMGAPC for
increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when permissive
underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.

6.4.2.4

Theory of operation
The mho algorithm is based on the phase comparison of a operating phasor and a
polarizing phasor. When the operating phasor leads the reference polarizing phasor by
more than 90 degrees, the function operates and gives a trip output.

Phase-to-phase fault
Mho
The plain mho circle has the characteristic as in figure 93. The condition for deriving
the angle is according to equation 31.

194
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

b = ang (V AB - I AB ZPP ) - ang (V pol )

(Equation 31)

EQUATION1789-ANSI V1 EN

where

V AB

is the voltage vector difference between phases A and B

EQUATION1790-ANSI
V1 EN

I AB

is the current vector difference between phases A and B

EQUATION1791-ANSI
V1 EN

ZPP

is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault

Vpol

is the polarizing voltage

The polarized voltage consists of 100% memorized positive sequence voltage (VAB
for phase A to B fault). The memorized voltage will prevent collapse of the mho circle
for close in faults.
Operation occurs if 90270

195
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

IABX

Vcomp=VAB - IAB ZPP

I AB ZPP

V pol
V AB

IABR

en07000109_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000109 V1 EN

Figure 93:

Simplified mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-to-B fault

Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the
settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-phase fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater than or equal to 90 (figure 94).
The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A-to-B fault can be defined according to equation 32.

196
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

V -(-IAB ZRevPP)
V -IAB ZPP

b = arg

(Equation 32)

EQUATION1792-ANSI V1 EN

where

is the VAB voltage

EQUATION1801 V1 EN

ZRevPP

is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase-to-phase fault in reverse direction

IABjX

V comp1 = VAB - IAB ZPP

I AB ZPP

Vcomp2 = V

=IFZF =VAB

IABR

- I AB

Z Re vPP
en07000110_ansi.vsd

ANSI07000110 V1 EN

Figure 94:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase A-toB fault.

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho, forward direction
When forward direction has been selected for the offset mho, an extra criteria beside
the one for offset mho (90<<270) is introduced, that is the angle between the
voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second quadrant and fourth
quadrant. See figure 95. Operation occurs if 90270 and ArgDirArgNegRes.
197
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

where

ArgDir

is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).

ArgNegRes

is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).

is calculated according to equation 32

The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the mho
directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See Directional
impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D) for information about the
mho directional element.
IABjX

ZPP

VAB

ArgNegRes

IAB
ArgDir

en07000111_ansi
ANSI07000111 V1 EN

Figure 95:

Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase A-toB fault

Offset mho, reverse direction

The operation area for offset mho in reverse direction is according to figure 96. The
operation area in second quadrant is ArgNegRes+180.
Operation occurs if 90270 and 180 - ArgDir ArgNegRes + 180

198
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The is derived according to equation 32 for the mho circle and is the angle between
the voltage and current.
X
ZPP

ArgNegRes

IAB

ArgDir

VAB

ZRevPP
en06000469_ansi.ep
ANSI06000469 V1 EN

Figure 96:

Operation characteristic for reverse phase A-to-B fault

Phase-to-ground fault
Mho
The measuring of ground faults uses ground-return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence
from the ground-return path.
For a ground fault in phase A, the compensation voltage Vcomp can be derived, as
shown in figure 97.

Vcomp = V
EQUATION1793-ANSI V1 EN

pol

- I A Z loop
(Equation 33)

199
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

where
Vpol

is the polarizing voltage (memorized VA for Phase A-to- ground fault)

Zloop

is the loop impedance, which in general terms can be expressed as

Z1+ZN = Z 1 1 + KN

)
(Equation 34)

EQUATION1799 V1 EN

where
Z1

is the positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)

KN

is the zero-sequence compensator factor

The angle between the Vcomp and the polarize voltage Vpol for a A-to-ground fault is

b = arg V A - I A + IN KN ZPE - arg(Vpol)

(Equation 35)

EQUATION1592 V1 EN

where
VA

is the phase voltage in faulty phase A

IA

is the phase current in faulty phase A

IA

is the phase current in faulty phase A

IN

is the zero-sequence current in faulty phase A (3I0)

KN
EQUATION1593 V1 EN

Z0-Z1
3 Z1
EQUATION1594 V1 EN

the setting parameter for the zero sequence compensation consisting of the
magnitude KN and the angle KNAng.
Vpol

is the 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA

Vpol

is the 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage VA

200
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

IAX
IAZN

V comp

I A Z loop
IAZPE
Vpol
f
IA (Ref)

IAR

en06000472_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000472 V1 EN

Figure 97:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and vector diagram for phase A-toground fault

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho
The characteristic for offset mho at ground fault is a circle containing the two vectors
from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the setting reach for the
positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector ZPE
in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP is
AngZPE+180.
The condition for operation at phase-to-ground fault is that the angle between the two
compensated voltages Vcomp1 and Vcomp2 is greater or equal to 90 see figure 98.
The angle will be 90 for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
The angle for A-to-ground fault can be defined as

Table continues on next page

201
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

IABjX

V comp1 = VA - IA ZPE

IA ZPE

VA

V comp2 = VA - (-IA ZRevPE)

I AB R

- IA Z RevPe
en 06000465_ansi. vsd
ANSI06000465 V1 EN

Figure 98:

Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase A-toground fault

Operation occurs if 90270.

Offset mho, forward direction
In the same way as for phase-to-phase fault, selection of forward direction of offset
mho will introduce an extra criterion for operation. Beside the basic criteria for offset
mho according to equation 38 and 90270, also the criteria that the angle between
the voltage and the current must lie between the blinders in second and fourth
quadrant. See figure 99. Operation occurs if 90270 and ArgDirArgNegRes.
where

ArgDir

is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).

ArgNegRes

is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant in the directional element,
ZDMRDIR (21D).

is calculated according to equation 38

202
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

IA jX

VA

ArgNegRes

IAR

IA
ArgDir

en 06000466_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000466 V1 EN

Figure 99:

Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for A-toground fault

Offset mho, reverse direction

In the same way as for offset in forward direction, the selection of offset mho in
reverse direction will introduce an extra criterion for operation compare to the normal
offset mho. The extra is that the angle between the fault voltage and the fault current
shall lie between the blinders in second and fourth quadrant. The operation area in
second quadrant is limited by the blinder defined as 180 -ArgDir and in fourth
quadrant ArgNegRes+180, see figure 100.
The conditions for operation of offset mho in reverse direction for A-to-ground fault is
90270 and 180-ArgdirArgNegRes+180.
The is derived according to equation 38 for the offset mho circle and is the angle
between the voltage and current.

203
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X
ZPE

ArgNegRes

IA
ArgDir

VA
ZRevPE

en06000470_ansi.ep
ANSI06000470 V1 EN

Figure 100:

6.4.2.5

Simplified characteristic for offset mho in reverse direction for A-toground fault

Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones
The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-ground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG. The phase-tophase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical
signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.
Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 101.

One type of function block, ZMHPDIS (21) are used in the IED for zone 1 - 5.
204
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FMPSPDIS (21) within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input
signal PHSEL is connected to FMPSPDIS (21) function output signal PHSCND.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filters out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter DirMode. Input signal DIRCND must be
configured to the STDIRCND output signal on ZDMRDIR (21D) function.
OffsetMhoDir=
Non-directional

AND

AND

DirMode=Offset
PHSEL

T
F

AND

AND
LoadEnchMode=
On/Off
LDCND

T
F

True

AND

Release

DIRCND
OffsetMhoDir=
Forward/Reverse
DirMode=
Forward/Reverse

AND

BLKZ
BLOCK

OR

ANSI11000216-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000216 V1 EN

Figure 101:

Simplified logic for release start signal

When load encroachment mode is switched on (LoadEnchMode=On) then start signal

PHSEL is also checked against LDCND signal.
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 101.
Composition of the phase pickup signals is presented in figure 56.
205
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Release

PU_AG
PU_BG
PU_CG

PHG_FLT

OR

AND

PU_A

OR
AND
AND

PU_B

OR
PU_AB
PU_BC

AND
AND
PU_C

OR
PU_CA

AND

OR

OR

PICKUP
PHPH_FLT

ANSI11000217-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000217 V1 EN

Figure 102:

Composition of pickup signals

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 58.

206
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Timer tPP=On
PHPH_FLT

AND

tPP
t
OR

Timer tPG=On
AND

PHG_FLT

tPG
t

15ms
AND

BLKTRIP

PU_A

AND

PU_B

AND

PU_C

AND

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C

ANSI11000218-1-en.vsd
ANSI11000218 V1 EN

Figure 103:

6.4.3

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

Function block
ZMHPDIS (21)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TR_A
CURR_INP*
TR_B
VOLT_INP*
TR_C
POL_VOLT*
TRPG
BLOCK
TRPP
BLKZ
PICKUP
BLKZMTD
PU_A
BLKHSIR
PU_B
BLKTRIP
PU_C
BLKPG
PHG_FLT
BLKPP
PHPH_FLT
EXTNST
PU_TIMER
INTRNST
DIRCND
PHSEL*
LDCND
ANSI06000423-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000423 V2 EN

Figure 104:

ZMHPDIS (21) function block

207
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.4.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 89:
Name

ZMHPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for current sample signals

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for voltage sample signals

CURR_INP

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for current signals

VOLT_INP

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for voltage signals

POL_VOLT

GROUP
SIGNAL

Connection for polarizing voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Block due to fuse failure

BLKZMTD

BOOLEAN

Block signal for blocking of time domaine function

BLKHSIR

BOOLEAN

Blocks time domain function at high SIR

BLKTRIP

BOOLEAN

Blocks all operate output signals

BLKPG

BOOLEAN

Blocks phase-to-ground operation

BLKPP

BOOLEAN

Blocks phase-to-phase operation

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

PHSEL

INTEGER

Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase

selector

LDCND

INTEGER

External load condition (loop enabler)

Table 90:
Name

ZMHPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip General

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip phase C

TRPG

BOOLEAN

Trip phase-to-ground

TRPP

BOOLEAN

Trip phase-to-phase

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Pickup General

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup phase C

PHG_FLT

BOOLEAN

Pickup phase-to-ground

PHPH_FLT

BOOLEAN

Pickup phase-to-phase

208
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.4.5
Table 91:

Setting parameters
ZMHPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation Enable/Disable

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

DirMode

Disabled
Offset
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction mode

LoadEncMode

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Load encroachment mode Off/On

ReachMode

Overreach
Underreach

Overreach

Reach mode Over/Underreach

OpModePG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhaseGround loops

ZPG

0.005 - 3000.000

ohm/p

0.001

30.000

Positive sequence impedance setting for

Phase-Ground loop

ZAngPG

10 - 90

Deg

80

Angle for positive sequence line impedance

for Phase-Ground loop

KN

0.00 - 3.00

0.01

0.80

Magnitud of ground return compensation

factor KN

KNAng

-180 - 180

Deg

-15

Angle for ground return compensation factor

KN

ZRevPG

0.005 - 3000.000

ohm/p

0.001

30.000

Reverse reach of the phase to ground

loop(magnitude)

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Delay time for operation of phase to ground

elements

IMinPUPG

10 - 30

%IB

20

Minimum operation phase to ground current

OpModePP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhasePhase loops

ZPP

0.005 - 3000.000

ohm/p

0.001

30.000

Impedance setting reach for phase to phase

elements

ZAngPP

10 - 90

Deg

85

Angle for positive sequence line impedance

for Phase-Phase elements

ZRevPP

0.005 - 3000.000

ohm/p

0.001

30.000

Reverse reach of the phase to phase

loop(magnitude)

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Delay time for operation of phase to phase

IMinPUPP

10 - 30

%IB

20

Minimum operation phase to phase current

209
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

Table 92:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

ZMHPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OffsetMhoDir

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Direction mode for offset mho

OpModetPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

OpModetPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Off / On of Zone timer, Ph-ph

6.4.6

Technical data
Table 93:

ZMHPDIS (21) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones with selectable

directions

Max 5 with selectable direction

Minimum operate current

(1030)% of IBase

Positive sequence impedance,

phase-to-ground loop

(0.0053000.000) W/phase

Positive sequence impedance

angle, phase-to-ground loop

(1090) degrees

Reverse reach, phase-to-ground

loop (Magnitude)

(0.0053000.000) /phase

2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In
Angle: 85 degrees

Magnitude of ground return

compensation factor KN

(0.003.00)

Angle for ground compensation

factor KN

(-180180) degrees

Dynamic overreach

<5% at 85 degrees measured

with CVTs and 0.5<SIR<30

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time

20 ms typically (with static

outputs)

Reset ratio

105% typically

Reset time

30 ms typically

210
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.5

Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for

earth faults ZMMPDIS (21), ZMMAPDIS (21)
Function description
Fullscheme distance protection,
quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 1)

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMMPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

Fullscheme distance protection,

quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 2-5)

ZMMAPDIS

21

S00346 V1 EN

6.5.1

Introduction
The line distance protection is a , up to five zone protection with three fault loops for
phase-to-ground fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each
zone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of
different types and lengths.
The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults functions ZMMDPIS
(21) and ZMMAPDIS (21) have functionality for load encroachment, which increases
the possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines , see figure 48.

211
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X
Forward
operation

R
Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 105:

Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection,

quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDIS (21)
activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone1 at load
exporting end at phase to ground faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.

6.5.2

Principle of operation

6.5.2.1

Full scheme measurement

The different fault loops within the IED are operating in parallel in the same principle
as a full scheme measurement.
Figure 106 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.

212
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

A-G

B-G

C-G

Zone 1

A-G

B-G

C-G

Zone 2

A-G

B-G

C-G

Zone 3

A-G

B-G

C-G

Zone 4

A-G

B-G

C-G

Zone 5

en07000080_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000080 V1 EN

Figure 106:

6.5.2.2

The different measuring loops at line-ground fault and phase-phase fault.

Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault loop
for each phase.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 107. The characteristic is illustrated with
the full loop reach.

213
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X (Ohm/loop)
RFPG

R1+Rn

RFPG

Xn =

X1+Xn

Rn =

jn
RFPG

jn

X0-X1
3
R0-R1
3

R (Ohm/loop)

RFPG

X1+Xn

RFPG

R1+Rn

RFPG
ANSI05000661-3-en.vsd

ANSI05000661 V3 EN

Figure 107:

Characteristic for the phase-to-ground measuring loops, ohm/loop

domain.

The fault loop reach may also be presented as in figure 108.

VA

IA

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A

Phase-to-ground
element

RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
IN

(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

en06000412_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000412 V1 EN

Figure 108:

Fault loop model

214
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The R1 and jX1 in figure 108 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPG is presented in order to convey the
fault resistance reach.
The zone may be set to operate in , , Disabled or direction through the setting
OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in figure 109. It may
be convenient to once again mention that the impedance reach is symmetric, in the
sense that it is conform for forward and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings
apply to both directions.
X

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 109:

6.5.2.3

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zone

Minimum operating current

The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phaseto-ground loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents.
IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS
value of the vector sum of the three phase currents, that is, residual current 3I0.

215
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Both current limits IMinPUPG and IMinOpIR are automatically

reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to operate in
reverse direction, that is, =.

6.5.2.4

Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.
Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase A, B or C.
The calculation of the apparant impedances at phase-to-ground fault follow equation 39
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner.
Z app =

VA
IA + I N KN
(Equation 39)

EQUATION1811-ANSI V1 EN

Where:
VA, IA and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN

KN =

is defined as:

Z0 - Z1
3 Z1

EQUATION-2105 V1 EN

Z 0 = R0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V1 EN

Z1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V1 EN

Where
R0

is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach

X0

is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach

R1

is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach

X1

is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

216
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach
along the line for all types of faults.
The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and
reactance X.
The formula given in equation 39 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single line-to-ground fault, conventional
distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end.
IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from
the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the
loop impedance according to equation 40,
V =R i +

Di

w0 Dt
(Equation 40)

EQUATION1547 V1 EN

in complex notation, or:

Re (V ) = R Re (I ) +

X
w0

D Re (I )
Dt
(Equation 41)

EQUATION1548 V1 EN

Im (V ) = R Im (I ) +
EQUATION1549 V1 EN

X
w0

D Im (I )
Dt
(Equation 42)

with

217
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

w0 = 2 p f 0
(Equation 43)

EQUATION356 V1 EN

where:
Re

designates the real component of current and voltage,

Im

designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and

f0

designates the rated system frequency

The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for
the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Rm =

Im (V) D Re (I) - Re (V) Dlm(I)

D Re (I) lm(I) - Dlm(I) Re (I)
(Equation 44)

EQUATION1550 V1 EN

X m = w0 D t

Re (V) lm(I) - lm(V ) Re (I)

D Re (I) lm(I) - Dlm(I) Re (I)

EQUATION1551 V1 EN

(Equation 45)

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

6.5.2.5

Directional lines
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the Directional impedance element
for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR (21D) function. Equation 46 is used to classify that
the fault is in forward direction for line-to-ground fault.

218
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

- AngDir < Ang

0.85 V 1A + 0.15 V 1 AM
IA

< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 46)

EQUATION1618 V1 EN

where:

AngDir

is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees) and

AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 115 degrees, see figure 110.
V1A

is positive sequence phase voltage in phase A

V1AM

is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A

IA

is phase current in phase A

The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 110) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.
ZDMRDIR (21D) gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on
the evaluation where FWD_A=1 adds 1, REV_A=1 adds 2, FWD_B=1 adds 4 etc.
X

AngNegRes

AngDir

en05000722_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000722 V1 EN

Figure 110:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault

219
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds
5% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.

6.5.2.6

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of distance protection zone 1 is presented for all measuring: phase-toground loops.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical
signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.
Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 111.

The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to the Phase selection with load enchroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS,21) function output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
220
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on the
DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall be
configured to the DIRCND output on the Directional impedance element for mho
characteristic (ZDMRDIR,21D) function.
PHSEL

AG

AND

NDIR_A

BG

AND

NDIR_B

CG

AND

NDIR_C
NDIR_G

OR

OR
LOVBZ
BLOCK

PHPUND

AND

OR

BLK
en06000408_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000408 V1 EN

Figure 111:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL

Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 112.
NDIR_A
AND

0
15 ms

AND

0
15 ms

AND

0
15 ms

AND

0
15 ms

NDIR_B
NDIR_C

OR

PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PICKUP

BLK
en06000409_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000409 V1 EN

Figure 112:

Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode

221
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 113.
NDIR_A
DIR_A

AND
OR

NDIR_B
DIR_B

PU_2MPG

&

AND

NDIR_C
DIR_C

AND

&

0
15 ms

&

0
15 ms

&

0
15 ms

PU_A

PU_B

PU_C

BLK
OR

&

PICKUP

0
15 ms

en07000081_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000081 V1 EN

Figure 113:

Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 114.
Timer tPG=Enable
PUZMPG

AND

0-tPG
0

BLKTR

AND

PU_A

AND

PU_B

AND

PU_C

AND

TRIP

0
15 ms

TR_A
TR_B
TR_C

en07000082_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000082 V1 EN

Figure 114:

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one

222
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.5.3

Function block
ZMMPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI06000454-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000454 V2 EN

Figure 115:

ZMMPDIS (21) function block

ZMMAPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
PICKUP
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI09000947-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000947 V1 EN

Figure 116:

6.5.4

ZMMAPDIS (21) function block

Input and output signals

Table 94:
Name

ZMMPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

PHSEL

INTEGER

Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase

selector

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

223
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 95:
Name

ZMMPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

PHPUND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected

phase or loop

Table 96:
Name

ZMMAPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

PHSEL

INTEGER

Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase

selector

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 97:
Name

ZMMAPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

PHPUND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected

phase or loop

224
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.5.5
Table 98:

Setting parameters
ZMMPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current, i.e. rated current

Vbase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage

OperationDir

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

R1

0.10 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

X0

0.50 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

R0

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle

RFPG

1.00 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G

Timer tPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-G

IMinPUPG

10 - 30

%IB

20

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

IMinOpIR

5 - 30

%IB

Minimum operate residual current for PhaseGround loops

Table 99:

ZMMAPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current, i.e. rated current

Vbase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage

OperationDir

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

R1

0.10 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for zone

characteristic angle

X0

0.50 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

R0

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle

Table continues on next page

225
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Step

Default

RFPG

1.00 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G

Timer tPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-G

IMinPUPG

10 - 30

%IB

20

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

6.5.6

Values (Range)

Unit

Technical data
Table 100:

ZMMPDIS (21) technical data

Function

6.6

Description

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

Max 5 with selectable direction

Minimum operate current

(10-30)% of IBase

Positive sequence reactance

(0.50-3000.00) W/phase

Positive sequence resistance

(0.10-1000.00) /phase

Zero sequence reactance

(0.50-9000.00) /phase

Zero sequence resistance

(0.50-3000.00) /phase

Fault resistance, phase-ground

(1.00-9000.00) W/loop

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees

Dynamic overreach

<5% at 85 degrees measured

with CCVTs and 0.5<SIR<30

Impedance zone timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time

24 ms typically

Reset ratio

105% typically

Reset time

30 ms typically

Directional impedance element for mho characteristic

and additional distance protection directional function
for earth faults ZDMRDIR (21D), ZDARDIR
Function description
Directional impedance element for mho
characteristic

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZDMRDIR

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D

S00346 V1 EN

226
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Additional distance protection

directional function for earth faults

IEC 60617
identification

ZDARDIR

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

S00346 V1 EN

6.6.1

Introduction
The phase-to-ground impedance elements can be optionally supervised by a phase
unselective directional function based on symmetrical components.

6.6.2

Principle of operation

6.6.2.1

Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR (21D)

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance element for
mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D). Equation 47 and equation 48 are used to classify
that the fault is in the forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase
fault respectively.
- AngDir < Ang

0.85 V 1A + 0.15 V 1 AM
IA

< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 47)

EQUATION1618 V1 EN

- AngDir < Ang

0.85 V 1 AB + 0.15 V 1 ABM

IAB

< AngNeg Re s
(Equation 48)

EQUATION1620 V1 EN

Where:
AngDir

Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees)

AngNegRes

Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 117 for mho characteristics.

V1A

Positive sequence phase voltage in phase A

V1AM

Positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A

IA

Phase current in phase A

V1AB

Voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

V1ABM

Memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

IAB

Current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

227
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The default settings for AngDir and AngNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 117) and they should not be changed unless system studies
show the necessity.
If one sets DirEvalType to Comparator (which is recommended when using the mho
characteristic) then the directional lines are computed by means of a comparator-type
calculation, meaning that the directional lines are based on mho-circles (of infinite
radius). The default setting value Impedance otherwise means that the directional lines
are implemented based on an impedance calculation equivalent to the one used for the
quadrilateral impedance characteristics.
When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic
(ZDMRDIR) is used together with Fullscheme distance protection,
mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS) the following settings for parameter
DirEvalType is vital:

alternative Comparator is strongly recommended

alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used
alternative Impedance should not be used. This altenative is
intended for use together with Distance protection zone,
quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS)

X
Zset reach point

AngNegRes

-AngDir

-Zs
en06000416_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000416 V1 EN

Figure 117:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward fault

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.

228
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds

5% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, no directional

indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its
rated value.

The Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR ,21D) function
has the following output signals:
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and
is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
bit 11
(2048)

bit 10
(1024)

bit 9
(512)

bit 8
(256)

bit 7
(128)

bit 6
(64)

REV_CA1=1

REV_BC=1

REV_AB=1

REV_C=1

REV_B=1

REV_A=1

bit 5
(32)

bit 4
(16)

bit 3
(8)

bit 2
(4)

bit 1
(2)

bit 0
(1)

FWD_CA=1

FWD_BC=1

FWD_AB=1

FWD_C=1

FWD_B=1

FWD_A=1

The PUFW output is a logical signal with value 1 or 0. It is made up as an OR-function

of all the forward starting conditions, that is, FWD_A, FWD_B, FWD_C, FWD_AB,
FWD_BC and RWD_CA. The PUREV output is similar to the PUFW output, the only
difference being that it is made up as an OR-function of all the reverse starting
conditions, that is, REV_A, REV_B, REV_C. REV_AB, REV_BC and REV_CA.
Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service values:

resistance phase A
reactance phase A
resistance phase B
reactance phase B
resistance phase C
229

Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

6.6.2.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

reactance phase C
direction phase A
direction phase B
direction phase C

Additional distance protection directional function for ground faults

ZDARDIR
A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage for its operation. The positive-sequence
memory-polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:

The greatest amount of expansion for improved resistive coverage. These elements
always expand back to the source.
Memory action for all fault types. This is very important for close-in three-phase
faults.
A common polarizing reference for all six distance-measuring loops. This is
important for single-pole tripping, during a pole-open period.

There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse phase
to phase faults and double phase-to-ground faults during high load periods. To solve
these, additional directional element is used.
For phase-to-ground faults, directional elements using sequence components are very
reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one of
following types of polarization:

Zero-sequence voltage
Negative-sequence voltage
Zero-sequence current

These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the Additional distance protection
directional function for ground faults (ZDARDIR).
Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection. The
measurement principle is illustrated in figure 118.

230
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

- 3V 0
AngleOp
AngleRCA

3I0
en06000417_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000417 V1 EN

Figure 118:

Principle for zero-sequence voltage polarized additional directional

element

Negative-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the

negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current at the location of the
protection.
Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zerosequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zero-sequence
current, for example, the current in the neutral of a power transformer.
The principle of zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current
compensation is described in figure 119. The same also applies for the negativesequence function.
Z0 SA

I0

I0

Z0SB

Z0 Line

Characteristic
angle

V0

V0

K*I0
V0 + K*I0
IF
en06000418_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000418 V1 EN

Figure 119:

Principle for zero sequence compensation

Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase
information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the normal
231
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

directional element that works on a per phase base. The release signals are per phase
and to have a release of a measuring element in a specific phase both the additional
directional element, and the normal directional element, for that phase must indicate
correct direction.
Normal
directional
element
A, B, C

AND

Release of distance
measuring element
A, B, C

Additional
directional
element

AND per
phase
en06000419_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000419 V1 EN

Figure 120:

6.6.3

Ground distance element directional supervision

Function block
I3P*
V3P*

ZDMRDIR (21D)
DIR_CURR
DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
PUFW
PUREV
STDIRCND
ANSI06000422-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000422 V2 EN

Figure 121:

ZDMRDIR (21D) function block

ZDARDIR
I3P*
V3P*
I3PPOL*
DIRCND

FWD_G
REV_G
DIREFCND

ANSI06000425-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000425 V2 EN

Figure 122:

ZDARDIR function block

232
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.6.4

Input and output signals

Table 101:
Name

ZDMRDIR (21D) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

group connection for current abs 1

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

group connection for voltage abs 1

Table 102:
Name

ZDMRDIR (21D) Output signals

Type

Description

DIR_CURR

GROUP SIGNAL

Group connection

DIR_VOLT

GROUP SIGNAL

Group connection

DIR_POL

GROUP SIGNAL

Group connection

PUFW

BOOLEAN

Pickup in forward direction

PUREV

BOOLEAN

Pickup in reverse direction

STDIRCND

INTEGER

Binary coded directional information per measuring loop

Table 103:
Name

ZDARDIR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Current signals

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage signals

I3PPOL

GROUP
SIGNAL

Polarisation current signals

DIRCND

INTEGER

Binary coded directional signal

Table 104:
Name

ZDARDIR Output signals

Type

Description

FWD_G

BOOLEAN

Forward start signal from phase-to-ground directional

element

REV_G

BOOLEAN

Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground directional

element

DIREFCND

INTEGER

Pickuo direction Binary coded

233
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.6.5
Table 105:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
ZDMRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current level

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level

DirEvalType

Impedance
Comparator
Imp/Comp

Comparator

Directional evaluation mode Impedance /

Comparator

AngNegRes

90 - 175

Deg

115

Angle of blinder in second quadrant for

forward direction

AngDir

5 - 45

Deg

15

Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward

direction

IMinPUPG

5 - 30

%IB

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

IMinPUPP

5 - 30

%IB

10

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

Table 106:
Name

ZDARDIR Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current values

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level in kV

PolMode

-3U0
-V2
IPol
Dual
-3U0Comp
-V2comp

-3U0

Polarization quantity for opt dir function for PG faults

AngleRCA

-90 - 90

Deg

75

Characteristic relay angle (= MTA or base

angle)

IPickup

1 - 200

%IB

Minimum operation current in % of IBase

VPolPU

1 - 100

%VB

Minimum polarizing voltage in % of VBase

IPolPU

5 - 100

%IB

10

Minimum polarizing current in % of IBase

Table 107:
Name

ZDARDIR Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AngleOp

90 - 180

Deg

160

Operation sector angle

Kmag

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm

0.01

40.00

Boost-factor in -V0comp and -V2comp

polarization

234
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.7

Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC

Function description
Mho Impedance supervision logic

6.7.1

IEC 61850
identification
ZSMGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes features for fault
inception detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss of
potential logic as well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.
ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different parts:
1.
2.

A fault inception detection logic

High SIR detection logic

6.7.2

Principle of operation

6.7.2.1

Fault inception detection

The aim for the fault inception detector is to detect quickly that a fault has occurred on
the system.
The fault inception detection detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents or
zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase voltage
or zero sequence voltage. If the change of any phase current and corresponding phase
voltage or 3V0 and 3I0 exceeds the settings and DeltaV respectively. Delta3V0 and and
the input signal BLOCK is not activated, the output signal FLTDET is activated
indicating that a system fault has occurred.
If the setting is set to Enabled in blocking scheme and the fault inception function has
detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST will be issued and send to remote
end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to be fulfilled for
sending the BLKCHST signal:
1.
2.
3.

The setting has to be set to Enabled

The breaker has to be closed, that is, the input signal CBOPEN has to be deactivated
A reverse fault should have been detected while the carrier send signal is not
blocked, that is, input signal REVSTART is activated and input signal BLOCKCS
is not activated

235
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Or
A fault inception is detected
If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the
BLKCHST signal, the function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote end.
The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are:
1.
2.
3.

The function has to be in pilot mode, that is, the setting has to be set to Enabled
The carrier send signal should be blocked, that is, input signal BLOCKCS is On and,
A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was not
blocked, that is, input signals REVSTART and BLOCKCS is not activated.

ZSMGAPC function has a built in loss of voltage detection based on the evaluation of
the change in phase voltage or the change in zero sequence voltage (3V0). It operates if
the change in phase voltages exceeds the setting or 3V0 exceeds the setting Delta3V0.
If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection function
will be blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external fuse
failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated by
activating the output BLKZ, which shall be connected to the input BLKZ on the
distance Mho function block.
During fault inception a lot of transients will be developed which in turn might cause
the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) will
increase the filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by
activating the output BLKZMD, which shall be connected to the input BLKZMTD on
mho distance function block.

High SIR detection

High SIR values increases the likelihood that CVT will introduce a prolonged and
distorted transient, increasing the risk for overreach of the distance function.
The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the
setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any of
the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting . The HSIR signal is intended to block the
delta based mho impedance function.

236
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.7.3

Function block
ZSMGAPC
I3P*
BLKZMTD
U3P*
BLKCHST
BLOCK
CHSTOP
REVSTART
HSIR
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN
IEC06000426-2-en.vsd
IEC06000426 V2 EN

Figure 123:

6.7.4

ZSMGAPC function block

Input and output signals

Table 108:
Name

ZSMGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and DFT

magnitude

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of the function

REVSTART

BOOLEAN

Indication of reverse start

BLOCKCS

BOOLEAN

Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end

CBOPEN

BOOLEAN

Indicates that the breaker is open

Table 109:
Name

ZSMGAPC Output signals

Type

Description

BLKZMTD

BOOLEAN

Block signal for blocking of time domain high speed mho

BLKCHST

BOOLEAN

Blocking signal to remote end to block overreaching

zone

CHSTOP

BOOLEAN

Stops the blocking signal to remote end

HSIR

BOOLEAN

Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit

237
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.7.5
Table 110:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
ZSMGAPC Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base value for current measurement

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base value for voltage measurement

PilotMode

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Pilot mode Disable / Enable

Zreach

0.1 - 3000.0

ohm

0.1

38.0

Line impedance

IMinOp

10 - 30

%IB

20

Minimum operating current for SIR

measurement

Table 111:
Name

ZSMGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DeltaI

0 - 200

%IB

10

Current change level in %IB for fault inception

detection

Delta3I0

0 - 200

%IB

10

Zero seq current change level in % of IB

DeltaV

0 - 100

%VB

Voltage change level in %VB for fault

inception detection

Delta3V0

0 - 100

%VB

Zero seq voltage change level in % of VB

SIRLevel

5 - 15

10

Settable level for source impedance ratio

6.8

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS (21)
Function description
Faulty phase identification with load
encroachment for mho

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

FMPSPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

6.8.1

Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of
the power system is reduced, for example difficulties to get permission to build new
power lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types of fault

238
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

so that single phase tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important roll in
this matter.
The phase selection function is design to accurately select the proper fault loop(s) in
the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some
cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation.
Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the
possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones without interfering
with the load.
The output signals from the phase selection function produce important information
about faulty phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis as well.

6.8.2

Principle of operation

6.8.2.1

The phase selection function

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS, 21) function
can be decomposed into six different parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

A high speed delta based current phase selector

A high speed delta based voltage phase selector
A symmetrical components based phase selector
Fault evaluation and selection logic
A load encroachment logic
A blinder logic

The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

Delta based current and voltages

The delta based fault detection function uses adaptive technique and is based on patent
US4409636.
The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase
selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho measuring element and is
essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power Line
Carrier (PLC) communication system across the protected line.
The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that filters
out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when no fault
is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault occurs, currents
and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the currents and voltages resulting
in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line. At this point the notch
239
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output is processed by the delta
function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship between phases to determine if a
fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases.
The current and voltage delta based phase selector gives a real output signal if the
following criterion is fulfilled (only phase A shown):
Max(VA,VB,VC)>DeltaVMinOp
Max(IA,IB,IC)>DeltaIMinOp
where:
VA, VB and VC

are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1

DeltaVMinOp and DeltaIMinOp

are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current
filters to decide that a fault has occurred. A slow evolving fault may not
produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a
case speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components
phase selector will operate.

The delta voltages VA(B,C) and delta current IA(B,C) are the voltage and current
between sample t and sample t-1.
The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type. The
logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing by the
largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The condition
for fault type classification for the voltages and currents can be expressed as:

FaultType =

( DVA, DVB , DVC )

Max ( DIA, DIB , DIC )
(Equation 49)

EQUATION1808-ANSI V1 EN

FaultType =

( DIA, DIB , DIC )

Max ( DIA, DIB , DIC )
(Equation 50)

EQUATION1809-ANSI V1 EN

The value of FaultType for different shunt faults are as follows:

Under ideal conditions: (Patent pending)
Single phase-to-ground;

FaultType=1

Phase-to-phase fault

FaultType=2

Three-phase fault;

FaultType=3

240
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The output signal is 1 for single phase-to-ground fault, 2 for phase-to-phase fault and 3
for three-phase fault. At this point the filter does not know if ground was involved or not.
Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the
result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType
over its entire range.
When a single phase-to-ground fault has been detected, the logic determines the largest
quantity, and asserts that phase. If phase-to-phase fault is detected, the two largest
phase quantities will be detected and asserted as outputs.
The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate
block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to
differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the wave shape. Therefore the output
is forced to wait a certain time by means of a timer. If the timer expires, and a fault is
detected in one phase only, the fault is deemed as phase-to-ground. This way a
premature single phase-to-ground fault detection is not released for a phase-to-phase
fault. If, however, ground current is detected before the timer expires, the phase-toground fault is released sooner.
If another phase picks up during the time delay, the wait time is reduced by a certain
amount. Each detection of either ground-to-phase or additional phases further reduce
the initial time delay and allow the delta phase selector output to be faster. There is no
time delay, if for example, all three phases are faulty.
The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time as
input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input will block the
delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the
DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too
abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.

Symmetrical component based phase selector

The symmetrical component phase selector uses preprocessed calculated sequence

voltages and currents as inputs. It also uses sampled values of the phase currents. All
the symmetrical quantities mentioned further in this section are with reference to phase
A.
The function is made up of four main parts:
A

Detection of the presence of ground fault

A phase-to-phase logic block based on V2/V1 angle relationship

A phase-to-ground component based on patent US5390067 where the angle relationships

between V2/I0 and V2/V1 is evaluated to determine ground fault or phase- to-phase to ground fault

Logic for detection of three-phase fault

241
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Presence of ground-fault detection

This detection of ground fault is performed in two levels, first by evaluation of the
magnitude of zero sequence current, and secondly by the evaluation of the zero and
negative sequence voltage. It is a complement to the ground-fault signal built-in in the
Symmetrical component based phase selector.
The complementary based zero-sequence current function evaluates the presence of
ground fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting parameter
INRelPE. The output signal is used to release the ground-fault loop. It is a complement
to the ground-fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector. The condition
for releasing the phase-to-ground loop is as follows:
The output from this detection is used to release the ground-fault loop.
|3I0|>maxIph: INRelPE
where:
|3I0|

is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0

maxIph

is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents

INRelPE

is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the
maximum phase current

The ground-fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current by
the main sequence function meets the following conditions:
|3I0|>IBase 0.5
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPG
where:
maxIph

is the maximal current magnitude found in any of the three phases

INRelPG

is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-ground measuring loop in % of IBase

IBase

is the global setting of the base current (A)

In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of zero
sequence current may not be significant and the above detection may fail. In those
cases the detection enters the second level, with evaluation of zero and negative
sequence voltage. The release of the ground-fault loops can then be achieved if all of
the following conditions are fulfilled:
|3V0|>|V2| 0.5

242
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

|3V0|>V1| 0.2
|V1|> VBase 0.2/(3)
and
3I0<0.1 IBase
or
3I0<maxIph INRelPG
where:
3V0

is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage

V2

is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point of
phase A

k5

is design parameter

ILmax

is the maximal phase current

IMinOp

is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase

Phase-to-phase fault detection

The detection of phase-to-phase fault is performed by evaluation of the angle
difference between the sequence voltages V2 and V1.

VC

60

C-A sector
180

VB

B-C sector

VA (Ref)

A-B sector
VA
300
ANSI06000383-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000383 V2 EN

Figure 124:

Definition of fault sectors for phase-to-phase fault

243
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The phase-to-phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle between
the sequence voltages V2 and V1 lies within the sector defined according to figure 124
and the following conditions are fulfilled:
|V1|>V1MinOP
|V2|>V2MinOp
where:

V1MinOP and V2MinOp

are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltages

The positive sequence voltage V1A in figure 124 above is reference.

If there is a three-phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase
signals, even if the general conditions for V2 and V1 are fulfilled.
Phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase-to-ground-fault detection
The detection of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase-to-ground fault (US patent
5390067) is based on two conditions:
1. Angle relationship between V2 and I0
2. Angle relationship between V2 and V1
The condition 1 determines faulty phase at single phase-to-ground fault by determine
the angle between V2 and I0.

244
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

80

BG sector

CG sector
V2A
(Ref)

200

AG sector
320

en06000384_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000384 V1 EN

Figure 125:

Condition 1: Definition of faulty phase sector as angle between V2 and

I0

The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in radians as
input to the V2 and I0 function block. The input angle is released only if the fault is in
forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault is classified as
forward direction if the angle between V0 and I0 lies between 20 to 200 degrees, see
figure 126.

Forward

200

20

Reverse

en06000385.vsd

IEC06000385 V1 EN

Figure 126:

Directional element used to release the measured angle between Vo

and I0

The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If the
angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that sector

245
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

will be active see figure 125. Only one sector signal is allowed to be activated at the
same time.
The sector function for condition 1 has an internal release signal which is active if the
main sequence function has classified the angle between V0 and I0 as valid. The
following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:
|V2|>V2MinOp
|3I0|> 0.05 IBase
|3I0|>maxIph INRelPG
where:
V2 and IN

are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zerosequence current (3I0)

V2MinOp

is the setting parameter for minimum operating negative sequence

voltage

maxIph

is the maximum phase current

The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction.
The condition 2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence voltage
V2 and the positive sequence voltage V1. Since this is a phase-to-phase voltage
relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse direction. A
phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same angle boarders as
for condition 1. If the calculated angle between V2 and V1 lies within one sector, the
corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The condition 2 is released if
both the following conditions are fulfilled:
|V2|>V2MinOp
|V1|>V1MinOp
where:
|V1| and |V2|

are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltages.

V1MinOP and V2MinOP

are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operating voltages.

246
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

140

CG sector
20
V1A
(Ref)

AG sector

BG sector

260

en06000413_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000413 V1 EN

Figure 127:

Condition 2: V2 and V1 angle relationship

If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single phaseto-ground. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be the
complement of the second condition, that is, a phase-to-phase-to- ground fault.
Condition 1 and

Condition 2

Fault type

CG

CG

CG

BG

AG

BCG

The sequence phase selector is blocked when ground is not involved or if a three-phase
fault is detected.
Three-phase fault detection
Unless it has been categorized as a single or two-phase fault, the function classifies it
as a three-phase fault if the following conditions are fulfilled:
|V1|V1Level
and
|I1|>I1LowLevel
or
|I1|>IMaxLoad

247
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

where:
V1| and |I1|

are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude

V1Level ,
I1LowLevel

are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current

IMaxLoad

is the setting of the maximum load current

The output signal for detection of three-phase fault is only released if not ground fault
and phase-to-phase fault in the main sequence function is detected.
The conditions for not detecting ground fault are the inverse of equation 5 to 10.
The condition for not detecting phase-to-phase faults is determined by three conditions.
Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase-to-phase fault. Those are:
1:
ground fault is detected
or
|3I0IN|> 0.05 IBase
and
|3I0IN|>maxIph INRelPG
2:
phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase faults are not fulfilled
and
maxIph<0.1 IBase
and
|I2|<0.1 maxIph
3:
|3I0IN|>maxIph 3I0BLK_PP
or
|I2|<maxIph I2maxIL

where:
maxIph

is the maximum of the phase currents IA, IB and IC

INRelPG

is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-ground fault loops

|I2|

is the magnitude of the negative sequence current

I2ILmax

is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current
to the maximum phase current in percent of IBase

3I0BLK_PP

is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring
loops

248
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Fault evaluation and selection logic

The phase selection logic has an evaluation procedure that can be simplified according
to figure 128. Only phase A is shown in the figure. If the internal signal 3 Phase fault is
activated, all four outputs PICKUP, PU_A, PU_B and PU_C gets activated.

DeltaIA

b
DeltaVA
Sequence based
function

AB fault

a
OR

a>b
then c=a
else c=a

a<b
then c=b
else c=a

FaultPriority
Adaptive release
dependent on result
from Delta logic

OR

AG fault
3 Phase fault

PU_A

&

IA Valid
BLOCK

en06000386_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000386 V1 EN

Figure 128:

Simplified diagram for fault evaluation, phase A

Load encroachment logic

Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
activated in faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS,
21) function but the influence on the zone measurement can be switched Enabled/
Disabledin the respective impedance measuring function.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 129. As illustrated, the resistive
reach in forward and reverse direction and the angle of the sector is the same in all four
quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by the load encroachment
function, as shown in figure 129.

Blinder
Blinder provides a mean to discriminate high load from a fault. The operating
characteristic is illustrated in figure 129. There are six individual measuring loops with
the blinder functionality. Three phase-to-ground loops which estimate the impedance
according to

249
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Zn = Vph / Iph
and three phase-to-phase loops according to
Zph-ph = Vph-ph / Iph-ph
The start operations from respective loop are binary coded into one word and provides
an output signal PLECND.
X

jX

Operation area

Operation area

RLd
LdAngle

LdAngle

R
R

LdAngle

LdAngle
RLd

Operation area

No operation area

No operation area

en06000414_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000414 V1 EN

Figure 129:

Influence on the characteristic by load encroachment logic

Outputs

The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic phase
selector activates the output signals PU_A, PU_B and PU_C. If a ground fault is
detected the signal PHG_FLT gets activated.
The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone
measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the
signal PHSCND. If only one phase is started (A, B or C), the corresponding phase-toground element is enabled. PHG_FLT is expected to be made available for two-phase
and three-phase faults for the correct output to be selected. The fault loop is indicated
by one of the decimal numbers below.
The output PHSCND provides release information from the phase selection part only.
DLECND provides release information from the load encroachment part only.
PLECND provides release information from the phase selection part and the load
encroachment part combined, that is, both parts have to issue a release at the same time
(this signal is normally not used in the zone measuring element). In these signals, each

250
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

fault type has an associated value, which represents the corresponding zone measuring
loop to be released. The values are presented in table 111.
0=

no faulted phases

1=

AG

2=

BG

3=

CG

4=

-ABG

5=

-BCG

6=

-CAG

7=

-ABCG

8=

-AB

9=

-BC

10=

-CA

11=

ABC

An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase-to-ground outputs are to
be asserted when the ground input G is not asserted.
The output signal PLECND is activated when the load encroachment is operating.
PLECNDis connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral impedance
measuring zones to be blocked. The signal must be connected to the input LDCND for
selected mho impedance measuring zones .
The load encroachment at the measuring zone must be activated to
release the blocking from the load encroachment function.

6.8.3

Function block
FMPSPDIS
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
ZSTART
TR3PH
1POLEAR

PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PHG_FLT
PHSCND
PLECND
DLECND
PICKUP
ANSI06000429-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000429 V2 EN

Figure 130:

FMPSPDIS (21) function block

251
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.8.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 112:

FMPSPDIS Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

ZSTART

BOOLEAN

Start from underimpdeance function

TR3PH

BOOLEAN

Three phase tripping initiated

1POLEAR

BOOLEAN

Single pole autoreclosing in progress

FMPSPDIS Output signals

Name

Table 114:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 113:

6.8.5

Default

Type

Description

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase C

PHG_FLT

BOOLEAN

Ground fault detected

PHSCND

INTEGER

Binary coded starts from phase selection

PLECND

INTEGER

Binary coded starts from ph sel with load encroachment

DLECND

INTEGER

Binary coded starts from load encroachment only

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Indicates that something has picked up

Setting parameters
FMPSPDIS Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

IMaxLoad

10 - 5000

%IB

200

Maximum load for identification of three

phase fault in % of IBase

RLd

1.00 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Load encroachment resistive reach in ohm/

phase

LdAngle

5 - 70

Deg

20

Load encroachment inclination of load

angular sector

252
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 115:

FMPSPDIS Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DeltaIMinOp

5 - 100

%IB

10

Delta current level in % of IBase

DeltaVMinOp

5 - 100

%VB

20

Delta voltage level in % of Vbase

V1Level

5 - 100

%VB

80

Pos seq voltage limit for identification of 3-ph

fault

I1LowLevel

5 - 200

%IB

10

Pos seq current level for identification of 3-ph

fault in % of IBase

V1MinOp

5 - 100

%VB

20

Minimum operate positive sequence voltage

for ph sel

V2MinOp

1 - 100

%VB

Minimum operate negative sequence voltage

for ph sel

INRelPG

10 - 100

%IB

20

3I0 limit for release ph-g measuring loops in

% of max phase current

3I0BLK_PP

10 - 100

%IB

40

3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase

measuring loops in % of max phase current

6.8.6

Technical data
Table 116:

FMPSPDIS (21) technical data

Function

6.9

Range or value

Accuracy

Minimum operate current

(5-30)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and
reverse

(0.53000) W/phase
(570) degrees

2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.11.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.530) x In
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic,

separate settings ZMRPDIS (21), ZMRAPDIS (21)
and ZDRDIR (21D)

253
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function description
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral
characteristic, separate settings (zone
1)

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMRPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

S00346 V1 EN

Distance protection zone, quadrilateral

characteristic, separate settings (zone
2-5)

ZMRAPDIS

21

S00346 V1 EN

Function description
Directional impedance quadrilateral

6.9.1

IEC 61850
identification
ZDRDIR

IEC 60617
identification
Z<->

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21D

Introduction
The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme protection with three fault
loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-ground fault for each
of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive
reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for transformer connected to
overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.
ZMRPDIS (21) together with Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable
angle FRPSPDIS (21) has functionality for load encroachment, which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure 48.

254
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X
Forward
operation

R
Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN

Figure 131:

Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Phase selection,

quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDIS (21)
activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built-in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single pole tripping and autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching of zone 1 at load
exporting end at phase-to-ground faults on heavily loaded power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines and so on.

6.9.2

Principle of operation

6.9.2.1

Full scheme measurement

The execution of the different fault loops within the IED are of full scheme type, which
means that each fault loop for phase-to-ground faults and phase-to-phase faults for
forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 49 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for up to five, impedancemeasuring zones. There are 3 to 5 zones depending on product type and variant.

255
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 1

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 2

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 3

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 4

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 5

A-G

B-G

C-G

A- B

B-C

C-A

Zone 6

ANSI05000458-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000458 V2 EN

Figure 132:

The different measuring loops at phase-to-ground fault and phase-tophase fault.

The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a pickup of an overreaching element to select correct
voltages and current depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs
like one independent distance protection IED with six measuring elements.

6.9.2.2

Impedance characteristic
The distance measuring zone includes six impedance measuring loops; three intended
for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as, threephase faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 50 and figure 51. The phase-to-ground
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per phase reach.

256
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X (Ohm/loop)
RFPG

R1+Rn

RFPG

Xn =

X1+Xn

Rn =

jn
RFPG

jn

X0-X1
3
R0-R1
3

R (Ohm/loop)

RFPG

X1+Xn

RFPG

R1+Rn

RFPG
ANSI05000661-3-en.vsd

ANSI05000661 V3 EN

Figure 133:

Characteristic for phase-to-ground measuring , ohm/loop domain

257
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

RFPP

(Ohm/phase)

R1PP

RFPP

X 0 PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE
PG- 1RVPG
X3
1XRVPE
XNRV
=
XNRV =
33
X
0
PE
--1X
11FWPE
X
0
PE
X 0 PG X
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW
XNFW
XNFW===
3 33

X1PP

R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP

RFPP

X1PP

RFPP
2

R1PP

RFPP
2

en07000062.vsd

IEC07000062 V2 EN

Figure 134:

Characteristic for phase-to-phase measuring

The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 52. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.

258
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

VA

Ip

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-ground
fault in phase A

Phase-to-ground
element

RFPG
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0

VA
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase A-B

IN

(R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )

IA

R1 + j X1

Phase-to-phase
element A-B
RFPP

IB

(Arc resistance)

VB
R1 + j X1

VA
Three-phase
fault

IA

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

R1 + j X1

0.5RFPP

Phase-to-phase
element A-C

IC
VC
ANSI05000181_2_en.vsd

ANSI05000181 V2 EN

Figure 135:

Fault loop model

The R1 and jX1 in figure 52 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The settings RFPG and RFPP are the eventual
fault resistances in the faulty place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 52, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The zone can be set to operate in Non-directional, Forward or Reverse direction
through the setting OperationDir. The result from respective set value is illustrated in
figure 53. The impedance reach is symmetric, in the sense that it conforms for forward
and reverse direction. Therefore, all reach settings apply to both directions.

259
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Non-directional

Forward

Reverse

en05000182.vsd
IEC05000182 V1 EN

Figure 136:

6.9.2.3

Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones

Minimum operating current

The operation of Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMRPDIS,
21) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents fall below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop AG (BG or CG) is blocked if IA (IB or IC) < IMinPUPG.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all phaseto-ground loops can be blocked when IN < IMinOpIR, regardless of the phase currents.
IA (IB or IC) is the RMS value of the current in phase IA (IB or IC). IN is the RMS
value of the vector sum of the three-phase currents, that is residual current 3I0.
The phase-to-phase loop AB (BC or CA) is blocked if IAB (BC or CA)< IMinPUPP.
All three current limits IMinPUPG, IMinOpIR and IMinPUPP are
automatically reduced to 75% of regular set values if the zone is set to
operate in reverse direction, that is OperationDir=Reverse

6.9.2.4

Measuring principles
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The

260
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

apparent impedances at phase-to-phase faults follow equation 1 (example for a phase A

to phase B fault).
Zapp =

VA - VB
IA - IB
(Equation 51)

EQUATION1545 V1 EN

Here V and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
The ground return compensation applies in a conventional manner to phase-to-ground
faults (example for a phase A to ground fault) according to equation 2.
Z app =

V_A
I _ A + IN KN
(Equation 52)

EQUATION1546 V1 EN

Where:
V_A, I_A and IN

are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED

KN is defined as:

KN =

Z0 - Z1
3 Z1

EQUATION-2105 V1 EN

Z 0 = R0 + jX 0
EQUATION2106 V1 EN

Z1 = R1 + jX 1
EQUATION2107 V1 EN

Where
R0

is setting of the resistive zero sequence reach

X0

is setting of the reactive zero sequence reach

R1

is setting of the resistive positive sequence reach

X1

is setting of the reactive positive sequence reach

Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in IED point. This results in the same reach
along the line for all types of faults.
261
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The apparent impedance is considered as an impedance loop with resistance R and

reactance X.
The formula given in equation 2 is only valid for radial feeder application without load.
When load is considered in the case of single phase-to-ground fault, conventional
distance protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end.
The IED has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such
applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (V), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought from
the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to the
loop impedance according to equation 3,
V =R i +

Di

w0 Dt
(Equation 53)

EQUATION1547 V1 EN

in complex notation, or:

Re (V ) = R Re (I ) +

X
w0

D Re (I )
Dt
(Equation 54)

EQUATION1548 V1 EN

Im (V ) = R Im (I ) +

X
w0

D Im (I )
Dt

EQUATION1549 V1 EN

(Equation 55)

with
w0 = 2 p f 0
EQUATION356 V1 EN

(Equation 56)

where:
Re

designates the real component of current and voltage,

Im

designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and

f0

designates the rated system frequency

262
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The algorithm calculates Rmmeasured resistance from the equation for the real value of
the voltage and substitutes it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation for
the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Rm =

Im (V) D Re (I) - Re (V) Dlm(I)

D Re (I) lm(I) - Dlm(I) Re (I)
(Equation 57)

EQUATION1550 V1 EN

X m = w0 D t

Re (V) lm(I) - lm(V ) Re (I)

D Re (I) lm(I) - Dlm(I) Re (I)
(Equation 58)

EQUATION1551 V1 EN

The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the IED point.

6.9.2.5

Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral
function ZDRDIR (21D). Equation 9 and equation 10 are used to classify that the fault
is in forward direction for phase-to-ground fault and phase-to-phase fault.
- ArgDir < arg

0.8 V 1L1 + 0.2 V 1L1 M

I L1

< ArgNeg Re s

EQUATION1552 V2 EN

(Equation 59)

For the AB element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

263
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

- ArgDir < arg

0.8 V 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 V 1L1 L 2 M

I L1 L 2

< ArgNeg Re s
(Equation 60)

EQUATION1553 V2 EN

where:
AngDir

is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees) and

AngNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 115 degrees, see figure 54.
V1A

is positive sequence phase voltage in phase A

V1AM

is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase A

IA

is phase current in phase A

V1AB

is voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

V1ABM

is memorized voltage difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

IAB

is current difference between phase A and B (B lagging A)

The setting of AngDir and AngNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (as shown in figure 54). It should not be changed unless system studies
have shown the necessity.
ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output
STDIRCND.
STDIR=

FWD_A*1+FWD_B*2+FWD_C*4+FWD_AB*8+
+FWD_BC*16+FWD_CA*32+REV_A*64+REV_B*128+REV_C*256+
+REV_AB*512+REV_BC*1024+REV_CA*2048

264
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

AngNegRes

AngDir

en05000722_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000722 V1 EN

Figure 137:

Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in

Directional impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR (21D)

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by

180 degrees.
The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds 5%
of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100ms the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

265
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.9.2.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

Simplified logic diagrams

Distance protection zones

The design of the distance protection zones are presented for all measuring loops: phaseto-ground as well as phase-to-phase.
Phase-to-ground related signals are designated by AG, BG and CG.. The phase-tophase signals are designated by AB, BC and CA.
Fulfillment of two different measuring conditions is necessary to obtain the one logical
signal for each separate measuring loop:

Zone measuring condition, which follows the operating equations described above.
Group functional input signal (PHSEL), as presented in figure 55.

The PHSEL input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FRPSPDIS (21) within the IED, which are converted within the zone measuring
function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition separately. Input
signal PHSEL is connected to FRPSPDIS (21) function output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals
depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It must be configured to the
STDIRCND output on directional function ZDRDIR (21D) function.

266
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

PUZMPP

OR

PHSEL

NDIR_AB

AB

AND

BC

AND

CA

AND

NDIR_CA

AG

AND

NDIR_A

BG

AND

NDIR_B

CG

AND

NDIR_BC

NDIR_C
STNDPE

OR

OR
LOVBZ
BLOCK

AND

OR
BLOCFUNC

PHPUND
BLK
ANSI99000557-1-en.vsd

ANSI99000557 V2 EN

Figure 138:

Conditioning by a group functional input signal PHSEL, external start

condition

Composition of the phase pickup signals for a case, when the zone operates in a nondirectional mode, is presented in figure 56.

267
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

NDIR_A

OR

NDIR_B
NIDR_C
NDIR_AB

OR

AND

0
15ms

AND

0
15ms

AND

0
15ms

AND

0
15ms

NDIR_BC
NDIR_CA

OR
OR

PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PICKUP

BLK
ANSI09000889-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000889 V1 EN

Figure 139:

Composition of pickup signals in non-directional operating mode

Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, as shown in figure 57.

268
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

NDIR_A
DIR_A

AND

AND

NDIR_C
DIR_C

AND

NDIR_AB
DIR_AB

AND

NDIR_BC
DIR_BC

AND

NDIR_CA
DIR_CA

PU_ZMPG

OR

NDIR_B
DIR_B

OR

OR

OR

AND

0
15 ms

AND

0
15 ms

AND

0
15 ms

AND

PU_A

PU_B

PU_C

PU_ZMPP

OR
BLK

OR

AND

PICKUP

0
15 ms

ANSI09000888-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000888 V2 EN

Figure 140:

Composition of pickup signals in directional operating mode

Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented in
figure 58.

269
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Timer tPP=enable
PUZMPP

tPP

AND

BLKFUNC

0-tPP
0

OR

Timer tPG=enable
PUZMPG

OR

tPG
0-tPG
0

AND

AND

BLKTR
BLK

AND

OR

AND
0
15 ms

TRIP

PU_A

AND

TR_A

PU_B

AND

TR_B

PU_C

AND

TR_C

ANSI09000887-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000887 V2 EN

Figure 141:

6.9.3

Tripping logic for the distance protection zone

Function block
ZMRPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
RI
BFI_A
BFI_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI08000248-1-en.vsd

ANSI08000248 V1 EN

Figure 142:

ZMRPDIS (21) function block

270
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

ZMRAPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKZ
BLKTR
PHSEL
DIRCND

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
BFI
PU_A
BFI_B
PU_C
PHPUND
ANSI08000290_1_en.vsd

ANSI08000290 V1 EN

Figure 143:

ZMRAPDIS (21) function block

ZDRDIR

I3P*
U3P*

STDIRCND

IEC09000639-1-en.vsd
IEC09000639 V1 EN

6.9.4

Input and output signals

Table 117:
Name

ZMRPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

PHSEL

INTEGER

Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase

selector

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 118:
Name

ZMRPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

RI

BOOLEAN

General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop

BFI_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

Table continues on next page

271
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Description

BFI_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

PHPUND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected

phase or loop

Table 119:
Name

ZMRAPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Blocks all output for LOV (or fuse failure) condition

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all trip outputs

PHSEL

INTEGER

Faulted phase loop selection enable from phase

selector

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 120:
Name

ZMRAPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General Trip, issued from any phase or loop

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

BFI

BOOLEAN

General Pickup, issued from any phase or loop

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

BFI_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

PHPUND

BOOLEAN

Non-directional pickup, issued from any selected

phase or loop

Table 121:
Name

ZDRDIR (21D) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

group connection for current abs 2

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

group connection for voltage abs 2

272
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 122:

ZDRDIR (21D) Output signals

Name

Type

STDIRCND

6.9.5
Table 123:

Description

INTEGER

Binary coded directional information per measuring loop

Setting parameters
ZMRPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation Disable / Enable

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current, i.e. rated current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage

OperationDir

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1PP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-Ph

R1PP

0.01 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

RFPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph

X1PG

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-G

R1PG

0.01 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-G

X0PG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G

R0PG

0.01 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle, Ph-G

RFPG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G

OperationPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhasePhase loops

Timer tPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhaseGround loops

Timer tPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-G

IMinPUPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

IMinPUPG

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

IMinOpIR

5 - 1000

%IB

Minimum operate residual current for PhaseGround loops

273
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

Table 124:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

ZMRAPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation Disable / Enable

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current, i.e. rated current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage

OperationDir

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Forward

Operation mode of directionality NonDir /

Forw / Rev

X1PP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-Ph

R1PP

0.01 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

RFPP

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-Ph

X1PG

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

30.00

Positive sequence reactance reach Ph-G

R1PG

0.01 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-G

X0PG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

100.00

Zero sequence reactance reach, Ph-G

R0PG

0.01 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle, Ph-G

RFPG

0.10 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach in ohm/loop, Ph-G

OperationPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhasePhase loops

Timer tPP

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-Ph

OperationPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of PhaseGround loops

Timer tPG

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of trip, Ph-G

IMinPUPP

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

IMinPUPG

10 - 1000

%IB

20

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

Table 125:
Name

ZDRDIR (21D) Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current level

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level

IMinPUPP

5 - 30

%IB

10

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

Table continues on next page

274
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IMinPUPG

5 - 30

%IB

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

AngNegRes

90 - 175

Deg

115

Angle of blinder in second quadrant for

forward direction

AngDir

5 - 45

Deg

15

Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant for forward

direction

6.9.6

Technical data
Table 126:

ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS (21) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Number of zones

Max 5 with selectable

direction

Minimum operate residual

current, zone 1

(5-1000)% of IBase

Minimum operate current, phaseto-phase and phase-to-ground

(10-1000)% of IBase

Positive sequence reactance

(0.10-3000.00) /
phase

Positive sequence resistance

(0.01-1000.00) /
phase

Zero sequence reactance

(0.10-9000.00) /
phase

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Zero sequence resistance

(0.01-3000.00) /
phase

Fault resistance, phase-toground

(0.10-9000.00) /loop

Fault resistance, phase-to-phase

(0.10-3000.00) /loop

Dynamic overreach

<5% at 85 degrees
measured with CVTs
and 0.5<SIR<30

Impedance zone timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time

24 ms typically

Reset ratio

105% typically

Reset time

30 ms typically

275
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

6.10

1MRK506312-UUS C

Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

settable angle FRPSPDIS (21)
Function description
Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with settable angle

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

FRPSPDIS

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
21

Z<phs
SYMBOL-DD V1 EN

6.10.1

Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and reinforcement of
the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get permission to build new
power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault,
so that single pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in
this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS
(21) is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance function
dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FRPSPDIS (21) has a built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive
setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with the
load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important information
about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.
A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously
measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set
values.

6.10.2

Principle of operation
The basic impedance algorithm for the operation of the phase selection measuring
elements is the same as for the distance zone measuring function. Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS, 21) includes six impedance
measuring loops; three intended for phase-to-ground faults, and three intended for phaseto-phase as well as for three-phase faults.

276
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The difference, compared to the distance zone measuring function, is in the

combination of the measuring quantities (currents and voltages) for different types of
faults.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but FRPSPDIS (21) uses information
from the directional function ZDRDIR to discriminate whether the fault is in forward
or reverse direction.
The pickup condition PHSELZ is essentially based on the following criteria:

Residual current criteria, that is, separation of faults with and without ground
connection
Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The current pickup condition PHSELI is based on the following criteria:

Residual current criteria

No quadrilateral impedance characteristic. The impedance reach outside the load
area is theoretically infinite. The practical reach, however, will be determined by
the minimum operating current limits.
Load encroachment characteristic is always active, but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.

The PHSELI output is non-directional. The directionality is determined by the distance

zones directional function ZDRDIR.
There are output from FRPSPDIS (21) that indicate whether a pickup is in forward or
reverse direction or non-directional, for example FWD_A, REV_A and NDIR_A.
These directional indications are based on the sector boundaries of the directional
function and the impedance setting of FRPSPDIS (21) function. Their operating
characteristics are illustrated in figure 76.

277
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

60

60

R
60

R
60

Non-directional (ND)

Forward (FWD)

Reverse (REV)
en05000668_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000668 V1 EN

Figure 144:

Characteristics for non-directional, forward and reverse operation of

Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS, 21)

The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment".
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming
from the directional function ZDRDIR (21D). It shall be connected to the STDIR
output on ZDRDIR (21D). This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND
on the distance measuring zones, that is, the ZMRPDIS (21) block.
The code built up for the directionality is as follows:
STDIR=

FWD_A*1+FWD_B*4+FWD_C*16+FWD_AB*64+
+FWD_BC*256+FWD_CA*1024+REV_A*2+REV_B*8+REV_C*32+
+REV_AB*128+REV_BC*512+REV_CA*2048

If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have pickup in forward
direction in phase A. If the binary code is 3 then we have pickup in forward direction
in phase A and B etc.
The or PHSEL output contains, in a similar way as DIRCND, binary coded
information, in this case information about the condition for opening correct fault loop
in the distance measuring element. It shall be connected to the PHSEL input on the
ZMRPDIS distance measuring zones (21) block.
The code built up for release of the measuring fault loops is as follows:
278
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

PHSEL = AG*1+BG*2+CG*4+AB*8+BC*16+CA*32

6.10.2.1

Phase-to-ground fault
Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase
selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS,
21).

ZPHSn =

VA( B , C )
IA( B , C )

(Equation 61)

EQUATION1554 V1 EN

where:
n

corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)

The characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) function at phase-to-ground fault is according to

figure 77. The characteristic has a settable angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 70.
The resistance RN and reactance XN are the impedance in the ground-return path
defined according to equation 24 and equation 25.
RN =

R 0 PE - R1PE
3

EQUATION-2125 V1 EN

(Equation 62)

R0 - R1
RN =
3
EQUATION1256 V1 EN

XN =

(Equation 62)

X 0 - X1
3

EQUATION1257 V1 EN

(Equation 63)

279
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X (ohm/loop)
R1PE+RN
RFRvPE

RFFwPE

X1+XN
RFFwPE
R (Ohm/loop)

RFRvPE

X1+XN

RFFwPE

RFRvPE
R1PE+RN

IEC09000633-1-en.vsd
IEC09000633 V1 EN

Figure 145:

Characteristic of FRPSPDIS (21) for phase to fault (directional lines

are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")

Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to equation 24
and equation 25.
3 I0 0.5 IMinOpPE
(Equation 64)

EQUATION2108 V1 EN

3 I0

3I 0 Enable _ PG
100

Iph max
(Equation 65)

EQUATION1812-ANSI V1 EN

where:

IMinOpPE

is the minimum operation current for forward zones

3I0Enable_PG is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-toground fault loops (in %).
Iphmax

is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.

280
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.10.2.2

Phase-to-phase fault
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured impedance by FRPSPDIS (21) is according to
equation 26.
ZPHS =

Vm - Vn
-2 In
(Equation 66)

EQUATION1813-ANSI V1 EN

Vm is the leading phase voltage, Vn the lagging phase voltage and In the phase current
in the lagging phase n.
The operation characteristic is shown in figure 78.
X (ohm/phase)
0.5FRvPP

R1PP 0.5RFFwPP

X1

0.5RFFwPP

R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPP

0.5RFRvPP

R1PP

X1

0.5RFFwPP

IEC09000634-1-en.vsd

IEC09000634 V1 EN

Figure 146:

The operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) at phase-to-phase

fault (directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line")

281
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

In the same way as the condition for phase-to-ground fault, there are current conditions
that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are
according to equation 27 or equation 28.
3I 0 < 3I 0Enable _ PG

(Equation 67)

EQUATION1814-ANSI V1 EN

3I 0 < 3I 0BLK _ PP
(Equation 68)

EQUATION1815-ANSI V1 EN

where:

3I0Enable_PG is the minimum operation current for forward ground measuring loops,

6.10.2.3

3I0BLK_PP

is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and

Iphmax

is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.

Three-phase faults
The operation conditions for three-phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase
fault, that is equation 26, equation 27 and equation 28 are used to release the operation
of the function.
However, the reach is expanded by a factor 2/3 (approximately 1.1547) in all
directions. At the same time the characteristic is rotated 30 degrees, counter-clockwise.
The characteristic is shown in figure 79.

282
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X (ohm/phase)
4 X1PP
3

0.5RFFwPPK3
X1K3

30 deg

RFwPP

2
3

R (ohm/phase)
0.5RFRvPPK3
K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)

30 deg

IEC09000635-1-en.vsd
IEC09000635 V2 EN

Figure 147:

6.10.2.4

The characteristic of FRPSPDIS (21) for three-phase fault (set angle 70)

Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load encroachment characteristic based on
the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 81. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the
sector is the same in all four quadrants.

283
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

RLdFwd
LdAngle

LdAngle

LdAngle

RLdRev

LdAngle

en05000196_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000196 V1 EN

Figure 148:

Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is

dependent on the chosen operation mode of FRPSPDIS (21) function. When output
signal PHSELZ is selected, the characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) (and also zone
measurement depending on settings) will be reduced by the load encroachment
characteristic, see figure 82.
When output signal PHSELI is selected, the operation characteristic will be as in
figure 81. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current and
the distance measuring zones.

284
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

PHSELZ

DLECND
ANSI10000099-1-en.vsd

ANSI10000099 V1 EN

Figure 149:

Difference in operating characteristic depending on operation mode

when load encroachment is activated

When FRPSPDIS (21) is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look like in figure 82. The figure shows a distance
measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of the zone
together with the load encroachment is highlighted in black.

285
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic
R
Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN

Figure 150:

Operating characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment

is activated

Figure 82 is valid for phase-to-ground. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
quadrilateral phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the
operate area is transformed according to figure 83. Notice in particular what happens
with the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone. Due to the 30degree rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100 degrees instead of
the original 70 degrees (if the angle setting is 70 degrees). The blinder that is nominally
located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt outwards and increase the resistive
reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or less necessary to use the load
encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the load impedance.

286
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

X (W /

phase)

Phase selection
Quadrilateral zone

Distance measuring zone

R (W /

phase)

IEC09000049-1-en.vsd
IEC09000049 V1 EN

Figure 151:

Operating characteristic for FRPSPDIS (21) in forward direction for

three-phase fault, ohm/phase domain

The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is
presented in fig 84. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as
the quadrilateral characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic
clockwise by 30 degrees when subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time
the characteristic will "shrink" by 2/3, from the full RLdFw and RLdRv reach, which
is valid at load or three-phase fault.

287
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC08000437.vsd
IEC08000437 V1 EN

Figure 152:

Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases

There is a gain in selectivity by using the same measurement as for the quadrilateral
characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be fully affected by a fault
between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive coverage in quadrant
one. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant four should not be a
problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

6.10.2.5

Minimum operate currents

The operation of Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle
(FRPSPDIS, 21) is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls below certain
threshold values.
The phase-to-ground loop n is blocked if In<IMinPUPG, where In is the RMS value of
the current in phase n (A or B or C).
The phase-to-phase loop mn is blocked if (2In<IMinOpPPIMinPUPP).

288
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.10.2.6

Simplified logic diagrams

Figure 85 presents schematically the creation of the phase-to-phase and phase-toground operating conditions. Consider only the corresponding part of measuring and
logic circuits, when only a phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase measurement is
available within the IED.

Load encroachment block

3 I 0 0.5 IMinPUPG

3I 0

3 I 0 Enable _ PG
100

IRELPG
0
15ms

AND

Iphmax

Bool to
integer

BLOCK

3I 0 < IMinPUPG

AND
AND

3I 0 <

3 I 0 BLK _ PP
100

STPG

10ms
0

0
20ms

0
15ms

AND

DLECND

STPP
IRELPP

Iph max
ANSI09000149-2-en.vsd

ANSI09000149 V2 EN

Figure 153:

Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground operating conditions (residual

current criteria)

A special attention is paid to correct phase selection at evolving faults. A PHSEL

output signal is created as a combination of the load encroachment characteristic and
current criteria, refer to figure 85. This signal can be configured to STCND functional
input signals of the distance protection zone and this way influence the operation of the
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring elements and their phase related
pickup and tripping signals.
Figure 86 presents schematically the composition of non-directional phase selective
signals NDIR_A (B or C). Internal signals ZMn and ZMmn (m and n change between
A, B and C according to the phase) represent the fulfilled operating criteria for each
separate loop measuring element, that is within the characteristic.

289
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

INDIR_A
INDIR_B
INDIR_3

OR

0
15 ms

OR

0
15 ms

OR

0
15 ms

OR

0
15 ms

PHSEL_G

IRELPG
ZMA
ZMB
ZMC
ZMAB
ZMBC3
ZMCA
IRELPP

AND
AND
AND

AND
AND

PHSEL_A

PHSEL_B

PHSEL_C

INDIR_AB
INDIR_BC

AND

INDIR_CA
OR

0
15 ms

PHSEL_PP

ANSI00000545-3-en.vsd
ANSI00000545 V3 EN

Figure 154:

Composition on non-directional phase selection signals

Composition of the directional (forward and reverse) phase selective signals is

presented schematically in figure 87 and figure 88. The directional criteria appears as a
condition for the correct phase selection in order to secure a high phase selectivity for
simultaneous and evolving faults on lines within the complex network configurations.
Internal signals DFWLn and DFWLnLm present the corresponding directional signals
for measuring loops with phases Ln and Lm. Designation FW (figure 88) represents
the forward direction as well as the designation RV (figure 87) represents the reverse
direction. All directional signals are derived within the corresponding digital signal
processor.
Figure 87 presents additionally a composition of a PHSELZ output signal, which is
created on the basis of impedance measuring conditions. This signal can be configured
to PHSEL functional input signals of the distance protection zone and this way
influence the operation of the phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground zone measuring
elements and their phase related pickup and tripping signals.

290
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

INDIR_A
DRV_A

AND

INDIR_AB
DRV_AB

AND

OR

15 ms
t

REV_A

OR

15 ms
t

REV_G

OR

15 ms
t

REV_B

INDIR_CA
DRV_CA

AND

INDIR_B
DRV_B

AND

INDIR_AB
AND
INDIR_BC
DRV_BC

INDIR_A
INDIR_B
INDIR_C
INDIR_AB
INDIR_BC
INDIR_CA

AND

INDIR_C
DRV_C

AND

INDIR_BC

Bool to
integer

PHSELZ

15 ms
AND

OR

INDIR_CA
AND

15 ms
OR

REV_C

REV_PP

ANSI00000546-2-en.vsd
ANSI00000546 V2 EN

Figure 155:

Composition of phase selection signals for reverse direction

291
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

AND
INDIR_A
DFW_A

AND

AND

OR

INDIR_AB
DFW_AB

AND

OR

INDIR_CA
DFW_CA

OR
AND

FWD_IPH

0
15 ms

FWD_A

0
15 ms

FWD_G

0
15 ms

FWD_B

0
15 ms

FWD_2PH

0
15 ms

FWD_C

0
15 ms

FWD_3PH

AND

INDIR_AB
AND

OR

INDIR_BC
DFW_BC

0
15 ms

AND

AND

INDIR_B
DFW_B

15 ms
0

AND
AND

OR

15 ms
0

INDIR_C
DFW_C

AND

AND

INDIR_BC
AND

OR

INDIR_CA

AND
AND

OR

FWD_PP

0
15 ms

ANSI05000201-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000201 V3 EN

Figure 156:

Composition of phase selection signals for forward direction

Figure89 presents the composition of output signals TRIP and START, where internal
signals STNDPP, STFWPP and STRVPP are the equivalent to internal signals
STNDPE, STFWPE and STRVPE, but for the phase-to-phase loops.

292
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

TimerPP=Disabled

tPP
t

AND
OR

TimerPE=Disabled

tPE
t

AND

AND
OR

TRIP

AND

STNDPP
STFWPP

OR

STRVPP
OR

STNDPE
STFWPE

RI

OR

STRVPE

ANSI08000441 1-1-en.vsd
ANSI08000441-1 V1 EN

Figure 157:

TRIP and START signal logic

293
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.10.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
FRPSPDIS (21)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
DIRCND

TRIP
BFI
FWD_A
FWD_B
FWD_C
FWD_G
REV_A
REV_B
REV_C
REV_G
NDIR_A
NDIR_B
NDIR_C
NDIR_G
FWD_1PH
FWD_2PH
FWD_3PH
PHG_FLT
PHPH_FLT
PHSELZ
DLECND
ANSI08000430-2-en.vsd

ANSI08000430 V2 EN

Figure 158:

6.10.4

FRPSPDIS (21) function block

Input and output signals

Table 127:
Name

FRPSPDIS (21) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

DIRCND

INTEGER

External directional condition

Table 128:
Name

FRPSPDIS (21) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip by pilot communication scheme logic

BFI

BOOLEAN

Start in any phase or loop

FWD_A

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phaseA - forward direction

FWD_B

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase B - forward direction

FWD_C

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase C - forward direction

FWD_G

BOOLEAN

Ground fault detected in forward direction

REV_A

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase A- reverse direction

Table continues on next page

294
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

6.10.5
Table 129:

Type

Description

REV_B

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase B - reverse direction

REV_C

BOOLEAN

Fault detected in phase C - reverse direction

REV_G

BOOLEAN

Ground fault detected in reverse direction

NDIR_A

BOOLEAN

Non directional fault detected in Phase A

NDIR_B

BOOLEAN

Non directional fault detected in Phase B

NDIR_C

BOOLEAN

Non directional fault detected in Phase C

NDIR_G

BOOLEAN

Non directional phase-to-ground fault detected

FWD_1PH

BOOLEAN

Single phase-to-ground fault in forward direction

FWD_2PH

BOOLEAN

Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction

FWD_3PH

BOOLEAN

Three phase fault in forward direction

PHG_FLT

BOOLEAN

Release condition to enable phase-ground measuring

elements

PHPH_FLT

BOOLEAN

Release condition to enable phase-phase measuring

elements

PHSELZ

INTEGER

21 pickup with load encroachment and 3I0

DLECND

INTEGER

Pickup for load encroachment and 3I0

Setting parameters
FRPSPDIS (21) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current, i.e. rated current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.01

400.00

Base voltage, i.e. rated voltage

3I0BLK_PP

10 - 100

%IPh

40

3I0 limit for disabling phase-to-phase

measuring loops

3I0Enable_PG

10 - 100

%IPh

20

3I0 pickup for releasing phase-to-ground

measuring loops

RLdFwd

1.00 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Forward resistive reach for the load

impedance area

RldRev

1.00 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

80.00

Reverse resistive reach for the load

impedance area

LdAngle

5 - 70

Deg

30

Load angle determining the load impedance

area

X1

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance reach

R1PP

0.10 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

15.00

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-Ph

X1FwPG

0.10 - 1000.00

ohm/p

0.01

1.50

Positive seq. resistance for characteristic

angle, Ph-G

X0

0.50 - 9000.00

ohm/p

0.01

120.00

Zero sequence reactance reach

Table continues on next page

295
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Step

Default

R0PG

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/p

0.01

5.00

Zero seq. resistance for zone characteristic

angle, Ph-G

RFltFwdPP

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, forward

RFltRevPP

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm/l

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-Ph, reverse

RFltFwdPG

1.00 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, forward

RFltRevPG

1.00 - 9000.00

ohm/l

0.01

100.00

Fault resistance reach, Ph-G, reverse

IMinPUPP

5 - 500

%IB

10

Minimum pickup delta current (2 x current of

lagging phase) for Phase-to-phase loops

IMinPUPG

5 - 500

%IB

Minimum pickup phase current for Phase-toground loops

Table 130:
Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

FRPSPDIS (21) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TimerPP

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation mode Disable/Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-Ph

tPP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Time delay to trip, Ph-Ph

TimerPE

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation mode Disable/ Enable of Zone

timer, Ph-G

tPG

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Time delay to trip, Ph-E

6.10.6

Technical data
Table 131:

FRPSPDIS (21) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Minimum operate current

(5-500)% of IBase

Reactive reach, positive

sequence

(0.503000.00) /phase

Resistive reach, positive

sequence

(0.101000.00) /phase

Reactive reach, zero sequence

(0.509000.00) /phase

Resistive reach, zero sequence

(0.503000.00) /phase

2.0% static accuracy

2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x In
Current range: (0.5-30) x IBase
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees

Fault resistance, phase-toground faults, forward and

reverse

(1.009000.00) /loop

Fault resistance, phase-tophase faults, forward and reverse

(0.503000.00) /loop

Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and
reverse
Safety load impedance angle

(1.003000.00) /phase
(5-70) degrees

Reset ratio

105% typically

296
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.11

Power swing detection ZMRPSB (68)

Function description
Power swing detection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ZMRPSB

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
68

Zpsb
SYMBOL-EE V1 EN

6.11.1

Introduction
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big generation
plants.
Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB, 68) is used to detect power swings and
initiate block of selected distance protection zones. Occurrence of ground-fault
currents during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB (68) function to allow fault
clearance.

6.11.2

Principle of operation
Power swing detection (ZMRPSB ,68) function comprises an inner and an outer
quadrilateral measurement characteristic with load encroachment, as shown in
figure 159.
Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power
swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and
the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than a
transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is the
same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the
characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately.
One-out-of-three or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to the
specific system operating conditions.

297
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

jX

X1OutFw
X1InFw

DRv

ZL

R1LIn

D Fw
j

R1FInRv

R1FInFw

D Fw

LdAngle

LdAngle

DRv

D Fw
D Fw

R
D Fw

DRv

D Fw

RLdInRv RLdInFw

DRv
j

RLdOutRv RLdOutFw

D Rv

X1InRv
X1OutRv
ANSI05000175-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000175 V2 EN

Figure 159:

Operating characteristic for ZMRPSB (68) function (setting parameters

in italic)

The impedance measurement within ZMRPSB (68) function is performed by solving

equation 69 and equation 70 (Typical equations are for phase A, similar equations are
applicable for phases B and C).
VA
Re
Rset
IA
EQUATION1557 V1 EN

(Equation 69)

VA
Im
Xset
IA
EQUATION1558 V1 EN

(Equation 70)

The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries.

298
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.11.2.1

Resistive reach in forward direction

To avoid load encroachment, the resistive reach is limited in forward direction by
setting the parameter RLdOutFw which is the outer resistive load boundary value while
the inner resistive boundary is calculated according to equation 71.

RLdInFw = kLdRFwRLdOutFw
EQUATION1185 V2 EN

(Equation 71)

where:

kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting the
parameter LdAngle.
The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first
quadrant (same LdAngle and RLdOutFw and calculated value RLdInFw).
The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation to
the distance measuring zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from
the setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the
inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by
the parameter R1FInFw.
From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.

6.11.2.2

Resistive reach in reverse direction

To avoid load encroachment in reverse direction, the resistive reach is limited by
setting the parameter RLdOutRv for the outer boundary of the load encroachment zone.
The distance to the inner resistive load boundary RLdInRv is determined by using the
setting parameter kLdRRv in equation 72.

RLdInRv = kLdRRvRLdOutRv
EQUATION1187 V2 EN

(Equation 72)

where:

kLdRRv is a settable multiplication factor less than 1

299
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv, a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant.
The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load encroachment
part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner boundary. The outer
boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.
The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment
zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The
angle of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted lines in
the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the same as for
the load encroachment in reverse direction, that is DRv.

6.11.2.3

Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,
where:
DFw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw RLdOutFw

The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined as
X1InRv + DRv.
where:
DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv RLdOutRv

6.11.2.4

Basic detection logic

The operation of the Power swing detection ZMRPSB (68) is only released if the
magnitude of the current is above the setting of the min operating current, IMinPUPG.
ZMRPSB (68) function can operate in two operating modes:

The 1 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the
three phases. Figure 160 presents a composition of an internal detection signal DETA in this particular phase.
The 2 out of 3 operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two
out of three phases. Figure 161 presents a composition of the detection signals
DET1of3 and DET2of3.

300
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Signals ZOUT_n (outer boundary) and ZIN_n (inner boundary) in figure 160 are
related to the operation of the impedance measuring elements in each phase separately
(n represents the corresponding A, B and C). They are internal signals, calculated by
ZMRPSB (68) function.
The tP1 timer in figure 160 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are
usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the
detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area
and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of
figure 160 (internal input signal ZOUT_A, ZIN_A, AND-gates and tP-timers) are
duplicated for phase B and C. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same settings.
ZOUTA
ZINA

0-tP1
0

AND

AND

OR
-loop

-loop

0-tP2
0

OR

AND

ZOUTB
ZOUTC

detected

AND

DET-A

OR

0
0-tW
ANSI05000113-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000113 V2 EN

Figure 160:

DET-A
DET-B
DET-C

Detection of power swing in phase A

DET1of3 - int.

OR

AND
AND

OR

DET2of3 - int.

AND

ANSI01000057-2-en.vsd
ANSI01000057 V2 EN

Figure 161:

Detection of power swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode

301
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

ZOUT_A

ZOUT

OR

ZOUT_B

ZIN_A

ZOUT_C

ZIN

OR

ZIN_B

AND

ZIN_C
TRSP

0
0-tGF

AND

I0CHECK
10ms
0

AND

BLK_I0

OR

0-tR1
0

AND

INHIBIT

OR

-loop
0-tR2
0

AND

BLK_SS
BLOCK

-loop
DET1of3 - int.
REL1PH
BLK1PH
DET2of3 - int.
REL2PH
BLK2PH

AND
OR
AND

0
0-tH
OR

AND

PICKUP

EXT_PSD
en05000114-1-ansi.vsd
ANSI05000114 V2 EN

Figure 162:

6.11.2.5

Simplified block diagram for ZMRPSB (68) function

Operating and inhibit conditions

Figure 162 presents a simplified logic diagram for the Power swing detection function
ZMRPSB (68). The internal signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic
diagrams in figure 160 and figure 161 respectively.
Selection of the operating mode is possible by the proper configuration of the
functional input signals REL1PH, BLK1PH, REL2PH, and BLK2PH.
The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter
OperationLdCh = Disabled, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated
from RLdOutFw and RLdOutRv. The characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral.
There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:

302
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.11.3

Logical 1 on functional input BLOCK inhibits the output PICKUP signal

instantaneously.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated, if the power swing has been detected and
the measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic for the time,
which is longer than the time delay set on tR2 timer. It is possible to disable this
condition by connecting the logical 1 signal to the BLK_SS functional input.
The INHIBIT internal signal is activated after the time delay, set on tR1 timer, if
an ground-fault appears during the power swing (input IOCHECK is high) and the
power swing has been detected before the ground-fault (activation of the signal
I0CHECK). It is possible to disable this condition by connecting the logical 1
signal to the BLK_I0 functional input.
The INHIBIT logical signals becomes logical 1, if the functional input I0CHECK
appears within the time delay, set on tGF timer and the impedance has been seen
within the outer characteristic of ZMRPSB (68) operate characteristic in all three
phases. This function prevents the operation of ZMRPSB (68) function in cases,
when the circuit breaker closes onto persistent single-pole fault after single-pole
autoreclosing dead time, if the initial single-pole fault and single-pole opening of
the circuit breaker causes the power swing in the remaining two phases.

Function block
ZMRPSB (68)
I3P*
PICKUP
V3P*
ZOUT
BLOCK
ZIN
BLK_SS
BLK_I0
BLK1PH
REL1PH
BLK2PH
REL2PH
I0CHECK
TRSP
EXT_PSD
ANSI06000264-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000264 V2 EN

Figure 163:

ZMRPSB (68) function block

303
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.11.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 132:

ZMRPSB (68) Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLK_SS

BOOLEAN

Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition

BLK_I0

BOOLEAN

Block inhibit of start output for subsequent residual

current detection

BLK1PH

BOOLEAN

Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode

REL1PH

BOOLEAN

Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode

BLK2PH

BOOLEAN

Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode

REL2PH

BOOLEAN

Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode

I0CHECK

BOOLEAN

Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit power

swing detection output

TRSP

BOOLEAN

Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping

function

EXT_PSD

BOOLEAN

Input for external detection of power swing

ZMRPSB (68) Output signals

Name

Table 134:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 133:

6.11.5

Default

Type

Description

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Power swing detected

ZOUT

BOOLEAN

Measured impedance within outer impedance boundary

ZIN

BOOLEAN

Measured impedance within inner impedance boundary

Setting parameters
ZMRPSB (68) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disbled/Enabled operation

X1InFw

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm

0.01

30.00

Inner reactive boundary, forward

R1LIn

0.10 - 1000.00

ohm

0.01

30.00

Line resistance for inner characteristic angle

R1FInFw

0.10 - 1000.00

ohm

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance coverage to inner resistive

line, forward

X1InRv

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm

0.01

30.00

Inner reactive boundary, reverse

Table continues on next page

304
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Step

Default

R1FInRv

0.10 - 1000.00

ohm

0.01

30.00

Fault resistance line to inner resistive

boundary, reverse

OperationLdCh

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation of load discrimination characteristic

RLdOutFw

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm

0.01

30.00

Outer resistive load boundary, forward

LdAngle

5 - 70

Deg

25

Load angle determining load impedance area

RLdOutRv

0.10 - 3000.00

ohm

0.01

30.00

Outer resistive load boundary, reverse

kLdRFw

0.50 - 0.90

Mult

0.01

0.75

Multiplication factor for inner resistive load

boundary, forward

kLdRRv

0.50 - 0.90

Mult

0.01

0.75

Multiplication factor for inner resistive load

boundary, reverse

tGF

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Timer for overcoming single-pole reclosing

dead time

IMinPUPG

5 - 30

%IB

10

Minimum operate current in % of IBase

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current level settings

Table 135:

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

ZMRPSB (68) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tP1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.045

Timer for detection of initial power swing

tP2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.015

Timer for detection of subsequent power

swings

tW

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.250

Waiting timer for activation of tP2 timer

tH

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.500

Timer for holding power swing PICKUP output

tR1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

Timer giving delay to inhibit by the residual

current

tR2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Timer giving delay to inhibit at very slow swing

6.11.6

Step

Default

Description

Technical data
Table 136:
Function

ZMRPSB (68) technical data

Range or value

Reactive reach

(0.10-3000.00) W/phase

Resistive reach

(0.101000.00) W/loop

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

Accuracy
2.0% static accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
degrees
0.5% 10 ms

305
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

6.12

1MRK506312-UUS C

Power swing logic ZMRPSL

Function description
Power swing logic

6.12.1

IEC 61850
identification
ZMRPSL

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
Power Swing Logic (ZMRPSL) is a complementary function to Power Swing
Detection (ZMRPSB,68) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of faults
on power lines during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the
distance protection function should normally be blocked. The complete logic consists
of two different parts:

Communication and tripping part: provides selective tripping on the basis of

special distance protection zones and a scheme communication logic, which are
not blocked during the system oscillations.
Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of instantaneous distance protection
zone 1 for oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the
adjacent power lines and other primary elements.

6.12.2

Principle of operation

6.12.2.1

Communication and tripping logic

Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection
zones is schematically presented in figure 164.

306
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

PUDOG
AR1P1

AND

PUPSD
BLOCK

AND

0-tCS
0

CS

AND

CSUR

AND
0-tTrip
0

PLTR_CRD
CR

BLKZMUR

0
0-tBlkTr

AND

OR

TRIP

en06000236_ansi.en
ANSI06000236 V1 EN

Figure 164:

Simplified logic diagram power swing communication and tripping logic

The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the BLOCK
functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the PUDOG functional input
signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by the logical one on
the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal BLKZMUR remains
logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally (BLOCK is logical zero)
and the ground-fault is detected on protected line (PUDOG is logical one), which is
connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero). Timer tBlkTr prolongs the
duration of this blocking condition, if the measured impedance remains within the
operate area of the Power Swing Detection (ZMRPSB, 68) function (PUPSD input
active). The BLKZMUR can be used to block the operation of the power-swing zones.
Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP
functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output
CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates the
TRIP functional output.
Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the PUPSD input has been
active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS.
Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals CACC and CR (local trip
condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not blocked by
one of the above conditions and the PUPSD signal has been present longer then the
time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.

307
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.12.2.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Blocking logic
Figure 165 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the
underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their clearance
on the remote power lines.

AND
BLKZMOR

AND
PUZMUR
BLOCK
PUZMOR
PUZMPSD
PUPSD

AND

0-tZL
0

AND

0-tDZ
0

AND

OR

PUZMURPS

OR

AND
-loop

en06000237_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000237 V1 EN

Figure 165:

Control of underreaching distance protection (Zone 1) at power swings

caused by the faults and their clearance on adjacent lines and other
system elements

The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional input BLOCK. It can start only if
the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:

PUPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that Power
swing detection (ZMRPSB, 68) function must not detect power swinging over the
protected power line.
PUZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the impedance
must be detected within the external boundary of ZMRPSB (68) function.
PUZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault must
be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example zone 2.

The PUZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic
instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following
conditions:

308
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

If the PUZMUR signal appears at the same time as the PUZMOR or if it appears
with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer tDZ.
If the PUZMUR signal appears after the PUZMOR signal with a time delay longer
than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the time delay
set on the tZL timer.

The functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the higher distance
protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area after tDZ time delay.

6.12.3

Function block
ZMRPSL
BLOCK
PUZMUR
PUZMOR
PUPSD
PUDOG
PUZMPSD
PLTR_CRD
AR1P1
CSUR
CR

TRIP
PUZMURPS
BLKZMUR
BLKZMOR
CS

ANSI07000026-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000026 V2 EN

Figure 166:

6.12.4

ZMRPSL function block

Input and output signals

Table 137:
Name

ZMRPSL Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PUZMUR

BOOLEAN

Pickup of the underreaching zone

PUZMOR

BOOLEAN

Pickup of the overreaching zone

PUPSD

BOOLEAN

Power swing detected

PUDOG

BOOLEAN

Pickup from ground Fault Protection in forward or

reverse direction

PUZMPSD

BOOLEAN

Operation of Power Swing Detection external

characteristic

PLTR_CRD

BOOLEAN

Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated

AR1P1

BOOLEAN

Single pole auto-reclosing in progress

CSUR

BOOLEAN

Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing zone

CR

BOOLEAN

Carrier receive signal during power swing detection

operation

309
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 138:

ZMRPSL Output signals

Name

6.12.5
Table 139:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip through Power Swing Logic

PUZMURPS

BOOLEAN

Pickup of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to be

used in configuration

BLKZMUR

BOOLEAN

Block trip of underreaching impedance zone

BLKZMOR

BOOLEAN

Block trip of overreaching distance protection zones

CS

BOOLEAN

Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing

Setting parameters
ZMRPSL Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

tDZ

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.050

Permitted max oper time diff between higher

and lower zone

tDZMUR

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Delay for oper of underreach zone with

detected diff in oper time

tCS

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Conditional timer for sending the CS at power

swings

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Conditional timer for tripping at power swings

tBlkTr

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

Timer for blocking the overreaching zones trip

6.13

6.13.1

Pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Pole slip protection

PSPPPAM

IEC 60617
identification
Ucos

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
78

Introduction
Sudden events in an electrical power system such as large changes in load, fault
occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power swings.
In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the
synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of the
pole slip protection (PSPPPAM ,78) is to detect, evaluate, and take the required action
for pole slipping occurrences in the power system. The electrical system parts swinging

310
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

to each other can be separated with the line/s closest to the centre of the power swing
allowing the two systems to be stable as separated islands.

6.13.2

Principle of operation
If the generator is faster than the power system, the rotor movement in the impedance
and voltage diagram is from right to left and generating is signalled. If the generator is
slower than the power system, the rotor movement is from left to right and motoring is
signalled (the power system drives the generator as if it were a motor).
The movements in the impedance plain can be seen in figure 167. The transient
behaviour is described by the transient EMF's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the
transient system impedance ZS.

311
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Zone 1
EB

Zone 2

Xd

XT

XS

IED

EA

jX

A
XS

Pole slip
impedance
movement

XT

Apparent generator
impedance

Xd
B

IEC06000437_2_en.vsd
IEC06000437 V2 EN

Figure 167:

Movements in the impedance plain

where:
X'd

= transient reactance of the generator

XT

= short-circuit reactance of the step-up transformer

ZS

= impedance of the power system A

The detection of rotor angle is enabled when:

312
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 VBase
the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular
velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
the corresponding direction is not blocked.

en07000004.vsd
IEC07000004 V1 EN

Figure 168:

Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the

equivalent generators

An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds
the angle set for 'WarnAngle'.
Slipping is detected when:

a change of rotor angle of min. 50 ms is recognized

the slip line is crossed between ZA and ZB.

When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in zone
1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone 1 when
signal EXTZONE1 is high (external device detects the direction of the centre of slipping).

313
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

After the first slip, the signals ZONE1 or ZONE2 and depending on the direction of
slip - either GEN or MOTOR are issued.
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line is
crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.
Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor
movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in the
opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within ZA-ZB
resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.
The TRIP1 tripping command and signal are generated after N1 slips in zone 1,
providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle. The TRIP2 signal is generated after
N2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than TripAngle.
All signals are reset if:

the direction of movement reverses

the rotor angle detector resets without a slip being counted or
no rotor relative movement was detected during the time ResetTime.

314
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Imin > 0.10 IBase

Vcosj < 0.92 VBase

AND
PICKUP

AND

0.2 Slip.Freq. 8 Hz

d startAngle
ZONE1

AND

Z cross line ZA - ZC

ZONE2

AND

Z cross line ZC - ZB

Counter
N1Limit

a
b

ab

d tripAngle

OR
Counter

N2Limit

TRIP1

AND

a
b ab

AND

TRIP

TRIP2

en07000005_ansi.vsd
ANSI07000005 V1 EN

Figure 169:

Simplified logic diagram for pole slip protection PSPPPAM (78)

315
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.13.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
PSPPPAM (78)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRIP1
BLOCK
TRIP2
BLKGEN
PICKUP
BLKMOTOR
ZONE1
EXTZONE1
ZONE2
GEN
MOTOR
SFREQ
SLIPZOHM
SLIPZPER
VCOS
VCOSPER
ANSI10000045-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000045 V1 EN

Figure 170:

6.13.4

PSPPPAM (78) function block

Input and output signals

Table 140:
Name

PSPPPAM (78) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Current group connection

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage group connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKGEN

BOOLEAN

Block operation in generating direction

BLKMOTOR

BOOLEAN

Block operation in motor direction

EXTZONE1

BOOLEAN

Extension of zone1 with zone2 region

Table 141:
Name

PSPPPAM (78) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

TRIP1

BOOLEAN

Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1

TRIP2

BOOLEAN

Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Common start signal

ZONE1

BOOLEAN

First slip in zone1 region

ZONE2

BOOLEAN

First slip in zone2 region

GEN

BOOLEAN

Generator is faster than the system

MOTOR

BOOLEAN

Generator is slower than the system

SFREQ

REAL

Slip frequency

Table continues on next page

316
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

6.13.5
Table 142:

Type

Description

SLIPZOHM

REAL

Slip impedance in ohms

SLIPZPER

REAL

Slip impedance in percent of ZBase

VCOS

REAL

UCosPhi voltage

VCOSPER

REAL

VCosPhi voltage in percent of VBase

Setting parameters
PSPPPAM (78) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable / Disable

OperationZ1

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation Enable/Disable zone Z1

OperationZ2

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation Enable/Disable zone Z2

ImpedanceZA

0.00 - 1000.00

0.01

10.00

Forward impedance in % of Zbase

ImpedanceZB

0.00 - 1000.00

0.01

10.00

Reverse impedance in % of Zbase

ImpedanceZC

0.00 - 1000.00

0.01

10.00

Impedance of zone1 limit in % of Zbase

AnglePhi

72.00 - 90.00

Deg

0.01

85.00

Angle of the slip impedance line

StartAngle

0.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

110.0

Rotor angle for the pickup signal

TripAngle

0.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

90.0

Rotor angle for the trip1 and trip2 signals

N1Limit

1 - 20

Count limit for the trip1 signal

N2Limit

1 - 20

Count limit for the trip2 signal

Table 143:

PSPPPAM (78) Group settings (advanced)

Name
ResetTime

Values (Range)

Unit

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
5.000

Description
Time without slip to reset all signals

317
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

Table 144:

1MRK506312-UUS C

PSPPPAM (78) Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

IBase

0.1 - 99999.9

0.1

3000.0

Base Current (primary phase current in

Amperes)

Vbase

0.1 - 9999.9

kV

0.1

20.0

Base Voltage (primary phase-to-phase

voltage in kV)

MeasureMode

PosSeq
AB
BC
CA

PosSeq

Measuring mode (PosSeq, AB, BC, CA)

InvertCTcurr

No
Yes

No

Invert current direction

6.13.6

Technical data
Table 145:

PSPPPAM (78) technical data

Function

6.14

Range or value

Accuracy

Impedance reach

(0.001000.00)% of Zbase

2.0% of Vn/In

Characteristic angle

(72.0090.00) degrees

5.0 degrees

Start and trip angles

(0.0180.0) degrees

5.0 degrees

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters

(1-20)

Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current

based ZCVPSOF
Function description
Automatic switch onto fault logic,
voltage and current based

6.14.1

Description

IEC 61850
identification
ZCVPSOF

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (ZCVPSOF) is a function
that gives an instantaneous trip at closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection
check is provided to activate the function when the line is dead.
Mho distance protections can not operate for switch onto fault condition when the
phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on VI Level is used for this
purpose.

318
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.14.2

Principle of operation
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based function (ZCVPSOF) can
be activated externally by Breaker Closed Input or internally (automatically) by using
VI Level Based Logic see figure 171.
The activation from the Dead line detection function is released if the internal signal
deadLine from the VILevel function is activated at the same time as the input ZACC is
not activated during at least for a duration tDLD and the setting parameter AutoInit is
set to Enabled.
When the setting AutoInit is Disabled, the function is activated by an external binary
input BC. To get a trip one of the following operation modes must also be selected by
the parameter Mode:
Mode = Impedance; trip is released if the input ZACC is activated (normal connected
to non directional distance protection zone).
Mode = VILevel; trip is released if VILevel detector is activated.
Mode = VILvl&Imp; trip is initiated based on impedance measured criteria or VILevel
detection.
The internal signal deadLine from the VILevel detector is activated if all three phase
currents and voltages are below the setting IPhPickup and UVPickup.
VI Level based measurement detects the switch onto fault condition even though the
voltage is very low. The logic is based on current and voltage levels. The internal
signal SOTF VILevel is activated if a phase voltage is below the setting UVPickup and
corresponding phase current is above the setting IPhPickup longer than the time
tDuration.
ZCVPSOF can be activated externally from input BC and thus setting AutoInit is
bypassed.
The function is released during a settable time tSOTF.
The function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

319
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

BLOCK
AND

TRIP

15

BC

AutiInit=On
ZACC

AND

IL1

OR

200
0

0
1000

deadLine

IL2
IL3
VA

VILevel detector

VB
VC
IphPickup

SOTFVILevel

VphPickup

AND

Mode = Impedance

AND

Mode = UILevel

OR

OR

Mode = UILvl&Imp

AND

en07000084_ansi.vsd

ANSI07000084 V1 EN

Figure 171:

Simplified logic diagram for Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage
and current based.

320
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

6.14.3

Function block
ZCVPSOF
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BC
ZACC

TRIP

ANSI06000459-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000459 V2 EN

Figure 172:

6.14.4

ZCVPSOF function block

Input and output signals

Table 146:

ZCVPSOF Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Current DFT

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage DFT

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BC

BOOLEAN

External enabling of SOTF

ZACC

BOOLEAN

Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF

ZCVPSOF Output signals

Name

Type

TRIP

Table 148:

Description

I3P

Table 147:

6.14.5

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Trip by pilot communication scheme logic

Setting parameters
ZCVPSOF Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current (A)

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage Ph-Ph (kV)

Mode

Impedance
VILevel
VILvl&Imp

VILevel

Mode of operation of SOTF Function

AutoInit

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Automatic switch onto fault initialization

Table continues on next page

321
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IphPickup

1 - 100

%IB

20

Current level for detection of dead line in % of

IBase

UVPickup

1 - 100

%VB

70

Voltage level for detection of dead line in % of

VBase

tDuration

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Time delay for VI detection (s)

tSOTF

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Drop off delay time of switch onto fault function

tDLD

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Delay time for activation of dead line detection

6.14.6

Technical data
Table 149:

ZCVPSOF technical data

Parameter

6.15

Accuracy

(1100)% of

0.5% of Vn

Operate current, detection of dead line

(1100)% of

1.0% of In

Delay following dead line detection input before

Automatic switch into fault logic function is
automatically enabled

(0.00060.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Time period after circuit breaker closure in which

Automatic switch into fault logic function is active

(0.00060.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

VBase
IBase

Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ

Function description
Phase preference logic

6.15.1

Range or value

Operate voltage, detection of dead line

IEC 61850
identification
PPLPHIZ

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is intended to be used in isolated or high
impedance grounded networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the
faulty lines at cross-country fault.
Phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single phase-to-ground faults in isolated
and high impedance grounded networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by
distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or the
lagging phase-ground loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred fault

322
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference

combinations are available for selection.

6.15.2

Principle of operation
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ has 10 operation modes, which can be set by the
parameter OperMode. The different modes and their explanation are shown in
table 150 below. The difference between cyclic and acyclic operation can be explained
by the following example. Assume a A fault on one line and a C fault on another line.
For OperMode = 1231c the line with C fault will be tripped (C before A) while for
OperMode = 123a the line with A 1 fault will be tripped (A before C).
Table 150:
OperMode

Operation modes for Phase preference logic

Description

No filter

No filter, phase-to-phase measuring loops are not blocked during single phase-toground faults. Tripping is allowed without any particular phase preference at crosscountry faults

No pref

No preference, trip is blocked during single phase-to-ground faults, trip is

allowed without any particular phase preference at cross-country fault

1231 c

Cyclic 1231c; A before B before C before C

1321 c

Cyclic 1321c; A before C before B before A

123 a

Acyclic 123a; A before B beforeC

132 a

Acyclic 132a;A before C beforeB

213 a

Acyclic 213a; B before A before C

231 a

Acyclic 231a; B before C beforeA

312 a

Acyclic 312a; C before B beforeA

321 a

Acyclic 321a; C before B before A

The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled voltage and current
discrimination and the second one labeled phase preference evaluation, see figure 173.
The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty
phases and to determine if there is a cross-country fault. If cross-country fault is
detected, an internal signal Detected cross-country fault is created and sent to the
phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the condition
for trip.
The voltage and current discrimination part gives phase segregated pickup signals if
the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting parameter PU27PN at the
same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting parameter 3V0Pickup. If
there is a pickup in any phase the PICKUP output signal will be activated.

323
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The internal signal for detection of cross-country fault, DetectCrossCountry, that come
from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be achieved in
three different ways:
1.
2.

3.

The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter Pickup_N for a time
longer than the setting of pick-up timer tIN.
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter Pickup_N at the same
time as the magnitude of 3V0 has been above the setting parameter 3V0Pickup
during a time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tVN.
The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter Pickup_N at the same
time as one of the following conditions are fulfilled:

the measured phase-to-phase voltage in at least one of the phase

combinations has been below the setting parameter PU27PP for more than
20 ms.
At least two of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter PU27PN
for more than 20 ms.

The second part, phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal
DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the input
signal PHSEL together with phase selection pickup condition (from phase selection
functions) connected to input PHSEL, and the information from the setting parameter
OperMode are used to determine the condition for trip. To release the Phase preference
logic, at least two out of three phases must be faulty. The fault classification whether it
is a single phase-to-ground, two-phase or cross-country fault and which phase to be
tripped at cross-country fault is converted into a binary coded signal and sent to the
distance protection measuring zone to release the correct measuring zone according to
the setting of OperMode. This is done by activating the output ZREL and it shall be
connected to the input PHSEL on the distance zone measuring element.
The release signals from phase selection will only be gated with the cross-country
check from IN and VN but without time delay. If no phase selection start has occurred,
the release is based on current and voltage discriminating part only.
The input signal PHSEL consist of binary information of fault type and is connected to
the output PHSEL on phase selection function. The fault must be activated in at least
two phases to be classified as a cross-country fault in the phase preference part of the
logic.
The input signals RELxxx are additional fault release signals that can be connected to
external protection functions through binary input.
The output BFI_3P and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK

324
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

VA
VB
VC

VAVB
VBVC
VCVA
IN

Voltage and
Current
Discrimination

VN
PU27PN

BFI_3P

AND

PU27PP
Pickup_N

Detect CrossCountry fault

3VOPU

OperMode
RELAG

Phase Preference
Evaluation

RELBG

ZREL

AND

RELCG
PHSEL

BLOCK

ANSI09000220-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000220 V1 EN

Figure 173:

6.15.3

Simplified block diagram for Phase preference logic

Function block
PPLPHIZ
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
RELAG
RELBG
RELCG
PHSEL

BFI_3P
ZREL

ANSI07000029-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000029 V2 EN

Figure 174:

PPLPHIZ function block

325
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection
6.15.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 151:

PPLPHIZ Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

RELAG

BOOLEAN

Release condition for the A to ground loop

RELBG

BOOLEAN

Release condition for the B to ground loop

RELCG

BOOLEAN

Release condition for the C to ground loop

PHSEL

INTEGER

Integer coded external release signals

PPLPHIZ Output signals

Name

Table 153:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 152:

6.15.5

Default

Type

Description

BFI_3P

BOOLEAN

Indicates start for ground fault(s), regardless of direction

ZREL

INTEGER

Integer coded output release signal

Setting parameters
PPLPHIZ Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.01

400.00

Base voltage

OperMode

No Filter
NoPref
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a

No Filter

Operating mode (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)

PU27PN

10 - 100

%VB

70

Operate value of 27P in % of VBase/sqrt(3)

PU27PP

10 - 100

%VB

50

Pickup value of line to line undervoltage (% of

VBase)

3V0PU

5 - 300

%VB

20

Operate value of residual voltage in % VBase/

sqrt(3)

Pickup_N

10 - 200

%IB

20

Pickup value of residual current (% of IBase)

Table continues on next page

326
Technical reference manual

Section 6
Impedance protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tVN

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Pickup-delay for residual voltage

tOffVN

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Dropoff-delay for residual voltage

tIN

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Pickup-delay for residual current

Table 154:

Step

Default

Description

PPLPHIZ technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, phase-to-phase

and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage

(10.0 - 100.0)% of VBase

0,5% of Vn

Reset ratio, undervoltage

< 105%

Operate value, residual voltage

(5.0 - 70.0)% of VBase

0,5% of Vn

Reset ratio, residual voltage

> 95%

Operate value, residual current

(10 - 200)% of IBase

1,0% of In for I < In

1,0% of I for I > In

Reset ratio, residual current

> 95%

Timers

(0.000 - 60.000) s

0,5% 10 ms

Operating mode

No Filter, NoPref
Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a,
312a, 321a

327
Technical reference manual

328

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 7

Current protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions like
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection,
Pole discrepancy protection and Residual overcurrent protection.

7.1

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase

output PHPIOC (50)
Function description
Instantaneous phase overcurrent
protection 3-phase output

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

PHPIOC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50

3I>>
SYMBOL-Z V1 EN

7.1.1

Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function.

7.1.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. The RMS value of each phase current is derived from the fundamental
frequency components, as well as sampled values of each phase current. These phase
current values are fed to the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 3-phase output
function PHPIOC (50). In a comparator the RMS values are compared to the set
operation current value of the function Pickup. If a phase current is larger than the set
operation current a signal from the comparator for this phase is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the output signal TR_x(x=A, B or C) for this phase and the
TRIP signal that is common for all three phases.

329
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

There is an operation mode (OpModeSel) setting: 1 out of 3 or 2 out of 3. If the

parameter is set to 1 out of 3 any phase trip signal will be activated. If the parameter is
set to 2 out of 3 at least two phase signals must be activated for trip.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(MultPU) via a binary input (MULTPU). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
PHPIOC (50) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.

7.1.3

Function block
PHPIOC (50)
I3P*
BLOCK
MULTPU

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
ANSI04000391-2-en.vsd

ANSI04000391 V2 EN

Figure 175:

7.1.4

PHPIOC (50) function block

Input and output signals

Table 155:
Name

PHPIOC (50) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase current

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

MULTPU

BOOLEAN

Enable current pickup value multiplier

Table 156:
Name

PHPIOC (50) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from any phase

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

330
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.1.5
Table 157:

Setting parameters
PHPIOC (50) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current

OpModeSel

2 out of 3
1 out of 3

1 out of 3

Select operation mode (2 of 3 / 1 of 3)

Pickup

1 - 2500

%IB

200

Phase current pickup in % of IBase

Table 158:

PHPIOC (50) Group settings (advanced)

Name
MultPU

7.1.6

Values (Range)
0.5 - 5.0

Unit

Step

0.1

1.0

Description
Multiplier for operate current level

Technical data
Table 159:

PHPIOC (50) technical data

Function

7.2

Default

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current

(1-2500)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio

> 95%

Operate time

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Reset time

25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Operate time

10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Reset time

35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset

Critical impulse time

2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Dynamic overreach

< 5% at t = 100 ms

Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC

(51/67)

331
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function description
Four step phase overcurrent protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

OC4PTOC

3I>
4
4

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51/67

alt

TOC-REVA V1 EN

7.2.1

Introduction
The four step phase overcurrent protection function OC4PTOC (51/67) has
independent inverse time delay settings for step 1 and 4. Step 2 and 3 are always
definite time delayed.
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined time characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized with memory. The function can be set to
be directional or non-directional independently for each of the steps.
Second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function and can be used to block
each step individually

7.2.2

Principle of operation
The Four step phase overcurrent protection OC4PTOC (51/67) is divided into four
different sub-functions, one for each step. For each step x , where x is step 1, 2, 3 and
4, an operation mode is set by DirModeSelx: Disable/Non-directional/Forward/
Reverse.
The protection design can be decomposed in four parts:

The direction element

The harmonic Restraint Blocking function
The four step over current function
The mode selection
If VT inputs are not available or not connected, setting parameter
DirModeSelx shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

332
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

faultState

Direction
Element

I3P

dirPhAFlt
dirPhBFlt
dirPhCFlt

4 step over current

element
One element for each
step

faultState
PICKUP

V3P

TRIP

I3P

Harmonic
Restraint
Element

harmRestrBlock

enableDir
Mode Selection

enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

en05000740_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000740 V1 EN

Figure 176:

Functional overview of OC4PTOC (51/67)

A common setting for all steps, NumPhSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out of
3 or 3 out of 3.
The sampled analog phase currents are processed in a pre-processing function block.
Using a parameter setting MeasType within the general settings for the four step phase
overcurrent protection 3-phase output function OC4PTOC (51/67), it is possible to
select the type of the measurement used for all overcurrent stages. It is possible to
select either discrete Fourier filter (DFT) or true RMS filter (RMS).
If DFT option is selected then only the RMS value of the fundamental frequency
components of each phase current is derived. Influence of DC current component and
higher harmonic current components are almost completely suppressed. If RMS option
is selected then the true RMS values is used. The true RMS value in addition to the
fundamental frequency component includes the contribution from the current DC

333
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

component as well as from higher current harmonic. The selected current values are
fed to OC4PTOC (51/67).
In a comparator, for each phase current, the DFT or RMS values are compared to the
set operation current value of the function (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3, Pickup4). If a
phase current is larger than the set operation current, outputs PICKUP, PU_STx,
PU_A, PU_B and PU_C are, without delay, activated. Output signals PU_A, PU_B
and PU_C are common for all steps. This means that the lowest set step will initiate the
activation. The PICKUP signal is common for all three phases and all steps. It shall be
noted that the selection of measured value (DFT or RMS) do not influence the
operation of directional part of OC4PTOC (51/67) .
Service value for individually measured phase currents are also available on the local
HMI for OC4PTOC (51/67) function, which simplifies testing, commissioning and in
service operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from the
pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain
current level.
The function can be directional. The direction of the fault current is given as current
angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage for the
directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional measurement
at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization voltage is a
combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%). The
following combinations are used.
Phase-phase short circuit:

Vref _ AB = VA - VB

I dir _ AB = I A - I B
(Equation 73)

GUID-4F361BC7-6D91-47B5-8119-A27009C0AD6A V1 EN

Vref _ BC = VB - VC

I dir _ BC = I B - I C
(Equation 74)

ANSIEQUATION1450 V1 EN

Vref _ CA = VC - VA
ANSIEQUATION1451 V1 EN

I dir _ CA = IC - I A
(Equation 75)

Phase-ground short circuit:

Table continues on next page

334
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Vref _ A = VA

I dir _ A = I A
(Equation 76)

ANSIEQUATION1452 V1 EN

Vref _ B = VB

I dir _ B = I B
(Equation 77)

ANSIEQUATION1453 V1 EN

Vref _ C = VC

I dir _ C = I C

ANSIEQUATION1454 V1 EN

(Equation 78)

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive-sequence voltage exceeds

4% of the set base voltage VBase. So the directional element can use it for all
unsymmetrical faults including close-in faults.
For close-in three-phase faults, the V1AM memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.
After 100 ms, the following occurs:

If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals in.

If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.

If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.

If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function and
an angle window AngleROA.

335
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Reverse

Vref
RCA

ROA

ROA

Forward

Idir

en05000745_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000745 V1 EN

Figure 177:

Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is 65. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase pickup current signal can be set:
PUMinOpPhSel.
If no blockings are given the pickup signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or inverse time
characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics is available. It
is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The possibilities for inverse
time characteristics are described in section "Inverse characteristics".
All four steps in OC4PTOC (51/67) can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK.
The binary input BLKx (x=1, 2, 3 or 4) blocks the operation of respective step.

336
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Characteristx=DefTime

|IOP|

Pickupx

AND

OR

a>b

0-tx
0

TRx

STx

AND

0-txMin
0

BLKSTx

AND

BLOCK
Inverse

Characteristx=Inverse
OR

DirModeSelx=Disabled

STAGEx_DIR_Int

DirModeSelx=Non-directional
DirModeSelx=Forward
DirModeSelx=Reverse

FORWARD_Int

REVERSE_Int

AND

OR

AND

ANSI12000008-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000008-1-en.vsd
ANSI12000008 V1 EN

Figure 178:

Simplified logic diagram for OC4PTOC

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in section "Inverse

characteristics".
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (MultiPUx, x= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of the
set operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications the
operation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switching
state. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The pickup signals
from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLK. The trip signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.

337
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.2.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
OC4PTOC (51_67)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
BLOCK
TRST2
BLKTR
TRST3
BLK1
TRST4
BLK2
TR_A
BLK3
TR_B
BLK4
TR_C
MULTPU1
TRST1_A
MULTPU2
TRST1_B
MULTPU3
TRST1_C
MULTPU4
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
TRST3_A
TRST3_B
TRST3_C
TRST4_A
TRST4_B
TRST4_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST2
PU_ST3
PU_ST4
PU_A
PU_B
PU_C
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
PU_ST3_A
PU_ST3_B
PU_ST3_C
PU_ST4_A
PU_ST4_B
PU_ST4_C
2NDHARM
DIR_A
DIR_B
DIR_C
ANSI06000187-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000187 V2 EN

Figure 179:

7.2.4

OC4PTOC (51/67) function block

Input and output signals

Table 160:
Name

OC4PTOC (51_67) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

Table continues on next page

338
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

BLK1

BOOLEAN

Block of Step1

BLK2

BOOLEAN

Block of Step2

BLK3

BOOLEAN

Block of Step3

BLK4

BOOLEAN

Block of Step4

MULTPU1

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1

MULTPU2

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2

MULTPU3

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3

MULTPU4

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4

Table 161:
Name

OC4PTOC (51_67) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

TRST1

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step1

TRST2

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step2

TRST3

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step3

TRST4

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step4

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

TRST1_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase A

TRST1_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase B

TRST1_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase C

TRST2_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase A

TRST2_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase B

TRST2_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase C

TRST3_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step3 phase A

TRST3_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step3 phase B

TRST3_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step3 phase C

TRST4_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step4 phase A

TRST4_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step4 phase B

TRST4_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step4 phase C

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General pickup signal

PU_ST1

BOOLEAN

Common pickup signal from step1

PU_ST2

BOOLEAN

Common pickup signal from step2

PU_ST3

BOOLEAN

Common pickup signal from step3

Table continues on next page

339
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

7.2.5
Table 162:
Name

Type

Description

PU_ST4

BOOLEAN

Common pickup signal from step4

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

PU_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

PU_ST1_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step1 phase A

PU_ST1_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step1 phase B

PU_ST1_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step1 phase C

PU_ST2_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step2 phase A

PU_ST2_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step2 phase B

PU_ST2_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step2 phase C

PU_ST3_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step3 phase A

PU_ST3_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step3 phase B

PU_ST3_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step3 phase C

PU_ST4_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step4 phase A

PU_ST4_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step4 phase B

PU_ST4_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step4 phase C

2NDHARM

BOOLEAN

Block from second harmonic detection

DIR_A

INTEGER

Direction for phase A

DIR_B

INTEGER

Direction for phase B

DIR_C

INTEGER

Direction for phase C

Setting parameters
OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current

Vbase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

AngleRCA

40 - 65

Deg

55

Relay characteristic angle (RCA)

AngleROA

40 - 89

Deg

80

Relay operation angle (ROA)

NumPhSel

1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for phase

selection (1 of 3, 2 of 3, 3 of 3)

DirModeSel1

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Table continues on next page

340
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist1

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

Pickup1

1 - 2500

%IB

1000

Phase current operate level for step1 in % of

IBase

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Definitive time delay of step 1

TD1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 1

IMin1

1 - 10000

%IB

100

Minimum operate current for step1in% of IBase

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 1

MultPU1

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for current operate level for step 1

DirModeSel2

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 2 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist2

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

Pickup2

1 - 2500

%IB

500

Phase current operate level for step2 in % of

IBase

Table continues on next page

341
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

t2

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
0.400

Description
Definitive time delay of step 2

TD2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 2

IMin2

1 - 10000

%IB

50

Minimum operate current for step2 in % of

IBase

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 2

MultPU2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for current operate level for step 2

DirModeSel3

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 3 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist3

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 3

Pickup3

1 - 2500

%IB

250

Phase current operate level for step3 in % of

IBase

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

Definitive time delay of step 3

TD3

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 3

IMin3

1 - 10000

%IB

33

Minimum operate current for step3 in % of

IBase

t3Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 3

MultPU3

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for current operate level for step 3

DirModeSel4

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 4 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Table continues on next page

342
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist4

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 4

Pickup4

1 - 2500

%IB

175

Phase current operate level for step4 in % of

IBase

t4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Definitive time delay of step 4

TD4

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 4

IMin4

1 - 10000

%IB

17

Minimum operate current for step4 in % of

IBase

t4Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 4

MultPU4

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for current operate level for step 4

Table 163:

OC4PTOC (51_67) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

PUMinOpPhSel

1 - 100

%IB

Minimum current for phase selection in % of

IBase

2ndHarmStab

5 - 100

%IB

20

Pickup of second harm restraint in % of

Fundamental

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for step 1

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time

curve step 1

tPCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1

Table continues on next page

343
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 1

HarmRestrain1

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for step 2

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time

curve step 2

tPCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 2

HarmRestrain2

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for step 3

tReset3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time

curve step 3

tPCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for step 3

Table continues on next page

344
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 3

HarmRestrain3

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable block of step3 from harmonic restrain

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for step 4

tReset4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time

curve step 4

tPCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 4

HarmRestrain4

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain

Table 164:

OC4PTOC (51_67) Non group settings (basic)

Name
MeasType

Values (Range)
DFT
RMS

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
DFT

Description
Selection between DFT and RMS
measurement

345
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.2.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 165:

OC4PTOC (51/67)

Function

7.3

Setting range

Accuracy

Trip current

(5-2500)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio

> 95% at (502500)% of

Min. operating current

(1-10000)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In

Relay characteristic angle (RCA)

(40.065.0) degrees

2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA)

(40.089.0) degrees

2.0 degrees

2nd harmonic blocking

(5100)% of fundamental

2.0% of In

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x

Iset

(0.000-60.000) s

0.2 % or 35 ms whichever is
greater

Minimum trip time

(0.000-60.000) s

2.0 % or 40 ms whichever is
greater

Inverse characteristics, see

table 699, table 700 and table 701

16 curve types

See table 699, table 700 and table

701

Trip time, pickup non-directional

at 0 to 2 x Iset

Min. = 15 ms

Reset time, pickup non-directional

at 2 to 0 x Iset

Min. = 15 ms

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

lBase

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms

Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC

(50N)
Function description
Instantaneous residual overcurrent
protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

EFPIOC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50N

IN>>
IEF V1 EN

346
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.3.1

Introduction
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC (50N) has a low transient
overreach and short tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous ground-fault
protection, with the reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line at
minimum source impedance. EFPIOC (50N) can be configured to measure the residual
current from the three-phase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
EFPIOC (50N) can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.

7.3.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog residual currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter
(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of the residual current, as
well as from the sample values the equivalent RMS value is derived. This current value
is fed to the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC,50N). In a
comparator the RMS value is compared to the set operation current value of the
function (Pickup). If the residual current is larger than the set operation current a signal
from the comparator is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the output
signal TRIP.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via a
binary input (enable multiplier MULTPU). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
EFPIOC (50N) function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip
signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be
activated during single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.

7.3.3

Function block
EFPIOC (50N)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKAR
MULTPU

TRIP

ANSI06000269-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000269 V2 EN

Figure 180:

EFPIOC (50N) function block

347
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.3.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 166:

EFPIOC (50N) Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase currents

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKAR

BOOLEAN

Block from auto recloser

MULTPU

BOOLEAN

Enable current multiplier

EFPIOC (50N) Output signals

Name

Type

TRIP

Table 168:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 167:

7.3.5

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Trip signal

Setting parameters
EFPIOC (50N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current

Pickup

1 - 2500

%IB

200

Operate residual current level in % of IBase

Table 169:
Name
MultPU

7.3.6

EFPIOC (50N) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
0.5 - 5.0

Unit

Step

0.1

Default
1.0

Description
Multiplier for operate current level

Technical data
Table 170:

EFPIOC (50N) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current

(1-2500)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio

> 95%

Operate time

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Reset time

25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

Table continues on next page

348
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function

7.4

Range or value

Accuracy

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Operate time

10 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Reset time

35 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Iset

Critical impulse time

2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Dynamic overreach

< 5% at t = 100 ms

Four step residual overcurrent protection, zero,

negative sequence direction EF4PTOC (51N/67N)
Function description
Four step residual overcurrent
protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

EF4PTOC

IN
4
4

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51N/67N

alt

TEF-REVA V1 EN

7.4.1

Introduction
The four step residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC (51N/67N) has an inverse or
definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each
of the steps.
IDir, VPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either zero sequence or
negative sequence.
Second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each step.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be used as main protection for phase-to-ground faults.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the
case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.

349
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication

logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. Current reversal and weak-end
infeed functionality are available as well.
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) can be configured to measure the residual current from the threephase current inputs or the current from a separate current input.

7.4.2

Principle of operation
This function has the following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the
configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.

I3P, input used for Operating Quantity.

V3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity.
I3PPOL, input used for Current Polarizing Quantity.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in
the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

7.4.2.1

Operating quantity within the function

The function always uses Residual Current (3I0) for its operating quantity. The residual
current can be:
1.

directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600

to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input I3P). This dedicated IED CT input can be for example,
connected to:

2.

parallel connection of current instrument transformers in all three phases

(Holm-Green connection).
one single core balance, current instrument transformer (cable CT).
one single current instrument transformer located between power system
WYE point and ground (that is, current transformer located in the neutral
grounding of a WYE connected transformer winding).
one single current instrument transformer located between two parts of a
protected object (that is, current transformer located between two WYE
points of double WYE shunt capacitor bank).

calculated from three-phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
Analog Input I3P is not connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula (will

350
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

take I2 from same SMAI AI3P connected to I3PDIR input (same SMAI AI3P
connected to I3P input)):
If zero sequence current is selected,
I op = 3 Io = IA + IB + IC
(Equation 79)

EQUATION2011-ANSI V1 EN

where:
IA, IB, IC

are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the EF4PTOC (51N/67N) protection to compare it with the
set operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If
the residual current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in nondirectional mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal
will, without delay, activate the output signal PUSTx (x=step 1-4) for this step and a
common PICKUP signal.

7.4.2.2

Internal polarizing
A polarizing quantity is used within the protection in order to determine the direction
to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.

Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected the protection will use either the residual voltage
-3V0 or the negative sequence voltage -3V2 as polarizing quantity V3P.
This voltage can be:
1.

2.

directly measured (when a dedicated VT input of the IED is connected in PCM600

to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input V3P). This dedicated IED VT input shall be then connected to
open delta winding of a three phase main VT.
calculated from three phase voltage input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) analog
function input V3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate -3V2 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

351
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

VPol=3V0=(VA +VB +VC)

(Equation 81)

EQUATION2012 V1 EN

where:
VA, VB, VC

are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

In order to use this, all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED
VT inputs.

The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived.
This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating directional current, in
order to determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse). In order to
enable voltage polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a
minimum level defined by setting parameter VpolMin.
It shall be noted that residual voltage (-3V0) or negative sequence voltage (-3V2) is
used to determine the location of the ground fault. This insures the required inversion
of the polarizing voltage within the ground-fault function.

Current polarizing
When current polarizing is selected the function will use an external residual current
(3I0) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
1.

directly measured (when a dedicated CT input of the IED is connected in PCM600

to the fourth analog input of the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/
67N) function input I3PPOL). This dedicated IED CT input is then typically
connected to one single current transformer located between power system WYE
point and ground (current transformer located in the WYE point of a WYE
connected transformer winding).

2.

For some special line protection applications this dedicated IED CT input
can be connected to parallel connection of current transformers in all three
phases (Holm-Green connection).

calculated from three phase current input within the IED (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function
analog input I3PPOL is NOT connected to a dedicated CT input of the IED in
PCM600). In such case the pre-processing block will calculate 3I0 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:

352
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

I Pol = 3 Io = IA + IB + IC
EQUATION2019-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 83)

where:
IA, IB and IC are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus the phasor of the
fundamental frequency component of the polarizing current is derived. This phasor is
then multiplied with pre-set equivalent zero-sequence source Impedance in order to
calculate equivalent polarizing voltage VIPol in accordance with the following formula:
VIPol = Zo S I Pol = ( RNPol + j XNPOL ) I Pol
EQUATION2013-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 84)

which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to
determine the direction to the ground fault (Forward/Reverse).
In order to enable current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger
than a minimum level defined by setting parameter IPolMin.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
VTotPol = VVPol + VIPol = -3V0 + Z 0 s IPol = -3V0 + ( RNPol + jXNPol ) IPol
ANSIEQUATION1878 V1 EN

(Equation 85)

Vpol and Ipol can be either zero sequence component or negative sequence component
depending upon the user selection.
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the ground fault (Forward/
Reverse).

7.4.2.3

External polarizing for ground-fault function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKx to provide external
directional control (that is, torque control) by for example using one of the following
functions if available in the IED:
1.
2.

Distance protection directional function.

Negative sequence polarized General current and voltage multi purpose protection
function.
353

Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.4.2.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Base quantities within the protection

The base quantities shall be entered as setting parameters for everyground-fault
function. Base current (IBase) shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected
object in primary amperes. Base voltage (VBase) shall be entered as rated phase-tophase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

7.4.2.5

Internal ground-fault protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Four residual overcurrent steps.

Directional supervision element for residual overcurrent steps with integrated
directional comparison step for communication based ground-fault protection
schemes (permissive or blocking).
Second harmonic blocking element with additional feature for sealed-in blocking
during switching of parallel transformers.
Switch on to fault feature with integrated Under-Time logic for detection of
breaker problems during breaker opening or closing sequence.

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

7.4.2.6

Four residual overcurrent steps

Each overcurrent step uses operating quantity Iop (residual current) as measuring
quantity. Each of the four residual overcurrent steps has the following built-in facilities:

Directional mode can be set to Disabled/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse. By

this parameter setting the directional mode of the step is selected. It shall be noted
that the directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the residual
overcurrent step itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common
directional supervision element.
Residual current pickup value.
Type of operating characteristic (inverse or definite time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select inverse or definite time delay for the ground-fault
protection. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics are
available. For the complete list of available inverse curves please refer to section
"Inverse characteristics".
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset / ANSI Reset). By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the step. For the
complete list of available reset curves please refer to section "Inverse time
characteristics".

354
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite
time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and
parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (Enabled/Disabled). By this
parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the step if the second
harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the preset level.
Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary
signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup
value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent step is shown in figure 181.
BLKTR
IMinx

Characteristx=DefTime

a>b

tx

|IOP|

AND

TRSTx

OR

a>b

MultPUx

PUSTx

AND

T
F

Pickupx

AND

Inverse

tMin

BLKx
BLOCK

Characteristx=Inverse
2ndHarm_BLOCK_Int

OR

HarmRestrainx=Disabled
OR

DirModex=Off

STEPx_DIR_Int

DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
DirModex=Reverse

FORWARD_Int

REVERSE_Int

AND

OR

AND

ANSI10000008-1-en.vsd

ANSI10000008 V1 EN

Figure 181:

Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent step x, where x = step

1, 2, 3 or 4

The protection can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. Output
signals for respective step, and PUSTx and TRSTx, can be blocked from the binary
input BLKx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.

7.4.2.7

Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function
It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent steps
shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the directional
supervision element and the integrated directional comparison function.

355
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The protection has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current lop
is always used. The polarizinwcg method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:
1.
2.
3.

When polMethod = Voltage, VPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

When polMethod = Current, IPol will be used as polarizing quantity.
WhenpolMethod = Dual, VPol + IPol ZNPol will be used as polarizing quantity.

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 182, in order to determine the direction of the ground fault.

Operating area

PUREV
0.6 * INDirPU

Characteristic for reverse

release of measuring steps
-RCA -85 deg

Characteristic
for PUREV

40% of
INDirPU

RCA +85 deg

RCA
65

VPol = -3V0

-RCA +85 deg

RCA -85 deg

Characteristic for forward

release of measuring steps

INDirPU

PUFW
I op = 3I0
Operating area
Characteristic
for PUFW

ANSI11000243-1-en.ai

ANSI11000243 V1 EN

Figure 182:

Operating characteristic for ground-fault directional element using the

zero sequence components

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

356
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Directional element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as Iop is bigger

than 40% of IDirPU and directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA, which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, will set
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function output binary signals:
1.
2.

PUFW=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger

than setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects fault in
forward direction.
PUREV=1 when operating quantity magnitude Iop x cos( - AngleRCA) is bigger
than 60% of setting parameter IDirPU and directional supervision element detects
fault in reverse direction.

These signals shall be used for communication based ground-fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 183:

357
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

|IopDir|

a
a>b
b

0.6

PUREV

AND

REVERSE_Int

X
a
a>b

IDirPU

0.4

FORWARD_Int

PUFW

AND

FWD
polMethod=Voltage

OR

polMethod=Dual

VPolMin
VPol

polMethod=Current

OR
IPol
0.0
RNPol
XNPol

T
0.0 F

IPolMin
I3PDIR

AND

FORWARD_Int

AND

REVERSE_Int

Directional
Characteristic

AngleRCA

VTPol
RVS

T
F

Complex
Number

VIPol
0.0

T
F

STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int

OR
AND

BLOCK

ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd

ANSI07000067 V4 EN

Figure 183:

7.4.2.8

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step

Second harmonic blocking element

A harmonic restrain of four step residual overcurrent protection function EF4PTOC
can be chosen for each step by a parameter setting HarmRestrainx. If the ratio of the
2nd harmonic component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the
residual current exceeds the preset level (defined by parameter 2ndHarmStab) then
2NDHARMD function output signal is set to logical value one and harmonic
restraining feature to the function block will be applicable.
Blocking from 2nd harmonic element activates if all three criteria are satisfied:

358
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

1.
2.
3.

Current fundamental frequency component > IMinOpHarmBlk

Current second harmonic component > IMinOpHarmBlk
Ratio of the 2nd harmoinc component in relation to the fundamental frequency
component in the residual current exceeds the preset level defined parameter
2ndHarmStab setting

If all the above three conditions are fulfilled then 2NDHARMD function output signal
is set to logical value one and harmonic restraining feature to the function block is
applicable.
In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can be
set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be
required to stabilize EF4PTOC (51N67N) during switching of parallel transformers in
the station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current.
If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in,
the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial
saturation of the transformer already in service. This is called transferred saturation.
The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents of the two transformers is in phase opposition.
The summation of the two currents thus gives a small 2nd harmonic current. The
residual fundamental current is however significant. The inrush current of the
transformer in service before the parallel transformer energizing, is a little delayed
compared to the first transformer. Therefore we have high 2nd harmonic current
component initially. After a short period this current is however small and the normal
2nd harmonic blocking resets. If the BlkParTransf function is activated the 2nd
harmonic restrain signal is latched as long as the residual current measured by the relay
is larger than a selected step current level by using setting UseStartValue.
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-in
feature is activated when all of the following three conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
1.
2.
3.

Feature is enabled by entering setting parameter BlkParTransf = On.

Basic 2nd harmonic restraint feature has been active for at least 70ms.
Residual current magnitude is higher than the set pickup value for one of the four
residual overcurrent stages. By a parameter setting Use_PUValue it is possible to
select which one of the four pickup values that will be used (Pickup1 or Pickup2
or Pickup3 or Pickup4).

Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal is sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined by
parameter setting Use_PUValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in figure 184.

359
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

BLOCK
a
0.07*IBase

IOP

a>b

Extract second
harmonic current
component
Extract
fundamental
current component

a>b

2NDHARMD

AND
a>b

2ndHarmStab

q-1

0-70ms
0

OR
AND

OR

2ndH_BLOCK_Int

BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|

a>b

Use_PUValue
Pickup1>
Pickup2>
Pickup3>
Pickup4>

ANSI13000015-1-en.vsd
ANSI13000015 V1 EN

Figure 184:

7.4.2.9

Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers feature

Switch on to fault feature

Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic
(SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either
SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk
to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The
SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during
which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the
setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the pickup signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected
by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from

360
Technical reference manual

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 7
Current protection

change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The
setting parameter SOTFSel can be set for activation of CB position open change, CB
position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current pickup from
step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set delay tSOTF.
This delay is normally set to a short time (default 200 ms).
The Under-Time logic always uses the pickup signal from the step 4. The Under-Time
logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function.
The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This
enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker
closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately after
switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from change
in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command pulses. This
selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a pickup from step 4
this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is normally set to a
relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time logic acts as circuit
breaker pole-discrepancy protection, but it is only active immediately after breaker
switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in solidly or low impedance
grounded systems.

361
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

SOTF

Open
t4U
Closed

SOTFSel

Close command

tSOTF
AND

PUST2

AND

StepForSOTF

PUST3

OperationMode
BLOCK

Disabled
SOTF

UNDERTIME

Undertime

TRIP

tUnderTime
2nd Harmonic

EnHarmRestSOTF

AND

Undertime

OR

Open
OR

Close

t4U
Close command

ActUndrTimeSel

AND

PUST4
ANSI06000643-3.vsd
ANSI06000643 V3 EN

Figure 185:

Simplified logic diagram for SOTF and Under-Time features

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete
EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function is shown in figure 186:

362
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Directional Check
Element

INPol

Direction
Element

3V0

4
operatingCurrent
ground FaultDirection

3I0

step over current

element
One element for each
step

signal to
communication
scheme

TRIP

angleValid

DirModeSel
enableDir

3I0

Harmonic
Restraint
Element

harmRestrBlock

or

pickup step 2 , 3 and 4

Blocking at parallel
transformers
SwitchOnToFault

DirModeSel
Mode
Selection

enableDir

TRIP

CB
pos
or cmd

enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4

en 06000376_ ansi. vsd

ANSI06000376 V1 EN

Figure 186:

7.4.3

Functional overview of EF4PTOC (51N/67N)

Function block
EF4PTOC (51N67N)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
I3PPOL*
TRST2
BLOCK
TRST3
BLKTR
TRST4
BLK1
TRSOTF
BLK2
PICKUP
BLK3
PUST1
BLK4
PUST2
MULTPU1
PUST3
MULTPU2
PUST4
MULTPU3
PUSOTF
MULTPU4
PUFW
52A
PUREV
CLOSECMD
2NDHARMD
OPENCMD
ANSI06000424-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000424 V2 EN

Figure 187:

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) function block

363
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.4.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 171:
Name

EF4PTOC (51N67N) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three Phase Current Group Connection

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three Phase Voltage Group Connection

I3PPOL

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three Phase Polarisation Current

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

General block

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

BLK1

BOOLEAN

Block of step 1 (Pickup and trip)

BLK2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2 (Pickup and trip)

BLK3

BOOLEAN

Block of step 3 (Pickup and trip)

BLK4

BOOLEAN

Block of step 4 (Pickup and trip)

MULTPU1

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1

MULTPU2

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2

MULTPU3

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3

MULTPU4

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4

52a

BOOLEAN

Breaker position

CLOSECMD

BOOLEAN

Breaker close command

OPENCMD

BOOLEAN

Breaker open command

Table 172:
Name

EF4PTOC (51N67N) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

TRST1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 1

TRST2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 2

TRST3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 3

TRST4

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 4

TRSOTF

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from switch onto fault function

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General pickup signal

PUST1

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal step 1

PUST2

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal step 2

PUST3

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal step 3

PUST4

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal step 4

PUSOTF

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from switch onto fault function

Table continues on next page

364
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

7.4.5
Table 173:

Type

Description

PUFW

BOOLEAN

Forward directional pickup signal

PUREV

BOOLEAN

Reverse directional pickup signal

2NDHARMD

BOOLEAN

2nd harmonic block signal

Setting parameters
EF4PTOC (51N67N) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base value for current settings

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400

Base value for voltage settings

AngleRCA

-180 - 180

Deg

65

Relay characteristic angle (RCA)

polMethod

Voltage
Current
Dual

Voltage

Type of polarization

VPolMin

1 - 100

%VB

Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of

VBase

IPolMin

2 - 100

%IB

Minimum current level for polarization in % of

IBase

RNPol

0.50 - 1000.00

ohm

0.01

5.00

Real part of source Z to be used for current

polarisation

XNPol

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm

0.01

40.00

Imaginary part of source Z to be used for

current polarisation

INDirPU

1 - 100

%IB

10

Residual current level for directional element

in % of IBase

2ndHarmStab

5 - 100

20

Second harmonic restrain operation in % of

IN magnitude

BlkParTransf

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable blocking at parallel transformers

Use_PUValue

ST1
ST2
ST3
ST4

ST4

Current pickup blocking at parallel transf

(step1, 2, 3 or 4)

SOTF

Disabled
SOTF
UnderTime
SOTF&UnderTime

Disabled

SOTF operation mode (Off/SOTF/Undertime/

SOTF&Undertime)

SOTFSel

Open
Closed
CloseCommand

Open

Select signal that shall activate SOTF

StepForSOTF

Step 2
Step 3

Step 2

Selection of step used for SOTF

Table continues on next page

365
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Step

Default

Description

EnHarmRestSOTF

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable harmonic restrain function in SOTF

tSOTF

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Time delay for SOTF

t4U

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Switch-onto-fault active time

ActUndrTimeSel

CB position
CB command

CB position

Select signal to activate under time (CB Pos/

CBCommand)

tUnderTime

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

Time delay for under time

DirModeSel1

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist1

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 1

Pickup1

1 - 2500

%IB

100

Residual current pickup for step 1 in % of IBase

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1

TD1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for step 1

IMin1

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

100.00

Minimum current for step 1

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 1

MultPU1

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step 1

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 1

HarmRestrain1

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable block of step 1 from harmonic restrain

tPCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1

Table continues on next page

366
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 1

DirModeSel2

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 2 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist2

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 2

Pickup2

1 - 2500

%IB

50

Residual current pickup for step 2 in % of IBase

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2

TD2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for step 2

IMin2

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

50

Minimum current for step 2

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves step

2

MultPU2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for step 2

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step 2

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 2

Table continues on next page

367
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Step

Default

Description

HarmRestrain2

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable block of step 2 from harmonic restrain

tPCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 2

DirModeSel3

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 3 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist3

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 3

Pickup3

1 - 2500

%IB

33

Residual current pickup for step 3 in % of IBase

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

Independent time delay of step 3

TD3

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for step 3

IMin3

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

33

Minimum current for step 3

t3Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 3

MultPU3

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for step 3

Table continues on next page

368
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step 3

tReset3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 3

HarmRestrain3

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable block of step 3 from harmonic restrain

tPCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve step 3

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve step 3

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve step 3

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 3

DirModeSel4

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 4 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist4

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 4

Pickup4

1 - 2500

%IB

17

Residual current pickup for step 4 in % of IBase

t4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.200

Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4

TD4

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for step 4

IMin4

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

17

Minimum current for step 4

t4Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4

Table continues on next page

369
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MultPU4

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for step 4

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step 4

tReset4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 4

HarmRestrain4

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable block of step 4 from harmonic restrain

tPCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve step 4

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve step 4

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve step 4

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve step 4

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve step 4

7.4.6

Technical data
Table 174:

EF4PTOC (51N/67N) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current

(1-2500)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I < In
1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio

> 95%

Operate current for directional

comparison

(1100)% of lBase

1.0% of In

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Inverse characteristics, see

table 699, table 700 and table 701

18 curve types

See table 699, table 700 and

table 701

Second harmonic restrain

operation

(5100)% of fundamental

2.0% of In

Relay characteristic angle

(-180 to 180) degrees

2.0 degrees

Minimum polarizing voltage

(1100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Minimum polarizing current

(1-30)% of IBase

0.25 % of In

Real part of source Z used for

current polarization

(0.50-1000.00) W/phase

Table continues on next page

370
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function

7.5

Range or value

Accuracy

Imaginary part of source Z used

for current polarization

(0.503000.00) W/phase

Operate time, pickup function

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Reset time, pickup function

25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2)
Function description
Four step negative sequence
overcurrent protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2

device number

NS4PTOC

I2

46I2

4
4

alt

IEC10000053 V1 EN

7.5.1

Introduction
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC, (4612) ) has an inverse
or definite time delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.
The directional function is voltage polarized or dual polarized.
NS4PTOC (4612) can be set directional or non-directional independently for each of
the steps.
NS4PTOC (4612) can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase
short circuits, phase-phase-ground short circuits and single phase ground faults.
NS4PTOC (4612) can also be used to provide a system back-up for example, in the
case of the primary protection being out of service due to communication or voltage
transformer circuit failure.
Directional operation can be combined together with corresponding communication
logic in permissive or blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for
371

Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

directional zero sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weak-end infeed
functionality are available.

7.5.2

Principle of operation
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) function has the
following three Analog Inputs on its function block in the configuration tool:
1.
2.
3.

I3P, input used for Operating Quantity.

V3P, input used for Voltage Polarizing Quantity.
I3PPOL, input used for Polarizing Quantity.

These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks in
the Configuration Tool within PCM600.

7.5.2.1

Operating quantity within the function

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (46I2) function always
uses negative sequence current (I2) for its operating quantity. The negative sequence
current is calculated from three-phase current input within the IED. The pre-processing
block calculates I2 from the first three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the
following formula:
I2 =

1
3

IA + a IB + a IC
2

)
(Equation 86)

ANSIEQUATION2266 V1 EN

where:
IA, IB, IC

are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.

is so called operator which gives a phase shift of 120 deg, that is, a = 1120 deg

a2

similarly gives a phase shift of 240 deg, that is, a2 = 1240 deg

The negative sequence current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus, the
phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the negative sequence current is
derived. The phasor magnitude is used within the NS4PTOC (4612) protection to
compare it with the set operation current value of the four steps (Pickup1, Pickup2,
Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the negative sequence current is larger than the set operation
current and the step is used in non-directional mode a signal from the comparator for
this step is set to true. This signal, without delay, activates the output signal PU_STx
(x=1 - 4) for this step and a common PICKUP signal.

372
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.5.2.2

Internal polarizing facility of the function

A polarizing quantity is used within the protection to determine the direction to the
fault (Forward/Reverse).
Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC (4612) function can be
set to use voltage polarizing or dual polarizing.

Voltage polarizing
When voltage polarizing is selected, NS4PTOC (4612) uses the negative sequence
voltage -V2 as polarizing quantity V3P. This voltage is calculated from three phase
voltage input within the IED. The pre-processing block calculates -V2 from the first
three inputs into the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
V2 =

1
3

VA + a VB + a VC
2

ANSIEQUATION00024 V1 EN

where:
VA, VB, VC

are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.

To use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED VT inputs.

The negative sequence voltage is pre-processed by a discrete fourier filter. Thus, the
phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the negative sequence voltage is
derived. This phasor is used together with the phasor of the operating current, in order
to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).To enable voltage polarizing
the magnitude of polarizing voltage must be bigger than a minimum level defined by
setting VpolMin.
Note that V2 is used to determine the location of the fault. This ensures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the function.

Dual polarizing
When dual polarizing is selected, the function uses the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
VTotPol = VVPol + VIPol = -V 2 + Z Pol I Pol = -V 2 + ( R Pol + jX Pol ) I Pol
ANSIEQUATION2315 V1 EN

(Equation 87)

373
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage VTotPol is used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction to the fault (Forward/Reverse).

7.5.2.3

External polarizing for negative sequence function

The individual steps within the protection can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKx (where x indicates
the relevant step within the protection) to provide external directional control (that is,
torque control) by for example using one of the following functions if available in the
IED:

7.5.2.4

Distance protection directional function

Negative sequence polarized general current and voltage multi purpose protection
function

Base quantities within the function

The base quantities must be entered as setting parameters for every function. Base
current (IBase) must be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in
primary amperes. In line protections the primary rated current of the CT is chosen.
Base voltage VBase must be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected
object in primary kV. In line protections the primary rated voltage of the VT is chosen.

7.5.2.5

Internal negative sequence protection structure

The protection is internally divided into the following parts:

Four negative sequence overcurrent steps

Directional supervision element for negative sequence overcurrent steps with
integrated directional comparison step for communication based negative
sequence protection schemes (permissive or blocking)

Each part is described separately in the following sections.

7.5.2.6

Four negative sequence overcurrent stages

Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity I2 (negative sequence current) as
measuring quantity. Every of the four overcurrent stage has the following built-in
facilities:

Operating mode (Disabled/ Non-directional /Forward / Reverse). By this

parameter setting the operating mode of the stage is selected. Note that the
directional decision (Forward/Reverse) is not made within the overcurrent stage

374
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

itself. The direction of the fault is determined in common Directional Supervision

Element described in the next paragraph.
Negative sequence current pickup value.
Type of operating characteristic (Inverse or Definite Time). By this parameter
setting it is possible to select Inverse or definite time delay for negative sequence
overcurrent function. Most of the standard IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics
are available. For the complete list of available inverse curves, refer to Chapter
"Inverse time characteristics"
Type of reset characteristic (Instantaneous / IEC Reset /ANSI reset).By this
parameter setting it is possible to select the reset characteristic of the stage. For the
complete list of available reset curves, refer to Chapter "Inverse time characteristics"
Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like definite
time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay and
parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
Multiplier for scaling of the set negative sequence current pickup value by external
binary signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase negative sequence
current pickup value when function binary input MULTPUx has logical value 1.

Simplified logic diagram for one negative sequence overcurrent stage is shown in the
following figure:

ANSI09000684 V1 EN

Figure 188:

Simplified logic diagram for negative sequence overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2, 3 or 4
375

Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

NS4PTOC (4612) can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The
pickup signals from NS4PTOC (4612) for each stage can be blocked from the binary
input BLKx. The trip signals from NS4PTOC (4612) can be blocked from the binary
input BLKTR.

7.5.2.7

Directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison

function
At least one of the four negative sequence overcurrent steps must be set
as directional in order to enable execution of the directional supervision
element and the integrated directional comparison function.
NS4PTOC (4612) has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current
Iop is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the setting polMethod. The
polarizing quantity can be selected by NS4PTOC (4612) in one of the following two
ways:

When polMethod=Voltage, VVPol is used as polarizing quantity

When polMethod=Dual, VTotPol is used as polarizing quantity

The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in figure 182, to determine the direction of the fault.

376
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Reverse
Area

Vpol=-V2

AngleRCA

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

ANSI10000031-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000031 V1 EN

Figure 189:

Operating characteristic for fault directional element

Two relevant setting parameters for directional supervision element are:

Directional element is internally enable to operate as soon as IOp is bigger than

40% of INDirPU and the directional condition is fulfilled in set direction.
Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of forward and
reverse areas in the operating characteristic.

Directional comparison step, built-in within directional supervision element, set

NS4PTOC (4612) output binary signals:
1.
2.

PUFW=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in forward area,

see fig 182 (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than setting INDirPU)
PUREV=1 when tip of I2 phasor (operating quantity magnitude) is in the reverse
area, see fig 182. (Operating quantity magnitude is bigger than 60% of setting
INDirPU)

377
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

These signals must be used for communication based fault teleprotection

communication schemes (permissive or blocking).
Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional
comparison step is shown in figure 183:
|IopDir|

a
a>b
b

0.6

PUREV

AND

REVERSE_Int

X
a
a>b

IDirPU

0.4

FORWARD_Int

PUFW

AND

FWD
polMethod=Voltage

OR

polMethod=Dual

VPol

polMethod=Current

OR
IPol
0.0
RNPol
XNPol

BLOCK

VPolMin
T
0.0 F

IPolMin
I3PDIR

AND

FORWARD_Int

AND

REVERSE_Int

Directional
Characteristic

AngleRCA

VTPol
RVS

T
F

Complex
Number

VIPol
0.0

T
F

STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int

OR
AND

ANSI07000067-4-en.vsd

ANSI07000067 V4 EN

Figure 190:

Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison step

378
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.5.3

Function block
NS4PTOC (46I2)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRST1
I3PPOL*
TRST2
BLOCK
TRST3
BLKTR
TRST4
BLK1
PICKUP
BLK2
PU_ST1
BLK3
PU_ST2
BLK4
PU_ST3
MULTPU1
PU_ST4
MULTPU2
PUFW
MULTPU3
PUREV
MULTPU4
ANSI09000685-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000685 V1 EN

Figure 191:

7.5.4

NS4PTOC (4612) function block

Input and output signals

Table 175:
Name

NS4PTOC (46I2) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Negative Sequence 3 phase current

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Negative Sequence 3 phase voltage

I3PPOL

GROUP
SIGNAL

Negative Sequence 3 phase polarisation current

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

General block

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

BLK1

BOOLEAN

Block of step 1 (Pickup and trip)

BLK2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2 (Pickup and trip)

BLK3

BOOLEAN

Block of step 3 (Pickup and trip)

BLK4

BOOLEAN

Block of step 4 (Pickup and trip)

MULTPU1

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step1

MULTPU2

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step2

MULTPU3

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step3

MULTPU4

BOOLEAN

When activated, the pickup multiplier is in use for step4

379
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 176:

NS4PTOC (46I2) Output signals

Name

7.5.5
Table 177:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

TRST1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 1

TRST2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 2

TRST3

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 3

TRST4

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step 4

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General pickup signal

PU_ST1

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal step 1

PU_ST2

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal step 2

PU_ST3

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal step 3

PU_ST4

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal step 4

PUFW

BOOLEAN

Forward directional pickup signal

PUREV

BOOLEAN

Reverse directional pickup signal

Setting parameters
NS4PTOC (46I2) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base value for current settings

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400

Base value for voltage settings

AngleRCA

-180 - 180

Deg

65

Relay characteristic angle (RCA)

polMethod

Voltage
Dual

Voltage

Type of polarization

VPolMin

1 - 100

%VB

Minimum voltage level for polarization in % of

VBase

IPolMin

2 - 100

%IB

Minimum current level for polarization in % of

IBase

RPol

0.50 - 1000.00

ohm

0.01

5.00

Real part of neg. seq. source imp. to be used

for current polarisation

XPol

0.50 - 3000.00

ohm

0.01

40.00

Imaginary part of neg. seq. source imp. to be

used for current polarisation

I>Dir

1 - 100

%IB

10

Neg. seq. curr. I2 level for Direction release in

% of IBase

DirModeSel1

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 1 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Table continues on next page

380
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist1

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 1

Pickup1

1 - 2500

%IB

100

Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 1 in

% of IBase

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Independent (defenite) time delay of step 1

TD1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for step 1

IMin1

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

100.00

Minimum current for step 1

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 1

MultPU1

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step 1

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 1

tPCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tBCrv1

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tCCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tPRCrv1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tTRCrv1

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for step 1

tCRCrv1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 1

Table continues on next page

381
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DirModeSel2

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 2 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist2

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 2

Pickup2

1 - 2500

%IB

50

Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 2 in

% of IBase

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Independent (definitive) time delay of step 2

TD2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for step 2

IMin2

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

50

Minimum current for step 2

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves step

2

MultPU2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for step 2

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step 2

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 2

tPCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tBCrv2

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tCCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tPRCrv2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for step 2

tTRCrv2

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for step 2

Table continues on next page

382
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tCRCrv2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 2

DirModeSel3

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 3 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist3

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 3

Pickup3

1 - 2500

%IB

33

Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 3 in

% of IBase

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.800

Independent time delay of step 3

TD3

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for step 3

IMin3

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

33

Minimum current for step 3

t3Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 3

MultPU3

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for step 3

ResetTypeCrv3

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step 3

tReset3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 3

tPCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tACrv3

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tBCrv3

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 3

tCCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve step 3

tPRCrv3

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve step 3

Table continues on next page

383
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tTRCrv3

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve step 3

tCRCrv3

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for step 3

DirModeSel4

Disabled
Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of step 4 (Disabled, Nondir,

Forward, Reverse)

Characterist4

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Time delay curve type for step 4

Pickup4

1 - 2500

%IB

17

Operate neg. seq. curr. I2 level for step 4 in

% of IBase

t4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.200

Independent (definitive) time delay of step 4

TD4

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for step 4

IMin4

1.00 - 10000.00

%IB

1.00

17

Minimum current for step 4

t4Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum operate time in inverse curves step 4

MultPU4

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for step 4

ResetTypeCrv4

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Reset curve type for step 4

tReset4

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Reset time delay for step 4

tPCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tACrv4

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve step 4

tBCrv4

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 4

tCCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve step 4

Table continues on next page

384
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tPRCrv4

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve step 4

tTRCrv4

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve step 4

tCRCrv4

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve step 4

7.5.6

Technical data
Table 178:

NS4PTOC (46I2) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, negative

sequence current, step 1-4

(1-2500)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio

> 95%

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Inverse characteristics, see

table 699, table 700 and table 701

18 curve types

See table 699, table 700 and

table 701

Minimum operate current for

step 1 - 4

(1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase

1.0% of In at I < In
1.0% of I at I > In

Operate value, negative current

for directional release

(1100)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Relay characteristic angle

(-180 to 180) degrees

2.0 degrees

Minimum polarizing voltage

(1100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Minimum polarizing current

(2-100)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Real part of negative sequence

source impedance used for
current polarization

(0.50-1000.00) W/phase

Imaginary part of negative

sequence source impedance
used for current polarization

(0.503000.00) W/phase

Operate time, pickup function

25 ms typically at 0.5 to 2 x Iset

Reset time, pickup function

25 ms typically at 2 to 0.5 x Iset

Critical impulse time, pickup

function

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Impulse margin time, pickup

function

15 ms typically

Transient overreach

<10% at = 100 ms

385
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

7.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE (67N)
Function description
Sensitive directional residual over
current and power protection

7.6.1

IEC 61850
identification
SDEPSDE

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
67N

Introduction
In networks with high impedance grounding, the phase-to-ground fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for ground-fault
protection is that the magnitude of the phase-to-ground fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-toground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current and
the residual voltage (-3V0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the
function can be set to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle 3I0 and cos .
Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-toground faults in high impedance grounded networks. The protection uses the residual
power component 3I0 3V0 cos , where is the angle between the residual current
and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.
A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or
inverse time delay.
A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional sensitive
back-up protection.
In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to ground via the
capacitances between the phase conductors and ground, the residual current always has
-90 phase shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is
chosen to -90 in such a network.
In resistance grounded networks or in Petersen coil grounded, with a parallel resistor,
the active residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be
used for the ground-fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen
to 0.

386
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

As the magnitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the
selectivity of the ground-fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when
should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the
following facts:

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better

sensitivity. The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase, 1
A or 5 A. This sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high impedance network
applications, if the measuring CT ratio is not too high.
Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time
characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance grounded networks,
with large capacitive ground-fault current
In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used, for example,
in low impedance grounded system. Such a resistor will give a resistive groundfault current component of about 200 - 400 A at a zero resistive phase-to-ground
fault. In such a system the directional residual power protection gives better
possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time power characteristics.

Phase
currents
IN

Phaseground
voltages
UN
IEC13000013-1-en.vsd
IEC13000013 V1 EN

Figure 192:

Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block

Over current functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3.
For 3I0 to be calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.
Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to
GRPxN this signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2
and GRPxL3 the sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0) will be used.
387
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.6.2

Principle of operation

7.6.2.1

Function inputs
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and V3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from pre-processor
blocks.
The sensitive directional ground fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage.
Vref = -3V0 ejRCADir, that is -3V0 rotated by the set characteristic angle RCADir
(=ang(3I0)-ang(Vref) ). RCADir is normally set equal to 0 in a high impedance
grounded network with a neutral point resistor as the active current component is
appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal to -90 in an isolated
network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0cos
gets larger than the set value.
Vref

RCA = 0, ROA = 90

3I0

= ang(3I0) - ang(3Vref)
3I0 cos

-3V0=Vref

en06000648_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000648 V1 EN

Figure 193:

RCADir set to 0

388
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Vref

RCA = -90, ROA = 90

3I0
3I0 cos
= ang(3I0) ang(Vref)
-3V0

en06000649_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000649 V1 EN

Figure 194:

RCADir set to -90

For trip, both the residual current 3I0cos and the release voltage 3V0, must be larger
than the set levels: INCosPhiPU and VNRelPU.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output
signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite
time delay.
There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle is
larger than a set value as shown in figure 195. This is equivalent to blocking of the
function if > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument
transformers.

389
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

3I0

3I0 cos

Operate area

-3V
=V3V
Vref0=ref o

RCA = 0

ROA

ANSI06000650-2vsd
en06000650_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000650 V2 EN

Figure 195:

Characteristic with ROADir restriction

The function indicates forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as 3I0cos ( + 180) the set value.
It is also possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer angle
error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure 196:

390
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Operate area

-3V0=Vref

Instrument
transformer
angle error

RCA = 0

RCAcomp
Characteristic after
angle compensation

3I0 (prim)

3I0 (to prot)

en06000651_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000651 V1 EN

Figure 196:

Explanation of RCAComp

Directional residual power protection measuring 3I0 3V0 cos

is defined as the angle between the residual current 3I0 and the reference voltage
compensated with the set characteristic angle RCADir (=ang(3I0)ang(Vref) ). Vref =
-3V0 e-jRCA. The function operates when 3I0 3V0 cos gets larger than the set value.
For trip, both the residual power 3I0 3V0 cos , the residual current 3I0 and the
release voltage 3V0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN_PU, INRelPU and VNRelPU).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse
time delay (setting TDSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as 3I0 3V0cos ( + 180) the set value.
391
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay.
The inverse time delay is defined as:
tinv =

TDSN (3I 0 3V0 cos (reference))

3I 0 3V0 cos (measured )
(Equation 88)

EQUATION2032-ANSI V2 EN

Directional residual current protection measuring 3I0 and

The function will operate if the residual current is larger that the set value and the angle
= ang(3I0)-ang(Vref) is within the sector RCADir ROADir
RCA = 0
ROA = 80

Operate area
3I0
Vref=-3V0

ANSI06000652-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000652 V2 EN

Figure 197:

Example of characteristic

For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3V0, shall be larger than
the set levels INDirPU and VNRelPU and the angle shall be in the set sector ROADir
and RCADir.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function is activated binary output signals PICKUP and PUDIRIN are
activated. If the output signals are active after the set delay tDef the binary output
signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.

392
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The function indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is

defined as is within the angle sector: RCADir + 180 ROADir
This variant has definite time delay.

Directional functions

For all the directional functions there are directional pickup signals PUFW: fault in the
forward direction, and PUREV: Pickup in the reverse direction. Even if the directional
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse
direction will give the pickup signal PUREV. Also if the directional function is set to
operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the
pickup signal PUFW.

Non-directional ground fault current protection

This function will measure the residual current without checking the phase angle. The
function will be used to detect cross-country faults. This function can serve as
alternative or back-up to distance protection with phase preference logic. To assure
selectivity the distance protection can block the non-directional ground fault current
function via the input BLKNDN.
The non-directional function is using the calculated residual current, derived as sum of
the phase currents. This will give a better ability to detect cross-country faults with
high residual current, also when dedicated core balance CT for the sensitive ground
fault protection will saturate.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set level (INNonDirPU).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.
When the function is activated binary output signal PUNDIN is activated. If the output
signal is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the binary
output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.

Residual overvoltage release and protection

The directional function shall be released when the residual voltage gets higher than a
set level.
There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this level set
voltage level.
For trip, the residual voltage 3V0 shall be larger than the set level (UN_PU).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKVN.
393
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

When the function is activated binary output signal PUVN is activated. If the output
signals are active after the set delay tVNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A
simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 198.
PUNDIN

INNonDirPU
UN_PU

0-t
0

TRNDIN

0-t
0

TRVN

PUVN

OpMODE=INcosPhi

Pickup_N

AND

INCosPhiPU
OpMODE=INVNCosPhi

AND

OR

PUDIRIN

AND

INVNCosPhiPU

SN

Phi in RCA +- ROA

AND

TRDIRIN

TimeChar = InvTime

AND

OpMODE=IN and Phi

TimeChar = DefTime

DirMode = Forw

AND

AND

OR
PUFW

Forw
DirMode = Rev

AND

PUREV

Rev

en06000653_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000653 V1 EN

Figure 198:

Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive ground-fault current protection

394
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.6.3

Function block
SDEPSDE (67N)
I3P*
TRIP
V3P*
TRDIRIN
BLOCK
TRNDIN
BLKTR
TRVN
BLKTRDIR
PICKUP
BLKNDN
PUDIRIN
BLKVN
PUNDIN
PUVN
PUFW
PUREV
CND
VNREL
ANSI07000032-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000032 V2 EN

Figure 199:

7.6.4

SDEPSDE (67N) function block

Input and output signals

Table 179:
Name

SDEPSDE (67N) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Blocks all the outputs of the function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks the operate outputs of the function

BLKTRDIR

BOOLEAN

Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function

BLKNDN

BOOLEAN

Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs

BLKVN

BOOLEAN

Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs

Table 180:
Name

SDEPSDE (67N) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip of the function

TRDIRIN

BOOLEAN

Trip of the directional residual over current function

TRNDIN

BOOLEAN

Trip of non directional residual over current

TRVN

BOOLEAN

Trip of non directional residual over voltage

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General pickup of the function

PUDIRIN

BOOLEAN

Pickup of the directional residual over current function

PUNDIN

BOOLEAN

Pickup of non directional residual over current

PUVN

BOOLEAN

Pickup of non directional residual over voltage

Table continues on next page

395
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

7.6.5
Table 181:
Name

Type

Description

PUFW

BOOLEAN

Pickup of directional function for a fault in forward

direction

PUREV

BOOLEAN

Pickup of directional function for a fault in reverse

direction

CND

INTEGER

Direction of fault. A general signal common to all three

mode of residual over current protection

VNREL

BOOLEAN

Residual voltage release of operation of all directional

modes

Setting parameters
SDEPSDE (67N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disable / Enable

OpModeSel

3I0Cosfi
3I03V0Cosfi
3I0 and fi

3I0Cosfi

Selection of operation mode for protection

DirMode

Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of operation forward or reverse

RCADir

-179 - 180

Deg

-90

Relay characteristic angle RCA, in deg

RCAComp

-10.0 - 10.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Relay characteristic angle compensation

ROADir

0 - 90

Deg

90

Relay open angle ROA used as release in

phase mode, in deg

INCosPhiPU

0.25 - 200.00

%IB

0.01

1.00

Set level for 3I0cosFi, directional res over

current, in %Ib

SN_PU

0.25 - 200.00

%SB

0.01

10.00

Set level for 3I03V0cosFi, pickup inv time

count, in %Sb

INDirPU

0.25 - 200.00

%IB

0.01

5.00

Set level for directional residual over current

prot, in %Ib

tDef

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Definite time delay directional residual

overcurrent, in sec

SRef

0.03 - 200.00

%SB

0.01

10.00

Reference value of res power for inverse time

count, in %Sb

TDSN

0.00 - 2.00

0.01

0.10

Time multiplier setting for directional residual

power mode

OpINNonDir

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation of non-directional residual

overcurrent protection

INNonDirPU

1.00 - 400.00

%IB

0.01

10.00

Set level for non directional residual over

current, in %Ib

tINNonDir

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Time delay for non-directional residual over

current, in sec

Table continues on next page

396
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TimeChar

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Reserved
Programmable
RI type
RD type

IEC Norm. inv.

Operation curve selection for IDMT operation

t_MinTripDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.040

Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves,

in sec

TDIN

0.00 - 2.00

0.01

1.00

IDMT time mult for non-dir res over current

protection

OpVN

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation of non-directional residual

overvoltage protection

VN_PU

1.00 - 200.00

%VB

0.01

20.00

Set level for non-directional residual over

voltage, in %Vb

tVN

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay for non-directional residual over

voltage, in sec

INRelPU

0.25 - 200.00

%IB

0.01

1.00

Residual release current for all directional

modes, in %Ib

VNRelPU

0.01 - 200.00

%VB

0.01

3.00

Residual release voltage for all direction

modes, in %Vb

Step

Default

Table 182:

SDEPSDE (67N) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.040

Description
Time delay used for reset of definite timers, in
sec

tPCrv

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Setting P for customer programmable curve

tACrv

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

13.500

Setting A for customer programmable curve

tBCrv

0.00 - 20.00

0.01

0.00

Setting B for customer programmable curve

tCCrv

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Setting C for customer programmable curve

ResetTypeCrv

Immediate
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

IEC Reset

Reset mode when current drops off.

tPRCrv

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Setting PR for customer programmable curve

tTRCrv

0.005 - 100.000

0.001

13.500

Setting TR for customer programmable curve

tCRCrv

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Setting CR for customer programmable curve

397

Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

Table 183:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

SDEPSDE (67N) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

100

Base Current, in A

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

63.50

Base Voltage, in kV Phase to Neutral

SBase

0.05 200000000.00

kVA

0.05

6350.00

Base Power, in kVA. IBase*Ubase

Table 184:
Name
RotResV

7.6.6

SDEPSDE (67N) Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
0 deg
180 deg

Unit

Step

Default
180 deg

Description
Setting for rotating polarizing quantity if
necessary

Technical data
Table 185:

SDEPSDE (67N) technical data

Function
Operate level for 3I0cosj
directional residual
overcurrent

Range or value
(0.25-200.00)% of lBase

Accuracy
1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of In: 0.05% of In
(1.00-5.00)% of In: 0.1% of In

Operate level for 3I03V0

cosj directional residual
power

(0.25-200.00)% of SBase

1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
At low setting:
(0.25-5.00)% of SBase
10% of set value

Operate level for 3I0 and j

residual overcurrent

(0.25-200.00)% of lBase

1.0% of In at In
1.0% of I at I > In
At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of In: 0.05% of In
(1.00-5.00)% of In: 0.1% of In

Operate level for nondirectional overcurrent

(1.00-400.00)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
At low setting <5% of In:
0.1% of In

Operate level for nondirectional residual

overvoltage

(1.00-200.00)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn at VVn
0.5% of V at V > Vn

Table continues on next page

398
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function
Residual release current for
all directional modes

Range or value

Accuracy

(0.25-200.00)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In
At low setting:
(0.25-1.00)% of In: 0.05% of In
(1.00-5.00)% of In: 0.1% of In

7.7

Residual release voltage for

all directional modes

(0.01-200.00)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn at VVn
0.5% of V at V > Vn

Reset ratio

> 95%

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Inverse characteristics, see

table 699, table 700 and
table 701

19 curve types

See table 699, table 700 and table

701

Relay characteristic angle

RCA

(-179 to 180) degrees

2.0 degrees

Relay open angle ROA

(0-90) degrees

2.0 degrees

Operate time, non-directional

residual over current

60 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Reset time, non-directional

residual over current

60 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

Operate time, pickup function

150 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Reset time, pickup function

50 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

Thermal overload protection, one time constant LPTTR

Function description
Thermal overload protection, one time
constant

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

LPTTR

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
26

SYMBOL-A V1 EN

7.7.1

Introduction
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits has generated
a need of a thermal overload protection also for power lines.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits.
399

Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2t characteristic with settable
time constant and a thermal memory..
An alarm pickup gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line is tripped.

7.7.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed and for each phase current the
RMS value is derived. These phase current values are fed to the thermal overload
protection, one time constant function LPTTR. (26).
From the largest of the three-phase currents a final temperature is calculated according
to the expression:

Q final

I
=
I ref

Tref

(Equation 89)

EQUATION1167 V1 EN

where:
I

is the largest phase current,

Iref

is a given reference current and

Tref

is steady state temperature rise corresponding to Iref

The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature. If this

temperature is larger than the set operate temperature level, TripTemp, a PICKUP
output signal is activated.
The actual temperature at the actual execution cycle is calculated as:

400
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Dt

Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) 1 - e t

EQUATION1168 V1 EN

(Equation 90)

where:
Qn

is the calculated present temperature,

Qn-1

is the calculated temperature at the previous time step,

Qfinal

is the calculated final temperature with the actual current,

Dt

is the time step between calculation of the actual temperature and

is the set thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable)

The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by

adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above. The
ambient temperature can be taken from a separate sensor or can be given a constant
value. The calculated component temperature is available as a real figure signal, TEMP.
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output
signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level
TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operate with the present current. This
calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above the
operation temperature:

Q
- Qoperate
toperate = -t ln final
Q final - Q n

EQUATION1169 V1 EN

(Equation 91)

The calculated time to trip is available as a real figure signal, TTRIP.

After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection, there can be a lockout to
reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated when
the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting ReclTemp.
The time to lockout release is calculated that is, a calculation of the cooling time to a
set value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.

401
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Q
- Qlockout _ release
tlockout _ release = -t ln final

Q final - Q n

EQUATION1170 V1 EN

(Equation 92)

Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature. The
calculated time to reset of lockout is available as a real figure signal, TENRECL.
In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This
is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting
the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current on one
line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the input MULTPU
must be activated.
The protection has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.

402
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Final Temp
> TripTemp

PICKUP

actual temperature

Calculation
of actual
temperature

IA, IB, IC

Calculation
of final
temperature
Actual Temp >
AlarmTemp

ALARM

TRIP
Actual Temp
> TripTemp

Lockout
logic

LOCKOUT

Actual Temp
< Recl Temp

Calculation
of time to
trip

Calculation
of time to
reset of
lockout

TTRIP

TENRECL

ANSI09000637-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000637 V2 EN

Figure 200:

Functional overview of LPTTR

403
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.7.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
LPTTR (26)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR
MULTPU
AMBTEMP
SENSFLT
RESET

TRIP
PICKUP
ALARM
LOCKOUT

ANSI04000396-2-en.vsd
ANSI04000396 V2 EN

Figure 201:

7.7.4

LPTTR (26) function block

Input and output signals

Table 186:
Name

LPTTR (26) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

MULTPU

BOOLEAN

Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more

lines

AMBTEMP

REAL

Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor

SENSFLT

BOOLEAN

Validity status of ambient temperature sensor

RESET

BOOLEAN

Reset of internal thermal load counter

Table 187:
Name

LPTTR (26) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Pickup Signal

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm signal

LOCKOUT

BOOLEAN

Lockout signal

404
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.7.5
Table 188:

Setting parameters
LPTTR (26) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

0 - 99999

3000

Base current in A

TRef

0 - 600

Deg

90

End temperature rise above ambient of the

line when loaded with IRef

IRef

0 - 400

%IB

100

The load current (in % of IBase) leading to

TRef temperature

IMult

1-5

Current multiplier when function is used for

two or more lines

Tau

0 - 1000

Min

45

Time constant of the line in minutes.

AlarmTemp

0 - 200

Deg

80

Temperature level for pickup (alarm)

TripTemp

0 - 600

Deg

90

Temperature level for trip

ReclTemp

0 - 600

Deg

75

Temperature for reset of lockout after trip

tPulse

0.05 - 0.30

0.01

0.1

Operate pulse length. Minimum one

execution cycle

AmbiSens

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

External temperature sensor availiable

DefaultAmbTemp

-50 - 250

Deg

20

Ambient temperature used when AmbiSens is

set to Off.

DefaultTemp

-50 - 600

Deg

50

Temperature raise above ambient

temperature at startup

405
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.7.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 189:

LFPTTR/LCPTTR (26) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Reference current

(0-400)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Reference temperature

(0-400)C, (0 - 600)F

2F, 2F

Trip time:

Time constant t = (11000) minutes

IEC 60255-8, 5.0%

or 200 ms
whichever is greater

Alarm temperature

(0-400)F, (0-200)C

2.0% of heat
content trip

Trip temperature

(0-400)C, (0-600)F

2.0% of heat
content trip

Reset level temperature

(0-400)C, (0-600)F

2.0% of heat
content trip

2
2

I - Ip
t = t ln
2 2 TTrip - TAmb 2
I ref
I - Ip - T
ref

EQUATION13000039 V2 EN

(Equation 93)

TTrip= set trip temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs

7.8

Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF)

Function description
Breaker failure protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

CCRBRF

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50BF

3I>BF
SYMBOL-U V1 EN

406
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.8.1

Introduction
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding
breakers in case the own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF (50BF) can be current based,
contact based, or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
Current check with extremely short reset time is used as check criterion to achieve high
security against inadvertent operation.
Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current through the breaker is small.
CCRBRF (50BF) can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with single pole
tripping applications. For the three-phase version of CCRBRF (50BF) the current
criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four for example, two phases or one
phase plus the residual current pickups. This gives a higher security to the back-up trip
command.
CCRBRF (50BF) function can be programmed to give a single- or three-phase re-trip
of the own breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an
incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.

7.8.2

Operation principle
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF (50BF) is initiated from protection trip command,
either from protection functions within the IED or from external protection devices.
The initiate signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase
selective initiate signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second
attempt to open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time
delay. For transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The retrip function can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection.
The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check
the re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the
operate current level.
The initiate signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. This signal will
initiate the back-up trip timer. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is
detected by the function, by detection of either low current through RMS evaluation
and a special adapted current algorithm or by open contact indication. The special
algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker opening, that is, fast
resetting of the current measurement. If the current and/or contact detection has not
detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip is
initiated.
Further the following possibilities are available:

407
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up
trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up
trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed breaker.
In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of 4
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high
residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or
residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
The current detection level for the residual current can be set different from the
setting of phase current detection.
It is possible to have different back-up time delays for single-phase faults and for
multi-phase faults.
The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the
circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
30 ms

BFI_3P
BFI_A

BFP Started A

OR

AND

S
R

BLOCK

SR

150ms

Time out A

AND

OR

Reset A

Retrip Time Out A

BackupTrip A

OR

ANSI09000976-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000976 V2 EN

Figure 202:

Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF) starting logic

Pickup_PH
a
b

FunctionMode

a>b

Current

OR

AND

OR

Time out A
OR

Current and Contact

I_A

AND

Current High A
CB Closed A

AND

OR

BFP Started A
a

Pickup_BlkCont
52a_A

Reset A

Contact

a>b

AND

OR

AND

AND

AND

Contact Closed A

ANSI09000977-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000977 V1 EN

Figure 203:

Simplified logic scheme of the CCRBRF (50BF), CB position evaluation

408
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

BFP Started A
RetripMode

OR

TRRET

OR

TRRET_A

OR

OR

AND

CB Pos Check
CB Closed A

52FAIL

TRRET_B

tPulse

AND

No CBPos Check
1

TRRET_C

From other
phases

Retrip Time Out A

t1
0

AND

ANSI09000978-4-en.vsd

ANSI09000978 V4 EN

Figure 204:

Simplified logic scheme of the retrip logic function

BFP Started A
BFP Started B

AND

BFP Started C

AND

IN

Pickup_N

BUTripMode
1

From other
phases

a>b

Contact Closed A

2 out of 4
1 out of 4
1 out of 3
Current High B
Current High C

OR
OR

Current High A
52FAIL

AND

AND

BFP Started A

t2
OR

0
AND

OR

From other
phases

BFP Started B

AND

AND

Backup Trip A

t2MPh
0

OR

tPulse

From other Backup Trip B

phases
Backup Trip C

OR

2 of 3

OR

TRBU

tPulse

BFP Started C
S
AND

SR

t3

OR

TRBU2

ANSI09000979-4-en.vsd

ANSI09000979 V4 EN

Figure 205:

Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip logic function

Internal logical signals PU_A, PU_B, PU_C have logical value 1 when current in
respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter Pickup_PH.

409
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.8.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
CCRBRF (50BF)
I3P*
BLOCK
BFI_3P
BFI_A
BFI_B
BFI_C
52A_A
52A_B
52A_C
52FAIL

TRBU
TRBU2
TRRET
TRRET_A
TRRET_B
TRRET_C
CBALARM

ANSI06000188-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000188 V2 EN

Figure 206:

7.8.4

CCRBRF (50BF) function block

Input and output signals

Table 190:
Name

CCRBRF (50BF) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for current inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BFI_3P

BOOLEAN

Three phase breaker failure initiation

BFI_A

BOOLEAN

Phase A breaker failure initiation

BFI_B

BOOLEAN

Phase B breaker failure initiation

BFI_C

BOOLEAN

Phase C breaker failure initiation

52a_A

BOOLEAN

Circuit breaker closed in phase A

52a_B

BOOLEAN

Circuit breaker closed in phase B

52a_C

BOOLEAN

Circuit breaker closed in phase C

52FAIL

BOOLEAN

CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantaneously

Table 191:
Name

CCRBRF (50BF) Output signals

Type

Description

TRBU

BOOLEAN

Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function

TRBU2

BOOLEAN

Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection

function

TRRET

BOOLEAN

Retrip by breaker failure protection function

TRRET_A

BOOLEAN

Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase A

TRRET_B

BOOLEAN

Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase B

TRRET_C

BOOLEAN

Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase C

CBALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for faulty circuit breaker

410
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.8.5
Table 192:

Setting parameters
CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current

FunctionMode

Current
Contact
Current&Contact

Current

Detection principle for back-up trip

BuTripMode

2 out of 4
1 out of 3
1 out of 4

1 out of 3

Back-up trip mode

RetripMode

Retrip Off
CB Pos Check
No CBPos Check

Retrip Off

Operation mode of re-trip logic

Pickup_PH

5 - 200

%IB

10

Phase current pickup in % of IBase

Pickup_N

2 - 200

%IB

10

Operate residual current level in % of IBase

t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of re-trip

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Time delay of back-up trip

t2MPh

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Time delay of back-up trip at multi-phase

pickup

tPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Trip pulse duration

Table 193:

CCRBRF (50BF) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Pickup_BlkCont

5 - 200

%IB

20

Current for blocking of CB contact operation

in % of IBase

t3

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.030

Additional time delay to 27P2TDLY for a

second back-up trip

tCBAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Time delay for CB faulty signal

7.8.6

Technical data
Table 194:

CCRBRF (50BF) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate phase current

(5-200)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, phase current

> 95%

Operate residual current

(2-200)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In

Table continues on next page

411
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function

7.9

Range or value

Accuracy

Reset ratio, residual

current

> 95%

Phase current pickup for

blocking of contact
function

(5-200)% of lBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio

> 95%

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time for current

detection

10 ms typically

Reset time for current

detection

15 ms maximum

Stub protection STBPTOC (50STB)

Function description
Stub protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

STBPTOC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
50STB

3I>STUB
SYMBOL-T V1 EN

7.9.1

Introduction
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector is
opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be outside
on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not be able to
operate and must be blocked.
The stub protection STBPTOC (50STB) covers the zone between the current
transformers and the open disconnector. The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent
function is released from a normally open, 89b auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.

7.9.2

Principle of operation
The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter (DFT)
block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current the RMS
value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed to a
comparator in the stub protection function STBPTOC (50STB). In a comparator the
RMS values are compared to the set operating current value of the function IPickup.

412
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

If a phase current is larger than the set operating current the signal from the comparator
for this phase is activated. This signal will, in combination with the release signal from
line disconnection (RELEASE input), activate the timer for the TRIP signal. If the fault
current remains during the timer delay t, the TRIP output signal is activated. The
function can be blocked by activation of the BLOCK input.
STUB PROTECTION FUNCTION

BLOCK
TRIP

AND

PU_A
OR

PU_B
PU_C
ENABLE

en05000731_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000731 V1 EN

Figure 207:

7.9.3

Simplified logic diagram for Stub protection (50STB)

Function block
STBPTOC (50STB)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
BLKTR
ENABLE
ANSI05000678-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000678 V2 EN

Figure 208:

STBPTOC (50STB) function block

413
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.9.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 195:

STBPTOC (50STB) Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase currents

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip

ENABLE

BOOLEAN

Enable stub protection usually with open disconnect

switch (89b)

STBPTOC (50STB) Output signals

Name

Table 197:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 196:

7.9.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Pickup

Setting parameters
STBPTOC (50STB) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current

EnableMode

Release
Continuous

Release

Enable stub protection usually with open

disconnect switch (89b)

IPickup

1 - 2500

%IB

200

Pickup current level in % of IBase

Table 198:
Name
t

STBPTOC (50STB) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default

Description

0.000

Time delay

414
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.9.6

7.10

Technical data
Table 199:

STBPTOC (50STB) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operating current

(1-2500)% of IBase

1.0% of In at I In
1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio

> 95%

Definite time

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time, pickup

function

20 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Reset time,
pickupfunction

25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Pole discrepancy protection CCRPLD (52PD)

Function description
Pole discrepancy protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

CCRPLD

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
52PD

PD
SYMBOL-S V1 EN

7.10.1

Introduction
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence currents which cause thermal
stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or
negative sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a situation. If the situation
warrants the surrounding breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load
situation.
The Polediscrepancy protection function CCRPLD (52PD) operates based on
information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with
additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents when required.

415
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.10.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Principle of operation
The detection of pole discrepancy can be made in two different ways. If the contact
based function is used an external logic can be made by connecting the auxiliary
contacts of the circuit breaker so that a pole discrepancy is indicated, see figure 209.
C.B.

52a
52a

52a
52b

poleDiscrepancy Signal from C.B.

52b
52b

ANSI_en05000287.vsd

ANSI05000287 V1 EN

Figure 209:

Pole discrepancy external detection logic

This binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance of this
signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set time delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED, see figure 210.
C.B.

52a

poleOneClosed from C.B.

52a

poleTwoClosed from C.B.

52a

52b

poleThreeClosed from C.B.

poleOneOpened from C.B.

52b

poleTwoOpened from C.B.

52b

poleThreeOpened from C.B.

en05000288_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000288 V1 EN

Figure 210:

Pole discrepancy signals for internal logic

416
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discrepancy the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set delay.
Pole discrepancy can also be detected by means of phase selective current
measurement. The sampled analog phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete
Fourier filter (DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase
current the RMS value of each phase current is derived. The smallest and the largest
phase current are derived. If the smallest phase current is lower than the setting
CurrUnsymPU times the largest phase current the settable trip timer (tTrip) is started.
The tTrip timer gives a trip signal after the set delay. The TRIP signal is a pulse 150
ms long. The current based pole discrepancy function can be set to be active either
continuously or only directly in connection to breaker open or close command.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discrepancy function can be blocked during sequences with a
single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
BLOCK
OR

BLKDBYAR

PolPosAuxCont
AND

52b_A
52a_A
52b_B
52a_B
52b_C
52a_C

Pole
Disc repancy
detection
150 ms
AND
OR

0- t
0

TRIP

PD signal from CB
AND

EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD

t+ 200 ms
OR
AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en 05000747_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000747 V1 EN

Figure 211:

Simplified block diagram of pole discrepancy function CCRPLD (52PD)

- contact and current based

CCRPLD (52PD) is disabled if:

The IED is in TEST mode and CCRPLD (52PD) has been blocked from the local
HMI
The input signal BLOCK is high
The input signal BLKDBYAR is high

417
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discrepancy
protection. It can be connected to a binary input in the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions in the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal functions.
Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discrepancy operation when a single phase
autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal 1PT1 on
SMBRREC (79) function block. If the autoreclosing function is an external device,
then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input in the IED and this binary
input is connected to a signalization 1phase autoreclosing in progress from the
external autoreclosing device.
If the pole discrepancy protection is enabled, then two different criteria can generate a
trip signal TRIP:

7.10.2.1

Pole discrepancy signaling from the circuit breaker.

Unsymmetrical current detection.

Pole discrepancy signaling from circuit breaker

If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close the pole
discrepancy status, then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discrepancy signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact
for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase
connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval tTrip (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip
pulse command TRIP is generated by the Polediscrepancy function (52PD).

7.10.2.2

Unsymmetrical current detection

Unsymmetrical current indicated if:

any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymPU of the highest current in the three
phases.
the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelPU of IBase.

If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time
delay tTrip if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has
received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms
limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.
The pole discrepancy protection is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command

418
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can be
connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field (that
is from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software
connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (that is close command from a
control function or a general trip from integrated protections).

7.10.3

Function block
CCRPLD (52PD)
I3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
BLKDBYAR
CLOSECMD
OPENCMD
EXTPDIND
52B_A
52A_A
52B_B
52A_B
52B_C
52A_C
ANSI06000275-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000275 V2 EN

Figure 212:

7.10.4

CCRPLD (52PD) function block

Input and output signals

Table 200:
Name

CCRPLD (52PD) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase currents

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKDBYAR

BOOLEAN

Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing

cycle

CLOSECMD

BOOLEAN

Close command to CB

OPENCMD

BOOLEAN

Open command to CB

EXTPDIND

BOOLEAN

Pole discrepancy signal from CB logic

52b_A

BOOLEAN

Phase A Pole opened indication from CB

52a_A

BOOLEAN

Phase A Pole closed indication from CB

52b_B

BOOLEAN

Phase B Pole opened indication from CB

52a_B

BOOLEAN

Phase B Pole closed indication from CB

52b_C

BOOLEAN

Phase C Pole opened indication from CB

52a_C

BOOLEAN

Phase C Pole closed indication from CB

419
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 201:

CCRPLD (52PD) Output signals

Name

7.10.5
Table 202:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal to CB

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay

Setting parameters
CCRPLD (52PD) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

Time delay between trip condition and trip

signal

ContactSel

Disabled
PD signal from CB
Pole pos aux cont.

Disabled

Contact function selection

CurrentSel

Disabled
CB oper monitor
Continuous monitor

Disabled

Current function selection

CurrUnsymPU

0 - 100

80

Unsym magn of lowest phase current

compared to the highest.

CurrRelPU

0 - 100

%IB

10

Current magnitude for release of the function

in % of IBase

7.10.6

Technical data
Table 203:

CCRPLD (52PD) technical data

Function

7.11

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current

(0100)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Time delay

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP (37)

Function description
Directional underpower protection

IEC 61850
identification
GUPPDUP

IEC 60617
identification

P<

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37

SYMBOL-LL V1 EN

420
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.11.1

Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a
torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as
motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is
very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it
to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.
Figure 213 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher
margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for
unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set
the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about
2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to
the generator is higher than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
Underpower IED

Operate
Line

Overpower IED

Operate
Line

Margin

Margin

Operating point
without
turbine torque

Operating point
without
turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 213:

Protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

421
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.11.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Principle of operation
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 214. The function has two stages with individual settings.

Chosen current
phasors

Chosen voltage
phasors

P
Complex
power
calculation

Derivation of
S( composant)
in Char angle

S( angle)

t
0

S( angle) <
Power1

TRIP1
PICKUP1

S( angle) <
Power2

t
0

TRIP2
PICKUP2

P = POWRE
Q = POWIM

ANSI06000438-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000438 V2 EN

Figure 214:

Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 204.
Table 204:

Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode

A, B, C

Formula used for complex power calculation

S = V A I A* + VB I B* + VC I C *
(Equation 94)

EQUATION2055-ANSI V1 EN

Arone

S = V AB I A* - VBC IC *
(Equation 95)

EQUATION2056-ANSI V1 EN

PosSeq

S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq*
(Equation 96)

EQUATION2057-ANSI V1 EN

AB

S = VAB ( I A* - I B* )
EQUATION2058-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 97)

Table continues on next page

422
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Set value: Mode

BC

Formula used for complex power calculation

S = VBC ( I B* - IC * )
EQUATION2059-ANSI V1 EN

CA

S = VCA ( I C * - I A* )
EQUATION2060-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 100)

S = 3 VB I B*
EQUATION2062-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 99)

S = 3 VA I A*
EQUATION2061-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 98)

(Equation 101)

S = 3 VC I C *
EQUATION2063-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 102)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is
calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2).
For directional underpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the
calculated power component is smaller than the pick up value. For directional
overpower protection, a pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power
component is larger than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip
TRIP1(2) signal is activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of
the two stages a common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two
stages also a common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)). For
generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally down
to 0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a
smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.

423
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value, the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out
and that the timer of the stage will reset.

7.11.2.1

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:

S = TD SOld + (1 TD ) SCalculated
(Equation 103)

EQUATION1959-ANSI V1 EN

Where
S

is a new measured value to be used for the protection function

Sold

is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

TD

is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter TD is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is without any additional delay).
When TD is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for
TD=0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

7.11.2.2

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at
5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above
100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 215.

424
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

% of In

Magnitude
compensation

+10
IMagComp5

Measured
current

IMagComp30
IMagComp100

30

-10

Degrees

100

% of In

0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant

Angle
compensation

+10
Measured
current

IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100

30

100

% of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN

Figure 215:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs (Monitored data) from the function can be used for service values or in
the disturbance report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of
base power: PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in
percent of base power: QPERCENT.

425
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.11.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
GUPPDUP (37)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2

TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
PICKUP
PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
ANSI07000027-2-en.vsd

ANSI07000027 V2 EN

Figure 216:

7.11.4

GUPPDUP (37) function block

Input and output signals

Table 205:
Name

GUPPDUP (37) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Current group connection

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage group connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLOCK1

BOOLEAN

Block of stage 1

BLOCK2

BOOLEAN

Block of stage 2

Table 206:
Name

GUPPDUP (37) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

TRIP1

BOOLEAN

Trip of stage 1

TRIP2

BOOLEAN

Trip of stage 2

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Common pickup

PICKUP1

BOOLEAN

Pickup of stage 1

PICKUP2

BOOLEAN

Pickup of stage 2

REAL

Active Power in MW

PPERCENT

REAL

Active power in % of SBASE

REAL

Reactive power in Mvar

QPERCENT

REAL

Reactive power in % of SBASE

426
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.11.5
Table 207:

Setting parameters
GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disable / Enable

OpMode1

Disabled
UnderPower

UnderPower

Operation mode 1

Power1

0.0 - 500.0

%SB

0.1

1.0

Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase

Angle1

-180.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Angle for stage 1

TripDelay1

0.010 - 6000.000

0.001

1.000

Trip delay for stage 1

DropDelay1

0.010 - 6000.000

0.001

0.060

Drop delay for stage 1

OpMode2

Disabled
UnderPower

UnderPower

Operation mode 2

Power2

0.0 - 500.0

%SB

0.1

1.0

Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase

Angle2

-180.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Angle for stage 2

TripDelay2

0.010 - 6000.000

0.001

1.000

Trip delay for stage 2

DropDelay2

0.010 - 6000.000

0.001

0.060

Drop delay for stage 2

Table 208:

GUPPDUP (37) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TD

0.000 - 0.999

0.001

0.000

Low pass filter coefficient for power

measurement, P and Q

Hysteresis1

0.2 - 5.0

pu

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % Sbase

Hysteresis2

0.2 - 5.0

pu

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % Sbase

IMagComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of

In

IMagComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30%

of In

IMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100%

of In

VMagComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of

Vn

VMagComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30%

of Vn

VMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100%

of Vn

IAngComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 5% of In

IAngComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 30% of In

IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

427
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

Table 209:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

GUPPDUP (37) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current level

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level

Mode

A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C

Pos Seq

Selection of measured current and voltage

7.11.6

Technical data
Table 210:

GUPPDUP (37) technical data

Function
Power level

Range or value
(0.0500.0)% of SBase
At low setting:
(0.5-2.0)% of SBase
(2.0-10)% of SBase

7.12

Accuracy
1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr
< 50% of set value
< 20% of set value

Characteristic angle

(-180.0180.0) degrees

2 degrees

Timers

(0.00-6000.00) s

0.5% 10 ms

Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP (32)

Function description
Directional overpower protection

IEC 61850
identification
GOPPDOP

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
32

P>
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V1 EN

7.12.1

Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a
torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

428
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as
motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is
very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it
to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the
generator itself.
Figure 217 illustrates the low forward power and reverse power protection with
underpower and overpower functions respectively. The underpower IED gives a higher
margin and should provide better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for
unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be higher. One should set
the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about
2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the network to
the generator is higher than 1%.
When IED with a metering class input CTs is used pickup can be set to more sensitive
value (e.g.0,5% or even to 0,2%).
Underpower IED

Operate
Line

Overpower IED

Operate
Line

Margin

Margin

Operating point
without
turbine torque

Operating point
without
turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN

Figure 217:

7.12.2

Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

Principle of operation
A simplified scheme showing the principle of the power protection function is shown
in figure 218. The function has two stages with individual settings.

429
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Chosen current
phasors

Chosen voltage
phasors

P
Complex
power
calculation

Derivation of
S(composant)
in Char angle

S(angle)

S(angle) >
Power1

TRIP1
PICKUP1

S(angle) >
Power2

TRIP2
PICKUP2

P = POWRE
Q = POWIM

ANSI06000567-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000567 V2 EN

Figure 218:

Simplified logic diagram of the power protection function

The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 211.
Table 211:

Complex power calculation

Set value: Mode

A,B,C

Formula used for complex power calculation

*

S = V A I A + V B I B + V C IC

(Equation 104)

EQUATION2038 V1 EN

Arone

S = V AB I A - V BC I C
S = 3 V PosSeq I PosSeq

(Equation 106)

EQUATION2040 V1 EN

A,B

S = V AB (I A - I B )
(Equation 107)

EQUATION2041 V1 EN

B,C

(Equation 105)

EQUATION2039 V1 EN

PosSeq

S = V BC (I B - I C )
EQUATION2042 V1 EN

(Equation 108)

Table continues on next page

430
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Set value: Mode

C,A

Formula used for complex power calculation

*

S = V CA (I C - I A )
(Equation 109)

EQUATION2043 V1 EN

S = 3 V A IA

(Equation 110)

EQUATION2044 V1 EN

S = 3 V B IB

(Equation 111)

EQUATION2045 V1 EN

S = 3 V C IC
EQUATION2046 V1 EN

(Equation 112)

The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
The component of the complex power S = P + jQ in the direction Angle1(2) is
calculated. If this angle is 0 the active power component P is calculated. If this angle
is 90 the reactive power component Q is calculated.
The calculated power component is compared to the power pick up setting Power1(2).
A pickup signal PICKUP1(2) is activated if the calculated power component is larger
than the pick up value. After a set time delay TripDelay1(2) a trip TRIP1(2) signal is
activated if the pickup signal is still active. At activation of any of the two stages a
common signal PICKUP will be activated. At trip from any of the two stages also a
common signal TRIP will be activated.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) drop-power1(2)). For
generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to
0.02 p.u. of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller
value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the droppower1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the pickup signal will drop out ant
that the timer of the stage will reset.

431
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.12.2.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k SOld + (1 - k ) SCalculated
(Equation 113)

EQUATION1959 V1 EN

Where
S

is a new measured value to be used for the protection function

Sold

is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k

is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k =
0.92 in case of slow operating functions.

7.12.2.2

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation at
5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and above
100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 219.

432
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

% of In

Magnitude
compensation

+10
IMagComp5

Measured
current

IMagComp30
IMagComp100

30

-10

Degrees

100

% of In

0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant

Angle
compensation

+10
Measured
current

IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100

30

100

% of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN

Figure 219:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.

433
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection
7.12.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
GOPPDOP (32)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLOCK1
BLOCK2

TRIP
TRIP1
TRIP2
PICKUP
PICKUP1
PICKUP2
P
PPERCENT
Q
QPERCENT
ANSI07000028-2-en.vsd

ANSI07000028 V2 EN

Figure 220:

7.12.4

GOPPDOP (32) function block

Input and output signals

Table 212:
Name

GOPPDOP (32) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Current group connection

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage group connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLOCK1

BOOLEAN

Block of stage 1

BLOCK2

BOOLEAN

Block of stage 2

Table 213:
Name

GOPPDOP (32) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

TRIP1

BOOLEAN

Trip of stage 1

TRIP2

BOOLEAN

Trip of stage 2

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Common pickup

PICKUP1

BOOLEAN

Pickup of stage 1

PICKUP2

BOOLEAN

Pickup of stage 2

REAL

Active Power in MW

PPERCENT

REAL

Active power in % of SBASE

REAL

Reactive power in Mvar

QPERCENT

REAL

Reactive power in % of SBASE

434
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.12.5
Table 214:

Setting parameters
GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disable / Enable

OpMode1

Disabled
OverPower

OverPower

Operation mode 1

Power1

0.0 - 500.0

%SB

0.1

120.0

Power setting for stage 1 in % of Sbase

Angle1

-180.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Angle for stage 1

TripDelay1

0.010 - 6000.000

0.001

1.000

Trip delay for stage 1

DropDelay1

0.010 - 6000.000

0.001

0.060

Drop delay for stage 1

OpMode2

Disabled
OverPower

OverPower

Operation mode 2

Power2

0.0 - 500.0

%SB

0.1

120.0

Power setting for stage 2 in % of Sbase

Angle2

-180.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Angle for stage 2

TripDelay2

0.010 - 6000.000

0.001

1.000

Trip delay for stage 2

DropDelay2

0.010 - 6000.000

0.001

0.060

Drop delay for stage 2

Table 215:

GOPPDOP (32) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

0.000 - 0.999

0.001

0.000

Low pass filter coefficient for power

measurement, P and Q

Hysteresis1

0.2 - 5.0

pu

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis of stage 1 in % of Sbase

Hysteresis2

0.2 - 5.0

pu

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis of stage 2 in % of Sbase

IMagComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of

In

IMagComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30%

of In

IMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100%

of In

VMagComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of

Vn

VMagComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30%

of Vn

VMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100%

of Vn

IAngComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 5% of In

IAngComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 30% of In

IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

435
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

Table 216:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

GOPPDOP (32) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current level

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level

Mode

A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C

Pos Seq

Selection of measured current and voltage

7.12.6

Technical data
Table 217:

GOPPDOP (32) technical data

Function
Power level

Range or value

Accuracy

(0.0500.0)% of Sbase

1.0% of Sr at S < Sr
1.0% of S at S > Sr

At low setting:
(0.5-2.0)% of Sbase
(2.0-10)% of Sbase

7.13

Characteristic angle

(-180.0180.0) degrees

2 degrees

Timers

(0.00-6000.00) s

0.5% 10 ms

Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46)

Function description
Broken conductor check

7.13.1

< 50% of set value

< 20% of set value

IEC 61850
identification
BRCPTOC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46

Introduction
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition.
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC, 46) function, consisting of continuous current
unsymmetrical check on the line where the IED is connected will give alarm or trip at
detecting broken conductors.

436
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

7.13.2

Principle of operation
Broken conductor check (BRCPTOC, 46) detects a broken conductor condition by
detecting the asymmetry between currents in the three phases. The current-measuring
elements continuously measure the three-phase currents.
The current asymmetry signal output PICKUP is set on if:

The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the phase
with the highest current is greater than set percentage Pickup_ub of the highest
phase current
The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value Pickup_PH

The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines. If
a conductor breaks in one phase on one line, the parallel line will experience an
increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions
being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set
time tOper the TRIP output is activated.
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 221
BRCPTOC (46) is disabled (blocked) if:

The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the local HMI
test menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
The input signal BLOCK is high.

The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices, or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself to receive a block command from internal functions.
The output trip signal TRIP is a three-phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to
the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.

437
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
AND
BlockBRC = Yes
BRC--START
BRC--BLOCK

OR

Function Enable
AND

Unsymmetrical
Current Detection

BRC--TRIP

0-t
0

PU_ub
IA<50%Pickup_PN
OR

IB<50%Pickup_PN
IC<50%Pickup_PN

en07000123.vsd
IEC07000123 V1 EN

Figure 221:

7.13.3

Simplified logic diagram for Broken conductor check BRCPTOC (46)

Function block
BRCPTOC (46)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
PICKUP

ANSI07000034-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000034 V2 EN

Figure 222:

7.13.4

BRCPTOC (46) function block

Input and output signals

Table 218:
Name

BRCPTOC (46) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks the operate output

438
Technical reference manual

Section 7
Current protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 219:

BRCPTOC (46) Output signals

Name

7.13.5
Table 220:

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Operate signal of the protection logic

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal of the protection logic

Setting parameters
BRCPTOC (46) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disable / Enable

IBase

0 - 99999

3000

IBase

Pickup_ub

50 - 90

%IM

50

Unbalance current operation value in percent

of max current

Pickup_PH

5 - 100

%IB

20

Minimum phase current for operation of

pickup_ub> in % of Ibase

tOper

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Operate time delay

Table 221:

BRCPTOC (46) Group settings (advanced)

Name
tReset

7.13.6

Values (Range)

Unit

0.010 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default

Description

0.100

Time delay in reset

Technical data
Table 222:

BRCPTOC (46) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Minimum phase current for operation

(5100)% of IBase

0.1% of In

Unbalance current operation

(0100)% of maximum current

0.1% of In

Timer

(0.00-6000.00) s

0.5% 10 ms

439
Technical reference manual

440

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 8

Voltage protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes voltage related protection functions. The way the functions
work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical
data are included for each function.

8.1

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)

Function description
Two step undervoltage protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

UV2PTUV

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27

3U<
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN
V2 EN

8.1.1

Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
Two step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV, 27) function can be used to open circuit
breakers to prepare for system restoration at power outages or as long-time delayed backup to primary protection.
UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.

8.1.2

Principle of operation
Two-step undervoltage protection (UV2PTUV ,27) is used to detect low power system
voltage. UV2PTUV (27) has two voltage measuring steps with separate time delays. If
one, two or three phase voltages decrease below the set value, a corresponding
PICKUP signal is generated. UV2PTUV (27) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP based on 1
out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 of the measured voltages, being below the set point. If
the voltage remains below the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen
time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted trip due to
disconnection of the related high voltage equipment, a voltage controlled blocking of
the function is available, that is, if the voltage is lower than the set blocking level the
441

Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

function is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is generated.The time delay

characteristic is individually chosen for each step and can be either definite time delay
or inverse time delay.
UV2PTUV (27) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-tophase fundamental value, phase-to-ground true RMS value or phase-to-phase true
RMS value. The choice of the measuring is done by the parameter ConnType. The
voltage related settings are made in percent of base voltage which is set in kV phase-tophase voltage. This means operation for phase-to-ground voltage under:
Vpickup < (%) VBase(kV )
3
(Equation 114)

EQUATION1606 V1 EN

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage under:

Vpickup < (%) VBase(kV)
(Equation 115)

EQUATION1991-ANSI V1 EN

When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root
of three.

8.1.2.1

Measurement principle
Depending on the set ConnType value, UV2PTUV (27) measures phase-to-ground or
phase-to-phase voltages and compare against set values, Pickup1 and Pickup2. The
parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the requirements to activate the
PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, or 3 out of 3 measured voltages have to
be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.1.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
undervoltage (TUV). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available:

inverse curve A
inverse curve B
customer programmable inverse curve

442
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The type A curve is described as:

t=

TD
Vpickup < -V
Vpickup <
(Equation 116)

ANSIEQUATION1431 V1 EN

where:
Vpickup
<

Set value for step 1 and step 2

Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

t=

TD 480

Vpickup < -V

- 0.5
32
Vpickup <

2.0

+ 0.055

EQUATION1608 V1 EN

(Equation 117)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

TD A
+D
t=
P
Vpickup < -V

-C
B
Vpickup

EQUATION1609 V1 EN

(Equation 118)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup< down to
Vpickup< (1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup< (1.0 CrvSatn/
100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
-C > 0
100

EQUATION1435 V1 EN

(Equation 119)

443
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details of
the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section 22.3 "Inverse
characteristics".
Figure 223:

Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Voltage

VL1
VL2
VL3

IDMT Voltage

Time
ANSI12000186-1-en.vsd

Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse
time mode (TUV). If the pickup condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time
(tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the
inverse time) the corresponding pickup output is reset. Here it should be noted that
after leaving the hysteresis area, the pickup condition must be fulfilled again and it is
not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the
undervoltage function the TUV reset time is constant and does not depend on the
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset
the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 224 and figure 225.

444
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

tIReset1
Voltage

tIReset1
PICKUP
HystAbs1

Measured
Voltage

TRIP

PICKUP1

Time
t

PICKUP
TRIP

Time
Integrator

Frozen Timer

Instantaneous

Linearly
decreased

Time
ANSI05000010-3-en.vsd

ANSI05000010 V3 EN

Figure 224:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types

445
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

tIReset1

Voltage
PICKUP

PICKUP

tIReset1
HystAbs1

Measured Voltage
TRIP

PICKUP 1

Time
t

PICKUP

TRIP

Time
Integrator

Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous

Linearly
decreased

ANSI05000011-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000011 V2 EN

Figure 225:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the pickup signal for step 1, and inverse time delay at different
reset types

Definite timer delay

446
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 226.
Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure
227 and figure 228 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset
of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.
PU_ST1
V
Pickup1

a
a<b

R tReset1

TRST1

t1
0

AND

ANSI09000785-3-en.vsd
ANSI09000785 V3 EN

Figure 226:

Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

Pickup1

PU_ST1

TRST1
tReset1

t1

ANSI10000039-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000039 V3 EN

Figure 227:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 reset

447
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Pickup1

PU_ST1

TRST1

tReset1

t1

ANSI10000040-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000040 V3 EN

Figure 228:

8.1.2.3

Example for Definite Time Delay stage1 operation

Blocking
It is possible to block Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27) partially or
completely, by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTR1:

blocks all trip outputs of step 1

BLK1:

blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1

BLKTR2:

blocks all trip outputs of step 2

BLK2:

blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the PICKUP outputs of step 1, are blocked.
The characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal
blocking can also be set to Disabled resulting in no voltage based blocking.
Corresponding settings and functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get
very low. The event will PICKUP both the under voltage function and the blocking
function, as seen in figure 229. The delay of the blocking function must be set less than
the time delay of under voltage function.

448
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Disconnection

Normal voltage
Pickup1
Pickup2

tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1

tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min

IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000466 V1 EN

Figure 229:

Blocking function

8.1.2.4

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-neutral
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive fourier filters or true RMS
filters of input voltage signals are used. The voltages are individually compared to the
set value, and the lowest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration.
A special logic is included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3 criteria to
fulfill the PICKUP condition. The design of Two step undervoltage protection
UV2PTUV (27) is schematically shown in Figure 230.

449
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

VL1

VL2

VL3

Comparator
VL1 < V1<

Comparator
VL2 < V1<

Comparator
VL3 < V1<

Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

ST1L1
Phase 1

ST1L2
Phase 2
Phase 3

IntBlkStVal1
PICKUP

Time integrator
MinVoltSelector

tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1

Pickup
t1
t1Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic

ST1L3
ST1

OR

TR1L1

Step 1

TR1L2

TRIP
TR1L3
TR1

OR
Comparator
VL1 < V2<

Comparator
VL2 < V2<

Comparator
VL3 < V2<

Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3
IntBlkStVal2
PICKUP

ST2L1
Phase 1

ST2L2
Phase 2

Pickup
t2
Phase 3 t2Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic

ST2L3
ST2

OR

TR2L1

Step 2
MinVoltSelector

Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2

TR2L2

TRIP
TR2L3
TR2

OR
OR

OR

PICKUP

TRIP

ANSI05000012-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000012 V2 EN

Figure 230:

Schematic design of Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV (27)

450
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

8.1.3

Function block
UV2PTUV (27)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLK1
BLKTR2
BLK2

TRIP
TRST1
TRST1_A
TRST1_B
TRST1_C
TRST2
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
ANSI06000276-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000276 V2 EN

Figure 231:

8.1.4

UV2PTUV (27) function block

Input and output signals

Table 223:
Name

UV2PTUV (27) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase voltages

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR1

BOOLEAN

Block of trip signal, step 1

BLK1

BOOLEAN

Block of step 1

BLKTR2

BOOLEAN

Block of trip signal, step 2

BLK2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2

Table 224:
Name

UV2PTUV (27) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

TRST1

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step1

TRST1_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase A

TRST1_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase B

TRST1_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase C

TRST2

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step2

TRST2_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase A

Table continues on next page

451
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

8.1.5
Table 225:
Name

Type

Description

TRST2_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase B

TRST2_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase C

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General pickup signal

PU_ST1

BOOLEAN

Common pickup signal from step1

PU_ST1_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step1 phase A

PU_ST1_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step1 phase B

PU_ST1_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step1 phase C

PU_ST2

BOOLEAN

Common pickup signal from step2

PU_ST2_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step2 phase A

PU_ST2_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step2 phase B

PU_ST2_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step2 phase C

Setting parameters
UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

OperationStep1

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable execution of step 1

Characterist1

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of

3, 3 of 3) from step 1

Pickup1

1 - 100

%VB

70

Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & InverseTime curve) in % of VBase, step 1

t1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

5.00

Definitive time delay of step 1

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 1

TD1

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 1

IntBlkSel1

Disabled
Block of trip
Block all

Disabled

Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 1

IntBlkStVal1

1 - 100

%VB

20

Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of

VBase, step 1

Table continues on next page

452
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tBlkUV1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for

step 1

HystAbs1

0.0 - 100.0

%VB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1

OperationStep2

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable execution of step 2

Characterist2

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

OpMode2

1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of

3, 3 of 3) from step 2

Pickup2

1 - 100

%VB

50

Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & InverseTime curve) in % of VBase, step 2

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Definitive time delay of step 2

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 2

TD2

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 2

IntBlkSel2

Disabled
Block of trip
Block all

Disabled

Internal (low level) blocking mode, step 2

IntBlkStVal2

1 - 100

%VB

20

Voltage setting for internal blocking in % of

VBase, step 2

tBlkUV2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay of internal (low level) blocking for

step 2

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

%VB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2

Table 226:

Step

Default

Description

UV2PTUV (27) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
0.025

Description
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for

step 1

tIReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1

ACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 1

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for step 1

Table continues on next page

453
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CrvSat1

0 - 100

Tuning param for prog. under voltage InverseTime curve, step 1

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time

curve step 2

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2

tIReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2

ACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 2

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 2

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for step 2

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CrvSat2

0 - 100

Tuning param for prog. under voltage InverseTime curve, step 2

Table 227:
Name
ConnType

8.1.6

UV2PTUV (27) Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
PhN DFT
PhPh RMS
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT

Unit

Step

Default
PhN DFT

Description
Group selector for connection type

Technical data
Table 228:

UV2PTUV (27) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage, low and

high step

(1100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Absolute hysteresis

(0100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Internal blocking level,

step 1 and step 2

(1100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Inverse time
characteristics for step 1
and step 2, see table 703

See table 703

Table continues on next page

454
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Definite time delay, step 1

(0.00 - 6000.00) s

0.5% 10 ms

Definite time delays

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Minimum operate time,

inverse characteristics

(0.00060.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time, pickup

function

25 ms typically at 2 x Vset to 0 0

Reset time, pickup

function

8.2

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 2 x Vset to 0

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)

Function description
Two step overvoltage protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

OV2PTOV

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59

3U>
SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN
V2 EN

8.2.1

Introduction
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines etc.
Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) function can be used to detect open
line ends, normally then combined with a directional reactive over-power function to
supervise the system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch
in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.
OV2PTOV (59) has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
OV2PTOV (59) has an extremely high reset ratio to allow settings close to system
service voltage.

8.2.2

Principle of operation
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) is used to detect high power system
voltage. OV2PTOV (59) has two steps with separate time delays. If one-, two- or three455

Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

phase voltages increase above the set value, a corresponding PICKUP signal is issued.
OV2PTOV (59) can be set to PICKUP/TRIP, based on 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of
3 of the measured voltages, being above the set point. If the voltage remains above the
set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
trip signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the global set base voltage VBase,
which is set in kV, phase-to-phase.
OV2PTOV (59) can be set to measure phase-to-ground fundamental value, phase-tophase fundamental value, phase-to-ground RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value.
The choice of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType.
The setting of the analog inputs are given as primary phase-to-ground or phase-tophase voltage. OV2PTOV (59) will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set
percentage of the set base voltage VBase. This means operation for phase-to-ground
voltage over:
Vpickup > (%) VBase(kV ) / 3
(Equation 120)

EQUATION1610 V2 EN

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

Vpickup > (%) VBase(kV)
(Equation 121)

EQUATION1992 V1 EN

When phase-to-ground voltage measurement is selected the function

automatically introduces division of the base value by the square root
of three.

8.2.2.1

Measurement principle
All the three voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 and Pickup2. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the
requirements to activate the PICKUP outputs. Either 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3
measured voltages have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding PICKUP signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

456
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

8.2.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:

inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

TD
V Vpickup >
Vpickup >

t=

(Equation 122)

EQUATION1625 V2 EN

The type B curve is described as:

t=

TD 480
0.035
V Vpickup >
32
0.5
Vpickup >
(Equation 123)

ANSIEQUATION2287 V2 EN

The type C curve is described as:

t=

TD 480
+ 0.035
V Vpickup >
32
0.5
Vpickup >
(Equation 124)

ANSIEQUATION2288 V2 EN

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

t=

TD A

V - Vpickup

-C
B
Vpickup

EQUATION1616 V1 EN

+D

(Equation 125)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup down to Vpickup
(1.0 CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup (1.0 CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

457
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

CrvSatn
-C > 0
100

EQUATION1435 V1 EN

(Equation 126)

The highest phase (or phase-to-phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time delay
integration, see figure 232. The details of the different inverse time characteristics are
shown in section "Inverse characteristics"

Voltage
IDMT Voltage

VA
VB
VC

Time
ANSI05000016-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000016 V2 EN

Figure 232:

Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration

Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time
mode (TOV). If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time
(tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse
time) the corresponding PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable (HystAbs2) to
allow an high and accurate reset of the function. It should be noted that for Two step
overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59) the TOV reset time is constant and does not
depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three

458
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is
frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time..
tIReset1
tIReset1

Voltage
PICKUP

TRIP

PU_Overvolt1

HystAbs1

Measured
Voltage

Time
PICKUP

TRIP

Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer

Linearly
decreased

Time

Instantaneous

ANSI05000019-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000019 V3 EN

Figure 233:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

459
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

tIReset1

Voltage
PICKUP

PICKUP

tIReset1
HystAbs1

TRIP

Pickup1
Measured Voltage

Time
t

PICKUP

TRIP

Time
Integrator

Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous

Linearly decreased

ANSI05000020-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000020 V2 EN

Figure 234:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Definite time delay

When definite time delay is selected the function will operate as shown in figure 235.
Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure
227 and figure 228 receptively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s instantaneous reset
of the definite time delayed stage is ensured

460
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

PU_ST1

tReset1

a
a>b

Vpickup>

t1
t

TRST1

AND
OFF
Delay

ON
Delay

ANSI10000100-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000100 V2 EN

Figure 235:

Detailed logic diagram for step 1, DT operation

Pickup1

PICKUP

TRIP
tReset1

t1

ANSI10000037-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000037 V2 EN

Figure 236:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage rest

461
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Pickup1

PICKUP

TRIP

tReset1

t1

ANSI10000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000038 V2 EN

Figure 237:

8.2.2.3

Example for Definite Time Delay stage operation

Blocking
It is possible to block Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV, (59) partially or
completely, by binary input signals where:

8.2.2.4

BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTR1:

blocks all trip outputs of step 1

BLK1:

blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1

BLKTR2:

blocks all trip outputs of step 2

BLK2:

blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 2

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the three phase-to-ground
voltages or the three phase-to-phase voltages. Recursive Fourier filters filter the input
voltage signals. The phase voltages are individually compared to the set value, and the
highest voltage is used for the inverse time characteristic integration. A special logic is
included to achieve the 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out of 3 criteria to fulfill the PICKUP
condition. The design of Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV, 59) is
schematically described in figure 238.

462
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

VA

VB

VC

Comparator
VA >
Pickup 1
Comparator
VB >
Pickup 1
Comparator
VC >
Pickup 1

Voltage Phase
Selector
OpMode1
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

PU_ST1_A

Phase A

PU_ST1_B
Phase B
Phase C

Phase C

PICKUP

Pickup
t1
t1Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic

PU_ ST1_C
PU_ST1

OR

TRST1-A

Step1
MaxVoltSelect

Time integrator
tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1

TRST1_B

TRIP

TRST1_C
TRST1

OR
Comparator
VA >
Pickup 2
Comparator
VB >
Pickup 2
Comparator
VC >
Pickup 2

Voltage Phase
Selector

Phase A

OpMode2
1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

Phase B
Phase C

PICKUP

MaxVoltSelect

Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2

TRIP

PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B

Pickup
t2
t2Reset
&
Trip
Output
Logic

PU_ST2_C
PU_ST2

OR

TRST2-A

Step 2

TRST2-B
TRST2-C
TRST2

OR

OR PICKUP

OR

TRIP

ANSI05000013-2-en.vsd
_
.
ANSI05000013 V2 EN

Figure 238:

Schematic design of Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV (59)

463
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection
8.2.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
OV2PTOV (59)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR1
BLK1
BLKTR2
BLK2

TRIP
TRST1
TRST1_A
TRST1_B
TRST1_C
TRST2
TRST2_A
TRST2_B
TRST2_C
PICKUP
PU_ST1
PU_ST1_A
PU_ST1_B
PU_ST1_C
PU_ST2
PU_ST2_A
PU_ST2_B
PU_ST2_C
ANSI06000277-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000277 V2 EN

Figure 239:

8.2.4

OV2PTOV (59) function block

Input and output signals

Table 229:
Name

OV2PTOV (59) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for three phase voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR1

BOOLEAN

Block of trip signal, step 1

BLK1

BOOLEAN

Block of step 1

BLKTR2

BOOLEAN

Block of trip signal, step 2

BLK2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2

Table 230:
Name

OV2PTOV (59) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

TRST1

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step1

TRST1_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase A

TRST1_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase B

TRST1_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step1 phase C

TRST2

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step2

TRST2_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase A

Table continues on next page

464
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

8.2.5
Table 231:

Type

Description

TRST2_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase B

TRST2_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from step2 phase C

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General pickup signal

PU_ST1

BOOLEAN

Common pickup signal from step1

PU_ST1_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step1 phase A

PU_ST1_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step1 phase B

PU_ST1_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step1 phase C

PU_ST2

BOOLEAN

Common pickup signal from step2

PU_ST2_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step2 phase A

PU_ST2_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step2 phase B

PU_ST2_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from step2 phase C

Setting parameters
OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

OperationStep1

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable execution of step 1

Characterist1

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

OpMode1

1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of

3, 3 of 3) from step 1

Pickup1

1 - 200

%VB

120

Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & InverseTime curve) in % of VBase, step 1

t1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

5.00

Definitive time delay of step 1

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 1

TD1

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 1

HystAbs1

0.0 - 100.0

%VB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1

OperationStep2

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable execution of step 2

Table continues on next page

465
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Characterist2

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

OpMode2

1 out of 3
2 out of 3
3 out of 3

1 out of 3

Number of phases required for op (1 of 3, 2 of

3, 3 of 3) from step 2

Pickup2

1 - 200

%VB

150

Voltage pickup value (Definite-Time & InverseTime curve) in % of VBase, step 2

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Definitive time delay of step 2

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 2

TD2

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 2

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

%VB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2

Table 232:
Name

OV2PTOV (59) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
0.025

Description
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for

step 1

tIReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1

ACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 1

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for step 1

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CrvSat1

0 - 100

Tuning param for programmable over voltage

TOV curve, step 1

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time

curve step 2

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2

tIReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2

Table continues on next page

466
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 2

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 2

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for step 2

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CrvSat2

0 - 100

Tuning param for programmable over voltage

TOV curve, step 2

Table 233:

OV2PTOV (59) Non group settings (basic)

Name
ConnType

8.2.6

Values (Range)
PhN DFT
PhPh DFT
PhN RMS
PhPh RMS

Unit

Step

Default
PhN DFT

Description
Group selector for connection type

Technical data
Table 234:

OV2PTOV (59) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage, step 1

and 2

(1-200)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn

Absolute hysteresis

(0100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn

Inverse time
characteristics for steps 1
and 2, see table 702

See table 702

Definite time delay, step 1

(0.00 - 6000.00) s

0.5% 10 ms

Definite time delays

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Minimum operate time,

Inverse characteristics

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time, pickup

function

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset

Reset time, pickup

function

25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

467
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

8.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

(59N)
Function description
Two step residual overvoltage
protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ROV2PTOV

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59N

3U0
TRV V1 EN

8.3.1

Introduction
Residual voltages may occur in the power system during ground faults.
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) function calculates the
residual voltage from the three-phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a
single voltage input transformer fed from a broken delta or neutral point voltage
transformer.
ROV2PTOV (59N) has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
Reset delay ensures operation for intermittent ground faults.

8.3.2

Principle of operation
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N) is used to detect high singlephase voltage, such as high residual voltage, also called 3V0. The residual voltage can
be measured directly from a voltage transformer in the neutral of a power transformer
or from a three-phase voltage transformer, where the secondary windings are
connected in an open delta. Another possibility is to measure the three-phase voltages
and internally in the IED calculate the corresponding residual voltage and connect this
calculated residual voltage to ROV2PTOV (59N). ROV2PTOV (59N) has two steps
with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage remains above the set
value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding
TRIP signal is issued.
The time delay characteristic is individually chosen for the two steps and can be either,
definite time delay or inverse time delay.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in kV,
phase-phase.

468
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

8.3.2.1

Measurement principle
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
Pickup1 and Pickup2.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

8.3.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (TOV). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available:

inverse curve A
inverse curve B
inverse curve C
customer programmable inverse curve

The type A curve is described as:

t=

TD
V - Vpickup >

Vpickup >
(Equation 127)

ANSIEQUATION2422 V1 EN

where:
Un>

Set value for step 1 and step 2

Measured voltage

The type B curve is described as:

t=

TD 480

V - Vpickup >
- 0.5
32
Vpickup
>

2.0

- 0.035

(Equation 128)

ANSIEQUATION2423 V1 EN

The type C curve is described as:

t=

TD 480

V - Vpickup >
- 0.5
32
Vpickup >

3.0

+ 0.035

ANSIEQUATION2421 V1 EN

(Equation 129)

The customer programmable curve can be created as:

469
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

t=

TD A

V - Vpickup

-C
B
Vpickup

EQUATION1616 V1 EN

+D

(Equation 130)

When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Vpickup up to Vpickup
(1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Vpickup (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:

CrvSatn
-C > 0
100

EQUATION1440 V1 EN

(Equation 131)

The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".
TRIP signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (TOV).
If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases during the delay
time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for
the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse time) the corresponding
PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed.
Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition
must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the
hysteresis area. Also notice that for the overvoltage function TOV reset time is
constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period.
However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer is reset
instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer value is
linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 233 and figure 234.

470
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

tIReset1
tIReset1

Voltage
PICKUP

TRIP

PU_Overvolt1

HystAbs1

Measured
Voltage

Time
PICKUP

TRIP

Time
Integrator
Frozen Timer

Linearly
decreased

Time

Instantaneous

ANSI05000019-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000019 V3 EN

Figure 240:

Voltage profile not causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

471
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

tIReset1

Voltage
PICKUP

PICKUP

tIReset1
HystAbs1

TRIP

Pickup1
Measured Voltage

Time
t

PICKUP

TRIP

Time
Integrator

Frozen Timer

Time
Instantaneous

Linearly decreased

ANSI05000020-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000020 V2 EN

Figure 241:

Voltage profile causing a reset of the PICKUP signal for step 1, and inverse time delay

Definite timer delay

When definite time delay is selected, the function will operate as shown in figure 242.
Detailed information about individual stage reset/operation behavior is shown in figure
227 and figure 228 respectively. Note that by setting tResetn = 0.0s, instantaneous reset
of the definite time delayed stage is ensured.

472
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

PU_ST1

tReset1

a
a>b

Vpickup>

t1
t

TRST1

AND
OFF
Delay

ON
Delay

ANSI10000100-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000100 V2 EN

Figure 242:

Detailed logic diagram for step 1, Definite time delay, DT operation

Pickup1

PICKUP

TRIP
tReset1

t1

ANSI10000037-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000037 V2 EN

Figure 243:

Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 reset

473
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Pickup1

PICKUP

TRIP

tReset1

t1

ANSI10000038-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000038 V2 EN

Figure 244:

8.3.2.3

Example for Definite Time Delay stage 1 operation

Blocking
It is possible to block Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV (59N)
partially or completely, by binary input signals where:

8.3.2.4

BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTR1:

blocks all trip outputs of step 1

BLK1:

blocks all pickup and trip outputs related to step 1

BLKTR2:

blocks all trip outputs of step 2

BLK2:

blocks all PICKUP and trip inputs related to step 2

Design
The voltage measuring elements continuously measure the residual voltage. Recursive
Fourier filters filter the input voltage signal. The single input voltage is compared to
the set value, and is also used for the inverse time characteristic integration. The design
of Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV, 59N) is schematically
described in figure 245.

474
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Comparator
VN >
Pickup 1

VN

Phase 1

PICKUP
Time integrator
tIReset1
ResetTypeCrv1

Comparator
VN >
Pickup2

TRIP

TRST1

Pickup
t1
tReset1
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 1

PU_ST2

Phase 1

PICKUP
Time integrator
tIReset2
ResetTypeCrv2

PU_ ST1

TRIP

TRST2

Pickup
t2
tReset2
&
Trip
Output
Logic
Step 2

OR

OR

PICKUP

TRIP

ANSI05000748-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000748 V2 EN

Figure 245:

8.3.3

Schematic design of Two step residual overvoltage protection

ROV2PTOV (59N)

Function block
ROV2PTOV (59N)
V3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
TRST1
BLKTR1
TRST2
BLK1
PICKUP
BLKTR2
PU_ST1
BLK2
PU_ST2
ANSI06000278-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000278 V2 EN

Figure 246:

ROV2PTOV (59N) function block

475
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection
8.3.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 235:

ROV2PTOV (59N) Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase voltages

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR1

BOOLEAN

Block of trip signal, step 1

BLK1

BOOLEAN

Block of step 1

BLKTR2

BOOLEAN

Block of trip signal, step 2

BLK2

BOOLEAN

Block of step 2

ROV2PTOV (59N) Output signals

Name

Table 237:
Name

Description

V3P

Table 236:

8.3.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip

TRST1

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step1

TRST2

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal from step2

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General pickup signal

PU_ST1

BOOLEAN

Common pickup signal from step1

PU_ST2

BOOLEAN

Common pickup signal from step2

Setting parameters
ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

OperationStep1

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable execution of step 1

Characterist1

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 1

Pickup1

1 - 200

%VB

30

Voltage setting/pickup value (DT & TOV),

step 1 in % of VBase

t1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

5.00

Definitive time delay of step 1

t1Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 1

Table continues on next page

476
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Step

Default

TD1

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 1

HystAbs1

0.0 - 100.0

%VB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 1

OperationStep2

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable execution of step 2

Characterist2

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for step 2

Pickup2

1 - 100

%VB

45

Voltage setting/pickup value (DT & TOV),

step 2 in % of VBase

t2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Definitive time delay of step 2

t2Min

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Minimum operate time for inverse curves for

step 2

TD2

0.05 - 1.10

0.01

0.05

Time multiplier for the inverse time delay for

step 2

HystAbs2

0.0 - 100.0

%VB

0.1

0.5

Absolute hysteresis in % of VBase, step 2

Table 238:

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

ROV2PTOV (59N) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tReset1

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
0.025

Description
Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1

ResetTypeCrv1

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of used IDMT reset curve type for

step 1

tIReset1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 1

ACrv1

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 1

BCrv1

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CCrv1

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 1

DCrv1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for step 1

PCrv1

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 1

CrvSat1

0 - 100

Tuning param for programmable over voltage

TOV curve, step 1

tReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in Definite-Time reset (s), step 2

ResetTypeCrv2

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of Time Delay reset curve for step 2

Table continues on next page

477
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

tIReset2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.025

Time delay in Inverse-Time reset (s), step 2

ACrv2

0.005 - 200.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for step 2

BCrv2

0.50 - 100.00

0.01

1.00

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CCrv2

0.0 - 1.0

0.1

0.0

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for step 2

DCrv2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for step 2

PCrv2

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for step 2

CrvSat2

0 - 100

Tuning param for programmable over voltage

TOV curve, step 2

8.3.6

Step

Default

Description

Technical data
Table 239:

ROV2PTOV (59N) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage, step 1

and step 2

(1-200)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
1.0% of V at V > Vn

Absolute hysteresis

(0100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn at V < Vn
1.0% of V at V > Vn

Inverse time
characteristics for low
and high step, see
table 704

See table 704

Definite time setting, step

1

(0.006000.00) s

0.5% 10 ms

Definite time setting

(0.00060.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Minimum operate time

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time, pickup

function

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset

Reset time, pickup

function

25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

478
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

8.4

Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24)

Function description
Overexcitation protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

OEXPVPH

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
24

U/f >
SYMBOL-Q V1 EN

8.4.1

Introduction
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated
components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy
currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent
parts in a relatively short time. The function has settable inverse operating curves and
independent alarm stages.

8.4.2

Principle of operation
The importance of Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH, 24) function is growing as
the power transformers as well as other power system elements today operate most of
the time near their designated limits.
Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if
emergency that causes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged unless
corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend an
overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.
Overexcitation results from excessive applied voltage, possibly in combination with
below-normal frequency. Such condition may occur when a transformer unit is on load,
but are more likely to arise when it is on open circuit, or at a loss of load occurrence.
Transformers directly connected to generators are in particular danger to experience
overexcitation condition. It follows from the fundamental transformer equation, see
equation 132, that peak flux density Bmax is directly proportional to induced voltage
E, and inversely proportional to frequency f, and turns n.
E = 4.44 f n Bmax A
EQUATION898 V2 EN

(Equation 132)

479
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The relative excitation M is therefore according to equation 133.

M ( p.u.) =

E f

( Vr ) ( fn )
(Equation 133)

ANSIEQUATION2296 V1 EN

Disproportional variations in quantities E and f may give rise to core overfluxing. If the
core flux density Bmax increases to a point above saturation level (typically 1.9 Tesla),
the flux will no longer be contained within the core, but will extend into other (nonlaminated) parts of the power transformer and give rise to eddy current circulations.
Overexcitation will result in:

overheating of the non-laminated metal parts

a large increase in magnetizing currents
an increase in core and winding temperature
an increase in transformer vibration and noise

Protection against overexcitation is based on calculation of the relative volt per hertz (V/
Hz) ratio. Protection initiates a reduction of excitation, and if this fails, or if this is not
possible, the TRIP signal will disconnect the transformer from the source after a delay
ranging from seconds to minutes, typically 5-10 seconds.
Overexcitation protection may be of particular concern on directly connected generator
unit transformers. Directly connected generator-transformers are subjected to a wide
range of frequencies during the acceleration and deceleration of the turbine. In such
cases, OEXPVPH (24) may trip the field breaker during a start-up of a machine, by
means of the overexcitation ALARM signal. If this is not possible, the power
transformer can be disconnected from the source, after a delay, by the TRIP signal.
The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers operate continuously at not
more than 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load, the
ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not exceed
1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a sustained
basis, see equation 134.
E
f

1.1

Vn
fn
(Equation 134)

EQUATION1630 V1 EN

or equivalently, with 1.1 Vn = Pickup1 according to equation 135.

480
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

E
f

Pickup1
fn
(Equation 135)

ANSIEQUATION2297 V2 EN

where:

Pickup1 is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.

Pickup1 is a setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 180%. If the user does not
know exactly what to set, then the default value for Pickup1 = 110 % given by the IEC
60076-1 standard shall be used.
In OEXPVPH (24), the relative excitation M is expressed according to equation 136.
M ( p.u.) =

E f
Vn fn

ANSIEQUATION2299 V1 EN

(Equation 136)

It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for
any E and f, where the ratio E/f is equal to Vn/fn. A power transformer is not
overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M Pickup1, Pickup1 expressed in %
of Vn/fn.
The overexcitation protection algorithm is fed with an input voltage V which is in
general not the induced voltage E from the fundamental transformer equation. For no
load condition, these two voltages are the same, but for a loaded power transformer the
internally induced voltage E may be lower or higher than the voltage V which is
measured and fed to OEXPVPH (24), depending on the direction of the power flow
through the power transformer, the power transformer side where OEXPVPH (24) is
applied, and the power transformer leakage reactance of the winding. It is important to
specify in the application configuration on which side of the power transformer
OEXPVPH (24) is placed.
As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load,
0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer
core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated
frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided between
the primary and the secondary winding: XLeakage = XLeakage1 = XLeakage2 = Xsc /
2 = 0.075 pu.
OEXPVPH (24) calculates the internal induced voltage E if XLeakage (meaning the
leakage reactance of the winding where OEXPVPH (24) is connected) is known to the
user. The assumption taken for two-winding power transformers that XLeakage = Xsc /

481
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

2 is unfortunately most often not true. For a two-winding power transformer the
leakage reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the
core with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the
situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance,
then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, XLeakage can be set to Xc/2.
OEXPVPH (24) protection will then take the given measured voltage V, as the induced
voltage E.
It is assumed that overexcitation is a symmetrical phenomenon, caused by events such
as loss-of-load, etc. It will be observed that a high phase-to-ground voltage does not
mean overexcitation. For example, in an ungrounded power system, a single phase-toground fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases-to-ground, but no
overexcitation on any winding. The phase-to-phase voltages will remain essentially
unchanged. The important voltage is the voltage between the two ends of each winding.

8.4.2.1

Measured voltage
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where overexcitation
protection is applied, then Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24) shall be set to
measure this voltage, MeasuredV. The particular voltage which is used determines the
two currents that must be used. This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.
It is extremely important that MeasuredV and MeasuredI are set to
same value.
If, for example, voltage Vab is fed to OEXPVPH(24), then currents Ia, and Ib must be
applied. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by
the OEXPVPH (24) algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of
the rated value, otherwise the protection algorithm exits without calculating the
excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation V/
Hz shows 0.000.
If three phase-to-ground voltages are available from the side where overexcitation is
connected, then OEXPVPH (24) shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage and
current. In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are
used by OEXPVPH (24). A check is made if the positive sequence voltage is higher
than 70% of rated phase-to-ground voltage, when below this value, OEXPVPH (24)
exits immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and the
displayed value of relative excitation V/Hz shows 0.000.
The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function operates
for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 Hz and 60 Hz
respectively.

482
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

OEXPVPH (24) can be connected to any power transformer side, independent

from the power flow.
The side with a possible load tap changer must not be used.

8.4.2.2

Operate time of the overexcitation protection

The operate time of OEXPVPH (24) is a function of the relative overexcitation.
Basically there are two different delay laws available to choose between:

the so called IEEE law, and

a tailor-made law.

The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on
analysis of the various transformers overexcitation capability characteristics. They can
match the transformer core capability well.
The square law is according to equation 137.
top =

0.18 TD

PUV Hz - 1

0.18 TD
overexcitation

(Equation 137)

ANSIEQUATION2298 V2 EN

where:
M

the relative excitation

Pickup1 is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
TD

is time multiplier for inverse time functions, see figure 248.

Parameter TD (time delay multiplier setting) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.

The relative excitation M is calculated using equation138

Vmeasured

fmeasured
=

ANSIEQUATION2404 V1 EN

Vmeasured

frated

VBase VBase fmeasured

frated
(Equation 138)

483
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

An analog overexcitation relay would have to evaluate the following integral

expression, which means to look for the instant of time t = top according to
equation 139.
top

( M ( t ) - Pickup1)

dt 0.18 TD

(Equation 139)

ANSIEQUATION2300 V1 EN

A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (that is, j = n) where it
becomes true that:
n

Dt

( M( j) - PUV / Hz )

0.18 TD

j=k

(Equation 140)

EQUATION1636 V1 EN

where:
Dt

is the time interval between two successive executions of OEXPVPH (24) and

M(j) - Pickup1 is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given
as Vn/fn.

As long as M > Pickup1 (that is, overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be
larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be
tripped at j = n.
Inverse delays as per figure 248, can be modified (limited) by two special definite
delay settings, namely t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay, see figure 247.

484
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

delay in s
t_MaxTrip
Delay

under excitation

inverse delay law

overexcitation
t_MinTripDelay
0
M=Pickup1
Pickup1

Mmax Pickup1
Mmax
Emax

Overexcitation M-Pickup1
Excitation M

E (only if f = fn = const)
ANSI99001067-2en.vsd

ANSI99001067 V2 EN

Figure 247:

Restrictions imposed on inverse delays by t_MaxTripDelay and

t_MinTripDelay

A definite maximum time, t_MaxTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at
low degrees of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than t_MaxTripDelay will not be
allowed. In case the inverse delay is longer than t_MaxTripDelay, OEXPVPH (24)
trips after t_MaxTripDelay seconds.
A definite minimum time, t_MinTripDelay, can be used to limit the operate time at
high degrees of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than
t_MinTripDelay, OEXPVPH (24) function trips after t_MinTripDelay seconds. The
inverse delay law is not valid for values exceeding Mmax. The delay will be tMin,
irrespective of the overexcitation level, when values exceed Mmax (that is, M>Pickup1).

485
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEEE OVEREXCITATION CURVES

Time (s)

1000

100
TD = 60

TD = 20

TD = 10
TD = 9
TD = 8
TD = 7
TD = 6
TD = 5

10

TD = 4
TD = 3
TD = 2

TD = 1
1

10

20

OVEREXCITATION IN %

30

40

(M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373_ansi.vsd

ANSI01000373 V1 EN

Figure 248:

Delays inversely proportional to the square of the overexcitation

The critical value of excitation M is determined indirectly via OEXPVPH (24) setting
Pickup2. Pickup2 can be thought of as a no-load voltage at rated frequency, where the
inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, t_MinTripDelay. If, for
example, Pickup2 = 140 %, then M is according to equation 141.
M=

( Pickup2 f )
Vn/fn

ANSIEQUATION2286 V1 EN

= 1.40
(Equation 141)

The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this
case the interval between M = Pickup1, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into
486
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5 and t6) as shown in
figure 249. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.
delay in s

t_MaxTripDelay

t_MinTripDelay

underexcitation

Overexcitation M-E maxcont

0
Emaxcont

M max - E maxcont Excitation M

M max
99001068_ansi.vsd

ANSI99001068 V1 EN

Figure 249:

An example of a Tailor-Made delay characteristic

Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear
interpolation.
Should it happen that t_MaxTripDelay be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2,
the actual delay would be t_MaxTripDelay. Above Mmax, the delay can only be
t_MinTripDelay.

8.4.2.3

Cooling
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH (24) is basically a thermal protection; therefore a
cooling process has been introduced. Exponential cooling process is applied. Parameter
Setting tool is an OEXPVPH (24) setting, with a default time constant t_CoolingK of
20 minutes. This means that if the voltage and frequency return to their previous
normal values (no more overexcitation), the normal temperature is assumed to be
reached not before approximately 5 times t_CoolingK minutes. If an overexcitation
condition would return before that, the time to trip will be shorter than it would be
otherwise.

8.4.2.4

Overexcitation protection function measurands

A monitored data value, TMTOTRIP, is available on the local HMI and in PCM600.
This value is an estimation of the remaining time to trip (in seconds), if the
overexcitation remained on the level it had when the estimation was done. This
information can be useful during small or moderate overexcitations.
If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is t_MaxTripDelay, then the
estimation of the remaining time to trip is done against t_MaxTripDelay.
487

Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

The relative excitation M, shown on the local HMI and in PCM600 has a monitored
data value VPERHZ, is calculated from the expression:
M ( p.u.) =

E f
Vn fn

ANSIEQUATION2299 V1 EN

(Equation 142)

If VPERHZ value is less than setting Pickup1 (in %), the power transformer is
underexcited. If VPERHZ is equal to Pickup1 (in %), the excitation is exactly equal to
the power transformer continuous capability. If VPERHZ is higher than Pickup1, the
protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if VPERHZ = 1.100, while
Pickup1 = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum continuous
excitation limit.
Monitored data value THERMSTA shows the thermal status of the protected power
transformer iron core. THERMSTA gives the thermal status in % of the trip value
which corresponds to 100%. THERMSTA should reach 100% at the same time, as
TMTOTRIP reaches 0 seconds. If the protected power transformer is then for some
reason not switched off, THERMSTA shall go over 100%.
If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by t_MaxTripDelay, and/
or t_MinTripDelay, then the Thermal status will generally not reach 100% at the same
time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation,
the very long delay is limited by t_MaxTripDelay, then the OEXPVPH (24) TRIP
output signal will be set to 1 before the Thermal status reaches 100%.

8.4.2.5

Overexcitation alarm
A separate step, AlarmPickup, is provided for alarming purpose. It is normally set 2%
lower than (Pickup1) and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the operator
an early abnormal voltages warning.

488
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

8.4.2.6

Logic diagram
BLOCK
AlarmPickup
0-tMax
0

0-tMax
0
Pickup1
Calculation
of internal
induced
voltage Ei

I3P

Ei

M=
(Ei / f)
(Vn / fn)

ALARM

t>tMin

&

TRIP

t_MinTripDelay
TD

&

tAlarm

M>Pickup1

V3P

t>tAlarm

IEEE law

0-tMax
M
0
Tailor-made law
t_MaxTripDelay
M>Pickup2

OR

Xleakage
Pickup2

M = relative Pickup as service value

ANSI05000162-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000162 V2 EN

Figure 250:

A simplified logic diagram of the Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

(24)

Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and
frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.

8.4.3

Function block
OEXPVPH (24)
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
RESET

TRIP
PICKUP
ALARM

ANSI05000329-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000329 V2 EN

Figure 251:

OEXPVPH (24) function block

489
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection
8.4.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 240:

OEXPVPH (24) Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Current connection

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

RESET

BOOLEAN

Reset operation

OEXPVPH (24) Output signals

Name

Table 242:
Name

Description

I3P

Table 241:

8.4.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip from overexcitation function

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Overexcitation above set trip pickup (instantaneous)

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Overexcitation above set alarm pickup (delayed)

Setting parameters
OEXPVPH (24) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current (rated phase current) in A

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage (main voltage) in kV

Pickup1

100.0 - 180.0

%VB/f

0.1

110.0

Operate level of V/Hz at no load and rated

freq in % of (Vbase/frated)

Pickup2

100.0 - 200.0

%VB/f

0.1

140.0

High level of V/Hz above which tMin is used,

in % of (Vbase/fn)

XLeakage

0.000 - 200.000

ohm

0.001

0.000

Winding leakage reactance in primary ohms

t_TripPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Length of the pulse for trip signal (in sec)

t_MinTripDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

7.000

Minimum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in

sec

t_MaxTripDelay

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

1800.00

Maximum trip delay for V/Hz inverse curve, in

sec

t_CoolingK

0.10 - 9000.00

0.01

1200.00

Transformer magnetic core cooling time

constant, in sec

CurveType

IEEE
Tailor made

IEEE

Inverse time curve selection, IEEE/Tailor made

Table continues on next page

490
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TDForIEEECurve

1 - 60

Time multiplier for IEEE inverse type curve

AlarmPickup

50.0 - 120.0

0.1

100.0

Alarm pickup level as % of Step1 trip pickup

level

tAlarm

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

5.00

Alarm time delay, in sec

Default

Table 243:

OEXPVPH (24) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

t1_UserCurve

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

7200.00

Time delay t1 (longest) for tailor made curve,

in sec

t2_UserCurve

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

3600.00

Time delay t2 for tailor made curve, in sec

t3_UserCurve

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

1800.00

Time delay t3 for tailor made curve, in sec

t4_UserCurve

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

900.00

Time delay t4 for tailor made curve, in sec

t5_UserCurve

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

450.00

Time delay t5 for tailor made curve, in sec

t6_UserCurve

0.00 - 9000.00

0.01

225.00

Time delay t6 (shortest) for tailor made curve,

in sec

Step

Default

Table 244:

Description

OEXPVPH (24) Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Description

MeasuredV

PosSeq
AB
BC
CA

AB

Selection of measured voltage

MeasuredI

AB
BC
CA
PosSeq

AB

Selection of measured current

8.4.6

Technical data
Table 245:

OEXPVPH (24) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Pickup value, pickup

(100180)% of (VBase/fn)

0.5% of V

Pickup value, alarm

(50120)% of pickup level

0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn

Pickup value, high level

(100200)% of (VBase/fn)

0.5% of V

Table continues on next page

491
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function

Range or value

Curve type

Accuracy

IEEE or customer defined

IEEE : t =

5% + 40 ms

(0.18 TD)
( M - 1) 2

EQUATION1645 V1 EN

(Equation 143)

where M = (E/f)/(Vn/fn)

8.5

Minimum time delay for inverse

function

(0.00060.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Maximum time delay for inverse

function

(0.009000.00) s

0.5% 10 ms

Alarm time delay

(0.009000.00)

0.5% 10 ms

Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV (60)

Function description
Voltage differential protection

8.5.1

IEC 61850
identification
VDCPTOV

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
60

Introduction
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from
two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one
trip step.

8.5.2

Principle of operation
The Voltage differential protection function VDCPTOV (60) is based on comparison
of the magnitudes of the two voltages connected in each phase. Possible differences
between the ratios of the two Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers can be
compensated for with a ratio correction factors RF_X. The voltage difference is
evaluated and if it exceeds the alarm level VDAlarm or trip level VDTrip signals for
alarm (ALARM output) or trip (TRIP output) is given after definite time delay tAlarm
respectively tTrip. The two three phase voltage supplies are also supervised with
undervoltage settings V1Low and V2Low. The outputs for loss of voltage V1LOW resp
V2LOW will be activated. The V1 voltage is supervised for loss of individual phases
whereas the V2 voltage is supervised for loss of all three phases.
Loss of all U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This blocking
can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow = No.

492
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

VDCPTOV (60) function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary
BLOCK input. It can for example, be activated from Fuse failure supervision function
SDDRFUF.
To allow easy commissioning the measured differential voltage is available as service
value. This allows simple setting of the ratio correction factor to achieve full balance in
normal service.
The principle logic diagram is shown in figure 252.
VDTrip_A

AND

VDTrip_B

AND

VDTrip_C

O
R

0
0-tReset

0-tTrip
0

AND

AND
AND

VDAlarm_A

TRIP

PICKUP

AND

VDAlarm_B

AND

VDAlarm_C

O
R

0-tAlarm
0

AND

ALARM

AND

V1LOW

AND

V1Low_A
V1Low_B

AND

0-tAlarm
0

V1Low_C

AND
OR

BlkDiffAtULow
V2Low_A
V2Low_B

AND

0-t1
0

AND

V2LOW

V2Low_C
BLOCK

en06000382_2_ansi.vsd
ANSI06000382 V3 EN

Figure 252:

Principle logic for Voltage differential function VDCPTOV (60)

493
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection
8.5.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
VDCPTOV (60)
V3P1*
V3P2*
BLOCK

TRIP
PICKUP
ALARM
V1LOW
V2LOW
VDIFF_A
VDIFF_B
VDIFF_C
ANSI06000528-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000528 V2 EN

Figure 253:

8.5.4

VDCPTOV (60) function block

Input and output signals

Table 246:
Name

VDCPTOV (60) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3P1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Bus voltage

V3P2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Capacitor voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

Table 247:
Name

VDCPTOV (60) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Voltage differential protection operated

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Pickup of voltage differential protection

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Voltage differential protection alarm

V1LOW

BOOLEAN

Loss of V1 voltage

V2LOW

BOOLEAN

Loss of V2 voltage

VDIFF_A

REAL

Differential Voltage phase A

VDIFF_B

REAL

Differential Voltage phase B

VDIFF_C

REAL

Differential Voltage phase C

494
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

8.5.5
Table 248:

Setting parameters
VDCPTOV (60) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable/Disable

VBase

0.50 - 2000.00

kV

0.01

400.00

Base Voltage

BlkDiffAtVLow

No
Yes

Yes

Block operation at low voltage

VDTrip

0.0 - 100.0

%VB

0.1

5.0

Operate level, in % of VBase

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Time delay for voltage differential operate, in

milliseconds

tReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for voltage differential reset, in

seconds

V1Low

0.0 - 100.0

%VB

0.1

70.0

Input 1 undervoltage level, in % of VBase

V2Low

0.0 - 100.0

%VB

0.1

70.0

Input 2 undervoltage level, in % of VBase

tBlock

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Reset time for undervoltage block

VDAlarm

0.0 - 100.0

%VB

0.1

2.0

Alarm level, in % of VBase

tAlarm

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Time delay for voltage differential alarm, in

seconds

Table 249:

VDCPTOV (60) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

RF_A

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Ratio compensation factor phase L1

U2L1*RFL1=U1L1

RF_B

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Ratio compensation factor phase L2

U2L2*RFL2=U1L2

RF_C

0.000 - 3.000

0.001

1.000

Ratio compensation factor phase L3

U2L3*RFL3=U1L3

8.5.6

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Technical data
Table 250:

VDCPTOV (60) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Voltage difference for alarm and

trip

(0.0100.0) % of VBase

0.5 % of Vn

Under voltage level

(0.0100.0) % of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Timers

(0.00060.000)s

0.5% 10 ms

495
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

8.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)

Function description
Loss of voltage check

8.6.1

IEC 61850
identification
LOVPTUV

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
27

Introduction
Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV, 27) is suitable for use in networks with an
automatic system restoration function. LOVPTUV (27) issues a three-pole trip
command to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a
time longer than the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.

8.6.2

Principle of operation
The operation of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27) is based on line voltage
measurement. LOVPTUV (27) is provided with a logic, which automatically
recognizes if the line was restored for at least tRestore before starting the tTrip timer.
All three phases are required to be low before the output TRIP is activated. The
PICKUP output signal indicates pickup.
Additionally, LOVPTUV (27) is automatically blocked if only one or two phase
voltages have been detected low for more than tBlock.
LOVPTUV (27) operates again only if the line has been restored to full voltage for at
least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure and open
circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs of the
function block.
Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length set
by setting tPulse.
The operation of LOVPTUV (27) is supervised by the fuse-failure function (BLKV
input) and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit
breaker.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. LOVPTUV (27) is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and the
function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (Blocked=Yes).

496
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
AND
Blocked = Yes

PICKUP

BLOCK

OR
Function Enable

tPulse
AND

PU_V_A
PU_V_B

TRIP

0-tTrip
0

AND
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
at least 10 s (not three)

Latched
Enable

PU_V_C

AND

OR

0-tBlock
0

CBOPEN

Reset Enable

OR

AND

VTSU
OR

Set Enable

0-tRestore

OR

Line restored for

at least 3 s

ANSI07000089_2_en.vsd
ANSI07000089 V2 EN

Figure 254:

Simplified diagram of Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV (27)

8.6.3

Function block
LOVPTUV (27)
V3P*
BLOCK
CBOPEN
VTSU

TRIP
PICKUP

ANSI07000039-2-en.vsd
ANSI07000039 V2 EN

Figure 255:

LOVPTUV (27) function block

497

Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection
8.6.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 251:

LOVPTUV (27) Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block the all outputs

CBOPEN

BOOLEAN

Circuit breaker open

VTSU

BOOLEAN

Block from voltage circuit supervision

LOVPTUV (27) Output signals

Name

Table 253:
Name

Description

V3P

Table 252:

8.6.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal

Setting parameters
LOVPTUV (27) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable/Disable

VBase

0.1 - 9999.9

kV

0.1

400.0

Base voltage

VPG

1 - 100

%VB

70

Pickup voltage in % of base voltage Vbase

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

7.000

Operate time delay

Table 254:
Name

LOVPTUV (27) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

tPulse

0.050 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
0.150

Description
Duration of TRIP pulse

tBlock

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Time delay to block when all 3ph voltages are

not low

tRestore

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Time delay for enable the function after

restoration

498
Technical reference manual

Section 8
Voltage protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

8.6.6

Technical data
Table 255:
Function

LOVPTUV (27) technical data

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage

(0100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Pulse timer

(0.05060.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Timers

(0.00060.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

499
Technical reference manual

500

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 9

Frequency protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes the frequency protection functions. The way the functions work,
their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data
are included for each function.

9.1

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81)

Function description
Underfrequency protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SAPTUF

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81

f<
SYMBOL-P V1 EN

9.1.1

Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in the network.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is used for load shedding systems, remedial
action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on.
SAPTUF (81) is also provided with undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phasephase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to
connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/
Setting guidelines

9.1.2

Principle of operation
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) is used to detect low power system
frequency. SAPTUF (81) can either have a definite time delay or a voltage magnitude
dependent time delay. If the voltage magnitude dependent time delay is applied, the
time delay will be longer if the voltage is higher, and the delay will be shorter if the
501

Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

voltage is lower. If the frequency remains below the set value for a time period
corresponding to the chosen time delay, the corresponding trip signal is issued. To
avoid an unwanted trip due to uncertain frequency measurement at low voltage
magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available, that is, if the
voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel the function is blocked and
no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.

9.1.2.1

Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the measured input voltage is measured continuously,
and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. The frequency function is dependent
on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases the setting IntBlockLevel,
SAPTUF (81) gets blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. All voltage
settings are made in percent of the setting VBase, which should be set as a phase-phase
voltage in kV.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.1.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) can be either a settable
definite time delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay
depends on the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low
voltage level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting
TimeDlyOperate sets the time delay.
For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings VNom,
VMin, Exponent, t_MaxTripDelay and t_MinTripDelay set the time delay according to
figure 256 and equation 144. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type
of time delay to apply.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay TimeDlyOperate. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again
within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that
the defined reset time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the
hysteresis area, the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient
for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area.
On the output of SAPTUF (81) a 100ms pulse is issued, after a time delay
corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency returns
to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.

502
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

9.1.2.3

Voltage dependent time delay

Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to decide,
where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the voltage level
is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas with low
voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to make sure
that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At constant
voltage, V, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to equation 144.
At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar way as for the
inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage functions.
V - VMin
VNom - VMin

t=

Exponent

( t _ MaxTripDelay - t _ MinTripDelay ) + t _ MinTripDelay

(Equation 144)

EQUATION1559 V1 EN

where:
t

is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),

is the measured voltage

Exponent

is a setting,

VMin, VNom

are voltage settings corresponding to

t_MaxTripDelay, t_MinTripDelay are time settings.

The inverse time characteristics are shown in figure 256, for:

VMin

= 90%
= 100%

t_MaxTrip
Delay

= 1.0 s

t_MinTripD
elay

= 0.0 s

Exponent

= 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4

503
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

TimeDlyOperate [s]

0
Exponenent

1
2

3
0.5

90

95

100

V [% of VBase]
en05000075_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000075 V1 EN

Figure 256:

9.1.2.4

Voltage dependent inverse time characteristics for underfrequency

protection SAPTUF (81). The time delay to operate is plotted as a
function of the measured voltage, for the Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
respectively.

Blocking
It is possible to block underfrequency protection SAPTUF (81) partially or completely,
by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP:

blocks the TRIP output

BLKREST:

blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
PICKUP and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

9.1.2.5

Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults. The time integrator can operate
either due to a definite delay time or to the special voltage dependent delay time. When
the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is
issued after the time delay TimeDlyRestore. The design of underfrequency protection
SAPTUF (81) is schematically described in figure 257.

504
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Block
OR

BLKDMAGN

BLOCK

Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel

Voltage

Time integrator

Frequency

Comparator
f < PuFrequency

TimerOperation Mode
Selector

PICKUP

TimeDlyOperate

TRIP

Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic

PICKUP

TimeDlyReset

TRIP

100 ms
Comparator
f > RestoreFreq

TimeDlyRestore

RESTORE

en05000726_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000726 V1 EN

Figure 257:

9.1.3

Simplified logic diagram for SAPTUF (81)

Function block
SAPTUF (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKREST

TRIP
PICKUP
RESTORE
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
ANSI06000279-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000279 V2 EN

Figure 258:

9.1.4

SAPTUF (81) function block

Input and output signals

Table 256:
Name

SAPTUF (81) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTRIP

BOOLEAN

Blocking operate output.

BLKREST

BOOLEAN

Blocking restore output.

505
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 257:

SAPTUF (81) Output signals

Name

9.1.5
Table 258:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Operate/trip signal for frequency.

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Start/pick-up signal for frequency.

RESTORE

BOOLEAN

Restore signal for load restoring purposes.

BLKDMAGN

BOOLEAN

Blocking indication due to low magnitude.

FREQ

REAL

Measured frequency

Setting parameters
SAPTUF (81) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

Vbase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

PUFrequency

35.00 - 75.00

Hz

0.01

48.80

Frequency setting pickup value.

IntBlockLevel

0 - 100

%VB

50

Internal blocking level in % of VBase.

TimeDlyOperate

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Operate time delay in over/under-frequency

mode.

TimeDlyReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for reset.

TimeDlyRestore

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Restore time delay.

RestoreFreq

45.00 - 65.00

Hz

0.01

50.10

Restore frequency if frequency is above

frequency value.

TimerOperation

Definite timer
Volt based timer

Definite timer

Setting for choosing timer mode.

VNom

50 - 150

%VB

100

Nominal voltage in % of VBase for voltage

based timer.

VMin

50 - 150

%VB

90

Lower operation limit in % of VBase for

voltage based timer.

Exponent

0.0 - 5.0

0.1

1.0

For calculation of the curve form for voltage

based timer.

t_MaxTripDelay

0.010 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Maximum time operation limit for voltage

based timer.

t_MinTripDelay

0.010 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Minimum time operation limit for voltage

based timer.

506
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

9.1.6

Technical data
Table 259:

SAPTUF (81) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

(35.00-75.00) Hz

2.0 mHz

Operate time, pickup function

100 ms typically

Reset time, pickup function

100 ms typically

Operate time, definite time function

(0.000-60.000)s

0.5% 10 ms

Reset time, definite time function

(0.000-60.000)s

0.5% 10 ms

Voltage dependent time delay

Settings:
VNom=(50-150)% of Vbase
VMin=(50-150)% of Vbase
Exponent=0.0-5.0
t_MaxTripDelay=(0.000-60.000
)s
t_MinTripDelay=(0.000-60.000)
s

5% + 200 ms

V - VMin
t=
VNom - VMin

Exponent

( t _ MaxTripDelay - t _ MinTripDelay ) + t _ MinTripDelay

Operate value, pickup function

EQUATION1559 V1 EN

(Equation 145)

V=Vmeasured

9.2

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)

Function description
Overfrequency protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SAPTOF

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81

f>
SYMBOL-O V1 EN

507
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection
9.2.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Introduction
Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF (81) is applicable in all situations, where
reliable detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed.
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power
network. Close to the generating plant, generator governor problems can also cause
over frequency.
SAPTOF (81) is used mainly for generation shedding and remedial action schemes. It
is also used as a frequency stage initiating load restoring.
SAPTOF (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phasephase or three phase-neutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to
connect analog inputs, refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/
Setting guidelines

9.2.2

Principle of operation
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is used to detect high power system
frequency. SAPTOF (81) has a settable definite time delay. If the frequency remains
above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay, the
corresponding TRIP signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain
frequency measurement at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the
function is available from the preprocessing function, that is, if the voltage is lower
than the set blocking voltage in the preprocessing function, the function is blocked and
no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued.

9.2.2.1

Measurement principle
The fundamental frequency of the positive sequence voltage is measured continuously,
and compared with the set value, PUFrequency. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF
(81) is dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the voltage magnitude decreases below
the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPTOF (81) is blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is
issued. All voltage settings are made in percent of the VBase, which should be set as a
phase-phase voltage in kV. To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a
hysteresis has been included.

9.2.2.2

Time delay
The time delay for Overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) is a settable definite time
delay, specified by the setting TimeDlyOperate.

508
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

TRIP signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay, TimeDlyReset. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during this user set delay time, and is not fulfilled again
within a user defined reset time, TimeDlyReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that
the defined reset time has elapsed. It is to be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area,
the PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to
only return back to the hysteresis area.

9.2.2.3

Blocking
It is possible to block overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81) partially or completely,
by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP:

blocks the TRIP output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
PICKUP and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

9.2.2.4

Design
The frequency measuring element continuously measures the frequency of the positive
sequence voltage and compares it to the setting PUFrequency. The frequency signal is
filtered to avoid transients due to switchings and faults in the power system. The time
integrator operates due to a definite delay time. The design of overfrequency protection
SAPTOF (81) is schematically described in figure 259.

509
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

BLOCK
BLKTRIP

BLOCK

Voltage

Time integrator
Definite Time Delay

Frequency

BLKDMAGN

OR

Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel

Comparator
f > PuFrequency

PICKUP

Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic

PICKUP

TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP

en05000735_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000735 V1 EN

Figure 259:

9.2.3

Schematic design of overfrequency protection SAPTOF (81)

Function block
SAPTOF (81)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTRIP

TRIP
PICKUP
BLKDMAGN
FREQ
ANSI06000280-2-en.vsd

ANSI06000280 V2 EN

Figure 260:

9.2.4

SAPTOF (81) function block

Input and output signals

Table 260:
Name

SAPTOF (81) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTRIP

BOOLEAN

Blocking operate output.

510
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 261:

SAPTOF (81) Output signals

Name

9.2.5
Table 262:

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Operate/trip signal for frequency.

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Start/pick-up signal for frequency.

BLKDMAGN

BOOLEAN

Blocking indication due to low magnitude.

FREQ

REAL

Measured frequency

Setting parameters
SAPTOF (81) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

PUFrequency

35.00 - 75.00

Hz

0.01

51.20

Frequency setting pickup value.

IntBlockLevel

0 - 100

%VB

50

Internal blocking level in % of VBase.

TimeDlyOperate

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Operate time delay in over/under-frequency

mode.

TimeDlyReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for reset.

9.2.6

Technical data
Table 263:

SAPTOF (81) technical data

Function

9.3

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, pickup function

(35.00-75.00) Hz

2.0 mHz at
symmetrical threephase voltage

Operate time, pickup function

100 ms typically at fset -0.5 Hz to fset +0.5 Hz

Reset time, pickup function

100 ms typically

Operate time, definite time

function

(0.000-60.000)s

0.5% 10 ms

Reset time, definite time function

(0.000-60.000)s

0.5% 10 ms

Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)

511
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function description
Rate-of-change frequency protection

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SAPFRC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
81

df/dt >
<
SYMBOL-N V1 EN

9.3.1

Introduction
Rate-of-change frequency protection function (SAPFRC,81) gives an early indication
of a main disturbance in the system. SAPFRC (81) can be used for generation
shedding, load shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC (81) can discriminate
between positive or negative change of frequency.
SAPFRC (81) is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation is based on
positive sequence voltage measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phaseneutral voltages to be connected. For information about how to connect analog inputs,
refer to Application manual/IED application/Analog inputs/Setting guidelines.

9.3.2

Principle of operation
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is used to detect fast power system
frequency changes, increase as well as, decrease at an early stage. SAPFRC (81) has a
settable definite time delay. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains below the set
value, for negative rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the
TRIP signal is issued. If the rate-of-change of frequency remains above the set value,
for positive rate-of-change, for a time period equal to the chosen time delay, the TRIP
signal is issued. To avoid an unwanted TRIP due to uncertain frequency measurement
at low voltage magnitude, a voltage controlled blocking of the function is available,
that is if the voltage is lower than the set blocking voltage IntBlockLevel, the function
is blocked and no PICKUP or TRIP signal is issued. If the frequency recovers, after a
frequency decrease, a restore signal is issued.

9.3.2.1

Measurement principle
The rate-of-change of the fundamental frequency of the selected voltage is measured
continuously, and compared with the set value, PUFreqGrad. Rate-of-change
frequency protection SAPFRC (81) is also dependent on the voltage magnitude. If the
voltage magnitude decreases below the setting IntBlockLevel, SAPFRC (81) is
blocked, and the output BLKDMAGN is issued. The sign of the setting PUFreqGrad,
controls if SAPFRC (81) reacts on a positive or on a negative change in frequency. If
SAPFRC (81) is used for decreasing frequency that is, the setting PUFreqGrad has
been given a negative value, and a trip signal has been issued, then a 100 ms pulse is

512
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

issued on the RESTORE output, when the frequency recovers to a value higher than
the setting RestoreFreq. A positive setting of PUFreqGrad, sets SAPFRC (81) to
PICKUP and TRIP for frequency increases.
To avoid oscillations of the output PICKUP signal, a hysteresis has been included.

9.3.2.2

Time delay
Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81) has a settable definite time delay,
tTrip. .
Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues
for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the PICKUP condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time, tReset, the PICKUP output is reset, after that the defined reset
time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the
PICKUP condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only
return back into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of SAPFRC (81) is set, after a time delay equal to the setting of
tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to the level corresponding to
RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If tRestore is set to 0.000 s the
restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be given. The restore functionality
is only active for lowering frequency conditions and the restore sequence is disabled if
a new negative frequency gradient is detected during the restore period, defined by the
settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.

9.3.2.3

Blocking
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) can be partially or totally blocked,
by binary input signals or by parameter settings, where:
BLOCK:

blocks all outputs

BLKTRIP:

blocks the TRIP output

BLKREST:

blocks the RESTORE output

If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
PICKUP and the TRIP outputs, are blocked.

9.3.2.4

Design
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC, 81) measuring element continuously
measures the frequency of the selected voltage and compares it to the setting
513

Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

PUFreqGrad. The frequency signal is filtered to avoid transients due to power system
switchings and faults. The time integrator operates with a definite delay time. When
the frequency has returned back to the setting of RestoreFreq, the RESTORE output is
issued after the time delay tRestore, if the TRIP signal has earlier been issued. The sign
of the setting PUFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising
or lowering frequency conditions. The design of SAPFRC (81) is schematically
described in figure 261.

BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET

Voltage

Rate-of-Change
of Frequency

OR

BLOCK

BLKDMAGN

Comparator
V < IntBlockLevel

Comparator
If
[PickupFreqGrad<0
PICKUP
AND
df/dt < PickupFreqGrad]
OR
[PickupFreqGrad>0
AND
df/dt > PickupFreqGrad]
Then
PICKUP

Time integrator
Definite Time Delay
TimeDlyOperate

Pickup
&
Trip
Output
Logic

PICKUP

TimeDlyReset
TRIP

100 ms
Frequency

Comparator
f > RestoreFreq

TimeDlyRestore

RESTORE

en05000835_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000835 V1 EN

Figure 261:

Schematic design of Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC (81)

514
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

9.3.3

Function block
SAPFRC (81)
V3P*
TRIP
BLOCK
PICKUP
BLKTRIP
RESTORE
BLKREST
BLKDMAGN
ANSI06000281-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000281 V2 EN

Figure 262:

9.3.4

SAPFRC (81) function block

Input and output signals

Table 264:

SAPFRC (81) Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTRIP

BOOLEAN

Blocking operate output.

BLKREST

BOOLEAN

Blocking restore output.

SAPFRC (81) Output signals

Name

Table 266:

Description

V3P

Table 265:

9.3.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient

RESTORE

BOOLEAN

Restore signal for load restoring purposes.

BLKDMAGN

BOOLEAN

Blocking indication due to low magnitude.

Setting parameters
SAPFRC (81) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for the phase-phase voltage in kV

PUFreqGrad

-10.00 - 10.00

Hz/s

0.01

0.50

Frequency gradient start value. Sign defines

direction.

IntBlockLevel

0 - 100

%VB

50

Internal blocking level in % of VBase.

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Operate time delay in pos./neg. frequency

gradient mode.

Table continues on next page

515
Technical reference manual

Section 9
Frequency protection
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

RestoreFreq

45.00 - 65.00

Hz

0.01

49.90

Restore frequency if frequency is above

frequency value (Hz)

tRestore

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Restore time delay.

tReset

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay for reset.

9.3.6

Description

Technical data
Table 267:

SAPFRC (81) Technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, pickup function

(-10.00-10.00) Hz/s

10.0 mHz/s

Operate value, internal blocking

level

(0-100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Operate time, pickup function

100 ms typically

516
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 10

Multipurpose protection

About this chapter

This chapter describes Multipurpose protection and includes the General current and
voltage function. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function
blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

10.1

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC

Function description
General current and voltage protection

10.1.1

IEC 61850
identification
CVGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be utilized as a negative
sequence current protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or
unsymmetrical faults.
CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive ground faults,
outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are
used, which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This
will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in
conjunction with the detection of the ground fault from the directional ground fault
protection function.

10.1.2

Principle of operation

10.1.2.1

Measured quantities within CVGAPC

General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function is always connected to threephase current and three-phase voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always
measure only one current and one voltage quantity selected by the end user in the
setting tool.
The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 268.
517

Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 268:

Current selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the

parameter

CurrentInput

Comment

PhaseA

CVGAPC function will measure the phase A current phasor

PhaseB

CVGAPC function will measure the phase B current phasor

PhaseC

CVGAPC function will measure the phase C current phasor

PosSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence

current phasor

NegSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence

current phasor

3ZeroSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current

phasor multiplied by factor 3

MaxPh

CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude

MinPh

CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude

UnbalancePh

CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is

internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current phasor
of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the
time

10

PhaseA-PhaseB

CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as

the vector difference between the phase A current phasor and phase B
current phasor (IA-IB)

11

PhaseB-PhaseC

CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as

the vector difference between the phase B current phasor and phase C
current phasor (IB-IC)

12

PhaseC-PhaseA

CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as

the vector difference between the phase C current phasor and phase L1
current phasor ( IC-IA)

13

MaxPh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum
magnitude

14

MinPh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum
magnitude

15

UnbalancePh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is

internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the phph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor with
minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 269:

518
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 269:

Voltage selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the

parameter

VoltageInput

Comment

PhaseA

CVGAPC function will measure the phase A voltage phasor

PhaseB

CVGAPC function will measure the phase B voltage phasor

PhaseC

CVGAPC function will measure the phase C voltage phasor

PosSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence

voltage phasor

-NegSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence

voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180 in
order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.

-3ZeroSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage

phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180 in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature
when used.

MaxPh

CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude

MinPh

CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude

UnbalancePh

CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is

internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage phasor
of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the
time

10

PhaseA-PhaseB

CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as

the vector difference between the phase A voltage phasor and phase B
voltage phasor (VA-VB)

11

PhaseB-PhaseC

CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as

the vector difference between the phase B voltage phasor and phase C
voltage phasor (VB-VC)

12

PhaseC-PhaseA

CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as

the vector difference between the phase C voltage phasor and phase A
voltage phasor ( VC-VA)

13

MaxPh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum
magnitude

14

MinPh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum
magnitude

15

UnbalancePh-Ph

CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is

internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the phph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage phasor with
minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0 all the time

It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 269 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB & VC or three phaseto-phase voltages VAB, VBC & VCA). This information about actual VT connection is
519
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will then take
automatic care about it.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 270 for built-in current
restraint feature:
Table 270:

Restraint current selection for CVGAPC function

Set value for the

parameter RestrCurr

10.1.2.2

Comment

PosSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence

current phasor

NegSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence

current phasor

3ZeroSeq

CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current

phasor multiplied by factor 3

MaxPh

CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with maximum
magnitude

Base quantities for CVGAPC function

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for
pickup levels of all measuring stages, shall be entered as setting parameters for every
CVGAPC function.
Base current shall be entered as:
1.
2.

rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured
Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 268.
rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by 3
(1.732 Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as
shown in table 268.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1.
2.

10.1.2.3

rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 269.
rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 269.

Built-in overcurrent protection steps

Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.

520
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity (see
table 268) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is
settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on other enabled built-in
features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step pickup signal.
Pickup signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the overcurrent
step are fulfilled at the same time.

Second harmonic feature

The overcurrent protection step can be restrained by a second harmonic component in

the measured current quantity (see table 268). However it shall be noted that this
feature is not applicable when one of the following measured currents is selected:

PosSeq (positive sequence current)

NegSeq (negative sequence current)
UnbalancePh (unbalance phase current)
UnbalancePh-Ph (unbalance ph-ph current)

This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step pickup if the second-to-first harmonic
ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.

Directional feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the
relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 268) and measured
voltage phasor (see table 269). In protection terminology it means that the General
currrent and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be made directional by
enabling this built-in feature. In that case overcurrent protection step will only operate
if the current flow is in accordance with the set direction (Forward, which means
towards the protected object, or Reverse, which means from the protected object). For
this feature it is of the outmost importance to understand that the measured voltage
phasor (see table 269) and measured current phasor (see table 268) will be used for
directional decision. Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the
appropriate current and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision.
CVGAPC function will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current
and voltage phasors selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria.
Table 271 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones) for
these two quantities for traditional directional relays.

521
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 271:
Set value for the
parameter

CurrentInput

Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature

Set value for the
parameter

VoltageInput

Comment

PosSeq

PosSeq

Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90
depending on the power

NegSeq

-NegSeq

Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45 to -90
depending on the power system voltage level (X/R ratio)

3ZeroSeq

-3ZeroSeq

Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0 to -90
depending on the power system grounding (that is, solidly
grounding, grounding via resistor)

Phase1

Phase2-Phase3

Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Phase2

Phase3-Phase1

Directional overcurrent function for the second phase is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Phase3

Phase1-Phase2

Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is

obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30 or +45

Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.
Two types of directional measurement principles are available, I & V and IcosPhi&V.
The first principle, referred to as "I & V" in the parameter setting tool, checks that:

the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 263).

522
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

V=-3V0

RCADir
Ipickup

ROADir

I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000252_anis.vsd
IEC05000252-ANIS V1 EN

Figure 263:

I & V directional operating principle for CVGAPC function

where:

RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50

The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&V" in the parameter setting tool, checks
that:

that the product Icos() is bigger than the set pick-up level, where is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by
the Icos() straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting;
see figure 263).

523
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

V=-3V0

RCADir
Ipickup

ROADir

I=3Io

Operate region
mta line

en05000253_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000253 V1 EN

Figure 264:

CVGAPC, IcosPhi&V directional operating principle

where:

RCADir is -75
ROADir is 50

Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the preset value. User can select one of the following three options:

Non-directional (operation allowed for low magnitude of the reference voltage)

Block (operation prevented for low magnitude of the reference voltage)
Memory (memory voltage shall be used to determine direction of the current)

It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms.
After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during
memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage
goes above set voltage memory limit.

Voltage restraint/control feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent of a measured
voltage quantity (see table 269). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead decreases with the decrease in the magnitude of the
measured voltage quantity. Two different types of dependencies are available:

Voltage restraint overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Slope)

524
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

PickupCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 * PickupCurr_OC1

VLowLimit_OC1

VHighLimit_OC1

Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000324 V1 EN

Figure 265:

Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation

Voltage controlled overcurrent (when setting parameter VDepMode_OC1=Step)

OC1 Stage Pickup Level

PickupCurr_OC1

VDepFact_OC1 *
PickupCurr_OC1

VHighLimit_OC1

Selected Voltage Magnitude

en05000323_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000323 V1 EN

Figure 266:

Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of

measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation

This feature will simply change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will as
well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT curves
(overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage conditions).
525
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Current restraint feature

The overcurrent protection step operation can be made dependent of a restraining

current quantity (see table 270). Practically then the pickup level of the overcurrent
step is not constant but instead increases with the increase in the magnitude of the
restraining current.

IMeasured

pe
O

te
ra

ea
ar

IsetHigh

ff
oe
trC
s
e
I>R

tr
es
*I r

ain

IsetLow

atan(RestrCoeff)
Restraint
en05000255.vsd
IEC05000255 V1 EN

Figure 267:

Current pickup variation with restraint current magnitude

This feature will simply prevent overcurrent step to pickup if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for calculation
of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve operate time will
not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay
in accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of
the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the
end user setting.

10.1.2.4

Built-in undercurrent protection steps

Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 268) with the set pickup level.
The undercurrent step will pickup and set its pickup signal to one if the magnitude of
the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The pickup signal will start
definite time delay with set time delay. If the pickup signal has value one for longer

526
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of
the pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the
setting.

10.1.2.5

Built-in overvoltage protection steps

Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity (see
table 269) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the magnitude
of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio is settable,
with default value of 0.99.
The pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end
user setting.

10.1.2.6

Built-in undervoltage protection steps

Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 269) with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level. Reset ratio is
settable, with default value of 1.01.
The pickup signal will start definite time delay or inverse (IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the pickup signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
pickup and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end
user setting.

10.1.2.7

Logic diagram
The simplified internal logics, for CVGAPC function are shown in the following figures.

527
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

IED

Phasors &
samples

Phasor calculation of
individual currents

Current and voltage selection

settings

Selection of which current

and voltage shall be given to
the built-in protection
elements

Selected current
Selected voltage

Restraint current selection

Selection of restraint current

Selected restraint current

Phasors &
samples

A/D conversion scaling

with CT ratio

52

CVGAPC function

Phasor calculation of
individual voltages

A/D conversion
scaling with CT ratio

ADM

ANSI05000169_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000169 V2 EN

Figure 268:

Treatment of measured currents within IED for CVGAPC function

Figure 268 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function
The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection function.
They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and kilovolts.
1.
2.
3.

Instantaneous values (samples) of currents & voltages from one three-phase

current and one three-phase voltage input.
Fundamental frequency phasors from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.
Sequence currents & voltages from one three-phase current and one three-phase
voltage input calculated by the pre-processing modules.

The multipurpose protection function:

528
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

1.
2.
3.

Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 268) for internally
measured current.
Selects one voltage from the three-phase input system (see table 269) for internally
measured voltage.
Selects one current from the three-phase input system (see table 270) for internally
measured restraint current.

529
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

CURRENT

UC1
2
Selected current

TRUC1

nd

Harmonic
restraint

PU_UC2

UC2
nd
2 Harmonic
restraint

TRUC2

PU_OC1

OC1

Selected restraint current

2nd Harmonic
restraint

TROC1

OR

Current restraint

BLK2ND
DIROC1

Directionality
Voltage control /
restraint

PU_OC2
TROC2

OC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint
Directionality

OR

VDIRLOW
DIROC2

Voltage control /
restraint

PU_OV1

OV1

TROV1
PU_OV2

OV2
Selected voltage

TROV2
PU_UV1

UV1

TRUV1
PU_UV2

UV2

TRUV2

VOLTAGE

530

en05000170_ansi.vsd

Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

ANSI05000170 V1 EN

Figure 269:

CVGAPC function main logic diagram for built-in protection elements

Logic in figure 269 can be summarized as follows:

1.

The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each
protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its
PICKUP and TRIP output signals.
More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following
four figures
Common PICKUP and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps
(internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.

2.
3.

Enable
second
harmonic

Second
harmonic check

DEF time
selected

a
b

AND

TROC1

OR

a>b

OC1=On
BLKOC1

BLKTROC1

0-DEF
0

Selected current

PickupCurr_OC1

NOT

PU_OC1

AND

Inverse
Voltage
control or
restraint
feature

Selected voltage

Selected restrain current

Directionality
check

DIR_OK

Inverse
time
selected

Current
Restraint
Feature
Imeasured > k Irestraint

en05000831_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000831 V1 EN

Figure 270:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step that is, OC1 (step OC2 has the
same internal logic)

531
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Bin input: BLKUC1TR

Selected current

b>a

AND

PickupCurr_UC1

TRUC1

AND

0-DEF
0

Operation_UC1=On

PU_UC1

Bin input: BLKUC1

en05000750_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000750 V1 EN

Figure 271:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step that is, UC1 (step UC2 has the
same internal logic)

DEF time
selected

0
Selected voltage

a
b

PickupVolt_OV1

BLKTROV1

0-DEF

AND

TROV1

OR

a>b

PU_OV1

AND
Inverse

Operation_OV1=On
BLKOV1

Inverse time
selected

en05000751_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000751 V1 EN

Figure 272:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)

532
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

DEF time
selected

0
Selected voltage

BLKTRUV1

0-DEF

AND

TRUV1

OR

b>a

PU_UV1

AND

PickupVolt_UV1

Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
selected

BLKUV1

en05000752_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000752 V1 EN

Figure 273:

Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)

10.1.3

Function block
CVGAPC
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKOC1
BLKOC1TR
ENMLTOC1
BLKOC2
BLKOC2TR
ENMLTOC2
BLKUC1
BLKUC1TR
BLKUC2
BLKUC2TR
BLKOV1
BLKOV1TR
BLKOV2
BLKOV2TR
BLKUV1
BLKUV1TR
BLKUV2
BLKUV2TR

TRIP
TROC1
TROC2
TRUC1
TRUC2
TROV1
TROV2
TRUV1
TRUV2
PICKUP
PU_OC1
PU_OC2
PU_UC1
PU_UC2
PU_OV1
PU_OV2
PU_UV1
PU_UV2
BLK2ND
DIROC1
DIROC2
VDIRLOW
CURRENT
ICOSFI
VOLTAGE
VIANGLE

ANSI05000372-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000372 V2 EN

Figure 274:

CVGAPC function block

533
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection
10.1.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 272:
Name

CVGAPC Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKOC1

BOOLEAN

Block of over current function OC1

BLKOC1TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for over current function OC1

ENMLTOC1

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1

BLKOC2

BOOLEAN

Block of over current function OC2

BLKOC2TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for over current function OC2

ENMLTOC2

BOOLEAN

When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2

BLKUC1

BOOLEAN

Block of under current function UC1

BLKUC1TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for under current function UC1

BLKUC2

BOOLEAN

Block of under current function UC2

BLKUC2TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for under current function UC2

BLKOV1

BOOLEAN

Block of over voltage function OV1

BLKOV1TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for over voltage function OV1

BLKOV2

BOOLEAN

Block of over voltage function OV2

BLKOV2TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for over voltage function OV2

BLKUV1

BOOLEAN

Block of under voltage function UV1

BLKUV1TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for under voltage function UV1

BLKUV2

BOOLEAN

Block of under voltage function UV2

BLKUV2TR

BOOLEAN

Block of trip for under voltage function UV2

Table 273:
Name

CVGAPC Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

TROC1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1

TROC2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2

TRUC1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1

TRUC2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2

TROV1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1

TROV2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2

Table continues on next page

534
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

10.1.5
Table 274:

Type

Description

TRUV1

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1

TRUV2

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2

PICKUP

BOOLEAN

General pickup signal

PU_OC1

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from overcurrent function OC1

PU_OC2

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from overcurrent function OC2

PU_UC1

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from undercurrent function UC1

PU_UC2

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from undercurrent function UC2

PU_OV1

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV1

PU_OV2

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from overvoltage function OV2

PU_UV1

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV1

PU_UV2

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from undervoltage function UV2

BLK2ND

BOOLEAN

Second harmonic block signal

DIROC1

INTEGER

Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)

DIROC2

INTEGER

Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)

VDIRLOW

BOOLEAN

Low voltage for directional polarization

CURRENT

REAL

Measured current value

ICOSFI

REAL

Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)

VOLTAGE

REAL

Measured voltage value

VIANGLE

REAL

Angle between voltage and current

Setting parameters
CVGAPC Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

CurrentInput

Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
Phase AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph

MaxPh

Select current signal which will be measured

inside function

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base Current

Table continues on next page

535
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Step

Default

Description

VoltageInput

Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
PosSeq
-NegSeq
-3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
Phase AB
Phase BC
Phase CA
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph

MaxPh

Select voltage signal which will be measured

inside function

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base Voltage

OperHarmRestr

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable operation of 2nd harmonic

restrain

l_2nd/l_fund

10.0 - 50.0

1.0

20.0

Ratio of second to fundamental current

harmonic in %

EnRestrainCurr

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable current restrain function

RestrCurrInput

PosSeq
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
Max

PosSeq

Select current signal which will be used for

current restrain

RestrCurrCoeff

0.00 - 5.00

0.01

0.00

Restraining current coefficient

RCADir

-180 - 180

Deg

-75

Relay Characteristic Angle

ROADir

1 - 90

Deg

75

Relay Operate Angle

LowVolt_VM

0.0 - 5.0

%VB

0.1

0.5

Below this level in % of Vbase setting

ActLowVolt takes over

Operation_OC1

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation of OC1

PickupCurr_OC1

2.0 - 5000.0

%IB

1.0

120.0

Pickup current for OC1 in % of Ibase

Table continues on next page

536
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CurveType_OC1

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for OC1

tDef_OC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

Independent (definitive) time delay of OC1

TD_OC1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for OC1

IMin1

1 - 10000

%IB

100

Minimum operate current for step1in% of IBase

tMin_OC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves

for OC1

VCntrlMode_OC1

Voltage control
Input control
Volt/Input control
Disabled

Disabled

Control mode for voltage controlled OC1

function

VDepMode_OC1

Step
Slope

Step

Voltage dependent mode OC1 (step, slope)

VDepFact_OC1

0.02 - 5.00

0.01

1.00

Multiplying factor for current pickup when

OC1 is voltage dependent

VLowLimit_OC1

1.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

50.0

Voltage low limit setting OC1 in % of Vbase

VHighLimit_OC1

1.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

100.0

Voltage high limit setting OC1 in % of Vbase

HarmRestr_OC1

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable block of OC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain

DirMode_OC1

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of OC1 (nondir,

forward,reverse)

DirPrinc_OC1

I&V
IcosPhi&U

I&V

Measuring on IandV or IcosPhiandV for OC1

ActLowVolt1_VM

Non-directional
Block
Memory

Non-directional

Low voltage level action for Dir_OC1 (Nodir,

Blk, Mem)

Operation_OC2

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation od OC2

PickupCurr_OC2

2.0 - 5000.0

%IB

1.0

120.0

Pickup current for OC2 in % of Ibase

Table continues on next page

537
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CurveType_OC2

ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.
ANSI Norm. inv.
ANSI Mod. inv.
ANSI Def. Time
L.T.E. inv.
L.T.V. inv.
L.T. inv.
IEC Norm. inv.
IEC Very inv.
IEC inv.
IEC Ext. inv.
IEC S.T. inv.
IEC L.T. inv.
IEC Def. Time
Programmable
RI type
RD type

ANSI Def. Time

Selection of time delay curve type for OC2

tDef_OC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

Independent (definitive) time delay of OC2

TD_OC2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for OC2

IMin2

1 - 10000

%IB

50

Minimum operate current for step2 in % of

IBase

tMin_OC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for IEC IDMT curves

for OC2

VCntrlMode_OC2

Voltage control
Input control
Volt/Input control
Disabled

Disabled

Control mode for voltage controlled OC2

function

VDepMode_OC2

Step
Slope

Step

Voltage dependent mode OC2 (step, slope)

VDepFact_OC2

0.02 - 5.00

0.01

1.00

Multiplying factor for current pickup when

OC2 is voltage dependent

VLowLimit_OC2

1.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

50.0

Voltage low limit setting OC2 in % of Vbase

VHighLimit_OC2

1.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

100.0

Voltage high limit setting OC2 in % of Vbase

HarmRestr_OC2

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable block of OC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain

DirMode_OC2

Non-directional
Forward
Reverse

Non-directional

Directional mode of OC2 (nondir,

forward,reverse)

DirPrinc_OC2

I&V
IcosPhi&U

I&V

Measuring on IandV or IcosPhiandV for OC2

ActLowVolt2_VM

Non-directional
Block
Memory

Non-directional

Low voltage level action for Dir_OC2 (Nodir,

Blk, Mem)

Operation_UC1

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable operation of UC1

EnBlkLowI_UC1

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable internal low current level blocking for

UC1

Table continues on next page

538
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

BlkLowCurr_UC1

0 - 150

%IB

20

Internal low current blocking level for UC1 in

% of Ibase

PickupCurr_UC1

2.0 - 150.0

%IB

1.0

70.0

Operate undercurrent level for UC1 in % of

Ibase

tDef_UC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

Independent (definitive) time delay of UC1

tResetDef_UC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time

curve UC1

HarmRestr_UC1

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable block of UC1 by 2nd harmonic restrain

Operation_UC2

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable operation of UC2

EnBlkLowI_UC2

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable internal low current level blocking for

UC2

BlkLowCurr_UC2

0 - 150

%IB

20

Internal low current blocking level for UC2 in

% of Ibase

PickupCurr_UC2

2.0 - 150.0

%IB

1.0

70.0

Operate undercurrent level for UC2 in % of

Ibase

tDef_UC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.50

Independent (definitive) time delay of UC2

HarmRestr_UC2

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable block of UC2 by 2nd harmonic restrain

Operation_OV1

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable operation of OV1

PickupVolt_OV1

2.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

150.0

Operate voltage level for OV1 in % of Vbase

CurveType_OV1

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for OV1

tDef_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use

of OV1

tMin_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time

curves for OV1

TD_OV1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for OV1

Operation_OV2

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable operation of OV2

PickupVolt_OV2

2.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

150.0

Pickup voltage for OV2 in % of Vbase

CurveType_OV2

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for OV2

tDef_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use

of OV2

tMin_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time

curves for OV2

Table continues on next page

539
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Step

Default

TD_OV2

0.05 - 999.00

Unit
-

0.01

0.30

Description
Time multiplier for the dependent time delay
for OV2

Operation_UV1

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable operation of UV1

PickupVolt_UV1

2.0 - 150.0

%VB

0.1

50.0

Operate undervoltage level for UV1 in % of

Vbase

CurveType_UV1

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for UV1

tDef_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use

of UV1

tMin_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time

curves for UV1

TD_UV1

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for UV1

EnBlkLowV_UV1

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable internal low voltage level blocking for

UV1

BlkLowVolt_UV1

0.0 - 5.0

%VB

0.1

0.5

Internal low voltage blocking level for UV1 in

% of Vbase

Operation_UV2

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable operation of UV2

PickupVolt_UV2

2.0 - 150.0

%VB

0.1

50.0

Pickup undervoltage for UV2 in % of Vbase

CurveType_UV2

Definite time
Inverse curve A
Inverse curve B
Prog. inv. curve

Definite time

Selection of time delay curve type for UV2

tDef_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

1.00

Operate time delay in sec for definite time use

of UV2

tMin_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.05

Minimum operate time for Inverse-Time

curves for UV2

TD_UV2

0.05 - 999.00

0.01

0.30

Time multiplier for the dependent time delay

for UV2

EnBlkLowV_UV2

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable internal low voltage level blocking for

UV2

BlkLowVolt_UV2

0.0 - 5.0

%VB

0.1

0.5

Internal low voltage blocking level for UV2 in

% of Vbase

540
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 275:

CVGAPC Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MultPU_OC1

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for OC1

ResCrvType_OC1

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for OC1

tResetDef_OC1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time

curve OC1

P_OC1

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for OC1

A_OC1

0.000 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for OC1

B_OC1

0.000 - 99.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for OC1

C_OC1

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for OC1

PR_OC1

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for OC1

TR_OC1

0.005 - 600.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for OC1

CR_OC1

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for OC1

MultPU_OC2

1.0 - 10.0

0.1

2.0

Multiplier for scaling the current setting value

for OC2

ResCrvType_OC2

Instantaneous
IEC Reset
ANSI reset

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for OC2

tResetDef_OC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time

curve OC2

P_OC2

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for OC2

A_OC2

0.000 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for OC2

B_OC2

0.000 - 99.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for OC2

C_OC2

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for OC2

PR_OC2

0.005 - 3.000

0.001

0.500

Parameter PR for customer programmable

curve for OC2

TR_OC2

0.005 - 600.000

0.001

13.500

Parameter TR for customer programmable

curve for OC2

CR_OC2

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Parameter CR for customer programmable

curve for OC2

tResetDef_UC2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay used in IEC Definite Time

curve UC2

Table continues on next page

541
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection
Name

Values (Range)

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ResCrvType_OV1

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for OV1

tResetDef_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use

of OV1

tResetIDMT_OV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time

curves for OV1

A_OV1

0.005 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for OV1

B_OV1

0.500 - 99.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for OV1

C_OV1

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for OV1

D_OV1

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for OV1

P_OV1

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for OV1

ResCrvType_OV2

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for OV2

tResetDef_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use

of OV2

tResetIDMT_OV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time

curves for OV2

A_OV2

0.005 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for OV2

B_OV2

0.500 - 99.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for OV2

C_OV2

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for OV2

D_OV2

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for OV2

P_OV2

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for OV2

ResCrvType_UV1

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for UV1

tResetDef_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use

of UV1

tResetIDMT_UV1

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time

curves for UV1

A_UV1

0.005 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for UV1

B_UV1

0.500 - 99.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for UV1

Table continues on next page

542
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

C_UV1

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for UV1

D_UV1

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for UV1

P_UV1

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for UV1

ResCrvType_UV2

Instantaneous
Frozen timer
Linearly decreased

Instantaneous

Selection of reset curve type for UV2

tResetDef_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for definite time use

of UV2

tResetIDMT_UV2

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

0.00

Reset time delay in sec for Inverse-Time

curves for UV2

A_UV2

0.005 - 999.000

0.001

0.140

Parameter A for customer programmable

curve for UV2

B_UV2

0.500 - 99.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter B for customer programmable

curve for UV2

C_UV2

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Parameter C for customer programmable

curve for UV2

D_UV2

0.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Parameter D for customer programmable

curve for UV2

P_UV2

0.001 - 10.000

0.001

0.020

Parameter P for customer programmable

curve for UV2

10.1.6

Technical data
Table 276:

CVGAPC technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Measuring current input

Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq,

NegSeq, 3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, Phase A-Phase B, Phase
B-Phase C, Phase C-Phase A, MaxPhPh, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph

Base current

(1 - 99999) A

Measuring voltage input

Phase A, Phase B, Phase C, PosSeq, NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,

UnbalancePh, Phase A-Phase B, Phase
B-Phase C, Phase C-Phase A, MaxPhPh, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-Ph

Base voltage

(0.05 - 2000.00) kV

Pickup overcurrent, step

1 and 2

(2 - 5000)% of IBase

1.0% of In for I<In

1.0% of I for I>In

Pickup undercurrent, step

1 and 2

(2 - 150)% of IBase

1.0% of In for I<In

1.0% of I for I>In

Table continues on next page

543
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection
Function

1MRK506312-UUS C

Range or value

Accuracy

Definite time delay

(0.00 - 6000.00) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time pickup

overcurrent

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Reset time pickup

overcurrent

25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

Operate time pickup

undercurrent

25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

Reset time pickup

undercurrent

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

See table 699 and table

700

Parameter ranges for customer defined

characteristic no 17:
TD: 0.05 - 999.00
A: 0.0000 - 999.0000
B: 0.0000 - 99.0000
C: 0.0000 - 1.0000
P: 0.0001 - 10.0000
PR: 0.005 - 3.000
TR: 0.005 - 600.000
CR: 0.1 - 10.0

See table 699 and table 700

Voltage level where

voltage memory takes
over

(0.0 - 5.0)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Pickup overvoltage, step

1 and 2

(2.0 - 200.0)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn for V<Vn

0.5% of V for V>Vn

Pickup undervoltage,
step 1 and 2

(2.0 - 150.0)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn for V<Vn

0.5% of V for V>Vn

Operate time, pickup

overvoltage

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset

Reset time, pickup

overvoltage

25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset

Operate time pickup

undervoltage

25 ms typically 2 to 0 x Vset

Reset time pickup

undervoltage

25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset

High and low voltage

limit, voltage dependent
operation

(1.0 - 200.0)% of VBase

1.0% of Vn for V<Vn

1.0% of V for V>Vn

Directional function

Settable: NonDir, forward and reverse

Relay characteristic angle

(-180 to +180) degrees

2.0 degrees

Relay operate angle

(1 to 90) degrees

2.0 degrees

Reset ratio, overcurrent

> 95%

Reset ratio, undercurrent

< 105%

Reset ratio, overvoltage

> 95%

Reset ratio, undervoltage

< 105%

Overcurrent:
Table continues on next page
544
Technical reference manual

Section 10
Multipurpose protection

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Vset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Critical impulse time

10 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Vset

Impulse margin time

15 ms typically

Undercurrent:

Overvoltage:

Undervoltage:

545
Technical reference manual

546

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 11

Secondary system supervision

About this chapter

This chapter describes functions like Current circuit supervision and Fuse failure
supervision. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,
input and output signals and technical data are included for each function.

11.1

Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87)

Function description
Current circuit supervision

11.1.1

IEC 61850
identification
CCSRDIF

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
87

Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, ground-fault current and negativesequence current functions.
It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at an occurrence of open
CT circuit will mean that the situation will remain and extremely high voltages will
stress the secondary circuit.
Current circuit supervision (CCSRDIF, 87) compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input
taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and is used as alarm or to
block protection functions expected to give unwanted tripping.

11.1.2

Principle of operation
Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87) compares the absolute value of the vectorial
sum of the three phase currents |Iphase| and the numerical value of the residual
current |Iref| from another current transformer set, see figure 275.
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
547

Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

The numerical value of the difference |Iphase| |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |Iphase| + |Iref|.
The numerical value of the current |Iphase| |Iref| is equal to or higher than the
set operate value IMinOp.
No phase current has exceeded Pickup_Block during the last 10 ms.
CCSRDIF (87) is enabled by setting Operation = Enabled.

The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms an ALARM will
be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the ANDgate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase
current supervision element(s) operate, for example, during a fault.
I>Pickup_Block
BLOCK
IA
IB
IC
I ref

IA
IB
IC
I ref

+
+
+

I>IMinOp
x
0,8

+
-

1,5 x Ir
OR

10 ms

OR

AND

FAIL

20 ms 100 ms

OPERATION

150 ms

1s

ALARM

BLOCK
en05000463_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000463 V1 EN

Figure 275:

Simplified logic diagram for Current circuit supervision CCSRDIF (87)

The operate characteristic is percentage restrained, see figure 276.

548
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

| I phase | - | I ref |

Slope = 1

Slope = 0.8

Operation
area

I MinOp
| I phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
IEC99000068 V1 EN

Figure 276:

Operate characteristics

Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S I
phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.

11.1.3

Function block
CCSRDIF (87)
I3P*
IREF*
BLOCK

FAIL
ALARM

ANSI05000389-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000389 V2 EN

Figure 277:

11.1.4

CCSRDIF (87) function block

Input and output signals

Table 277:
Name

CCSRDIF (87) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for three phase current input

IREF

GROUP
SIGNAL

Reference current signal input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

549
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

Table 278:

1MRK506312-UUS C

CCSRDIF (87) Output signals

Name

11.1.5
Table 279:
Name

Type

Description

FAIL

BOOLEAN

Detection of current circuit failure

ALARM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for current circuit failure

Setting parameters
CCSRDIF (87) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

IBase value for current pickup detectors

IMinOp

5 - 200

%IB

20

Minimum operate current differential pickup in

% of IBase

Table 280:
Name
Pickup_Block

11.1.6

CCSRDIF (87) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
5 - 500

Unit

Step

%IB

Default
150

Description
Block of the function at high phase current, in
% of IBase

Technical data
Table 281:

CCSRDIF (87) technical data

Function

11.2

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate current

(5-200)% of In

10.0% of In at I In
10.0% of I at I > In

Block current

(5-500)% of In

5.0% of In at I In
5.0% of I at I > In

Fuse failure supervision SDDRFUF

Function description
Fuse failure supervision

IEC 61850
identification
SDDRFUF

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

550
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

11.2.1

Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (SDDRFUF) is to block voltage
measuring functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage
transformer and the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might
occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three different algorithms, negative
sequence and zero sequence based algorithms and an additional delta voltage and delta
current algorithm.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated
or high-impedance grounded networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage without the presence of the negative-sequence
current 3I2.
The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or
low impedance grounded networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage 3V0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0.
For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been
introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative
sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation modes
makes it possible to choose different interaction possibilities between the negative
sequence and zero sequence based algorithm.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the
fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in
practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station operations.

11.2.2

Principle of operation

11.2.2.1

Zero and negative sequence detection

The zero and negative sequence function continuously measures the currents and
voltages in all three phases and calculates, see figure 278:

the zero-sequence voltage 3V0

the zero-sequence current 3I0
the negative sequence current 3I2
the negative sequence voltage 3V2

The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3V0PU and 3I0PU,
3V2PU and 3I2PU.

551
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetZeroSeq if the measured zerosequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V0PU and the measured zero-sequence
current is below the set value 3I0PU.
The function enable the internal signal FuseFailDetNegSeq if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3V2PU and the measured negative
sequence current is below the set value 3I2PU.
A drop out delay of 100 ms for the measured zero-sequence and negative sequence
current will prevent a false fuse failure detection at un-equal breaker opening at the two
line ends.
Sequence Detection
3I0PU
IA

IB

IC

CurrZeroSeq
Zero
sequence
filter

3I0
a
b

a>b

Negative
sequence
filter

3I2
AND

a
b

3I2PU

CurrNegSeq

100 ms
0

a>b

100 ms
0
AND

3V0PU

FuseFailDetZeroSeq

FuseFailDetNegSeq
VoltZeroSeq

VA

VB

VC

Zero
sequence
filter
Negative
sequence
filter

a
b

3V0

a>b
VoltNegSeq

a
b

3V2

a>b

3V2PU

ANSI10000036-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000036 V2 EN

Figure 278:

Simplified logic diagram for sequence detection part

The calculated values 3V0, 3I0, 3I2 and 3V2 are available as service values on local
HMI and monitoring tool in PCM600.

Input and output signals

The output signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ can be blocked in the following conditions:

552
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

The input BLOCK is activated

The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as the internal signal
fufailStarted is not present
The operation mode selector OpModeSel is set to Disable.
The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.
The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection
functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of
the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the
security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might
cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-out time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary
circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block
all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of
OpModeSel selector. The additional drop-out timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of
MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due to
non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal
BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is
open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the position of the line
disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the
distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is connected to the system
and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is disconnected from the system and
the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, synchro-check and so on) except for the impedance protection.
The function output BLKZ shall be used for blocking the impedance protection function.

553
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST
TEST ACTIVE

AND

BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK

intBlock

OR
20 ms
t

BLKTRIP
AND

100 ms
t
FusefailStarted

All UL < USealIn<

OR

AND

AND

AND

SealIn = On

3PH

AND
Any UL < UsealIn<
FuseFailDetDUDI
AND

OpDUDI = On

OR

5s
t

FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
UNsINs

OpMode

CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq

OR

UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs

OR

UZsIZs AND UNsINs

OptimZsNs
OR
a
b

AND

a>b

AND
200 ms
t

DeadLineDet1Ph

AND
150 ms
t

MCBOP

All UL > UsealIn<

VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq

60 s
t

OR

OR

OR

OR

AND

AND

BLKZ

BLKU

AND
5s
t

AllCurrLow
CBCLOSED
DISCPOS

IEC10000033-2-en.vsd

IEC10000033 V2 EN

554
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

Figure 279:

11.2.2.2

Simplified logic diagram for main logic of Fuse failure function

Delta current and delta voltage detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 280. The calculation of the
change is based on vector change which means that it detects both amplitude and phase
angle changes. The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set
values DI< and DU> and the algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient change in
voltage without a sufficient change in current is detected in each phase separately. The
following quantities are calculated in all three phases:

The change in voltage DU

The change in current DI

The internal FuseFailDetDUDI signal is activated if the following conditions are

fulfilled for a phase:

The magnitude of the phase-ground voltage has been above UPh> for more than
1.5 cycle
The magnitude of DU is higher than the corresponding setting DU>
The magnitude of DI is below the setting DI>

and at least one of the following conditions are fulfilled:

The magnitude of the phase current in the same phase is higher than the setting IPh>
The circuit breaker is closed (CBCLOSED = True)

The first criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high
current for the same phase will set the output. The measured phase current is used to
reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is low,
a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed by
current change and a false fuse failure might occur
The second criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at
the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and
energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse
failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to be an
important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only the
first criterion can activate the delta function.

555
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

DUDI Detection
DUDI detection Phase 1
IL1

One cycle
delay
|DI|

a
b

DI<
UL1

a>b

One cycle
delay
|DU|

a
b

DU>
a
b

UPh>
IL2

a>b

20 ms
t

a>b

AND

1.5 cycle
t

DUDI detection Phase 2

UL2

Same logic as for phase 1

IL3

DUDI detection Phase 3

UL3

Same logic as for phase 1

UL1

a
b

IL1
IPh>

a
b

a<b

a>b

AND

CBCLOSED
UL2

a
b

IL2

AND

a
b

a
b

IL3

a
b

OR

AND

a<b

a>b

AND

AND
UL3

OR

OR

OR

AND

a<b

a>b

AND

AND

OR

OR

AND
OR

FuseFailDetDUDI

IEC10000034-1-en.vsd
IEC10000034 V1 EN

Figure 280:

Simplified logic diagram for DU/DI detection part

556
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

11.2.2.3

Dead line detection

A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 281. A dead phase
condition is indicated if both the voltage and the current in one phase is below their
respective setting values VDLDPU and IDLDPU. If at least one phase is considered to
be dead the output DLD1PH and the internal signal DeadLineDet1Ph is activated. If all
three phases are considered to be dead the output DLD3PH is activated
Dead Line Detection
IA

a
b

IB

a
b

IC

a
b

a<b

AllCurrLow

AND
a<b
a<b

IDLDPU
VA

DeadLineDet1Ph
a
b

VB

a
b

VC

a
b

a<b
a<b

AND
OR

AND

AND
AND

a<b

DLD1PH

AND

AND

DLD3PH

VDLDPU
intBlock

ANSI0000035-1-en.vsd
ANSI0000035 V1 EN

Figure 281:

11.2.2.4

Simplified logic diagram for Dead Line detection part

Main logic
A simplified diagram for the functionality is found in figure 282. The fuse failure
supervision function (SDDRFUF) can be switched on or off by the setting parameter
Operation to Enabled or Disabled.
For increased flexibility and adaptation to system requirements an operation mode
selector, OpModeSel, has been introduced to make it possible to select different
operating modes for the negative and zero sequence based algorithms. The different
operation modes are:

Disabled; The negative and zero sequence function is disabled

V2I2; Negative sequence is selected
V0I0; Zero sequence is selected
557

Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

V0I0 OR V2I2; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in
parallel in an OR-condition
V0I0 AND V2I2; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in
series (AND-condition for operation)
OptimZsNs; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be activated)

The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OpDVDI to Enabled.
When selected it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithms.
As soon as any fuse failure situation is detected, signals FuseFailDetZeroSeq,
FuseFailDetNegSeq or FuseFailDetDVDI, and the specific functionality is released,
the function will activate the output signal BLKV. The output signal BLKZ will be
activated as well if not the internal dead phase detection, DeadLineDet1Ph, is not
activated at the same time. The output BLKV can be used for blocking voltage related
measuring functions (under voltage protection, synchro-check, and so on). For
blocking of impedance protection functions output BLKZ shall be used.
If the fuse failure situation is present for more than 5 seconds and the setting parameter
SealIn is set to Enabled it will be sealed in as long as at least one phase voltages is
below the set value VSealInPU. This will keep the BLKV and BLKZ signals activated
as long as any phase voltage is below the set value VSealInPU. If all three phase
voltages drop below the set value VSealInPU and the setting parameter SealIn is set to
Enabled the output signal 3PH will also be activated. The signals 3PH, BLKV and
BLKZ signals will now be active as long as any phase voltage is below the set value
VSealInPU.
If SealIn is set to Enabled the fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile
memory in the IED. At start-up of the IED (due to auxiliary power interruption or restart due to configuration change) it checks the stored value in its non volatile memory
and re-establishes the conditions that were present before the shut down. All phase
voltages must be greater than VSealInPU before fuse failure is de-activated and
removes the block of different protection functions.
The output signal BLKV will also be active if all phase voltages have been above the
setting VSealInPU for more than 60 seconds, the zero or negative sequence voltage has
been above the set value 3V0PU and 3V2PU for more than 5 seconds, all phase
currents are below the setting IDLDPU (operate level for dead line detection) and the
circuit breaker is closed (input 52a is activated).
If a MCB is used then the input signal MCBOP is to be connected via a terminal binary
input to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT
secondary circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKV and BLKZ in
order to block all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of
the setting of OpModeSel or OpDVDI. An additional drop-out timer of 150 ms

558
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

prolongs the presence of MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage
dependent function due to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the
miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal 89b is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to the
N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The 89b signal sets the output signal
BLKV in order to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is
open. The impedance protection function does not have to be affected since there will
be no line currents that can cause malfunction of the distance protection.
The output signals 3PH, BLKV and BLKZ as well as the signals DLD1PH and
DLD3PH from dead line detections are blocked if any of the following conditions occur:

The operation mode selector OpMode is set to Disabled

The input BLOCK is activated
The input BLKTRIP is activated at the same time as no fuse failure indication is
present
The IED is in TEST status (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has been
blocked from the HMI (BlockFUSE=Yes)

The input BLOCK is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure supervision
function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to receive a block
command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the IED. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and
internal function outputs.
The input BLKTRIP is intended to be connected to the trip output of any of the
protection functions included in the IED and/or trip from external equipments via
binary inputs. When activated for more than 20 ms without any fuse fail detected, the
operation of the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to
increase the security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker,
which might cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.

559
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

Fuse failure detection

Main logic
TEST
TEST ACTIVE

AND

BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK

intBlock

OR
20 ms
t

BLKTRIP
AND

100 ms
t
FusefailStarted

All VL < VSealInPU

OR

AND

AND

AND

SealIn = Enabled

3PH

AND
Any VL < VSealInPU
FuseFailDetDUDI
AND

OpDVDI = Enabled

OR

5s
t

FuseFailDetZeroSeq
AND

AND
FuseFailDetNegSeq
AND
UNsINs

OpModeSel

CurrZeroSeq
CurrNegSeq

OR

UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR UNsINs

OR

UZsIZs AND UNsINs

OptimZsNs
OR
a
b

AND

a>b

AND
200 ms
t

DeadLineDet1Ph

AND
150 ms
t

MCBOP

All VL > VSealInPU

60 s
t

VoltZeroSeq
VoltNegSeq

OR

OR

OR

OR

AND

AND

BLKZ

BLKV

AND
5s
t

AllCurrLow
52a
89b
ANSI10000033-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000033 V2 EN

560
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

Figure 282:

11.2.3

Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, Main logic

Function block
SDDRFUF
I3P*
V3P*
BLOCK
52A
MCBOP
89B
BLKTRIP

BLKZ
BLKV
3PH
DLD1PH
DLD3PH

ANSI05000700-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000700 V2 EN

Figure 283:

11.2.4

SDDRFUF function block

Input and output signals

Table 282:
Name

SDDRFUF Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Current connection

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage connection

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

52a

BOOLEAN

Active when circuit breaker is closed

MCBOP

BOOLEAN

Active when external Miniature Circuit Breaker opens

protected voltage circuit

89b

BOOLEAN

Active when line disconnect switch is open

BLKTRIP

BOOLEAN

Blocks operation of function when active

Table 283:
Name

SDDRFUF Output signals

Type

Description

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Start of current and voltage controlled function

BLKV

BOOLEAN

General pickup

3PH

BOOLEAN

Three-phase pickup

DLD1PH

BOOLEAN

Dead line condition in at least one phase

DLD3PH

BOOLEAN

Dead line condition in all three phases

561
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision
11.2.5
Table 284:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
SDDRFUF Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base current

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base voltage

OpModeSel

Disabled
V2I2
V0I0
V0I0 OR V2I2
V0I0 AND V2I2
OptimZsNs

V0I0

Operating mode selection

3V0PU

1 - 100

%VB

30

Pickup of residual overvoltage element in %

of VBase

3I0PU

1 - 100

%IB

10

Pickup of residual undercurrent element in %

of IBase

3V2PU

1 - 100

%VB

30

Pickup of negative sequence overvoltage

element in % of VBase

3I2PU

1 - 100

%IB

10

Pickup of negative sequence undercurrent

element in % of IBase

OpDVDI

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation of change based function Disable/

Enable

DVPU

1 - 100

%VB

60

Pickup of change in phase voltage in % of

VBase

DIPU

1 - 100

%IB

15

Pickup of change in phase current in % of

IBase

VPPU

1 - 100

%VB

70

Pickup of phase voltage in % of VBase

IPPU

1 - 100

%IB

10

Pickup of phase current in % of IBase

SealIn

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Seal in functionality Disable/Enable

VSealInPU

1 - 100

%VB

70

Pickup of seal-in phase voltage in % of VBase

IDLDPU

1 - 100

%IB

Pickup for phase current detection in % of

IBase for dead line detection

VDLDPU

1 - 100

%VB

60

Pickup for phase voltage detection in % of

VBase for dead line detection

562
Technical reference manual

Section 11
Secondary system supervision

1MRK506312-UUS C

11.2.6

Technical data
Table 285:

SDDRFUF technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate voltage, zero sequence

(1-100)% of VBase

1.0% of Vn

Operate current, zero sequence

(1100)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Operate voltage, negative sequence

(1100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Operate current, negative sequence

(1100)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Operate voltage change pickup

(1100)% of VBase

5.0% of Vn

Operate current change pickup

(1100)% of IBase

5.0% of In

Operate phase voltage

(1-100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Operate phase current

(1-100)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Operate phase dead line voltage

(1-100)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Operate phase dead line current

(1-100)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Operate time, general pickup of function

25 ms typically at 1 to 0 of Vbase

Reset time, general pickup of function

35 ms typically at 0 to 1 of Vbase

563
Technical reference manual

564

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 12

Control

About this chapter

This chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their setting
parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are included
for each function.

12.1

Synchronism check, energizing check, and

synchronizing SESRSYN (25)
Function description
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and
synchronizing

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SESRSYN

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
25

sc/vc
SYMBOL-M V1 EN

12.1.1

Introduction
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time, which improves the network stability.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN, 25) function checks
that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least
one side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.
SESRSYN (25) function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus
and breaker-and-a-half or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and can
have different settings.
For systems which are running asynchronous a synchronizing function is provided.
The main purpose of the synchronizing function is to provide controlled closing of
circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are going to be connected. It is used

565
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

for slip frequencies that are larger than those for synchronism check and lower than a
set maximum level for the synchronizing function.

12.1.2

Principle of operation

12.1.2.1

Basic functionality
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and
compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is given only when the actual
measured quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker,
from the measured slip frequency. The output is given only when all measured
conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed to
give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the
closing circuit.
For single circuit breaker and breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangements, the
SESRSYN (25) function blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage
selection. For single circuit breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is
made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors. For breaker-and-a-half circuit
breaker arrangements, correct voltage selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the
bus disconnectors as well as the circuit breakers.
The internal logic for each function block as well as, the input and outputs, and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this document.
For application related information, please refer to the application manual.

12.1.2.2

Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams

The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the SESRSYN function
components such as Synchrocheck, Synchronizing, Energizing check and Voltage
selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.

Synchronism check

The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the synchronism check function for
evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as phase-

566
Technical reference manual

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 12
Control

neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a setting,
which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.
When the function is set to OperationSC = Enabled, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
VHighBusSC and VHighLineSC.
If both sides are higher than the set values, the measured values are compared with the
set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference: FreqDiffA,
FreqDiffM, PhaseDiffA, PhaseDiffM and VDiffSC. If a compensation factor is set due
to the use of different voltages on the bus and line, the factor is deducted from the line
voltage before the comparison of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency difference
between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may not exceed the
set value.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available
and used for the manual closing and autoreclose functions respectively, as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN (25) function and block of the Synchronism check function respectively.
Input TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.
The outputs MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can be
delayed independently for MANSYOK and AUTOSYOK conditions.
A number of outputs are available as information about fulfilled checking conditions.
VOKSC shows that the voltages are high, VDIFFSC, FRDIFFA, FRDIFFM,
PHDIFFA, PHDIFFM shows when the voltage difference, frequency difference and
phase angle difference conditions are out of limits.
Output INADVCLS, inadvertent circuit breaker closing, indicate that the circuit
breaker has been closed by some other equipment or function than SESRSYN. The
output is activated, if the voltage condition is fulfilled at the same time the phase angle
difference between bus and line is suddenly changed from being larger than 60 degrees
to smaller than 5 degrees.

567
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Note! Similar logic for Manual Synchronism check.

OperationSC = Enabled
AND

AND

TSTAUTSY

TSTSC
BLKSC
BLOCK

AND
OR
AND

AUTOSYOK

tSCA

AND

0-60 ms
0

VDiffSC
AND

VHighBusSC

50 ms
0

VOKSC

AND

VHighLineSC

VDIFFSC

FreqDiffA

PhaseDiffA

FRDIFFA
PHDIFFA
VDIFFME

voltageDifferenceValue

FRDIFFME

frequencyDifferenceValue

PHDIFFME

phaseAngleDifferenceValue

100 ms

PhDiff > 60

AND

0
32 ms

AND

INADVCLS

PhDiff < 5

ANSI07000114-3-en.vsd
ANSI07000114 V3 EN

Figure 284:

Simplified logic diagram for the Auto Synchronism function

Synchronizing

When the function is set to OperationSynch = Enabled the measuring will be performed.
The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values
for VHighBusSynch and VHighLineSynch, which is a supervision that the voltages are
both live. Also the voltage difference is checked to be smaller than the set value for
VDiffSynch, which is a p.u value of set voltage base values. If both sides are higher
than the set values and the voltage difference between bus and line is acceptable, the
measured values are compared with the set values for acceptable frequency

568
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

FreqDiffMax and FreqDiffMin, rate of change of frequency FreqRateChange, phase

angle, which has to be smaller than the internally preset value of 15 degrees.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation to
be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle
release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK
output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function resets. The function
will also reset if the synchronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set tMaxSynch
time. This prevents that the function is, by mistake, maintained in operation for a long
time, waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN function and block of the Synchronizing function respectively.
TSTSYNCH will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate output.
SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH=ON

TEST MODE=ON
STARTSYN
AND

BLKSYNCH
OR

AND

S
R

VDiffSynch
VHighBusSynch

AND

50 ms
t

SYNOK

AND

VHighLineSynch

SYNPROGR

OR

FreqDiffMax

AND

FreqDiffMin

OR

FreqRateChange

AND

fBus&fLine 5Hz
Phase Diff < 15 deg

TSTSYNOK

tClose
Pulse

tMax
Synch
AND

SYNFAIL

PhaseDiff=closing angle
FreqDiff
tBreaker

Close pulse
in advance
ANSI06000636-3-en.vsd

ANSI06000636 V3 EN

Figure 285:

Simplified logic diagram for the synchronizing function

569
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Energizing check

Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by
the Synchronism check function.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are
live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values VHighBusEnerg and
VLowBusEnerg for bus energizing and VHighLineEnerg and VLowLineEnerg for line
energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision
conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for
MANENOK and AUTOENOK conditions. The Energizing direction can also be
selected by an integer input AENMODE respective MENMODE, which for example,
can be connected to a Binary to Integer function block (B16I). Integers supplied shall
be 1=off, 2=DLLB, 3=DBLL and 4= Both. Not connected input with connection of
INTZERO output from Fixed Signals (FIXDSIGN) function block will mean that the
setting is done from Parameter Setting tool. The active position can be read on outputs
MODEAEN resp MODEMEN. The modes are 0=OFF, 1=DLLB, 2=DBLL and 3=Both.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
SESRSYN (25) function respective block of the Energizing check function.
TSTENERG will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are
connected to a separate test output.

Voltage selection

The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer

fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the SESRSYN (25) function and
determines the parameters fed to the Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and Energizing
check functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages
and fuse supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig.
If No voltage sel. is set the default voltages used will be V-Line1 and V-Bus1. This is
also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for
the used inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function, selected voltages, and fuse conditions are the
Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.

570
Technical reference manual

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 12
Control

For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts to
supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but, it is also possible to use an
inverter for one of the positions.

Voltage selection for a single circuit breaker with double busbars

This function uses the binary input from the disconnectors auxiliary contacts BUS1_OPBUS1_CL for Bus 1, and BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL for Bus 2 to select between bus 1 and
bus 2 voltages. If the disconnector connected to bus 1 is closed and the disconnector
connected to bus 2 is opened the bus 1 voltage is used. All other combinations use the
bus 2 voltage. The outputs B1SEL and B2SEL respectively indicate the selected Bus
voltage.
The function checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs VB1OK-VB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1 and VB2OK-VB2FF
supervises the fuse for Bus 2. VL1OK and VL1FF supervises the fuse for the Line
voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used
dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage
source an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected bus
or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be blocked
with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure 286.

571
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL

B1SEL

AND

AND

B2SEL

NOT
AND

bus1Voltage

invalidSelection
busVoltage

bus2Voltage

VB1OK
VB1FF

OR

VB2OK
VB2FF

OR

VL1OK
VL1FF

OR

AND
OR

AND

AND
AND

selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL

BLOCK

en05000779_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000779 V1 EN

Figure 286:

Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit breaker with double busbars

Voltage selection for a breaker-and-a-half circuit breaker arrangement

Note that with breaker-and-a-half schemes two Synchronism check functions must be
used in the IED (three for two IEDs in a complete bay). Below, the scheme for one Bus
breaker and the Tie breaker is described.
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the SESRSYN
(Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side of
the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either to
line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement.
Inputs LINE1_OP-LINE1_CL, BUS1_OP-BUS1_CL, BUS2_OP-BUS2_CL,
LINE2_OP-LINE2_CL are inputs for the position of the Line disconnectors
respectively the Bus and Tie breakers. The outputs L1SEL, L2SEL and B2SEL will
give indication of the selected Line voltage as a reference to the fixed Bus 1 voltage,
which indicates B1SEL.

572
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

The fuse supervision is connected to VLNOK-VLNFF and with alternative Healthy or

Failing fuse signals depending on what is available from each fuse (MCB).
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other
side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are
possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.

The line 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is closed.

The bus 1 voltage is selected if the line 1 disconnector is open and the bus 1 circuit
breaker is closed.
The line 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is closed.
The bus 2 voltage is selected if the line 2 disconnector is open and the bus 2 circuit
breaker is closed.

The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If a
fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal VSELFAIL is set. This
output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output
as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function
block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in figure 287
and for the tie circuit breaker in figure 288.

573
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

LINE1_OP
LINE1_CL

L1SEL

AND

BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL

L2SEL

AND

AND

LINE2_CL

AND

invalidSelection

AND
AND

BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL

B2SEL

OR

LINE2_OP

AND

line1Voltage

lineVoltage

line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF

OR

VB2OK
VB2FF

OR

OR

VL1OK
VL1FF

OR

VL2OK
VL2FF

OR

AND

AND

AND

AND

selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL

AND

BLOCK

en05000780_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000780 V1 EN

Figure 287:

Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a breaker-anda-half arrangement

574
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

LINE1_OP
LINE1_CL

L1SEL

AND

B1SEL

NOT
BUS1_OP
BUS1_CL

AND

AND

AND

line1Voltage

busVoltage

bus1Voltage
LINE2_OP
LINE2_CL

L2SEL

AND

B2SEL

NOT
BUS2_OP
BUS2_CL

AND

AND

AND

OR

line2Voltage

invalidSelection

lineVoltage

bus2Voltage
VB1OK
VB1FF

OR

VB2OK
VB2FF

OR

AND
OR

VL1OK
VL1FF

OR

VL2OK
VL2FF

OR

AND

AND

AND

AND

selectedFuseOK
VSELFAIL

AND

BLOCK

en05000781_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000781 V1 EN

Figure 288:

Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in breaker-and-ahalf arrangement.

Fuse failure supervision

External fuse failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse switch/MCB are connected
to binary inputs that are configured to the inputs of SESRSYN (25) function in the
IED. Alternatively, the internal signals from fuse failure supervision can be used when
available. There are two alternative connection possibilities. Inputs labelled OK must
be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit is healthy. Inputs
575
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

labelled FF must be connected if the available contact indicates that the voltage circuit
is faulty.
The VB1OK/VB2OK and VB1FF/VB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and
the VLNOK and VLNFF inputs are related to the line voltage. Configure them to the
binary input or function outputs that indicate the status of the external fuse failure of
the busbar and line voltages. In the event of a fuse failure, the energizing check
function is blocked. The synchronism check function requires full voltage on both
sides and will be blocked automatically in the event of fuse failures.

12.1.3

Function block
SESRSYN (25)
V3PB1*
SYNOK
V3PB2*
AUTOSYOK
V3PL1*
AUTOENOK
V3PL2*
MANSYOK
BLOCK
MANENOK
BLKSYNCH
TSTSYNOK
BLKSC
TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG
TSTMANSY
BUS1_OP
TSTENOK
BUS1_CL
VSELFAIL
BUS2_OP
B1SEL
BUS2_CL
B2SEL
LINE1_OP
L1SEL
LINE1_CL
L2SEL
LINE2_OP
SYNPROGR
LINE2_CL
SYNFAIL
VB1OK
VOKSYN
VB1FF
VDIFFSYN
VB2OK
FRDIFSYN
VB2FF
FRDIFFOK
VL1OK
FRDERIVA
VL1FF
VOKSC
VL2OK
VDIFFSC
VL2FF
FRDIFFA
STARTSYN
PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH
FRDIFFM
TSTSC
PHDIFFM
TSTENERG
INADVCLS
AENMODE
VDIFFME
MENMODE
FRDIFFME
PHDIFFME
Vbus
VLine
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
ANSI10000046-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000046 V1 EN

Figure 289:

SESRSYN (25) function block

576
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.1.4

Input and output signals

Table 286:
Name

SESRSYN (25) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3PB1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1,

busbar 1

V3PB2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1,

busbar 2

V3PL1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1, line

1

V3PL2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for phase to ground voltage input L1, line

2

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

General block

BLKSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Block synchronizing

BLKSC

BOOLEAN

Block synchro check

BLKENERG

BOOLEAN

Block energizing check

BUS1_OP

BOOLEAN

Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1

BUS1_CL

BOOLEAN

Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus1

BUS2_OP

BOOLEAN

Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2

BUS2_CL

BOOLEAN

Close status for CB and disconnector connected to bus2

LINE1_OP

BOOLEAN

Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1

LINE1_CL

BOOLEAN

Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line1

LINE2_OP

BOOLEAN

Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2

LINE2_CL

BOOLEAN

Close status for CB and disconnector connected to line2

VB1OK

BOOLEAN

Bus1 voltage transformer OK

VB1FF

BOOLEAN

Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure

VB2OK

BOOLEAN

Bus2 voltage transformer OK

VB2FF

BOOLEAN

Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure

VL1OK

BOOLEAN

Line1 voltage transformer OK

VL1FF

BOOLEAN

Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure

VL2OK

BOOLEAN

Line2 voltage transformer OK

VL2FF

BOOLEAN

Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure

STARTSYN

BOOLEAN

Start synchronizing

TSTSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Set synchronizing in test mode

TSTSC

BOOLEAN

Set synchro check in test mode

TSTENERG

BOOLEAN

Set energizing check in test mode

AENMODE

INTEGER

Input for setting of automatic energizing mode

MENMODE

INTEGER

Input for setting of manual energizing mode

577
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 287:
Name

SESRSYN (25) Output signals

Type

Description

SYNOK

BOOLEAN

Synchronizing OK output

AUTOSYOK

BOOLEAN

Auto synchronism-check OK

AUTOENOK

BOOLEAN

Automatic energizing check OK

MANSYOK

BOOLEAN

Manual synchronism-check OK

MANENOK

BOOLEAN

Manual energizing check OK

TSTSYNOK

BOOLEAN

Synchronizing OK test output

TSTAUTSY

BOOLEAN

Auto synchronism-check OK test output

TSTMANSY

BOOLEAN

Manual synchronism-check OK test output

TSTENOK

BOOLEAN

Energizing check OK test output

VSELFAIL

BOOLEAN

Selected voltage transformer fuse failed

B1SEL

BOOLEAN

Bus1 selected

B2SEL

BOOLEAN

Bus2 selected

L1SEL

BOOLEAN

Line1 selected

L2SEL

BOOLEAN

Line2 selected

SYNPROGR

BOOLEAN

Synchronizing in progress

SYNFAIL

BOOLEAN

Synchronizing failed

VOKSYN

BOOLEAN

Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits

VDIFFSYN

BOOLEAN

Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing

FRDIFSYN

BOOLEAN

Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing

FRDIFFOK

BOOLEAN

Frequency difference in band for synchronizing

FRDERIVA

BOOLEAN

Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing

VOKSC

BOOLEAN

Voltage magnitudes above set limits

VDIFFSC

BOOLEAN

Voltage difference out of limit

FRDIFFA

BOOLEAN

Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation

PHDIFFA

BOOLEAN

Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation

FRDIFFM

BOOLEAN

Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation

PHDIFFM

BOOLEAN

Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation

INADVCLS

BOOLEAN

Inadvertent circuit breaker closing

VDIFFME

REAL

Calculated difference of voltage in p.u

FRDIFFME

REAL

Calculated difference of frequency

PHDIFFME

REAL

Calculated difference of phase angle

Vbus

REAL

Bus voltage

VLine

REAL

Line voltage

MODEAEN

INTEGER

Selected mode for automatic energizing

MODEMEN

INTEGER

Selected mode for manual energizing

578
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.1.5
Table 288:

Setting parameters
SESRSYN (25) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

CBConfig

No voltage sel.
Double bus
1 1/2 bus CB
1 1/2 bus alt. CB
Tie CB

No voltage sel.

Select CB configuration

VBaseBus

0.001 - 9999.999

kV

0.001

400.000

Base value for busbar voltage settings

VBaseLine

0.001 - 9999.999

kV

0.001

400.000

Base value for line voltage settings

PhaseShift

-180 - 180

Deg

Phase shift

VRatio

0.040 - 25.000

0.001

1.000

Voltage ratio

OperationSynch

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation for synchronizing function Off/On

VHighBusSynch

50.0 - 120.0

%VBB

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit bus for synchronizing in %

of UBaseBus

VHighLineSynch

50.0 - 120.0

%VBL

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in %

of VBaseLine

VDiffSynch

0.02 - 0.50

pu

0.01

0.10

Voltage difference limit for synchronizing in p.u

FreqDiffMin

0.003 - 0.250

Hz

0.001

0.010

Minimum frequency difference limit for

synchronizing

FreqDiffMax

0.050 - 0.250

Hz

0.001

0.200

Maximum frequency difference limit for

synchronizing

FreqRateChange

0.000 - 0.500

Hz/s

0.001

0.300

Maximum allowed frequency rate of change

tBreaker

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.080

Closing time of the breaker

tClosePulse

0.050 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Breaker closing pulse duration

tMaxSynch

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

600.00

Resets synch if no close has been made

before set time

tMinSynch

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Minimum time to accept synchronizing

conditions

OperationSC

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation for synchronism-check function Off/

On

VHighBusSC

50.0 - 120.0

%VBB

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit bus for synchrocheck in %

of VBaseBus

VHighLineSC

50.0 - 120.0

%VBL

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit line for synchrocheck in %

of UBaseLine

VDiffSC

0.02 - 0.50

pu

0.01

0.15

Voltage difference limit in p.u

FreqDiffA

0.003 - 1.000

Hz

0.001

0.010

Frequency difference limit between bus and

line Auto

FreqDiffM

0.003 - 1.000

Hz

0.001

0.010

Frequency difference limit between bus and

line Manual

Table continues on next page

579
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Step

Default

PhaseDiffA

Values (Range)
5.0 - 90.0

Unit
Deg

1.0

25.0

Description
Phase angle difference limit between bus and
line Auto

PhaseDiffM

5.0 - 90.0

Deg

1.0

25.0

Phase angle difference limit between bus and

line Manual

tSCA

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay output for synchrocheck Auto

tSCM

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay output for synchrocheck Manual

AutoEnerg

Disabled
DLLB
DBLL
Both

DBLL

Automatic energizing check mode

ManEnerg

Disabled
DLLB
DBLL
Both

Both

Manual energizing check mode

ManEnergDBDL

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Manual dead bus, dead line energizing

VLiveBusEnerg

50.0 - 120.0

%VBB

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit bus for energizing check in

% of UBaseBus

VLiveLineEnerg

50.0 - 120.0

%VBL

1.0

80.0

Voltage high limit line for energizing check in

% of VBaseLine

VDeadBusEnerg

10.0 - 80.0

%VBB

1.0

40.0

Voltage low limit bus for energizing check in

% of VBaseBus

VDeadLineEnerg

10.0 - 80.0

%VBL

1.0

40.0

Voltage low limit line for energizing check in

% of VBaseLine

VMaxEnerg

50.0 - 180.0

%VB

1.0

115.0

Maximum voltage for energizing in % of

VBase, Line and/or Bus

tAutoEnerg

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay for automatic energizing check

tManEnerg

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay for manual energizing check

580
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 289:

SESRSYN (25) Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SelPhaseBus1

Phase L1 for
busbar1
Phase L2 for
busbar1
Phase L3 for
busbar1
Phase L1L2 for
busbar1
Phase L2L3 for
busbar1
Phase L3L1 for
busbar1
Pos. sequence for
busbar1

Phase L1 for
busbar1

Select phase for busbar1

SelPhaseBus2

Phase L1 for
busbar2
Phase L2 for
busbar2
Phase L3 for
busbar2
Phase L1L2 for
busbar2
Phase L2L3 for
busbar2
Phase L3L1 for
busbar2
Pos. sequence for
busbar2

Phase L1 for
busbar2

Select phase for busbar2

SelPhaseLine1

Phase L1 for line1

Phase L2 for line1
Phase L3 for line1
Phase L1L2 for
line1
Phase L2L3 for
line1
Phase L3L1 for
line1
Pos. sequence for
line1

Phase L1 for line1

Select phase for line1

SelPhaseLine2

Phase L1 for line2

Phase L2 for line2
Phase L3 for line2
Phase L1L2 for
line2
Phase L2L3 for
line2
Phase L3L1 for
line2
Pos. sequence for
line2

Phase L1 for line2

Select phase for line2

581
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.1.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 290:

SESRSYN (25) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Phase shift, jline - jbus

(-180 to 180) degrees

Voltage ratio, Vbus/Vline

0.500 - 2.000

Voltage high limit for synchronism

check

(50.0-120.0)% of VBaseBus and

VBaseLine

0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn

Reset ratio, synchronism check

> 95%

Frequency difference limit

between bus and line for
synchrocheck

(0.003-1.000) Hz

2.0 mHz

Phase angle difference limit

between bus and line for
synchrocheck

(5.0-90.0) degrees

2.0 degrees

Voltage difference limit between

bus and line for synchronizing
and synchrocheck

(0.02-0.5) p.u

0.5% of Vn

Time delay output for

synchronism check

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Frequency difference minimum

limit for synchronizing

(0.003-0.250) Hz

2.0 mHz

Frequency difference maximum

limit for synchronizing

(0.050-0.500) Hz

2.0 mHz

Maximum allowed frequency rate

of change

(0.000-0.500) Hz/s

10.0 mHz/s

Closing time of the breaker

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Breaker closing pulse duration

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

tMaxSynch, which resets

synchronizing function if no close
has been made before set time

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Minimum time to accept

synchronizing conditions

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Voltage high limit for energizing

check

(50.0-120.0)% of VBaseBus and

VBaseLine

0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn

Reset ratio, voltage high limit

> 95%

Voltage low limit for energizing

check

(10.0-80.0)% of VBaseBus and

VBaseLine

0.5% of Vn

Reset ratio, voltage low limit

< 105%

Maximum voltage for energizing

(50.0-180.0)% of VBaseBus and/

or VBaseLine

0.5% of Vn at V Vn
0.5% of V at V > Vn

Table continues on next page

582
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function

12.2

Range or value

Accuracy

Time delay for energizing check

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operate time for synchronism

check function

160 ms typically

Operate time for energizing

function

80 ms typically

Autorecloser SMBRREC (79)

Function Description
Autorecloser

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SMBRREC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
79

O->I
SYMBOL-L V1 EN

12.2.1

Introduction
The autorecloser SMBRREC, 79 function provides high-speed and/or delayed autoreclosing for single or multi-breaker applications.
Up to five three-phase reclosing attempts can be included by parameter setting. The
first attempt can be single-, two and/or three pole for single pole or multi-pole faults
respectively.
Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. A
priority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only close if
the fault proved to be transient.
Each autoreclosing function is configured to co-operate with the synchronism check
function.

12.2.2

Principle of operation

12.2.2.1

Logic Diagrams
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of
the functionality.

583
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.2.2.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Auto-reclosing operation Disabled and Enabled

Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters
and through external control. With the setting Operation = Enabled, the function is
activated while with the setting Operation = Disabled the function is deactivated. With
the setting Operation = External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input
signal pulses, for example, from a control system.
When the function is set Enabled and is operative the output SETON is activated
(high). Other input conditions such as 52a and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At
this point the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output
signal READY on the SMBRREC (79) function block is activated (high).

12.2.2.3

Auto-reclosing mode selection

The Auto-reclosing mode is selected with setting ARMode = 3phase(0), 1/2/3ph(1),
1/2ph(2), 1ph+1*2ph(3), 1/2ph+1*3ph(4), 1ph+1*2/3ph(5). The selected mode can be
read as integer as per above list on output MODE.
As an alternative to setting the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for
example from function block B16I to input MODEINT.
Following integers shall be used: 1=3phase, 2=1/2/3ph, 3=1/2ph, 4=1ph+1*2ph,
5=1/2ph+1*3ph or 6=1ph+1*2/3ph.
When INTZERO from Fixed signal function block is connected to the input
MODEINT the parameter setting selected will be valid.

12.2.2.4

Initiate auto-reclosing and conditions for initiation of a reclosing cycle

The usual way in which to initiate a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to initiate it when a
line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the RI input. It should be
necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for different
power system configurations or during tripping at different protection stages, the input
RI_HS (reclose initiation of high-speed reclosing) can also be used.
For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met.
They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are:

CBREADY: CB ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear
52a: to ensure that the CB was closed when the line fault occurred and initiation
was applied
No blocking or inhibit signal shall be present.

584
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

After the initiate has been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal Started is
set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.
To initiate auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals,
one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs 52a and RI and set a
parameter StartByCBOpen = Enabled and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normally
closed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual trip
commands to input INHIBIT.
The logic for switching the auto-recloser Enabled/Disabled and the starting of the
reclosing is shown in figure 290. The following should be considered:

Setting Operation can be set to Disabled, External ctrl or Enabled. External ctrl
offers the possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF,
communication commands to the same inputs, and so on.
SMBRREC (79) is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and
Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function
must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both
alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function.
RI makes a first attempt with synchronism-check, RI_HS makes its first attempt
without synchronism-check. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time
before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to
perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs 52a and CBREADY.

585
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Operation:Enabled
Operation:Disabled
Operation:External Ctrl

ON

AND

OFF

AND

OR

RI
RI_HS

OR

OR
OR

autoInitiate

Additional conditions

TRSOTF

initiate

AND
PICKUP

CBREADY
52a

SETON

AND

AND

0
0-t120

CB Closed

AND

AND

0-tCBClosedMin
0

AND
Blocking conditions

OR

AND

READY

Inhibit conditions
count 0
ANSI05000782_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000782 V2 EN

Figure 290:

12.2.2.5

Auto-reclosing Disabled/Enabled and start

Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1

It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one
extension time. There are separate settings for single- , two- and three-phase autoreclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied,
and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the autoreclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated
in connection with the input START, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or threephase reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase highspeed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated by input
RI_HS.
An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal
shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for
permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time
difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time
can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended t1
= Enabled and the input PLCLOST.

586
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.2.2.6

Long trip signal

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The
user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the autoreclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Disabled, a long trip
signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input INHIBIT.

Extended t1

PLCLOST
initiate
pickup

AND
0-tTrip
0

OR

AND

AND

Extend t1

AND

AND

long duration
(block SMBRREC)

ANSI05000783_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000783 V2 EN

Figure 291:

Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection

Reclosing checks and the reset timer

When dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditions
must be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signals are
exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. In threephase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It is possible to
use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or an external one. The
release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosing function input SYNC.
If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input can be set to TRUE (set
high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchronism check function to a
permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchronism check, or if the
reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At single-phase, twophase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started by RI_HS,
synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input is disregarded.

587
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) the readiness

of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closing command. If the
CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready for an Open-CloseOpen sequence) this condition may not be complied with after the tripping and at the
moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition was however checked at the
start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB is prepared for a CloseOpen sequence.
The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time interval,
tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted and
blocked.
The reset timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the
reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a
continuation of the first fault. The reset timer is started when the CB closing command
is given.
A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in
the reclosing sequence.

588
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

0-t1 1Ph
0
From logic for
reclosing
programs

1P2PTO
3PHSTO
3PT1TO
3PT2TO
3PT3TO
3PT4TO
3PT5TO

OR

0-t1 2Ph
0

AND
OR

"SMBRREC Open time"

timers
1P2PTO

OR

0-t1 3Ph HS
0

3PHSTO

0-t1 3Ph
0

3PT1TO
Pulse AR

AND

SYNC
initiate
CBREADY

AND

AND

SMBRREC State
Control
COUNTER

0-tSync
0

AND

Blocking out

OR

CL

Shot 0
Shot 1

0
1

Shot 2
Shot 3

2
3
Pulse SMBRREC (above)
OR
TR2P

LOGIC
reclosing
programs

TR3P

AND

0-tReset
0
Reset Timer On

Shot 4
Shot 5

4
5

1PT1

PICKUP

2PT1

RI

3PHS

Shot 0
Shot 1
Shot 2
Shot 3
Shot 4
Shot 5

3PT1

INPROGR
OR

3PT2
3PT3
3PT4
PERMIT1P

3PT5

PREP3P

1
Blocking out
INHIBIT

OR

0
tInhibit

Inhibit (internal)

ANSI05000784_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000784 V2 EN

Figure 292:

Reclosing Reset and Inhibit timers

589
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Pulsing of the CB closing command

The CB closing command, CLOSECMD is a pulse with a duration set by parameter

tPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cutting
described below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameter
CutPulse=Enabled. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut
(interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 293
When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter is
incremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total number
of reclosing commands issued.
pulse
initiate

tPulse
AND

**)

CLOSECMD

OR

50 ms
1PT1

AND

2PT1

AND

3PT1

AND

3PT2

AND

3PT3

AND

3PT4

AND

3PT5

AND

RSTCOUNT

counter
counter

COUNT1P
COUNT2P

counter

COUNT3P1

counter

COUNT3P2

counter

COUNT3P3

counter

COUNT3P4

counter

COUNT3P5

counter

COUNTAR

**) Only if "CutPulse" = Enabled

ANSI05000785_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000785 V2 EN

Figure 293:

Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

Transient fault

After the reclosing command the reset timer tReset starts running for the set time. If no
tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

590
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal

If a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal RI or
TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. The timers
for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for the number of
reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence will be ended.
After the reset time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but the CB remains
open. The CB closed data at the 52a input will be missing. Because of this, the
reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.
Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and initiate is received after
the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The
signal resets once the reset time has elapsed. The unsuccessful signal can also be
made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should then be
set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not respond to
the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output UNSUCCL is
set high after time tUnsucCl.
initiate
block start

AND

OR

shot 0

AND

UNSUCCL

UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

Pulse AR (Closing)
52a

OR

CBclosed

AND

0-tUnsucCl
0

AND

en05000786_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000786 V1 EN

Figure 294:

Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequence

The auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosing

shots (if selected) even if the initiate signals are not received from the protection
functions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameter
AutoCont = Enabled and to the required delay for the function to proceed without a
new initiate.

591
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

0-tAutoContWait
0
AND

CLOSECMD
AND

S Q
R

AND

52a

CBClosed

OR

RI

OR

initiate

en05000787_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000787 V1 EN

Figure 295:

Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

Initiation of reclosing from CB open information

If a user wants to apply initiation of auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of

from protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is
selected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = Enabled. One needs then to block
reclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically, one also set CBAuxContType =
NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b) to
inputs 52a and RI. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB open an autoreclosing start pulse of limited length is generated and latched in the function, subject
to the usual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs to
connect signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent
reclosing, to the input INHIBIT.

592
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

StartByCBOpen= Enabled
NOT

RI

AND

RI_HS

AND
100 ms

PICKUP

AND
100 ms
AND

ANSI05000788_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000788 V2 EN

Figure 296:

12.2.2.7

Pulsing of the pickup inputs

Time sequence diagrams

Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and
permanent faults are shown below in figures 297 to 300.

593
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Fault
CB POS

Closed

Open

Closed

CB READY
RECL. INT. (Trip)
SYNC
tReset

READY
INPROG
1PT1
ACTIVE
CLOSE CMD

t1 1Ph

tPulse

PREP3P
SUCCL
Time

en04000196-2_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000196 V2 EN

Figure 297:

Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

594
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Fault
CB POS

Closed

Open

Open

CB READY

RECL. INT. (Trip)

TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
3PT1

t1 3Ph

3PT2

t2 3Ph
tReset

ACTIVE
CLOSE CMD

tPulse

tPulse

PREP3P
UNSUCCL
Time
en04000197_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000197 V1 EN

Figure 298:

Permanent fault. Three-pole trip. Two-shot reclosing

595
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
AR01-RI
AR01-TR3P
AR01-SYNC
AR01-READY
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-1PT1
AR01-T1
AR01-T2
AR01-CLOSECMD

t1s

AR01-P3P
AR01-UNSUC

tReset

en04000198_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000198 V1 EN

Figure 299:

Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phase singleshot reclosing

596
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
AR01-RI
AR01-TR3P
AR01-SYNC
AR01-READY
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-1PT1
AR01-T1
AR01-T2
AR01-CLOSECMD

t1s

t2

AR01-P3P
AR01-UNSUC

tReset

en04000199_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000199 V1 EN

Figure 300:

Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph, twoshot reclosing

597
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.2.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
SMBRREC (79)
ON
BLOCKED
OFF
SETON
BLKON
READY
BLKOFF
ACTIVE
RESET
SUCCL
INHIBIT
UNSUCCL
RI
INPROGR
RI_HS
1PT1
TRSOTF
2PT1
SKIPHS
3PT1
ZONESTEP
3PT2
TR2P
3PT3
TR3P
3PT4
THOLHOLD
3PT5
CBREADY
PERMIT1P
52A
PREP3P
PLCLOST
CLOSECMD
SYNC
WFMASTER
WAIT
COUNT1P
RSTCOUNT
COUNT2P
MODEINT
COUNT3P1
COUNT3P2
COUNT3P3
COUNT3P4
COUNT3P5
COUNTAR
MODE
ANSI06000189-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000189 V2 EN

Figure 301:

12.2.4

SMBRREC (79) function block

Input and output signals

Table 291:
Name

SMBRREC (79) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

ON

BOOLEAN

Switches the AR On (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)

OFF

BOOLEAN

Switches the AR Off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)

BLKON

BOOLEAN

Sets the AR in blocked state

BLKOFF

BOOLEAN

Releases the AR from the blocked state

RESET

BOOLEAN

Resets the AR to initial conditions

INHIBIT

BOOLEAN

Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence

RI

BOOLEAN

Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal

RI_HS

BOOLEAN

Start High Speed reclosing without SynchronismCheck: t13PhHS

TRSOTF

BOOLEAN

Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF

SKIPHS

BOOLEAN

Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed

shots

ZONESTEP

BOOLEAN

Coordination between local AR and down stream

devices

Table continues on next page

598
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

TR2P

BOOLEAN

Signal to the AR that a two-pole tripping occurred

TR3P

BOOLEAN

Signal to the AR that a three-pole tripping occurred

THOLHOLD

BOOLEAN

Holds the AR in wait state

CBREADY

BOOLEAN

CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow

start / close

52a

BOOLEAN

Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open

PLCLOST

BOOLEAN

Power line carrier or other form of permissive signal lost

SYNC

BOOLEAN

Synchronism-check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)

WAIT

BOOLEAN

Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)

RSTCOUNT

BOOLEAN

Resets all counters

MODEINT

INTEGER

Integer input used to set the reclosingMode,

alternative to setting

Table 292:
Name

SMBRREC (79) Output signals

Type

Description

BLOCKED

BOOLEAN

The AR is in blocked state

SETON

BOOLEAN

The AR operation is switched on, operative

READY

BOOLEAN

Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new

sequence

ACTIVE

BOOLEAN

Reclosing sequence in progress

SUCCL

BOOLEAN

Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl

UNSUCCL

BOOLEAN

Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim

time

INPROGR

BOOLEAN

Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open reset

1PT1

BOOLEAN

Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1

2PT1

BOOLEAN

Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1

3PT1

BOOLEAN

Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1

3PT2

BOOLEAN

Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2

3PT3

BOOLEAN

Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3

3PT4

BOOLEAN

Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4

3PT5

BOOLEAN

Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5

PERMIT1P

BOOLEAN

Permit single-pole trip, inverse signal to PREP3P

PREP3P

BOOLEAN

Prepare three-pole trip, control of the next trip operation

CLOSECMD

BOOLEAN

Closing command for CB

WFMASTER

BOOLEAN

Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential

reclosing

COUNT1P

INTEGER

Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots

COUNT2P

INTEGER

Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots

Table continues on next page

599
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

12.2.5
Table 293:
Name

Type

Description

COUNT3P1

INTEGER

Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1

COUNT3P2

INTEGER

Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2

COUNT3P3

INTEGER

Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3

COUNT3P4

INTEGER

Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4

COUNT3P5

INTEGER

Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5

COUNTAR

INTEGER

Counting total number of reclosing shots

MODE

INTEGER

Integer output for reclosing mode

Setting parameters
SMBRREC (79) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
External ctrl
Enabled

External ctrl

Off, ExternalCtrl, On

ARMode

3 phase
1/2/3ph
1/2ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph

1/2/3ph

The AR mode selection e.g. 3ph, 1/3ph

t1 1Ph

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Open time for shot 1, single-phase

t1 3Ph

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

6.000

Open time for shot 1, delayed reclosing 3ph

t1 3PhHS

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Open time for shot 1, high speed reclosing 3ph

tReset

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

60.00

Duration of the reset time

tSync

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

30.00

Maximum wait time for synchronism-check OK

tTrip

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Maximum trip pulse duration

tPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Duration of the circuit breaker closing pulse

tCBClosedMin

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

5.00

Minimum time that CB must be closed before

new sequence allows

tUnsucCl

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

30.00

Wait time for CB before indicating

Unsuccessful/Successful

Priority

None
Low
High

None

Priority selection between adjacent terminals

None/Low/High

tWaitForMaster

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

60.00

Maximum wait time for release from Master

600
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 294:

SMBRREC (79) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

NoOfShots

1
2
3
4
5

Max number of reclosing shots 1-5

StartByCBOpen

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

To be set ON if AR is to be started by CB
open position

CBAuxContType

NormClosed
NormOpen

NormOpen

Select the CB aux contact type NC/NO for

52a input

CBReadyType

CO
OCO

CO

Select type of circuit breaker ready signal CO/

OCO

t1 2Ph

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Open time for shot 1, two-phase

t2 3Ph

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

30.00

Open time for shot 2, three-phase

t3 3Ph

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

30.00

Open time for shot 3, three-phase

t4 3Ph

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

30.00

Open time for shot 4, three-phase

t5 3Ph

0.00 - 6000.00

0.01

30.00

Open time for shot 5, three-phase

Extended t1

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Extended open time at loss of permissive

channel Off/On

tExtended t1

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.500

3Ph Dead time is extended with this value at

loss of perm ch

tInhibit

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Inhibit reclosing reset time

CutPulse

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Shorten closing pulse at a new trip Off/On

Follow CB

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Advance to next shot if CB has been closed

during dead time

AutoCont

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Continue with next reclosing-shot if breaker

did not close

tAutoContWait

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Wait time after close command before

proceeding to next shot

UnsucClByCBChk

NoCBCheck
CB check

NoCBCheck

Unsuccessful closing signal obtained by

checking CB position

BlockByUnsucCl

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Block AR at unsuccessful reclosing

ZoneSeqCoord

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Coordination of down stream devices to local

prot units AR

601
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.2.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 295:

SMBRREC (79) technical data

Function
Number of autoreclosing shots
Autoreclosing open time:
shot 1 - t1 1Ph
shot 1 - t1 2Ph
shot 1 - t1 3PhHS
shot 1 - t1 3PhDld

Range or value
1-5

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

shot 2 - t2
shot 3 - t3
shot 4 - t4
shot 5 - t5

(0.00-6000.00) s

Extended autorecloser open time

(0.000-60.000) s

Autorecloser maximum wait time for sync

(0.00-6000.00) s

Maximum trip pulse duration

(0.000-60.000) s

Inhibit reset time

(0.000-60.000) s

Reset time

(0.00-6000.00) s

Minimum time CB must be closed before AR

becomes ready for autoreclosing cycle

(0.00-6000.00) s

Circuit breaker closing pulse length

(0.000-60.000) s

CB check time before unsuccessful

(0.00-6000.00) s

Wait for master release

(0.00-6000.00) s

Wait time after close command before proceeding

to next shot

(0.000-60.000) s

12.3

Apparatus control APC

12.3.1

Introduction

Accuracy

The apparatus control functions are used for control and supervision of circuit
breakers, disconnectors and grounding switches within a bay. Permission to operate is
given after evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking,
synchronism check, operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
In normal security, the command is processed and the resulting position is not
supervised. However with enhanced security, the command is processed and the
resulting position is supervised.

602
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.3.2

Principle of operation
A bay can handle, for example a power line, a transformer, a reactor, or a capacitor
bank. The different primary apparatuses within the bay can be controlled via the
apparatus control function directly by the operator or indirectly by automatic sequences.
Because a primary apparatus can be allocated to many functions within a Substation
Automation system, the object-oriented approach with a function module that handles
the interaction and status of each process object ensures consistency in the process
information used by higher-level control functions.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised
by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals
connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same software is
used to handle these two types of apparatuses.
The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an
interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of
interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is
intended for a disconnector or grounding switch (SXSWI). Four types of function
blocks are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay. These
function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard
configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These
four types are:

Bay control QCBAY

Switch controller SCSWI
Circuit breaker SXCBR
Circuit switch SXSWI

The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The functions
Local Remote (LOCREM) and Local Remote Control (LOCREMCTRL), to handle the
local/remote switch, and the functions Bay reserve (QCRSV) and Reservation input
(RESIN), for the reservation function, also belong to the apparatus control function.
The principles of operation, function block, input and output signals and setting
parameters for all these functions are described below.

12.3.3

Error handling
Depending on the error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal will
be set with a value. Table 296 describes vendor specific cause values in addition to
these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the cause are in order
of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE on the
function block for Switch controller (SCSWI), Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit
switch (SXSWI) indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
603

Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 296:

Values for "cause" signal in priority order

Attribute value

Defined in IEC 61850

Description

Supported

no error

serviceError-type

blocked-by-switchinghierarchy

select-failed

invalid-position

position-reached

parameter-change-inexecution

step-limit

blocked-by-mode

blocked-by-process

10

blocked-by-interlocking

11

blocked-by-synchrocheck

12

command-already-inexecution

13

blocked-by-health

14

1-of-n-control

15

abortion-by-cancel

16

time-limit-over

17

abortion-by-trip

18

object-not-selected

19

Not in use

Table continues on next page

604
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Attribute value

Description

-20

Not in use

-21

Not in use

-23

blocked-for-command

-24

blocked-for-opencommand

-25

blocked-for-closecommand

-26

Not in use

-27

Not in use

-28

Not in use

-29

Not in use

-30

long-operation-time

-31

switch-not-start-moving

-32

persisting-intermediatestate

-33

switch-returned-to-initialposition

-34

switch-in-bad-state

-35

not-expected-final-position

Vendor specific

12.3.4

Bay control QCBAY

12.3.4.1

Introduction

Supported

The Bay control QCBAY function is used together with Local remote and local remote
control functions to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also
provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses within the
bay.

12.3.4.2

Principle of operation
The functionality of the Bay control (QCBAY) function is not defined in the IEC 61850
81 standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node.
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay for example, switch control
functions, voltage control functions and measurement functions.

605
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Local panel switch

The local panel switch is a switch that defines the operator place selection. The switch
connected to this function can have three positions remote/local/off. The positions are
here defined so that remote means that operation is allowed from station/remote level
and local from the IED level. The local/remote switch is also on the control/protection
IED itself, which means that the position of the switch and its validity information are
connected internally, and not via I/O boards. When the switch is mounted separately
from the IED the signals are connected to the function via I/O boards.
When the local panel switch (or LHMI selection, depending on the set source to select
this) is in Off position, all commands from remote and local level will be ignored. If
the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO output will always be set
to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL are needed and connected to QCBAY.

Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO)

The actual state of the operator place is presented by the value of the Permitted Source
To Operate, PSTO signal. The PSTO value is evaluated from the local/remote switch
position according to table 297. In addition, there is one configuration parameter that
affects the value of the PSTO signal. If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set and LRswitch position is in Local or Remote state, the PSTO value is set to 5 (all), that is, it is
permitted to operate from both local and remote level without any priority. When the
external panel switch is in Off position the PSTO value shows the actual state of switch
that is, 0. In this case it is not possible to control anything.
Table 297:
Local panel switch
positions

PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions

PSTO value

AllPSTOValid
(configuration
parameter)

Possible locations that shall be able to

operate

0 = Off

--

Not possible to operate

1 = Local

Priority

Local Panel

1 = Local

No priority

Local or Remote level without any

priority

2 = Remote

Priority

Remote level

2 = Remote

No priority

Local or Remote level without any

priority

3 = Faulty

--

Not possible to operate

Blockings

The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide the
possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured within
a complete bay.
606
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:

Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs related
to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC 61850
81). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but no
outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and functional
and configuration data is visible.

The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.

12.3.4.3

Function block
QCBAY
LR_OFF
LR_LOC
LR_REM
LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD

PSTO
UPD_BLKD
CMD_BLKD
LOC
REM

IEC10000048-1-en.vsd
IEC10000048 V1 EN

Figure 302:

12.3.4.4

QCBAY function block

Input and output signals

Table 298:
Name

QCBAY Input signals

Type

Default

Description

LR_OFF

BOOLEAN

External Local/Remote switch is in Off position

LR_LOC

BOOLEAN

External Local/Remote switch is in Local position

LR_REM

BOOLEAN

External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position

LR_VALID

BOOLEAN

Data representing the L/R switch position is valid

BL_UPD

BOOLEAN

Steady signal to block the position updates

BL_CMD

BOOLEAN

Steady signal to block the command

607
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 299:

QCBAY Output signals

Name

12.3.4.5
Table 300:
Name
AllPSTOValid

Type

Description

PSTO

INTEGER

Value for the operator place allocation

UPD_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Update of position is blocked

CMD_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Function is blocked for commands

LOC

BOOLEAN

Local operation allowed

REM

BOOLEAN

Remote operation allowed

Setting parameters
QCBAY Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Priority
No priority

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Priority

Description
Priority of originators

12.3.5

Local/Remote switch LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL

12.3.5.1

Introduction
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch are applied via
the function blocks LOCREM and LOCREMCTRL to the Bay control (QCBAY)
function block. A parameter in function block LOCREM is set to choose if the switch
signals are coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware switch connected
via binary inputs.

12.3.5.2

Principle of operation
The function block Local remote (LOCREM) handles the signals coming from the local/
remote switch. The connections are seen in figure 303, where the inputs on function
block LOCREM are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When the
local HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the configuration.
The outputs from the LOCREM function block control the output PSTO (Permitted
Source To Operate) on Bay control (QCBAY).

608
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL
REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID

QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LOC
LR_ VALID
REM
BL_ UPD
BL_ CMD

LOCREM
CTRLOFF
OFF
LOCCTRL
LOCAL
REMCTRL
REMOTE
LHMICTRL
VALID

QCBAY
LR_ OFF
PSTO
LR_ LOC UPD_ BLKD
LR_ REM CMD_ BLKD
LOC
LR_ VALID
REM
BL_ UPD
BL_ CMD

LOCREMCTRL
PSTO1
HMICTR1
PSTO2
HMICTR2
PSTO3
HMICTR3
PSTO4
HMICTR4
PSTO5
HMICTR5
PSTO6
HMICTR6
PSTO7
HMICTR7
PSTO8
HMICTR8
PSTO9
HMICTR9
PSTO 10
HMICTR 10
PSTO 11
HMICTR 11
PSTO 12
HMICTR 12
IEC10000052-1-en.vsd
IEC10000052 V1 EN

Figure 303:

Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local HMI with two
bays and two screen pages

If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can be
different for the included bays. When the local HMI is used the position of the local/
remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram screen page
that is presented on the local HMI. The function block Local remote control
(LOCREMCTRL) controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position
to applicable bay and screen page.
The switching of the local/remote switch requires at least system operator level. The
password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined in PCM600.

609
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.3.5.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
LOCREM
CTRLOFF
LOCCTRL
REMCTRL
LHMICTRL

OFF
LOCAL
REMOTE
VALID
IEC05000360-2-en.vsd

IEC05000360 V2 EN

Figure 304:

PSTO1
PSTO2
PSTO3
PSTO4
PSTO5
PSTO6
PSTO7
PSTO8
PSTO9
PSTO10
PSTO11
PSTO12

LOCREM function block

LOCREMCTRL
HMICTR1
HMICTR2
HMICTR3
HMICTR4
HMICTR5
HMICTR6
HMICTR7
HMICTR8
HMICTR9
HMICTR10
HMICTR11
HMICTR12
IEC05000361-2-en.vsd

IEC05000361 V2 EN

Figure 305:

12.3.5.4

LOCREMCTRL function block

Input and output signals

Table 301:
Name

LOCREM Input signals

Type

Default

Description

CTRLOFF

BOOLEAN

Disable control

LOCCTRL

BOOLEAN

Local in control

REMCTRL

BOOLEAN

Remote in control

LHMICTRL

INTEGER

LHMI control

Table 302:
Name

LOCREM Output signals

Type

Description

OFF

BOOLEAN

Control is disabled

LOCAL

BOOLEAN

Local control is activated

REMOTE

BOOLEAN

Remote control is activated

VALID

BOOLEAN

Outputs are valid

610
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 303:

LOCREMCTRL Input signals

Name

Type
INTEGER

PSTO input channel 1

PSTO2

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 2

PSTO3

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 3

PSTO4

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 4

PSTO5

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 5

PSTO6

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 6

PSTO7

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 7

PSTO8

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 8

PSTO9

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 9

PSTO10

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 10

PSTO11

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 11

PSTO12

INTEGER

PSTO input channel 12

LOCREMCTRL Output signals

Name

Table 305:

Description

PSTO1

Table 304:

12.3.5.5

Default

Type

Description

HMICTR1

INTEGER

Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR2

INTEGER

Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR3

INTEGER

Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR4

INTEGER

Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR5

INTEGER

Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR6

INTEGER

Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR7

INTEGER

Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR8

INTEGER

Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR9

INTEGER

Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR10

INTEGER

Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR11

INTEGER

Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input

HMICTR12

INTEGER

Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input

Setting parameters
LOCREM Non group settings (basic)

Name
ControlMode

Values (Range)
Internal LR-switch
External LR-switch

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Internal LR-switch

Description
Control mode for internal/external LR-switch

611
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.3.6

Switch controller SCSWI

12.3.6.1

Introduction
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle
and operate on one three-phase device.

12.3.6.2

Principle of operation
The Switch controller (SCSWI) is provided with verification checks for the select execute sequence, that is, checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The
involved functions for these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation,
blockings and synchronism-check.

Control handling
Two types of control models can be used. The two control models are "direct with
normal security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security". The
parameter CtlModel defines which one of the two control models is used. The control
model "direct with normal security" does not require a select whereas, the "SBO with
enhanced security" command model requires a select before execution.
Normal security means that only the command is evaluated and the resulting position is
not supervised. Enhanced security means that the command sequence is supervised in
three steps, the selection, command evaluation and the supervision of position. Each
step ends up with a pulsed signal to indicate that the respective step in the command
sequence is finished. If an error occurs in one of the steps in the command sequence,
the sequence is terminated and the error is mapped into the enumerated variable
"cause" attribute belonging to the pulsed response signal for the IEC 61850
communication. The last cause L_CAUSE can be read from the function block and
used for example at commissioning.
There is no relation between the command direction and the actual
position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is possible to
execute a close command.
Before an execution command, an evaluation of the position is done. If the parameter
PosDependent is true and the position is in intermediate state or in bad state no
execution command is sent. If the parameter is false the execution command is sent
independent of the position value.

612
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Evaluation of position

In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the onephase switches, following principles will be applied:
The position output from switch (SXCBR or SXSWI) is connected to SCSWI. With
the group signal connection the SCSWI obtains the position, time stamps and quality
attributes of the position which is used for further evaluation.
All switches in open position:

switch control position = open

All switches in close position:

switch control position = close

One switch =open, two switches= close (or

inversely):

switch control position = intermediate

Any switch in intermediate position:

switch control position = intermediate

Any switch in bad state:

switch control position = bad state

The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to
intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discrepancy and is
supervised by this function. In case of a pole discrepancy situation, that is, the position
of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting tPoleDiscord,
an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values
from the switch modules Circuit breaker (SXCBR)/ Circuit switch (SXSWI). At error
the "cause" value with highest priority is shown.

Blocking principles

The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC 61850 communication from the operator place.
The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary inputs,
e.g. a block command on binary inputs will not prevent commands over
IEC 61850.
The different blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock of command. It is used to block command for operation of position.

Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but
613

Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and

functional and configuration data is visible.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, that is, no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.

Interaction with synchronism-check and synchronizing functions

The Switch controller (SCSWI) works in conjunction with the synchronism-check and
the synchronizing function (SESRSYN, 25). It is assumed that the synchronism-check
function is continuously in operation and gives the result to SCSWI. The result from
the synchronism-check function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator
performs an override of the synchronism-check, the evaluation of the synchronismcheck state is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchronismcheck function, SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function
Circuit breaker (SXCBR).
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchronism-check function, SCSWI
will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send the
closing command to SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled, see
figure 306. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of the
"synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-synchronismcheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 310.

614
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

SCSWI
EXE_CL

SXCBR
OR

CLOSE

SYNC_OK
START_SY
SY_INPRO
SESRSYN
CLOSECMD
Synchro
check

Synchronizing
function

ANSI09000209-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000209 V1 EN

Figure 306:

Example of interaction between SCSWI, SESRSYN (25) (synchronism

check and synchronizing function) and SXCBR function

Time diagrams

The Switch controller (SCSWI) function has timers for evaluating different time
supervision conditions. These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution
after the selection of the object to operate.

select
execute command
tSelect
timer

t1

t1>tSelect, then longoperation-time in 'cause'

is set
en05000092.vsd

IEC05000092 V1 EN

Figure 307:

tSelect

The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, that is, the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
615
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

select
reservation request RES_RQ
reservation granted RES_GRT
command termination
tResResponse
timer

t1>tResResponse, then
1-of-n-control in 'cause'
is set

t1

en05000093.vsd
IEC05000093 V1 EN

Figure 308:

tResResponse

The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see figure 309.
execute command
phase A open
close
phase B open
close
phase C open
close
command termination
phase A
command termination
phase B
command termination
phase C
command termination

circuit breaker open

close
tExecutionFB
timer

t1

t1>tExecutionFB, then
long-operation-time in
'cause' is set

* The command termination will be delayed one execution sample.

en05000094_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000094 V1 EN

Figure 309:

tExecutionFB

The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between the
execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true at the
time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will not start.
The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchronism-check conditions
are not fulfilled.
616
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1

START_SY
SY_INPRO
tSynchronizing

t2

t2>tSynchronizing, then
blocked-by-synchronism
check in 'cause' is set

en05000095_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000095 V1 EN

Figure 310:

12.3.6.3

tSynchroCheck and tSynchronizing

Function block
SCSWI
BLOCK
PSTO
L_SEL
L_OPEN
L_CLOSE
AU_OPEN
AU_CLOSE
BL_CMD
RES_GRT
RES_EXT
SY_INPRO
SYNC_OK
EN_OPEN
EN_CLOSE
XPOS1
XPOS2
XPOS3

EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SELECTED
RES_RQ
START_SY
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
POLEDISC
CMD_BLK
L_CAUSE
XOUT
POS_INTR

IEC05000337-2-en.vsd
IEC05000337 V2 EN

Figure 311:

12.3.6.4

SCSWI function block

Input and output signals

Table 306:
Name

SCSWI Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

L_SEL

BOOLEAN

Select signal from local panel

L_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Open signal from local panel

L_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Close signal from local panel

Table continues on next page

617
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

AU_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Used for local automation function

AU_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Used for local automation function

BL_CMD

BOOLEAN

Steady signal for block of the command

RES_GRT

BOOLEAN

Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made

RES_EXT

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made externally

SY_INPRO

BOOLEAN

Synchronizing function in progress

SYNC_OK

BOOLEAN

Closing is permitted by the synchronism-check

EN_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Enables open operation

EN_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Enables close operation

XPOS1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase

XPOS2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase

XPOS3

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal from XCBR/XSWI per phase

Table 307:
Name

SCSWI Output signals

Type

Description

EXE_OP

BOOLEAN

Execute Open command

EXE_CL

BOOLEAN

Execute Close command

SELECTED

BOOLEAN

Select conditions are fulfilled

RES_RQ

BOOLEAN

Request signal to the reservation function

START_SY

BOOLEAN

Starts the synchronizing function

POSITION

INTEGER

Position indication

OPENPOS

BOOLEAN

Open position indication

CLOSEPOS

BOOLEAN

Closed position indication

POLEDISC

BOOLEAN

The positions for poles A, B and C are not equal after

a set time

CMD_BLK

BOOLEAN

Commands are blocked

L_CAUSE

INTEGER

Latest value of the error indication during command

XOUT

BOOLEAN

Execution information to XCBR/XSWI

POS_INTR

BOOLEAN

Stopped in intermediate position

AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE are used to issue automated commands as

e.g. for load shedding for opening respectively closing to the SCSWI
function. They work without regard to how the operator place selector,
PSTO, is set. In order to have effect on the outputs EXE_OP and
618
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

EXE_CL, the corresponding enable input, EN_OPEN respectively

EN_CLOSE must be set, and that no interlocking is active.

L_SEL, L_OPEN and L_CLOSE are used for local command sequence
connected to binary inputs. In order to have effect, the operator place
selector, PSTO, must be set to local or to remote with no priority. If the
control model used is Select before operate, Also the corresponding
enable input must be set, and no interlocking is active. The L_SEL
input must be set before L_OPEN or L_CLOSE is operated, if the
control model is Select before operate.

12.3.6.5
Table 308:

Setting parameters
SCSWI Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CtlModel

Dir Norm
SBO Enh

SBO Enh

Specifies control model type

PosDependent

Always permitted
Not perm at 00/11

Always permitted

Permission to operate depending on the

position

tSelect

0.00 - 600.00

0.01

30.00

Maximum time between select and execute

signals

tResResponse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Allowed time from reservation request to

reservation granted

tSynchrocheck

0.00 - 600.00

0.01

10.00

Allowed time for synchronism-check to fulfil

close conditions

tSynchronizing

0.00 - 600.00

0.01

0.00

Supervision time to get the signal

synchronizing in progress

tExecutionFB

0.00 - 600.00

0.01

30.00

Maximum time from command execution to

termination

tPoleDiscord

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Allowed time to have discrepancy between

the poles

12.3.7

Circuit breaker SXCBR

12.3.7.1

Introduction
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the actual status of positions
and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output boards and to supervise
the switching operation and position.
619

Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.3.7.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Principle of operation
The users of the Circuit breaker function (SXCBR) is other functions such as for
example, switch controller, protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850
client residing in another IED or the operator place. This switch function executes
commands, evaluates block conditions and evaluates different time supervision
conditions. Only if all conditions indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the
function performs the execution command. In case of erroneous conditions, the
function indicates an appropriate "cause" value.
SXCBR has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary
input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point
Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.

Local/Remote switch

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXCBR to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the
signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted.
When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal
IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 312.

UE
TR

From I/O

Local= Operation at
switch yard level

switchLR
FAL

SE

Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 312:

Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles

SXCBR includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, operators
place, protection functions, autoreclosure and so on.
The IEC 61850 communication has always priority over binary inputs,
e.g. a block command on binary inputs will not prevent commands over
IEC 61850.

620
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

The blocking possibilities are:

Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate
command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but
no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution

The substitution part in SXCBR is used for manual set of the position for the switch.
The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because that
the real process value is erroneous for some reason. SXCBR will then use the manually
entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the
position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and
other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are
stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 313 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

621
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

AdaptivePulse = TRUE

EXE_CL
Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

"switch-not-start-moving"
attribute in 'cause' is set

tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove

tIntermediate timer
t2

if t2 > tIntermediate then

"persisting-intermediate-state"
attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 313:

The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to
be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 314 shows the principle of the
execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect on both execute
output pulses.
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

EXE_CL
tClosePulse

en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 314:

Execute output pulse

622
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in closed
position and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition
that the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is
always activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration
parameter AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the
pulse duration timer has elapsed.
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS
=1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only
when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.
An example of when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is
shown in figure 315 .
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_OP
tOpenPulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 315:

Open command with open position indication

623
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.3.7.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
SXCBR
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
TR_OPEN
TR_CLOSE
RS_CNT
XIN

XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SUBSTED
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
TR_POS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
IEC05000338-2-en.vsd

IEC05000338 V2 EN

Figure 316:

12.3.7.4

SXCBR function block

Input and output signals

Table 309:
Name

SXCBR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

LR_SWI

BOOLEAN

Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard

OPEN

BOOLEAN

Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch

CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch

BL_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal to block the open command

BL_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal to block the close command

BL_UPD

BOOLEAN

Steady signal for block of the position updating

POSOPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O

POSCLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O

TR_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal for open position of truck from I/O

TR_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal for close position of truck from I/O

RS_CNT

BOOLEAN

Resets the operation counter

XIN

BOOLEAN

Execution information from CSWI

Table 310:
Name

SXCBR Output signals

Type

Description

XPOS

GROUP SIGNAL

Group signal for XCBR output

EXE_OP

BOOLEAN

Executes the command for open direction

EXE_CL

BOOLEAN

Executes the command for close direction

Table continues on next page

624
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

12.3.7.5
Table 311:

Type

Description

SUBSTED

BOOLEAN

Indication that the position is substituted

OP_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Indication that the function is blocked for open

commands

CL_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Indication that the function is blocked for close

commands

UPD_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Update of position indication is blocked

POSITION

INTEGER

Apparatus position indication

OPENPOS

BOOLEAN

Apparatus open position

CLOSEPOS

BOOLEAN

Apparatus closed position

TR_POS

INTEGER

Truck position indication

CNT_VAL

INTEGER

Operation counter value

L_CAUSE

INTEGER

Latest value of the error indication during command

Setting parameters
SXCBR Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

tStartMove

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

0.100

Supervision time for the apparatus to move

after a command

tIntermediate

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Allowed time for intermediate position

AdaptivePulse

Not adaptive
Adaptive

Not adaptive

Output resets when a new correct end

position is reached

tOpenPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Output pulse length for open command

tClosePulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Output pulse length for close command

SuppressMidPos

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Mid-position is suppressed during the time

tIntermediate

12.3.8

Circuit switch SXSWI

12.3.8.1

Introduction

Default

Description

The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide the actual status of
positions and to perform the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or grounding switches via binary
output boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.

625
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.3.8.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Principle of operation
The users of the Circuit switch (SXSWI) is other functions such as for example, switch
controller, protection functions, autorecloser function, or a 61850 client residing in
another IED or the operator place. SXSWI executes commands, evaluates block
conditions and evaluates different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions
indicate a switch operation to be allowed, SXSWI performs the execution command. In
case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate "cause" value.
SXSWI has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The counter
value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from a binary
input or remotely from the operator place by configuring a signal from the Single Point
Generic Control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) for example.

Local/Remote switch

One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in SXSWI to indicate the local/remote
switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is set to
TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level. If the
signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is permitted.
When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position) from internal
IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions are rejected.
The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 317.

TR

From I/O

UE

Local= Operation at
switch yard level

switchLR
FAL

SE

Remote= Operation at
IED or higher level
en05000096.vsd
IEC05000096 V1 EN

Figure 317:

Local/Remote switch

Blocking principles

SXSWI includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients for example, operators
place, protection functions, autorecloser and so on.
The blocking possibilities are:

626
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Block/deblock for open command. It is used to block operation for open

command. Note that this block signal also affects the input OPEN for immediate
command.
Block/deblock for close command. It is used to block operation for close
command. Note that this block signal also affects the input CLOSE for immediate
command.
Update block/deblock of positions. It is used to block the updating of position
values. Other signals related to the position will be reset.
Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
61850). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is active, but
no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected and
functional and configuration data is visible.

The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile memory.

Substitution

The substitution part in SXSWI is used for manual set of the position for the switch.
The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value because the
real process value is erroneous of some reason. SXSWI will then use the manually
entered value instead of the value for positions determined by the process.
It is always possible to make a substitution, independently of the
position indication and the status information of the I/O board. When
substitution is enabled, the position values are blocked for updating and
other signals related to the position are reset. The substituted values are
stored in a non-volatile memory.

Time diagrams

There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 318 explains these two timers during the execute phase.

627
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

AdaptivePulse = TRUE

EXE_CL
Close pulse duration

OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

if t1 > tStartMove then

"switch-not-start-moving"
attribute in 'cause' is set

tStartMove timer
t1
tStartMove

tIntermediate timer
t2

if t2 > tIntermediate then

"persisting-intermediate-state"
attribute in 'cause' is set

tIntermediate
en05000097.vsd
IEC05000097 V1 EN

Figure 318:

The timers tStartMove and tIntermediate

The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses to
be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 319 shows the principle of the
execute output pulse. The AdaptivePulse parameter will have affect on both execute
output pulses.
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_CL
tClosePulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

EXE_CL
tClosePulse

en05000098.vsd
IEC05000098 V1 EN

Figure 319:

Execute output pulse

628
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed tOpenPulse or
tClosePulse.
The execute output pulses are reset when:
If the start position indicates bad state (OPENPOS=1 and CLOSEPOS
=1) when a command is executed the execute output pulse resets only
when timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed.

the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, that is, tStartMove has
elapsed.

There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that the
configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse
duration timer has elapsed.
An example when a primary device is open and an open command is executed is
shown in figure 320.
OPENPOS

CLOSEPOS

AdaptivePulse=FALSE

EXE_OP
tOpenPulse

AdaptivePulse=TRUE

EXE_OP
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer

en05000099.vsd
IEC05000099 V1 EN

Figure 320:

Open command with open position indication

629
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.3.8.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
SXSWI
BLOCK
LR_SWI
OPEN
CLOSE
BL_OPEN
BL_CLOSE
BL_UPD
POSOPEN
POSCLOSE
RS_CNT
XIN

XPOS
EXE_OP
EXE_CL
SUBSTED
OP_BLKD
CL_BLKD
UPD_BLKD
POSITION
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
CNT_VAL
L_CAUSE
IEC05000339-2-en.vsd

IEC05000339 V2 EN

Figure 321:

12.3.8.4

SXSWI function block

Input and output signals

Table 312:
Name

SXSWI Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

LR_SWI

BOOLEAN

Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard

OPEN

BOOLEAN

Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch

CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch

BL_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal to block the open command

BL_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal to block the close command

BL_UPD

BOOLEAN

Steady signal for block of the position updating

POSOPEN

BOOLEAN

Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O

POSCLOSE

BOOLEAN

Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O

RS_CNT

BOOLEAN

Resets the operation counter

XIN

BOOLEAN

Execution information from CSWI

Table 313:
Name

SXSWI Output signals

Type

Description

XPOS

GROUP SIGNAL

Group signal for XSWI output

EXE_OP

BOOLEAN

Executes the command for open direction

EXE_CL

BOOLEAN

Executes the command for close direction

SUBSTED

BOOLEAN

Indication that the position is substituted

OP_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Indication that the function is blocked for open

commands

Table continues on next page

630
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

12.3.8.5
Table 314:

Type

Description

CL_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Indication that the function is blocked for close

commands

UPD_BLKD

BOOLEAN

Update of position indication is blocked

POSITION

INTEGER

Apparatus position indication

OPENPOS

BOOLEAN

Apparatus open position

CLOSEPOS

BOOLEAN

Apparatus closed position

CNT_VAL

INTEGER

Operation counter value

L_CAUSE

INTEGER

Latest value of the error indication during command

Setting parameters
SXSWI Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

tStartMove

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

3.000

Supervision time for the apparatus to move

after a command

tIntermediate

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

15.000

Allowed time for intermediate position

AdaptivePulse

Not adaptive
Adaptive

Not adaptive

Output resets when a new correct end

position is reached

tOpenPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Output pulse length for open command

tClosePulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Output pulse length for close command

SwitchType

Load Break
Disconnector
Grounding Switch
HS Groundg.
Switch

Disconnector

1=LoadBreak,2=Disconnector,3=EarthSw,
4=HighSpeedEarthSw

SuppressMidPos

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Mid-position is suppressed during the time

tIntermediate

12.3.9

Bay reserve QCRSV

12.3.9.1

Introduction

Default

Description

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking

information between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay,
switchyard part, or complete substation.

631
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.3.9.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Principle of operation
The Bay reserve (QCRSV) function handles the reservation. QCRSV function starts to
operate in two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or
if there is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the
function if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the
input signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller (SCWI). The signals for
request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function
block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are
connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay only
(TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.

Reservation request of own bay

If the reservation request comes from the own bay, the function QCRSV has to know
which apparatus the request comes from. This information is available with the input
signal RES_RQx and parameter ParamRequestx (where x=1-8 is the number of the
requesting apparatus). In order to decide if a reservation request of the current bay can
be permitted QCRSV has to know whether the own bay already is reserved by itself or
another bay. This information is available in the output signal RESERVED.
If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx
(where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch
controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset
and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation of other bays

When the function QCRSV receives a request from an apparatus in the own bay that
requires other bays to be reserved as well, it checks if it already is reserved. If not, it
will send a request to the other bays that are predefined (to be reserved) and wait for
their response (acknowledge). The request of reserving other bays is done by activating
the output RES_BAYS.
When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-ncontrol" in the "cause" signal.

Reservation request from another bay

When another bay requests for reservation, the input BAY_RES in corresponding
function block RESIN is activated. The signal for reservation request is grouped into
the output signal EXCH_OUT in RESIN, which is connected to input RES_DATA in

632
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

QCRSV. If the bay is not reserved, the bay will be reserved and the acknowledgment
from output ACK_T_B is sent back to the requested bay. If the bay already is reserved
the reservation is kept and no acknowledgment is sent.

Blocking and overriding of reservation

If QCRSV function is blocked (input BLK_RES is set to true) the reservation is

blocked. That is, no reservation can be made from the own bay or any other bay. This
can be set, for example, via a binary input from an external device to prevent
operations from another operator place at the same time.
The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE
input signal, that is, reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.

Bay with more than eight apparatuses

If only one instance of QCRSV is used for a bay that is, use of up to eight apparatuses,
the input EXCH_IN must be set to FALSE.
If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The two QCRSV functions have to communicate and this is done through the
input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 322. If more then one QCRSV
are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must be in the way
that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.

633
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_ GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_ GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_ GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_ GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_ GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_ GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_ GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_ GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_ BAYS
BLK_ RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_ DATA EXCH_ OUT

QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_ GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_ GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_ GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_ GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_ GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_ GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_ GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_ GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_ BAYS
BLK_ RES
ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_ DATA EXCH_ OUT

OR

OR

OR

RES_ BAYS

ACK_TO_B

RESERVED

ANSI05000088_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000088 V2 EN

Figure 322:

12.3.9.3

Connection of two QCRSV function blocks

Function block
QCRSV
EXCH_IN
RES_RQ1
RES_RQ2
RES_RQ3
RES_RQ4
RES_RQ5
RES_RQ6
RES_RQ7
RES_RQ8
BLK_RES
OVERRIDE
RES_DATA

RES_GRT1
RES_GRT2
RES_GRT3
RES_GRT4
RES_GRT5
RES_GRT6
RES_GRT7
RES_GRT8
RES_BAYS
ACK_TO_B
RESERVED
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000340-2-en.vsd

IEC05000340 V2 EN

Figure 323:

QCRSV function block

634
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.3.9.4

Input and output signals

Table 315:
Name

QCRSV Input signals

Type

Default

Description

EXCH_IN

INTEGER

Used for exchange signals between different BayRes

blocks

RES_RQ1

BOOLEAN

Signal for apparatus 1 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ2

BOOLEAN

Signal for apparatus 2 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ3

BOOLEAN

Signal for apparatus 3 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ4

BOOLEAN

Signal for apparatus 4 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ5

BOOLEAN

Signal for apparatus 5 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ6

BOOLEAN

Signal for apparatus 6 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ7

BOOLEAN

Signal for apparatus 7 that requests to do a reservation

RES_RQ8

BOOLEAN

Signal for apparatus 8 that requests to do a reservation

BLK_RES

BOOLEAN

Reservation is not possible and the output signals are

reset

OVERRIDE

BOOLEAN

Signal to override the reservation

RES_DATA

INTEGER

Reservation data coming from function block ResIn

Table 316:
Name

QCRSV Output signals

Type

Description

RES_GRT1

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the apparatus 1 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT2

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the apparatus 2 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT3

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the apparatus 3 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT4

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the apparatus 4 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT5

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the apparatus 5 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT6

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the apparatus 6 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT7

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the apparatus 7 is allowed to

operate

RES_GRT8

BOOLEAN

Reservation is made and the apparatus 8 is allowed to

operate

RES_BAYS

BOOLEAN

Request for reservation of other bays

ACK_TO_B

BOOLEAN

Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved

RESERVED

BOOLEAN

Indicates that the bay is reserved

EXCH_OUT

INTEGER

Used for exchange signals between different BayRes

blocks

635
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.3.9.5
Table 317:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
QCRSV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

tCancelRes

0.000 - 60.000

Step
0.001

Default
10.000

Supervision time for canceling the reservation

ParamRequest1

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at selection

of apparatus 1

ParamRequest2

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at selection

of apparatus 2

ParamRequest3

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at selection

of apparatus 3

ParamRequest4

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at selection

of apparatus 4

ParamRequest5

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at selection

of apparatus 5

ParamRequest6

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at selection

of apparatus 6

ParamRequest7

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at selection

of apparatus 7

ParamRequest8

Other bays res.

Only own bay res.

Only own bay res.

Reservation of the own bay only, at selection

of apparatus 8

12.3.10

Reservation input RESIN

12.3.10.1

Introduction

Description

The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the reservation information from
other bays. The number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to
60 instances are available).

12.3.10.2

Principle of operation
The reservation input (RESIN) function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions.
The logic diagram in figure 324 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs
of the function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals
transferred over the station bus from another bay.

636
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

EXCH_IN

INT
BIN

ACK_F_B

AND
FutureUse

OR

BAY_ACK

ANY_ACK

OR

VALID_TX

AND
BAY_VAL

OR
RE_RQ_B

OR

BAY_RES

AND
V _RE_RQ

OR

BIN

EXCH_OUT
INT

INT..Integer
BIN..Binary

en05000089_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000089 V1 EN

Figure 324:

Logic diagram for RESIN

Figure 325 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules in
the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the
reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions are
connected to the module bay reserve (QCRSV) that handles the reservation function in
the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the first RESIN module in the chain
has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the
function block RESIN, where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden for the user.

637
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

Bay 1

Bay 2

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

Bay n

RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT

QCRSV
RES_DATA

en05000090.vsd
IEC05000090 V2 EN

Figure 325:

12.3.10.3

Diagram of the chaining principle for RESIN

Function block
RESIN1
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES

ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC05000341-2-en.vsd

IEC05000341 V2 EN

Figure 326:

RESIN1 function block

RESIN2
EXCH_IN
BAY_ACK
BAY_VAL
BAY_RES

ACK_F_B
ANY_ACK
VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
IEC09000807_1_en.vsd

IEC09000807 V1 EN

Figure 327:

RESIN2 function block

638
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.3.10.4

Input and output signals

Table 318:
Name

RESIN1 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BAY_ACK

BOOLEAN

Another bay has acknowledged the reservation

request from this bay

BAY_VAL

BOOLEAN

The reservervation and acknowledge signals from

another bay are valid

BAY_RES

BOOLEAN

Request from other bay to reserve this bay

Table 319:
Name

RESIN1 Output signals

Type

Description

ACK_F_B

BOOLEAN

All other bays have acknowledged the reservation

request from this bay

ANY_ACK

BOOLEAN

Any other bay has acknowledged the reservation

request from this bay

VALID_TX

BOOLEAN

The reservation and acknowledge signals from other

bays are valid

RE_RQ_B

BOOLEAN

Request from other bay to reserve this bay

V_RE_RQ

BOOLEAN

Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid

EXCH_OUT

INTEGER

Used for exchange signals between different ResIn

blocks

Table 320:
Name

RESIN2 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

EXCH_IN

INTEGER

Used for exchange signals between different ResIn

blocks

BAY_ACK

BOOLEAN

Another bay has acknowledged the reservation

request from this bay

BAY_VAL

BOOLEAN

The reservervation and acknowledge signals from

another bay are valid

BAY_RES

BOOLEAN

Request from other bay to reserve this bay

639
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 321:

RESIN2 Output signals

Name

12.3.10.5
Table 322:
Name
FutureUse

Table 323:
Name
FutureUse

Type

Description

ACK_F_B

BOOLEAN

All other bays have acknowledged the reservation

request from this bay

ANY_ACK

BOOLEAN

Any other bay has acknowledged the reservation

request from this bay

VALID_TX

BOOLEAN

The reservation and acknowledge signals from other

bays are valid

RE_RQ_B

BOOLEAN

Request from other bay to reserve this bay

V_RE_RQ

BOOLEAN

Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid

EXCH_OUT

INTEGER

Used for exchange signals between different ResIn

blocks

Setting parameters
RESIN1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)
Bay in use
Bay future use

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Bay in use

Description
The bay for this ResIn block is for future use

RESIN2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Bay in use
Bay future use

Unit
-

Step
-

12.4

Interlocking (3)

12.4.1

Introduction

Default
Bay in use

Description
The bay for this ResIn block is for future use

The interlocking functionality blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching

devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material
damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The interlocking functionality in each IED is
not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs
communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
system at any given time.
640
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.2

Principle of operation
The interlocking function consists of software modules located in each control IED.
The function is distributed and not dependent on any central function. Communication
between modules in different bays is performed via the station bus.
The reservation function (see section "Introduction") is used to ensure that HV
apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap, which
arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the communication
system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the interlocking condition of
the intended operation. The reservation is maintained until the operation is performed.
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on
the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching devices
that may affect it.
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay.
The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and the
switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or breaker-and-a-half bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:

Positions of HV apparatuses (sometimes per phase)

Valid positions (if evaluated in the control module)
External release (to add special conditions for release)
Line voltage (to block operation of line grounding switch)
Output signals to release the HV apparatus

The interlocking module is connected to the surrounding functions within a bay as

shown in figure 328.

641
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Interlocking
modules in
other bays

Interlocking
module

Apparatus control
modules
SCILO

SCSWI

SXSWI

Apparatus control
modules
SCILO

SCSWI

SXCBR

152

Apparatus control
modules
SCILO

SCSWI

SXSWI

en04000526_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000526 V1 EN

Figure 328:

Interlocking module on bay level

Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:

Ungrounded busbars
Busbars connected together
Other bays connected to a busbar
Received data from other bays is valid

Figure 329 illustrates the data exchange principle.

642
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Station bus
Bay 1

Bay n

Disc 189 and 289 closed

WA1 not grounded

WA2 not grounded
WA1 and WA2 interconn

Bus coupler

Disc 189 and 289 closed

...
..

WA1 ungrounded
WA1 ungrounded
WA1 and WA2 interconn

WA1 not grounded

WA2 not grounded
WA1 and WA2 interconn

WA1 and WA2 interconn

in other bay

WA1
WA2
189

289

189

289

289

189

189G

289G

152
152

152
989

989

en05000494_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000494 V1 EN

Figure 329:

Data exchange between interlocking modules

When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control IED, or input board
error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release for
execution of the function will not be given.
On the local HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
For all interlocking modules these general rules apply:

The interlocking conditions for opening or closing of disconnectors and grounding

switches are always identical.
Grounding switches on the line feeder end, for example, rapid grounding switches,
are normally interlocked only with reference to the conditions in the bay where
they are located, not with reference to switches on the other side of the line. So a
line voltage indication may be included into line interlocking modules. If there is
no line voltage supervision within the bay, then the appropriate inputs must be set
to no voltage, and the operator must consider this when operating.
Grounding switches can only be operated on isolated sections for example,
without load/voltage. Circuit breaker contacts cannot be used to isolate a section,
that is, the status of the circuit breaker is irrelevant as far as the grounding switch
operation is concerned.
Disconnectors cannot break power current or connect different voltage systems.
Disconnectors in series with a circuit breaker can only be operated if the circuit
breaker is open, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel with other closed
connections. Other disconnectors can be operated if one side is completely

643
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

isolated, or if the disconnectors operate in parallel to other closed connections, or

if they are grounding on both sides.
Circuit breaker closing is only interlocked against running disconnectors in its bay
or additionally in a transformer bay against the disconnectors and grounding
switch on the other side of the transformer, if there is no disconnector between CB
and transformer.
Circuit breaker opening is only interlocked in a bus-coupler bay, if a bus bar
transfer is in progress.

To make the implementation of the interlocking function easier, a number of

standardized and tested software interlocking modules containing logic for the
interlocking conditions are available:

Line for double and transfer busbars, ABC_LINE (3)

Bus for double and transfer busbars, ABC_BC (3)
Transformer bay for double busbars, AB_TRAFO (3)
Bus-section breaker for double busbars, A1A2_BS (3)
Bus-section disconnector for double busbars, A1A2_DC (3)
Busbar grounding switch, BB_ES (3)
Double CB Bay, DB_BUS_A(3), DB_LINE(3), DB_BUS_B(3)
Breaker-and-a-half diameter, BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN, BH_LINE_B (3)

The interlocking conditions can be altered, to meet the customer specific requirements,
by adding configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration tool PCM600.
The inputs Qx_EXy on the interlocking modules are used to add these specific conditions.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending in
TR are intended for transfer to other bays.

12.4.3

Logical node for interlocking SCILO (3)

12.4.3.1

Introduction
The Logical node for interlocking SCILO(3) function is used to enable a switching
operation if the interlocking conditions permit. SCILO (3) function itself does not
provide any interlocking functionality. The interlocking conditions are generated in
separate function blocks containing the interlocking logic.

644
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.3.2

Logic diagram
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if the
interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined end
position for example, open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN)
is false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time
only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the
interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit breaker/
Circuit switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) and the enable signals come from the interlocking
logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller (SCSWI). One
instance per switching device is needed.
SCILO

POSOPEN
POSCLOSE

XOR

NOT

EN_OPEN

AND

OR
AND

OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN

EN_CLOSE

AND

OR
AND
en04000525_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000525 V1 EN

Figure 330:

12.4.3.3

SCILO (3) function logic diagram

Function block
SCILO (3)
POSOPEN
EN_OPEN
POSCLOSE
EN_CLOSE
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN
ANSI05000359-1-en.vsd
ANSI05000359 V1 EN

Figure 331:

12.4.3.4

SCILO (3) function block

Input and output signals

Table 324:
Name

SCILO (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

POSOPEN

BOOLEAN

Open position of switch device

POSCLOSE

BOOLEAN

Closed position of switch device

OPEN_EN

BOOLEAN

Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled

CLOSE_EN

BOOLEAN

Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled

645

Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 325:

SCILO (3) Output signals

Name

Type

Description

EN_OPEN

BOOLEAN

Open operation at closed or intermediate or bad

position is enabled

EN_CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Close operation at open or intermediate or bad

position is enabled

12.4.4

Interlocking for busbar grounding switch BB_ES (3)

12.4.4.1

Introduction
The interlocking for busbar grounding switch (BB_ES, 3) function is used for one
busbar grounding switch on any busbar parts according to figure 332.

89G

en04000504.vsd
ANSI04000504 V1 EN

Figure 332:

12.4.4.2

Switchyard layout BB_ES (3)

Function block
BB_ES (3)
89G_OP
89GREL
89G_CL
89GITL
BB_DC_OP
BBGSOPTR
VP_BB_DC
BBGSCLTR
EXDU_BB
ANSI05000347-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000347 V2 EN

Figure 333:

BB_ES (3) function block

646
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.4.3

Logic diagram
BB_ES
VP_BB_DC
BB_DC_OP
EXDU_BB

AND

NOT

89G_OP
89G_CL

89GREL
89GITL
BBGSOPTR
BBGSCLTR
en04000546_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000546 V1 EN

12.4.4.4

Input and output signals

Table 326:
Name

BB_ES (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QC_OP

BOOLEAN

Busbar grounding switch 89G is in open position

QC_CL

BOOLEAN

Busbar grounding switch 89G is in closed position

BB_DC_OP

BOOLEAN

All disconnectors on this busbar part are open

VP_BB_DC

BOOLEAN

Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid

EXDU_BB

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part

Table 327:
Name

BB_ES (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QCREL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 89G is allowed

QCITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 89G is not allowed

BBESOPTR

BOOLEAN

89G on this busbar part is in open position

BBESCLTR

BOOLEAN

89G on this busbar part is in closed position

12.4.5

Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS (3)

12.4.5.1

Introduction
The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS ,3) function is used for one bussection circuit breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 334. The function
can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

647
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

WA1 (A1)

WA2 (A2)

289

189

189G

289G

152

489G

389G

A1A2_BS
en04000516_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000516 V1 EN

Figure 334:

12.4.5.2

Switchyard layout A1A2_BS (3)

Function block
A1A2_BS (3)
152_OP
152OPREL
152_CL
152OPITL
189_OP
152CLREL
189_CL
152CLITL
289_OP
189REL
289_CL
189ITL
389G_OP
289REL
389G_CL
289ITL
489G_OP
389GREL
489G_CL
389GITL
S189G_OP
489GREL
S189G_CL
489GITL
S289G_OP
S1S2OPTR
S289G_CL
S1S2CLTR
BBTR_OP
189OPTR
VP_BBTR
189CLTR
EXDU_12
289OPTR
EXDU_89G
289CLTR
152O_EX1
VPS1S2TR
152O_EX2
VP189TR
152O_EX3
VP289TR
189_EX1
189_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
ANSI05000348-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000348 V2 EN

Figure 335:

A1A2_BS (3) function block

648
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.5.3

Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
S1189G_OP
S1189G_CL
S2289G_OP
S2289G_CL
VP189
189_OP
152O_EX1
VP289
289_OP
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12
152O_EX3
VP189
VP289
VP152
VP389G
VP489G
VPS1189G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP389G
VPS1189G
389G_CL
S1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2

A1A2_BS
XOR

VP152

XOR

VP189

XOR

VP289

XOR

VP389G

XOR

VP489G

XOR

VPS1189G

XOR

VPS2289G

AND

OR
NOT

152OPREL
152OPITL

AND

AND

AND
AND

NOT

OR
NOT

152CLREL
152CLITL
189REL
189ITL

AND

en04000542_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000542 V1 EN

649
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP152
VP389G
VP489G
VPS2289G
152_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
S2289G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP489G
VPS2289G
489G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
VP189
VP289
189_OP
289_OP

AND

289REL
289ITL

OR
NOT

AND

AND

389GREL
389GITL
489GREL
489GITL

NOT
NOT

189_OP
189_CL
VP189

189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR

289_OP
289_CL
VP289

289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR

189_OP
289_OP
152_OP
VP189
VP289
VP152

OR

NOT

S1S2OPTR
S1S2CLTR
VPS1S2TR

AND

en04000543_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000543 V1 EN

12.4.5.4

Input and output signals

Table 328:
Name

A1A2_BS (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

389G is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

389G is in closed position

QC4_OP

BOOLEAN

489G is in open position

QC4_CL

BOOLEAN

489G is in closed position

S1QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

S189G on bus section 1 is in open position

S1QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position

S2QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

S289G on bus section 2 is in open position

Table continues on next page

650
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

S2QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

S289G on bus section 2 is in closed position

BBTR_OP

BOOLEAN

No busbar transfer is in progress

VP_BBTR

BOOLEAN

Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar

transfer

EXDU_12

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1

and 2

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bays containing ground sw.

S189G or S289G

QA1O_EX1

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus 152

QA1O_EX2

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus 152

QA1O_EX3

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus 152

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

Table 329:
Name

A1A2_BS (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QA1OPREL

BOOLEAN

Opening of 152 is allowed

QA1OPITL

BOOLEAN

Opening of 152 is not allowed

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is not allowed

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is not allowed

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is not allowed

QC3REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 389G is allowed

QC3ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 389G is not allowed

QC4REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 489G is allowed

QC4ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 489G is not allowed

S1S2OPTR

BOOLEAN

No bus section connection between bus section 1 and

2

S1S2CLTR

BOOLEAN

Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2

exists

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

QB2OPTR

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2CLTR

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

Table continues on next page

651
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Description

VPS1S2TR

BOOLEAN

Status of the apparatuses between bus section 1 and

2 are valid

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB2TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

12.4.6

Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC (3)

12.4.6.1

Introduction
The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC, 3) function is used for one
bus-section disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 336. A1A2_DC (3)
function can be used for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.
WA1 (A1)

WA2 (A2)

52
289G

189G

A1A2_DC

en04000492_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000492 V1 EN

Figure 336:

12.4.6.2

Switchyard layout A1A2_DC (3)

Function block
A1A2_DC (3)
089_OP
089OPREL
089_CL
089OPITL
S189G_OP
089CLREL
S189G_CL
089CLITL
S289G_OP
DCOPTR
S289G_CL
DCCLTR
S1DC_OP
VPDCTR
S2DC_OP
VPS1_DC
VPS2_DC
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BB
089C_EX1
089C_EX2
089O_EX1
089O_EX2
089O_EX3
ANSI05000349-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000349 V2 EN

Figure 337:

A1A2_DC (3) function block

652
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.6.3

Logic diagram
A1A2_DC
89_OP
89_CL
S1189G_OP
S1189G_CL
S2289G_OP
S2289G_CL
VPS1189G
VPS2289G
VPS1_DC
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_89G

XOR

VPQB

VPDCTR
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
VPS1189G

XOR

VPS2289G

XOR

AND

OR
NOT

89OPREL
89OPITL

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1189
VPS2289G
VPS2_DC
S1189G_OP
S2289G_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_89G

AND

EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1189G
VPS2289G
S1189G_CL
S2289G_CL
EXDU_89G
QBOP_EX3

AND

en04000544_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000544 V1 EN

IEC04000545 V1 EN

653
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.4.6.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 330:
Name

Type

Default

Description

QB_OP

BOOLEAN

089 is in open position

QB_CL

BOOLEAN

089 is in closed position

S1QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

S189G on bus section 1 is in open position

S1QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

S189G on bus section 1 is in closed position

S2QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

S289G on bus section 2 is in open position

S2QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

S289G on bus section 2 is in closed position

S1DC_OP

BOOLEAN

All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position

S2DC_OP

BOOLEAN

All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position

VPS1_DC

BOOLEAN

Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid

VPS2_DC

BOOLEAN

Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bays containing ground sw.

S189G or S289G

EXDU_BB

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1

and 2

QBCL_EX1

BOOLEAN

External close condition for section disconnector 089

QBCL_EX2

BOOLEAN

External close condition for section disconnector 089

QBOP_EX1

BOOLEAN

External open condition for section disconnector 089

QBOP_EX2

BOOLEAN

External open condition for section disconnector 089

QBOP_EX3

BOOLEAN

External open condition for section disconnector 089

Table 331:
Name

12.4.7

A1A2_DC (3) Input signals

A1A2_DC (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QBOPREL

BOOLEAN

Opening of 089 is allowed

QBOPITL

BOOLEAN

Opening of 089 is not allowed

QBCLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 089 is allowed

QBCLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 089 is not allowed

DCOPTR

BOOLEAN

The bus section disconnector is in open position

DCCLTR

BOOLEAN

The bus section disconnector is in closed position

VPDCTR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 089 is valid (open or closed)

Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC (3)

654
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.7.1

Introduction
The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC, 3) function is used for a bus-coupler
bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 338. The function
can also be used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar
arrangement without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
189

289

189G

2089

789

152

289G

en04000514_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000514 V1 EN

Figure 338:

Switchyard layout ABC_BC (3)

655
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.4.7.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
ABC_BC (3)
152_OP
152OPREL
152_CL
152OPITL
189_OP
152CLREL
189_CL
152CLITL
289_OP
189REL
289_CL
189ITL
789_OP
289REL
789_CL
289ITL
2089_OP
789REL
2089_CL
789ITL
189G_OP
2089REL
189G_CL
2089ITL
289G_OP
189GREL
289G_CL
189GITL
1189G_OP
289GREL
1189G_CL
289GITL
2189G_OP
189OPTR
2189G_CL
189CLTR
7189G_OP
22089OTR
7189G_CL
22089CTR
BBTR_OP
789OPTR
BC_12_CL
789CLTR
VP_BBTR
1289OPTR
VP_BC_12
1289CLTR
EXDU_89G
BC12OPTR
EXDU_12
BC12CLTR
EXDU_BC
BC17OPTR
152O_EX1
BC17CLTR
152O_EX2
BC27OPTR
152O_EX3
BC27CLTR
189_EX1
VP189TR
189_EX2
V22089TR
189_EX3
VP789TR
289_EX1
VP1289TR
289_EX2
VPBC12TR
289_EX3
VPBC17TR
2089_EX1
VPBC27TR
2089_EX2
789_EX1
789_EX2
ANSI05000350-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000350 V2 EN

Figure 339:

ABC_BC (3) function block

656
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.7.3

Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
2089_OP
2089_CL
789_OP
789_CL
289_OP
289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
7189G_OP
7189G_CL
VP189
189_OP
152O_EX1
VP2089
2089_OP
152O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
EXDU_12

ABC_BC
VP152

XOR
XOR

VP189

XOR

VP2089

XOR

VP789

XOR

VP289

XOR

VP189G

XOR

VP289G

XOR

VP1189G

XOR

VP2189G

XOR

VP7189G

AND

152OPREL
152OPITL

OR

NOT

AND

AND

152O_EX3
VP189
VP289
VP789
VP2089

AND

NOT

152CLREL
152CLITL

en04000533_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000533 V1 EN

VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP_BC_12
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3

AND

OR
NOT

189REL
189ITL

AND

AND

en04000534_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000534 V1 EN

657
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP_BC_12
189_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3

AND

OR
NOT

289REL
289ITL

AND

AND

en04000535_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000535 V1 EN

VP152
VP2089
VP189G
VP289G
VP7189G
152_OP
2089_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
789_EX1
VP289G
VP7189G
289G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX2
VP152
VP789
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
789_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
2089_EX1
VP289G
VP2189G
289G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
2089_EX2

AND

789REL

OR
NOT

789ITL

AND

AND

2089REL

OR
NOT

2089ITL

AND

en04000536_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000536 V1 EN

658
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP189
VP2089
VP789
VP289
189_OP
2089_OP
789_OP
289_OP
189_OP
189_CL
VP189
2089_OP
289_OP
VP2089
VP289
789_OP
789_CL
VP789
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289
152_OP
189_OP
2089_OP
VP152
VP189
VP2089
152_OP
189_OP
789_OP
VP152
VP189
VP789
152_OP
289_OP
789_OP
VP152
VP289
VP789

AND

189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL

NOT
NOT

AND

NOT

AND

OR

NOT

AND
OR

NOT

189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
22089OTR
22089CTR
V22089TR
789OPTR
789CLTR
VP789TR
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR
BC12OPTR
BC12CLTR
VPBC12TR

AND

OR

NOT

BC17OPTR
BC17CLTR
VPBC17TR

AND

OR

NOT

BC27OPTR
BC27CLTR
VPBC27TR

AND

en04000537_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000537 V1 EN

12.4.7.4

Input and output signals

Table 332:
Name

ABC_BC (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

QB7_OP

BOOLEAN

789 is in open position

QB7_CL

BOOLEAN

789 is in closed position

QB20_OP

BOOLEAN

2089 is in open position

QB20_CL

BOOLEAN

2089 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

189G is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

189G is in closed position

Table continues on next page

659
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

289G is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

289G is in closed position

QC11_OP

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open

position

QC11_CL

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed

position

QC21_OP

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open

position

QC21_CL

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed

position

QC71_OP

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in open

position

QC71_CL

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in closed

position

BBTR_OP

BOOLEAN

No busbar transfer is in progress

BC_12_CL

BOOLEAN

A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1

and WA2

VP_BBTR

BOOLEAN

Status are valid for apparatuses involved in the busbar

transfer

VP_BC_12

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1

and WA2 are valid

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay containing grounding

switches

EXDU_12

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2

busbars

EXDU_BC

BOOLEAN

No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay

QA1O_EX1

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus 152

QA1O_EX2

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus 152

QA1O_EX3

BOOLEAN

External open condition for apparatus 152

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB1_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB2_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB20_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 2089

QB20_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 2089

QB7_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 789

QB7_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 789

660
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 333:
Name

ABC_BC (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QA1OPREL

BOOLEAN

Opening of 152 is allowed

QA1OPITL

BOOLEAN

Opening of 152 is not allowed

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is not allowed

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is not allowed

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is not allowed

QB7REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 789 is allowed

QB7ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 789 is not allowed

QB20REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 2089 is allowed

QB20ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 2089 is not allowed

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is not allowed

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is not allowed

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

QB220OTR

BOOLEAN

289 and 2089 are in open position

QB220CTR

BOOLEAN

289 or 2089 or both are not in open position

QB7OPTR

BOOLEAN

789 is in open position

QB7CLTR

BOOLEAN

789 is in closed position

QB12OPTR

BOOLEAN

189 or 289 or both are in open position

QB12CLTR

BOOLEAN

189 and 289 are not in open position

BC12OPTR

BOOLEAN

No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1

and WA2

BC12CLTR

BOOLEAN

Connection exists via the own bus coupler between

WA1 and WA2

BC17OPTR

BOOLEAN

No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1

and WA7

BC17CLTR

BOOLEAN

Connection exists via the own bus coupler between

WA1 and WA7

BC27OPTR

BOOLEAN

No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2

and WA7

BC27CLTR

BOOLEAN

Connection exists via the own bus coupler between

WA2 and WA7

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

Table continues on next page

661
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Description

VQB220TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 289 and 2089 are valid (open or closed)

VPQB7TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 789 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB12TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)

VPBC12TR

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1

and WA2 are valid

VPBC17TR

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7

are valid

VPBC27TR

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7

are valid

12.4.8

Interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter BH (3)

12.4.8.1

Introduction
The interlocking for breaker-and-a-half diameter (BH_CONN(3), BH_LINE_A(3),
BH_LINE_B(3)) functions are used for lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half
diameter according to figure 340.

662
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189

289
189G

189G

152

152
289G

289G

689

689
389G

BH_LINE_A

389G

6189

152

BH_LINE_B

6289

989

989
189G

289G
989G

989G

BH_CONN
en04000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000513 V1 EN

Figure 340:

Switchyard layout breaker-and-a-half

Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A (3) and
BH_LINE_B (3) are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN (3) is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker-and-a-half switchyard
layout.

663
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.4.8.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function blocks
BH_LINE_A (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
689_OP
689REL
689_CL
689ITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
389GREL
389G_CL
389GITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
C152_OP
189OPTR
C152_CL
189CLTR
C6189_OP
VP189TR
C6189_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7
ANSI05000352-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000352 V2 EN

Figure 341:

BH_LINE_A (3) function block

664
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

BH_LINE_B (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
689_OP
689REL
689_CL
689ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
389GREL
389G_CL
389GITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
C152_OP
289OPTR
C152_CL
289CLTR
C6289_OP
VP289TR
C6289_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_89G
689_EX1
689_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5
989_EX6
989_EX7
ANSI05000353-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000353 V2 EN

Figure 342:

BH_LINE_B (3) function block

BH_CONN (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
6189_OP
6189REL
6189_CL
6189ITL
6289_OP
6289REL
6289_CL
6289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
1389G_OP
1389G_CL
2389G_OP
2389G_CL
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
6289_EX1
6289_EX2
ANSI05000351-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000351 V2 EN

Figure 343:

BH_CONN (3) function block

665

Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.4.8.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Logic diagrams
152_OP
152_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
1389G_OP
1389G_CL
2389G_OP
2389G_CL
VP6189
VP6289
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP189G
VP1389G
189G_CL
1389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP2389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP289G
VP2389G
289G_CL
2389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP6189
VP6289
6189_OP
6289_OP

BH_CONN
XOR

VP152

XOR

VP6189

XOR

VP6289

XOR

VP189G

XOR

VP289G

XOR

VP1389G
VP2389G
152CLREL
152CLITL
NOT

XOR
AND
AND

OR
NOT

6189REL
61891ITL

AND

AND

OR
NOT

6289REL
6289ITL

AND

AND

NOT
NOT

189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
en04000560_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000560 V1 EN

666
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
689_OP
689_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
C152_OP
C152_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
C6189_OP
C6189_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP189
VP689
VP989
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2

BH_LINE_A
XOR

VP152

XOR

VP189

XOR

VP689

XOR

VP989G

XOR

VP989

XOR

VP189G

XOR

VP289G

XOR

VP389G

XOR

VPC152

XOR

VPC189G

XOR

VPC289G

XOR

VPC6189

XOR

VP1189G

XOR
AND

AND

NOT

OR
NOT

VPVOLT
152CLREL
152CLITL

689REL
689ITL

AND

en04000554_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000554 V1 EN

667
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2
VP189
VP689
189_OP
689_OP
VP689
VP989
VPC6189
689_OP
989_OP
C6189_OP
VP152
VP689
VP989G
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6189
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989_EX3

AND

189REL
189ITL

OR
NOT

AND

AND

189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL

NOT
NOT

389GREL
389GITL

AND
NOT

AND

OR

NOT

989REL
989ITL

OR
AND

en04000555_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000555 V1 EN

C6189_OP
989_EX4
C152_OP
C189G_OP
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
189_OP
189_CL
VP189

OR

AND

OR

AND

AND

AND

NOT

989GREL
989GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
en04000556_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000556 V1 EN

668
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

152_OP
152_CL
289_OP
289_CL
689_OP
689_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
C152_OP
C152_CL
C189G_OP
C189G_CL
C289G_OP
C289G_CL
C6289_OP
C6289_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP289
VP689
VP989
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
689_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
689_EX2

BH_LINE_B
XOR

VP152

XOR

VP289

XOR

VP689

XOR

VP989G

XOR

VP989

XOR

VP189G

XOR

VP289G

XOR

VP389G

XOR

VPC152

XOR

VPC189G

XOR

VPC289G

XOR

VPC6289

XOR

VP2189G

XOR

VPVOLT
152CLREL
152CLITL

AND

AND

NOT

OR
NOT

689REL
689ITL

AND

en04000557_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000557 V1 EN

669
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2
VP289
VP689
289_OP
689_OP
VP689
VP989
VPC6289
689_OP
989_OP
C6289_OP
VP152
VP689
VP989G
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VPC152
VPC6289
VPC189G
VPC289G
989_EX1
689_OP
989_EX2
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989_EX3

289REL

OR

AND

289ITL

NOT

AND

AND

189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL

NOT
NOT

389GREL
389GITL

AND
NOT

989REL
AND

OR

NOT

989ITL

OR
AND

en04000558_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000558 V1 EN

C6289_OP
989_EX4
C152_OP
C189G_OP
C289G_OP
989_EX5
989G_OP
389G_OP
989_EX6
VP989G
VP389G
989G_CL
389G_CL
989_EX7
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF
289_OP
289_CL
VP289

OR

AND

OR

AND

AND

AND

NOT

989GREL
989GITL
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
en04000559_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000559 V1 EN

670
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.8.4

Input and output signals

Table 334:
Name

BH_LINE_A (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 is in closed position

QB6_OP

BOOLEAN

689 is in open position

QB6_CL

BOOLEAN

689 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

189G is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

189G is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

289G is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

289G is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

389G is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

389G is in closed position

QB9_OP

BOOLEAN

989 is in open position

QB9_CL

BOOLEAN

989 is in closed position

QC9_OP

BOOLEAN

989G is in open position

QC9_CL

BOOLEAN

989G is in closed position

CQA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQB61_OP

BOOLEAN

6189 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQB61_CL

BOOLEAN

6189 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQC1_OP

BOOLEAN

189G in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQC1_CL

BOOLEAN

189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQC2_OP

BOOLEAN

289G in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQC2_CL

BOOLEAN

289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position

QC11_OP

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open

position

QC11_CL

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed

position

VOLT_OFF

BOOLEAN

There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure

VOLT_ON

BOOLEAN

There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bay containing grounding switch

1189G

QB6_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for disconnector 689

QB6_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for disconnector 689

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

Table continues on next page

671
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB9_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX4

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX5

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX6

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX7

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

Table 335:
Name

BH_LINE_A (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is not allowed

QB6REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 689 is allowed

QB6ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 689 is not allowed

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is not allowed

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is not allowed

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is not allowed

QC3REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 389G is allowed

QC3ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 389G is not allowed

QB9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989 is allowed

QB9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989 is not allowed

QC9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989G is allowed

QC9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989G is not allowed

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

672
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 336:
Name

BH_LINE_B (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 is in closed position

QB6_OP

BOOLEAN

689 is in open position

QB6_CL

BOOLEAN

689 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

189G is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

189G is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

289G is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

289G is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

389G is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

389G is in closed position

QB9_OP

BOOLEAN

989 is in open position

QB9_CL

BOOLEAN

989 is in closed position

QC9_OP

BOOLEAN

989G is in open position

QC9_CL

BOOLEAN

989G is in closed position

CQA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQB62_OP

BOOLEAN

6289 in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQB62_CL

BOOLEAN

6289 in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQC1_OP

BOOLEAN

189G in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQC1_CL

BOOLEAN

189G in module BH_CONN is in closed position

CQC2_OP

BOOLEAN

289G in module BH_CONN is in open position

CQC2_CL

BOOLEAN

289G in module BH_CONN is in closed position

QC21_OP

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open

position

QC21_CL

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed

position

VOLT_OFF

BOOLEAN

There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure

VOLT_ON

BOOLEAN

There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bay containing grounding switch

2189G

QB6_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for disconnector 689

QB6_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for disconnector 689

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

Table continues on next page

673
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

QB9_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX4

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX5

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX6

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX7

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

Table 337:
Name

BH_LINE_B (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is not allowed

QB6REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 689 is allowed

QB6ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 689 is not allowed

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is not allowed

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is not allowed

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is not allowed

QC3REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 389G is allowed

QC3ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 389G is not allowed

QB9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989 is allowed

QB9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989 is not allowed

QC9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989G is allowed

QC9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989G is not allowed

QB2OPTR

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2CLTR

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

VPQB2TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

Table 338:
Name

BH_CONN (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 is in closed position

QB61_OP

BOOLEAN

6189 is in open position

Table continues on next page

674
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

6189 is in closed position

QB62_OP

BOOLEAN

6289 is in open position

QB62_CL

BOOLEAN

6289 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

189G is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

189G is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

289G is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

289G is in closed position

1QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

1389G on line 1 is in open position

1QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

1389G on line 1 is in closed position

2QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

2389G on line 2 is in open position

2QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

2389G on line 2 is in closed position

QB61_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 6189

QB61_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 6189

QB62_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 6289

QB62_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 6289

Table 339:
Name

12.4.9

Type

QB61_CL

BH_CONN (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is not allowed

QB61REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 6189 is allowed

QB61ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 6189 is not allowed

QB62REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 6289 is allowed

QB62ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 6289 is not allowed

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is not allowed

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is not allowed

Interlocking for double CB bay DB (3)

675
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.4.9.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Introduction
The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A
(3), DB_BUS_B (3) and DB_LINE (3) functions are used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement according to figure 344.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189

DB_BUS_A

189G

289

489G

DB_BUS_B

252

152

589G

289G

6189

6289
389G

DB_LINE

989
989G

en04000518_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000518 V1 EN

Figure 344:

Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_LINE (3) is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are
connected to the busbars. DB_BUS_A (3) and DB_BUS_B (3) are the connections
from the line to the busbars.

676
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.9.2

Function block
DB_BUS_A (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
189_OP
6189REL
189_CL
6189ITL
6189_OP
189REL
6189_CL
189ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389G_OP
189OPTR
389G_CL
189CLTR
1189G_OP
VP189TR
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6189_EX1
6189_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
ANSI05000354-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000354 V2 EN

Figure 345:

DB_BUS_A (3) function block

DB_LINE (3)
152_OP
152_CL
252_OP
252_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
989_EX1
989_EX2
989_EX3
989_EX4
989_EX5

989REL
989ITL
389GREL
389GITL
989GREL
989GITL

ANSI05000356-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000356 V2 EN

Figure 346:

DB_LINE (3) function block

677
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

DB_BUS_B (3)
252_OP
252CLREL
252_CL
252CLITL
289_OP
6289REL
289_CL
6289ITL
6289_OP
289REL
6289_CL
289ITL
489G_OP
489GREL
489G_CL
489GITL
589G_OP
589GREL
589G_CL
589GITL
389G_OP
289OPTR
389G_CL
289CLTR
2189G_OP
VP289TR
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
6289_EX1
6289_EX2
289_EX1
289_EX2
ANSI05000355-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000355 V2 EN

Figure 347:

DB_BUS_B (3) function block

678
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.9.3

Logic diagrams
152_OP
152_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189_OP
189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
VP6189
VP189
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
6189_EX1
VP289G
VP389G
289G_CL
389G_CL
6189_EX2
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX2

DB_BUS_A
VP152

XOR
XOR

VP6189

XOR

VP189

XOR

VP189G

XOR

VP289G

XOR

VP389G

XOR
NOT

VP1189G
152CLREL
152CLITL

NOT

6189REL
6189ITL

AND
AND

OR

AND

AND

OR
NOT

189REL
189ITL

AND

en04000547_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000547 V1 EN

VP6189
VP189
6189_OP
189_OP
189_OP
189_CL
VP189

AND

NOT
NOT

189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL
189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR
en04000548_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000548 V1 EN

679
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

252_OP
252_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
289_OP
289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VP6289
VP289
VP252
VP489G
VP589G
VP389G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
389G_OP
6289_EX1
VP589G
VP389G
589G_CL
389G_CL
6289_EX2
VP252
VP489G
VP589G
VP2189G
252_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP489G
VP2189G
489G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX2

DB_BUS_B
XOR

VP252

XOR

VP6289

XOR

VP289

XOR

VP489G

XOR

VP589G
VP389G

XOR
XOR
AND
AND

NOT

OR
NOT

VP2189G
252CLREL
252CLITL
6289REL
6289ITL

AND

AND

OR
NOT

289REL
289ITL

AND

en04000552_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000552 V1 EN

VP6289
VP289
6289_OP
289_OP
289_OP
289_CL
VP289

AND

NOT
NOT

489GREL
489GITL
589GREL
589GITL
289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
en04000553_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000553 V1 EN

680
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

152_OP
152_CL
252_OP
252_CL
6189_OP
6189_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
6289_OP
6289_CL
489G_OP
489G_CL
589G_OP
589G_CL
989_OP
989_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP152
VP252
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
152_OP
252_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1

DB_LINE
VP152

XOR
XOR

VP252

XOR

VP6189

XOR

VP189G

XOR

VP289G

XOR

VP6289

XOR

VP489G

XOR

VP589G

XOR

VP989

XOR

VP389G

XOR

VP989G
VPVOLT

XOR
AND

OR
NOT

989REL
989ITL

AND
en04000549_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000549 V1 EN

681
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP989G
VP6289
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
989G_OP
6289_OP
989_EX2
VP252
VP6189
VP389G
VP489G
VP589G
VP989G
252_OP
6189_OP
389G_OP
489G_OP
589G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX3
VP389G
VP989G
VP6189
VP6289
389G_OP
989G_OP
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_EX4
VP389G
VP989G
389G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX5

AND

OR

AND

AND

AND

en04000550_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000550 V1 EN

VP6189
VP6289
VP989
6189_OP
6289_OP
989_OP
VP989
VPVOLT
989_OP
VOLT_OFF

NOT

389GREL
389GITL

NOT

989GREL
989GITL

AND

AND

en04000551_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000551 V1 EN

12.4.9.4

Input and output signals

Table 340:
Name

DB_BUS_A (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

Table continues on next page

682
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

QB61_OP

BOOLEAN

6189 is in open position

QB61_CL

BOOLEAN

6189 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

189G is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

189G is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

289G is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

289G is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

389G is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

389G is in closed position

QC11_OP

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open

position

QC11_CL

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed

position

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bay containing grounding switch

1189G

QB61_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 6189

QB61_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 6189

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

Table 341:
Name

DB_BUS_A (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is not allowed

QB61REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 6189 is allowed

QB61ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 6189 is not allowed

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is not allowed

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is not allowed

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is not allowed

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

683
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 342:
Name

DB_LINE (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 is in closed position

QA2_OP

BOOLEAN

252 is in open position

QA2_CL

BOOLEAN

252 is in closed position

QB61_OP

BOOLEAN

6189 is in open position

QB61_CL

BOOLEAN

6189 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

189G is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

189G is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

289G is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

289G is in closed position

QB62_OP

BOOLEAN

6289 is in open position

QB62_CL

BOOLEAN

6289 is in closed position

QC4_OP

BOOLEAN

489G is in open position

QC4_CL

BOOLEAN

489G is in closed position

QC5_OP

BOOLEAN

589G is in open position

QC5_CL

BOOLEAN

589G is in closed position

QB9_OP

BOOLEAN

989 is in open position

QB9_CL

BOOLEAN

989 is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

389G is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

389G is in closed position

QC9_OP

BOOLEAN

989G is in open position

QC9_CL

BOOLEAN

989G is in closed position

VOLT_OFF

BOOLEAN

There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure

VOLT_ON

BOOLEAN

There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure

QB9_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX4

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX5

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

684
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 343:
Name

DB_LINE (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QB9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989 is allowed

QB9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989 is not allowed

QC3REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 389G is allowed

QC3ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 389G is not allowed

QC9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989G is allowed

QC9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989G is not allowed

Table 344:
Name

DB_BUS_B (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA2_OP

BOOLEAN

252 is in open position

QA2_CL

BOOLEAN

252 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

QB62_OP

BOOLEAN

6289 is in open position

QB62_CL

BOOLEAN

6289 is in closed position

QC4_OP

BOOLEAN

489G is in open position

QC4_CL

BOOLEAN

489G is in closed position

QC5_OP

BOOLEAN

589G is in open position

QC5_CL

BOOLEAN

589G is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

389G is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

389G is in closed position

QC21_OP

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open

position

QC21_CL

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed

position

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from bay containing grounding switch

2189G

QB62_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 6289

QB62_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 6289

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

685
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 345:
Name

DB_BUS_B (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QA2CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 252 is allowed

QA2CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 252 is not allowed

QB62REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 6289 is allowed

QB62ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 6289 is not allowed

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is not allowed

QC4REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 489G is allowed

QC4ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 489G is not allowed

QC5REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 589G is allowed

QC5ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 589G is not allowed

QB2OPTR

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2CLTR

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

VPQB2TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

12.4.10

Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE (3)

12.4.10.1

Introduction
The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function is used for a line connected to a
double busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 348. The
function can also be used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a
single busbar arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

686
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
189

289

189G

789

152
289G
989

989G

en04000478_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000478 V1 EN

Figure 348:

Switchyard layout ABC_LINE (3)

687
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.4.10.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
ABC_LINE (3)
152CLREL
152_OP
152_CL
152CLITL
989_OP
989REL
989_CL
989ITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
789_OP
789REL
789_CL
789ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
989G_OP
989GREL
989G_CL
989GITL
1189G_OP
189OPTR
1189G_CL
189CLTR
2189G_OP
289OPTR
2189G_CL
289CLTR
7189G_OP
789OPTR
7189G_CL
789CLTR
BB7_D_OP
1289OPTR
BC_12_CL
1289CLTR
BC_17_OP
VP189TR
BC_17_CL
VP289TR
BC_27_OP
VP789TR
BC_27_CL
VP1289TR
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_12
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BPB
EXDU_BC
989_EX1
989_EX2
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3
789_EX1
789_EX2
789_EX3
789_EX4
ANSI05000357-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000357 V2 EN

Figure 349:

ABC_LINE (3) function block

688
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.10.3

Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
989_OP
989_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
789_OP
789_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
989G_OP
989G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
7189G_OP
7189G_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
VP152
VP189G
VP289G
VP989G
152_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
989G_OP
989_EX1
VP289G
VP989G
289G_CL
989G_CL
989_EX2

ABC_LINE
XOR

VP152

XOR

VP989

XOR

VP189

XOR

VP289

XOR

VP789

XOR

VP189G

XOR

VP289G

XOR

VP989G

XOR

VP1189G

XOR

VP2189G

XOR

VP7189G

XOR

VPVOLT
AND

AND

OR
NOT

NOT

152CLREL
152CLITL

989REL
989ITL

AND

en04000527_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000527 V1 EN

689
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
1189G_OP

AND

VP289

AND

189REL

OR
NOT

189ITL

EXDU_89G
189_EX1

VP_BC_12
289_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2

VP189G
VP1189G
189G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G

AND

189EX3

en04000528_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000528 V1 EN

690
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G

AND

VP189
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC

AND

289REL

OR
NOT

289ITL

289_EX1

289_EX2

VP189G
VP2189G
189G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G

AND

289_EX3

en04000529_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000529 V1 EN

691
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP989G
VP7189G

AND

VP_BB7_D

789REL

OR
NOT

VP_BC_17

789ITL

VP_BC_27
989G_OP
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
789_EX1
VP152
VP189
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
152_CL
189_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G

AND

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX2
en04000530_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000530 V1 EN

692
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP152
VP289
VP989G
VP989
VP7189G
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
152_CL
289_CL
989G_OP
989_CL
7189G_OP
EXDU_89G

AND

OR

BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
789_EX3
VP989G
VP7189G
989G_CL
7189G_CL
EXDU_89G
789_EX4
VP189
VP289
VP989
189_OP
289_OP
989_OP
VP789
VP989
VPVOLT
789_OP
989_OP
VOLT_OFF

AND

AND

NOT
NOT

AND
NOT

189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL

989GREL
989GITL

en04000531_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000531 V1 EN

693
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

189_OP
189_CL
VP189

189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR

289_OP
289_CL
VP289

289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR

789_OP
789_CL
VP789

789OPTR
789CLTR
VP789TR

189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289

OR

NOT

AND

1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR

en04000532_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000532 V1 EN

12.4.10.4

Input and output signals

Table 346:
Name

ABC_LINE (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 is in closed position

QB9_OP

BOOLEAN

989 is in open position

QB9_CL

BOOLEAN

989 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

QB7_OP

BOOLEAN

789 is in open position

QB7_CL

BOOLEAN

789 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

189G is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

189G is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

289G is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

289G is in closed position

QC9_OP

BOOLEAN

989G is in open position

QC9_CL

BOOLEAN

989G is in closed position

Table continues on next page

694
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

QC11_OP

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in open

position

QC11_CL

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed

position

QC21_OP

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in open

position

QC21_CL

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed

position

QC71_OP

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in open

position

QC71_CL

BOOLEAN

Grounding switch 7189G on busbar WA7 is in closed

position

BB7_D_OP

BOOLEAN

Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay

are open

BC_12_CL

BOOLEAN

A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1

and WA2

BC_17_OP

BOOLEAN

No bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA1 and WA7

BC_17_CL

BOOLEAN

A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1

and WA7

BC_27_OP

BOOLEAN

No bus coupler connection exists between busbar

WA2 and WA7

BC_27_CL

BOOLEAN

A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2

and WA7

VOLT_OFF

BOOLEAN

There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure

VOLT_ON

BOOLEAN

There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure

VP_BB7_D

BOOLEAN

Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are

valid

VP_BC_12

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1

and WA2 are valid

VP_BC_17

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7

are valid

VP_BC_27

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7

are valid

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay containing grounding

switches

EXDU_BPB

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on

WA7

EXDU_BC

BOOLEAN

No transmission error from any bus coupler bay

QB9_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB9_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 989

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

Table continues on next page

695
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

QB1_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB2_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB7_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 789

QB7_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 789

QB7_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 789

QB7_EX4

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 789

Table 347:
Name

ABC_LINE (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is not allowed

QB9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989 is allowed

QB9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989 is not allowed

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is not allowed

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is not allowed

QB7REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 789 is allowed

QB7ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 789 is not allowed

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is not allowed

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is not allowed

QC9REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989G is allowed

QC9ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 989G is not allowed

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

QB2OPTR

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2CLTR

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

QB7OPTR

BOOLEAN

789 is in open position

QB7CLTR

BOOLEAN

789 is in closed position

QB12OPTR

BOOLEAN

189 or 289 or both are in open position

QB12CLTR

BOOLEAN

189 and 289 are not in open position

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

Table continues on next page

696
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Description

VPQB2TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB7TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 789 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB12TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)

12.4.11

Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO (3)

12.4.11.1

Introduction
The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO, 3) function is used for a
transformer bay connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 350.
The function is used when there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and
transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE, 3) function can be
used. This function can also be used in single busbar arrangements.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
189

289

189G
AB_TRAFO

152
289G

389G
252
489G
389

252 and 489G are not

used in this interlocking

489

en04000515_ansi.vsd
ANSI04000515 V1 EN

Figure 350:

Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO (3)

697
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.4.11.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
AB_TRAFO (3)
152_OP
152CLREL
152_CL
152CLITL
189_OP
189REL
189_CL
189ITL
289_OP
289REL
289_CL
289ITL
189G_OP
189GREL
189G_CL
189GITL
289G_OP
289GREL
289G_CL
289GITL
389_OP
189OPTR
389_CL
189CLTR
489_OP
289OPTR
489_CL
289CLTR
389G_OP
1289OPTR
389G_CL
1289CLTR
1189G_OP
VP189TR
1189G_CL
VP289TR
2189G_OP
VP1289TR
2189G_CL
BC_12_CL
VP_BC_12
EXDU_89G
EXDU_BC
152_EX1
152_EX2
152_EX3
189_EX1
189_EX2
189_EX3
289_EX1
289_EX2
289_EX3
ANSI05000358-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000358 V2 EN

Figure 351:

AB_TRAFO (3) function block

698
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.11.3

Logic diagram
152_OP
152_CL
189_OP
189_CL
289_OP
289_CL
189G_OP
189G_CL
289G_OP
289G_CL
389_OP
389_CL
489_OP
489_CL
389G_OP
389G_CL
1189G_OP
1189G_CL
2189G_OP
2189G_CL
VP189
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP389
VP489
VP389G
152_EX2
389G_OP
152_EX3
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
152_EX1

AB_TRAFO
XOR

VP152

XOR

VP189

XOR

VP289

XOR

VP189G

XOR

VP289G

XOR

VP389

XOR

VP489

XOR

VP389G

XOR

VP1189G

XOR

VP2189G
152CLREL
152CLITL

AND

NOT

OR
AND

en04000538_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000538 V1 EN

699
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP152
VP289
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP1189G
152_OP
289_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
1189G_OP
EXDU_89G
189_EX1
VP289
VP389G
VP_BC_12
289_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
189_EX2
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP1189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
1189G_CL
EXDU_89G
189_EX3

AND

189REL

OR
NOT

189ITL

AND

AND

en04000539_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000539 V1 EN

VP152
VP189
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP2189G
152_OP
189_OP
189G_OP
289G_OP
389G_OP
2189G_OP
EXDU_89G
289_EX1
VP189
VP389G
VP_BC_12
189_CL
389G_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
289_EX2
VP189G
VP289G
VP389G
VP2189G
189G_CL
289G_CL
389G_CL
2189G_CL
EXDU_89G
289_EX3

AND

OR
NOT

252REL
252ITL

AND

AND

en04000540_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000540 V1 EN

700
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

VP189
VP289
VP389
VP489
189_OP
289_OP
389_OP
489_OP

AND

189GREL
189GITL
289GREL
289GITL

NOT
NOT

189_OP
189_CL
VP189

189OPTR
189CLTR
VP189TR

289_OP
289_CL
VP289
189_OP
289_OP
VP189
VP289

289OPTR
289CLTR
VP289TR
1289OPTR
1289CLTR
VP1289TR

OR

NOT

AND

en04000541_ansi.vsd

ANSI04000541 V1 EN

12.4.11.4

Input and output signals

Table 348:
Name

AB_TRAFO (3) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

QA1_OP

BOOLEAN

152 is in open position

QA1_CL

BOOLEAN

152 is in closed position

QB1_OP

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1_CL

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

QB2_OP

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2_CL

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

QC1_OP

BOOLEAN

189G is in open position

QC1_CL

BOOLEAN

189G is in closed position

QC2_OP

BOOLEAN

289G is in open position

QC2_CL

BOOLEAN

289G is in closed position

QB3_OP

BOOLEAN

389 is in open position

QB3_CL

BOOLEAN

389 is in closed position

QB4_OP

BOOLEAN

489 is in open position

QB4_CL

BOOLEAN

489 is in closed position

QC3_OP

BOOLEAN

389G is in open position

QC3_CL

BOOLEAN

389G is in closed position

QC11_OP

BOOLEAN

1189G on busbar WA1 is in open position

QC11_CL

BOOLEAN

1189G on busbar WA1 is in closed position

QC21_OP

BOOLEAN

2189G on busbar WA2 is in open position

QC21_CL

BOOLEAN

2189G on busbar WA2 is in closed position

BC_12_CL

BOOLEAN

A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1

and WA2

Table continues on next page

701
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

VP_BC_12

BOOLEAN

Status of the bus coupler apparatuses between WA1

and WA2 are valid

EXDU_ES

BOOLEAN

No transm error from any bay containing grounding

switches

EXDU_BC

BOOLEAN

No transmission error from any bus coupler bay

QA1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for breaker 152

QA1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for breaker 152

QA1_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for breaker 152

QB1_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB1_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB1_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 189

QB2_EX1

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB2_EX2

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

QB2_EX3

BOOLEAN

External condition for apparatus 289

Table 349:
Name

AB_TRAFO (3) Output signals

Type

Description

QA1CLREL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is allowed

QA1CLITL

BOOLEAN

Closing of 152 is not allowed

QB1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is allowed

QB1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189 is not allowed

QB2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is allowed

QB2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289 is not allowed

QC1REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is allowed

QC1ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 189G is not allowed

QC2REL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is allowed

QC2ITL

BOOLEAN

Switching of 289G is not allowed

QB1OPTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in open position

QB1CLTR

BOOLEAN

189 is in closed position

QB2OPTR

BOOLEAN

289 is in open position

QB2CLTR

BOOLEAN

289 is in closed position

QB12OPTR

BOOLEAN

189 or 289 or both are in open position

QB12CLTR

BOOLEAN

189 and 289 are not in open position

VPQB1TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 189 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB2TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 289 is valid (open or closed)

VPQB12TR

BOOLEAN

Switch status of 189 and 289 are valid (open or closed)

702
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.4.12

Position evaluation POS_EVAL

12.4.12.1

Introduction
Position evaluation (POS_EVAL) function converts the input position data signal
POSITION, consisting of value, time and signal status, to binary signals OPENPOS or
CLOSEPOS.
The output signals are used by other functions in the interlocking scheme.

12.4.12.2

Logic diagram
Position including quality

POSITION

POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS

Open/close position of
switch device

IEC08000469-1-en.vsd
IEC08000469-1-EN V1 EN

Only the value, open/close, and status is used in this function. Time information is not
used.
Input position (Value)

12.4.12.3

Signal quality

Output OPENPOS

Output CLOSEPOS

0 (Breaker intermediate)

Good

1 (Breaker open)

Good

2 (Breaker closed)

Good

3 (Breaker faulty)

Good

Any

Invalid

Any

Oscillatory

Function block
POSITION

POS_EVAL
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
IEC09000079_1_en.vsd

IEC09000079 V1 EN

Figure 352:

12.4.12.4

POS_EVAL function block

Input and output signals

Table 350:
Name
POSITION

POS_EVAL Input signals

Type
INTEGER

Default
0

Description
Position status including quality
703

Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 351:

POS_EVAL Output signals

Name

12.5

Type

OPENPOS

BOOLEAN

Open position

CLOSEPOS

BOOLEAN

Close position

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGGIO
Function description
Logic rotating switch for function
selection and LHMI presentation

12.5.1

Description

IEC 61850
identification
SLGGIO

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO) (or
the selector switch function block) is used to get a selector switch functionality similar
to the one provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used
extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set values.
Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system
reliability and an extended purchase portfolio. The logic selector switches eliminate all
these problems.

12.5.2

Principle of operation
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (SLGGIO)
function has two operating inputs UP and DOWN. When a signal is received on the
UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates the
UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on the DOWN
input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output, in
descending order (if the present activated output is 3 for example and one operates
the DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the output
settings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in case of
UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also,
depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWN
activation signal positive front and the output activation.
Besides the inputs visible in the application configuration in the Application
Configuration tool, there are other possibilities that will allow an user to set the desired

704
Technical reference manual

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 12
Control

position directly (without activating the intermediate positions), either locally or

remotely, using a select before execute dialog. One can block the function operation,
by activating the BLOCK input. In this case, the present position will be kept and
further operation will be blocked. The operator place (local or remote) is specified
through the PSTO input. If any operation is allowed the signal INTONE from the
Fixed signal function block can be connected. SLGGIO function block has also an
integer value output, that generates the actual position number. The positions and the
block names are fully settable by the user. These names will appear in the menu, so the
user can see the position names instead of a number.

705
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.5.2.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Functionality and behaviour

Control
Single Line Diagram
Commands

Control
Measurements
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Reset
Authorization
Language

Ctrl/Com
Single Command
Selector Switch (GGIO)

3
../Com/Sel Sw/
SLGGIO3
Damage ctrl

../Ctrl/Com/Sel Sw
SLGGIO1
SLGGIO2
..
..
SLGGIO15

../Com/Sel Sw/
SLGGIO3
Damage ctrl

P:Disc All
OK

N: Disc Fe
Cancel

4
5
../Com/Sel Sw/
DmgCtrl
Damage ctrl:

The dialog window that appears

shows the present position (P:)
and the new position (N:), both
in clear names, given by the
user (max. 13 characters).

Modify the position with arrows.

The pos will not be modified (outputs
will not be activated) until you press
the E-button for O.K.

IEC06000420-2-en.vsd

IEC06000420 V2 EN

Figure 353:
Example 1 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the local HMI:
1 SLGGIO instances in the ACT application configuration
2 Switch name given by the user (max 13 characters)
3 Position number, up to 32 positions
4 Change position
5 New position

12.5.2.2

Graphical display
There are two possibilities for SLGGIO

706
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters).
if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but
only the first three letters of the name will be used.

In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when
building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control, the
following sequence of commands will ensure:

Change to the "Switches" page

of the SLD by left-right arrows.
Select switch by up-down
arrows

../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DAL

Control
Measurements
Events
Disturbance records
Settings
Diagnostics
Test
Reset
Authorization
Language

Open

Close

Select switch. Press the

Open or Close key. A
dialog box appears.

E
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until
you press the E-button for O.K.

Control
Single Line Diagram
Commands

../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
P: Disc
OK

N: Disc Fe
Cancel

../Control/SLD/Switch
SMBRREC control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
ANSI06000421-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000421 V2 EN

Figure 354:
Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
From the single line diagram on local HMI.

707
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.5.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
SLGGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
UP
DOWN

^SWPOS01
^SWPOS02
^SWPOS03
^SWPOS04
^SWPOS05
^SWPOS06
^SWPOS07
^SWPOS08
^SWPOS09
^SWPOS10
^SWPOS11
^SWPOS12
^SWPOS13
^SWPOS14
^SWPOS15
^SWPOS16
^SWPOS17
^SWPOS18
^SWPOS19
^SWPOS20
^SWPOS21
^SWPOS22
^SWPOS23
^SWPOS24
^SWPOS25
^SWPOS26
^SWPOS27
^SWPOS28
^SWPOS29
^SWPOS30
^SWPOS31
^SWPOS32
SWPOSN
ANSI05000658-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000658 V2 EN

Figure 355:

12.5.4

SLGGIO function block

Input and output signals

Table 352:
Name

SLGGIO Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

UP

BOOLEAN

Binary "UP" command

DOWN

BOOLEAN

Binary "DOWN" command

708
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 353:
Name

SLGGIO Output signals

Type

Description

SWPOS01

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 1

SWPOS02

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 2

SWPOS03

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 3

SWPOS04

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 4

SWPOS05

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 5

SWPOS06

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 6

SWPOS07

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 7

SWPOS08

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 8

SWPOS09

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 9

SWPOS10

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 10

SWPOS11

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 11

SWPOS12

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 12

SWPOS13

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 13

SWPOS14

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 14

SWPOS15

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 15

SWPOS16

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 16

SWPOS17

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 17

SWPOS18

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 18

SWPOS19

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 19

SWPOS20

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 20

SWPOS21

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 21

SWPOS22

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 22

SWPOS23

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 23

SWPOS24

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 24

SWPOS25

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 25

SWPOS26

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 26

SWPOS27

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 27

SWPOS28

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 28

SWPOS29

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 29

SWPOS30

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 30

SWPOS31

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 31

SWPOS32

BOOLEAN

Selector switch position 32

SWPOSN

INTEGER

Switch position (integer)

709
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.5.5
Table 354:
Name

Setting parameters
SLGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable/Disable

NrPos

2 - 32

32

Number of positions in the switch

OutType

Pulsed
Steady

Steady

Output type, steady or pulse

tPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Operate pulse duration, in [s]

tDelay

0.000 - 60000.000

0.010

0.000

Time delay on the output, in [s]

StopAtExtremes

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Stop when min or max position is reached

12.6

Selector mini switch VSGGIO

Function description
Selector mini switch

12.6.1

IEC 61850
identification
VSGGIO

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
The Selector mini switch VSGGIO function block is a multipurpose function used for a
variety of applications, as a general purpose switch.
VSGGIO can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the single line diagram
(SLD) on the local HMI.

12.6.2

Principle of operation
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO) function can be used for double purpose, in the same
way as switch controller (SCSWI) functions are used:

for indication on the single line diagram (SLD). Position is received through the
IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and distributed in the configuration through the POS1
and POS2 outputs, or to IEC 61850 through reporting, or GOOSE.
for commands that are received via the local HMI or IEC 61850 and distributed in
the configuration through outputs CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21.
The output CMDPOS12 is set when the function receives a CLOSE command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.

710
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

The output CMDPOS21 is set when the function receives an OPEN command
from the local HMI when the SLD is displayed and the object is chosen.
It is important for indication in the SLD that the a symbol is associated
with a controllable object, otherwise the symbol won't be displayed on
the screen. A symbol is created and configured in GDE tool in PCM600.
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place, operation from local HMI (Local) or through IEC 61850 (Remote). An
INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block (FXDSIGN) will allow
operation from local HMI.
As it can be seen, both indications and commands are done in double-bit
representation, where a combination of signals on both inputs/outputs generate the
desired result.
The following table shows the relationship between IPOS1/IPOS2 inputs and the name
of the string that is shown on the SLD. The value of the strings are set in PST.
IPOS1

12.6.3

IPOS2

Name of displayed string

Default string value

PosUndefined

P00

Position1

P01

Position2

P10

PosBadState

P11

Function block
VSGGIO
BLOCK
PSTO
IPOS1
IPOS2

BLOCKED
POSITION
POS1
POS2
CMDPOS12
CMDPOS21
IEC06000508-2-en.vsd

IEC06000508 V3 EN

Figure 356:

VSGGIO function block

711
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.6.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 355:

VSGGIO Input signals

Name

Type

Table 357:
Name

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

IPOS1

BOOLEAN

Position 1 indicating input

IPOS2

BOOLEAN

Position 2 indicating input

Table 356:

VSGGIO Output signals

Name

12.6.5

Default

Type

Description

BLOCKED

BOOLEAN

The function is active but the functionality is blocked

POSITION

INTEGER

Position indication, integer

POS1

BOOLEAN

Position 1 indication, logical signal

POS2

BOOLEAN

Position 2 indication, logical signal

CMDPOS12

BOOLEAN

Execute command from position 1 to position 2

CMDPOS21

BOOLEAN

Execute command from position 2 to position 1

Setting parameters
VSGGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

CtlModel

Dir Norm
SBO Enh

Dir Norm

Specifies the type for control model according

to IEC 61850

Mode

Steady
Pulsed

Pulsed

Operation mode

tSelect

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

30.000

Max time between select and execute signals

tPulse

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Command pulse lenght

12.7

IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions

DPGGIO

712
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 61850 generic communication I/O

functions

12.7.1

IEC 60617
identification

DPGGIO

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
The IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (DPGGIO) function block is
used to send double indications to other systems or equipment in the substation. It is
especially used in the interlocking and reservation station-wide logics.

12.7.2

Principle of operation
Upon receiving the input signals, the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions
(DPGGIO) function block will send the signals over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment
or system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, other tools must be
used, as described in the application manual, to PCM600 must be used to define which
function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

12.7.3

Function block
DPGGIO
OPEN
CLOSE
VALID

POSITION

IEC07000200-2-en.vsd
IEC07000200 V2 EN

Figure 357:

12.7.4

DPGGIO function block

Input and output signals

Table 358:
Name

DPGGIO Input signals

Type

Default

Description

OPEN

BOOLEAN

Open indication

CLOSE

BOOLEAN

Close indication

VALID

BOOLEAN

Valid indication

Table 359:

DPGGIO Output signals

Name
POSITION

Type
INTEGER

Description
Double point indication

713
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.7.5

1MRK506312-UUS C

Settings
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

12.8

Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GGIO

Function description
Single point generic control 8 signals

12.8.1

IEC 61850
identification
SPC8GGIO

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO) function block is a collection
of 8 single point commands, designed to bring in commands from REMOTE (SCADA)
to those parts of the logic configuration that do not need extensive command receiving
functionality (for example, SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be sent
directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of
the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and
SPGGIO function blocks. The commands can be pulsed or steady.

12.8.2

Principle of operation
The PSTO input selects the operator place (LOCAL, REMOTE or ALL). One of the
eight outputs is activated based on the command sent from the operator place selected.
The settings Latchedx and tPulsex (where x is the respective output) will determine if
the signal will be pulsed (and how long the pulse is) or latched (steady). BLOCK will
block the operation of the function in case a command is sent, no output will be activated.
PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions.
Although, PSTO can be configured to use LOCAL or ALL operator
places only, REMOTE operator place is used in SPC8GGIO function.

714
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.8.3

Function block
SPC8GGIO
BLOCK
PSTO

^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
IEC07000143-2-en.vsd

IEC07000143 V2 EN

Figure 358:

12.8.4

SPC8GGIO function block

Input and output signals

Table 360:
Name

SPC8GGIO Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Blocks the function operation

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

Table 361:
Name

SPC8GGIO Output signals

Type

Description

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Output2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Output3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Output4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Output5

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Output6

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Output7

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Output8

715
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.8.5
Table 362:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
SPC8GGIO Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disabled/Enabled

Latched1

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 1

tPulse1

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Output1 Pulse Time

Latched2

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 2

tPulse2

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Output2 Pulse Time

Latched3

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 3

tPulse3

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Output3 Pulse Time

Latched4

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 4

tPulse4

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Output4 Pulse Time

Latched5

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 5

tPulse5

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Output5 Pulse Time

Latched6

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 6

tPulse6

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Output6 Pulse Time

Latched7

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 7

tPulse7

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Output7 Pulse Time

Latched8

Pulsed
Latched

Pulsed

Setting for pulsed/latched mode for output 8

tPulse8

0.01 - 6000.00

0.01

0.10

Output8 pulse time

12.9

AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS
Function description
AutomationBits, command function for
DNP3

IEC 61850
identification
AUTOBITS

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

716
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.9.1

Introduction
AutomationBits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 to get into
the configuration of the commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The
AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC
61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).

12.9.2

Principle of operation
AutomationBits function (AUTOBITS) has 32 individual outputs which each can be
mapped as a Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in
DNP3. This object contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time.
To operate an AUTOBITS output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulseOn, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The remaining parameters will be regarded were
appropriate. ex: pulse-On, on-time=100, off-time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive
100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.
There is a BLOCK input signal, which will disable the operation of the function, in the
same way the setting Operation: Enabled/Disabled does. That means that, upon
activation of the BLOCK input, all 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set to 0. The
BLOCK acts like an overriding, the function still receives data from the DNP3 master.
Upon deactivation of BLOCK, all the 32 CMDBITxx outputs will be set by the DNP3
master again, momentarily. For AUTOBITS , the PSTO input determines the operator
place. The command can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in
Local then no change is applied to the outputs.

717
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.9.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
AUTOBITS
BLOCK
PSTO

^CMDBIT1
^CMDBIT2
^CMDBIT3
^CMDBIT4
^CMDBIT5
^CMDBIT6
^CMDBIT7
^CMDBIT8
^CMDBIT9
^CMDBIT10
^CMDBIT11
^CMDBIT12
^CMDBIT13
^CMDBIT14
^CMDBIT15
^CMDBIT16
^CMDBIT17
^CMDBIT18
^CMDBIT19
^CMDBIT20
^CMDBIT21
^CMDBIT22
^CMDBIT23
^CMDBIT24
^CMDBIT25
^CMDBIT26
^CMDBIT27
^CMDBIT28
^CMDBIT29
^CMDBIT30
^CMDBIT31
^CMDBIT32
IEC09000925-1-en.vsd

IEC09000925 V1 EN

Figure 359:

12.9.4

AUTOBITS function block

Input and output signals

Table 363:
Name

AUTOBITS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

Table 364:
Name

AUTOBITS Output signals

Type

Description

CMDBIT1

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 1

CMDBIT2

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 2

CMDBIT3

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 3

CMDBIT4

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 4

CMDBIT5

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 5

Table continues on next page

718
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

12.9.5
Table 365:

Type

Description

CMDBIT6

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 6

CMDBIT7

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 7

CMDBIT8

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 8

CMDBIT9

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 9

CMDBIT10

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 10

CMDBIT11

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 11

CMDBIT12

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 12

CMDBIT13

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 13

CMDBIT14

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 14

CMDBIT15

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 15

CMDBIT16

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 16

CMDBIT17

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 17

CMDBIT18

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 18

CMDBIT19

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 19

CMDBIT20

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 20

CMDBIT21

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 21

CMDBIT22

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 22

CMDBIT23

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 23

CMDBIT24

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 24

CMDBIT25

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 25

CMDBIT26

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 26

CMDBIT27

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 27

CMDBIT28

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 28

CMDBIT29

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 29

CMDBIT30

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 30

CMDBIT31

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 31

CMDBIT32

BOOLEAN

Command out bit 32

Setting parameters
AUTOBITS Non group settings (basic)

Name
Operation

Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Description
Disable/Enable Operation

719
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

Table 366:
Name
Operation

Table 367:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

DNPGEN Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Description
Disable/Enable Operation

CHSERRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Serial-Mode

Disabled

Operation mode

BaudRate

300 Bd
600 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd

9600 Bd

Baud-rate for serial port

WireMode

Four-wire
Two-wire

Two-wire

RS485 wire mode

Table 368:
Name

CHSERRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DLinkConfirm

Never
Sometimes
Always

Never

Data-link confirm

tDLinkTimeout

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

2.000

Data-link confirm timeout in s

DLinkRetries

0 - 255

Data-link maximum retries

tRxToTxMinDel

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Rx to Tx minimum delay in s

ApLayMaxRxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Rx fragment size

ApLayMaxTxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Tx fragment size

StopBits

1-2

Stop bits

Parity

No
Even
Odd

Even

Parity

tRTSWarmUp

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

RTS warm-up in s

tRTSWarmDown

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

RTS warm-down in s

tBackOffDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.050

RS485 back-off delay in s

tMaxRndDelBkOf

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

RS485 maximum back-off random delay in s

720
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 369:

CH2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only

Disabled

Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort

1 - 65535

20000

TCP/IP listen port

UDPPortAccData

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from

master

UDPPortInitNUL

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port for initial NULL response

UDPPortCliMast

0 - 65535

UDP port to remote client/master

Table 370:

CH2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ApLayMaxRxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Rx fragment size

ApLayMaxTxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Tx fragment size

Table 371:

CH3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only

Disabled

Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort

1 - 65535

20000

TCP/IP listen port

UDPPortAccData

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from

master

UDPPortInitNUL

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port for initial NULL response

UDPPortCliMast

0 - 65535

UDP port to remote client/master

Table 372:

CH3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ApLayMaxRxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Rx fragment size

ApLayMaxTxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Tx fragment size

721
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

Table 373:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

CH4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only

Disabled

Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort

1 - 65535

20000

TCP/IP listen port

UDPPortAccData

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from

master

UDPPortInitNUL

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port for initial NULL response

UDPPortCliMast

0 - 65535

UDP port to remote client/master

Table 374:
Name

CH4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ApLayMaxRxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Rx fragment size

ApLayMaxTxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Tx fragment size

Table 375:
Name

CH5TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
TCP/IP
UDP-Only

Disabled

Operation mode

TCPIPLisPort

1 - 65535

20000

TCP/IP listen port

UDPPortAccData

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port to accept UDP datagrams from

master

UDPPortInitNUL

1 - 65535

20000

UDP port for initial NULL response

UDPPortCliMast

0 - 65535

UDP port to remote client/master

Table 376:
Name

CH5TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ApLayMaxRxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Rx fragment size

ApLayMaxTxSize

20 - 2048

2048

Application layer maximum Tx fragment size

Table 377:
Name

MSTRS485 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

SlaveAddress

0 - 65519

Slave address

MasterAddres

0 - 65519

Master address

Table continues on next page

722
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Obj1DefVar

1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus

1:BISingleBit

Object 1, default variation

Obj2DefVar

1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e

3:BIChWithRelTim
e

Object 2, default variation

Obj4DefVar

1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e

3:DIChWithRelTim
e

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar

1:BO
2:BOStatus

2:BOStatus

Object 10, default variation

Obj20DefVar

1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF

5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T

1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 378:

MSTRS485 Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ValMasterAddr

No
Yes

Yes

Validate source (master) address

AddrQueryEnbl

No
Yes

Yes

Address query enable

tApplConfTout

0.00 - 300.00

0.01

10.00

Application layer confim timeout

Table continues on next page

723
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ApplMultFrgRes

No
Yes

Yes

Enable application for multiple fragment

response

ConfMultFrag

No
Yes

Yes

Confirm each multiple fragment

UREnable

No
Yes

Yes

Unsolicited response enabled

URSendOnline

No
Yes

No

Unsolicited response sends when on-line

UREvClassMask

Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3

Disabled

Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

0 - 10

Unsolicited response retries before off-line

retry mode

tURRetryDelay

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response retry delay in s

tUROfflRtryDel

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

30.00

Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s

UREvCntThold1

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer

timeout

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 2 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer

timeout

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 3 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer

timeout

DelOldBufFull

No
Yes

No

Delete oldest event when buffer is full

tSynchTimeout

30 - 3600

1800

Time synch timeout before error status is

generated

TSyncReqAfTout

No
Yes

No

Time synchronization request after timeout

DNPToSetTime

No
Yes

Yes

Allow DNP to set time in IED

Averag3TimeReq

No
Yes

No

Use average of 3 time requests

PairedPoint

No
Yes

Yes

Enable paired point

tSelectTimeout

1.0 - 60.0

0.1

30.0

Select timeout

724
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 379:

MST1TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disable / Enable

SlaveAddress

0 - 65519

Slave address

MasterAddres

0 - 65519

Master address

ValMasterAddr

No
Yes

Yes

Validate source (master) address

MasterIP-Addr

0 - 18

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Master IP-address

MasterIPNetMsk

0 - 18

IP
Address

255.255.255.255

Master IP net mask

Obj1DefVar

1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus

1:BISingleBit

Object 1, default variation

Obj2DefVar

1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e

3:BIChWithRelTim
e

Object 2, default variation

Obj3DefVar

1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag

1:DIWithoutFlag

Object 3, default variation

Obj4DefVar

1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e

3:DIChWithRelTim
e

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar

1:BO
2:BOStatus

2:BOStatus

Object 10, default variation

Obj20DefVar

1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF

5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 20, default variation

Table continues on next page

725
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T

1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 380:
Name

MST1TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AddrQueryEnbl

No
Yes

Yes

Address query enable

tApplConfTout

0.00 - 300.00

0.01

10.00

Application layer confim timeout

ApplMultFrgRes

No
Yes

Yes

Enable application for multiple fragment

response

ConfMultFrag

No
Yes

Yes

Confirm each multiple fragment

UREnable

No
Yes

Yes

Unsolicited response enabled

UREvClassMask

Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3

Disabled

Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

0 - 10

Unsolicited response retries before off-line

retry mode

tURRetryDelay

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response retry delay in s

tUROfflRtryDel

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

30.00

Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s

UREvCntThold1

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

Table continues on next page

726
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Unit

Step

Default

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer

timeout

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 2 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer

timeout

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 3 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer

timeout

DelOldBufFull

No
Yes

No

Delete oldest event when buffer is full

ExtTimeFormat

LocalTime
UTC

UTC

External time format

DNPToSetTime

No
Yes

No

Allow DNP to set time in IED

tSynchTimeout

30 - 3600

1800

Time synch timeout before error status is

generated

TSyncReqAfTout

No
Yes

No

Time synchronization request after timeout

Averag3TimeReq

No
Yes

No

Use average of 3 time requests

PairedPoint

No
Yes

Yes

Enable paired point

tSelectTimeout

1.0 - 60.0

0.1

30.0

Select timeout

tBrokenConTout

0 - 3600

Broken connection timeout

tKeepAliveT

0 - 3600

10

Keep-Alive timer

Table 381:

Values (Range)

Description

MST2TCP Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

SlaveAddress

0 - 65519

Slave address

MasterAddres

0 - 65519

Master address

ValMasterAddr

No
Yes

Yes

Validate source (master) address

MasterIP-Addr

0 - 18

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Master IP-address

MasterIPNetMsk

0 - 18

IP
Address

255.255.255.255

Master IP net mask

Obj1DefVar

1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus

1:BISingleBit

Object 1, default variation

Table continues on next page

727
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Obj2DefVar

1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e

3:BIChWithRelTim
e

Object 2, default variation

Obj3DefVar

1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag

1:DIWithoutFlag

Object 3, default variation

Obj4DefVar

1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e

3:DIChWithRelTim
e

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar

1:BO
2:BOStatus

2:BOStatus

Object 10, default variation

Obj20DefVar

1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF

5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T

1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 382:
Name

MST2TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AddrQueryEnbl

No
Yes

Yes

Address query enable

tApplConfTout

0.00 - 300.00

0.01

10.00

Application layer confim timeout

ApplMultFrgRes

No
Yes

Yes

Enable application for multiple fragment

response

Table continues on next page

728
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ConfMultFrag

No
Yes

Yes

Confirm each multiple fragment

UREnable

No
Yes

Yes

Unsolicited response enabled

UREvClassMask

Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3

Disabled

Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

0 - 10

Unsolicited response retries before off-line

retry mode

tURRetryDelay

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response retry delay in s

tUROfflRtryDel

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

30.00

Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s

UREvCntThold1

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer

timeout

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 2 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer

timeout

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 3 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer

timeout

DelOldBufFull

No
Yes

No

Delete oldest event when buffer is full

ExtTimeFormat

LocalTime
UTC

UTC

External time format

DNPToSetTime

No
Yes

No

Allow DNP to set time in IED

tSynchTimeout

30 - 3600

1800

Time synch timeout before error status is

generated

TSyncReqAfTout

No
Yes

No

Time synchronization request after timeout

Averag3TimeReq

No
Yes

No

Use average of 3 time requests

PairedPoint

No
Yes

Yes

Enable paired point

tSelectTimeout

1.0 - 60.0

0.1

30.0

Select timeout

tBrokenConTout

0 - 3600

Broken connection timeout

tKeepAliveT

0 - 3600

10

Keep-Alive timer

729
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

Table 383:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

MST3TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

SlaveAddress

0 - 65519

Slave address

MasterAddres

0 - 65519

Master address

ValMasterAddr

No
Yes

Yes

Validate source (master) address

MasterIP-Addr

0 - 18

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Master IP-address

MasterIPNetMsk

0 - 18

IP
Address

255.255.255.255

Master IP net mask

Obj1DefVar

1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus

1:BISingleBit

Object 1, default variation

Obj2DefVar

1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e

3:BIChWithRelTim
e

Object 2, default variation

Obj3DefVar

1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag

1:DIWithoutFlag

Object 3, default variation

Obj4DefVar

1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e

3:DIChWithRelTim
e

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar

1:BO
2:BOStatus

2:BOStatus

Object 10, default variation

Obj20DefVar

1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF

5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 20, default variation

Table continues on next page

730
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T

1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 384:

MST3TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AddrQueryEnbl

No
Yes

Yes

Address query enable

tApplConfTout

0.00 - 300.00

0.01

10.00

Application layer confim timeout

ApplMultFrgRes

No
Yes

Yes

Enable application for multiple fragment

response

ConfMultFrag

No
Yes

Yes

Confirm each multiple fragment

UREnable

No
Yes

Yes

Unsolicited response enabled

UREvClassMask

Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3

Disabled

Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

0 - 10

Unsolicited response retries before off-line

retry mode

tURRetryDelay

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response retry delay in s

tUROfflRtryDel

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

30.00

Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s

UREvCntThold1

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

Table continues on next page

731
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unit

Step

Default

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer

timeout

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 2 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer

timeout

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 3 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer

timeout

DelOldBufFull

No
Yes

No

Delete oldest event when buffer is full

ExtTimeFormat

LocalTime
UTC

UTC

External time format

DNPToSetTime

No
Yes

No

Allow DNP to set time in IED

tSynchTimeout

30 - 3600

1800

Time synch timeout before error status is

generated

TSyncReqAfTout

No
Yes

No

Time synchronization request after timeout

Averag3TimeReq

No
Yes

No

Use average of 3 time requests

PairedPoint

No
Yes

Yes

Enable paired point

tSelectTimeout

1.0 - 60.0

0.1

30.0

Select timeout

tBrokenConTout

0 - 3600

Broken connection timeout

tKeepAliveT

0 - 3600

10

Keep-Alive timer

Table 385:
Name

Values (Range)

Description

MST4TCP Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

SlaveAddress

0 - 65519

Slave address

MasterAddres

0 - 65519

Master address

ValMasterAddr

No
Yes

Yes

Validate source (master) address

MasterIP-Addr

0 - 18

IP
Address

0.0.0.0

Master IP-address

MasterIPNetMsk

0 - 18

IP
Address

255.255.255.255

Master IP net mask

Obj1DefVar

1:BISingleBit
2:BIWithStatus

1:BISingleBit

Object 1, default variation

Table continues on next page

732
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Obj2DefVar

1:BIChWithoutTim
e
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTim
e

3:BIChWithRelTim
e

Object 2, default variation

Obj3DefVar

1:DIWithoutFlag
2:DIWithFlag

1:DIWithoutFlag

Object 3, default variation

Obj4DefVar

1:DIChWithoutTim
e
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTim
e

3:DIChWithRelTim
e

Object 4, default variation

Obj10DefVar

1:BO
2:BOStatus

2:BOStatus

Object 10, default variation

Obj20DefVar

1:BinCnt32
2:BinCnt16
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF

5:BinCnt32WoutF

Object 20, default variation

Obj22DefVar

1:BinCnt32EvWout
T
2:BinCnt16EvWout
T
5:BinCnt32EvWith
T
6:BinCnt16EvWith
T

1:BinCnt32EvWou
tT

Object 22, default variation

Obj30DefVar

1:AI32Int
2:AI16Int
3:AI32IntWithoutF
4:AI16IntWithoutF
5:AI32FltWithF
6:AI64FltWithF

3:AI32IntWithoutF

Object 30, default variation

Obj32DefVar

1:AI32IntEvWoutF
2:AI16IntEvWoutF
3:AI32IntEvWithFT
4:AI16IntEvWithFT
5:AI32FltEvWithF
6:AI64FltEvWithF
7:AI32FltEvWithFT
8:AI64FltEvWithFT

1:AI32IntEvWoutF

Object 32, default variation

Table 386:

MST4TCP Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

AddrQueryEnbl

No
Yes

Yes

Address query enable

tApplConfTout

0.00 - 300.00

0.01

10.00

Application layer confim timeout

ApplMultFrgRes

No
Yes

Yes

Enable application for multiple fragment

response

Table continues on next page

733
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ConfMultFrag

No
Yes

Yes

Confirm each multiple fragment

UREnable

No
Yes

Yes

Unsolicited response enabled

UREvClassMask

Disabled
Class 1
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3

Disabled

Unsolicited response, event class mask

UROfflineRetry

0 - 10

Unsolicited response retries before off-line

retry mode

tURRetryDelay

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response retry delay in s

tUROfflRtryDel

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

30.00

Unsolicited response off-line retry delay in s

UREvCntThold1

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 1 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout1

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 1 event buffer

timeout

UREvCntThold2

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 2 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout2

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 2 event buffer

timeout

UREvCntThold3

1 - 100

Unsolicited response class 3 event count

report treshold

tUREvBufTout3

0.00 - 60.00

0.01

5.00

Unsolicited response class 3 event buffer

timeout

DelOldBufFull

No
Yes

No

Delete oldest event when buffer is full

ExtTimeFormat

LocalTime
UTC

UTC

External time format

DNPToSetTime

No
Yes

No

Allow DNP to set time in IED

tSynchTimeout

30 - 3600

1800

Time synch timeout before error status is

generated

TSyncReqAfTout

No
Yes

No

Time synchronization request after timeout

Averag3TimeReq

No
Yes

No

Use average of 3 time requests

PairedPoint

No
Yes

Yes

Enable paired point

tSelectTimeout

1.0 - 60.0

0.1

30.0

Select timeout

tBrokenConTout

0 - 3600

Broken connection timeout

tKeepAliveT

0 - 3600

10

Keep-Alive timer

734
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

12.10

Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD

Function description
Single command, 16 signals

12.10.1

IEC 61850
identification
SINGLECMD

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from
the local HMI. The command function block has outputs that can be used, for example,
to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined functionality.

12.10.2

Principle of operation
Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) function has 16 binary output signals.
The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automation system or
from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with a maximum of 13
characters in PCM600.
The output signals can be of the types Disabled, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration
setting is done via the local HMI or PCM600 and is common for the whole function
block. The length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode, SINGLECMD
function has a memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED.
Also a BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.
The output signals, OUT1 to OUT16, are available for configuration to built-in
functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the IED.

735
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control
12.10.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
SINGLECMD
BLOCK

^OUT1
^OUT2
^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT7
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11
^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16
IEC05000698-2-en.vsd

IEC05000698 V3 EN

Figure 360:

12.10.4

SINGLECMD function block

Input and output signals

Table 387:
Name
BLOCK

Table 388:
Name

SINGLECMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block single command function

SINGLECMD Output signals

Type

Description

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Single command output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Single command output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Single command output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Single command output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Single command output 5

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Single command output 6

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Single command output 7

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Single command output 8

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Single command output 9

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Single command output 10

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Single command output 11

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Single command output 12

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Single command output 13

Table continues on next page

736
Technical reference manual

Section 12
Control

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

12.10.5
Table 389:

Type

Description

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Single command output 14

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Single command output 15

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Single command output 16

Setting parameters
SINGLECMD Non group settings (basic)

Name
Mode

Values (Range)
Disabled
Steady
Pulsed

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Description
Operation mode

737
Technical reference manual

738

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 13

Scheme communication

About this chapter

This chapter describes the scheme communication logic that is used in distance and
ground fault protection function to obtain almost instantaneous fault clearance for
faults on the protected line. The chapter considers scheme communication logic
(ZCPSCH, 85), current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic (ZCRWPSCH, 85) for the
distance protection function and scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent
protection (ECPSCH, 85) and current reversal and weak-end in-feed logic
(ECRWPSCH, 85) for the residual overcurrent function.
Also Local acceleration logic (ZCLCPLAL) is discussed which is a function that can
generate instantaneous tripping as a result of remote end faults without any
telecommunication.
The chapter contains a short description of the design, simplified logical block
diagrams, figure of the function block, input and output signals and setting parameters.

13.1

Scheme communication logic for distance or

overcurrent protection ZCPSCH(85)
Function description
Scheme communication logic for
distance or overcurrent protection

13.1.1

IEC 61850
identification
ZCPSCH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85

Introduction
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, scheme communication
logic is provided. All types of communication schemes for example, permissive
underreaching, permissive overreaching, blocking, unblocking, intertrip are available.
The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication
signaling when included.

739
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Phase segregated communication is also available for correct operation at simultaneous

faults when three distance protection communication channels are available between
the line ends.

13.1.2

Principle of operation
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue
the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive
schemes, respectively.
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received
signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.

13.1.2.1

Blocking scheme
The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is
allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed,
when no signal is received from the remote IED.
The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone to
be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The forward
overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input PLTR_CRD, see
figure 361.
In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable
timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 361.
The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by
activating the input BLKTR, Block of signal send by activating the input BLKCS.
PLTR-CRD
CR

AND

0-tCoord
0

TRIP

en05000512_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000512 V1 EN

Figure 361:

Basic logic for trip signal in blocking scheme

Channels for communication in each direction must be available.

13.1.2.2

Permissive underreaching scheme

In a permissive underreaching scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring
element (normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is
detected.in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching

740
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

zone to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive
underreaching schemes is normally set to zero.
The logic for trip signal in permissive scheme is shown in figure 362.
PLTR-CRD
CR

AND

0-tCoord
0

TRIP

en05000513_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000513 V1 EN

Figure 362:

Logic for trip signal in permissive scheme

The permissive underreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme.

13.1.2.3

Permissive overreaching scheme

In a permissive overreaching scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element
(normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CS to the remote end if a fault is detected
in forward direction. The received signal CR is used to allow an overreaching zone to
trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord in permissive overreaching
schemes is normally set to zero.
The logic for trip signal is the same as for permissive underreaching, as in figure 362.
The permissive overreaching scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme.

13.1.2.4

Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by
using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a
receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable,
power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CR_GUARD, which must always be
present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CR_GUARD signal
for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 363.
This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal
is present again.

741
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

CR
NOT

CRL

OR

0-tSecurity
0

CR_GUARD
200 ms
0

AND

OR

150 ms
0

AND
LCG

en05000746_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000746 V1 EN

Figure 363:

Guard signal logic with unblocking schemeGuard singal logic with

unblocking scheme and with setting Unblock = Restart

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Disabled

The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart

Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored

If CR_GUARD disappears a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)

Restart

Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored

It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CR_GUARD signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signalling

13.1.2.5

Intertrip scheme
In the direct intertrip scheme, the send signal CS is sent from an underreaching zone
that is tripping the line.
The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local
criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic.
In case of single-pole tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.

13.1.2.6

Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 364.

742
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Unblock =
Off
CR
Unblock =
NoRestart

CRL
CRL

OR

AND

Unblock =
Restart
CR_GUARD

NOT

0-tSecurity
0

200ms
0

OR

AND

AND

LCG

AND

150ms
0

SchemeType =
Intertrip
CSUR
tSendMin

BLOCK
CS_STOP
CRL

AND

OR

AND

OR

Schemetype =
Permissive UR

AND

AND
PLTR_CRD

CS

OR

OR

0-tCoord
0

0
25ms

TRIP

Schemetype =
Permissive OR

OR

CSOR

AND

AND
tSendMin

OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking
BLKCS

AND

en05000515_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000515 V1 EN

Figure 364:

Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection,

simplified logic diagram

743
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.1.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
ZCPSCH (85)
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKCS
CS_STOP
PLTR_CRD
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CR_GUARD

TRIP
CS
CRL
LCG

ANSI06000286-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000286 V2 EN

Figure 365:

13.1.4

ZCPSCH (85) function block

Input and output signals

Table 390:
Name

ZCPSCH (85) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block pilot (communication assisted) trip

BLKCS

BOOLEAN

Block pilot channel start

CSBLK

BOOLEAN

Block of channel start (CS) due to reverse fault detection

CACC

BOOLEAN

Signal to be used for coordinating local pilot tripping

with the channel receive (CR) signal

CSOR

BOOLEAN

Signal to be used for channel start with overreaching

pilot schemes

CSUR

BOOLEAN

Signal to be used for channel start with underreaching

pilot schemes

CR

BOOLEAN

Channel receive input signal from communications

apparatus/module for pilot communication scheme logic

CRG

BOOLEAN

Carrier channel guard input signal

Table 391:
Name

ZCPSCH (85) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip by pilot communication scheme logic

CS

BOOLEAN

Pilot channel start signal

CRL

BOOLEAN

Channel receive signal output from communication

scheme logic

LCG

BOOLEAN

Loss of channel guard signal output from

communication scheme logic

744
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.1.5
Table 392:

Setting parameters
ZCPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

SchemeType

Disabled
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking

Permissive UR

Scheme type

tCoord

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.035

Communication scheme channel coordination

time

tSendMin

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

(carrier continuation)

Table 393:

ZCPSCH (85) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Unblock

Disabled
NoRestart
Restart

Disabled

Operation mode of unblocking logic

tSecurity

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.035

Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection

13.1.6

Technical data
Table 394:

ZCPSCH (85) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Scheme type

Intertrip
Permissive Underreach
Permissive Overreach
Blocking

Co-ordination time for blocking

communication scheme

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Minimum duration of a send signal

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Security timer for loss of guard

signal detection

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operation mode of unblocking logic

Disabled
NoRestart
Restart

745
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

13.2

Phase segregated scheme communication logic for

distance protection ZC1PPSCH (85)
Function description
Phase segregated Scheme
communication logic for distance
protection

13.2.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC 61850
identification
ZC1PPSCH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85

Introduction
Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults on a
power line. All possible types of communication schemes for example, permissive
underreach, permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To manage
problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase segregated
communication is needed. This will then replace the standard Scheme communication
logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH, 85) on important lines where
three communication channels (in each subsystem) are available for the distance
protection communication.
The main purpose of the Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance
protection (ZC1PPSCH, 85) function is to supplement the distance protection function
such that:

fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are on
the part of the line not covered by its underreaching zone.
correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for faults
occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.

To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, that is, one per phase,
each capable of transmitting a signal in each direction is required.
ZC1PPSCH (85) can be completed with the current reversal and WEI logic for phase
segregated communication, when found necessary in Blocking and Permissive
overreaching schemes.

13.2.2

Principle of operation
Depending on whether a reverse or forward directed impedance zone is used to issue
the send signal, the communication schemes are divided into Blocking and Permissive
schemes, respectively.

746
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a received
signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.
The Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection
(ZC1PPSCH ,85) function is a logical function built-up from logical elements. It is a
supplementary function to the distance protection, requiring for its operation inputs
from the distance protection and the communication equipment.
The type of communication-aided scheme to be used can be selected by way of the
settings.
The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of
ZC1PPSCH (85) makes this logic able to support practically any scheme
communication requirements regardless of their basic operating principle. The outputs
to initiate tripping and sending of the teleprotection signal are given in accordance with
the type of communication-aided scheme selected and the zone(s) and phase(s) of the
distance protection which have operated.
When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes
communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive
criteria is provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the
transmission of the command signal over the faulted line.

13.2.2.1

Blocking scheme
The principle of operation for a blocking scheme is that an overreaching zone is
allowed to trip instantaneously after the settable co-ordination time tCoord has elapsed,
when no signal is received from the remote IED. The received signal (sent by a reverse
looking element in the remote IED), which shall be connected to CRLx, is used to not
release the zone to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord).
The overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACCLx, see
figure 366. In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CRLx) must be received
before the settable timer tCoord elapses, to prevent an unneccesary trip, see figure 366.
ZC1PPSCH (85) can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is
achieved by activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by activating
the input BLKCSLx.
CACCLx
CRLx

AND

0 - tCoord
0

0
25 ms

TRLx

ANSI06000310_2_en.vsd
ANSI06000310 V2 EN

Figure 366:

Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme

747

Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.2.2.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Permissive underreach scheme

In a permissive underreach scheme, a forward directed underreach measuring element
(normally zone1) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone (connected to CACCLx) to trip after the tCoord timer has elapsed.
The tCoord is in permissive underreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for
trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 367. Three channels for
communication in each direction must be available.
CACCLx
CRLx

AND

0
25 ms

0-tCoord
0

TRLx

ANSI07000088_2_en.vsd
ANSI07000088 V2 EN

Figure 367:

13.2.2.3

Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach

scheme

Permissive overreach scheme

In a permissive overreach scheme, a forward directed overreach measuring element
(normally zone2) sends a permissive signal CSLx to the remote end if a fault is
detected in forward direction. The received signal CRLx is used to allow an
overreaching zone to trip after the settable tCoord timer has elapsed. The tCoord is in
permissive overreach schemes normally set to zero. The logic for trip carrier is the
same as for permissive underreach, see figure 366.
The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned for
blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current reversal
logic when this function is included.
Three channels for communication in each direction must be available.

13.2.2.4

Unblocking scheme
In an unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome
by using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a
carrier receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less
reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication is used. As phase segregated
communication schemes uses phases individually and the PLC is typically connected
single-phase or phase-to-phase it is not possible to evaluate which of the phases to
release and the unblocking scheme has thus not been supported.

748
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.2.2.5

Intertrip scheme
In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for
tripping without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase
segregated communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection and
logic for tripping the three phases is performed in the trip function block.

13.2.2.6

Simplified logic diagram

The simplified logic diagram for one phase is shown in figure 368.

749
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

SchemeType =
Intertrip
CSURLx
tSendMin

BLOCK
CSBLKLx
CRLx

AND

OR

AND

OR

Scheme Type =
Permissive UR

AND

AND
CACCLx

CSLx

OR

OR

0-tCoord
25

TRLx

Scheme Type =
Permissive OR
OR

CSORLx

AND

AND
tSendMin
OR
AND

Scheme Type =
Blocking
BLKCSx

AND

CSL1
CSL2

AND

CSL2
CSL3

AND

OR

CSMPH

CSL3
CSL1

AND

CSL1
CSL2

OR

GENERAL

CSL3

ANSI06000311_2_en.vsd
ANSI06000311 V2 EN

Figure 368:

Simplified logic diagram for one phase

750
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.2.3

Function block
ZC1PPSCH (85)
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKTR
TR_A
BLKTRL1
TR_B
BLKTRL2
TR_C
BLKTRL3
CS_A
CACCL1
CS_B
CACCL2
CS_C
CACCL3
CSMPH
CSURL1
CRL_A
CSURL2
CRL_B
CSURL3
CRL_C
CSORL1
CSORL2
CSORL3
CSBLKL1
CSBLKL2
CSBLKL3
BLKCSL1
BLKCSL2
BLKCSL3
CRL1
CRL2
CRL3
CRMPH
ANSI06000427-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000427 V2 EN

Figure 369:

13.2.4

ZC1PPSCH (85) function block

Input and output signals

Table 395:
Name

ZC1PPSCH (85) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Common signal for block of trip output from

communication logic in all phases

BLKTRL1

BOOLEAN

Signal for block of trip output from communication

logic in Phase L1

BLKTRL2

BOOLEAN

Signal for block of trip output from communication

logic in Phase L2

BLKTRL3

BOOLEAN

Signal for block of trip output from communication

logic in Phase L3

CACCL1

BOOLEAN

Accelerated Distance protection zone start in Phase L1

CACCL2

BOOLEAN

Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase

L2

CACCL3

BOOLEAN

Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase

L3

CSURL1

BOOLEAN

Underreaching distance protection zone signal in

Phase L1

Table continues on next page

751
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Type

Default

Description

CSURL2

BOOLEAN

Underreaching distance protection zone signal in

Phase L2

CSURL3

BOOLEAN

Underreaching distance protection zone signal in

Phase L3

CSORL1

BOOLEAN

Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase

L1

CSORL2

BOOLEAN

Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase

L2

CSORL3

BOOLEAN

Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase

L3

CSBLKL1

BOOLEAN

Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in

Phase L1

CSBLKL2

BOOLEAN

Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in

Phase L2

CSBLKL3

BOOLEAN

Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in

Phase L3

BLKCSL1

BOOLEAN

Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in

Phase L1

BLKCSL2

BOOLEAN

Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in

Phase L2

BLKCSL3

BOOLEAN

Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in

Phase L3

CRL1

BOOLEAN

Carrier signal received in Phase A

CRL2

BOOLEAN

Carrier signal received in Phase B

CRL3

BOOLEAN

Carrier signal received in Phase C

CRMPH

BOOLEAN

Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault

Table 396:
Name

ZC1PPSCH (85) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip output in any of the phase

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip output in Phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip output in Phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip output in Phase C

CS_A

BOOLEAN

Carrier Send in phase A

CS_B

BOOLEAN

Carrier Send in phase B

CS_C

BOOLEAN

Carrier Send in phase C

CSMPH

BOOLEAN

carrier Send for multi phase fault

CRL_A

BOOLEAN

Carrier signal received in Phase A

CRL_B

BOOLEAN

Carrier signal received in Phase B

CRL_C

BOOLEAN

Carrier signal received in Phase C

752
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.2.5
Table 397:

Setting parameters
ZC1PPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable / Disable

Scheme Type

Disabled
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking

Permissive UR

Scheme type

tCoord

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Trip coordinate time

tSendMin

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Minimum duration of Carrier Send signal

13.2.6

Technical data
Table 398:

ZC1PPSCH (85) technical data

Function

13.3

Range or value

Accuracy

Scheme type

Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking

Co-ordination time for blocking

communication scheme

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Minimum duration of a carrier send

signal

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Security timer for loss of carrier

guard detection

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Operation mode of unblocking logic

Off
NoRestart
Restart

Current reversal and WEI logic for distance protection

3-phase ZCRWPSCH (85)
Function description
Current reversal and weak-end infeed
logic for distance protection

IEC 61850
identification
ZCRWPSCH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85

753
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.3.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlap on the parallel line.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local undervoltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back during
200 ms to accelerate the sending end.
Three phase or phase segregated scheme logic is available.

13.3.2

Principle of operation

13.3.2.1

Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IREV to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in any of the phases. When the reverse zone has
been activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the receive signal to reset before the trip signal is activated
due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure 370.

IREV

0
0-tPickUpRev

0
10ms

0-tPickUpRev
0

AND

IFWD

0
0-tDelayRev

IRVL

ANSI05000122-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000122 V2 EN

Figure 370:

Current reversal logic

The preventing of sending the send signal CS and activating of the TRIP in the scheme
communication block ZCPSCH (85) is carried out by connecting the IRVL signal to
input BLOCK in the ZCPSCH (85) function.
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current reversal
logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set to zero.

754
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.3.2.2

Weak-end infeed logic

The weak-end infeed logic (WEI) function sends back (echoes) the received signal
under the condition that no fault has been detected on the weak-end by different fault
detection elements (distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
The WEI function returns the received signal, see figure 371, when:

No active signal present on the input BLOCK.

The functional input CRL is active. This input is usually connected to the CRL
output on the scheme communication logic ZCPSCH (85).
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLK1
functional input or to theLOVBZ functional input. The later is usually configured
to the BLOCK functional output of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional
input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as
present within the IED is usually used for this purpose.

BLOCK
WTSZ
WEIBLK1
CRL

WEIBLKn

OR
0-tWEI
0

AND

0
50 ms

200ms
0

ECHO - cont.
AND

0
200ms

ECHO

en06000324_ansi.vsd

ANSI06000324 V1 EN

Figure 371:

Echo of a received signal by the WEI function

When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a spurious
signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the
system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms.
An undervoltage criteria is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of
the local breaker is selected, setting WEI = Echo&Trip, together with the WEI function
and ECHO signal has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 372.

755
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC00000551-TIFF V1 EN

Figure 372:

13.3.3

Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram

Function block
ZCRWPSCH (85)
V3P*
IRVL
BLOCK
TRWEI
IFWD
TRWEI_A
IREV
TRWEI_B
WEIBLK1
TRWEI_C
WEIBLK2
ECHO
LOVBZ
CBOPEN
CRL
ANSI06000287-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000287 V2 EN

Figure 373:

13.3.4

ZCRWPSCH (85) function block

Input and output signals

Table 399:
Name

ZCRWPSCH (85) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IFWD

BOOLEAN

A signal that indicates a forward fault has been

detected and will block tripping if there was a preexisting reverse fault condition (IREV)

Table continues on next page

756
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

A signal that indicates a reverse fault has been

detected and activates current reverasl logic

WEIBLK1

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic

WEIBLK2

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic due to operation of other

protections that would effect a pilot trip or the detection
of reverse faults that will be tripped by an external device

LOVBZ

BOOLEAN

Block of trip from WEI logic through the loss of voltage

(fuse-failure) function

CBOPEN

BOOLEAN

Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker

CRL

BOOLEAN

POTT or Unblock carrier receive for WEI logic

ZCRWPSCH (85) Output signals

Name

Table 401:

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 400:

13.3.5

Default

IREV

Type

Description

IRVL

BOOLEAN

Operation of current reversal logic

TRWEI

BOOLEAN

Trip of WEI logic

TRWEI_A

BOOLEAN

Trip of WEI logic in phase A

TRWEI_B

BOOLEAN

Trip of WEI logic in phase B

TRWEI_C

BOOLEAN

Trip of WEI logic in phase C

ECHO

BOOLEAN

A signal that indicates channel start (CS) by WEI logic

Setting parameters
ZCRWPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CurrRev

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic

tPickUpRev

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Pickup time for current reversal logic

tDelayRev

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.060

Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local

trip

WEI

Disabled
Echo
Echo & Trip

Disabled

Operating mode of WEI logic

tPickUpWEI

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.010

Coordination time for the WEI logic

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level

PU27PP

10 - 90

%VB

70

Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault

condition

PU27PN

10 - 90

%VB

70

Phase to Neutral voltage for detection of fault

condition

757
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.3.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 402:

ZCRWPSCH (85) technical data

Function

13.4

Range or value

Detection pickupphase-toneutral voltage

(10-90)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Detection pickup phase-tophase voltage

(10-90)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Reset ratio

<105%

Operate time for current reversal

logic

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Delay time for current reversal

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Coordination time for weak-end

infeed logic

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Local acceleration logic ZCLCPLAL

Function description
Local acceleration logic

13.4.1

Accuracy

IEC 61850
identification
ZCLCPLAL

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel is
available, local acceleration logic (ZCLCPLAL) can be used. This logic enables fast
fault clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a
communication channel.
The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the loss-ofload current (loss-of-load acceleration).

13.4.2

Principle of operation

13.4.2.1

Zone extension
The overreaching zone is connected to the input EXACC. For this reason, configure
the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used autoreclosing
function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device, see
figure 374.
This will allow the overreaching zone to trip instantaneously.

758
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC05000157 V1 EN

Figure 374:

Simplified logic diagram for local acceleration logic

After the autorecloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state,
there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step
distance time functions.
In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching zone range, an unwanted
autoreclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function at the reclosing attempt will
prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.
On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous
zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous".
The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss-ofload acceleration).

13.4.2.2

Loss-of-Load acceleration
When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss-of-load, the overreaching zone used for
"acceleration" connected to input LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously"
during normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been
above the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone
will be allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of
the phase currents will become low due to a three-phase trip at the opposite IED, see
figure 375. The current measurement is performed internally and the internal STILL
signal becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a
healthy phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite IED. Note that
this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase
currents will be low when the opposite IED is tripped.

759
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

BLOCK

OR

BC

0-tLoadOn
0

STILL

TRLL

AND

LLACC

ANSI05000158-1-en.vsd
ANSI05000158 V1 EN

Figure 375:

Loss-of-load acceleration - simplified logic diagram

Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during
normal closing.

13.4.3

Function block
ZCLCPLAL
I3P*
BLOCK
ARREADY
NDST
EXACC
BC
LLACC

TRZE
TRLL

IEC05000333-2-en.vsd
IEC05000333 V2 EN

Figure 376:

13.4.4

ZCLCPLAL function block

Input and output signals

Table 403:
Name

ZCLCPLAL Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

ARREADY

BOOLEAN

Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for fast trip

NDST

BOOLEAN

Non directional criteria used to prevent instantaneous

trip

EXACC

BOOLEAN

Connected to function used for tripping at zone

extension

BC

BOOLEAN

Breaker Close

LLACC

BOOLEAN

Connected to function used for tripping at loss of load

760
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 404:

ZCLCPLAL Output signals

Name

13.4.5
Table 405:

Type

Description

TRZE

BOOLEAN

Trip by zone extension

TRLL

BOOLEAN

Trip by loss of load

Setting parameters
ZCLCPLAL Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current values

LoadCurr

1 - 100

%IB

10

Load current before disturbance in % of IBase

LossOfLoad

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable/Disable operation of Loss of load.

ZoneExtension

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Enable/Disable operation of Zone extension

MinCurr

1 - 100

%IB

Lev taken as curr loss due to remote CB trip

in % of IBase

tLowCurr

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Time delay on pick-up for MINCURR value

tLoadOn

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay on pick-up for load current release

tLoadOff

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.300

Time delay on drop off for load current release

13.5

Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent

protection ECPSCH (85)
Function description
Scheme communication logic for
residual overcurrent protection

13.5.1

IEC 61850
identification
ECPSCH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85

Introduction
To achieve fast fault clearance of ground faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual
overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication channels.
In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted
to the other line end. With directional comparison, a short operate time of the
761

Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short operate
time enables rapid autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.
The communication logic module for directional residual current protection enables
blocking as well as permissive under/overreaching schemes. The logic can also be
supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed and current reversal, included in
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
(ECRWPSCH, 85) function.

13.5.2

Principle of operation
The four step directional residual overcurrent protection EF4PTOC (51N/67N) is
configured to give input information, that is directional fault detection signals, to the
ECPSCH (85) logic:

Input signal PLTR_CRD is used for tripping of the communication scheme,

normally the pickup signal of a forward overreaching step of STFW.
Input signal CS_STOP is used for sending block signal in the blocking
communication scheme, normally thepickup signal of a reverse overreaching step
of STRV.
Input signal CSUR is used for sending permissive signal in the underreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the pickup signal of a forward
underreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the underreaching step.
Input signal CSOR is used for sending permissive signal in the overreaching
permissive communication scheme, normally the pickup signal of a forward
overreaching step of STINn, where n corresponds to the overreaching step.

In addition to this a signal from the autoreclosing function should be configured to the
BLKCS input for blocking of the function at a single phase reclosing cycle.

13.5.2.1

Blocking scheme
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element
detects a ground fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element
operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the
opposite line end. The time delay, normally 30 40 ms, depends on the
communication transmission time and a chosen safety margin.
One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is
needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero
and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal attenuation will
occur due to the fault.

762
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Blocking schemes are particular favorable for three-terminal applications if there is no

zero-sequence outfeed from the tapping. The blocking scheme is immune to current
reversals because the received signal is maintained long enough to avoid unwanted
operation due to current reversal. There is never any need for weak-end infeed logic,
because the strong end trips for an internal fault when no blocking signal is received
from the weak end. The fault clearing time is however generally longer for a blocking
scheme than for a permissive scheme.
If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (received signal)
the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.
CS

AND

CS_STOP

BLOCK
AND

PLTR_CRD
CR

0-tCoord
0

0
25ms

TRIP

0
50ms

AND

CRL

ANSI05000448-1-en.vsd
ANSI05000448 V1 EN

Figure 377:

13.5.2.2

Simplified logic diagram for blocking scheme

Permissive under/overreaching scheme

In the permissive scheme the forward directed ground-fault measuring element sends a
permissive signal to the other end, if a ground fault is detected in the forward direction.
The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before
activating a trip signal. Independent channels must be available for the communication
in each direction.
An impedance measuring IED, which works in the same type of permissive mode, with
one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication scheme
for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring IED works in the
permissive overreaching mode, common channels can be used in single line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance

763
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

measuring and the directional ground-fault current system of the healthy line may
detect a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.
Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end infeed function is used in the
distance or ground-fault protection.
In case of an internal ground-fault, the forward directed measuring element operates
and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (sent signal). Local
tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a
permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (received signal).
The permissive scheme can be of either underreaching or overreaching type. In the
underreaching alternative, an underreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input signal
CSUR.
In the overreaching alternative, an overreaching directional residual overcurrent
measurement element will be used as sending criterion of the permissive input signal
CSOR. Also the underreaching input signal CSUR can initiate sending.

BLOCK

CRL

AND

CR

PLTR_CRD

AND

AND

0-tCoord
0

TRIP

0
25ms

0
50ms
AND
BLKCS
AND
Overreach
CSOR
CSUR

OR

CS

AND
OR

50ms
0

en05000280_3_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000280 V1 EN

764
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.5.2.3

Unblocking scheme
In unblocking scheme, the lower dependability in permissive scheme is overcome by
using the loss of guard signal from the communication equipment to locally create a
receive signal. It is common or suitable to use the function when older, less reliable,
power line carrier (PLC) communication is used.
The unblocking function uses a guard signal CR_GUARD, which must always be
present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CR_GUARD signal
for a time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 378.
This also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after the
security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated for
signaling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard signal
is present again.
CR
NOT

CRL

OR

0-tSecurity
0

CR_GUARD
200 ms
0

AND

OR

150 ms
0

AND
LCG

en05000746_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000746 V1 EN

Figure 378:

Guard signal logic with unblocking scheme

The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
Disabled:

The unblocking function is out of operation

No restart:

Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored

If CR_GUARD disappears, a CRL signal will be transferred to the trip logic
There will not be any information in case of communication failure (LCG)

Restart

Communication failure shorter than tSecurity will be ignored

It sends a defined (150 ms) CRL after the disappearance of the CR_GUARD signal
The function will activate LCG output in case of communication failure
If the communication failure comes and goes (<200 ms) there will not be recurrent
signaling

765
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.5.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
ECPSCH (85)
BLOCK
BLKTR
BLKCS
CS_STOP
PLTR_CRD
CSOR
CSUR
CR
CR_GUARD

TRIP
CS
CRL
LCG

ANSI06000288-1-en.vsd
ANSI06000288 V1 EN

Figure 379:

13.5.4

ECPSCH (85) function block

Input and output signals

Table 406:
Name

ECPSCH (85) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block pilot (communication assisted) trip

BLKCS

BOOLEAN

Block pilot channel start

CSBLK

BOOLEAN

Block of channel start (CS) due to reverse fault detection

CACC

BOOLEAN

Signal to be used for coordinating local pilot tripping

with the channel receive (CR) signal

CSOR

BOOLEAN

Signal to be used for channel start with overreaching

pilot schemes

CSUR

BOOLEAN

Signal to be used for channel start with underreaching

pilot schemes

CR

BOOLEAN

Channel receive input signal from communications

apparatus/module for pilot communication scheme logic

CRG

BOOLEAN

Carrier channel guard input signal

Table 407:
Name

ECPSCH (85) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip by pilot communication scheme logic

CS

BOOLEAN

Pilot channel start signal

CRL

BOOLEAN

Channel receive signal output from communication

scheme logic

LCG

BOOLEAN

Loss of channel guard signal output from

communication scheme logic

766
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.5.5
Table 408:

Setting parameters
ECPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

SchemeType

Disabled
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking

Permissive UR

Scheme type, Mode of Operation

tCoord

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.035

Communication scheme channel coordination

time

tSendMin

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Minimum duration of a carrier send signal

(carrier continuation)

Table 409:

ECPSCH (85) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Unblock

Disabled
NoRestart
Restart

Disabled

Operation mode of unblocking logic

tSecurity

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.035

Security timer for loss of carrier guard detection

13.5.6

Technical data
Table 410:

ECPSCH (85) technical data

Function

13.6

Range or value

Accuracy

Scheme type

Permissive Underreaching
Permissive Overreaching
Blocking

Communication scheme
coordination time

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for

residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH (85)
Function description
Current reversal and weak-end infeed
logic for residual overcurrent protection

IEC 61850
identification
ECRWPSCH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85

767
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.6.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Introduction
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH (85) is a supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECPSCH (85).
To achieve fast fault clearing for all ground faults on the line, the directional groundfault protection function can be supported with logic that uses communication channels.
The 670 series IEDs have for this reason available additions to scheme communication
logic.
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both terminals, overreaching
permissive communication schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal.
This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line.
This lack of security can result in a total loss of interconnection between the two buses.
To avoid this type of disturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transient blocking
logic) can be used.
Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent protection can basically
operate only when the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault. The detection
requires a sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this IED. The fault
current can be too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive and/or zero-sequence
source impedance behind this IED. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed
(WEI) echo logic is used.

13.6.2

Principle of operation

13.6.2.1

Directional comparison logic function

The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreaching and
permissive overreaching schemes.
The circuits for the permissive overreaching scheme contain logic for current reversal
and weak-end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking
overreaching scheme.
Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional ground-fault protection
module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions and
prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.
Figure 380 and figure 381 show the logic circuits.

768
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Connect the necessary signal from the autorecloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase autoreclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input of
the directional comparison module.

13.6.2.2

Fault current reversal logic

The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to the input
signal IREV, which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the reverse
direction element is activated the output signal IRVL is activated which is shown in
Figure 380. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. The
output signal IRVL will be connected to the block input on the permissive
overreaching scheme.
When the fault current is reversed on the healthy line, IRV is deactivated and IRVBLK
is activated. The tDelayRev timer delays the reset of the output signal. The signal
blocks operation of the overreach permissive scheme for residual current and thus
prevents unwanted operation caused by fault current reversal.
BLOCK
IREV

0
tPickUpRev

0
10ms

tPickUpRev
0

AND

0
tDelayRev

IRVL

IFWD
Drawing2.vsd
ANSI09000031 V1 EN

Figure 380:

13.6.2.3

Simplified logic diagram for current reversal

Weak-end infeed logic

The weak-end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or an
echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Echo & Trip). The corresponding logic diagrams
are depicted in Figure 381 and Figure 382.
The weak-end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element,
connected to WEIBLK2 via an OR-gate. If neither the forward nor the reverse
directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms, the weak-end infeed
logic echoes back the received permissive signal as shown in Figure 381 and Figure
382. The weak-end infeed logic also echoes the received permissive signal when
CBOPEN is high (local breaker opens) prior to faults appeared at the end of line.
If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last
200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the ground
fault function that is in operation.

769
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

BLOCK
WEIBLK1
CRL

200 ms
0

tPickUpWEI
0

&

0
50 ms

200 ms
0

ECHO

AND

WEI = Echo
ANSI09000032-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000032 V2 EN

Figure 381:

Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo

With the WEI= Echo & Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to the diagram
above. Further, it activates the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions
are fulfilled and the neutral point voltage is above the set operate value for 3V0PU.
The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
ground fault function which is in operation.
BLOCK
WEIBLK1

0
200 ms

CRL
WEI = Echo&Trip
3V0PU

AND

0
50 ms

200 ms
0

ECHO

AND

AND

TRWEI

100 ms
AND

CBOPEN
ANSI09000020-2-en.vsd
ANSI09000020 V2 EN

Figure 382:

Simplified logic diagram for weak-end infeed logic - Echo & Trip

The weak-end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200
ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to be
sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the weakend echo is selected for both line ends.

770
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.6.3

Function block
ECRWPSCH (85)
V3P*
IRVL
BLOCK
TRWEI
IFWD
ECHO
IREV
CR
WEIBLK1
WEIBLK2
LOVBZ
CBOPEN
CRL
ANSI06000289-1-en.vsd
ANSI06000289 V1 EN

Figure 383:

13.6.4

ECRWPSCH (85) function block

Input and output signals

Table 411:
Name

ECRWPSCH (85) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IFWD

BOOLEAN

A signal that indicates a forward fault has been

detected and will block tripping if there was a preexisting reverse fault condition (IREV)

IREV

BOOLEAN

A signal that indicates a reverse fault has been

detected and activates current reverasl logic

WEIBLK1

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI Logic

WEIBLK2

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic due to operation of other

protections that would effect a pilot trip or the detection
of reverse faults that will be tripped by an external device

LOVBZ

BOOLEAN

Block of trip from WEI logic through the loss of voltage

(fuse-failure) function

CBOPEN

BOOLEAN

Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker

CRL

BOOLEAN

POTT or Unblock carrier receive for WEI logic

Table 412:
Name

ECRWPSCH (85) Output signals

Type

Description

IRVL

BOOLEAN

Operation of current reversal logic

TRWEI

BOOLEAN

Trip of WEI logic

ECHO

BOOLEAN

A signal that indicates channel start (CS) by WEI logic

CR

BOOLEAN

POR Carrier signal received from remote end

771
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.6.5
Table 413:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
ECRWPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

CurrRev

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic

tPickUpRev

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Pickup time for current reversal logic

tDelayRev

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.060

Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local

trip

WEI

Disabled
Echo
Echo & Trip

Disabled

Operating mode of WEI logic

tPickUpWEI

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Coordination time for the WEI logic

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level

3V0PU

5 - 70

%VB

25

Neutral voltage setting for fault conditions

measurement

13.6.6

Technical data
Table 414:

ECRWPSCH (85) technical data

Function

13.7

Range or value

Accuracy

Operating mode of WEI logic

Disabled
Echo
Echo & Trip

Operate voltage 3Vo for WEI trip

(5-70)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Reset ratio

>95%

Operate time for current reversal

logic

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Delay time for current reversal

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Coordination time for weak-end

infeed logic

(0.00060.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase

segregated communication ZC1WPSCH (85)
Function description
Current reversal and weak-end infeed
logic for phase segregated
communication

IEC 61850
identification
ZC1WPSCH

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
85

772
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.7.1

Introduction
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
(ZC1WPSCH, 85) function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to
accelerate the sending end.

13.7.2

Principle of operation

13.7.2.1

Current reversal logic

The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been
activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided trip
signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see figure
384.

IRVLn

tPickUpRev 10 ms
t
t

tPickUpRev
t
&

IRVBLKLn

tDelayRev
t

IRVOPLn

IEC06000474_2_en.vsd
IEC06000474 V2 EN

Figure 384:

Current reversal logic

The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLn and activating of the TRIPLn in
the Scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH ,85)
is carried out by connecting the IRVOPLn signal to input BLOCKLn in ZCPSCH (85)
function.
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
(ZC1WPSCH ,85) function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the
current reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer
is set to zero.
773
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Weak-end infeed logic

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition
that no fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault detection elements
(distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
VTSZ
BLOCK
CRLLn

WEIBLK1

WEIBLK2

OR

ECHOLn - cont.
0-tWEI
0

AND

0
50ms

200ms
0

AND

ECHOLn

0
200ms

0
200ms
en07000085_ansi.vsd

ANSI07000085 V1 EN

Figure 385:

Weak-end infeed logic

The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 385, when:

The input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx output on
the scheme communication logic for distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH ,
85).
The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the WEIBLKLx
input or to the VTSZ input. The later is usually configured to the STGEN output
of the fuse-failure function.
No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 input. An
OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as present
within the IED is usually used for this purpose.

When an echo function is used in both IEDs (should generally be avoided), a spurious
signal can be looped round by the echo logics. To avoid a continuous lock-up of the
system, the duration of the echoed signal is limited to 200 ms. An undervoltage criteria
is used as an additional tripping criteria, when the tripping of the local breaker is
selected, setting WEI = Echo &Trip, together with the WEI function and ECHO signal
has been issued by the echo logic, see figure 386.

774
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

WEI = Echo&Trip

ECHOLn - cont.

CBOPEN
STUL1N
STUL2N

AND

STUL3N

100ms
0

OR

OR
AND

0
15ms

AND

0
15ms

AND

0
15ms

TRWEI
TRWEIL1

TRWEIL2

TRWEIL3

en00000551_ansi.vsd
ANSI00000551 V1 EN

Figure 386:

13.7.3

Tripping part of the WEI logic, simplified diagram

Function block
ZC1WPSCH (85)
V3P*
TRPWEI
BLOCK
TRPWEI_A
BLKZ
TRPWEI_B
CBOPEN
TRPWEI_C
CRL1
IRVOP
CRL2
IRVOP_A
CRL3
IRVOP_B
IRVL1
IRVOP_C
IRVL2
ECHO
IRVL3
ECHO_A
IRVBLKL1
ECHO_B
IRVBLKL2
ECHO_C
IRVBLKL3
WEIBLK
WEIBLKL1
WEIBLKL2
WEIBLKL3
WEIBLKOP
WEIBLKO1
WEIBLKO2
WEIBLKO3
ANSI06000477-2-en.vsd
ANSI06000477 V2 EN

Figure 387:

ZC1WPSCH (85) function block

775
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.7.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 415:
Name

ZC1WPSCH (85) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKZ

BOOLEAN

Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure function

CBOPEN

BOOLEAN

Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker

CRL1

BOOLEAN

Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1

CRL2

BOOLEAN

Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L2

CRL3

BOOLEAN

Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L3

IRVL1

BOOLEAN

Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1

IRVL2

BOOLEAN

Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2

IRVL3

BOOLEAN

Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3

IRVBLKL1

BOOLEAN

Block of current reversal function in Phase L1

IRVBLKL2

BOOLEAN

Block of current reversal function in Phase L2

IRVBLKL3

BOOLEAN

Block of current reversal function in Phase L3

WEIBLK

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic

WEIBLKL1

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic in Phase L1

WEIBLKL2

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic in Phase L2

WEIBLKL3

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic in Phase L3

WEIBLKOP

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protection

WEIBLKO1

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation of

other protection

WEIBLKO2

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 due to operation of

other protections

WEIBLKO3

BOOLEAN

Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 due to operation of

other protections

Table 416:
Name

ZC1WPSCH (85) Output signals

Type

Description

TRPWEI

BOOLEAN

Trip of WEI logic

TRPWEI_A

BOOLEAN

Trip of WEI logic in Phase A

TRPWEI_B

BOOLEAN

Trip of WEI logic in Phase B

TRPWEI_C

BOOLEAN

Trip of WEI logic in Phase C

IRVOP

BOOLEAN

Operation of current reversal logic

IRVOP_A

BOOLEAN

Operation of current reversal logic in Phase A

Table continues on next page

776
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

13.7.5
Table 417:

Type

Description

IRVOP_B

BOOLEAN

Operation of current reversal logic in Phase B

IRVOP_C

BOOLEAN

Operation of current reversal logic in Phase C

ECHO

BOOLEAN

Carrier Send by WEI logic

ECHO_A

BOOLEAN

Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase A

ECHO_B

BOOLEAN

Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase B

ECHO_C

BOOLEAN

Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase C

Setting parameters
ZC1WPSCH (85) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for Voltage level

OperCurrRev

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operating mode of Current Reversal Logic

tPickUpRev

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Pickup time for current reversal logic

tDelayRev

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.060

Time Delay to prevent Carrier send and local

trip

OperationWEI

Disabled
Echo
Echo & Trip

Disabled

Operating mode of WEI logic

VPGPickup

10 - 90

%VB

70

Phase to Ground voltage for detection of fault

condition

PU27PP

10 - 90

%VB

70

Phase to Phase voltage for detection of fault

condition

tPickUpWEI

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.010

Coordination time for the WEI logic

13.7.6

Description

Technical data
Table 418:

ZC1WPSCH technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Detection pickup phase to

neutral voltage

(10-90)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Detection pickup phase to phase

voltage

(10-90)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn

Reset ratio

<105%

Operate time for current reversal

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Delay time for current reversal

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Coordination time for weak-end

infeed logic

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

777
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.8

Direct transfer trip logic

13.8.1

Introduction
Direct transfer trip (DTT) logic is used together with Line distance protection function
or other type of line protection. One typical example for use of transfer trip is given
below. When Line distance protection function is extended to cover power lines
feeding the transformer directly and there is a fault in transformer differential area, the
transformer differential protection operates faster than line protection. A trip command
is sent to the remote end of the line. On remote end, before sending a trip command to
the circuit breaker, the certainty of a fault condition is ensured by checking local
criterion in DTT logic.
CR
TRIP

CS

DTT

TRIP
IDIFF>

VT1

Xsource

Line
CT1

CT2

CT3
Power
Transformer

Source

Load
en03000120.vsd

IEC03000120 V1 EN

Figure 388:

Direct transfer trip

On receiving the CR signal from remote end, Direct transfer trip logic needs to check
additional local criterion, before sending the trip signal to circuit breaker.
DTT logic can be handled in the following separate application functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC (37_55)

Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC (51)
Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC (59_27)
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC (94)
Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV (59N)
Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV (47)
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC (51N)
Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC (46)
Three-phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC (51)
Three-phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC (37)

A composite scheme of these functions must be configured in PCM600 configuration

tool, to make a complete DTT scheme as shown in Figure 389. The different individual

778
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

local criteria functions can also be used as direct tripping protections, normally with a
time delay.
CR!

CR2

Impedance protection
Low impedance protection

Breaker Failure

Backup trip of breaker failure

protection

Three phase overcurrent

CarrierReceiveLogic

CR!
CR2
Zero sequence overcurrent
protection

I3P

Analog input

LocalCheck
Negative sequence overcurrent
protection

CB Trip output

LCCRPTRC (94)

Three phase undercurrent

V3P

OR

Zero sequence overvoltage

protection

Negative sequence overvoltage

protection

Compensated over and

undervoltage protection

Low active power and power

factor protection

Sudden change in current

variation

ANSI09000773-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000773 V1 EN

Figure 389:

13.8.2

Direct transfer trip scheme

Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC

(37_55)
Function description
Low active power and power factor
protection

IEC 61850
identification
LAPPGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37_55

779
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.8.2.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Introduction
Low active power and power factor protection (LAPPGAPC, 37_55) function
measures power flow. It can be used for protection and monitoring of:

phase wise low active power

phase wise low power factor
phase wise reactive power and apparent power as service values

Following features are available:

Definite time stage for low active power protection

Definite time stage for low power factor protection
Individual enabling of Low active power and Low power factor functions
Low active power trip with 2 selection modes '1 out of 3' and '2 out of 3'
Phase wise calculated values of apparent power, reactive power, active power and
power factor are available as service values
Insensitive to small variations in voltage and current

13.8.2.2

Principle of operation
Low active power and low power factor protection (LAPPGAPC, 37_55) calculates
power and power factor from voltage and current values. Trip signal must be set
independently for low active power and low power factor condition after definite time
delay.
Active power calculation
LAPPGAPC (37_55) calculates single phase complex power of A, B and C loop by
following equations. From this complex apparent power, the real and imaginary parts
can be respective active and reactive power values of respective phases. All the
apparent power values given out of the function are absolute values. The active power
is the real part of the calculated apparent power.
S

= VA

EQUATION2243-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 146)

S = V I
B

EQUATION2244-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 147)

SC = VC IC
EQUATION2245-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 148)

Power factor calculation

780
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Power factor is a ratio of active power to apparent power. The function calculates
power factor from the calculated values of active power and apparent power of A, B
and C loop by following equation:
pfA =

PA
SA

EQUATION2246-ANSI V1 EN

pfB =

PB
SB

EQUATION2247-ANSI V1 EN

pfC =

(Equation 149)

(Equation 150)

PC
SC

EQUATION2248-ANSI V1 EN

(Equation 151)

Active power trip mode

The low active power functionality has a trip mode setting. According to this setting,
trip is activated if the low active power is detected in one out of three phases or two out
of three phases respectively. These two modes are user settable through setting
OpModeSel.
Zero clamping filtering
The function will do zero clamping to disable the calculation if the current and voltage
values of a particular phase are less than 30% of VBase for voltage and 3% of IBase for
current value.
Calculation
The active power setting value used for detection of under power must be given as a threephase value. The design starts to calculate internally the per phase value from this
setting and detect phase wise under power condition individually. The power factor
pickup value is common for all the three phases.
Phase wise analog values apparent power, active power, reactive power and power
factor are available as service values.

781
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

PU_LAP_x
P < LAP<

I3P

TRLAP

t
Calculation P and
pf

V3P

PU_LPF_x
pf < pf<

TRLPFx

ANSI10000011-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000011 V1 EN

Figure 390:

13.8.2.3

Logic diagram of Low active power and low power factor protection
(LAPPGAPC, 37_55)

Function block
LAPPGAPC (37_55)
I3P*
TRLAP
V3P*
TRLPF
BLOCK
TRTPFA
BLKTR
TRLPFB
TRLPFC
PU_LAP
PU_LPF
PU_LAP_A
PU_LAP_B
PU_LAP_C
PU_LPF_A
PU_LPF_B
PU_LPF_C
ANSI09000763-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000763 V1 EN

Figure 391:

13.8.2.4

LAPPGAPC (37_55) function block

Input and output signals

Table 419:
Name

LAPPGAPC (37_55) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for current

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for voltage

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block all trip signals of the funtction

782
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 420:

LAPPGAPC (37_55) Output signals

Name

13.8.2.5
Table 421:

Type

Description

TRLAP

BOOLEAN

Trip low active power

TRLPF

BOOLEAN

Trip low power factor

TRTPFA

BOOLEAN

Trip low power factor phase A

TRLPFB

BOOLEAN

Trip low power factor Phase B

TRLPFC

BOOLEAN

Trip low power factor Phase C

PU_LAP

BOOLEAN

Pick up low active power

PU_LPF

BOOLEAN

Pickup low power factor

PU_LAP_A

BOOLEAN

Pick up low active power phase A

PU_LAP_B

BOOLEAN

Pick up low active power phase B

PU_LAP_C

BOOLEAN

Pick up low active power phase C

PU_LPF_A

BOOLEAN

Pick up low power factor phase A

PU_LPF_B

BOOLEAN

Pick up low power factor phase B

PU_LPF_C

BOOLEAN

Pick up low power factor phase C

Setting parameters
LAPPGAPC (37_55) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable/Disable

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base Setting for current in A

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage in kV

SBase

1 - 50000

MVA

1200

Base Setting for power in MVA

OperationLAP

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation low active power Enable/disable

OpModeSel

2 out of 3
1 out of 3

2 out of 3

Trip mode low active power 2out of 3 or 1 out

of 3

PU_LAP

2.0 - 100.0

%SB

0.1

5.0

3 Phase pick up value for low active power

tdelay_LAP

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.010

Time delay to operate for low active power

OperationLPF

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation low power factor enable/disable

PU_LPF

0.00 - 1.00

0.01

0.40

Pick up for low power factor

tdelay_LPD

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.010

Time delay to operate for low power factor

783
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.8.2.6

13.8.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 422:

LAPPGAPC (37_55)technical data

Function

Range or value
(2.0-100.0)% of SBase

1,0% of Sn

Reset ratio, low active

power

<105%

Transient overreach, low

active power

<20 % at = 100 ms

Operate value, low power

factor

0.00-1.00

1,0% of Sn

Reset ratio, low power

factor

<105%

Transient overreach, low

power factor

<20 % at = 100 ms

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Critical impulse time, low

active power

10 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8xPset

Impulse margin time, low

active power

10 ms typically

Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC

(59_27)
Function description
Compensated over and undervoltage
protection

13.8.3.1

Accuracy

Operate value, low active

power

IEC 61850
identification
COUVGAPC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59_27

Introduction
Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC, 59_27) function
calculates the remote end voltage of the transmission line utilizing local measured
voltage, current and with the help of transmission line parameters, that is, line
resistance, reactance, capacitance and local shunt reactor. For protection of long
transmission line for in zone faults, COUVGAPC, (59_27) can be incorporated with
local criteria within direct transfer trip logic to ensure tripping of the line only under
abnormal conditions.

784
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.8.3.2

Principle of operation
Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC, 59_27) function is
phase segregated and mainly used for local criteria check in Direct transfer trip. The
principle is to utilize local measured voltage and current to calculate the voltage at the
remote end of the line.
The main measured inputs to COUVGAPC (59_27) are three-phase voltage and
current signals. COUVGAPC (59_27)uses line resistance, reactance and line charging
capacitance to calculate the remote end voltage. It also takes the input for local shunt
reactor, connected at the line side of the line breaker, reactance value. The calculated
voltage is referred to as compensated voltage.
59 PU
59 Trip

Over voltage
V3P

59_PU_x

comparator

I3P

t
Compensated
voltage calculation

SWIPOS
EnShuntReactor

59_Trip_x

27_PU_x

AND
Under voltage

27_Trip_x
27 Trip

comparator
27 PU

ANSI09000782-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000782 V1 EN

Figure 392:

Logic diagram of Compensated over and undervoltage protection

(COUVGAPC, 59_27)

The formula used for calculation of compensated voltage is as follows:

Vremote = Vlocal (Ilocal j x Vlocal/Xsr + j x Vlocal/Xcp) x Zsetting
Where:
Vremote

calculated voltage at the opposite side of line

Vlocal

measured local voltage

Ilocal

measured local current

Xsr

reactance of local line connected shunt reactor, if applicable

Xcp

half of equivalent reactance of line distributed capacitor

Above calculated compensated voltage is compared to preset over and under voltage
levels set as percentage of base voltage VBase. If the calculated voltage exceeds setting
785
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

in any phase, COUVGAPC (59_27) generates pickup and trip signals for that phase
and common pickup and trip signals. Independent enabling for overvoltage and
undervoltage are available with definite time delay. If shunt reactor is not present in the
system, COUVGAPC (59_27) does not include any effect of shunt reactor while
calculating the compensated voltage. This shunt reactor calculation is enabled when
both input SWIPOS is and setting parameter EnShuntReactor is Enabled. Run time
change in EnShuntReactor setting parameter restarts the IED and SWIPOS input signal
is used to enable/disable the shunt reactor calculations.
Calculations

All resistance and reactance considered in compensated voltage calculation are

primary side values.
Calculation of shunt reactor reactance in ohms from given MVAr rating:
2

X sr =

VN
QN
(Equation 152)

EQUATION2249-ANSI V1 EN

Where:

VN

line to line voltage

QN

is total three phase MVAr of shunt reactor

If total line capacitance (Ctotal) is known then half line capacitive reactance:

X cp

2
wCtotal
(Equation 153)

EQUATION2250 V1 EN

and if total line capacitive reactance XcTotal is known:

X cp

= 2 X cTotal
(Equation 154)

EQUATION2251 V1 EN

Compensated voltage for all three phases is available as service values.

786
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.8.3.3

Function block
COUVGAPC (59_27)
I3P*
27 Trip
V3P*
59 Trip
BLOCK
27_Trip_A
BLKTR
27_Trip_B
SWIPOS
27_Trip_C
59_Trip_A
59_Trip_B
59_Trip_C
27 PU
59 PU
27_PU_A
27_PU_B
27_PU_C
59_PU_A
59_PU_B
59_PU_C
ANSI09000764-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000764 V1 EN

Figure 393:

13.8.3.4

COUVGAPC (59_27) function block

Input and output signals

Table 423:
Name

COUVGAPC (59_27) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage inputs

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block the function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Blocks all operate outputs

SWIPOS

BOOLEAN

Local shunt reactor connected or not

Table 424:
Name

COUVGAPC (59_27) Output signals

Type

Description

27 Trip

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal for compensated under voltage

59 Trip

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal for compensated over voltage

27_Trip_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase A

27_Trip_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase B

27_Trip_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for compensated under voltage of phase C

59_Trip_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase A

59_Trip_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase B

59_Trip_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for compensated over voltage of phase C

27 PU

BOOLEAN

Common PU fr compensated undervoltage

Table continues on next page

787
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

13.8.3.5
Table 425:
Name

Type

Description

59 PU

BOOLEAN

Pick up for overvoltage

27_PU_A

BOOLEAN

pick up for 27 phase A uncompensated

27_PU_B

BOOLEAN

pick up for 27 phase B uncompensated

27_PU_C

BOOLEAN

pickup for compensated 27 phase C

59_PU_A

BOOLEAN

pick up for uncompensated 59 phase A

59_PU_B

BOOLEAN

pick up for uncompensated 59 phase B

59_PU_C

BOOLEAN

pick up for uncompensated 59 phase C

Setting parameters
COUVGAPC (59_27) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable/Disable

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage in kV

OperationUV

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation compensated under voltage Off/On

27_COMP

1 - 100

%VB

70

Compensated under voltage level in % of

VBase

tUV

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Time delay to trip under voltage

OperationOV

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation compensated over voltage Off/On

59_COMP

1 - 200

%VB

120

Compensated over voltage level in % of VBase

tOV

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

5.000

Time delay to trip over voltage

Table 426:
Name
HystAbs

COUVGAPC (59_27) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
0.0 - 100.0

Unit
%VB

Step
0.1

Default
0.5

Description
Hysteresis absolute for compensated over/
under voltage in % of VBase

788
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 427:

COUVGAPC (59_27) Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

R1

0.01 - 3000.00

ohm

0.01

5.00

Positive sequence resistance per phase for

the line in ohm

X1

0.01 - 3000.00

ohm

0.01

40.00

Positive sequence reactance per phase for

the line in ohm

Xc

1.00 - 10000.00

ohm

0.01

1000.00

Half of equivalent capacitive reactance per

phase in ohm

EnShuntReactor

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable setting if shunt reactor connected in line

Xsh

1.00 - 10000.00

ohm

0.01

1500.00

Per phase reactance of local Shunt Reactor

in ohm

13.8.3.6

13.8.4

Technical data
Table 428:

COUVGAPC (59_27)technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value,
undervoltage

(1-100)% of VBase

0,5% of Vn

Reset ratio, undervoltage

<105%

Critical impulse time,

undervoltage

5 ms typically at 1.2 to 0.8xVset

Impulse margin time,

undervoltage

15 ms typically

Operate value,
overvoltage

(1-200)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn at V<Vn
0.5% of V at V>Vn

Reset ratio, overvoltage

>95%

Critical impulse time,

overvoltage

2 ms typically at 0.8 to 1.2xVset

Impulse margin time,

overvoltage

10 ms typically

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC (51)

Function description
Sudden change in current variation

IEC 61850
identification
SCCVPTOC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51

789
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.8.4.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Introduction
Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC, 51) function is a fast way of finding
any abnormality in line currents. When there is a fault in the system, the current
changes faster than the voltage. SCCVPTOC (51) finds abnormal condition based on
phase-to-phase current variation. The main application is as a local criterion to increase
security when transfer trips are used.

13.8.4.2

Principle of operation
Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC, 51) function calculates the variation
in phase-to-phase current and gives the RI output when this variation crosses the sum
of start level and float threshold for a time of tDelay. The variation is calculated for all
the three phase-to-phase currents.
The variation in the current is calculated using the following equation:

Di = i ( t ) - 2 i ( t - T ) + i ( t - 2T )
EQUATION2252 V1 EN

Where:

i(t)

Amplitude of the current at the present instant

i(t-T)

Amplitude of the current at the instant exactly one cycle time before

i(t-2T)

Amplitude of the current at the instant exactly two cycle time before

Criteria:
Di > i (1.8 DIT + IPickup )
(Equation 155)

EQUATION2253-ANSI V1 EN

IPickup: pickup level

It is the full-circle integral of the phase-to-phase current variation

1 2T -1
DIT = Di ( t - n )
T n =T
EQUATION2254 V1 EN

(Equation 156)

T: the count of the sampling value in one cycle

790
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

If the above criteria becomes true for a time of tDelay, then respective RI output is
activated provided the BLOCK input is false, and the respective TRIP outputs is
activated for the time of tHold provided the BLKTR and BLOCK input is false.

13.8.4.3

Function block
SCCVPTOC (51)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
RI

ANSI09000765-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000765 V1 EN

Figure 394:

13.8.4.4

SCCVPTOC (51) function block

Input and output signals

Table 429:

SCCVPTOC (51) Input signals

Name

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase to phase current samples group

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block trip signals

SCCVPTOC (51) Output signals

Name

Table 431:

Description

I3P

Table 430:

13.8.4.5

Default

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

RI

BOOLEAN

Common start signal

Setting parameters
SCCVPTOC (51) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Off/On

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current in A

IPickup

0 - 100

%IB

20

Fixed threshold setting in % of IBase

tHold

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.500

Hold time for operate signals

791
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

Table 432:
Name
tDelay

13.8.4.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

SCCVPTOC (51) Group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

0.000 - 0.005

Step
0.001

Time delay for start and trip signals

SCCVPTOC (51)technical data

Function

13.8.5.1

0.002

Description

Technical data
Table 433:

13.8.5

Default

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value,
overcurrent

(0 - 100)% of IBase

1,0% of In

Reset ratio, overcurrent

>95%

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC (94)

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Carrier receive logic

LCCRPTRC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
94

Introduction
In Direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme, the received CR signal gives the trip to the circuit
breaker after checking certain local criteria functions in order to increase the security
of the overall tripping functionality. Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC, 94) function
gives final trip output of the DTT scheme.
Features:

13.8.5.2

Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme

Blocking function output on CR Channel Error
Phase wise trip outputs

Principle of operation
The functionality of the Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC, 94) is to release the TRIP
signal for DTT scheme based on the LOCTR_A, LOCTRL_B, LOCTR_C, and
LOCTR signals coming from local criterion, and the Carrier receive signals CR! and
CR2. There are two modes of operation 1 out of 2 and 2 out of 2. In the case of the 1
out of 2 mode if any one of the carrier signal is received then the trip signals will be

792
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

released, and in 2 out of 2 mode both the CRs should be high to release trip signal. If
any one of the channel error signals is high in 2 out of 2 mode, then logic automatically
switches to 1 out of 2 mode after a time delay of 200 ms. After switching to 1/2 mode
under channel error condition and if channel error gets cleared the mode will switch
back only after a time delay of 200 ms.
If the input channel error signal is high then the respective carrier receive signal will be
blocked.
The complete function can be blocked by setting the BLOCK input high.

13.8.5.3

Function block
LCCRPTRC (94)
BLOCK
LOCTR
LOCTR_A
LOCTR_B
LOCTR_C
CHERR1
CHERR2
CR!
CR2

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C

ANSI09000766-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000766 V1 EN

Figure 395:

13.8.5.4

LCCRPTRC (94) function block

Input and output signals

Table 434:
Name

LCCRPTRC (94) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

LOCTR

BOOLEAN

Local common trip signal coming from DTT

LOCTR_A

BOOLEAN

Local trip signal for phase A coming from DTT

LOCTR_B

BOOLEAN

Local trip signal for phase B coming from DTT

LOCTR_C

BOOLEAN

Local trip signal for phase C coming from DTT

CHERR1

BOOLEAN

Channel error indication flag for carrier receive 1

CHERR2

BOOLEAN

Channel error indication flag for carrier receive 2

CR!

BOOLEAN

Carrier receive 1

CR2

BOOLEAN

Carrier receive 2

793
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 435:

LCCRPTRC (94) Output signals

Name

13.8.5.5
Table 436:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip Phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip Phase C

Setting parameters
LCCRPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disabled/Enabled

ChMode

2 out of 3
1 Out Of 2

2 out of 3

Setting to select 1/2 or 2/2 mode

tOperate

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.100

Time delay to operate

13.8.5.6

Technical data
Table 437:

LCCRPTRC (94)technical data

Function

13.8.6

Range or value
1 Out Of 2
2 Out Of 2

Timer

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV (47)

Function description
Negative sequence overvoltage
protection

13.8.6.1

Accuracy

Operation mode

IEC 61850
identification
LCNSPTOV

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
47

Introduction
Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault condition. Negative
sequence voltage and current get high values during unsymmetrical faults.

794
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.8.6.2

Principle of operation
Negative sequence over voltage protection (LCNSPTOV, 47) is a definite time stage
comparator function. The negative sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection V3P in PCM600. This
voltage is compared against the preset value and a pickup signal will be set high if the
input negative sequence voltage is greater than the preset value Pickup2. Trip signal
will be set high after a time delay setting oftV2. There is a BLOCK input which will
block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The negative sequence
voltage is also available as service value output U2.

13.8.6.3

Function block
LCNSPTOV (47)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
RI

ANSI09000767-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000767 V1 EN

Figure 396:

13.8.6.4

LCNSPTOV (47) Function block

Input and output signals

Table 438:
Name

LCNSPTOV (47) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for voltage inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block overall function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block trip output

Table 439:
Name

LCNSPTOV (47) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for negative sequence over voltage

RI

BOOLEAN

Start signal for negative sequence over voltage

795
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.8.6.5
Table 440:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
LCNSPTOV (47) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable/Disable

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400

Base setting for voltage in kV

Pickup2

1 - 200

%VB

10

Negative sequence over voltage start value in

%VBase

tV2

0.000 - 120.000

0.001

2.000

Time delay to operate

13.8.6.6

Technical data
Table 441:

LCNSPTOV (47)technical data

Function

13.8.7

Range or value
(1-200)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn at V<Vn
0.5% of V at V>Vn

Reset ratio, negative

sequence overvoltage

>95%

Operate time, start

20 ms typically at 0 to 2xVset

Reset time, start

25 ms typically at 2 to 0xVset

Critical impulse time,

negative sequence
overvoltage

10 ms typically at 0 to 2xVset

Impulse margin time,

negative sequence
overvoltage

15 ms typically

Timers

(0.000-120.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV (59N)

Function description
Zero sequence overvoltage protection

13.8.7.1

Accuracy

Operate value, negative

sequence overvoltage

IEC 61850
identification
LCZSPTOV

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
59N

Introduction
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal conditions involving ground.
They can reach considerably high values during ground faults.

796
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.8.7.2

Principle of operation
Zero sequence over voltage protection (LCZSPTOV, 59N) is a definite time stage
comparator function. The zero sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection V3P in PCM600. This
voltage is compared against the preset value and a pickup signal will be set high if the
input zero sequence voltage is greater than the preset value 3V0PU. Trip signal will be
set high after a time delay setting of t3V0. BLOCK input will block the complete
function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The zero sequence voltage will be
available as service value output as 3V0.

13.8.7.3

Function block
LCZSPTOV (59N)
V3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
RI

ANSI09000768-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000768 V1 EN

Figure 397:

13.8.7.4

LCZSPTOV (59N) function block

Input and output signals

Table 442:
Name

LCZSPTOV (59N) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for voltage inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block overall function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block TRIP output

Table 443:
Name

LCZSPTOV (59N) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

TRIP signal for zero sequence over voltage

RI

BOOLEAN

Start signal for zero sequence over voltage

797
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.8.7.5
Table 444:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
LCZSPTOV (59N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disabled/Enabled

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400

Base setting for voltage in kV

3V0PU

1 - 200

%VB

10

Zero sequence voltage start value in % of

VBase

t3V0

0.000 - 120.000

0.001

2.000

Time delay to operate

13.8.7.6

Technical data
Table 445:

LCZSPTOV (59N)technical data

Function

13.8.8

Range or value
(1-200)% of VBase

0.5% of Vn at V<Vn
0.5% of V at V>Vn

Reset ratio, zero

sequence overvoltage

>95%

Operate time, start

25 ms typically at 0 to 1.5xVset

Reset time, start

25 ms typically at 1.5 to 0xVset

Critical impulse time, zero

sequence overvoltage

10 ms typically at 0 to 1.5xVset

Timers

(0.000-120.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC (46)

Function description
Negative sequence overcurrent
protection

13.8.8.1

Accuracy

Operate value, zero

sequence overvoltage

IEC 61850
identification
LCNSPTOC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
46

Introduction
Negative sequence components are present in all types of fault condition. They can
reach considerably high values during abnormal operation.

798
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.8.8.2

Principle of operation
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (LCNSPTOC, 46) is a definite time stage
comparator function. The negative sequence input current from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection I3P in PCM600. This
current is compared against the preset value and a pickup signal will be set high if the
input negative sequence current is greater than the preset value Pickup2. Trip signal
will be set high after a time delay setting of tI2. BLOCK input will block the complete
function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The negative sequence current is available
as service value output I2.

13.8.8.3

Function block
LCNSPTOC (46)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
RI

ANSI09000769-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000769 V1 EN

Figure 398:

13.8.8.4

LCNSPTOC (46) Function block

Input and output signals

Table 446:
Name

LCNSPTOC (46) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for current inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block overall function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block trip signal

Table 447:
Name

LCNSPTOC (46) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal negative sequence over current protection

RI

BOOLEAN

Start signal for negative sequence over current

protection

799
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.8.8.5
Table 448:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
LCNSPTOC (46) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disabled/Enabled

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current in A

Pickup2

1 - 2500

%IB

100

Negative sequence over current start value in

% of IBase

tI2

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to operate

13.8.8.6

13.8.9

Technical data
Table 449:

LCNSPTOC (37_55)technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value, negative

sequence overcurrent

(1 - 2500)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir at I < In
1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, negative

sequence overcurrent

>95%

Operate time, start

20 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset
15 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset

Reset time, start

25 ms typically at 2 to 0xIset

Critical impulse time,

negative sequence
overcurrent

10 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset
2 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset

Impulse margin time,

negative sequence
overcurrent

10 ms typically

Timer

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Transient overreach, start

function

<5% at = 100 ms

Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC (51N)

Function description
Zero sequence overcurrent protection

IEC 61850
identification
LCZSPTOC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51N

800
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.8.9.1

Introduction
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal conditions involving ground.
They have a considerably high value during ground faults.

13.8.9.2

Principle of operation
Zero sequence overcurrent protection (LCZSPTOC, 51N) is a definite time stage
comparator function. The zero sequence input current from the SMAI block is
connected as input to the function through a group connection I3P in PCM600. This
current is compared against the preset value and a pickup signal will be set high if the
input zero sequence current is greater than the preset value 3I0 PU. Trip signal will be
set high after a time delay setting of t3I0. BLOCK input will block the complete
function. BLKTR will block the trip output. The zero sequence current is available as
service value output 3I0.

13.8.9.3

Function block
LCZSPTOC (51N)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
RI

ANSI09000770-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000770 V1 EN

Figure 399:

13.8.9.4

LCZSPTOC (51N) Function block

Input and output signals

Table 450:
Name

LCZSPTOC (51N) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for current inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block overall function

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block trip output

Table 451:
Name

LCZSPTOC (51N) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Trip signal for zero sequence over current protection

RI

BOOLEAN

Start signal for zero sequence over current protection

801
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.8.9.5
Table 452:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
LCZSPTOC (51N) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disabled/Enabled

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current in A

3I0 PU

1 - 2500

%IB

100

Zero sequence over current start value in %

of IBase

t3I0

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to operate

13.8.9.6

Technical data
Table 453:

LCZSPTOC (51N)technical data

Function

13.8.10

Accuracy

(1-2500)% of IBase

1.0% of In at I<In
1.0% of I at I>In

Reset ratio, zero

sequence overcurrent

>95%

Operate time, start

20 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset
15 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset

Reset time, start

30 ms typically at 2 to 0xIset

Critical impulse time, zero

sequence overcurrent

10 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset
2 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset

Impulse margin time,

zero sequence
overcurrent

15 ms typically

Timer

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC (51)

Function description
Three phase overcurrent

13.8.10.1

Range or value

Operate value, zero

sequence overcurrent

IEC 61850
identification
LCP3PTOC

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
51

Introduction
Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC, 51) is designed for overcurrent conditions.

802
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Features:

13.8.10.2

Phase wise pickup and trip signals

Overcurrent protection
Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
Single definite time stage trip function.

Principle of operation
Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC, 51) is used for detecting over current
conditions. LCP3PTOC (51) pickups when the current exceeds the set limit PU 51. It
operates with definite time (DT) characteristics, that is, the function operates after a
predefined time tOC and resets when the fault current disappears. The function
contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function output, timer or
the function itself, if desired.

13.8.10.3

Function block
LCP3PTOC (51)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
RI
PU_A
PU_B
BFI_C
ANSI09000771-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000771 V1 EN

Figure 400:

13.8.10.4

LCP3PTOC (51) Function block

Input and output signals

Table 454:
Name

LCP3PTOC (51) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Three phase group signal for current inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block all binary outputs by resetting timers

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block trip of the function

803
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 455:

LCP3PTOC (51) Output signals

Name

13.8.10.5
Table 456:
Name

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

RI

BOOLEAN

Common start signal

PU_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

BFI_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

Setting parameters
LCP3PTOC (51) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable / Disable

IBase

0 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current in A

PU 51

5 - 2500

%IB

1000

Start value for 3 phase over current in % IBase

tOC

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.020

Time delay to operate

13.8.10.6

Technical data
Table 457:

LCP3PTOC (51) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value,
overcurrent

(5-2500)% of IBase

1.0% of Ir at I < In
1.0% of I at I > In

Reset ratio, overcurrent

>95%

Operate time, start

20 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset
15 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset

Reset time, start

30 ms typically at 2 to 0xIset

Critical impulse time,

overcurrent

5 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset
2 ms typically at 0 to 10xIset

Impulse margin time,

overcurrent

10 ms typically

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

804
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.8.11

Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC (37)

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Three phase undercurrent

13.8.11.1

IEC 60617
identification

LCP3PTUC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
37

Introduction
Three phase undercurrent function (LCP3PTUC, 37) is designed for detecting loss of
load conditions.
Features:

13.8.11.2

Phase wise pickup and trip signals

Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
Single definite time stage trip function

Principle of operation
Three phase undercurrent (LCP3PTUC, 37) is used for detecting sudden load loss
which is considered as fault condition. LCP3PTUC (37) starts when the current is less
than the set limit PU_37. It operates with definite time (DT) characteristics, that is, the
function operates after a predefined time tUC and resets when the load current restores.
The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function
output, timer or the function itself, if desired.

13.8.11.3

Function block
LCP3PTUC (37)
I3P*
BLOCK
BLKTR

TRIP
TR_A
TR_B
TR_C
RI
BFI_A
PU_B
BFI_C
ANSI09000772-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000772 V1 EN

Figure 401:

LCP3PTUC (37) Function block

805
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication
13.8.11.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 458:

LCP3PTUC (37) Input signals

Name

Type

Three phase group signal for current inputs

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block all binary outputs by resetting timers

BLKTR

BOOLEAN

Block trip of the function

LCP3PTUC (37) Output signals

Name

Table 460:
Name

Description

GROUP
SIGNAL

Table 459:

13.8.11.5

Default

I3P

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

Common trip signal

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

RI

BOOLEAN

Common start signal

BFI_A

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase A

PU_B

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase B

BFI_C

BOOLEAN

Pickup signal from phase C

Setting parameters
LCP3PTUC (37) Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable / Disable

IBase

0 - 99999

3000

Current Base

PU_37

1.00 - 100.00

%IB

0.01

50.00

Start value for 3 phase under current in %

IBase

tUC

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Time delay to operate

806
Technical reference manual

Section 13
Scheme communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

13.8.11.6

Technical data
Table 461:

LCP3TUC (37) technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Operate value,
undercurrent

(1.00-100.00)% of IBase

1.0% of In

Reset ratio, undercurrent

>105%

Operate time, start

20 ms typically at 2 to 0xIset

Reset time, start

30 ms typically at 0 to 2xIset

Critical impulse time,

undercurrent

10 ms typically at 2 to 0xIset

Impulse margin time,

undercurrent

10 ms typically

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

807
Technical reference manual

808

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 14

Logic

About this chapter

This chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way the
functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and
technical data are included for each function.

14.1

Tripping logic SMPPTRC (94)

Function description
Tripping logic

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

SMPPTRC

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
94

I->O
SYMBOL-K V1 EN

14.1.1

Introduction
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved in
the tripping of the fault. It provides a settable pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse
of sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with
autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block also includes a settable latch functionality for evolving faults
and breaker lock-out.

14.1.2

Principle of operation
The duration of a trip output signal from tripping logic common 3-phase output
SMPPTRC (94) is settable (tTripMin). The pulse length should be long enough to
secure the breaker opening.
For three-pole tripping logic common 3-phase output, SMPPTRC (94) has a single
input (TRINP_3P) through which all trip output signals from the protection functions
within the IED, or from external protection functions via one or more of the IEDs
binary inputs, are routed. It has a single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or

809
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

more of the IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring
this signal.

BLOCK
tTripMin

TRIN

AND

OR

TRIP

Operation Mode = Enabled

Program = 3 phase
ANSI10000266-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000266 V1 EN

Figure 402:

Simplified logic diagram for three pole trip

SMPPTRC (94) function for single-pole and two-pole tripping has additional phase
segregated inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs
enable single- pole and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their
own phase selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and
not phase segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of
the expanded SMPPTRC (94) function. Examples of such protection functions are the
residual overcurrent protections. The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function has two
inputs for these functions, one for impedance tripping (for example, carrier-aided
tripping commands from the scheme communication logic), and one for ground fault
tripping (for example, tripping output from a residual overcurrent protection).
Additional logic, including a timer tWaitForPHS, secures a three-phase trip command
for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase selection signals.
The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function has three trip outputs TR_A, TR_B, TR_C
(besides the trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the
IEDs binary outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these
signals. There are also separate output signals indicating single-pole, two-pole or threepole trip. These signals are important for cooperation with the autorecloser SMBRREC
(79) function.
The expanded SMPPTRC (94) function is equipped with logic which secures correct
operation for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special
input is also provided which disables single- pole and two-pole tripping, forcing all
tripping to be three-pole.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one SMPPTRC (94) function block is used for each
breaker. This can be the case if single pole tripping and autoreclosing is used.

810
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from
another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three-pole trip, if
desired.
It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing
only the choice is by setting TripLockout.

14.1.2.1

Logic diagram
TRINP_A
TRINP_B

OR

TRINP_C

OR

1PTRZ
1PTRGF

OR

TRINP_3P

AND

INTL_ABCTRIP

Program = 3 phase
ANSI05000517-3-en.vsd
ANSI05000517 V3 EN

Figure 403:

Three-phase front logic simplified logic diagram

811
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

TRINP_3P
TRINP_A
PS_A

TR_A

OR

AND
TRINP_B

TR_B

PS_B

OR

AND
TRINP_C
PS_C

TR_C

OR

AND
OR

OR

OR
- loop
-loop

OR
AND
1PTRGF

AND
AND

AND

tWaitForPHS

OR

1PTRZ

ANSI10000056-3-en.vsd
ANSI10000056 V3 EN

Figure 404:

Phase segregated front logic

812
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

150 ms

ATRIP

AND

150 ms

AND

150 ms

AND

OR

AND

OR

INTL_BTRIP

OR

0
2000 ms

CTRIP

INTL_ATRIP

OR

0
2000 ms

BTRIP

OR

OR

AND

OR

INTL_CTRIP

OR

0
2000 ms

BLOCK

OR

AND

OR

OR

P3PTR

AND

OR
-loop
ANSI10000268-2-en.vsd
ANSI10000268 V2 EN

Figure 405:

Additional logic for the 1ph/3ph operating mode

813
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

BLOCK

ANSI05000520-3.vsd
ANSI05000520 V3 EN

Figure 406:

Additional logic for the 1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode

814
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

ANSI05000521-3.vsd
ANSI05000521 V3 EN

Figure 407:

14.1.3

Final tripping circuits

Function block
SMPPTRC (94)
BLOCK
TRIP
BLKLKOUT
TR_A
TRINP_3P
TR_B
TRINP_A
TR_C
TRINP_B
TR1P
TRINP_C
TR2P
PS_A
TR3P
PS_B
CLLKOUT
PS_C
1PTRZ
1PTRGF
P3PTR
SETLKOUT
RSTLKOUT
ANSI05000707-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000707 V2 EN

Figure 408:

SMPPTRC (94) function block

815
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic
14.1.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 462:
Name

SMPPTRC (94) Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

BLKLKOUT

BOOLEAN

Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)

TRINP_3P

BOOLEAN

Trip all phases

TRINP_A

BOOLEAN

Trip phase A

TRINP_B

BOOLEAN

Trip phase B

TRINP_C

BOOLEAN

Trip phase C

PS_A

BOOLEAN

Input from phase selection, phase A

PS_B

BOOLEAN

Input from phase selection, phase B

PS_C

BOOLEAN

Input from phase selection, phase C

1PTRZ

BOOLEAN

Zone Trip with a separate phase selection

1PTRGF

BOOLEAN

Single phase Directional Ground Fault Overcurrent

Trip with phase selection

P3PTR

BOOLEAN

Prepare all tripping to be three-phase

SETLKOUT

BOOLEAN

Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function

RSTLKOUT

BOOLEAN

Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function

Table 463:
Name

SMPPTRC (94) Output signals

Type

Description

TRIP

BOOLEAN

General trip output signal

TR_A

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase A

TR_B

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase B

TR_C

BOOLEAN

Trip signal from phase C

TR1P

BOOLEAN

Tripping single-pole

TR2P

BOOLEAN

Tripping two-pole

TR3P

BOOLEAN

Tripping three-pole

CLLKOUT

BOOLEAN

Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)

816
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

14.1.5
Table 464:

Setting parameters
SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Disable/Enable Operation

Program

3 phase
1p/3p
1p/2p/3p

1p/3p

Three pole; single or three pole; single, two or

three pole trip

tTripMin

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Minimum duration of trip output signal

tWaitForPHS

0.020 - 0.500

0.001

0.050

Secures 3-pole trip when phase selection

failed

Table 465:

SMPPTRC (94) Group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

TripLockout

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

If TripLockout is set to On, it will activate

output (CLLKOUT) and trip latch. If set to Off
it will activate only CLLKOUT

AutoLock

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

If AutoLock is set to On i will activate lockout

from input (SETLKOUT) and trip, If set to Off
it will activate only from SETLKOUT

14.1.6

Technical data
Table 466:

SMPPTRC (94) technical data

Function

14.2

Range or value

Accuracy

Trip action

3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph

Minimum trip pulse length

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Timers

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO

Function description
Trip matrix logic

IEC 61850
identification
TMAGGIO

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

817
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic
14.2.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Introduction
Trip matrix logic TMAGGIO function is used to route trip signals and other logical
output signals to different output contacts on the IED.
TMAGGIO output signals and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the signals
to the physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.

14.2.2

Principle of operation
Trip matrix logic (TMAGGIO) block is provided with 32 input signals and 3 output
signals. The function block incorporates internal logic OR gates in order to provide the
necessary grouping of connected input signals (for example, for tripping and alarming
purposes) to the three output signals from the function block.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1.
2.
3.

when any one of first 16 inputs signals (INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical value 1
(TRUE) the first output signal (OUTPUT1) will get logical value 1 (TRUE).
when any one of second 16 inputs signals (INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 (TRUE) the second output signal (OUTPUT2) will get logical value 1
(TRUE).
when any one of all 32 input signals (INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value 1
(TRUE) the third output signal (OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1 (TRUE).

By use of the settings ModeOutput1, ModeOutput2, ModeOutput3, PulseTime,

OnDelay and OffDelay the behavior of each output can be customized. The OnDelay is
always active and will delay the input to output transition by the set time. The
ModeOutput for respective output decides whether the output shall be steady with an
drop-off delay as set by OffDelay or if it shall give a pulse with duration set by
PulseTime. Note that for pulsed operation since the inputs are connected in an ORfunction a new pulse will only be given on the output if all related inputs are reset and
then one is activated again. And for steady operation the OffDelay will start when all
related inputs have reset. Detailed logical diagram is shown in figure 409

818
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

PulseTime

AND

ModeOutput1

Input 1
0-OnDelay
0

OR

Input 16

0
0-OffDelay

AND

OR

Output 1

PulseTime

AND

ModeOutput2

Input 17
0-OnDelay
0

OR

Input 32

0
0-OffDelay

AND

OR

Output 2

PulseTime

AND

ModeOutput3

OR

0-OnDelay
0

0
0-OffDelay

AND

OR

Output 3

ANSI10000055-1-en.vsd
ANSI10000055 V2 EN

Figure 409:

Trip matrix internal logic

Output signals from TMAGGIO are typically connected to other logic blocks or
directly to output contacts in the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order to
obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

819
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic
14.2.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
TMAGGIO
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
INPUT17
INPUT18
INPUT19
INPUT20
INPUT21
INPUT22
INPUT23
INPUT24
INPUT25
INPUT26
INPUT27
INPUT28
INPUT29
INPUT30
INPUT31
INPUT32

OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3

IEC09000830-1-en.vsd

IEC09000830 V1 EN

Figure 410:

14.2.4

TMAGGIO function block

Input and output signals

Table 467:
Name

TMAGGIO Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary input 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Binary input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary input 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Binary input 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Binary input 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Binary input 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Binary input 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Binary input 13

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Binary input 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Binary input 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Binary input 16

INPUT17

BOOLEAN

Binary input 17

Table continues on next page

820
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Binary input 18

INPUT19

BOOLEAN

Binary input 19

INPUT20

BOOLEAN

Binary input 20

INPUT21

BOOLEAN

Binary input 21

INPUT22

BOOLEAN

Binary input 22

INPUT23

BOOLEAN

Binary input 23

INPUT24

BOOLEAN

Binary input 24

INPUT25

BOOLEAN

Binary input 25

INPUT26

BOOLEAN

Binary input 26

INPUT27

BOOLEAN

Binary input 27

INPUT28

BOOLEAN

Binary input 28

INPUT29

BOOLEAN

Binary input 29

INPUT30

BOOLEAN

Binary input 30

INPUT31

BOOLEAN

Binary input 31

INPUT32

BOOLEAN

Binary input 32

TMAGGIO Output signals

Name

Table 469:

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 468:

14.2.5

Default

INPUT18

Type

Description

OUTPUT1

BOOLEAN

OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16

OUTPUT2

BOOLEAN

OR function between inputs 17 to 32

OUTPUT3

BOOLEAN

OR function between inputs 1 to 32

Setting parameters
TMAGGIO Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Operation Disable / Enable

PulseTime

0.050 - 60.000

0.001

0.150

Output pulse time

OnDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Output on delay time

OffDelay

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.000

Output off delay time

ModeOutput1

Steady
Pulsed

Steady

Mode for output ,1 steady or pulsed

ModeOutput2

Steady
Pulsed

Steady

Mode for output 2, steady or pulsed

ModeOutput3

Steady
Pulsed

Steady

Mode for output 3, steady or pulsed

821
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

14.3

Configurable logic blocks

14.3.1

Introduction
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs.

OR function block.

INVERTER function blocks that inverts the input signal.

PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs, settable pulse time.

GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal should be able to pass
from the input to the output.

XOR function block.

LOOPDELAY function block used to delay the output signal one execution cycle.

TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay.

AND function block.

SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or reset an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it
was, after a power interruption.

RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or set an output from two
inputs respectively. Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block's output should reset or return to the state it
was, after a power interruption. RESET input has priority.

822
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

14.3.2

Inverter function block INV

INV
INPUT

OUT
IEC04000404_2_en.vsd

IEC04000404 V2 EN

Figure 411:

INV function block

Table 470:

INV Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

BOOLEAN

Table 471:

Description
Input

INV Output signals

Name

Type

OUT

14.3.3

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Output

OR function block OR
The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted.
OR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6

OUT
NOUT

IEC04000405_2_en.vsd
IEC04000405 V2 EN

Figure 412:

OR function block

Table 472:

OR Input signals

Name

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Input 1 to OR gate

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input 2 to OR gate

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Input 3 to OR gate

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Input 4 to OR gate

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Input 5 to OR gate

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Input 6 to OR gate

823
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 473:

OR Output signals

Name

14.3.4

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output from OR gate

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output from OR gate

AND function block AND

The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with boolean
variables. The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs
are inverted.
AND
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4N

OUT
NOUT

IEC04000406_2_en.vsd
IEC04000406 V2 EN

Figure 413:

AND function block

Table 474:

AND Input signals

Name

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

INPUT4N

BOOLEAN

Input 4 inverted

Table 475:
Name

14.3.5

Type

INPUT1

AND Output signals

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Output inverted

Timer function block TIMER

The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to the
input signal. The timer has a settable time delay (T).

824
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

TIMER
INPUT

ON
OFF
IEC04000378-3-en.vsd

IEC04000378 V2 EN

Figure 414:

TIMER function block

Table 476:

TIMER Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

BOOLEAN

Table 477:

TIMER Output signals

Name

Table 478:

Default
0

Type

Description
Input to timer

Description

ON

BOOLEAN

Output from timer , pickup delay

OFF

BOOLEAN

Output from timer, dropout delay

TIMER Non group settings (basic)

Name
T

14.3.6

Values (Range)

Unit

0.000 - 90000.000

Step

0.001

Default

Description

0.000

Time delay of function

Pulse timer function block PULSETIMER

The pulse (PULSETIMER) function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or
limiting of operation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.
PULSETIMER
INPUT
T

OUT

IEC04000407-2-en.vsd
IEC04000407 V2 EN

Figure 415:

PULSETIMER function block

Table 479:

PULSETIMER Input signals

Name
INPUT

Table 480:
Name
OUT

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Input to pulse timer

PULSETIMER Output signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Description
Output from pulse timer

825
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

Table 481:
Name
T

14.3.7

1MRK506312-UUS C

PULSETIMER Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

0.000 - 90000.000

Step

Default

0.001

Description

0.010

Time delay of function

Exclusive OR function block XOR

The exclusive OR function (XOR) is used to generate combinatory expressions with
boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same.
XOR
INPUT1
INPUT2

OUT
NOUT
IEC04000409-2-en.vsd

IEC04000409 V2 EN

Figure 416:

XOR function block

Table 482:

XOR Input signals

Name

Type

Description

BOOLEAN

Input 1 to XOR gate

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input 2 to XOR gate

Table 483:

XOR Output signals

Name

14.3.8

Default

INPUT1

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output from XOR gate

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output from XOR gate

Loop delay function block LOOPDELAY

The Logic loop delay function block (LOOPDELAY) function is used to delay the
output signal one execution cycle.
LOOPDELAY
INPUT

OUT
IEC09000296-1-en.vsd

IEC09000296 V1 EN

Figure 417:

LOOPDELAY function block

826
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 484:

LOOPDELAY Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

BOOLEAN

Table 485:

Description
Input signal

LOOPDELAY Output signals

Name

Type

OUT

14.3.9

Default

Description

BOOLEAN

Output signal, signal is delayed one execution cycle

Set-reset with memory function block SRMEMORY

The Set-reset with memory function block (SRMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can set or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each SRMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if
the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be
reset.
Table 486:
SET

Truth table for SRMEMORY function block

RESET

OUT

NOUT

Last
value

Inverted
last value

SRMEMORY
SET
OUT
RESET
NOUT
IEC04000408_2_en.vsd
IEC04000408 V2 EN

Figure 418:

SRMEMORY function block

Table 487:

SRMEMORY Input signals

Name

Type

Default

Description

SET

BOOLEAN

Input signal to set

RESET

BOOLEAN

Input signal to reset

827
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 488:

SRMEMORY Output signals

Name

Table 489:
Name
Memory

14.3.10

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output signal

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output signal

SRMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Disabled
Enabled

Step

Default

Description

Enabled

Operating mode of the memory function

Reset-set with memory function block RSMEMORY

The Reset-set with memory function block (RSMEMORY) is a flip-flop with memory
that can reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each RSMEMORY
function block has two outputs, where one is inverted. The memory setting controls if
the flip-flop after a power interruption will return the state it had before or if it will be
reset. For a Reset-Set flip-flop, RESET input has higher priority over SET input.
Table 490:

Truth table for RSMEMORY function block

RESET

SET

OUT

NOUT

Last
value

Inverted last
value

RSMEMORY
SET
RESET

OUT
NOUT
IEC09000294-1-en.vsd

IEC09000294 V1 EN

Figure 419:

RSMEMORY function block

Table 491:

RSMEMORY Input signals

Name

Type

Default

Description

SET

BOOLEAN

Input signal to set

RESET

BOOLEAN

Input signal to reset

828
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 492:

RSMEMORY Output signals

Name

Table 493:

Type

Description

OUT

BOOLEAN

Output signal

NOUT

BOOLEAN

Inverted output signal

RSMEMORY Group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Memory

Unit

Disabled
Enabled

14.3.11

Step
-

Default
Enabled

Description
Operating mode of the memory function

Controllable gate function block GATE

The Controllable gate function block (GATE) is used for controlling if a signal should
be able to pass from the input to the output or not depending on a setting.
GATE
INPUT

OUT
IEC04000410-2-en.vsd

IEC04000410 V2 EN

Figure 420:

GATE function block

Table 494:

GATE Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

Table 495:

Description
Input to gate

GATE Output signals

Name

Type

OUT

Table 496:

Default

BOOLEAN

Description

BOOLEAN

Output from gate

GATE Group settings (basic)

Name
Operation

Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled

829
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic
14.3.12

1MRK506312-UUS C

Settable timer function block TIMERSET

The Settable timer function block (TIMERSET) timer has outputs for delayed input
signal at drop-out and at pick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an
Operation setting /Enabled, /Disabled that controls the operation of the timer.
TIMERSET
INPUT

ON
OFF
IEC04000411-2-en.vsd

IEC04000411 V2 EN

Figure 421:

TIMERSET function block

Table 497:

TIMERSET Input signals

Name

Type

INPUT

Table 498:

Name

Description
Input to timer

TIMERSET Output signals

Name

Table 499:

Default

BOOLEAN

Type

Description

ON

BOOLEAN

Output from timer, pickup delay

OFF

BOOLEAN

Output from timer, dropout delay

TIMERSET Group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Disabled/Enabled

0.000 - 90000.000

0.001

0.000

Delay for settable timer n

14.3.13

Technical data
Table 500:
Logic block

Configurable logic blocks

Quantity with cycle time
fast
medium

normal

Range or value

Accuracy

LogicAND

60

60

160

LogicOR

60

60

160

LogicXOR

10

10

20

LogicInverter

30

30

80

LogicSRMemory

10

10

20

LogicRSMemory

10

10

20

Table continues on next page

830
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Logic block

14.4

Quantity with cycle time

fast
medium

Range or value

normal

Accuracy

LogicGate

10

10

20

LogicTimer

10

10

20

(0.000
90000.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

LogicPulseTimer

10

10

20

(0.000
90000.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

LogicTimerSet

10

10

20

(0.000
90000.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

LogicLoopDelay

10

10

20

(0.000
90000.000) s

0.5% 10 ms

Trip Matrix Logic

Boolean 16 to Integer

Boolean 16 to
integer with Logic
Node

Integer to Boolean 16

Integer to Boolean
16 with Logic Node

Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN

Function description
Fixed signals

IEC 61850
identification
FXDSIGN

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals
that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating certain logic.

14.4.1

Principle of operation
There are eight outputs from FXDSIGN function block:

OFF is a boolean signal, fixed to OFF (boolean 0) value

ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value
INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0
INTONE is an integer number, fixed to integer value 1
INTALONE is an integer value FFFF (hex)
REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixed to 0.0 value

831
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

14.4.2

STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value

ZEROSMPL is a channel index, fixed to 0 value
GRP_OFF is a group signal, fixed to 0 value

Function block
FXDSIGN
OFF
ON
INTZERO
INTONE
INTALONE
REALZERO
STRNULL
ZEROSMPL
GRP_OFF
IEC05000445-3-en.vsd
IEC05000445 V3 EN

Figure 422:

14.4.3

Input and output signals

Table 501:
Name

14.4.4

FXDSIGN function block

FXDSIGN Output signals

Type

Description

OFF

BOOLEAN

Boolean signal fixed off

ON

BOOLEAN

Boolean signal fixed on

INTZERO

INTEGER

Integer signal fixed zero

INTONE

INTEGER

Integer signal fixed one

INTALONE

INTEGER

Integer signal fixed all ones

REALZERO

REAL

Real signal fixed zero

STRNULL

STRING

String signal with no characters

ZEROSMPL

GROUP SIGNAL

Channel id for zero sample

GRP_OFF

GROUP SIGNAL

Group signal fixed off

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

832
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

14.5

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I

Function description

IEC 61850
identification

Boolean 16 to integer conversion

14.5.1

IEC 60617
identification

B16I

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) is used to transform a set of 16
binary (logical) signals into an integer.

14.5.2

Operation principle
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up
to 16 binary inputs INx where 1x16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value
according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx =
2x-1 where 1x16. The sum of all the values on the activated INx will be available on
the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is
an integer. When all INx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds
to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. B16I function is designed for
receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the output at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block B16I
Name of input

Type

Default

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

IN1

BOOLEAN

Input 1

IN2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

IN3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

IN4

BOOLEAN

Input 4

IN5

BOOLEAN

Input 5

16

IN6

BOOLEAN

Input 6

32

IN7

BOOLEAN

Input 7

64

IN8

BOOLEAN

Input 8

128

IN9

BOOLEAN

Input 9

256

IN10

BOOLEAN

Input 10

512

Table continues on next page

833
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name of input

Type

Default

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

IN11

BOOLEAN

Input 11

1024

IN12

BOOLEAN

Input 12

2048

IN13

BOOLEAN

Input 13

4096

IN14

BOOLEAN

Input 14

8192

IN15

BOOLEAN

Input 15

16384

IN16

BOOLEAN

Input 16

32768

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the B16I function block.

14.5.3

Function block
B16I
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

OUT

IEC07000128-2-en.vsd
IEC07000128 V2 EN

Figure 423:

14.5.4

B16I function block

Input and output signals

Table 502:
Name

B16I Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IN1

BOOLEAN

Input 1

IN2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

IN3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

IN4

BOOLEAN

Input 4

Table continues on next page

834
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Description

BOOLEAN

Input 5

IN6

BOOLEAN

Input 6

IN7

BOOLEAN

Input 7

IN8

BOOLEAN

Input 8

IN9

BOOLEAN

Input 9

IN10

BOOLEAN

Input 10

IN11

BOOLEAN

Input 11

IN12

BOOLEAN

Input 12

IN13

BOOLEAN

Input 13

IN14

BOOLEAN

Input 14

IN15

BOOLEAN

Input 15

IN16

BOOLEAN

Input 16

Table 503:

B16I Output signals

Name
OUT

14.5.5

Default

IN5

Type
INTEGER

Description
Output value

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

14.6

Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node

representation B16IFCVI
Function description
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with
logic node representation

14.6.1

IEC 61850
identification
B16IFCVI

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function (B16IFCVI)
is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer.
B16IFCVI can receive remote values via IEC 61850 depending on the operator
position input (PSTO).
835

Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic
14.6.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Operation principle
The Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic node representation function
(BTIGAPC) will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx where 1x16 to
an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768.
This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1x16. The sum of all the values
on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the values of all
the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx where 1x16 are
activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the
output OUT. The BTIGAPC function is designed for receiving the integer input from a
station computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If the BLOCK input is activated, it
will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block BTIGAPC.
Name of input

Type

Default

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

IN1

BOOLEAN

Input 1

IN2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

IN3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

IN4

BOOLEAN

Input 4

IN5

BOOLEAN

Input 5

16

IN6

BOOLEAN

Input 6

32

IN7

BOOLEAN

Input 7

64

IN8

BOOLEAN

Input 8

128

IN9

BOOLEAN

Input 9

256

IN10

BOOLEAN

Input 10

512

IN11

BOOLEAN

Input 11

1024

IN12

BOOLEAN

Input 12

2048

IN13

BOOLEAN

Input 13

4096

IN14

BOOLEAN

Input 14

8192

IN15

BOOLEAN

Input 15

16384

IN16

BOOLEAN

Input 16

32768

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all INx (where
1x16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be
converted to an integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

836
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

14.6.3

Function block
B16IFCVI
BLOCK
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16

OUT

IEC09000624-1-en.vsd
IEC09000624 V1 EN

Figure 424:

14.6.4

B16IFCVI function block

Input and output signals

Table 504:
Name

B16IFCVI Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IN1

BOOLEAN

Input 1

IN2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

IN3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

IN4

BOOLEAN

Input 4

IN5

BOOLEAN

Input 5

IN6

BOOLEAN

Input 6

IN7

BOOLEAN

Input 7

IN8

BOOLEAN

Input 8

IN9

BOOLEAN

Input 9

IN10

BOOLEAN

Input 10

IN11

BOOLEAN

Input 11

IN12

BOOLEAN

Input 12

IN13

BOOLEAN

Input 13

IN14

BOOLEAN

Input 14

IN15

BOOLEAN

Input 15

IN16

BOOLEAN

Input 16

837
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 505:

B16IFCVI Output signals

Name
OUT

14.6.5

Type

Description

INTEGER

Output value

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

14.7

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16

Function description
Integer to boolean 16 conversion

14.7.1

IEC 61850
identification
IB16

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals.

14.7.2

Operation principle
With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the table IB16_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1,
OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of
these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1x16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.
The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) will transfer an integer with a
value between 0 to 65535 connected to the input INP to a combination of activated
outputs OUTx where 1x16. The sum of the values of all OUTx will then be equal to
the integer on input INP. The values of the different OUTx are according to the table
below. When an OUTx is not activated, its value is 0.

838
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

When all OUTx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The IB16 function is designed for receiving
the integer input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical
outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block IB16.
Name of OUTx

Type

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Output 5

16

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Output 6

32

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Output 7

64

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Output 8

128

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Output 9

256

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Output 10

512

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Output 11

1024

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Output 12

2048

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Output 13

4096

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Output 14

8192

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Output 15

16384

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Output 16

32768

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where x =
1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be
converted by the IB16 function block.

839
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic
14.7.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
IB16
BLOCK
INP

OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
ANSI06000501-1-en.vsd

ANSI06000501 V1 EN

Figure 425:

14.7.4

IB16 function block

Input and output signals

Table 506:
Name

IB16 Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INP

INTEGER

INP

Table 507:
Name

IB16 Output signals

Type

Description

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Output 5

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Output 6

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Output 7

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Output 8

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Output 9

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Output 10

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Output 11

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Output 12

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Output 13

Table continues on next page

840
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

14.7.5

Type

Description

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Output 14

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Output 15

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Output 16

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

14.8

Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation IB16FCVB
Function description
Integer to boolean 16 conversion with
logic node representation

14.8.1

IEC 61850
identification
IB16FCVB

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation function (IB16FCVB) is
used to transform an integer to 16 binary (logic) signals.
IB16FCVB function can receive remote values over IEC61850 depending on the
operator position input (PSTO).

14.8.2

Operation principle
With integer 15 on the input INP the OUT1 = OUT2 = OUT3= OUT4 =1 and the
remaining OUTx = 0 for (5x16).
OUTx represents a value when activated. The value of each of the OUTx is in
accordance with the table ITBGAPC_1. When not activated the OUTx has the value 0.
In the above example when integer 15 is on the input INP the OUT1 has a value =1,
OUT2 has a value =2, OUT3 has a value =4 and OUT4 has a value =8. The sum of
these OUTx is equal to 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 = 15.
This follows the general formulae: The sum of the values of all OUTx = 2x-1 where
1x16 will be equal to the integer value on the input INP.

841
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function

(ITBGAPC) will transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 connected to the
input INP to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where 1x16. The sum of the
values of all OUTx will then be equal to the integer on input INP. The values of the
different OUTx are according to the table below. When an OUTx is not activated, its
value is 0.
When all OUTx where 1x16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that
integer 65535 is connected to input INP. The ITBGAPC function is designed for
receiving the integer input from a station computer - for example, over IEC 61850. If
the BLOCK input is activated, it will freeze the logical outputs at the last value.
Values of each of the different OUTx from function block ITBGAPC for 1x16.
The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output
OUT on the function block ITBGAPC.
Table 508:
Name of OUTx

Output signals
Type

Description

Value when
activated

Value when
deactivated

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Output 5

16

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Output 6

32

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Output 7

64

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Output 8

128

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Output 9

256

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Output 10

512

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Output 11

1024

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Output 12

2048

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Output 13

4096

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Output 14

8192

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Output 15

16384

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Output 16

32768

The sum of the numbers in column Value when activated when all OUTx (where x =
1 to 16) are active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest integer that can be
converted by the ITBGAPC function block.

842
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

The operator position input (PSTO) determines the operator place. The integer number
can be written to the block while in Remote. If PSTO is in Off or Local, then no
change is applied to the outputs.

14.8.3

Function block
IB16FCVB
BLOCK
PSTO

OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
OUT5
OUT6
OUT7
OUT8
OUT9
OUT10
OUT11
OUT12
OUT13
OUT14
OUT15
OUT16
IEC09000399-1-en.vsd

IEC09000399 V1 EN

Figure 426:

14.8.4

IB16FCVB function block

Input and output signals

Table 509:
Name

IB16FCVB Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

PSTO

INTEGER

Operator place selection

Table 510:
Name

IB16FCVB Output signals

Type

Description

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Output 5

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Output 6

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Output 7

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Output 8

Table continues on next page

843
Technical reference manual

Section 14
Logic

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

14.8.5

Type

Description

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Output 9

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Output 10

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Output 11

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Output 12

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Output 13

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Output 14

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Output 15

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Output 16

Setting parameters
This function does not have any setting parameters.

844
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 15

Monitoring

About this chapter

This chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events and
disturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,
input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

15.1

Measurements
Function description
Measurements

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

CVMMXN

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN

Phase current measurement

CMMXU

I
SYMBOL-SS V1 EN

Phase-phase voltage measurement

VMMXU

U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

Current sequence component

measurement

CMSQI

Voltage sequence measurement

VMSQI

I1, I2, I0
SYMBOL-VV V1 EN

U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN

Phase-neutral voltage measurement

VNMMXU

U
SYMBOL-UU V1 EN

845
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
15.1.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Introduction
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for
example, via IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of
active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital
for efficient production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides
to the system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally, it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and control
IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument transformers
(CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the measured value
from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of the IED analog
measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify proper direction
orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.
The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
that is, the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the
impact of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.
The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:

P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

PF: power factor
V: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude
I: phase current magnitude
F: power system frequency

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measuring functions CMMXU, VNMMXU and VMMXU provide physical
quantities:

I: phase currents (magnitude and angle) (CMMXU)

V: voltages (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage, magnitude and angle)
(VMMXU, VNMMXU)

846
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and magnitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware,
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.
The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:

I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)

V: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and angle).

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current respectively voltage signals.
The measured power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated
quantities or, averaged values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on
the selected settings.

15.1.2

Principle of operation

15.1.2.1

Measurement supervision
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and further
process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks.
The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends on the type of IED
and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

Locally by means of the local HMI

Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM600 or over the station bus
Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report function

Phase angle reference

All phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. The General
setting parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".

Zero point clamping

Measured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the
noise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a general
setting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, V, I, F, IA, IB, IC, VA, VB, VC, VAB,
VBC, VCA, I1, I2, 3I0, V1, V2 or 3V0). Observe that this measurement supervision

847
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

zero point clamping might be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the
measurement values within CVMMXU.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantity

Users can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each function block
by means of four defined operating thresholds, see figure 427. The monitoring has two
different modes of operating:

Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or Highhigh limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 427.

Y
X_RANGE = 3

High-high limit

X_RANGE= 1

Hysteresis

High limit
X_RANGE=0

X_RANGE=0
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4

en05000657.vsd
IEC05000657 V1 EN

Figure 427:

Presentation of operating limits

Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded, 3: Highhigh limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The output may
be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to get
measurement supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 427.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between
the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one channel.

848
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Actual value of the measured quantity

The actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. The
measurement is continuous for each measured quantity separately, but the reporting of
the value to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The following
basic reporting modes are available:

Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)

Magnitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)
Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reporting

The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting

(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of magnitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
In addition to the normal cyclic reporting the IED also report spontaneously when
measured value passes any of the defined threshold limits.
Y
Value Reported
(1st)

Value Reported

Value Reported

Value Reported

Value Reported

Y3
Y2

Y4

Y1

Y5

(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

t (*)

Value 5

Value 4

t (*)

Value 3

t (*)

Value 2

Value 1

t (*)

en05000500.vsd

IEC05000500 V1 EN

Figure 428:

Periodic reporting

849
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Magnitude dead-band supervision

If a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the change is
larger than the Y pre-defined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then the
measuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a new
measured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary. Figure 429
shows an example with the magnitude dead-band supervision. The picture is
simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a time
interval of one execution cycle from each other.
Value Reported

Y
Value Reported
(1st)

Value Reported
Y3
Y2

Y1

Value Reported
DY
DY

DY
DY

DY
DY

t
99000529.vsd

IEC99000529 V1 EN

Figure 429:

Magnitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the Y limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than
defined by the Y set limits.

Integral dead-band reporting

The measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-set
limit (XDbRepInt), figure 430, where an example of reporting with integral dead-band
supervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but the
values are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 430 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
850
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.
This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following
measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
A1 >=
pre-set value

Y
A >=
pre-set value

A2 >=
pre-set value
Y3

Y2
Value Reported
(1st)

A1

Value
Reported

A2
Value
Reported

Y1

Y4
Value
Reported

A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
A4
A3

A5

A6

A7

Y5
Value
Reported
t
99000530.vsd

IEC99000530 V1 EN

Figure 430:

Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

15.1.2.2

Measurements CVMMXN
Mode of operation

The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase

voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure and
calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the available
VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a parameter setting,
which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used within the function.
Available options are summarized in the following table:

851
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter

phase power calculation
Mode
1

A, B, C

S = VA I A* + VB I B* + VC I C*
EQUATION1561 V1 EN

Formula used for voltage and

current magnitude calculation

(
I =( I

V = VA + VB + VC
+ IB + IC

)/
)/3

Comment

Used when three

phase-to-ground
voltages are
available

EQUATION1562 V1 EN

Arone

S = VAB I A - VBC I C
*

(Equation 157)

EQUATION1563 V1 EN

(
I =( I

V = VAB + VBC / 2
A

EQUATION1564 V1 EN

PosSeq

V =

S = 3 VPosSeq I PosSeq
*

(Equation 159)

EQUATION1565 V1 EN

AB

S = VAB I A - I B
*

(Equation 161)

EQUATION1567 V1 EN

BC

S = VBC I B - I C
*

(Equation 163)

EQUATION1569 V1 EN

CA

S = VCA I C - I A
EQUATION1571 V1 EN

(Equation 165)

S = 3 VA I A
*

EQUATION1573 V1 EN

(Equation 167)

Used when only

VAB phase-tophase voltage is
available

I = IA + IB / 2
(Equation 162)

Used when only

VBC phase-tophase voltage is
available

V = VBC

I = I B + IC / 2
(Equation 164)

Used when only

VCA phase-tophase voltage is
available

V = VCA

I = IC + I A / 2
EQUATION1572 V1 EN

(Equation 160)

V = VAB

EQUATION1570 V1 EN

Used when only

symmetrical three
phase power shall
be measured

I = I PosSeq

EQUATION1568 V1 EN

(Equation 158)

3 VPosSeq

EQUATION1566 V1 EN

+ IC / 2

V =

(Equation 166)
Used when only
VA phase-toground voltage is
available

3 VA

I = IA
EQUATION1574 V1 EN

Used when three

two phase-tophase voltages
are available

(Equation 168)

Table continues on next page

852
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Set value for Formula used for complex, threeparameter

phase power calculation
Mode
8

S = 3 VB I B
*

EQUATION1575 V1 EN

(Equation 169)

Formula used for voltage and

current magnitude calculation

V =

3 VB

I = IB
EQUATION1576 V1 EN

S = 3 VC I C
*

EQUATION1577 V1 EN

(Equation 171)

V =

Used when only

VB phase-toground voltage is
available

(Equation 170)

3 VC

I = IC
EQUATION1578 V1 EN

Comment

Used when only

VC phase-toground voltage is
available

(Equation 172)

* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes that is, 1 & 2 the
measurement function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes
that is, from 3 to 9 it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power
system is fully symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P,
Q, S, & PF are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 173)

EQUATION1403 V1 EN

Q = Im( S )
(Equation 174)

EQUATION1404 V1 EN

S = S =

P +Q
2

EQUATION1405 V1 EN

(Equation 175)

PF = cosj = P
S
EQUATION1406 V1 EN

(Equation 176)

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function
are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage
phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging behind
voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor is
leading the voltage phasor.
853
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

Calibration of analog inputs

Measured currents and voltages used in the CVMMXN function can be calibrated to
get class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by magnitude and angle
compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below
5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 431.
% of In

Magnitude
compensation

+10
IMagComp5

Measured
current

IMagComp30
IMagComp100

30

% of In

0-5%:
Constant
5-30-100%: Linear
>100%:
Constant

-10

Degrees

100

Angle
compensation

+10
Measured
current

IAngComp30
IAngComp5
IAngComp100

30

100

% of In

-10

ANSI05000652_3_en.vsd
ANSI05000652 V3 EN

Figure 431:

Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the magnitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filtering

In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, V, I
and power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in

854
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the following

recursive formula:
X = k X Old + (1 - k ) X Calculated
(Equation 177)

EQUATION1407 V1 EN

where:
X

is a new measured value (that is P, Q, S, V, I or PF) to be given out from the function

XOld

is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k

is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (that is, without any additional delay).
When k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k
shall be determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clamping

In order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is not
present, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitudeIGenZeroDb level for current
and voltage measurement VGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either current or
voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power (P,
Q and S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurement
supervision functionality, included in CVMMXN, is using these values the zero
clamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zero
point clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurement
supervision").

Compensation facility

In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors and so on.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved by
setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to
multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude
(setting parameter PowMagFact, default value 1.000) and angle (setting parameter
PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two parameters are
done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value (complex
constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific operating range (for
example, around rated power) can be done at site. However, to perform this calibration
it is necessary to have an external power meter with high accuracy class available.

855
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Directionality

If CT grounding parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and

reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown in
the following figure 432.

Busbar

52

IED
Q

Protected
Object
ANSI05000373_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000373 V2 EN

Figure 432:

Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

Practically, it means that active and reactive power will have positive values when they
flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, for example, when power is measured on the secondary side of the
power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to have
actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power measurements.
This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to value of 180.0
degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have positive values
when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

Frequency

Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained

from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block as
an output.

15.1.2.3

Phase current measurement CMMXU

The Phase current measurement (CMMXU) function must be connected to three-phase
current input in the configuration tool to be operable. Currents handled in the function
can be calibrated to get better then class 0.5 measuring accuracy for internal use, on the

856
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

outputs and IEC 61850. This is achieved by magnitude and angle compensation at 5,
30 and 100% of rated current. The compensation below 5% and above 100% is
constant and linear in between, see figure 431.
Phase currents (magnitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each magnitude
output has a corresponding supervision level output (Ix_RANGE). The supervision
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

15.1.2.4

Phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage measurements VMMXU,

VNMMXU
The voltage function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the
configuration tool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents
when it comes to class 0.5 calibrations, see above.
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, magnitude and angle) are available on the
outputs and each magnitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(Vxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".

15.1.2.5

Voltage and current sequence measurements VMSQI, CMSQI

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CMSQI) or
voltage (VMSQI) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, other than
X_RANG, are calculated within the measuring blocks and it is not possible to calibrate
the signals. Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred to
corresponding output.
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the outputs
(voltage and current, magnitude and angle). Each magnitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer in
the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

15.1.3

Function block
The available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

857
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

CVMMXN
I3P*
U3P*

S
S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
IEC10000016-1-en.vsd

IEC10000016 V1 EN

Figure 433:

CVMMXN function block

CMMXU
I3P*

I_A
IA_RANGE
IA_ANGL
I_B
IB_RANGE
IB_ANGL
I_C
IC_RANGE
IC_ANGL
ANSI05000699-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000699 V2 EN

Figure 434:

CMMXU function block

VNMMXU
V3P*

V_A
VA_RANGE
VA_ANGL
V_B
VB_RANGE
VB_ANGL
V_C
VC_RANGE
VC_ANGL
ANSI09000850-1-en.vsd

ANSI09000850 V1 EN

Figure 435:

VNMMXU function block

858
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

VMMXU
V3P*

V_AB
VAB_RANG
VAB_ANGL
V_BC
VBC_RANG
VBC_ANGL
V_CA
VCA_RANG
VCA_ANGL
ANSI05000701-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000701 V2 EN

Figure 436:

VMMXU function block

CMSQI
I3P*

3I0
3I0RANG
3I0ANGL
I1
I1RANG
I1ANGL
I2
I2RANG
I2ANGL
IEC05000703-2-en.vsd

IEC05000703 V2 EN

Figure 437:

CMSQI function block

VMSQI
V3P*

3V0
3V0RANG
3V0ANGL
V1
V1RANG
V1ANGL
V2
V2RANG
V2ANGL
ANSI05000704-2-en.vsd

ANSI05000704 V2 EN

Figure 438:

15.1.4

VMSQI function block

Input and output signals

Table 511:
Name

CVMMXN Input signals

Type

Default

Description

I3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for current input

V3P

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for voltage input

859
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 512:
Name

CVMMXN Output signals

Type

Description

REAL

Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value

S_RANGE

INTEGER

Apparent Power range

P_INST

REAL

Active Power

REAL

Active Power magnitude of deadband value

P_RANGE

INTEGER

Active Power range

Q_INST

REAL

Reactive Power

REAL

Reactive Power magnitude of deadband value

Q_RANGE

INTEGER

Reactive Power range

PF

REAL

Power Factor magnitude of deadband value

PF_RANGE

INTEGER

Power Factor range

ILAG

BOOLEAN

Current is lagging voltage

ILEAD

BOOLEAN

Current is leading voltage

REAL

Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value

V_RANGE

INTEGER

Calcuate voltage range

REAL

Calculated current magnitude of deadband value

I_RANGE

INTEGER

Calculated current range

REAL

System frequency magnitude of deadband value

F_RANGE

INTEGER

System frequency range

Table 513:
Name
I3P

Table 514:
Name

CMMXU Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Default
-

Description
Group connection abstract block 1

CMMXU Output signals

Type

Description

I_A

REAL

Phase A current magnitude of reported value

IA_RANGE

INTEGER

Phase A current magnitude range

IA_ANGL

REAL

Phase A current magnitude angle

I_B

REAL

Phase B current magnitude of reported value

IB_RANGE

INTEGER

Phase B current magnitude range

IB_ANGL

REAL

Phase B current magnitude angle

I_C

REAL

Phase C current magnitude of reported value

IC_RANGE

INTEGER

Phase C current magnitude range

IC_ANGL

REAL

Phase C current magnitude angle

860
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 515:
Name
V3P

Table 516:
Name

VNMMXU Input signals

Type

Default

GROUP
SIGNAL

Description
Group connection abstract block 5

VNMMXU Output signals

Type

Description

V_A

REAL

V_A Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

VA_RANGE

INTEGER

V_A Amplitude range

VA_ANGL

REAL

V_A Angle, magnitude of reported value

V_B

REAL

V_B Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

VB_RANGE

INTEGER

V_B Amplitude range

VB_ANGL

REAL

V_B Angle, magnitude of reported value

V_C

REAL

V_C Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

VC_RANGE

INTEGER

V_C Amplitude range

VC_ANGL

REAL

V_C Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 517:
Name
V3P

Table 518:
Name

VMMXU Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Default
-

Description
Group connection abstract block 2

VMMXU Output signals

Type

Description

V_AB

REAL

VAB Reported magnitude value

VAB_RANG

INTEGER

VAB Magnitude range

VAB_ANGL

REAL

VAB Angle, magnitude of reported value

V_BC

REAL

VBC Reported magnitude value

VBC_RANG

INTEGER

VBC Magnitude range

VBC_ANGL

REAL

VBC Angle, magnitude of reported value

V_CA

REAL

VCA Reported magnitude value

VCA_RANG

INTEGER

VCA Magnitude range

VCA_ANGL

REAL

VCA Angle, magnitude of reported value

861
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 519:
Name
I3P

Table 520:
Name

CMSQI Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Default
-

Description
Group connection abstract block 3

CMSQI Output signals

Type

Description

3I0

REAL

3I0 magnitude of reported value

3I0RANG

INTEGER

3I0 Magnitude range

3I0ANGL

REAL

3I0 Angle, magnitude of reported value

I1

REAL

I1magnitude of reported value

I1RANG

INTEGER

I1 Magnitude range

I1ANGL

REAL

I1 Angle, magnitude of reported value

I2

REAL

I2 Magnitude of reported value

I2RANG

INTEGER

I2 Magnitude range

I2ANGL

REAL

I2 Angle, magnitude of reported value

Table 521:
Name
V3P

Table 522:
Name

VMSQI Input signals

Type
GROUP
SIGNAL

Default
-

Description
Group connection abstract block 4

VMSQI Output signals

Type

Description

3V0

REAL

3V0 Reported magnitude value

3V0RANG

INTEGER

3V0 Magnitude range

3V0ANGL

REAL

3V0 Magnitude angle

V1

REAL

V1 Reported magnitude value

V1RANG

INTEGER

V1 Magnitude range

V1ANGL

REAL

V1 Magnitude angle

V2

REAL

V2 Reported magnitude value

V2RANG

INTEGER

V2 Magnitude range

V2ANGL

REAL

V2 Magnitude angle

862
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

15.1.5

Setting parameters
The available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) are
depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

Table 523:

CVMMXN Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SLowLim

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of SBase

SLowLowLim

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of SBase

SMin

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of SBase

SMax

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of SBase

SRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

PMin

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-200.0

Minimum value in % of SBase

PMax

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of SBase

PRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

QMin

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-200.0

Minimum value in % of SBase

QMax

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of SBase

QRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

PFMin

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

-1.000

Minimum value

PFMax

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

Maximum value

PFRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

VMin

0.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of UBase

VMax

0.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of UBase

VRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

IMin

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

50.0

Minimum value in % of IBase

IMax

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

200.0

Maximum value in % of IBase

IRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

FrMin

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

FrMax

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

70.000

Maximum value

Table continues on next page

863
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FrRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current values in A

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage value in kV

SBase

0.05 - 200000.00

MVA

0.05

2080.00

Base setting for power values in MVA

Mode

A, B, C
Arone
Pos Seq
AB
BC
CA
A
B
C

A, B, C

Selection of measured current and voltage

PowMagFact

0.000 - 6.000

0.001

1.000

Magnitude factor to scale power calculations

PowAngComp

-180.0 - 180.0

Deg

0.1

0.0

Angle compensation for phase shift between

measured I & V

0.000 - 1.000

0.001

0.000

Low pass filter coefficient for power

measurement, V and I

Table 524:
Name

CVMMXN Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

SZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

SHiHiLim

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of SBase

SHiLim

0.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of SBase

SLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for

all limits)

PDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

PZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

PHiHiLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of SBase

PHiLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of SBase

PLowLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-120.0

Low limit in % of SBase

PLowLowLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-150.0

Low Low limit in % of SBase

PLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for

all limits)

QDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Table continues on next page

864
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

QZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

QHiHiLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of SBase

QHiLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of SBase

QLowLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-120.0

Low limit in % of SBase

QLowLowLim

-2000.0 - 2000.0

%SB

0.1

-150.0

Low Low limit in % of SBase

QLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for

all limits)

PFDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

PFZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

PFHiHiLim

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

1.000

High High limit (physical value)

PFHiLim

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

0.800

High limit (physical value)

PFLowLim

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

-0.800

Low limit (physical value)

PFLowLowLim

-1.000 - 1.000

0.001

-1.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

PFLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for

all limits)

VDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

VZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

VHiHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of UBase

VHiLim

0.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of UBase

VLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of UBase

VLowLowLim

0.0 - 200.0

%VB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of UBase

VLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for

all limits)

IDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

IZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

IHiHiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

150.0

High High limit in % of IBase

IHiLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

120.0

High limit in % of IBase

ILowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

80.0

Low limit in % of IBase

ILowLowLim

0.0 - 500.0

%IB

0.1

60.0

Low Low limit in % of IBase

ILimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for

all limits)

FrDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

FrZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

FrHiHiLim

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

65.000

High High limit (physical value)

FrHiLim

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

63.000

High limit (physical value)

Table continues on next page

865
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FrLowLim

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

47.000

Low limit (physical value)

FrLowLowLim

0.000 - 100.000

Hz

0.001

45.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

FrLimHyst

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for

all limits)

VGenZeroDb

1 - 100

%VB

Zero point clamping in % of VBase

IGenZeroDb

1 - 100

%IB

Zero point clamping in % of IBase

VMagComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 5% of

Vn

VMagComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 30%

of Vn

VMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100%

of Vn

IMagComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of

In

IMagComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30%

of In

IMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100%

of In

IAngComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 5% of In

IAngComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 30% of In

IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

Table 525:
Name

CMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IA_DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disbled/Enabled operation

IBase

1 - 99999

3000

Base setting for current level in A

IA_Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

IA_RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

IA_AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

IB_DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

IB_Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

Table continues on next page

866
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IB_RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

IB_AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

IC_DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

IC_Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

IC_RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

IC_AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Table 526:

CMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IA_ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

IA_HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

900.000

High High limit (physical value)

IA_HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

800.000

High limit (physical value)

IMagComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 5% of

In

IMagComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 30%

of In

IA_LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low limit (physical value)

IA_LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

IMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate current at 100%

of In

IAngComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 5% of In

IA_Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

IAngComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 30% of In

IAngComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

Deg

0.001

0.000

Angle calibration for current at 100% of In

IA_LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

IB_ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

IB_HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

900.000

High High limit (physical value)

Table continues on next page

867
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IB_HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

800.000

High limit (physical value)

IB_LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low limit (physical value)

IB_LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

IB_Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

IB_LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

IC_ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

IC_HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

900.000

High High limit (physical value)

IC_HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

800.000

High limit (physical value)

IC_LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low limit (physical value)

IC_LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

IC_Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

IC_LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

Table 527:
Name

VNMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

VA_DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disbled/Enabled operation

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level in kV

VA_Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

300000.000

Maximum value

VA_RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

VA_LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

VA_AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

VB_DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Table continues on next page

868
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

VB_Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

300000.000

Maximum value

VB_RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

VB_LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

VB_AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

VC_DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

VC_Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

300000.000

Maximum value

VC_RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

VC_LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

VC_AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Table 528:

VNMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

VA_ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

VA_HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

260000.000

High High limit (physical value)

VA_HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

240000.000

High limit (physical value)

VA_LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

220000.000

Low limit (physical value)

VA_LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

200000.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

VMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100%

of Vn

VA_Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

VB_ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

VB_HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

260000.000

High High limit (physical value)

VB_HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

240000.000

High limit (physical value)

VB_LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

220000.000

Low limit (physical value)

Table continues on next page

869
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

VB_LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

200000.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

VB_Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

VC_ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

VC_HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

260000.000

High High limit (physical value)

VC_HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

240000.000

High limit (physical value)

VC_LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

220000.000

Low limit (physical value)

VC_LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

200000.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

VC_Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

Table 529:

VMMXU Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

VAB_DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disbled/Enabled operation

VBase

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Base setting for voltage level in kV

VAB_Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

500000.000

Maximum value

VAB_RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

VAB_AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

VBC_DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

VBC_Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

500000.000

Maximum value

VBC_RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

VBC_AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

VCA_DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Table continues on next page

870
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

VCA_Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

500000.000

Maximum value

VCA_RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

VCA_AnDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Table 530:

VMMXU Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

VAB_ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

VAB_HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

450000.000

High High limit (physical value)

VAB_HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

420000.000

High limit (physical value)

VAB_LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

380000.000

Low limit (physical value)

VAB_LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

350000.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

VMagComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Magnitude factor to calibrate voltage at 100%

of Vn

VAB_Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

VAB_LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

VBC_ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

VBC_HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

450000.000

High High limit (physical value)

VBC_HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

420000.000

High limit (physical value)

VBC_LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

380000.000

Low limit (physical value)

VBC_LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

350000.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

VBC_Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

VBC_LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

VCA_ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

VCA_HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

450000.000

High High limit (physical value)

VCA_HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

420000.000

High limit (physical value)

Table continues on next page

871
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

VCA_LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

380000.000

Low limit (physical value)

VCA_LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

350000.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

VCA_Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

VCA_LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

Table 531:
Name

CMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

3I0DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

3I0Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

3I0Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

3I0RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

3I0LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

3I0AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disbled/Enabled operation

3I0AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

3I0AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

3I0AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

I1DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

I1Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

I1Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

I1RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

I1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

I1AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

Table continues on next page

872
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

I1AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

I2DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

I2Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

I2Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

1000.000

Maximum value

I2RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

I2LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

I2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

I2AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

I2AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

Table 532:

CMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

3I0ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

3I0HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

900.000

High High limit (physical value)

3I0HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

800.000

High limit (physical value)

3I0LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low limit (physical value)

3I0LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

3I0AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

I1ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

I1HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

900.000

High High limit (physical value)

I1HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

800.000

High limit (physical value)

I1LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low limit (physical value)

I1LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

Table continues on next page

873
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

I1LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

I1AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

I1AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

I2ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

I2HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

900.000

High High limit (physical value)

I2HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

800.000

High limit (physical value)

I2LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low limit (physical value)

I2LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

I2AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

I2AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

Table 533:
Name

VMSQI Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

3V0DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

3V0Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

3V0Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

300000.000

Maximum value

3V0RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

3V0LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

3V0AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disbled/Enabled operation

3V0AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

3V0AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

3V0AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

3V0AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

V1DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

Table continues on next page

874
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

V1Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

V1Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

300000.000

Maximum value

V1RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

V1LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

V1AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

V2DbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

V2Min

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum value

V2Max

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

300000.000

Maximum value

V2RepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

V2LimHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range and is

common for all limits

V2AngDbRepInt

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

V2AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

V2AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

V2AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

UAmpPreComp5

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at

5% of Ir

UAmpPreComp30

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at

30% of Ir

UAmpPreComp100

-10.000 - 10.000

0.001

0.000

Amplitude factor to pre-calibrate voltage at

100% of Ir

Table 534:

VMSQI Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

3V0ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

3V0HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

260000.000

High High limit (physical value)

3V0HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

240000.000

High limit (physical value)

Table continues on next page

875
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

3V0LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

220000.000

Low limit (physical value)

3V0LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

200000.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

V1ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

V1HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

260000.000

High High limit (physical value)

V1HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

240000.000

High limit (physical value)

V1LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

220000.000

Low limit (physical value)

V1LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

200000.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

V1AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

V1AngMin

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

-180.000

Minimum value

V1AngMax

-180.000 - 180.000

Deg

0.001

180.000

Maximum value

V1AngRepTyp

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Cyclic

Reporting type

V2ZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

V2HiHiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

260000.000

High High limit (physical value)

V2HiLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

240000.000

High limit (physical value)

V2LowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

220000.000

Low limit (physical value)

V2LowLowLim

0.000 10000000000.000

0.001

200000.000

Low Low limit (physical value)

V2AngZeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

15.1.6

Technical data
Table 535:

CVMMXN technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Frequency

(0.95-1.05) fn

2.0 mHz

Voltage

(0.1-1.5) Vn

0.5% of Vn at VVn
0.5% of V at V > Vn

Connected current

(0.2-4.0) In

0.5% of In at I In
0.5% of I at I > In

Table continues on next page

876
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function

Range or value

Active power, P

0.1 x Vn< V < 1.5 x Vn

0.2 x In < I < 4.0 x In

Reactive power, Q

0.1 x Vn< V < 1.5 x Vn

0.2 x In < I < 4.0 x In

Apparent power, S

0.1 x Vn < V < 1.5 x Vn

0.2 x In< I < 4.0 x In

Power factor, cos ()

0.1 x Vn < V < 1.5 x Vn

0.2 x In< I < 4.0 x In

Table 536:

Accuracy
1.0% of Sn at S Sn
1.0% of S at S > Sn
Conditions:
0.8 x Vn < V < 1.2 Vn
0.2 x In < I < 1.2 In

0.02

CMMXU technical data

Function

Range or value

Current

(0.1-4.0) In

0.2% of In at I 0.5 In
0.2% of I at I > 0.5 In

Phase angle

(0.14.0) x In

0.5 at 0.2 In < I < 0.5 In

0.2 at 0.5 In I < 4.0 In

Table 537:

Accuracy

VMMXU technical data

Function

Range or value

Voltage

(10 to 300) V

0.3% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V

Phase angle

(10 to 300) V

0.3 at V 50 V
0.2 at V > 50 V

Table 538:

Accuracy

VNMMXU technical data

Function

Range or value

Voltage

(10 to 300) V

0.3% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V

Phase angle

(10 to 300) V

0.3 at V 50 V
0.2 at V > 50 V

Accuracy

877
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 539:

CMSQI technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Current positive sequence, I1

Three phase settings

(0.14.0) In

0.2% of In at I 0.5 In
0.2% of I at I > 0.5 In

Current zero sequence, 3I0

Three phase settings

(0.11.0) In

0.2% of In at I 0.5 In
0.2% of I at I > 0.5 In

Current negative sequence, I2

Three phase settings

(0.11.0) In

0.2% of In at I 0.5 In
0.2% of I at I > 0.5 In

Phase angle

(0.14.0) In

0.5 at 0.2 In < I < 0.5 In

0.2 at 0.5 In I < 4.0 In

Table 540:

VMSQI technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Voltage positive sequence, U1

(10 to 300) V

0.3% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V

Voltage zero sequence, 3U0

(10 to 300) V

0.3% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V

Voltage negative sequence, U2

(10 to 300) V

0.3% of V at V 50 V
0.2% of V at V > 50 V

Phase angle

(10 to 300) V

0.3 at V 50 V
0.2 at V > 50 V

15.2

Event counter CNTGGIO

15.2.1

Identification
Function description
Event counter

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

CNTGGIO

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

S00946 V1 EN

15.2.2

Introduction
Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counters which are used for storing the number of
times each counter input has been activated.

878
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

15.2.3

Principle of operation
Event counter (CNTGGIO) has six counter inputs. CNTGGIO stores how many times
each of the inputs has been activated. The counter memory for each of the six inputs is
updated, giving the total number of times the input has been activated, as soon as an
input is activated.
To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism
for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This
however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a new
value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored before
auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. CNTGGIO stored values in flash memory
will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked. The input can for example, be used for blocking the counters at
testing.The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six
counters are set to 0.
All inputs are configured via PCM600.

15.2.3.1

Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI.
Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input.
Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from a IEC 61850
client. The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI
graphical display.

15.2.3.2

Design
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six
counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each
positive edge of the input respectively.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked and are not updated. Valid number is held.
The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters are
set to 0.

879
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
15.2.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
CNTGGIO
BLOCK
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
RESET

VALUE1
VALUE2
VALUE3
VALUE4
VALUE5
VALUE6

IEC05000345-2-en.vsd
IEC05000345 V2 EN

Figure 439:

15.2.5

CNTGGIO function block

Input signals
Table 541:
Name

CNTGGIO Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

COUNTER1

BOOLEAN

Input for counter1

COUNTER2

BOOLEAN

Input for counter2

COUNTER3

BOOLEAN

Input for counter3

COUNTER4

BOOLEAN

Input for counter4

COUNTER5

BOOLEAN

Input for counter5

COUNTER6

BOOLEAN

Input for counter6

RESET

BOOLEAN

Reset of function

Table 542:
Name

CNTGGIO Output signals

Type

Description

VALUE1

INTEGER

Output of counter1

VALUE2

INTEGER

Output of counter2

VALUE3

INTEGER

Output of counter3

VALUE4

INTEGER

Output of counter4

VALUE5

INTEGER

Output of counter5

VALUE6

INTEGER

Output of counter6

880
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

15.2.6
Table 543:

Setting parameters
CNTGGIO Group settings (basic)

Name
Operation

15.2.7

Values (Range)

Unit

Disabled
Enabled

Step

Disabled

Description
Disable/Enable Operation

Technical data
Table 544:

CNTGGIO technical data

Function

15.3

Default

Range or value

Accuracy

Counter value

0-100000

Max. count up speed

10 pulses/s (50% duty cycle)

Event function EVENT

Function description
Event function

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

EVENT

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

S00946 V1 EN

15.3.1

Introduction
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, timetagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level.
These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the
Event function (EVENT). The event function block is used for remote communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through EVENT function.

15.3.2

Principle of operation
The main purpose of the event function (EVENT) is to generate events when the state
or value of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a state
transition, for which event generation is enabled.
Each EVENT function has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given a
name from the Application Configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create
single events, but are also intended for double indication events.
881

Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

EVENT function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals
and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module.
The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have a
resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of EVENT function. The timetagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a resolution of
1 ms.
The outputs from EVENT function are formed by the reading of status, events and
alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each input
is intended to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The EventMask can be set
individually for each input channel. These settings are available:

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of EVENT function generates the events. This can be
performed individually for the SPAChannelMask and LONChannelMask respectively.
For each communication type these settings are available:

Disabled
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16

For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is
possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input
channel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate
the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is
implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted
quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be removed

882
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the maximum
burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel is 45 events per second.

15.3.3

Function block
EVENT
BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16
IEC05000697-2-en.vsd
IEC05000697 V2 EN

Figure 440:

15.3.4

EVENT function block

Input and output signals

Table 545:
Name

EVENT Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INPUT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 1

INPUT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 2

INPUT3

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 3

INPUT4

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 4

INPUT5

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 5

INPUT6

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 6

INPUT7

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 7

INPUT8

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 8

INPUT9

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 9

Table continues on next page

883
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

15.3.5
Table 546:

Type

Default

Description

INPUT10

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 10

INPUT11

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 11

INPUT12

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 12

INPUT13

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 13

INPUT14

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 14

INPUT15

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 15

INPUT16

GROUP
SIGNAL

Input 16

Setting parameters
EVENT Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SPAChannelMask

Disabled
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16

Disabled

SPA channel mask

LONChannelMask

Disabled
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16

Disabled

LON channel mask

EventMask1

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 1

EventMask2

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 2

EventMask3

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 3

EventMask4

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 4

Table continues on next page

884
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

EventMask5

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 5

EventMask6

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 6

EventMask7

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 7

EventMask8

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 8

EventMask9

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 9

EventMask10

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 10

EventMask11

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 11

EventMask12

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 12

EventMask13

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 13

EventMask14

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 14

Table continues on next page

885
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

EventMask15

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 15

EventMask16

NoEvents
OnSet
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect

AutoDetect

Reporting criteria for input 16

MinRepIntVal1

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 1

MinRepIntVal2

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 2

MinRepIntVal3

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 3

MinRepIntVal4

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 4

MinRepIntVal5

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 5

MinRepIntVal6

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 6

MinRepIntVal7

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 7

MinRepIntVal8

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 8

MinRepIntVal9

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 9

MinRepIntVal10

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 10

MinRepIntVal11

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 11

MinRepIntVal12

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 12

MinRepIntVal13

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 13

MinRepIntVal14

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 14

MinRepIntVal15

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 15

MinRepIntVal16

0 - 3600

Minimum reporting interval input 16

15.4

Logical signal status report BINSTATREP

Function description
Logical signal status report

15.4.1

IEC 61850
identification
BINSTATREP

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible for a SPA
master to poll signals from various other functions.

886
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

15.4.2

Principle of operation
The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function has 16 inputs and 16
outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be read from the local HMI or via
SPA communication.
When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input
signal remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal
resets.

INPUTn
OUTPUTn
t

t
IEC09000732-1-en.vsd

IEC09000732 V1 EN

Figure 441:

15.4.3

BINSTATREP logical diagram

Function block
BINSTATREP
OUTPUT1
BLOCK
^INPUT1
OUTPUT2
^INPUT2
OUTPUT3
^INPUT3
OUTPUT4
^INPUT4
OUTPUT5
^INPUT5
OUTPUT6
^INPUT6
OUTPUT7
^INPUT7
OUTPUT8
^INPUT8
OUTPUT9
^INPUT9
OUTPUT10
^INPUT10
OUTPUT11
^INPUT11
OUTPUT12
^INPUT12
OUTPUT13
^INPUT13
OUTPUT14
^INPUT14
OUTPUT15
^INPUT15
OUTPUT16
^INPUT16
IEC09000730-1-en.vsd
IEC09000730 V1 EN

Figure 442:

BINSTATREP function block

887
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
15.4.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 547:
Name

BINSTATREP Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 13

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Single status report input 16

Table 548:
Name

BINSTATREP Output signals

Type

Description

OUTPUT1

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 1

OUTPUT2

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 2

OUTPUT3

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 3

OUTPUT4

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 4

OUTPUT5

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 5

OUTPUT6

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 6

OUTPUT7

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 7

OUTPUT8

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 8

OUTPUT9

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 9

OUTPUT10

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 10

OUTPUT11

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 11

OUTPUT12

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 12

OUTPUT13

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 13

Table continues on next page

888
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

15.4.5
Table 549:

Type

Description

OUTPUT14

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 14

OUTPUT15

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 15

OUTPUT16

BOOLEAN

Logical status report output 16

Setting parameters
BINSTATREP Non group settings (basic)

Name
t

15.5

Values (Range)
0.000 - 60000.000

Unit
s

0.001

Default
10.000

Description
Time delay of function

Fault locator LMBRFLO

Function description
Fault locator

15.5.1

Step

IEC 61850
identification
LMBRFLO

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

Introduction
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.
The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to the fault as
a relative (in%) or an absolute value. The main advantage is the high accuracy
achieved by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero-sequence effect on
double circuit lines.
The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of
the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current,
together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault
position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to
further increase the accuracy.
Especially on heavily loaded long lines (where the fault locator is most important)
where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can be
still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.

889
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
15.5.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Principle of operation
The Fault locator (LMBRFLO) in the IED is an essential complement to other
monitoring functions, since it measures and indicates the distance to the fault with high
accuracy.
When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages
are selected from the Trip value recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the fault
locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The analog
configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool within
PCM600.
The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance.
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
R1A+jX1A

Z0m=Z0m+jX0m

DRPRDRE

R1B+jX1B

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L

LMBRFLO
ANSI05000045_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000045 V2 EN

Figure 443:

Simplified network configuration with network data, required for

settings of the fault location-measuring function

If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to
exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order,
and so on), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the
distance to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. Its also
possible to change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be
achieved.
The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a part
of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via
the local HMI or PCM600.

15.5.2.1

Measuring Principle
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end
infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the distance

890
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done, the
accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of
additional fault resistance.
The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of doubleend infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.

15.5.2.2

Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault

Figure 444 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from
both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume that the fault occurs at a
distance F from IED A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault
resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the
algorithm.
L
F

ZA

pZL

IA

IB

(1-p).ZL

ZB

IF

VA

RF

xx01000171_ansi.vsd
ANSI01000171 V1 EN

Figure 444:

Fault on transmission line fed from both ends

From figure 444 it is evident that:

VA = IA p ZL + IF RF
EQUATION1595 V1 EN

(Equation 178)

Where:
IA

is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,

IF

is the fault current and

is a relative distance to the fault

891
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

The fault current is expressed in measurable quantities by:

IF A
IF = -------DA
(Equation 179)

EQUATION96 V1 EN

Where:
IFA

is the change in current at the point of measurement, IED A and

DA

is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and
the total fault current.

For a single line, the value is equal to:

( 1 p ) Z L + ZB
DA = ----------------------------------------Z A + Z L + ZB
(Equation 180)

EQUATION97 V1 EN

Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:

VA = IA p ZL +

IFA
DA

RF
(Equation 181)

EQUATION1596 V1 EN

Table 550:
Fault type:

Expressions for VA, IA and IFA for different types of faults

VA

IA

AG

VAA

IAA + KN x INA

BG

VBA

IBA + KN x INA

IFA

3
2

D (IAA - I0 A )

EQUATION1597 V1 EN

3
2

D (IBA - I0 A )

EQUATION1598 V1 EN

CG

VCA

ICA + KN x INA

3
2

D (ICA - I0 A )

EQUATION1599 V1 EN

ABC, AB, ABG

VAA-VBA

IAA - IBA

DIABA

BC, BCG

VBA-VCA

IBA - ICA

DICBA

CA, CAG

VCA-VAA

ICA - IAA

DICAA

The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal to:

892
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Z0L Z 1L
K N = -----------------------3 Z1L
(Equation 182)

EQUATION99 V1 EN

DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before
the fault.
In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into
the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.
For double lines, the fault equation is:

VA = IA p Z1L +

IFA
DA

RF + I0P Z 0M

EQUATION1600 V1 EN

(Equation 183)

Where:
I0P

is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,

Z0M

is a mutual zero sequence impedance and

DA

is the distribution factor of the parallel line, which is:

( 1 p ) ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------2 ZA + Z L + 2 Z B
EQUATION101 V1 EN

The KN compensation factor for the double line becomes:

Z0L Z 1L
Z 0M I 0P
- + ---------------- ------K N = ----------------------3 Z1L
3 Z1L I 0A
EQUATION102 V1 EN

(Equation 184)

From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two
cases.
Because the DA distribution factor according to equation 181 or 183 is a function of p,
the general equation 183 can be written in the form:
2

p p K1 + K2 K3 RF = 0
EQUATION103 V1 EN

(Equation 185)

893
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Where:

K1 =

VA
IA ZL

ZB
ZL + Z ADD

+1
(Equation 186)

EQUATION1601 V1 EN

K2 =

VA

ZB

IA ZL ZL + Z ADD

+ 1

EQUATION1602 V1 EN

(Equation 187)

IF A
ZA + ZB
- -------------------------- + 1
K 3 = --------------
I A Z L Z 1 + ZA DD
EQUATION106 V1 EN

(Equation 188)

and:

ZADD = ZA + ZB for parallel lines.

IA, IFA and VA are given in the above table.
KN is calculated automatically according to equation 184.
ZA, ZB, ZL, Z0L and Z0M are setting parameters.

For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 185 applies to both single and
parallel lines.
Equation 185 can be divided into real and imaginary parts:
2

p p Re ( K 1 ) + Re ( K 2 ) R F Re ( K 3 ) = 0
EQUATION107 V1 EN

(Equation 189)

p Im ( K1 ) + Im ( K 2 ) R F Im ( K3 ) = 0
EQUATION108 V1 EN

(Equation 190)

If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 190, and
then inserted to equation 189. According to equation 189, the relative distance to the
fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.
Equation 189 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, which gives an unequivocal figure
for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be selected.

894
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the
relative distance to the fault.

15.5.2.3

The non-compensated impedance model

In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault
current:
VA = p Z1L IA + RF IA
(Equation 191)

EQUATION1603 V1 EN

Where:
IA

is according to table 550.

The accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, using the non-compensated

impedance model, is influenced by the pre-fault load current. So, this method is only
used if the load compensated models do not function.

15.5.2.4

IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location
information from the IED to a master (that is station HSI). There are two outputs that
must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis,
FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and
CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX output.

15.5.3

Function block
LMBRFLO
PHSEL_A*
FLTDISTX
PHSEL_B*
CALCMADE
PHSEL_C*
BCD_80
CALCDIST*
BCD_40
BCD_20
BCD_10
BCD_8
BCD_4
BCD_2
BCD_1
ANSI05000679-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000679 V2 EN

Figure 445:

FLO function block

895
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
15.5.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 551:

LMBRFLO Input signals

Name

Type
BOOLEAN

Phase selection phase A

PHSEL_B

BOOLEAN

Phase selection phase B

PHSEL_C

BOOLEAN

Phase selection phase C

CALCDIST

BOOLEAN

Input signal to initiate fault distance calculation

LMBRFLO Output signals

Name

Table 553:
Name

Description

PHSEL_A

Table 552:

15.5.5

Default

Type

Description

FLTDISTX

REAL

Reactive distance to fault

CALCMADE

BOOLEAN

Fault calculation made

BCD_80

BOOLEAN

Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%

BCD_40

BOOLEAN

Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%

BCD_20

BOOLEAN

Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%

BCD_10

BOOLEAN

Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10%

BCD_8

BOOLEAN

Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8%

BCD_4

BOOLEAN

Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4%

BCD_2

BOOLEAN

Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2%

BCD_1

BOOLEAN

Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%

Setting parameters
LMBRFLO Group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

R1A

0.001 - 1500.000

ohm/p

0.001

2.000

Source resistance A (near end)

X1A

0.001 - 1500.000

ohm/p

0.001

12.000

Source reactance A (near end)

R1B

0.001 - 1500.000

ohm/p

0.001

2.000

Source resistance B (far end)

X1B

0.001 - 1500.000

ohm/p

0.001

12.000

Source reactance B (far end)

R1L

0.001 - 1500.000

ohm/p

0.001

2.000

Positive sequence line resistance

X1L

0.001 - 1500.000

ohm/p

0.001

12.500

Positive sequence line reactance

R0L

0.001 - 1500.000

ohm/p

0.001

8.750

Zero sequence line resistance

X0L

0.001 - 1500.000

ohm/p

0.001

50.000

Zero sequence line reactance

R0M

0.000 - 1500.000

ohm/p

0.001

0.000

Zero sequence mutual resistance

X0M

0.000 - 1500.000

ohm/p

0.001

0.000

Zero sequence mutual reactance

LineLength

0.0 - 10000.0

0.1

40.0

Length of line

896
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 554:

LMBRFLO Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

DrepChNoI_A

1 - 30

Ch

Recorder Input number recording phase

current, IA

DrepChNoI_B

1 - 30

Ch

Recorder Input number recording phase

current, IB

DrepChNoI_C

1 - 30

Ch

Recorder Input number recording phase

current, IC

DrepChNoIN

0 - 30

Ch

Recorder input number recording residual

current, IN

DrepChNoIP

0 - 30

Ch

Recorder input number recording 3I0 on

parallel line

DrepChNoV_A

1 - 30

Ch

Recorder Input number recording phase

voltage, VA

DrepChNoV_B

1 - 30

Ch

Recorder Input number recording phase

voltage, VB

DrepChNoV_C

1 - 30

Ch

Recorder Input number recording phase

voltage, VC

15.5.6

Technical data
Table 555:

LMBRFLO technical data

Function

15.6

Value or range

Accuracy

Reactive and resistive reach

(0.001-1500.000) /phase

2.0% static accuracy

2.0% degrees static angular
accuracy
Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Vn
Current range: (0.5-30) x In

Phase selection

According to input signals

Maximum number of fault

locations

100

Measured value expander block RANGE_XP

Function description
Measured value expander block

IEC 61850
identification
RANGE_XP

IEC 60617
identification
-

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

897
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
15.6.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Introduction
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU
and VNMMXU), current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) are
provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values can be
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high
limit. The measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to enable
translating the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary signals:
below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or above high
limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable logic or for
alarming purpose.

15.6.2

Principle of operation
The input signal must be connected to a range output of a measuring function block
(CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, VNMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQ or MVGGIO). The
function block converts the input integer value to five binary output signals according
to table 556.
Table 556:

Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervised
value is:
Output:
LOWLOW

below low-low between low

limit
low and low
limit

between high- above high-high

high and high limit
limit

High

LOW

High

NORMAL

High

HIGH

High

HIGHHIGH

15.6.3

between low
and high limit

High

Function block
RANGE*

RANGE_XP
HIGHHIGH
HIGH
NORMAL
LOW
LOWLOW
IEC05000346-2-en.vsd

IEC05000346 V2 EN

Figure 446:

RANGE_XP function block

898
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

15.6.4

Input and output signals

Table 557:

RANGE_XP Input signals

Name

Type

RANGE

Table 558:

INTEGER

Type

Measured value range

Description

HIGHHIGH

BOOLEAN

Measured value is above high-high limit

HIGH

BOOLEAN

Measured value is between high and high-high limit

NORMAL

BOOLEAN

Measured value is between high and low limit

LOW

BOOLEAN

Measured value is between low and low-low limit

LOWLOW

BOOLEAN

Measured value is below low-low limit

Disturbance report DRPRDRE

Function description

15.7.1

Description

RANGE_XP Output signals

Name

15.7

Default

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Analog input signals

A41RADR

Disturbance report

DRPRDRE

Disturbance report

A1RADR

Disturbance report

A4RADR

Disturbance report

B1RBDR

Introduction
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of
all selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block with a,
maximum of 40 analog and 96 binary signals.
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

Sequential of events
Indications
Event recorder
899

Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Trip value recorder

Disturbance recorder
Fault locator

The Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility regarding

configuration, initiating conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the AxRADR or BxRBDR
function blocks, which are set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start
of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in the recording.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer.
The local HMI is used to get information about the recordings. The disturbance report
files may be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the disturbance handling
tool.

15.7.2

Principle of operation
Disturbance report DRPRDRE is a common name for several functions to supply the
operator, analysis engineer, and so on, with sufficient information about events in the
system.
The functions included in the disturbance report are:

Sequential of events (SOE)

Indications (IND)
Event recorder (ER)
Trip value recorder(TVR)
Disturbance recorder (DR)

Figure 447 shows the relations between Disturbance Report, included functions and
function blocks. Sequential of events (SOE), Event recorder (ER) and Indications
(IND) uses information from the binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value
recorder (TVR) uses analog information from the analog input function blocks
(AxRADR). Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE acquires information from both
AxRADR and BxRBDR.

900
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Disturbance Report

A1-4RADR

A4RADR

DRPRDRE

FL

Analog signals
Trip value rec

B1-6RBDR

Binary signals

Fault locator

Disturbance
recorder

B6RBDR
Sequential of
events
Event recorder
Indications

ANSI09000336-1-en.vsd
ANSI09000336 V1 EN

Figure 447:

Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings, each
with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The sequential of events
function is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording
time, and so on. All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash
memories. This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power.
Each report will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report

Record no. N

General dist.
information

Record no. N+1

Indications

Trip
values

Record no. N+100

Event
recordings

Disturbance
recording

Fault locator

Event list
(SOE)
en05000125_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000125 V1 EN

Figure 448:

Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recorded

when the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is overwritten by the new one.
The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of sampling
901
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

frequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. Figure 449
shows the number of recordings versus the total recording time tested for a typical
configuration, that is, in a 60 Hz system it is possible to record 80 where the average
recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of the
disturbance report (Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER), Indications (IND) and Trip
value recorder (TVR)).

Number of recordings
100

3.4s
20 analog
96 binary

3.4s

80

40 analog
96 binary

60

6.3s

6.3s
50 Hz

6.3s

40

60 Hz

Total recording time

250

300

350

400 s
en05000488_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000488 V1 EN

Figure 449:

Example of number of recordings versus the total recording time

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

Disturbance information

Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local HMI. To acquire a complete disturbance report the
902
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

user must use a PC and - either the PCM600 Disturbance handling tool - or a FTP or
MMS (over 61850) client. The PC can be connected to the IED front, rear or remotely
via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

Indications (IND)

Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of the
disturbance (not time-tagged), see section "Indications" for more detailed information.

Event recorder (ER)

The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which have
occurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the local HMI or
PCM600, see section "Event recorder" for more detailed information.

Sequential of events (SOE)

The sequetial of events may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The list
information is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. The
oldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via local HMI or
PCM600, see section "Sequential of events" for more detailed information.

Trip value recorder (TVR)

The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the fault and
during the fault, see section "Trip value recorder" for more detailed information.

Disturbance recorder (DR)

Disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during and after the
fault, see section "Disturbance recorder" for more detailed information.

Fault locator (FL)

The fault location function calculates the distance to fault, see section "Fault locator
LMBRFLO" for more detailed information.

Time tagging

The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report

Recording times

Disturbance report DRPRDRE records information about a disturbance during a

settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
Disturbance recorder (DR), event recorder (ER) and indication function register
disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:
tRecording =

PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on

which criterion stops the current disturbance recording

903
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT

PostFaultRecT

3
en05000487.vsd

IEC05000487 V1 EN

Figure 450:

The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1

Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.

tFault, 2

Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the limit
time).

PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit

Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of a
recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored disturbances. Use the
setting TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signals

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for
external analog signals from analog input modules (TRM) and line data
communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks (SMAI) and
summation block (3PHSUM). The last 10 channels may be connected to internally
calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA input signals,
phase differential currents, bias currents and so on).

904
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

A1RADR

SMAI

External analog
signals

Block
^GRP2_A

AI3P
AI1

^GRP2_B
^GRP2_C

AI2
AI3

INPUT2

^GRP2_N
Type

AI4
AIN

INPUT4

A2RADR
INPUT1

A3RADR

INPUT3
INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32

Internal analog signals

INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
...
INPUT40
ANSI10000029-1-en.vsd

ANSI10000029 V1 EN

Figure 451:

Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the AxRADR function block via the
SMAI function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base
sampling rate (1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to
the cycle time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the
base sampling rate, Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new
updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration). In
case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (SMAI) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). SMAI makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual
output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as an input signal the
corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the
SMAI function block. Connect the signals to the AxRADR accordingly.

905
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

For each of the analog signals, Operation = Enabled means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Disabled. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be
used as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
If Operation = Disabled, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in
graph. However, Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported.
The input channel can still be used to trig the disturbance recorder.
If Operation = Enabled, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect the
entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signals

Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by disturbance report. The

signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal is
selected to be recorded when:

the corresponding function block is included in the configuration

the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report (Operation
= Operation>TrigDR =Disabled). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red
LED on the local HMI (SetLED = Enabled/Disabled).
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, sequential of events and the
disturbance recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used
as triggers. The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with local HMI
IndicationMask=Show/Hide.

Trigger signals

The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the sequential of
events, which runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a
complete disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is
fulfilled, there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the
importance of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
A trigger can be of type:

Manual trigger
Binary-signal trigger
Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

906
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Manual trigger

A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, PCM600 or via
station bus (IEC 61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal is
generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to the operator's manual
for procedure.

Binary-signal trigger

Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.

Analog-signal trigger

All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded in
the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is found,
the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average value
is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger is
indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or undercurrent
trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name. The procedure
is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog trigger conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this initiation is typically in
the range of one cycle, 16 2/3 ms for a 60 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the local HMI and PCM600.

Post Retrigger

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition
during a recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However,
under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault
recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig
= Enabled) during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start
and, during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Disabled), a new recording will
not start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a
new trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding
recording a new complete recording will be started.
907
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

15.7.3

Function block
DRPRDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
IEC05000406-3-en.vsd
IEC05000406 V3 EN

Figure 452:

DRPRDRE function block

A1RADR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
IEC05000430-3-en.vsd
IEC05000430 V3 EN

Figure 453:

A1RADR function block

A4RADR
^INPUT31
^INPUT32
^INPUT33
^INPUT34
^INPUT35
^INPUT36
^INPUT37
^INPUT38
^INPUT39
^INPUT40
IEC05000431-3-en.vsd
IEC05000431 V3 EN

Figure 454:

A4RADR function block, derived analog inputs

908
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

B1RBDR
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16
IEC05000432-3-en.vsd
IEC05000432 V3 EN

Figure 455:

15.7.4

B1RBDR function block, binary inputs, example for B1RBDR - B6RBDR

Input and output signals

Table 559:
Name

DRPRDRE Output signals

Type

Description

DRPOFF

BOOLEAN

Disturbance report function turned off

RECSTART

BOOLEAN

Disturbance recording started

RECMADE

BOOLEAN

Disturbance recording made

CLEARED

BOOLEAN

All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared

MEMUSED

BOOLEAN

More than 80% of memory used

Table 560:
Name

A1RADR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 1

INPUT2

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 2

INPUT3

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 3

INPUT4

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 4

INPUT5

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 5

INPUT6

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 6

INPUT7

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 7

Table continues on next page

909
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

INPUT8

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 8

INPUT9

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 9

INPUT10

GROUP
SIGNAL

Group signal for input 10

Table 561:
Name

A4RADR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT31

REAL

Analog channel 31

INPUT32

REAL

Analog channel 32

INPUT33

REAL

Analog channel 33

INPUT34

REAL

Analog channel 34

INPUT35

REAL

Analog channel 35

INPUT36

REAL

Analog channel 36

INPUT37

REAL

Analog channel 37

INPUT38

REAL

Analog channel 38

INPUT39

REAL

Analog channel 39

INPUT40

REAL

Analog channel 40

Table 562:
Name

B1RBDR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 13

Table continues on next page

910
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

15.7.5
Table 563:

Type

Default

Description

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Binary channel 16

Setting parameters
DRPRDRE Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable/Disable

PreFaultRecT

0.05 - 9.90

0.01

0.10

Pre-fault recording time

PostFaultRecT

0.1 - 10.0

0.1

0.5

Post-fault recording time

TimeLimit

0.5 - 10.0

0.1

1.0

Fault recording time limit

PostRetrig

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Post-fault retrig enabled (On) or not (Off)

ZeroAngleRef

1 - 30

Ch

Reference channel (voltage), phasors,

frequency measurement

OpModeTest

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation mode during test mode

Table 564:

A1RADR Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation01

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/Off

NomValue01

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 1

UnderTrigOp01

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 1 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe01

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 1 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp01

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 1 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe01

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 1 in % of signal

Operation02

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/Off

NomValue02

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 2

UnderTrigOp02

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 2 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe02

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 2 in % of

signal

Table continues on next page

911
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OverTrigOp02

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 2 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe02

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 2 in % of signal

Operation03

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/Off

NomValue03

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 3

UnderTrigOp03

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 3 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe03

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 3 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp03

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 3 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe03

0 - 5000

200

Overtrigger level for analog cha 3 in % of signal

Operation04

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/Off

NomValue04

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 4

UnderTrigOp04

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 4 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe04

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 4 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp04

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 4 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe04

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 4 in % of signal

Operation05

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/Off

NomValue05

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 5

UnderTrigOp05

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 5 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe05

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 5 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp05

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 5 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe05

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 5 in % of signal

Operation06

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/Off

NomValue06

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 6

UnderTrigOp06

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 6 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe06

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 6 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp06

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 6 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe06

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 6 in % of signal

Table continues on next page

912
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation07

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/Off

NomValue07

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 7

UnderTrigOp07

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 7 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe07

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 7 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp07

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 7 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe07

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 7 in % of signal

Operation08

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/Off

NomValue08

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 8

UnderTrigOp08

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 8 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe08

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 8 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp08

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 8 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe08

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 8 in % of signal

Operation09

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/Off

NomValue09

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 9

UnderTrigOp09

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 9 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe09

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 9 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp09

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 9 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe09

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 9 in % of signal

Operation10

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/Off

NomValue10

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 10

UnderTrigOp10

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 10 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe10

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 10 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp10

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 10 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe10

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 10 in % of

signal

913
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

Table 565:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

A4RADR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation31

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/off

NomValue31

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 31

UnderTrigOp31

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 31 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe31

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 31 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp31

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 31 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe31

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 31 in % of

signal

Operation32

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/off

NomValue32

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 32

UnderTrigOp32

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 32 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe32

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 32 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp32

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 32 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe32

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 32 in % of

signal

Operation33

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/off

NomValue33

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 33

UnderTrigOp33

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 33 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe33

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 33 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp33

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 33 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe33

0 - 5000

200

Overtrigger level for analog cha 33 in % of

signal

Operation34

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/off

NomValue34

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 34

UnderTrigOp34

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 34 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe34

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 34 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp34

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 34 (on) or

not (off)

Table continues on next page

914
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OverTrigLe34

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 34 in % of

signal

Operation35

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/off

NomValue35

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 35

UnderTrigOp35

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 35 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe35

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 35 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp35

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 35 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe35

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 35 in % of

signal

Operation36

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/off

NomValue36

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 36

UnderTrigOp36

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 36 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe36

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 36 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp36

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 36 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe36

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 36 in % of

signal

Operation37

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/off

NomValue37

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 37

UnderTrigOp37

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 37 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe37

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 37 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp37

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 37 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe37

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 37 in % of

signal

Operation38

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/off

NomValue38

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 38

UnderTrigOp38

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 38 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe38

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 38 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp38

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 38 (on) or

not (off)

Table continues on next page

915
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

OverTrigLe38

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 38 in % of

signal

Operation39

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/off

NomValue39

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 39

UnderTrigOp39

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 39 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe39

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 39 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp39

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 39 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe39

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 39 in % of

signal

Operation40

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation On/off

NomValue40

0.0 - 999999.9

0.1

0.0

Nominal value for analog channel 40

UnderTrigOp40

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use under level trig for analog cha 40 (on) or

not (off)

UnderTrigLe40

0 - 200

50

Under trigger level for analog cha 40 in % of

signal

OverTrigOp40

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Use over level trig for analog cha 40 (on) or

not (off)

OverTrigLe40

0 - 5000

200

Over trigger level for analog cha 40 in % of

signal

Table 566:
Name

B1RBDR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation01

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel01

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 1

IndicationMa01

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 1

SetLED01

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 1

Operation02

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel02

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 2

IndicationMa02

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 2

SetLED02

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 2

Table continues on next page

916
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation03

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel03

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 3

IndicationMa03

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 3

SetLED03

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 3

Operation04

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel04

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 4

IndicationMa04

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 4

SetLED04

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 4

Operation05

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel05

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 5

IndicationMa05

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 5

SetLED05

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 5

Operation06

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel06

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 6

IndicationMa06

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 6

SetLED06

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 6

Operation07

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel07

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 7

IndicationMa07

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 7

SetLED07

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 7

Operation08

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel08

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 8

Table continues on next page

917
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

IndicationMa08

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 8

SetLED08

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 8

Operation09

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel09

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 9

IndicationMa09

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 9

SetLED09

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 9

Operation10

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel10

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 10

IndicationMa10

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 10

SetLED10

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 10

Operation11

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel11

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 11

IndicationMa11

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 11

SetLED11

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 11

Operation12

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel12

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 12

IndicationMa12

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 12

SetLED12

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary input 12

Operation13

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel13

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 13

IndicationMa13

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 13

SetLED13

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 13

Table continues on next page

918
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation14

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel14

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 14

IndicationMa14

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 14

SetLED14

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 14

Operation15

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel15

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 15

IndicationMa15

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 15

SetLED15

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 15

Operation16

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Trigger operation On/Off

TrigLevel16

Trig on 0
Trig on 1

Trig on 1

Trig on positiv (1) or negative (0) slope for

binary inp 16

IndicationMa16

Hide
Show

Hide

Indication mask for binary channel 16

SetLED16

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Set red-LED on HMI for binary channel 16

FUNT1

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 1 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT2

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 2 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT3

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 3 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT4

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 4 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT5

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 5 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT6

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 6 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT7

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 7 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT8

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 8 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT9

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 9 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT10

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 10 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

Table continues on next page

919
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FUNT11

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 11 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT12

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 12 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT13

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 13 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT14

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 14 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT15

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 15 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

FUNT16

0 - 255

FunT

Function type for binary channel 16 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

INFNO1

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 1 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

INFNO2

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 2 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

INFNO3

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 3 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

INFNO4

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 4 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

INFNO5

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 5 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

INFNO6

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 6 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

INFNO7

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 7 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

INFNO8

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 8 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

INFNO9

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 9 (IEC

-60870-5-103)

INFNO10

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 10

(IEC -60870-5-103)

INFNO11

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 11

(IEC -60870-5-103)

INFNO12

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 12

(IEC -60870-5-103)

INFNO13

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 13

(IEC -60870-5-103)

INFNO14

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 14

(IEC -60870-5-103)

INFNO15

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 15

(IEC -60870-5-103)

INFNO16

0 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary channel 16

(IEC -60870-5-103)

920
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

15.7.6

Technical data
Table 567:

DRPRDRE technical data

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Pre-fault time

(0.059.90) s

Post-fault time

(0.110.0) s

Limit time

(0.510.0) s

Maximum number of recordings

100, first in - first out

Time tagging resolution

1 ms

See table 28

Maximum number of analog inputs

30 + 10 (external + internally
derived)

Maximum number of binary inputs

96

Maximum number of phasors in the Trip

Value recorder per recording

30

Maximum number of indications in a

disturbance report

96

Maximum number of events in the Event

recording per recording

150

Maximum number of events in the

Sequence of events

1000, first in - first out

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s

recording time and maximum number of
channels, typical value)

340 seconds (100 recordings)

at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz

Sampling rate

1 kHz at 50 Hz
1.2 kHz at 60 Hz

Recording bandwidth

(5-300) Hz

15.8

Sequential of events

15.8.1

Introduction
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system from an overview
perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The sequential of events logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
report function. The list may contain up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.

15.8.2

Principle of operation
When a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status, the
sequential of events function stores input name, status and time in the sequential of
921

Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

events in chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal
logic signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten
when a new event arrives.
The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the
local HMI.
The sequential of events function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder
function, which is only active during a disturbance, and each event record is an integral
part of its associated DR.
The name of the binary signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined
name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the disturbance
recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function (ER).
The sequential of events is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report
information(ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).

15.8.3

Function block
The Sequential of events has no function block of its own.It is included in the
DRPRDRE block and uses information from the BxRBDR block.

15.8.4

Input signals
The Sequential of events logs the same binary input signals as configured for the
Disturbance report function.

15.8.5

Technical data
Table 568:

technical data

Function
Buffer capacity

Value
Maximum number of events in the list

1000

Resolution

1 ms

Accuracy

Depending on time
synchronizing

922
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

15.9

Indications

15.9.1

Introduction
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/
or in the secondary system it is important to know, for example binary signals that
have changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short
perspective to get information via the local HMI in a straightforward way.
There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and red), which will display
status information about the IED and the Disturbance report function (triggered).
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance report function that have changed status during a disturbance.

15.9.2

Principle of operation
The LED indications display this information:
Green LED:
Steady light

In Service

Flashing light

Internal fail

Dark

No power supply

Yellow LED:
Steady light

A disturbance report is triggered

Flashing light

The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode

Red LED:
Steady light

Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On

Indication list:
The possible indication signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance
report function and disturbance recorder.

923
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording
period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic
one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of
indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of
indications the:

the signal must be connected to binary input(DRB1-6)

the DRP parameter Operation must be set Enabled
the DRP must be trigged (binary or analog)

Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when setting the
binary inputs.
The name of the binary signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-defined
name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in disturbance
recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function (ER).

15.9.3

Function block
The Indications function has no function block of its own. It is included in the
DRPRDRE block and uses information from the BxRBDR block.

15.9.4

Input signals
The Indications function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance report
function.

15.9.5

Technical data
Table 569:

technical data

Function
Buffer capacity

15.10

Event recorder

15.10.1

Introduction

Value
Maximum number of indications presented
for single disturbance

96

Maximum number of recorded disturbances

100

Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged during
924
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

disturbances. This information is used for different purposes in the short term (for
example corrective actions) and in the long term (for example functional analysis).
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).

15.10.2

Principle of operation
When one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the event
recorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can be
generated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internal
signals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channels
are time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the total
recording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance report
flash memory at the end of each recording.
In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = Enabled and a new trig signal
appears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the userdefined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function(ER).
The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR,
IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the local HMI or PCM600.
Events can not be read from the IED if more than one user is accessing
the IED simultaneously.

15.10.3

Function block
The Event recorder has no function block of its own. It is included in the DRPRDRE
block and uses information from the BxRBDR block.

15.10.4

Input signals
The Event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the Disturbance
report function.
925

Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring
15.10.5

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 570:

technical data

Function
Buffer capacity

Value
Maximum number of events in disturbance report

150

Maximum number of disturbance reports

100

Resolution

1 ms

Accuracy

Depending on time
synchronizing

15.11

Trip value recorder

15.11.1

Introduction
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for
the disturbance evaluation.
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals
connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle
before and during the fault for each analog input signal.
The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).

15.11.2

Principle of operation
Trip value recorder (TVR)calculates and presents both fault and pre-fault magnitudes
as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. The parameter
ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference. The
calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL).
When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception
is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The
channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest number.
When a fault interception point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values
of the complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The
estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using
the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after

926
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the
signals.
If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used
as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one
cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault
and fault values.
The name of the analog signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function is the userdefined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the
Disturbance recorder function (DR).
The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR,
IND, TVR and fault locator) and managed in PCM600 or via the local HMI.

15.11.3

Function block
The Trip value recorder has no function block of its own. It is included in the
DRPRDRE block and uses information from the BxRBDR block.

15.11.4

Input signals
The trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to A1RADR to
A3RADR (not A4RADR).

15.11.5

Technical data
Table 571:

technical data

Function
Buffer capacity

Value
Maximum number of analog inputs

30

Maximum number of disturbance reports

100

15.12

Disturbance recorder

15.12.1

Introduction
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information
about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior
and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Recorded
information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (for example
corrective actions) and long perspective (for example functional analysis).
927

Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from selected analog- and binary
signals connected to the Disturbance report function (maximum 40 analog and 96
binary signals). The binary signals available are the same as for the event recorder
function.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation
of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection functions.
Up to ten seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved in the disturbance file.
The disturbance recorder information for up to 100 disturbances are saved in the IED
and the local HMI is used to view the list of recordings.

15.12.2

Principle of operation
Disturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals.
The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signals
generated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are input
channels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differential communication
Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI) and possible
summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derived analog signals.For
details, refer to section "Disturbance report DRPRDRE".
Disturbance recorder collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic
buffer. The pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will
continuously be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this
buffer is determined by the set pre-fault recording time.
Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and the
data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long as
the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault
time and it can be set in the disturbance report.
The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,
intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten. Up to the last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.
The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance
recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from analog
inputs (over-/underlevel trig).
A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for
all functions within the disturbance report functionality.

928
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

15.12.2.1

Memory and storage

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total
recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of
recordings to less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This
might cause disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.
When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.
This post-recording processing comprises:

Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance handling tool (part of PCM 600)
Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.

The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided
into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).
The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the
disturbance, that is, information from the Disturbance report sub-functions(ER, TVR
and FL). The Disturbance handling tool use this information and present the recording
in a user-friendly way.
General:

Station name, object name and unit name

Date and time for the trig of the disturbance
Record number
Sampling rate
Time synchronization source
Recording times
Activated trig signal
Active setting group

Analog:

Signal names for selected analog channels

Information e.g. trig on analog inputs
Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating
929

Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

Over- or Undertrig: level and operation

Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig
CT direction

Binary:

Signal names
Status of binary input signals

The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpret

the data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency,
channel info etc.
The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for
each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence number
and time stamp for each set of samples.

15.12.2.2

IEC 60870-5-103
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbance
recordings from the IED to a master (station HSI). The standard describes how to
handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages) using
the public range and binary signals.
The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master.
When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will
appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED).
To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first
8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the private
range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to table 572.
Table 572:
Signal

Configuration of analog channels

Disturbance recorder

IA

A1RADR

INPUT1

IB

A1RADR

INPUT2

IC

A1RADR

INPUT3

IN

A1RADR

INPUT4

VA

A1RADR

INPUT5

VB

A1RADR

INPUT6

VC

A1RADR

INPUT7

VN

A1RADR

INPUT8

930
Technical reference manual

Section 15
Monitoring

1MRK506312-UUS C

The binary signals connected to BxRBDR are reported by polling. The function blocks
include function type and information number.

15.12.3

Function block
The Disturbance recorder has no function block of its own. It is included in the
DRPRDRE, AxRADR and BxRBDR block.

15.12.4

Input and output signals

For signals see section, in Disturbance report, "Input and output signals".

15.12.5

Setting parameters
For Setting parameters see section "Disturbance report DRPRDRE".

15.12.6

Technical data
Table 573:

technical data

Function
Buffer capacity

Value
Maximum number of analog inputs

40

Maximum number of binary inputs

96

Maximum number of disturbance reports

100

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number
of channels, typical value)

340 seconds (100

recordings) at 50 Hz
280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz

931
Technical reference manual

932

Section 16
Metering

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 16

Metering

About this chapter

This chapter describes among others, Pulse counter logic which is a function used to
meter externally generated binary pulses. The way the functions work, their setting
parameters, function blocks, input and output signals, and technical data are included
for each function.

16.1

Pulse-counter logic PCGGIO

Function description
Pulse-counter logic

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

PCGGIO

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

S00947 V1 EN

16.1.1

Introduction
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then read
by the function. A scaled service value is available over the station bus. The special
Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered to
achieve this functionality.

16.1.2

Principle of operation
The registration of pulses is done for positive transitions (0->1) on one of the 16 binary
input channels located on the Binary Input Module (BIM). Pulse counter values are
sent to the station HMI with predefined cyclicity without reset.
The reporting time period can be set in the range from 1 second to 60 minutes and is
synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse counter
values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single counter. All
933

Technical reference manual

Section 16
Metering

1MRK506312-UUS C

active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation command (GI) or
IEC 61850.
Pulse counter (PCGGIO) function in the IED supports unidirectional incremental
counters. That means only positive values are possible. The counter uses a 32 bit
format, that is, the reported value is a 32-bit, signed integer with a range
0...+2147483647. The counter is reset at initialization of the IED.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Scaled Value
(pulse count x scale), Time, and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality
consists of:

Invalid (board hardware error or configuration error)

Wrapped around
Blocked
Adjusted

The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is,
the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. PCGGIO updates the value in the database when an integration cycle is
finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block. This signal can be
connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and transmitted to the station
HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was frozen by the function.
The pulse counter function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that is
specially adapted to the pulse counter function.
Figure 456 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and
outputs.

934
Technical reference manual

Section 16
Metering

1MRK506312-UUS C

SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
SingleCmdFunc
OUTx
I/Omodule

Pulse
INPUT OUT
Pulse length >1s
Reset counter

PulseCounter
BLOCK
INVALID
RESTART
READ_VAL
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
BI_PULSE
RS_CNT
NAME
SCAL_VAL

SMS settings
1.Operation = Off/On
2.tReporting = 0s...60min
3.Event Mask = No Events/Report Events
4.Scale = 1-90000

EVENT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4

IEC EVENT

Database
Pulse counter value:
0...2147483647
en05000744_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000744 V1 EN

Figure 456:

Overview of the pulse counter function

The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI.
As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected
to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must be
a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).
The RS_CNT input is used for resetting the counter.
Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be connected
to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED
and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function
block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where
the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-up,
in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around during
last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There
are two reasons why the counter is blocked:

935
Technical reference manual

Section 16
Metering

1MRK506312-UUS C

The BLOCK input is set, or

The Binary Input Module, where the counter input is situated, is inoperative.

The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.
Note, the pulse is short, one cycle.

The SCAL_VAL signal consists of scaled value (according to parameter Scale), time
and status information.

16.1.3

Function block
PCGGIO
BLOCK
READ_VAL
BI_PULSE*
RS_CNT

INVALID
RESTART
BLOCKED
NEW_VAL
SCAL_VAL
IEC05000709-2-en.vsd

IEC05000709 V3 EN

Figure 457:

16.1.4

PCGGIO function block

Input and output signals

Table 574:
Name

PCGGIO Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

READ_VAL

BOOLEAN

Initiates an additional pulse counter reading

BI_PULSE

BOOLEAN

Connect binary input channel for metering

RS_CNT

BOOLEAN

Resets pulse counter value

Table 575:
Name

PCGGIO Output signals

Type

Description

INVALID

BOOLEAN

The pulse counter value is invalid

RESTART

BOOLEAN

The reported value does not comprise a complete

integration cycle

BLOCKED

BOOLEAN

The pulse counter function is blocked

NEW_VAL

BOOLEAN

A new pulse counter value is generated

SCAL_VAL

REAL

Scaled value with time and status information

936
Technical reference manual

Section 16
Metering

1MRK506312-UUS C

16.1.5
Table 576:

Setting parameters
PCGGIO Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable/Disable

EventMask

NoEvents
ReportEvents

NoEvents

Report mask for analog events from pulse

counter

CountCriteria

Disabled
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange

RisingEdge

Pulse counter criteria

Scale

1.000 - 90000.000

0.001

1.000

Scaling value for SCAL_VAL output to unit

per counted value

Quantity

Count
ActivePower
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy

Count

Measured quantity for SCAL_VAL output

tReporting

0 - 3600

60

Cycle time for reporting of counter value

16.1.6

Technical data
Table 577:

PCGGIO technical data

Function

16.2

Setting range

Accuracy

Input frequency

See Binary Input Module (BIM)

Cycle time for report of

counter value

(13600) s

Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR
Function description
Energy calculation and demand
handling

IEC 61850
identification
ETPMMTR

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number
-

937
Technical reference manual

Section 16
Metering
16.2.1

1MRK506312-UUS C

Introduction
Outputs from the Measurements (CVMMXN) function can be used to calculate energy
consumption. Active as well as reactive values are calculated in import and export
direction. Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values
are also calculated by the function.

16.2.2

Principle of operation
The instantaneous output values of active and reactive power from the Measurements
(CVMMXN) function block are used and integrated over a selected time tEnergy to
measure the integrated energy. The energy values (in MWh and MVarh) are available
as output signals and also as pulsed output which can be connected to a pulse counter.
Outputs are available for forward as well as reverse direction. The accumulated energy
values can be reset from the local HMI reset menu or with input signal RSTACC.
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set
time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over
communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXPRFD, MAXPRRD
for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until reset with input
signal RSTDMD or from the local HMI reset menu.
CVMMXN

P_INST
Q_INST

P
Q

TRUE
FALSE
FALSE

ETPMMTR

STACC
RSTACC
RSTDMD

IEC09000106.vsd
IEC09000106 V1 EN

Figure 458:

Connection of Energy calculation and demand handling function

(ETPMMTR) to the Measurements function (CVMMXN)

938
Technical reference manual

Section 16
Metering

1MRK506312-UUS C

16.2.3

Function block
ETPMMTR
P
Q
STACC
RSTACC
RSTDMD

ACCST
EAFPULSE
EARPULSE
ERFPULSE
ERRPULSE
EAFALM
EARALM
ERFALM
ERRALM
EAFACC
EARACC
ERFACC
ERRACC
MAXPAFD
MAXPARD
MAXPRFD
MAXPRRD
IEC07000120-2-en.vsd

IEC07000120 V2 EN

Figure 459:

16.2.4

ETPMMTR function block

Input and output signals

Table 578:
Name

ETPMMTR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

REAL

Measured active power

REAL

Measured reactive power

STACC

BOOLEAN

Start to accumulate energy values

RSTACC

BOOLEAN

Reset of accumulated enery reading

RSTDMD

BOOLEAN

Reset of maximum demand reading

Table 579:
Name

ETPMMTR Output signals

Type

Description

ACCST

BOOLEAN

Start of accumulating energy values.

EAFPULSE

BOOLEAN

Accumulated forward active energy pulse

EARPULSE

BOOLEAN

Accumulated reverse active energy pulse

ERFPULSE

BOOLEAN

Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse

ERRPULSE

BOOLEAN

Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse

EAFALM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set

interval

EARALM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set

interval

Table continues on next page

939
Technical reference manual

Section 16
Metering

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

16.2.5
Table 580:
Name

Type

Description

ERFALM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set

interval

ERRALM

BOOLEAN

Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set

interval

EAFACC

REAL

Accumulated forward active energy value in Ws

EARACC

REAL

Accumulated reverse active energy value in Ws

ERFACC

REAL

Accumulated forward reactive energy value in VArS

ERRACC

REAL

Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in VArS

MAXPAFD

REAL

Maximum forward active power demand value for set

interval

MAXPARD

REAL

Maximum reverse active power demand value for set

interval

MAXPRFD

REAL

Maximum forward reactive power demand value for

set interval

MAXPRRD

REAL

Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse

direction

Setting parameters
ETPMMTR Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation Enable/Disable

StartAcc

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Activate the accumulation of energy values

tEnergy

1 Minute
5 Minutes
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes

1 Minute

Time interval for energy calculation

tEnergyOnPls

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

1.000

Energy accumulated pulse ON time in secs

tEnergyOffPls

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.500

Energy accumulated pulse OFF time in secs

EAFAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

MWh

0.001

100.000

Pulse quantity for active forward accumulated

energy value

EARAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

MWh

0.001

100.000

Pulse quantity for active reverse accumulated

energy value

ERFAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

MVArh

0.001

100.000

Pulse quantity for reactive forward

accumulated energy value

ERVAccPlsQty

0.001 - 10000.000

MVArh

0.001

100.000

Pulse quantity for reactive reverse

accumulated energy value

940
Technical reference manual

Section 16
Metering

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 581:

ETPMMTR Non group settings (advanced)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

EALim

0.001 10000000000.000

MWh

0.001

1000000.000

Active energy limit

ERLim

0.001 10000000000.000

MVArh

0.001

1000.000

Reactive energy limit

DirEnergyAct

Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of active energy flow Forward/

Reverse

DirEnergyReac

Forward
Reverse

Forward

Direction of reactive energy flow Forward/

Reverse

EnZeroClamp

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Enable of zero point clamping detection

function

LevZeroClampP

0.001 - 10000.000

MW

0.001

10.000

Zero point clamping level at active Power

LevZeroClampQ

0.001 - 10000.000

MVAr

0.001

10.000

Zero point clamping level at reactive Power

EAFPrestVal

0.000 - 10000.000

MWh

0.001

0.000

Preset Initial value for forward active energy

EARPrestVal

0.000 - 10000.000

MWh

0.001

0.000

Preset Initial value for reverse active energy

ERFPresetVal

0.000 - 10000.000

MVArh

0.001

0.000

Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy

ERVPresetVal

0.000 - 10000.000

MVArh

0.001

0.000

Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy

941
Technical reference manual

942

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 17

Station communication

About this chapter

This chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to the
substation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, their
setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are
included for each function.

17.1

Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to one or
many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA)
bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.
Following communication protocols are available:

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
LON communication protocol
SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
DNP3.0 communication protocol

Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

17.2

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

17.2.1

Introduction
The IED is equipped with single or double optical Ethernet rear ports (order
dependent) for IEC 61850-8-1 station bus communication. The IEC 61850-8-1
communication is also possible from the optical Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1
protocol allows intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange
information and simplifies system engineering. Peer-to-peer communication according
to GOOSE is part of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.

943
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
17.2.2
Table 582:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
IEC61850-8-1 Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Off
On

Off

Operation Off/On

GOOSE

Front
OEM311_AB
OEM311_CD

OEM311_AB

Port for GOOSE communication

17.2.3

Technical data
Table 583:

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Function

Value

Protocol

IEC 61850-8-1

Communication speed for the IEDs

100BASE-FX

Protocol

IEC 6085103

Communication speed for the IEDs

9600 or 19200 Bd

Protocol

DNP3.0

Communication speed for the IEDs

30019200 Bd

Protocol

TCP/IP, Ethernet

Communication speed for the IEDs

100 Mbit/s

17.2.4

IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions SPGGIO,

SP16GGIO

17.2.4.1

Introduction
IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (SPGGIO) is used to send one single
logical signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.

17.2.4.2

Principle of operation
Upon receiving a signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions
(SPGGIO) function sends the signal over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system
that requests this signal. To get the signal, PCM600 must be used to define which
function block in which equipment or system should receive this information.

944
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

17.2.4.3

Function block
SPGGIO
BLOCK
^IN
IEC07000124-2-en.vsd
IEC07000124 V2 EN

Figure 460:

SPGGIO function block

SP16GGIO
BLOCK
^IN1
^IN2
^IN3
^IN4
^IN5
^IN6
^IN7
^IN8
^IN9
^IN10
^IN11
^IN12
^IN13
^IN14
^IN15
^IN16
IEC07000125-2-en.vsd
IEC07000125 V2 EN

Figure 461:

17.2.4.4

SP16GGIO function block

Input and output signals

Table 584:
Name

SPGGIO Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IN

BOOLEAN

Input status

Table 585:
Name

SP16GGIO Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

IN1

BOOLEAN

Input 1 status

IN2

BOOLEAN

Input 2 status

IN3

BOOLEAN

Input 3 status

IN4

BOOLEAN

Input 4 status

IN5

BOOLEAN

Input 5 status

IN6

BOOLEAN

Input 6 status

Table continues on next page

945
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

17.2.4.5

Type

Default

Description

IN7

BOOLEAN

Input 7 status

IN8

BOOLEAN

Input 8 status

IN9

BOOLEAN

Input 9 status

IN10

BOOLEAN

Input 10 status

IN11

BOOLEAN

Input 11 status

IN12

BOOLEAN

Input 12 status

IN13

BOOLEAN

Input 13 status

IN14

BOOLEAN

Input 14 status

IN15

BOOLEAN

Input 15 status

IN16

BOOLEAN

Input 16 status

Setting parameters
The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

17.2.5

IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions MVGGIO

IEC61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGGIO) function is used to send
the instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an
analog value and to permit measurement supervision on that value.

17.2.5.1

Principle of operation
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, IEC61850 generic communication I/O
functions (MVGGIO) will give the instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as
output values. In the same time, it will send over IEC 61850-8-1 the value, to other
IEC 61850 clients in the substation.

17.2.5.2

Function block
MVGGIO
BLOCK
^IN

^VALUE
RANGE
IEC05000408-2-en.vsd

IEC05000408 V2 EN

Figure 462:

MVGGIO function block

946
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

17.2.5.3

Input and output signals

Table 586:

MVGGIO Input signals

Name

Type

Block of function

IN

REAL

Analogue input value

MVGGIO Output signals

Name

Table 588:

Description

BOOLEAN

Table 587:

17.2.5.4

Default

BLOCK

Type

Description

VALUE

REAL

Magnitude of deadband value

RANGE

INTEGER

Range

Setting parameters
MVGGIO Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MV db

1 - 300

Type

10

Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In % of range,

Int Db: In %s

MV zeroDb

0 - 100000

m%

500

Zero point clamping in 0.001% of range

MV hhLim

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

90.000

High High limit

MV hLim

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

80.000

High limit

MV lLim

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

-80.000

Low limit

MV llLim

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

-90.000

Low Low limit

MV min

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

-100.000

Minimum value

MV max

-10000000000.000
- 10000000000.000

0.001

100.000

Maximum value

MV dbType

Cyclic
Dead band
Int deadband

Dead band

Reporting type

MV limHys

0.000 - 100.000

0.001

5.000

Hysteresis value in % of range (common for

all limits)

17.2.6

IEC 61850-8-1 redundant station bus communication

947
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function description

17.2.6.1

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Parallel Redundancy Protocol Status

PRPSTATUS

Duo driver configuration

DUODRV

Introduction
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 and IEC
62439-3 Edition 2 are available as options in 670 series IEDs. IEC 62439-3 parallel
redundant protocol is an optional quantity and the selection is made at ordering.
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC 62439-3 uses both port AB
and port CD on the OEM module.
Select IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 protocol at the time of ordering when an
existing redundant station bus DuoDriver installation is extended.
Select IEC 62439-3 Edition 2 protocol at the time of ordering for new
installations with redundant station bus.
IEC 62439-3 Edition 1 is NOT compatible with IEC 62439-3 Edition 2.

17.2.6.2

Principle of operation
The redundant station bus communication (DUODRV) is configured using the local
HMI. The settings for DUODRV are also visible in PST in PCM600.
The communication is performed in parallel, that is the same data package is
transmitted on both channels simultaneously. The received package identity from one
channel is compared with data package identity from the other channel, if the same, the
last package is discarded.
PRPSTATUS function block supervise the redundant communication on the two
channels. If no data package has been received on one (or both) channels within the
last 10 s, the output LAN-A-STATUS and/or LAN-B-STATUS is set to indicate error.

948
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Station Control System

Redundancy
Supervision
Duo

Data

Data

Switch A

Switch B

1 2

1 2

Data

Data

AB
Configuration

CD

IED

OEM

DUODRV

PRPSTATUS

IEC09000758-2-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V2 EN

Figure 463:

Redundant station bus

949
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
17.2.6.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block
PRPSTATUS
LAN-A-Status
LAN-B-Status
IEC09000757-1-en.vsd
IEC09000757 V1 EN

Figure 464:

17.2.6.4

PRPSTATUS function block

Output signals
Table 589:

PRPSTATUS Output signals

Name

17.2.6.5
Table 590:
Name

Type

Description

LAN-A-Status

BOOLEAN

Channel A status

LAN-B-Status

BOOLEAN

Channel B status

Setting parameters
DUODRV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Disable/Enable Operation

IPAddress

0 - 18

IP
Address

192.168.7.10

IP-Address

IPMask

0 - 18

IP
Address

255.255.255.0

IP-Mask

17.3

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

17.3.1

Introduction
The IEC 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to
communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly
known as Merging Units (MU). The physical interface in the IED that is used for the
communication is the OEM modules (the two port module version) "CD" port.

17.3.2

Principle of operation
The ABB merging units (MUs) are situated close to primary equipment, like circuit
breakers, isolators, etc. The MUs have the capability to gather measured values from

950
Technical reference manual

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 17
Station communication

measuring transformers, non-conventional transducers or both. The gathered data are

then transmitted to subscribers over the process bus, utilizing the IEC 61850-9-2LE
protocol.
ABB "physical MU" contains up to 3 logical MUs, each capable of sampling 4 currents
and 4 voltages.
The IED communicates with the MUs over the process bus via the OEM module port
"CD". For the user, the MU appears in the IED as a normal analogue input module and
is engineered in the very same way.

951
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

IED
Application

SMAI1
BLOCK
DFTSPFC
^GRP1L1
^GRP1L2
^GRP1L3
^GRP1N
TYPE

Station Wide
GPS Clock

Preprocessing blocks
SMAI

SPFCOUT
AI3P
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AIN

Splitter
Electrical-toOptical Converter
1PPS

MU1 (Logic MU) MU2 (Logic MU)

OEM Module
CD

IEC61850-9-2LE

Ethernet Switch
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE

ABB
Merging
Unit

Combi
Sensor

1PPS

ABB
Merging
Unit

1PPS

Combi
Sensor

en08000071-2.vsd
IEC08000071 V2 EN

Figure 465:

Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from merging

units via process bus IEC 61850-9-2LE with PPS synchronization

952
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

IED
Application

Preprocessing blocks
SMAI

Station Wide
GPS Clock

Preprocessing blocks
SMAI

MU1

MU2

Splitter
Electrical-toOptical Converter

1PPS
TRM module

OEM Module
CD

110 V

1A

1A

IEC61850-9-2LE

Ethernet Switch
IEC61850-9-2LE
IEC61850-9-2LE

ABB
Merging
Unit

CT

Combi
Sensor

ABB
Merging
Unit

1PPS

CT

1PPS

Combi
Sensor

Conventional VT
en08000072-2.vsd
IEC08000072 V2 EN

Figure 466:

Example of signal path for sampled analogue values from MU and

conventional CT/VT

953
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

The function has the following alarm signals:

MUDATA: Indicates when sample sequence needs to be realigned. that is the

application soon needs to be restarted. The signal is raised to 2 s before the
application is restarted.
SYNCH: Indicates that the time quality of the hardware is out of the set value
from parameter synchAccLevel (1 s, 4 s or unspecified) and the parameter
AppSynch is set to Synch. In case of AppSynch is set to NoSynch the SYNCH
output will never go high.
SMPLLOST: Indicates that more than one sample has been lost/been marked
invalid/ overflow/ been marked failed, and the sample has thereafter been
substituted. When SMPLLOST is high, protection is blocked.
MUSYNCH: Indicates that the MU connected is not synchronized. Received from
quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.
TESTMODE: Indicates that the MU connected is in TestMode. Received from
quality flag in datastream. No IED setting affects this signal.

Timeout
TSYNCERR Indicates that there is some timeout on any configured time source or the
time quality is worse than specified in SynchAccLevel. The timeout is individually
specified per time source (PPS, IRIG-B, SNTP etc.) See section "Time synchronization"
Blocking condition
Blocking of protection functions is indicated by (SAMPLOST is high) or (MUSYNCH
is high and AppSynch is set to Synch) or (SYNCH is high)
Application synch is not required for differential protection based on ECHO mode. A
missing PPS however will lead to a drift between MU and IED. Therefore protection
functions in this case will be blocked.

17.3.3

Consequence on accuracy for power measurement functions

when using signals from IEC 61850-9-2LE communication
The Power measurement functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU)
contains correction factors to account for the non-linearity in the input circuits, mainly
in the input transformers, when using direct analogue connection to the IED.
The IED will use the same correction factors also when feeding the IED with analog
signals over IEC 61850-9-2LE. Since the signals via IEC 61850-9-2LE are not subject
to the same non-linearity errors this will cause an inaccuracy in the measured values.
For voltage signals the correction factors are less than 0.05% of the measured value
and no angle compensation why the impact on reported value can be ignored.

954
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

For current signals the correction factors will cause a not insignificant impact on the
reported values at low currents. The correction factors are +2.4% and -3.6 degrees at
signal levels below 5% of set base current, +0.6% and -1.12 degrees at signal level
30% of set base current and 0% and -0.44 degrees at signal levels above 100% of set
base current. Between the calibration points 5%, 30% and 100% of set base current,
linear interpolation is used. Since the output from the Power measurement function is
used as an input for the Energy measuring function (ETPMMTR) the above described
impact will also be valid for the output values for ETPMMTR.

17.3.4

Function block
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The
signals appear only in the SMT tool when merging units (MU) are
included in the configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT
tool they can be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED
and used internally in the configuration.

17.3.5

Output signals
Table 591:
Name

MU1_4I_4U Output signals

Type

Description

I1

STRING

Analogue input I1

I2

STRING

Analogue input I2

I3

STRING

Analogue input I3

I4

STRING

Analogue input I4

V1

STRING

Analogue input U1

V2

STRING

Analogue input U2

V3

STRING

Analogue input U3

V4

STRING

Analogue input U4

MUDATA

BOOLEAN

Fatal error, serious data loss

SYNCH

BOOLEAN

MU clock synchronized to same clock as IED

SMPLLOST

BOOLEAN

Sample lost

MUSYNCH

BOOLEAN

Synchronization lost in MU

TESTMODE

BOOLEAN

MU in test mode

955
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
17.3.6
Table 592:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SVId

0 - 35

ABB_MU0101

MU identifier

SmplGrp

0 - 65535

Sampling group

CT_WyePoint1

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CT_WyePoint2

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CT_WyePoint3

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

CT_WyePoint4

FromObject
ToObject

ToObject

ToObject= towards protected object,

FromObject= the opposite

Table 593:
Name
SynchMode

17.3.7

MU1_4I_4U Non group settings (advanced)

Values (Range)
NoSynch
Init
Operation

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Synchronization mode

Technical data
Table 594:

IEC 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

Functions

Value

Protocol

IEC 61850-9-2LE

Communication speed for the IEDs

100BASE-FX

17.4

LON communication protocol

17.4.1

Introduction
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operators workplace,
from the control center and also from other terminals.
LON communication protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3
from Echelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks.
These networks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (few

956
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

bytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, low maintenance,

multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports the needs of
applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows the reference
model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the International
Standardization Organization (ISO).
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
For other addresses, refer to section "Related documents".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with LON communication protocol in general.

17.4.2

Principle of operation
The speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. With
protection and control devices, fibre optic media is used, which enables the use of the
maximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where all the
devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The own subnet
and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes per one subnet).
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent to
the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example,
interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages,
such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals.
Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events and
explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for multimaster implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the terminals
can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network variables.

Introduction of LON protocol

For more information, refer to LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and
Control, Users manual and Technical description.

LON protocol
Configuration of LON
Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks
957
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

network, is easily accessible on a single tool program. For more information, refer to
the operator's manual.
Activate LON Communication
Activate LON communication in the Parameter Setting tool under Main menu/
Communication/ SLM configuration/ Rear optical LON port/ Horizontal
communication, where Operation must be set to ON.
Add LON Device Types LNT
A new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installing
the device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDT
670 series package version 1p2 r03.
LON net address
To establish a LON connection with the 670 series IEDs, the IED has to be given a
unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This is
accomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.
Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices and
protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed process
data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter data and
disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using explicit messages.
Events and indications
Events sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H)
with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal is
changed in the IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmitted from
terminal.
Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:20 in the
670 series IEDs. The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 595
shows the LON addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses
to the other inputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For
example, input 15 on event block EVENT:17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications only the first eight inputs 18 must be used. Inputs 916 can be
used for other type of events at the same event block.
As basic, three event function blocks EVENT:1 to EVENT:3 running with a fast loop
time (3 ms) is available in the 670 series IEDs. The remaining event function blocks
EVENT:4 to EVENT:9 runs with a loop time on 8 ms and EVENT:10 to EVENT:20
runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event blocks are used to send binary signals,
integers, real time values like analogue data from measuring functions and mA input
modules as well as pulse counter signals.
958
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

16 pulse counter value function blocks PCGGIO:1 to PCGGIO:16 and 24 mA input

service values function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the
670 series IEDs.
The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 595
Table 595:
Function block

LON adresses for Event functions

First LON address in
function block

EVENT:1

1024

EVENT:2

1040

EVENT:3

1056

EVENT:4

1072

EVENT:5

1088

EVENT:6

1104

EVENT:7

1120

EVENT:8

1136

EVENT:9

1152

EVENT:10

1168

EVENT:11

1184

EVENT:12

1200

EVENT:13

1216

EVENT:14

1232

EVENT:15

1248

EVENT:16

1264

EVENT:17

1280

EVENT:18

1296

EVENT:19

1312

EVENT:20

1328

Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from Parameter Setting Tool
(PST) under: Settings/ General Settings/ Monitoring / EventFunction as follows:

No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

959
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event
function block.
Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always
reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other
Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event
masked in the event function block.
Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the
event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is
done in the event function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for the
first 8 inputs on an event function block.

00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0

01 generates an open event with the read status 1
10 generates a close event with the read status 2
11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the connected
function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the event
function block.
Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent SPAbus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character message
following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent using explicit
messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N)
are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only
one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending the
next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, That is,
the function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18 and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPA
addresses are according to table 596.

960
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Horizontal communication

Network variables are used for communication between 500 series and 670 series
IEDs. The supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state
is used to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
Multiple command send function block (MULTICMDSND) is used to pack the
information to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented
for the application by a multiple command function block (MULTICMDRCV). At
horizontal communication the input BOUND on the event function block
(MULTICMDSND) must be set to 1. There are 10 MULTICMDSND and 60
MULTICMDRCV function blocks available. The MULTICMDSND and
MULTICMDRCV function blocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505).
This tool also defines the service and addressing on LON.
This is an overview for configuring the network variables for 670 series IEDs.
Configuration of LON network variables
Configure the Network variables according to the specific application using the LON
network Tool. For more information, refer to LNT 505 in Operation manual. The
following is an example of how to configure network variables concerning, for
example, interlocking between two IEDs.
LON
BAY E1

BAY E3

MULTICMDSND: 7

MULTICMDSND: 9

BAY E4
MULTICMDSND: 9

en05000718.vsd
IEC05000718 V2 EN

Figure 467:

Examples connections between MULTICMDSND and MULTICMDRCV

function blocks in three IEDs

The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From
LNT window select Connections/ NVConnections/ New.

961
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

en05000719.vsd
IEC05000719 V1 EN

Figure 468:

The network variables window in LNT

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either the users can use the dragand-drop method where they can select all nodes in the device window, drag them to
the Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there; or, they
can perform it by selecting the traditional menu, Configuration/ Download.

962
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

en05000720.vsd
IEC05000720 V1 EN

Figure 469:

The download configuration window in LNT

Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC60870-5-103/DNP and

LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can have
connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST, bayonet)
or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available
depending on type of fibre. The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver
input, and the outgoing optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic
cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and
connection of the optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on
the module.
Table 596:

SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

BL_CMD

SCSWI01

1 I 5115

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI02

1 I 5139

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI02

1 I 5161

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI04

1 I 5186

SPA parameters for block

command

Table continues on next page

963
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

BL_CMD

SCSWI05

1 I 5210

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI06

1 I 5234

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI07

1 I 5258

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI08

1 I 5283

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI09

1 I 5307

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI10

1 I 5331

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI11

1 I 5355

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI12

1 I 5379

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI13

1 I 5403

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI14

1 I 5427

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI15

1 I 5451

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI16

1 I 5475

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI17

1 I 5499

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI18

1 I 5523

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI19

1 I 5545

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI20

1 I 5571

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI21

1 I 5594

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI22

1 I 5619

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI23

1 I 5643

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI24

1 I 5667

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI25

1 I 5691

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI26

1 I 5715

SPA parameters for block

command

Table continues on next page

964
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

BL_CMD

SCSWI27

1 I 5739

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI28

1 I 5763

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI29

1 I 5787

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI30

1 I 5811

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI31

1 I 5835

SPA parameters for block

command

BL_CMD

SCSWI32

1 I 5859

SPA parameters for block

command

CANCEL

SCSWI01

1 I 5107

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI02

1 I 5131

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI03

1 I 5153

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI04

1 I 5178

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI05

1 I 5202

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI06

1 I 5226

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI07

1 I 5250

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI08

1 I 5275

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI09

1 I 5299

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI10

1 I 5323

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI11

1 I 5347

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI12

1 I 5371

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI13

1 I 5395

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI14

1 I 5419

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI15

1 I 5443

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI16

1 I 5467

SPA parameters for cancel

command

Table continues on next page

965
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

CANCEL

SCSWI17

1 I 5491

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI18

1 I 5515

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI19

1 I 5537

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI20

1 I 5563

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI21

1 I 5586

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI22

1 I 5611

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI23

1 I 5635

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI24

1 I 5659

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI25

1 I 5683

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI26

1 I 5707

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI27

1 I 5731

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI28

1 I 5755

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI29

1 I 5779

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI30

1 I 5803

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI31

1 I 5827

SPA parameters for cancel

command

CANCEL

SCSWI32

1 I 5851

SPA parameters for cancel

command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01,
SELOpen+ILO=10,
SELClose+ILO=11,
SELOpen+SCO=20,
SELClose+SCO=21,
SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
SELClose+ILO+SCO=31

SCSWI01

1 I 5105

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command
Note: Send select command
before operate command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI02

1 I 5129

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI03

1 I 5151

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI04

1 I 5176

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

Table continues on next page

966
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI05

1 I 5200

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI06

1 I 5224

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI07

1 I 5248

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI08

1 I 5273

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI09

1 I 5297

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI10

1 I 5321

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI11

1 I 5345

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI12

1 I 5369

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI13

1 I 5393

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI14

1 I 5417

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI15

1 I 5441

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI16

1 I 5465

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI17

1 I 5489

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI18

1 I 5513

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI19

1 I 5535

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI20

1 I 5561

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI21

1 I 5584

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI22

1 I 5609

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI23

1 I 5633

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI24

1 I 5657

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI25

1 I 5681

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI26

1 I 5705

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

Table continues on next page

967
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI27

1 I 5729

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI28

1 I 5753

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI29

1 I 5777

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI30

1 I 5801

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI31

1 I 5825

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

SELECTOpen=00,
SELECTClose=01, so on.

SCSWI32

1 I 5849

SPA parameters for select (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01,
ExcOpen+ILO=10,
ExcClose+ILO=11,
ExcOpen+SCO=20,
ExcClose+SCO=21,
ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,
ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31

SCSWI01

1 I 5106

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command
Note: Send select command
before operate command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI02

1 I 5130

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI02

1 I 5152

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI04

1 I 5177

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI05

1 I 5201

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI06

1 I 5225

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI07

1 I 5249

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI08

1 I 5274

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI09

1 I 5298

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI10

1 I 5322

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI11

1 I 5346

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI12

1 I 5370

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI13

1 I 5394

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI14

1 I 5418

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

Table continues on next page

968
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI15

1 I 5442

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI16

1 I 5466

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI17

1 I 5490

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI18

1 I 5514

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI19

1 I 5536

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI20

1 I 5562

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI21

1 I 5585

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI22

1 I 5610

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI23

1 I 5634

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI24

1 I 5658

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI25

1 I 5682

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI26

1 I 5706

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI27

1 I 5730

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI28

1 I 5754

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI29

1 I 5778

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI30

1 I 5802

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI31

1 I 5826

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

ExcOpen=00,
ExcClose=01, so on.

SCSWI32

1 I 5850

SPA parameters for operate (Open/

Close) command

Sub Value

SXCBR01

2 I 7854

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted
Note: Send the value before Enable

Sub Value

SXCBR02

2 I 7866

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR03

2 I 7884

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR04

2 I 7904

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Table continues on next page

969
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Sub Value

SXCBR05

2 I 7923

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR06

2 I 7942

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR07

2 I 7961

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR08

2 I 7980

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR09

3I7

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR10

3 I 26

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR11

3 I 45

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR12

3 I 56

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR13

3 I 74

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR14

3 I 94

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR15

3 I 120

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR16

3 I 133

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR17

3 I 158

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXCBR18

3 I 179

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI01

3 I 196

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI02

3 I 216

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI03

3 I 235

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI04

3 I 254

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI05

3 I 272

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI06

3 I 292

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI07

3 I 310

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI08

3 I 330

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Table continues on next page

970
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Sub Value

SXSWI09

3 I 348

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI10

3 I 359

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI11

3 I 378

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI12

3 I 397

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI13

3 I 416

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI14

3 I 435

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI15

3 I 454

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI16

3 I 473

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI17

3 I 492

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI18

3 I 511

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI19

3 I 530

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI20

3 I 549

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI21

3 I 568

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI22

3 I 587

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI23

3 I 606

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI24

3 I 625

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI25

3 I 644

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI26

3 I 663

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI27

3 I 682

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Value

SXSWI28

3 I 701

SPA parameter for position to be

substituted

Sub Enable

SXCBR01

2 I 7855

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command
Note: Send the Value before
Enable

Table continues on next page

971
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Sub Enable

SXCBR02

2 I 7865

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR03

2 I 7885

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR04

2 I 7903

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR05

2 I 7924

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR06

2 I 7941

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR07

2 I 7962

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR08

2 I 7979

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR09

3I8

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR10

3 I 25

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR11

3 I 46

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR12

3 I 55

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR13

3 I 75

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR14

3 I 93

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR15

3 I 121

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR16

3 I 132

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR17

3 I 159

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXCBR18

3 I 178

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI01

3 I 197

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI02

3 I 215

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI03

3 I 234

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI04

3 I 252

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI05

3 I 271

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Table continues on next page

972
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Sub Enable

SXSWI06

3 I 290

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI07

3 I 309

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI08

3 I 328

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI09

3 I 347

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI10

3 I 360

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI11

3I 379

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI12

3 I 398

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI13

3 I 417

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI14

3 I 436

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI15

3 I 455

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI16

3 I 474

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI17

3 I 493

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI18

3 I 512

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI19

3 I 531

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI20

3 I 550

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI21

3 I 569

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI22

3 I 588

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI23

3 I 607

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI24

3 I 626

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI25

3 I 645

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI26

3 I 664

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Sub Enable

SXSWI27

3 I 683

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Table continues on next page

973
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Sub Enable

SXSWI28

3 I 702

SPA parameter for substitute

enable command

Update Block

SXCBR01

2 I 7853

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR02

2 I 7864

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR03

2 I 7883

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR04

2 I 7905

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR05

2 I 7922

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR06

2 I 7943

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR07

2 I 7960

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR08

2 I 7981

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR09

3I6

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR10

3 I 27

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR11

3 I 44

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR12

3 I 57

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR13

3 I 73

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR14

3 I 92

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR15

3 I 122

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR16

3 I 131

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR17

3 I 160

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXCBR18

3 I 177

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI01

3 I 198

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI02

3 I 214

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI03

3 I 236

SPA parameter for update block

command

Table continues on next page

974
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Update Block

SXSWI04

3 I 253

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI05

3 I 273

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI06

3 I 291

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI07

3 I 311

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI08

3 I 329

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI09

3 I 349

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI10

3 I 358

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI11

3 I 377

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI12

3 I 396

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI13

3 I 415

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI14

3 I 434

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI15

3 I 453

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI16

3 I 472

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI17

3 I 491

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI18

3 I 510

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI19

3 I 529

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI20

3 I 548

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI21

3 I 567

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI22

3 I 586

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI23

3 I 605

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI24

3 I 624

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI25

3 I 643

SPA parameter for update block

command

Table continues on next page

975
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

17.4.3
Table 597:
Name
Operation

Table 598:
Name

Function
block

SPA
address

Description

Update Block

SXSWI26

3 I 662

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI27

3 I 681

SPA parameter for update block

command

Update Block

SXSWI28

3 I 700

SPA parameter for update block

command

Setting parameters
HORZCOMM Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Disabled
Enabled

Step

Default

Description

Disabled

Operation

ADE Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation

TimerClass

Slow
Normal
Fast

Slow

Timer class

17.4.4

Technical data
Table 599:

LON communication protocol

Function

Value

Protocol

LON

Communication speed

1.25 Mbit/s

17.5

SPA communication protocol

17.5.1

Introduction
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available. For
other addresses, refer to section "Related documents".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in general.

976
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

17.5.2

Principle of operation
The SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 data
bits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. For more
information on recommended baud rate for each type of IED, refer to Technical
reference manual. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocol

The basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiated need
to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slaves and,
consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data to the
slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling (for
example, for event information) or only on demand.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information to
the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common a
broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit and
receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocol

The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data to
an IED with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MIM3 to MIM16) are found in
table 600.
Table 600:

SPA addresses for the MIM function

Function block

SPA address

MIM3-CH1

4-O-6508

MIM3-CH2

4-O-6511

MIM3-CH3

4-O-6512

MIM3-CH4

4-O-6515

MIM3-CH5

4-O-6516

MIM3-CH6

4-O-6519

MIM4-CH1

4-O-6527

MIM4-CH2

4-O-6530

MIM4-CH3

4-O-6531

MIM4-CH4

4-O-6534

MIM4-CH5

4-O-6535

MIM4-CH6

4-O-6538

MIM5-CH1

4-O-6546

MIM5-CH2

4-O-6549

Table continues on next page

977
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
Function block

1MRK506312-UUS C

SPA address

MIM5-CH3

4-O-6550

MIM5-CH4

4-O-6553

MIM5-CH5

4-O-6554

MIM5-CH6

4-O-6557

MIM6-CH1

4-O-6565

MIM6-CH2

4-O-6568

MIM6-CH3

4-O-6569

MIM6-CH4

4-O-6572

MIM6-CH5

4-O-6573

MIM6-CH6

4-O-6576

MIM7-CH1

4-O-6584

MIM7-CH2

4-O-6587

MIM7-CH3

4-O-6588

MIM7-CH4

4-O-6591

MIM7-CH5

4-O-6592

MIM7-CH6

4-O-6595

MIM8-CH1

4-O-6603

MIM8-CH2

4-O-6606

MIM8-CH3

4-O-6607

MIM8-CH4

4-O-6610

MIM8-CH5

4-O-6611

MIM8-CH6

4-O-6614

MIM9-CH1

4-O-6622

MIM9-CH2

4-O-6625

MIM9-CH3

4-O-6626

MIM9-CH4

4-O-6629

MIM9-CH5

4-O-6630

MIM9-CH6

4-O-6633

MIM10-CH1

4-O-6641

MIM10-CH2

4-O-6644

MIM10-CH3

4-O-6645

MIM10-CH4

4-O-6648

MIM10-CH5

4-O-6649

MIM10-CH6

4-O-6652

MIM11-CH1

4-O-6660

MIM11-CH2

4-O-6663

Table continues on next page

978
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function block

SPA address

MIM11-CH3

4-O-6664

MIM11-CH4

4-O-6667

MIM11-CH5

4-O-6668

MIM11-CH6

4-O-6671

MIM12-CH1

4-O-6679

MIM12-CH2

4-O-6682

MIM12-CH3

4-O-6683

MIM12-CH4

4-O-6686

MIM12-CH5

4-O-6687

MIM12-CH6

4-O-6690

MIM13-CH1

4-O-6698

MIM13-CH2

4-O-6701

MIM13-CH3

4-O-6702

MIM13-CH4

4-O-6705

MIM13-CH5

4-O-6706

MIM13-CH6

4-O-6709

MIM14-CH1

4-O-6717

MIM14-CH2

4-O-6720

MIM14-CH3

4-O-6721

MIM14-CH4

4-O-6724

MIM14-CH5

4-O-6725

MIM14-CH6

4-O-6728

MIM15-CH1

4-O-6736

MIM15-CH2

4-O-6739

MIM15-CH3

4-O-6740

MIM15-CH4

4-O-6743

MIM15-CH5

4-O-6744

MIM15-CH6

4-O-6747

MIM16-CH1

4-O-6755

MIM16-CH2

4-O-6758

MIM16-CH3

4-O-6759

MIM16-CH4

4-O-6762

MIM16-CH5

4-O-6763

MIM16-CH6

4-O-6766

979
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PCGGIO:1 to PCGGIO:16 are found
in table 601.
Table 601:
Function block

SPA addresses for the PCGGIO function

SPA address CNT_VAL

SPA address NEW_VAL

PCGGIO:1

3-O-5834

3-O-5833

PCGGIO:2

3-O-5840

3-O-5839

PCGGIO:3

3-O-5846

3-O-5845

PCGGIO:4

3-O-5852

3-O-5851

PCGGIO:5

3-O-5858

3-O-5857

PCGGIO:6

3-O-5864

3-O-5863

PCGGIO:7

3-O-5870

3-O-5869

PCGGIO:8

3-O-5876

3-O-5875

PCGGIO:9

3-O-5882

3-O-5881

PCGGIO:10

3-O-5888

3-O-5887

PCGGIO:11

3-O-5894

3-O-5893

PCGGIO:12

3-O-5900

3-O-5899

PCGGIO:13

3-O-5906

3-O-5905

PCGGIO:14

3-O-5912

3-O-5911

PCGGIO:15

3-O-5918

3-O-5917

PCGGIO:16

3-O-5924

3-O-5923

I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function
block are used, that is, the addresses for BI1 BI16. For SPA addresses, refer to
section "Related documents".
Single command, 16 signals
The IEDs can be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substation
automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has 16
outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in
switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also be used.
Single command, 16 signals function consists of three function blocks; SINGLECMD:
1 to SINGLECMD:3 for 16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. For Single command, 16 signals function
block, SINGLECMD:1 to SINGLECMD:3, the address is for the first output. The other

980
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

outputs follow consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the
SINGLECMD:2 function block has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for Single command, 16 signals functions SINGLECMD:1 to
SINGLECMD:3 are found in table 602.
Table 602:

SPA addresses for SINGLECMD function

Function block

SPA address CMD Input

SPA address CMD output

SINGLECMD1-Cmd1

4-S-4639

5-O-511

SINGLECMD1-Cmd2

4-S-4640

5-O-512

SINGLECMD1-Cmd3

4-S-4641

5-O-513

SINGLECMD1-Cmd4

4-S-4642

5-O-514

SINGLECMD1-Cmd5

4-S-4643

5-O-515

SINGLECMD1-Cmd6

4-S-4644

5-O-516

SINGLECMD1-Cmd7

4-S-4645

5-O-517

SINGLECMD1-Cmd8

4-S-4646

5-O-518

SINGLECMD1-Cmd9

4-S-4647

5-O-519

SINGLECMD1-Cmd10

4-S-4648

5-O-520

SINGLECMD1-Cmd11

4-S-4649

5-O-521

SINGLECMD1-Cmd12

4-S-4650

5-O-522

SINGLECMD1-Cmdt13

4-S-4651

5-O-523

SINGLECMD1-Cmd14

4-S-4652

5-O-524

SINGLECMD1-Cmd15

4-S-4653

5-O-525

SINGLECMD1-Cmd16

4-S-4654

5-O-526

SINGLECMD2-Cmd1

4-S-4672

5-O-527

SINGLECMD2-Cmd2

4-S-4673

5-O-528

SINGLECMD2-Cmdt3

4-S-4674

5-O-529

SINGLECMD2-Cmd4

4-S-4675

5-O-530

SINGLECMD2-Cmd5

4-S-4676

5-O-531

SINGLECMD2-Cmd6

4-S-4677

5-O-532

SINGLECMD2-Cmd7

4-S-4678

5-O-533

SINGLECMD2-Cmd8

4-S-4679

5-O-534

SINGLECMD2-Cmd9

4-S-4680

5-O-535

SINGLECMD2-Cmd10

4-S-4681

5-O-536

SINGLECMD2-Cmd11

4-S-4682

5-O-537

SINGLECMD2-Cmd12

4-S-4683

5-O-538

SINGLECMD2-Cmd13

4-S-4684

5-O-539

SINGLECMD2-Cmd14

4-S-4685

5-O-540

Table continues on next page

981
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
Function block

1MRK506312-UUS C

SPA address CMD Input

SPA address CMD output

SINGLECMD2-Cmd15

4-S-4686

5-O-541

SINGLECMD2-Cmd16

4-S-4687

5-O-542

SINGLECMD3-Cmd1

4-S-4705

5-O-543

SINGLECMD3-Cmd2

4-S-4706

5-O-544

SINGLECMD3-Cmd3

4-S-4707

5-O-545

SINGLECMD3-Cmd4

4-S-4708

5-O-546

SINGLECMD3-Cmd5

4-S-4709

5-O-547

SINGLECMD3-Cmd6

4-S-4710

5-O-548

SINGLECMD3-Cmd7

4-S-4711

5-O-549

SINGLECMD3-Cmd8

4-S-4712

5-O-550

SINGLECMD3-Cmd9

4-S-4713

5-O-551

SINGLECMD3-Cmd10

4-S-4714

5-O-552

SINGLECMD3-Cmd11

4-S-4715

5-O-553

SINGLECMD3-Cmd12

4-S-4716

5-O-554

SINGLECMD3-Cmd13

4-S-4717

5-O-555

SINGLECMD3-Cmd14

4-S-4718

5-O-556

SINGLECMD3-Cmd15

4-S-4719

5-O-557

SINGLECMD3-Cmd16

4-S-4720

5-O-558

Figure 470 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection IED
for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the IED normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 OUT16 in SINGLECMD:1
are shown in table 602.

982
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

PULSETIMER

SINGLECMD
BLOCK

INPUT

^OUT1
^OUT2

#1.000

OUT

To output board, CLOSE

^OUT3
^OUT4
^OUT5
^OUT6
^OUT8
^OUT9
^OUT10
^OUT11

PULSETIMER

AND

^OUT7
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4N

OUT
NOUT

INPUT
#1.000

OUT

To output board, OPEN

^OUT12
^OUT13
^OUT14
^OUT15
^OUT16

SYNCH OK

IEC05000717-2-en.vsd
IEC05000717 V2 EN

Figure 470:

Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of a

circuit breaker

The MODE input defines if the output signals from SINGLECMD:1 is off, steady or
pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting / General
Settings / Control / Commands / Single Command.
Event function
Event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (for example,
operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event
list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input
channels. All the internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module, while
the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are
produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for
both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a
buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event
in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the IED, Terminal
Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Setting / General Setting / Monitoring / Event Function as follows:

No events
OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria for
integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

983
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 603.
Table 603:
Event block

Status and event codes

Status

Single indication1)
Set event
Reset
event

Double indication
Intermedi Closed 10 Open 01 Undefined
ate 00
11

EVENT:1
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6
Input 7
Input 8
Input 9
Input 10
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
Input 14
Input 15
Input 16

22O1
22O2
22O3
22O4
22O5
22O6
22O7
22O8
22O9
22O10
22O11
22O12
22O13
22O14
22O15
22O16

22E33
22E35
22E37
22E39
22E41
22E43
22E45
22E47
22E49
22E51
22E53
22E55
22E57
22E59
22E61
22E63

22E32
22E34
22E36
22E38
22E40
22E42
22E44
22E46
22E48
22E50
22E52
22E54
22E56
22E58
22E60
22E62

22E0
22E4
22E8
22E12
22E16
22E20
22E24
22E28
-

22E1
22E5
22E9
22E13
22E17
22E21
22E25
22E29
-

22E2
22E6
22E10
22E14
22E18
22E22
22E26
22E30
-

22E3
22E7
22E11
22E15
22E19
22E23
22E27
22E31
-

EVENT:2
EVENT:3
EVENT:20

230..
240..
410..

23E..
24E..
41E..

23E..
24E..
41E..

23E..
24E..
41E..

23E..
23E..
41E..

23E..
24E..
41E..

23E..
24E..
41E..

These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked OFF.
Connection of signals as events
Signals coming from different protection and control functions and must be sent as
events to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Event
function block according to figure 471.

984
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

EVENT
Block
ILRANG
PSTO
UL12RANG
UL23RANG
UL31RANG
3I0RANG
3U0RANG
FALSE

BLOCK
^INPUT1
^INPUT2
^INPUT3
^INPUT4
^INPUT5
^INPUT6
^INPUT7
^INPUT8
^INPUT9
^INPUT10
^INPUT11
^INPUT12
^INPUT13
^INPUT14
^INPUT15
^INPUT16

IEC07000065-2-en.vsd
IEC07000065 V2 EN

Figure 471:

17.5.2.1

Connection of protection signals for event handling

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA /IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can
have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available
depending on type of fibre.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay
special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the
optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installation
and commissioning manual for respective IEDs.

17.5.3

Design
When communicating locally with a computer (PC) in the station, using the rear SPA
port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is:

Optical fibres
Opto/electrical converter for the PC
PC

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware
and telephone modems are needed.

985
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM600.

When communicating between the local HMI and a PC, the only hardware required is
a front-connection cable.

17.5.4
Table 604:
Name

Setting parameters
SPA Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SlaveAddress

1 - 899

30

Slave address

BaudRate

300 Bd
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
38400 Bd

9600 Bd

Baudrate on serial line

Table 605:
Name

LONSPA Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Operation

SlaveAddress

1 - 899

30

Slave address

17.5.5

Technical data
Table 606:

SPA communication protocol

Function

Value

Protocol

SPA

Communication speed

300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd

Slave number

1 to 899

17.6

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

17.6.1

Introduction
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED
communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have
software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

986
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

17.6.2

Principle of operation

17.6.2.1

General
IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial
communication exchanging information with a control system, and with a data transfer
rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology, a primary station is a master and a
secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle.
The master must have software that can interpret IEC 60870-5-103 communication
messages.

Introduction to IEC 608705103 protocol

IEC 60870-5-103 protocol functionality consists of the following functions:

Event handling
Report of analog service values (measurements)
Fault location
Command handling

Autorecloser ON/OFF
Teleprotection ON/OFF
Protection ON/OFF
LED reset
Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)

File transfer (disturbance files)

Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC 60870 standard part
5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103 vendor specific implementation

The signal and setting tables specify the information types supported by the IEDs with
the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
The information types are supported when corresponding functions are included in the
protection and control IED.
Commands in control direction
Commands in control direction, I103IEDCMD
Command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1

987
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.

Information number is defined for each output signals.
Info. no

Message

Supported

19

LED Reset

Yes

23

Activate setting group 1

Yes

24

Activate setting group 2

Yes

25

Activate setting group 3

Yes

26

Activate setting group 4

Yes

Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signals.
Info. no.

Message

Supported

16

Auto-recloser on/off

Yes

17

Teleprotection on/off

Yes

18

Protection on/off

Yes

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMD

Function command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.
Number of instances: 4
Function type for each function block instance in private range is selected with
parameter FunctionType. Default values are defined in private range 1 - 4. One for
each instance.
Information number must be selected for each output signal. Default values are 1 - 8.
Info. no.

Message

Supported

Output signal 01

Yes

Output signal 02

Yes

Output signal 03

Yes

Output signal 04

Yes

Output signal 05

Yes

Table continues on next page

988
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Info. no.

Message

Supported

Output signal 06

Yes

Output signal 07

Yes

Output signal 08

Yes

Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined IED functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each input signals.
Info. no.

Message

Supported

19

LED reset

Yes

20

Monitor direction blocked

No

21

TestMode

22

Local Parameter setting

23

Setting group 1 active

Yes

24

Setting group 2 active

Yes

25

Setting group 3 active

Yes

26

Setting group 4 active

Yes

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDef

Function indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.
Number of instances: 20
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType for each function block
instance in private range. Default values are defined in private range 5 - 24. One for
each instance.
Information number is required for each input signal. Default values are defined in
range 1 - 8.
Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103Superv
Indication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
989
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Information number is defined for output signals.

Ground fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF
Indication block for ground fault in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Info. no.

Message

Supported

48

Ground fault A

No

49

Ground fault B

No

50

Ground fault C

No

51

Ground fault forward

Yes

52

Ground fault reverse

Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDis

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Number of instances: 1
Info. no.

Message

Supported

64

Start L1

Yes

65

Start L2

Yes

66

Start L3

Yes

67

Start IN

Yes

84

General start

Yes

69

Trip L1

Yes

70

Trip L2

Yes

71

Trip L3

Yes

68

General trip

Yes

74

Fault forward/line

Yes

75

Fault reverse/busbar

Yes

78

Zone 1

Yes

Table continues on next page

990
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Info. no.

Message

Supported

79

Zone 2

Yes

80

Zone 3

Yes

81

Zone 4

Yes

82

Zone 5

Yes

76

Signal transmitted

Yes

77

Signal received

Yes

73

SCL, Fault location in ohm

Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStd

Fault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.
The instance type is suitable for line differential, transformer differential, overcurrent
and ground fault protection functions.
FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.
INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.
Number of instances: 1
Info. no.

Message

Supported

64

Start L1

Yes

65

Start L2

Yes

66

Start L3

Yes

67

Start IN

Yes

84

General start

Yes

69

Trip L1

Yes

70

Trip L2

Yes

71

Trip L3

Yes

68

General trip

Yes

74

Fault forward/line

Yes

75

Fault reverse/busbar

Yes

85

Breaker failure

Yes

86

Trip measuring system L1

Yes

87

Trip measuring system L2

Yes

88

Trip measuring system L3

Yes

89

Trip measuring system N

Yes

90

Over current trip I>

Yes

Table continues on next page

991
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
Info. no.

1MRK506312-UUS C

Message

Supported

91

Over current trip I>>

Yes

92

Ground fault trip IN>

Yes

93

Ground fault trip IN>>

Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103AR

Indication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.
Number of instances: 1
Function type is selected with parameter FunctionType.
Information number is defined for each output signal.
Info. no.

Message

Supported

16

Autorecloser active

Yes

17

Teleprotection active

No

18

Protection active

No

128

CB on by Autorecloser

Yes

129

CB on by long-time AR

No

130

Autorecloser blocked

Yes

Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXN.
Measurands in public range, I103Meas
Number of instances: 1
The IED reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
Info. no.

Message

Supported

148

I_A

Yes

144, 145,
148

I_B

Yes

148

I_C

Yes

147

IN, Neutral current

Yes

Table continues on next page

992
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Info. no.

Message

Supported

148

V_A

Yes

148

V_B

Yes

148

V_C

Yes

145, 146

V_A-V_B

Yes

147

UN, Neutral voltage

Yes

146, 148

P, active power

Yes

146, 148

Q, reactive power

Yes

148

f, frequency

Yes

Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsr

Number of instances: 3
Function type parameter for each block in private range. Default values are defined in
private range 25 27. One for each instance.
Information number must be selected for measurands.
Info.

Message

*1)

Meas1

Supported
Yes

Meas2

Yes

Meas3

Yes

Meas4

Yes

Meas5

Yes

Meas6

Yes

Meas7

Yes

Meas8

Yes

Meas9

Yes

1) * User defined information number

Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.
Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:

IA connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block A1RADR

IB connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block A1RADR
IC connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block A1RADR
993

Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block A1RADR

VAE connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block A1RADR
VBE connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block A1RADR
VCE connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block A1RADR
VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block A1RADR

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private
range 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder can be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for
transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the
master) will not be reported to the master again.
When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recorded
disturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances can be
sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. For example, when
a disturbance is deteceted (by other client, for example, SPA) or when a new
disturbance has been recorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.
Deviations from the standard
Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however, some
of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorder in 670
series.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
In list of recorded disturbances (ASDU23) an information element named SOF
(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicates whether:

Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or test
mode.
Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event than
pick-up

994
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information
is always set (hard coded) to:
TP

Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM

Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]

OTEV

Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According to the
standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takes action.
In 670 series FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for each
disturbance.
ASDU26
When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number must indicate fault number
in the power system,that is, a fault in the power system with several trip and autoreclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN must be incremented). NOF is in 670
series, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.
To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the
disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever he
connects to the corresponding input.

Interoperability, physical layer

Supported
Electrical Interface
EIA RS-485

No

number of loads

No

Optical interface
glass fibre

Yes

plastic fibre
Transmission speed
9600 bit/s

Yes

19200 bit/s

Yes

Link Layer
DFC-bit used

Yes

Connectors
connector F-SMA

No

connector BFOC/2.5

Yes

995
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Interoperability, application layer

Supported
Selection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction
ASDU

Yes

Time-tagged message

Yes

Time-tagged message with rel. time

Yes

Measurands I

Yes

Time-tagged message with rel. time

Yes

Identification

Yes

Time synchronization

Yes

End of general interrogation

Yes

Measurands II

Yes

10

Generic data

No

11

Generic identification

No

23

List of recorded disturbances

Yes

26

Ready for transm. of disturbance data

Yes

27

Ready for transm. of a channel

Yes

28

Ready for transm of tags

Yes

29

Transmission of tags

Yes

30

Transmission fo disturbance data

Yes

31

End of transmission

Yes

Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction

ASDU

Yes

Time synchronization

Yes

General interrogation

Yes

10

Generic data

No

20

General command

Yes

21

Generic command

No

24

Order for disturbance data transmission

Yes

25

Acknowledgement for distance data transmission

Yes

Selection of basic application functions

Test mode

No

Blocking of monitoring direction

Yes

Disturbance data

Yes

Private data

Yes

Generic services

No

996
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

17.6.2.2

Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can
have connectors for two plastic fibre cables (snap-in) or two glass fibre cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fibre. Three different types are available
depending on type of fibre.
The incoming optical fibre is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fibre to the TX transmitter output. When the fibre optic cables are laid out, pay
special attention to the instructions concerning the handling and connection of the
optical fibres. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

17.6.3

Function block
BLOCK
FUNTYPE

I103IEDCMD
19-LEDRS
23-GRP1
24-GRP2
25-GRP3
26-GRP4
IEC05000689-2-en.vsd

IEC05000689 V2 EN

I103CMD
BLOCK
FUNTYPE

16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
IEC05000684-2-en.vsd

IEC05000684 V2 EN

I103USRCMD
BLOCK
OUTPUT1
PULSEMOD
OUTPUT2
T
OUTPUT3
FUNTYPE
OUTPUT4
INFNO_1
OUTPUT5
INFNO_2
OUTPUT6
INFNO_3
OUTPUT7
INFNO_4
OUTPUT8
INFNO_5
INFNO_6
INFNO_7
INFNO_8
IEC05000693-2-en.vsd
IEC05000693 V2 EN

997
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
21_TESTM
FUNTYPE
IEC05000688-2-en.vsd
IEC05000688 V2 EN

I103USRDEF
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
FUNTYPE
INFNO_1
INFNO_2
INFNO_3
INFNO_4
INFNO_5
INFNO_6
INFNO_7
INFNO_8
IEC05000694-2-en.vsd
IEC05000694 V2 EN

I103SUPERV
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
FUNTYPE
IEC05000692-2-en.vsd
IEC05000692 V2 EN

I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
FUNTYPE
IEC05000685-2-en.vsd
IEC05000685 V2 EN

998
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

I103FLTDIS
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
84_STGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
74_FW
75_REV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
73_SCL
FLTLOC
ARINPROG
FUNTYPE
IEC05000686-2-en.vsd
IEC05000686 V2 EN

I103FLTSTD
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
84_STGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
74_FW
75_REV
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
FUNTYPE
IEC05000687-2-en.vsd
IEC05000687 V2 EN

I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_UNSU
FUNTYPE
IEC05000683-2-en.vsd
IEC05000683 V2 EN

999
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

I103MEAS
BLOCK
I_A
I_B
I_C
IN
V_A
V_B
V_C
V_AB
V_N
P
Q
F
FUNTYPE
ANSI05000690-2-en.vsd
ANSI05000690 V2 EN

17.6.4

Input and output signals

Table 607:
Name
BLOCK

Table 608:
Name

I103IEDCMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of commands

I103IEDCMD Output signals

Type

Description

19-LEDRS

BOOLEAN

Information number 19, reset LEDs

23-GRP1

BOOLEAN

Information number 23, activate setting group 1

24-GRP2

BOOLEAN

Information number 24, activate setting group 2

25-GRP3

BOOLEAN

Information number 25, activate setting group 3

26-GRP4

BOOLEAN

Information number 26, activate setting group 4

Table 609:
Name
BLOCK

Table 610:
Name

I103CMD Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of commands

I103CMD Output signals

Type

Description

16-AR

BOOLEAN

Information number 16, block of autorecloser

17-DIFF

BOOLEAN

Information number 17, block of differential protection

18-PROT

BOOLEAN

Information number 18, block of protection

1000
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 611:
Name
BLOCK

Table 612:
Name

I103USRCMD Input signals

Type

Default

BOOLEAN

Description
Block of commands

I103USRCMD Output signals

Type

Description

OUTPUT1

BOOLEAN

Command output 1

OUTPUT2

BOOLEAN

Command output 2

OUTPUT3

BOOLEAN

Command output 3

OUTPUT4

BOOLEAN

Command output 4

OUTPUT5

BOOLEAN

Command output 5

OUTPUT6

BOOLEAN

Command output 6

OUTPUT7

BOOLEAN

Command output 7

OUTPUT8

BOOLEAN

Command output 8

Table 613:
Name

I103IED Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

19_LEDRS

BOOLEAN

Information number 19, reset LEDs

23_GRP1

BOOLEAN

Information number 23, setting group 1 is active

24_GRP2

BOOLEAN

Information number 24, setting group 2 is active

25_GRP3

BOOLEAN

Information number 25, setting group 3 is active

26_GRP4

BOOLEAN

Information number 26, setting group 4 is active

21_TESTM

BOOLEAN

Information number 21, test mode is active

Table 614:
Name

I103USRDEF Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary signal Input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary signal input 8

1001
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

Table 615:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

I103SUPERV Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

32_MEASI

BOOLEAN

Information number 32, measurand supervision of I

33_MEASU

BOOLEAN

Information number 33, measurand supervision of U

37_IBKUP

BOOLEAN

Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection

38_VTFF

BOOLEAN

Information number 38, fuse failure VT

46_GRWA

BOOLEAN

Information number 46, group warning

47_GRAL

BOOLEAN

Information number 47, group alarm

Table 616:
Name

I103EF Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

51_EFFW

BOOLEAN

Information number 51, ground-fault forward

52_EFREV

BOOLEAN

Information number 52, ground-fault reverse

Table 617:
Name

I103FLTDIS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

64_PU_A

BOOLEAN

Information number 64, start phase A

65_PU_B

BOOLEAN

Information number 65, start phase B

66_PU_C

BOOLEAN

Information number 66, start phase C

67_STIN

BOOLEAN

Information number 67, start residual current IN

84_STGEN

BOOLEAN

Information number 84, start general

69_TR_A

BOOLEAN

Information number 69, trip phase A

70_TR_B

BOOLEAN

Information number 70, trip phase B

71_TR_C

BOOLEAN

Information number 71, trip phase C

68_TRGEN

BOOLEAN

Information number 68, trip general

74_FW

BOOLEAN

Information number 74, forward/line

75_REV

BOOLEAN

Information number 75, reverse/bus

78_ZONE1

BOOLEAN

Information number 78, zone 1

79_ZONE2

BOOLEAN

Information number 79, zone 2

80_ZONE3

BOOLEAN

Information number 79, zone 3

81_ZONE4

BOOLEAN

Information number 79, zone 4

82_ZONE5

BOOLEAN

Information number 79, zone 5

76_TRANS

BOOLEAN

Information number 76, signal transmitted

Table continues on next page

1002
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

77_RECEV

BOOLEAN

Information number 77, signal recevied

73_SCL

REAL

Information number 73, fault location in ohm

FLTLOC

BOOLEAN

Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLOCALCMADE)

ARINPROG

BOOLEAN

Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

Table 618:
Name

I103FLTSTD Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

64_PU_A

BOOLEAN

Information number 64, start phase A

65_PU_B

BOOLEAN

Information number 65, start phase B

66_PU_C

BOOLEAN

Information number 66, start phase C

67_STIN

BOOLEAN

Information number 67, start residual curent IN

84_STGEN

BOOLEAN

Information number 84, start general

69_TR_A

BOOLEAN

Information number 69, trip phase A

70_TR_B

BOOLEAN

Information number 70, trip phase B

71_TR_C

BOOLEAN

Information number 71, trip phase C

68_TRGEN

BOOLEAN

Information number 68, trip general

74_FW

BOOLEAN

Information number 74, forward/line

75_REV

BOOLEAN

Information number 75, reverse/bus

85_BFP

BOOLEAN

Information number 85, breaker failure

86_MTR_A

BOOLEAN

Information number 86, trip measuring system phase A

87_MTR_B

BOOLEAN

Information number 87, trip measuring system phase B

88_MTR_C

BOOLEAN

Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3

89_MTRN

BOOLEAN

Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N

90_IOC

BOOLEAN

Information number 90, over current trip, stage low

91_IOC

BOOLEAN

Information number 91, over current trip, stage high

92_IEF

BOOLEAN

Information number 92, ground-fault trip, stage low

93_IEF

BOOLEAN

Information number 93, ground-fault trip, stage high

ARINPROG

BOOLEAN

Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

1003
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

Table 619:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

I103AR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of status reporting

16_ARACT

BOOLEAN

Information number 16, auto-recloser active

128_CBON

BOOLEAN

Information number 128, circuit breaker on by autorecloser

130_UNSU

BOOLEAN

Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing

Table 620:
Name

I103MEAS Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of service value reporting

I_A

REAL

0.0

Service value for current phase A

I_B

REAL

0.0

Service value for current phase B

I_C

REAL

0.0

Service value for current phase C

IN

REAL

0.0

Service value for residual current IN

V_A

REAL

0.0

Service value for voltage phase A

V_B

REAL

0.0

Service value for voltage phase B

V_C

REAL

0.0

Service value for voltage phase C

V_AB

REAL

0.0

Service value for voltage phase-phase A-B

V_N

REAL

0.0

Service value for residual voltage VN

REAL

0.0

Service value for active power

REAL

0.0

Service value for reactive power

REAL

0.0

Service value for system frequency

Table 621:
Name

I103MEASUSR Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of service value reporting

INPUT1

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 1

INPUT2

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 2

INPUT3

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 3

INPUT4

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 4

INPUT5

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 5

INPUT6

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 6

INPUT7

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 7

INPUT8

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 8

INPUT9

REAL

0.0

Service value for measurement on input 9

1004
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

17.6.5
Table 622:

Setting parameters
IEC60870-5-103 Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

SlaveAddress

0 - 255

30

Slave address

BaudRate

9600 Bd
19200 Bd

9600 Bd

Baudrate on serial line

RevPolarity

Disabled
Enabled

Enabled

Invert polarity

CycMeasRepTime

1.0 - 3600.0

0.1

5.0

Cyclic reporting time of measurments

Table 623:

I103IEDCMD Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

FUNTYPE

Table 624:

1 - 255

FunT

Step
1

Default
255

Description
Function type (1-255)

I103CMD Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

FUNTYPE

Table 625:

Unit

1 - 255

Unit
FunT

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Function type (1-255)

I103USRCMD Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

PULSEMOD

0-1

Mode

Pulse mode 0=Steady, 1=Pulsed

0.200 - 60.000

0.001

0.400

Pulse length

FUNTYPE

1 - 255

FunT

Function type (1-255)

INFNO_1

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for output 1 (1-255)

INFNO_2

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for output 2 (1-255)

INFNO_3

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for output 3 (1-255)

INFNO_4

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for output 4 (1-255)

INFNO_5

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for output 5 (1-255)

INFNO_6

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for output 6 (1-255)

INFNO_7

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for output 7 (1-255)

INFNO_8

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for output 8 (1-255)

Table 626:

I103IED Non group settings (basic)

Name
FUNTYPE

Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
FunT

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Function type (1-255)

1005
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

Table 627:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

I103USRDEF Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FUNTYPE

1 - 255

FunT

Function type (1-255)

INFNO_1

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary input 1 (1-255)

INFNO_2

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary input 2 (1-255)

INFNO_3

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary input 3 (1-255)

INFNO_4

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary input 4 (1-255)

INFNO_5

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary input 5 (1-255)

INFNO_6

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary input 6 (1-255)

INFNO_7

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary input 7 (1-255)

INFNO_8

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for binary input 8 (1-255)

Table 628:
Name
FUNTYPE

Table 629:
Name
FUNTYPE

Table 630:
Name
FUNTYPE

Table 631:
Name
FUNTYPE

Table 632:
Name
FUNTYPE

I103SUPERV Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
FunT

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Function type (1-255)

I103EF Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
FunT

Step
1

Default
160

Description
Function type (1-255)

I103FLTDIS Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
FunT

Step
1

Default
128

Description
Function type (1-255)

I103FLTSTD Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
FunT

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Function type (1-255)

I103AR Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)
1 - 255

Unit
FunT

Step
1

Default
1

Description
Function type (1-255)

1006
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 633:

I103MEAS Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

RatedI_A

1 - 99999

3000

Rated current phase A

RatedI_B

1 - 99999

3000

Rated current phase B

RatedI_C

1 - 99999

3000

Rated current phase C

RatedI_N

1 - 99999

3000

Rated residual current IN

RatedV_A

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

230.00

Rated voltage for phase A

RatedV_B

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

230.00

Rated voltage for phase B

RatedV_C

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

230.00

Rated voltage for phase C

RatedV_AB

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

400.00

Rated voltage for phase-phase A-B

RatedV_N

0.05 - 2000.00

kV

0.05

230.00

Rated residual voltage VN

RatedP

0.00 - 2000.00

MW

0.05

1200.00

Rated value for active power

RatedQ

0.00 - 2000.00

MVA

0.05

1200.00

Rated value for reactive power

RatedF

50.0 - 60.0

Hz

10.0

50.0

Rated system frequency

FUNTYPE

1 - 255

FunT

Function type (1-255)

Table 634:

I103MEASUSR Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

FUNTYPE

1 - 255

FunT

25

Function type (1-255)

INFNO

1 - 255

InfNo

Information number for measurands (1-255)

RatedMeasur1

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Rated value for measurement on input 1

RatedMeasur2

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Rated value for measurement on input 2

RatedMeasur3

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Rated value for measurement on input 3

RatedMeasur4

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Rated value for measurement on input 4

RatedMeasur5

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Rated value for measurement on input 5

RatedMeasur6

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Rated value for measurement on input 6

RatedMeasur7

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Rated value for measurement on input 7

RatedMeasur8

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Rated value for measurement on input 8

RatedMeasur9

0.05 10000000000.00

0.05

1000.00

Rated value for measurement on input 9

1007
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
17.6.6

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 635:

IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol

Function

Value

Protocol

IEC 60870-5-103

Communication speed

9600, 19200 Bd

1008
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

17.7

Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking

GOOSEINTLKRCV

17.7.1

Function block
GOOSEINTLKRCV
BLOCK
^RESREQ
^RESGRANT
^APP1_OP
^APP1_CL
APP1VAL
^APP2_OP
^APP2_CL
APP2VAL
^APP3_OP
^APP3_CL
APP3VAL
^APP4_OP
^APP4_CL
APP4VAL
^APP5_OP
^APP5_CL
APP5VAL
^APP6_OP
^APP6_CL
APP6VAL
^APP7_OP
^APP7_CL
APP7VAL
^APP8_OP
^APP8_CL
APP8VAL
^APP9_OP
^APP9_CL
APP9VAL
^APP10_OP
^APP10_CL
APP10VAL
^APP11_OP
^APP11_CL
APP11VAL
^APP12_OP
^APP12_CL
APP12VAL
^APP13_OP
^APP13_CL
APP13VAL
^APP14_OP
^APP14_CL
APP14VAL
^APP15_OP
^APP15_CL
APP15VAL
COM_VAL
IEC07000048-2-en.vsd
IEC07000048 V2 EN

Figure 472:

GOOSEINTLKRCV function block

1009
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
17.7.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 636:
Name
BLOCK

Table 637:
Name

GOOSEINTLKRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of output signals

GOOSEINTLKRCV Output signals

Type

Description

RESREQ

BOOLEAN

Reservation request

RESGRANT

BOOLEAN

Reservation granted

APP1_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 1 position is open

APP1_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 1 position is closed

APP1VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 1 position is valid

APP2_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 2 position is open

APP2_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 2 position is closed

APP2VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 2 position is valid

APP3_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 3 position is open

APP3_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 3 position is closed

APP3VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 3 position is valid

APP4_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 4 position is open

APP4_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 4 position is closed

APP4VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 4 position is valid

APP5_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 5 position is open

APP5_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 5 position is closed

APP5VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 5 position is valid

APP6_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 6 position is open

APP6_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 6 position is closed

APP6VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 6 position is valid

APP7_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 7 position is open

APP7_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 7 position is closed

APP7VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 7 position is valid

APP8_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 8 position is open

APP8_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 8 position is closed

APP8VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 8 position is valid

APP9_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 9 position is open

APP9_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 9 position is closed

APP9VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 9 position is valid

Table continues on next page

1010
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

17.7.3
Table 638:

Type

Description

APP10_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 10 position is open

APP10_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 10 position is closed

APP10VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 10 position is valid

APP11_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 11 position is open

APP11_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 11 position is closed

APP11VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 11 position is valid

APP12_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 12 position is open

APP12_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 12 position is closed

APP12VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 12 position is valid

APP13_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 13 position is open

APP13_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 13 position is closed

APP13VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 13 position is valid

APP14_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 14 position is open

APP14_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 14 position is closed

APP14VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 14 position is valid

APP15_OP

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 15 position is open

APP15_CL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 15 position is closed

APP15VAL

BOOLEAN

Apparatus 15 position is valid

COM_VAL

BOOLEAN

Receive communication status is valid

Setting parameters
GOOSEINTLKRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name
Operation

Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled

1011
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

17.8

Goose binary receive GOOSEBINRCV

17.8.1

Function block
GOOSEBINRCV
BLOCK

^OUT1
OUT1VAL
^OUT2
OUT2VAL
^OUT3
OUT3VAL
^OUT4
OUT4VAL
^OUT5
OUT5VAL
^OUT6
OUT6VAL
^OUT7
OUT7VAL
^OUT8
OUT8VAL
^OUT9
OUT9VAL
^OUT10
OUT10VAL
^OUT11
OUT11VAL
^OUT12
OUT12VAL
^OUT13
OUT13VAL
^OUT14
OUT14VAL
^OUT15
OUT15VAL
^OUT16
OUT16VAL
IEC07000047-2-en.vsd

IEC07000047 V2 EN

Figure 473:

17.8.2

GOOSEBINRCV function block

Input and output signals

Table 639:
Name
BLOCK

Table 640:
Name

GOOSEBINRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of output signals

GOOSEBINRCV Output signals

Type

Description

OUT1

BOOLEAN

Binary output 1

OUT1VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 1

OUT2

BOOLEAN

Binary output 2

Table continues on next page

1012
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

17.8.3
Table 641:

Type

Description

OUT2VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 2

OUT3

BOOLEAN

Binary output 3

OUT3VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 3

OUT4

BOOLEAN

Binary output 4

OUT4VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 4

OUT5

BOOLEAN

Binary output 5

OUT5VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 5

OUT6

BOOLEAN

Binary output 6

OUT6VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 6

OUT7

BOOLEAN

Binary output 7

OUT7VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 7

OUT8

BOOLEAN

Binary output 8

OUT8VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 8

OUT9

BOOLEAN

Binary output 9

OUT9VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 9

OUT10

BOOLEAN

Binary output 10

OUT10VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 10

OUT11

BOOLEAN

Binary output 11

OUT11VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 11

OUT12

BOOLEAN

Binary output 12

OUT12VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 12

OUT13

BOOLEAN

Binary output 13

OUT13VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 13

OUT14

BOOLEAN

Binary output 14

OUT14VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 14

OUT15

BOOLEAN

Binary output 15

OUT15VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 15

OUT16

BOOLEAN

Binary output 16

OUT16VAL

BOOLEAN

Valid data on binary output 16

Setting parameters
GOOSEBINRCV Non group settings (basic)

Name
Operation

Values (Range)
Disabled
Enabled

Unit
-

Step
-

Default
Disabled

Description
Operation Disabled/Enabled

1013
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

17.9

1MRK506312-UUS C

Multiple command and transmit MULTICMDRCV,

MULTICMDSND
Function description

17.9.1

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Multiple command and transmit

MULTICMDRCV

Multiple command and transmit

MULTICMDSND

Introduction
The IED can be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from other
IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/inputs
that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control purposes
within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with other IEDs,
these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with 16 outputs to
send the information received by the command block.

17.9.2

Principle of operation
Two multiple transmit function blocks MULTICMDSND:1 and MULTICMDSND:2
and 8 slow multiple transmit function blocks MULTICMDSND:3 to MULTICMDSND:
10 are available in the IED.
Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple command
block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT).
Twelve multiple command function blocks MULTICMDRCV:1 to MULTICMDRCV:
12 with fast execution time and 48 multiple command function blocks MULTICMDRCV:
13 to MULTICMDRCV:60 with slower execution time are available in the IED.
Multiple command function block MULTICMDRCV has 16 outputs combined in one
block, which can be controlled from other IEDs.
The output signals, here OUTPUT1 to OUTPUT16, are then available for
configuration to built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary
outputs of the IED.
MULTICMDRCV also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID to 0
if the block does not receive data within set maximum time.

1014
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

17.9.3

Design

17.9.3.1

General
The output signals can be of the types Disabled, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done
on the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from PCM600.

17.9.4

0 = Disabled sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station
level, that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from the
station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic
connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer than
the execution cycle time for the command function block.

Function block
MULTICMDRCV
BLOCK

ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
IEC06000007-2-en.vsd

IEC06000007 V2 EN

Figure 474:

MULTICMDRCV function block

1015
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

MULTICMDSND
BLOCK
ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
IEC06000008-2-en.vsd
IEC06000008 V2 EN

Figure 475:

17.9.5

MULTICMDSND function block

Input and output signals

Table 642:
Name
BLOCK

Table 643:
Name

MULTICMDRCV Input signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Default
0

Description
Block of function

MULTICMDSND Input signals

Type

Default

Description

BLOCK

BOOLEAN

Block of function

INPUT1

BOOLEAN

Input 1

INPUT2

BOOLEAN

Input 2

INPUT3

BOOLEAN

Input 3

INPUT4

BOOLEAN

Input 4

INPUT5

BOOLEAN

Input 5

INPUT6

BOOLEAN

Input 6

INPUT7

BOOLEAN

Input 7

INPUT8

BOOLEAN

Input 8

INPUT9

BOOLEAN

Input 9

INPUT10

BOOLEAN

Input 10

INPUT11

BOOLEAN

Input 11

INPUT12

BOOLEAN

Input 12

INPUT13

BOOLEAN

Input 13

Table continues on next page

1016
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Type

Default

Description

INPUT14

BOOLEAN

Input 14

INPUT15

BOOLEAN

Input 15

INPUT16

BOOLEAN

Input 16

Table 644:
Name

MULTICMDRCV Output signals

Type

Description

ERROR

BOOLEAN

MultiReceive error

NEWDATA

BOOLEAN

New data is received

OUTPUT1

BOOLEAN

Output 1

OUTPUT2

BOOLEAN

Output 2

OUTPUT3

BOOLEAN

Output 3

OUTPUT4

BOOLEAN

Output 4

OUTPUT5

BOOLEAN

Output 5

OUTPUT6

BOOLEAN

Output 6

OUTPUT7

BOOLEAN

Output 7

OUTPUT8

BOOLEAN

Output 8

OUTPUT9

BOOLEAN

Output 9

OUTPUT10

BOOLEAN

Output 10

OUTPUT11

BOOLEAN

Output 11

OUTPUT12

BOOLEAN

Output 12

OUTPUT13

BOOLEAN

Output 13

OUTPUT14

BOOLEAN

Output 14

OUTPUT15

BOOLEAN

Output 15

OUTPUT16

BOOLEAN

Output 16

VALID

BOOLEAN

Output data is valid

Table 645:
Name
ERROR

MULTICMDSND Output signals

Type
BOOLEAN

Description
MultiSend error

1017
Technical reference manual

Section 17
Station communication
17.9.6
Table 646:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Setting parameters
MULTICMDRCV Non group settings (basic)
Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tMaxCycleTime

0.050 - 200.000

0.001

11.000

Maximum cycle time between receptions of

input data

tMinCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum cycle time between receptions of

input data

Mode

Steady
Pulsed

Steady

Mode for output signals

tPulseTime

0.000 - 60.000

0.001

0.200

Pulse length for multi command outputs

Table 647:
Name

MULTICMDSND Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

tMaxCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

5.000

Maximum time interval between transmission

of output data

tMinCycleTime

0.000 - 200.000

0.001

0.000

Minimum time interval between transmission

of output data

1018
Technical reference manual

Section 18
Remote communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 18

Remote communication

About this chapter

This chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardware
functionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,
input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

18.1

Binary signal transfer

Function description

18.1.1

IEC 61850
identification

IEC 60617
identification

ANSI/IEEE C37.2
device number

Binary signal transfer

BinSignReceive

Binary signal transfer

BinSignTransm

Introduction
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection, or for
transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other 670 series IEDs. The
binary signals are freely configurable and can, thus, be used for any purpose, for
example, communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other binary
signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an LDCM
(Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a 64 kbit/s
communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
The IED can be equipped with up to two short range, medium range or long range LDCM.

18.1.2

Principle of operation
The communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/s channels.
It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (same in 50 Hz
and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used is C37.94 and
one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to be transmitted, Cyclic
Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associated with C37.94).

1019
Technical reference manual

Section 18
Remote communication

Start
flag
8 bits

1MRK506312-UUS C

Information
n x 16 bits

CRC

Stop
flag

16 bits

8 bits

en01000134.vsd
IEC01000134 V1 EN

Figure 476:

Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the
HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition.
The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing
is included in the data field.
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the
correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function
detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight
binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented as
sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity
of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the
capacity of 192 signals.

1020
Technical reference manual

Section 18
Remote communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

18.1.3

Function block
LDCMRecBinStat1
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000043-2-en.vsd
IEC07000043 V2 EN

LDCMRecBinStat2
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC07000044-2-en.vsd
IEC07000044 V2 EN

Figure 477:

LDCMRecBinStat function blocks

LDCMRecBinStat3
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
IEC05000451-2-en.vsd
IEC05000451 V2 EN

Figure 478:

LDCMRecBinStat function block

1021
Technical reference manual

Section 18
Remote communication
18.1.4

1MRK506312-UUS C

Input and output signals

Table 648:
Name

LDCMRecBinStat1 Output signals

Type

Description

COMFAIL

BOOLEAN

Detected error in the differential communication

YBIT

BOOLEAN

Detected error in remote end with incoming message

NOCARR

BOOLEAN

No carrier is detected in the incoming message

NOMESS

BOOLEAN

No start and stop flags identified for the incoming

message

ADDRERR

BOOLEAN

Incoming message from a wrong terminal

LNGTHERR

BOOLEAN

Wrong length of the incoming message

CRCERROR

BOOLEAN

Identified error by CRC check in incoming message

REMCOMF

BOOLEAN

Remote terminal indicates problem with received

message

LOWLEVEL

BOOLEAN

Low signal level on the receive link

Table 649:
Name

LDCMRecBinStat2 Output signals

Type

Description

COMFAIL

BOOLEAN

Detected error in the differential communication

YBIT

BOOLEAN

Detected error in remote end with incoming message

NOCARR

BOOLEAN

No carrier is detected in the incoming message

NOMESS

BOOLEAN

No start and stop flags identified for the incoming

message

ADDRERR

BOOLEAN

Incoming message from a wrong terminal

LNGTHERR

BOOLEAN

Wrong length of the incoming message

CRCERROR

BOOLEAN

Identified error by CRC check in incoming message

TRDELERR

BOOLEAN

Transmission time is longer than permitted

SYNCERR

BOOLEAN

Indicates when echo synchronication is used

REMCOMF

BOOLEAN

Remote terminal indicates problem with received

message

REMGPSER

BOOLEAN

Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS

synchronization

SUBSTITU

BOOLEAN

Link error, values are substituted

LOWLEVEL

BOOLEAN

Low signal level on the receive link

1022
Technical reference manual

Section 18
Remote communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 650:

LDCMRecBinStat3 Output signals

Name

18.1.5
Table 651:

Type

Description

COMFAIL

BOOLEAN

Detected error in the differential communication

YBIT

BOOLEAN

Detected error in remote end with incoming message

NOCARR

BOOLEAN

No carrier is detected in the incoming message

NOMESS

BOOLEAN

No start and stop flags identified for the incoming

message

ADDRERR

BOOLEAN

Incoming message from a wrong terminal

LNGTHERR

BOOLEAN

Wrong length of the incoming message

CRCERROR

BOOLEAN

Identified error by CRC check in incoming message

TRDELERR

BOOLEAN

Transmission time is longer than permitted

SYNCERR

BOOLEAN

Indicates when echo synchronication is used

REMCOMF

BOOLEAN

Remote terminal indicates problem with received

message

REMGPSER

BOOLEAN

Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS

synchronization

SUBSTITU

BOOLEAN

Link error, values are substituted

LOWLEVEL

BOOLEAN

Low signal level on the receive link

Setting parameters
LDCMRecBinStat1 Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ChannelMode

Disabled
Enabled
OutOfService

Enabled

Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,

2=OutOfService

TerminalNo

0 - 255

Terminal number used for line differential

communication

RemoteTermNo

0 - 255

Terminal number on remote terminal

CommSync

Slave
Master

Slave

Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=Slave, 1=Master

OptoPower

LowPower
HighPower

LowPower

Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High

ComFailAlrmDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Time delay before communication error signal

is activated

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Reset delay before communication error

signal is reset

InvertPolX21

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Invert polarization for X21 communication

1023
Technical reference manual

Section 18
Remote communication

Table 652:
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

LDCMRecBinStat2 Non group settings (basic)

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ChannelMode

Disabled
Enabled
OutOfService

Enabled

Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,

2=OutOfService

NAMECH1

0 - 13

LDCM#-CH1

User defined string for analog input 1

TerminalNo

0 - 255

Terminal number used for line differential

communication

RemoteTermNo

0 - 255

Terminal number on remote terminal

NAMECH2

0 - 13

LDCM#-CH2

User defined string for analog input 2

DiffSync

Echo
GPS

Echo

Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=ECHO, 1=GPS

GPSSyncErr

Block
Echo

Block

Operation mode when GPS synchroniation

signal is lost

CommSync

Slave
Master

Slave

Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=Slave, 1=Master

NAMECH3

0 - 13

LDCM#-CH3

User defined string for analog input 3

OptoPower

LowPower
HighPower

LowPower

Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High

NAMECH4

0 - 13

LDCM#-CH4

User defined string for analog input 4

TransmCurr

CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2

CT-GRP1

Summation mode for transmitted current

values

ComFailAlrmDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Time delay before communication error signal

is activated

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Reset delay before communication error

signal is reset

RedChSwTime

5 - 500

ms

Time delay before switching in redundant

channel

RedChRturnTime

5 - 500

ms

100

Time delay before switching back from

redundant channel

AsymDelay

-20.00 - 20.00

ms

0.01

0.00

Asymmetric delay when communication use

echo synch.

AnalogLatency

2 - 20

Latency between local analogue data and

transmitted

remAinLatency

2 - 20

Analog latency of remote terminal

MaxTransmDelay

0 - 40

ms

20

Max allowed transmission delay

CompRange

0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA

0-25kA

Compression range

Table continues on next page

1024
Technical reference manual

Section 18
Remote communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

MaxtDiffLevel

200 - 2000

us

600

Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up

DeadbandtDiff

200 - 1000

us

300

Deadband for t Diff

InvertPolX21

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Invert polarization for X21 communication

Table 653:

LDCMRecBinStat3 Non group settings (basic)

Name

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

ChannelMode

Disabled
Enabled
OutOfService

Enabled

Channel mode of LDCM, 0=OFF, 1=ON,

2=OutOfService

NAMECH1

0 - 13

LDCM#-CH1

User defined string for analog input 1

TerminalNo

0 - 255

Terminal number used for line differential

communication

RemoteTermNo

0 - 255

Terminal number on remote terminal

NAMECH2

0 - 13

LDCM#-CH2

User defined string for analog input 2

DiffSync

Echo
GPS

Echo

Diff Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=ECHO, 1=GPS

GPSSyncErr

Block
Echo

Block

Operation mode when GPS synchroniation

signal is lost

CommSync

Slave
Master

Slave

Com Synchronization mode of LDCM,

0=Slave, 1=Master

NAMECH3

0 - 13

LDCM#-CH3

User defined string for analog input 3

OptoPower

LowPower
HighPower

LowPower

Transmission power for LDCM, 0=Low, 1=High

NAMECH4

0 - 13

LDCM#-CH4

User defined string for analog input 4

TransmCurr

CT-GRP1
CT-GRP2
CT-SUM
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChannel

CT-GRP1

Summation mode for transmitted current

values

ComFailAlrmDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Time delay before communication error signal

is activated

ComFailResDel

5 - 500

ms

100

Reset delay before communication error

signal is reset

RedChSwTime

5 - 500

ms

Time delay before switching in redundant

channel

RedChRturnTime

5 - 500

ms

100

Time delay before switching back from

redundant channel

AsymDelay

-20.00 - 20.00

ms

0.01

0.00

Asymmetric delay when communication use

echo synch.

AnalogLatency

2 - 20

Latency between local analogue data and

transmitted

Table continues on next page

1025
Technical reference manual

Section 18
Remote communication
Name

1MRK506312-UUS C

Values (Range)

Unit

Step

Default

Description

remAinLatency

2 - 20

Analog latency of remote terminal

MaxTransmDelay

0 - 40

ms

20

Max allowed transmission delay

CompRange

0-10kA
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA

0-25kA

Compression range

MaxtDiffLevel

200 - 2000

us

600

Maximum time diff for ECHO back-up

DeadbandtDiff

200 - 1000

us

300

Deadband for t Diff

InvertPolX21

Disabled
Enabled

Disabled

Invert polarization for X21 communication

18.2

Transmission of analog data from LDCM

LDCMTransmit

18.2.1

Function block
LDCMTRN
^CT1L1
^CT1L2
^CT1L3
^CT1N
^CT2L1
^CT2L2
^CT2L3
^CT2N
IEC10000017-1-en.vsd
IEC10000017 V1 EN

Figure 479:

LDCMTransmit function block

The function blocks are not represented in the Application

Configuration tool except for the LDCMTRN function block that is
visible in ACT. The signals appear only in the Signal Matrix tool when
a LDCM is included in the configuration with the function selector tool.

1026
Technical reference manual

Section 18
Remote communication

1MRK506312-UUS C

18.2.2

Input and output signals

Table 654:
Name

LDCMTRN Input signals

Type

Default

Description

CT1L1

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L1 to

remote end

CT1L2

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L2 to

remote end

CT1L3

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 line L3 to

remote end

CT1N

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group1 neutral N to

remote end

CT2L1

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L1 to

remote end

CT2L2

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L2 to

remote end

CT2L3

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 line L3 to

remote end

CT2N

STRING

Input to be used for transmit CT-group2 neutral N to

remote end

1027
Technical reference manual

1028

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 19

IED hardware

About this chapter

This chapter describes the different hardware modules available in the IED. The
descriptions includes diagrams from different elevations indicating the location of
connection terminals and modules.

19.1

Overview

19.1.1

Variants of case and local HMI display size

Close

Open

xx04000458_ansi.e
ANSI04000458 V1 EN

Figure 480:

1/2 19 case with medium local HMI display.

1029
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Close

Open

xx05000762_ansi.eps
ANSI05000762 V1 EN

Figure 481:

3/4 19 case with medium local HMI display.

Close

Open

xx04000460_ansi.e
ANSI04000460 V1 EN

Figure 482:

1/1 19 case with medium local HMI display.

1030
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.1.2
Table 655:

Case from the rear side

Designations for 1/2 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module

Rear Positions

PSM

X11

BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or

MIM

X31 and X32 etc. to X51

and X52

SLM

X301:A, B, C, D

LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485

X302

LDCM or RS485

X303

OEM

X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM, RS485 or GTM

X312, 313

TRM

X401

1MRK002801-AC-2-670-1.2-PG V1 EN

1031
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

Table 656:

1MRK506312-UUS C

Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module

Rear Positions

PSM

X11

BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or

MIM

X31 and X32 etc. to

X101 and X102

SLM

X301:A, B, C, D

LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485

X302

LDCM or RS485

X303

OEM

X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM, RS485 or GTM

X312, X313

TRM

X401

1MRK002801-AC-3-670-1.2-PG V1 EN

1032
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 657:

Designations for 3/4 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slot

Module

Rear Positions

PSM

X11

BIM, BOM, SOM, IOM or

MIM

X31 and X32 etc. to X71 and

X72

SLM

X301:A, B, C, D

LDCM, IRIG-B or RS485

X302

LDCM or RS485

X303

OEM

X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM, RS485 or GTM

X312, X313, X322, X323

TRM 1

X401

TRM 2

X411

1MRK002801-AC-4-670-1.2-PG V1 EN

1033
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

Table 658:

1MRK506312-UUS C

Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 1 TRM slot

Module

Rear Positions

PSM

X11

BIM, BOM,
SOM, IOM or
MIM

X31 and X32 etc. to X161

and X162

SLM

X301:A, B, C, D

LDCM, IRIG-B or
RS485

X302

LDCM or RS485

X303

OEM

X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM,RS485 or
GTM

X312, X313

TRM

X401

1MRK002801-AC-5-670-1.2-PG V1 EN

1034
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 659:

Designations for 1/1 x 19 casing with 2 TRM slots

Module

Rear Positions

PSM

X11

BIM, BOM,
SOM, IOM or
MIM

X31 and X32 etc. to X131

and X132

SLM

X301:A, B, C, D

LDCM, IRIG-B or
RS485

X302

LDCM or RS485

X303

OEM

X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM, RS485 or
GTM

X312, X313, X322, X323

TRM 1

X401

TRM 2

X411

1MRK002801-AC-6-670-1.2-PG V1 EN

19.2

Hardware modules

19.2.1

Overview
Table 660:

Basic modules

Module

Description

Combined backplane module (CBM)

A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals

between modules in an IED. Only the TRM (when
included) is not connected directly to this board.

Universal backplane module (UBM)

A backplane PCB that forms part of the IED backplane

with connectors for TRM (when included), ADM etc.

Power supply module (PSM)

Including a regulated DC/DC converter that supplies

auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.

An internal fail alarm output is available.

Table continues on next page

1035
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Module

Description

Numerical module (NUM)

Module for overall application control. All information is

processed or passed through this module, such as
configuration, settings and communication.

Local Human machine interface (LHMI)

The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push button

keyboard and an ethernet connector used to connect
a PC to the IED.

Transformer input module (TRM)

Transformer module that galvanically separates the

internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has 12
analog inputs.

Analog digital conversion module (ADM)

Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.

Table 661:

Application specific modules

Module

Description

Binary input module (BIM)

Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs

Binary output module (BOM)

Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-pole

command outputs including supervision function

Binary I/O module (IOM)

Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10

outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.

Line data communication modules (LDCM),

short range, medium range, long range, X21

Modules used for digital communication to remote

terminal.

Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3

communication modules (SLM)

Used for SPA/LON/IEC 608705103/DNP3

communication

Optical ethernet module (OEM)

PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.

mA input module (MIM)

Analog input module with 6 independent, galvanically

separated channels.

GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

Used to provide the IED with GPS time synchronization.

Static output module (SOM)

Module with 6 fast static outputs and 6 change over

output relays.

IRIG-B Time synchronization module (IRIG-B)

Module with 2 inputs. One is used for handling both

pulse-width modulated signals and amplitude
modulated signals and one is used for optical input
type ST for PPS time synchronization.

19.2.2

Combined backplane module (CBM)

19.2.2.1

Introduction
The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.

1036
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.2.2

Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBM
backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.
Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able to
communicate with CAN based modules.
If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal Fail
signal IRF.

19.2.2.3

Design
There are two basic versions of the CBM:

with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on

the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two are used
by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs. See
figure 484
with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending on
the IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is used
by for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 483

Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors are
connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.

2
en05000516.vsd

IEC05000516 V1 EN

Figure 483:

CBM for 1 TRM.

Pos Description
1

CAN slots

CPCI slots

1037
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

en05000755.vsd
IEC05000755 V1 EN

Figure 484:

CBM for 2 TRM.

Pos Description
1

CAN slots

CPCI slots

en05000756.vsd
IEC05000756 V1 EN

Figure 485:

CBM position, rear view.

Pos Description
1

CBM

1038
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.3

Universal backplane module (UBM)

19.2.3.1

Introduction
The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mounted
above the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog
digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).

19.2.3.2

Functionality
The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analog signals from the
transformer input module to the analog digital converter module. The Numerical
processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on the
front panel as well as the internal ethernet contacts are connected to the UBM which
provides the signal path to the NUM board.

19.2.3.3

Design
It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion
module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
The UBM exists in 2 versions.

for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and one
96 pin euro connector, see figure 487
for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and one
96 pin euro connector, see figure 488.

The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The 48
pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.

1039
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

TRM

ADM

NUM

AD Data
X1

X2

X3

X4

RS485
X10

X10

Ethernet

Front

LHMI connection
port

Ethernet

X5

en05000489.vsd
IEC05000489 V1 EN

Figure 486:

UBM block diagram.

en05000757.vsd
IEC05000757 V1 EN

Figure 487:

UBM for 1 TRM.

en05000758.vsd
IEC05000758 V1 EN

Figure 488:

UBM for 2 TRM.

1040
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

en05000759.vsd
IEC05000759 V1 EN

Figure 489:

UBM position, rear view.

Pos Description
1

UBM

19.2.4

Numeric processing module (NUM)

19.2.4.1

Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection
functions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is the
compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and receives
interrupts.

1041
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware
19.2.4.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Functionality
The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelf
compact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with the
backplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots
onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash
file system.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of
the real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power dissipation.

1042
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.4.3

Block diagram

Compact
Flash

Logic

PMC
connector

Memory

Ethernet

UBM
connector

PC-MIP

PCI-PCIbridge

Backplane
connector

North
bridge

CPU

en04000473.vsd
IEC04000473 V1 EN

Figure 490:

Numeric processing module block diagram

19.2.5

Power supply module (PSM)

19.2.5.1

Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is
available.

1043
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware
19.2.5.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC
input voltage ranges see table 662. The power supply module contains a built-in, selfregulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the
external battery system.

Power
supply

Filter

Backplane connector

Input connector

Block diagram

Supervision

99000516.vsd
IEC99000516 V1 EN

Figure 491:

19.2.5.3

PSM Block diagram.

Technical data
Table 662:

PSM - Power supply module

Quantity

19.2.6

Rated value

Nominal range

Auxiliary dc voltage, EL (input)

EL = (24 - 60) V
EL = (90 - 250) V

EL 20%
EL 20%

Power consumption

50 W typically

Auxiliary DC power in-rush

< 5 A during 0.1 s

Local human-machine interface (Local HMI)

Refer to section "Local HMI" for information.

1044
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.7

Transformer input module (TRM)

19.2.7.1

Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The module
has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can be ordered.

19.2.7.2

Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the
module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.
Basic versions:

6 current channels and 6 voltage channels

7 current channels and 5 voltage channels
9 current channels and 3 voltage channels
12 current channels

The rated values and channel type, measurement or protection, of the current inputs are
selected at order.
Transformer input module for measuring should not be used with
current transformers intended for protection purposes, due to
limitations in overload characteristics.
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for
analog inputs SMAI".

19.2.7.3

Technical data
Table 663:

TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer modules

Quantity

Rated value

Current

In = 1 or 5 A

Operative range

(0-100) x In

Permissive overload

4 In cont.
100 In for 1 s *)

Nominal range
(0.2-40) In

Table continues on next page

1045
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Quantity

Rated value

Burden

< 150 mVA at In = 5 A

< 20 mVA at In = 1 A

Ac voltage

Vn = 120 V

Operative range

(0340) V

Permissive overload

420 V cont.
450 V 10 s

Burden

< 20 mVA at 110 V

Frequency

fn = 60/50 Hz

*)

Nominal range

0.5288 V

5%

max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Table 664:

TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer modules

Quantity

Rated value

Current

In = 1 or 5 A

Permissive overload

1.1 In cont.
1.8 In for 30 min at In = 1 A
1.6 In for 30 min at In = 5 A

Burden

< 350 mVA at In = 5 A

< 200 mVA at In = 1 A

Ac voltage

Vn = 120 V

Operative range

(0340) V

Permissive overload

420 V cont.
450 V 10 s

Burden

< 20 mVA at 110 V

Frequency

fn = 60/50 Hz

Nominal range
(0-1.8) In at In = 1 A
(0-1.6) In at In = 5 A

0.5288 V

5%

19.2.8

Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization

(ADM)

19.2.8.1

Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC slot.
The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards according
to table 665. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board. The UBM
connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).

1046
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 665:
PC-MIP cards

PC-MIP cards and PMC cards

PMC cards

LDCM

SLM

LR-LDCM

OEM 1 ch

MR-LDCM

OEM 2 ch

X21-LDCM
IRIG-B
RS485

19.2.8.2

Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the
transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic
voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate A
\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is
obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.
Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz and
are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequency
and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

1047
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12

AD1
AD2
1.2v

AD3
AD4

PMC

level shift

PC-MIP
2.5v

PCI to PCI
PC-MIP

en05000474.vsd
IEC05000474 V1 EN

Figure 492:

The ADM layout

1048
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.9

Binary input module (BIM)

19.2.9.1

Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs
to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable
and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also
be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables
extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated
electrical circuits.

19.2.9.2

Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level
of the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBI".
A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, a
hysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making it
possible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensure normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 493 The figure shows the typical operating
characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage levels.
The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstand
disturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required. Inputs
are debounced by software.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.

1049
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

[V]
300

176
144
88
72
38
32
19
17
24/30V

48/60V

110/125V

220/250V
xx99000517-2_ansi.vsd

ANSI99000517 V2 EN

Figure 493:

Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Operation

Operation uncertain

No operation
IEC99000517-ABC V1 EN

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via the
CAN-bus on the backplane.
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 494 and 495.

1050
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

[mA]
50

55

[ms]
en07000104-3.vsd

IEC07000104 V3 EN

Figure 494:

Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of BIM.

[mA]
50

5.5

[ms]
en07000105-1.vsd

IEC07000105 V2 EN

Figure 495:

Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.

1051
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Process connector

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input

Microcontroller

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input
Opto isolated input

Backplane connector

Opto isolated input

CAN

Process connector

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

99000503-2.vsd
IEC99000503 V2 EN

Figure 496:

Block diagram of the Binary input module.

1052
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.9.3

Technical data
Table 666:

BIM - Binary input module

Quantity

Rated value

Nominal range

Binary inputs

16

DC voltage, RL

24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V

RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%

Power consumption
24/30 V, 50mA
48/60 V, 50mA
125 V, 50mA
220/250 V, 50mA
220/250 V, 110mA

max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
max. 0.5 W/input

Counter input frequency

10 pulses/s max

Oscillating signal discriminator

Blocking settable 140 Hz

Release settable 130 Hz

Debounce filter

Settable 120ms

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously

with influencing factors within nominal range.

Table 667:

BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities

Quantity

Rated value

Nominal range

Binary inputs

16

DC voltage, RL

24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V

RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%

Power consumption
24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V

max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input

Counter input frequency

10 pulses/s max

Balanced counter input frequency

40 pulses/s max

Oscillating signal discriminator

Blocking settable 140 Hz

Release settable 130 Hz

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously

with influencing factors within nominal range.

1053
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.10

Binary output modules (BOM)

19.2.10.1

Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output
or any signaling purpose.

19.2.10.2

Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each pair
of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 497. This
should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the
back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker
trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker
auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is
required.
For configuration of the output signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
outputs SMBO".
Output module

3
ANSI_xx00000299.vsd
ANSI00000299 V1 EN

Figure 497:

Relay pair example

1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection
3 Output connection from relay 2

1054
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

Relay

Relay

Relay

Relay

Process connector

Relay

Relay

1MRK506312-UUS C

Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay

Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay

Microcontroller

Relay
Relay

Backplane connector

Relay

CAN

Process connector

Relay

Relay

99000505-2-en.vsd
IEC99000505 V2 EN

Figure 498:

19.2.10.3

Block diagram of the Binary Output Module

Technical data
Table 668:

BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity

Trip and Signal relays

Binary outputs

24

Max system voltage

250 V AC, DC

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min

1000 V rms

Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous
Per relay, 1 s
Per process connector pin, continuous

8A
10 A
12 A

Table continues on next page

1055
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function or quantity

Trip and Signal relays

Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms

0.2 s
1.0 s

30 A
10 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4

250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms

48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing

factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may
be activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed
200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is
possible with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the
temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two
relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to
power dissipation.

19.2.11

Static binary output module (SOM)

19.2.11.1

Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output
relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.

19.2.11.2

Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
The SOM consists mainly of:

An MCU
A CAN-driver
6 static relays outputs
6 electromechanical relay outputs
A DC/DC converter
Connectors interfacing

CAN-bus to backplane CBM

IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)

1056
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

The following parts are supervised:

Interruption in relay coil

Short circuit of relay coil
Driver failure

Drive &
Read back

Process connector

Drive &
Read back

Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back

Codeflash

Drive &
Read back

MCU

Drive &
Read back

CANdriver

Drive &
Read back

DC/DC
Drive &
Read back

Drive &
Read back

Internal_fail_n
AC_fail_n
RCAN_ID
Sync

Drive &
Read back

Backplane connector

Process connector

Drive &
Read back

Reset
Drive &
Read back

en07000115.vsd
IEC07000115 V1 EN

Figure 499:

Block diagram of the static output module

1057
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC09000974-1-en.vsd

IEC09000974 V1 EN

Figure 500:

SOM Static output principle

1MRK002802-AB-13-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN

Figure 501:

19.2.11.3

Connection diagram of the static output module

Technical data
Table 669:

SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs

Function of quantity

Static binary output trip

Rated voltage

48 - 60 VDC

110 - 250 VDC

Number of outputs

Impedance open state

~300 k

~810 k

Test voltage across open contact, 1

min

No galvanic separation

No galvanic separation

Continuous

5A

5A

1.0s

10A

10A

0.2s

30A

30A

1.0s

10A

10A

Current carrying capacity:

Making capacity at capacitive load

with the maximum capacitance of
0.2 F :

Table continues on next page

1058
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Function of quantity
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R
40ms

Static binary output trip

48V / 1A

110V / 0.4A

60V / 0.75A

125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A

Operating time

Table 670:

<1ms

<1ms

SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Electromechanical
relay outputs

Function of quantity

Trip and signal relays

Max system voltage

250V AC/DC

Number of outputs

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min

1000V rms

Current carrying capacity:

Continuous

8A

1.0s

10A

Making capacity at capacitive load with the

maximum capacitance of 0.2 F:
0.2s

30A

1.0s

10A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 40ms

48V / 1A
110V / 0.4A
125V / 0.35A
220V / 0.2A
250V / 0.15A

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing

factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may
be activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed
200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is
possible with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the
temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two
relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to
power dissipation.

1059
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.12

Binary input/output module (IOM)

19.2.12.1

Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels are
needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signaling
purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where
short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for
required binary input information.

19.2.12.2

Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase the
disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved with a
high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure 494. Inputs
are debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply ground faults, see figure 493.
The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays.
One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are
connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other
group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see
figure 502.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay is
connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, refer to sections "Signal matrix for
binary inputs SMBI" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO".
The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

1060
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC1MRK002801-AA11-UTAN-RAM V1 EN

IEC1MRK002802-AA-13 V1 EN

Figure 502:

Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds to

rear position X31, X41, and so on, and output contacts named XB to
rear position X32, X42, and so on

The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for example
be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause excessive wear
of the contacts.

1061
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.

xx04000069.vsd
IEC04000069 V1 EN

Figure 503:

19.2.12.3

IOM with MOV protection, relay example

Technical data
Table 671:

IOM - Binary input/output module

Quantity

Rated value

Nominal range

Binary inputs

DC voltage, RL

24/30 V
48/60 V
125 V
220/250 V

RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%
RL 20%

Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA
48/60 V, 50 mA
125 V, 50 mA
220/250 V, 50 mA
220/250 V, 110 mA

max. 0.05 W/input

max. 0.1 W/input
max. 0.2 W/input
max. 0.4 W/input
max. 0.5 W/input

Counter input frequency

10 pulses/s max

Oscillating signal discriminator

Blocking settable 1-40 Hz

Release settable 1-30 Hz

Debounce filter

Settable 1-20 ms

Maximum 176 binary input channels may be activated simultaneously

with influencing factors within nominal range.

1062
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 672:

IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity

Trip and signal relays

Fast signal relays (parallel reed

relay)

Binary outputs

10

Max system voltage

250 V AC, DC

250 V DC

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min

1000 V rms

800 V DC

Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous
Per relay, 1 s
Per process connector pin, continuous

8A
10 A
12 A

8A
10 A
12 A

30 A
10 A

0.4 A
0.4 A

0.2 s
1.0 s

30 A
10 A

220250 V/0.4 A
110125 V/0.4 A
4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos > 0.4

250 V/8.0 A

250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R <

40 ms

48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load

10 nF

Making capacity at inductive load with

L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
Making capacity at resistive load

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing

factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may
be activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed
200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is
possible with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the
temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two
relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to
power dissipation.
Table 673:

IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC
61810-2)

Function or quantity

Trip and Signal relays

Fast signal relays (parallel reed

relay)

Binary outputs

IOM: 10

IOM: 2

Max system voltage

250 V AC, DC

250 V DC

Table continues on next page

1063
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Test voltage across open

contact, 1 min

250 V rms

250 V rms

8A
10 A
12 A

8A
10 A
12 A

30 A
10 A

0.4 A
0.4 A

0.2 s
1.0 s

30 A
10 A

220250 V/0.4 A
110125 V/0.4 A
4860 V/0.2 A
2430 V/0.1 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos

j>0.4

250 V/8.0 A

250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/

R < 40 ms

48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load

10 nF

Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous
Per relay, 1 s
Per process connector pin,
continuous
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s
Making capacity at resistive load

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated simultaneously with influencing

factors within nominal range. After 6 ms an additional 24 outputs may
be activated. The activation time for the 96 outputs must not exceed
200 ms. 48 outputs can be activated during 1 s. Continued activation is
possible with respect to current consumption but after 5 minutes the
temperature rise will adversely affect the hardware life. Maximum two
relays per BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated continuously due to
power dissipation.

19.2.13

mA input module (MIM)

19.2.13.1

Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the 20 to +20
mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure transducers. The
module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.

1064
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.13.2

Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, refer to section "Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMMI".
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter
has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately
The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory on
the module.
The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The module
communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.

1065
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Protection
& filter

Protection
& filter

Volt-ref

DC/DC
Optoisolation

A/D Converter
Volt-ref

DC/DC
Optoisolation

A/D Converter
Volt-ref

DC/DC

Optoisolation

A/D Converter
Volt-ref

DC/DC

Optoisolation

A/D Converter

Protection
& filter

Volt-ref

DC/DC

Optoisolation

A/D Converter

Protection
& filter

Volt-ref

Memory

DC/DC

Microcontroller

Backplane connector

Protection
& filter

Optoisolation

A/D Converter

CAN

Process connector

Protection
& filter

99000504.vsd
IEC99000504 V1 EN

Figure 504:

19.2.13.3

MIM block diagram

Technical data
Table 674:

MIM - mA input module

Quantity:

Rated value:

Nominal range:

Input resistance

Rin = 194 Ohm

Input range

5, 10, 20mA
0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20mA

Power consumption
each mA-board
each mA input

2W
0.1 W

1066
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.14

Serial and LON communication module (SLM)

19.2.14.1

Introduction
The serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for SPA, IEC 60870-5-103,
DNP3 and LON communication. The module has two optical communication ports for
plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass. One port is used for serial communication
(SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 port or dedicated IEC 60870-5-103 port depending
on ordered SLM module) and one port is dedicated for LON communication.

19.2.14.2

Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of optical
fiber connectors, see figure 505. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and
the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.

IEC05000760 V1 EN

Figure 505:

The SLM variants, component side view

Snap in connector for plastic fiber

ST connector for glass fiber

LON port

SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port or dedicated IEC 60870-5-103 port depending on

ordered SLM module

1067
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

IEC05000761 V1 EN

Figure 506:

The SLM layout overview, component side view

Receiver, LON

Transmitter, LON

Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3

Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3

Observe that when the SLM connectors are viewed from the rear side
of the IED, contact 4 above is in the uppermost position and contact 1
in the lowest position.

19.2.14.3

Technical data
Table 675:

SLM LON port

Quantity

Range or value

Optical connector

Glass fiber: type ST

Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in

Fiber, optical budget

Glass fiber: 11 dB (3000 ft typically *)

Plastic fiber: 7 dB (35 ft 10 m typically *)

Fiber diameter

Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fiber: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

1068
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 676:

SLM SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Quantity

Range or value

Optical connector

Glass fiber: type ST

Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in

Fiber, optical budget

Glass fiber: 11 dB (3000ft/1000 m typically *)

Plastic fiber: 7 dB (80ft/25 m typically *)

diameter

Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fiber: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

19.2.15

Galvanic RS485 communication module

19.2.15.1

Introduction
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used for DNP3.0
communication. The module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a
balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections.
A 2-wire connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop
communication with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires however a
control of the output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for RX and TX
multidrop communication with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No special
control signal is needed in this case.

19.2.15.2

Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. The internal structure of the RS485 can be seen in figure 507:

PCI-con

PCIController

Local bus
to
wishbone
Status
Register

ID-chip

Control
Register

UART

RS485
tranceiver
Isolation

Rx

6-pole-connector

PCI-bus

Tx

Isolation

Isolation
Termination

Info
Register
Isolated
DC/DC

Soft
ground

2-pole
connector

PCI-con

Internal
bus

Wishbone interconnect switch

FPGA
32 MHz

IEC06000516 V1 EN

Figure 507:

The internal structure of the RS485 card

1069
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

RS485 connector pinouts

The arrangement for the pins in the RS485 connector (figure 508) are presented in
table 677:
Table 677:

The arrangement for the pins

Pin

Name 2-wire

Name 4-wire

Description

RS485+

TX+

Receive/transmit high or transmit high

RS485

TX

Receive/transmit

Term

T-Term

Termination resistor for transmitter (and receiver in 2

wir case) (connect to TX+)

N.A.

R-Term

Termination resistor for receiver (connect to RX+)

N.A.

RX

Receive low

N.A.

RX+

Receive high

Angle
bracket

Screw
terminal
X3

Screw
terminal
X1

1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6

RS485
PWB

Backplane

IEC06000517 V1 EN

Figure 508:

RS485 connector

2-wire: Connect pin 1 to pin 6 and pin 2 to pin 5

Termination (2-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3

Termination (4-wire): Connect pin 1 to pin 3 and pin 4 to pin 6

Soft ground connector pinouts

A second 2-pole screw connector is used for the connection of IO-ground. It can be
used in two combinations like:

1070
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.15.3

Unconnected: No ground of the IO-part .

Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a MOV

Technical data
Table 678:

Galvanic RS485 communication module

Quantity

Range or value

Communication speed

240019200 bauds

External connectors

RS-485 6-pole connector

Soft ground 2-pole connector

19.2.16

Optical ethernet module (OEM)

19.2.16.1

Introduction
The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communication buses
(like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol (OEM rear port A, B). The
process bus use the IEC 61850-9-2LE protocol (OEM rear port C, D). The module has
one or two optical ports with ST connectors.

19.2.16.2

Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according
to IEC6185081 have been implemented.

19.2.16.3

Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card
on the ADM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single channel or
double channel unit.

1071
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

PCI - bus Connector

100Base-FX
Transmitter

EEPROM

ST fiber optic
connectors

Ethernet Controller
100Base-FX
Receiver
PCI - PCI Bridge

100Base-FX
Transmitter

ID chip

ST fiber optic
connectors

Ethernet Controller
100Base-FX
Receiver

EEPROM
IO - bus Connector

en04000472.vsd
IEC04000472 V1 EN

Figure 509:

OEM block diagram.

ID chip

LED

Transmitter

IO bus

Receiver

Ethernet cont.

25MHz oscillator

LED

Transmitter

Ethernet cont.

25MHz oscillator

PCI bus

Receiver

PCI to PCI
bridge

en05000472.vsd
IEC05000472 V1 EN

Figure 510:

19.2.16.4

OEM layout, standard PMC format 2 channels

Technical data
Table 679:

OEM - Optical ethernet module

Quantity

Rated value

Number of channels

1 or 2 (port A, B for IEC61850-8-1 and port C, D for

IEC 61850-9-2LE)

Standard

IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX

Type of fiber

62.5/125 mm multimode fibre

Wave length

1300 nm

Optical connector

Type ST

Communication speed

Fast Ethernet 100 MB

1072
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.17

Line data communication module (LDCM)

19.2.17.1

Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between the
IEDs situated at distances <68 miles or from the IED to optical to electrical converter
with G.703 interface located on a distances <1.9 miles away. The LDCM module sends
and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI standard
format is used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module has
one optical port with ST connectors see figure 511.

Line data communication module LDCM

Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED
communicates.
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (850 nm multi mode) are available.
Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.
Never look into the laser beam.

19.2.17.2

Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:

the ADM
the NUM

1073
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

ID

ST

16.000
MHz
32,768
MHz

IO-connector

ST

en07000087.vsd
IEC07000087 V1 EN

Figure 511:

The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI
connectors and one I/O ST type connector

X1
2.5V

ADN
2841

MAX
3645

DS
3904

DS
3904

ID

FPGA
256 FBGA

PCI9054
TQ176

3
2

en06000393.vsd
IEC06000393 V1 EN

Figure 512:

19.2.17.3

The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width

format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

Technical data

1074
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 680:

Line data communication module

Characteristic
Type of LDCM

Range or value
Short range (SR)

Type of fiber

Graded-index
multimode
62.5/125 m or
50/125 m

Singlemode 9/125
m

Singlemode 9/125 m

Wave length

850 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Optical budget
Graded-index multimode
62.5/125 mm,

13 dB (typical
distance about 2
mile *)
9 dB (typical
distance about 1
mile *)

22 dB (typical
distance 50 mile *)

26 dB (typical distance 68 mile *)

Optical connector

Type ST

Type FC/PC

Type FC/PC

Protocol

C37.94

C37.94
implementation **)

C37.94 implementation **)

Data transmission

Synchronous

Synchronous

Synchronous

Transmission rate / Data

rate

2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s

2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s

2 Mb/s / 64 kbit/s

Clock source

Internal or
derived from
received signal

Internal or derived
from received signal

Internal or derived from received

signal

Graded-index multimode
50/125 mm

Medium range (MR)

Long range (LR)

*) depending on optical budget calculation

**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94

19.2.18

Galvanic X.21 line data communication (X.21-LDCM)

19.2.18.1

Introduction
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IEDs.
Examples of applications:

Line differential protection

Binary signal transfer

1075
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware
19.2.18.2

1MRK506312-UUS C

Design

The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.

en07000196.vsd
IEC07000196 V1 EN

Figure 513:

Overview of the X.21 LDCM module

1
1

15

en07000239.wmf

IEC07000239 V1 EN

Figure 514:

The X.21 LDCM module external connectors

1076
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

1.
2.
3.
4.

Ground selection connector for IO, screw terminals, 2-pole

Ground pin
Soft ground pin, see figure 515
X.21 Micro D-sub 15 pole male connector according to the V11 (X:27) balanced
version

I/O

100kW

100nF

Soft ground
en07000242.vsd
IEC07000242 V1 EN

Figure 515:

Schematic view of soft ground

Grounding
At special problems with ground loops, the soft ground connection for the IO-ground
can be tested.
Three different kinds of grounding principles can be set (used for fault tracing):
1.
2.
3.

Direct ground - The normal grounding is direct ground, connect terminal 2 direct
to the chassi.
No ground - Leave the connector without any connection.
Soft ground - Connect soft ground pin (3), see figure 514

X.21 connector
Table 681:

Pinout for the X.21 communication connector

Pin number

Signal

Shield (ground)

TXD A

Control A

RXD A

Signal timing A

Table continues on next page

1077
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

19.2.18.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Ground

TXD B

10

Control B

11

RXD B

13

Signal timing B

5,7,12,14,15

Not used

Functionality
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64 kbit/
s.
A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).
Synchronization
The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission
is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a DTE.
When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal is low it
will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control register.
Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.
When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set as a
master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal
Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.
The Byte Timing signal is not used in ABB devices.

19.2.18.4

Technical data
Table 682:

Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)

Quantity

Range or value

Connector, X.21

Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch

Connector, ground selection

2 pole screw terminal

Standard

CCITT X21

Communication speed

64 kbit/s

Insulation

1 kV

Maximum cable length

100 m

1078
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.2.19

GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

19.2.19.1

Introduction
This module includes a GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has one
SMA contact for connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS STconnector output.

19.2.19.2

Design
The GTM is a PCMIP-format card and is placed only on one of the ADM slots. The
antenna input connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded plate to
eliminate the risk of electromagnetic interference.
All communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the PCI-bus. PPS time data
is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide 1s accuracy at
sampling level. An optical transmitter for PPS output is available for time
synchronization of another relay with an optical PPS input. The PPS output connector
is of ST-type for multimode fibre and could be used up to 1 km.

Controller

Selector

PCI

GPS- receiver

UART-core
PCI- core

FPGA
PCI
Antenna
connector

Receiver
memory
Stripline( 50 Ohms)

Wishbone bus

Registers
Optical
PPS
transmitter

TSU
IO

Transmitter
Driver
JTAG
connector

Configmemory

OSC

ID- chip

IEC09000980-1-en.vsd
IEC09000980 V1 EN

Figure 516:

Block diagram of the GCM

1079
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware
19.2.19.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 683:

GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

Receiver

1s relative UTC

Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new

position or after power loss longer than 1 month

<30 minutes

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss

longer than 48 hours

<15 minutes

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss

shorter than 48 hours

<5 minutes

19.2.20

GPS antenna

19.2.20.1

Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.

19.2.20.2

Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on
an antenna mast. See figure 517

1080
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

2
3

xx04000155.vsd
IEC04000155 V2 EN

Figure 517:

Antenna with console

where:
1

GPS antenna

TNC connector

Console, (2'6.7"x4'11')

Mounting holes about 1/5"

Tab for securing of antenna cable

Vertical mounting position

Horizontal mounting position

Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male
SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GTM. Choose cable type
and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to the
antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna cable
with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna. When the

1081
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the receiver.

REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is connected.

19.2.20.3

Technical data
Table 684:

GPS Antenna and cable

Function

Value

Max antenna cable attenuation

26 db @ 1.6 GHz

Antenna cable impedance

50 ohm

Lightning protection

Must be provided externally

Antenna cable connector

SMA in receiver end

TNC in antenna end

Accuracy

+/-2s

19.2.21

IRIG-B time synchronization module IRIG-B

19.2.21.1

Introduction
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate time synchronizing of the
IED from a station clock.
The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input shall be used for synchronizing when IEC
61850-9-2LE is used.
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X IRIG-B support.
Optical connection (ST) for 1344 IRIG-B support.

19.2.21.2

Design
The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle both
a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude modulated
signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type ST for PPS
to synchronize the time between several protections.

1082
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

STconnector

FPGA

PCI-con

32 MHz

OPTO_INPUT
PCI-bus

Registers

PCI-con

PCI-Controller

IRIGDecoder

ID-chip
Capture1

IRIG_INPUT
ZXING

Amplitude
modulator
Isolated
receiver

IO-con

Capture2

BNCconnector

4 mm barrier

Zero-cross
detector

MPPS
PPS

Isolated
DC/DC
5 to +- 12V

TSU

CMPPS

en06000303.vsd
IEC06000303 V1 EN

A1

Y2

C
C

ST

A1

IRIG-B block diagram

DC//DC

Figure 518:

3
2

en06000304.vsd
IEC06000304 V1 EN

Figure 519:

IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm
multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for IRIGB signal input

1083
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware
19.2.21.3

1MRK506312-UUS C

Technical data
Table 685:

IRIG-B

Quantity

Rated value

Number of channels IRIG-B

Number of channels PPS

Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B

BNC

Pulse-width modulated

5 Vpp

Amplitude modulated
low level
high level

1-3 Vpp
3 x low level, max 9 Vpp

Supported formats

IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x

Accuracy

+/-10s for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100s for IRIG-B 12x

Input impedance

100 k ohm

Optical connector:
Optical connector PPS and IRIG-B

Type ST

Type of fibre

62.5/125 m multimode fibre

Supported formats

IRIG-B 00x, PPS

Accuracy

+/- 2s

1084
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.3

Dimensions

19.3.1

Case without rear cover

A
D

C
xx08000164.vsd

IEC08000164 V1 EN

Figure 520:

Case without rear cover

1085
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

K
F

G
H

J
xx08000166.vsd

IEC08000166 V1 EN

Figure 521:
Case size
(inches)

Case without rear cover with 19 rack mounting kit

E

6U, 1/2 x 19

10.47

8.81

7.92

9.96

8.10

7.50

8.02

7.39

6U, 3/4 x 19

10.47

13.23

7.92

9.96

12.52

7.50

12.44

7.39

6U, 1/1 x 19

10.47

17.65

7.92

9.96

16.94

7.50

16.86

18.31

7.39

19.00

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit

1086
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.3.2

Case with rear cover

C
xx08000163.vsd

IEC08000163 V1 EN

Figure 522:

Case with rear cover

1087
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

K
F

G
H

J
xx08000165.vsd

IEC08000165 V1 EN

Figure 523:

Case with rear cover and 19 rack mounting kit

xx05000503.vsd
IEC05000503 V1 EN

Figure 524:

Rear cover case with details

1088
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Case size
(inches)

6U, 1/2 x 19

10.47

8.81

9.53

10.07

8.10

7.50

8.02

9.00

6U, 3/4 x 19

10.47

13.23

9.53

10.07

12.52

7.50

12.4

9.00

6U, 1/1 x 19

10.47

17.65

9.53

10.07

16.86

7.50

16.86

18.31

9.00

19.00

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19 rack mounting kit.

19.3.3

Flush mounting dimensions

A
B

E
D
xx08000162.vsd
IEC08000162 V1 EN

Figure 525:

Flush mounting

1089
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Case size
Tolerance

Cut-out dimensions (inches)

A
+/0.04

B
+/0.04

6U, 1/2 x 19

8.27

10.01

0.160.39

0.49

6U, 3/4 x 19

12.69

10.01

0.160.39

0.49

6U, 1/1 x 19

17.11

10.01

0.160.39

0.49

E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover

19.3.4

Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

xx06000182.vsd
IEC06000182 V1 EN

Figure 526:

A 1/2 x 19 size 670 series IED side-by-side with RHGS6.

1090
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

C
xx05000505.vsd
IEC05000505 V1 EN

Figure 527:

Case size
(inches)
Tolerance

A
0.04

B
0.04

Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

C
0.04

D
0.04

E
0.04

F
0.04

G
0.04

6U, 1/2 x 19

8.42

10.21

9.46

7.50

1.35

0.52

0.25 diam

6U, 3/4 x 19

12.85

10.21

13.89

7.50

1.35

0.52

0.25 diam

6U, 1/1 x 19

17.27

10.21

18.31

7.50

1.35

0.52

0.25 diam

1091
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware
19.3.5

1MRK506312-UUS C

Wall mounting dimensions

A
B
E

en04000471.vsd
IEC04000471 V1 EN

Figure 528:

Case size (inches)

Wall mounting

6U, 1/2 x 19

10.50

10.52

10.74

15.36

9.57

6U, 3/4 x 19

15.92

14.94

10.74

15.36

9.57

6U, 1/1 x 19

20.31

19.33

10.74

15.36

9.57

19.3.6

External resistor unit for high impedance differential protection

WARNING! - USE EXTREME CAUTION!Dangerously high
voltages might be present on this equipment, especially on the plate
with resistors. Do any maintenance ONLY if the primary object
protected with this equipment is de-energized. If required by national low/

1092
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

[6.97]

[4.02]

[1.48]

standard enclose the plate with resistors with a protective cover or in a

separate box!

[18.31]

[0.33]

[0.79]

[7.68]

[18.98]

Dimension
mm [inches]

xx06000232.eps

IEC06000232 V2 EN

Dimension drawing of a one phase impedance resistor unit

[7.50]

[10.47]

[1.50]

Figure 529:

[0.33]

[18.31]

[0.79]

[7.68]

[18.98]

[inches]

en06000234.eps

IEC06000234 V2 EN

Figure 530:

Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit

1093
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.4

Mounting alternatives

19.4.1

Flush mounting

19.4.1.1

Overview
The flush mounting kit are utilized for case sizes:

1/2 x 19
3/4 x 19
1/1 x 19
1/4 x 19 (RHGS6 6U)

Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, for class IP54
protection.
Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs when
IP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained when
mounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealing

must be ordered when ordering the IED.

1094
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.4.1.2

Mounting procedure for flush mounting

1

5
2

6
3

xx08000161.vsd
IEC08000161 V1 EN

Figure 531:

Flush mounting details.

PosNo Description

Quantity Type

Sealing strip, used to obtain IP54 class. The sealing strip is factory
mounted between the case and front plate.

Fastener

Groove

Screw, self tapping

2.9x9.5 mm

Joining point of sealing strip

Panel

1095
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.4.2

19 panel rack mounting

19.4.2.1

Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19 cubicle rack by using the for each size
suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws for
the angles.
The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED size 1/2 x 19 or
3/4 x 19 either to the left or right side of the cubicle.
Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-byside mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19.

When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws that follows
the recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions
than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

1096
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.4.2.2

Mounting procedure for 19 panel rack mounting

2
1a

1b

xx08000160.vsd
IEC08000160 V1 EN

Figure 532:
Pos

19 panel rack mounting details

Description

Quantity

Type

1a, 1b

Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to the

left or right side of the case.

Screw

M4x6

1097
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.4.3

Wall mounting

19.4.3.1

Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19, 3/4 x 19,1/1 x 19, can be wall mounted. It is also possible
to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows the
recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than
the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for communication modules
with fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON
communication module (SLM),Optical Ethernet module (OEM) and
Line data communication module (LDCM).

19.4.3.2

Mounting procedure for wall mounting

3
4

2
1

5
6

xx04000453.vs d

DOCUMENT127716-IMG2265 V1 EN

Figure 533:

Wall mounting details.

1098
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.4.3.3

PosNo

Description

Quantity

Type

Bushing

Screw

M4x10

Screw

M6x12 or corresponding

Mounting bar

Screw

M5x8

Side plate

How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover, which is recommended to use
with this type of mounting. See figure 534.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 3.2 inches is required on the unhinged
side.
View from above
3

3.2"
(80 mm)

ANSI_en06000135.vsd
ANSI06000135 V1 EN

Figure 534:

How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

PosNo

Description

Type

Screw

M4x10

Screw

M5x8

Rear protection cover

1099
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.4.4

Side-by-side 19 rack mounting

19.4.4.1

Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side
up to a maximum size of 19. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side
mounting kit together with the 19 rack panel mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately.
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with
other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

19.4.4.2

Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

2
1

xx04000456.vsd
IEC04000456 V1 EN

Figure 535:

Side-by-side rack mounting details.

PosNo

Description

Quantity

Type

Mounting plate

2, 3

Screw

16

M4x6

Mounting angle

1100
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.4.4.3

IED in the 670 series mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19 or 3/4 x 19 size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending
on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type
RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of,
for example, a DC-switch or two trip IEDs.

xx06000180.vsd
IEC06000180 V1 EN

Figure 536:

IED in the 670 series (1/2 x 19) mounted with a RHGS6 case
containing a test switch module equipped with only a test switch and a
RX2 terminal base

19.4.5

Side-by-side flush mounting

19.4.5.1

Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required. If
your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting
details kit and the 19 panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has to
be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19.
With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 is
obtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDs
separately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, see
section "Flush mounting".

1101
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with
other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

Please contact factory for special add on plates for mounting FT

switches on the side (for 1/2 19" case) or bottom of the relay.

19.4.5.2

Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

1

3
4

xx06000181.vsd
IEC06000181 V1 EN

Figure 537:

Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x 19

IED).

PosNo

Description

Quantity

Type

Mounting plate

2, 3

Screw

16

M4x6

Mounting angle

1102
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

19.5

Technical data

19.5.1

Enclosure
Table 686:

Case

Material

Steel sheet

Front plate

Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI

Surface treatment

Aluzink preplated steel

Finish

Light grey (RAL 7035)

Table 687:

Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front

IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom

IP20

Rear side

IP20 with screw compression type

IP10 with ring lug terminals

Table 688:

Weight

Case size

19.5.2

Weight

6U, 1/2 x 19

22 lb

6U, 3/4 x 19

33 lb

6U, 1/1 x 19

40 lb

Connection system
Table 689:

CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type

Rated voltage and current

Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type

250 V AC, 20 A

4 mm2 (AWG12)
2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)

Terminal blocks suitable for ring

lug terminals

250 V AC, 20 A

4 mm2 (AWG12)

Table 690:

Binary I/O connection system

Connector type

Rated voltage

Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type

250 V AC

2.5 mm2 (AWG14)

2 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)

Terminal blocks suitable for ring

lug terminals

300 V AC

3 mm2 (AWG14)

1103
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Because of limitations of space, when ring lug terminal is ordered for

Binary I/O connections, one blank slot is necessary between two
adjacent IO cards. Please refer to the ordering particulars for details.

19.5.3

Influencing factors
Table 691:

Temperature and humidity influence

Parameter

Reference value

Nominal range

Influence

Ambient temperature,
operate value

+20 C

-10 C to +55 C

0.02% /C

Relative humidity
Operative range

10%-90%
0%-95%

10%-90%

Storage temperature

-40 C to +70 C

Table 692:

Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on

Reference value

Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage

Operative range

Within nominal range Influence

15% of EL

0.01% /%

Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate

value

20% of EL

0.01% /%

Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage

24-60 V DC 20%

Interruption
interval
050 ms

max. 2%
Full wave rectified

90-250 V DC 20%
No restart

0 s

Correct behaviour
at power down

Restart time

<300 s

1104
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 693:

Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 602551)

Dependence on

19.5.4

Within nominal range

Influence

Frequency dependence,
operate value

fn 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fn 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

1.0% / Hz

Frequency dependence for

distance protection operate
value

fn 2.5 Hz for 50 Hz
fn 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

2.0% / Hz

Harmonic frequency
dependence (20% content)

2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn

1.0%

Harmonic frequency
dependence for distance
protection (10% content)

2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn

6.0%

Harmonic frequency
dependence for high
impedance differential
protection (10% content)

2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fn

5.0%

Type tests according to standard

Table 694:

Electromagnetic compatibility

Test

Type test values

Reference standards

1 MHz Oscillatory burst

disturbance

2.5 kV

IEC 60255-22-1

100 kHz slow damped oscillatory

wave immunity test

2.5 kV

IEC 61000-4-18, Class III

Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz

2-4 kV

IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV

Surge withstand capability test

2.5 kV, oscillatory

4.0 kV, fast transient

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1

Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application

15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge

IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV

Electrostatic discharge
Direct application
Indirect application

15 kV air discharge
8 kV contact discharge
8 kV contact discharge

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1

Fast transient disturbance

4 kV

IEC 60255-22-4, Class A

Surge immunity test

1-2 kV, 1.2/50 ms

high energy

IEC 60255-22-5

Power frequency immunity test

150-300 V

IEC 60255-22-7, Class A

Conducted common mode

immunity test

15 Hz-150 kHz

IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV

Power frequency magnetic field

test

1000 A/m, 3 s
100 A/m, cont.

IEC 61000-4-8, Class V

Damped oscillatory magnetic field

test

100 A/m

IEC 61000-4-10, Class V

IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV

Table continues on next page

1105
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Test

Type test values

Reference standards

Radiated electromagnetic field

disturbance

20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz

Radiated electromagnetic field

disturbance

35 V/m
26-1000 MHz

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

Conducted electromagnetic field

disturbance

10 V, 0.15-80 MHz

IEC 60255-22-6

Radiated emission

30-1000 MHz

IEC 60255-25

Conducted emission

0.15-30 MHz

IEC 60255-25

Table 695:

IEC 60255-22-3

1.4-2.7 GHz

Insulation

Test

Type test values

Reference standard

Dielectric test

2.0 kV AC, 1 min.

Impulse voltage test

5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J

Insulation resistance

>100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 696:

ANSI C37.90

Environmental tests

Test

Type test value

Reference standard

Cold test

Test Ad for 16 h at -25C

IEC 60068-2-1

Storage test

Test Ad for 16 h at -40C

IEC 60068-2-1

Dry heat test

Test Bd for 16 h at +70C

IEC 60068-2-2

Damp heat test, steady state

Test Ca for 4 days at +40 C and

humidity 93%

IEC 60068-2-78

Damp heat test, cyclic

Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55

C and humidity 93 to 95% (1
cycle = 24 hours)

IEC 60068-2-30

Table 697:

CE compliance

Test

According to

Immunity

EN 50263

Emissivity

EN 50263

Low voltage directive

EN 50178

1106
Technical reference manual

Section 19
IED hardware

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 698:

Mechanical tests

Test

Type test values

Reference standards

Vibration response test

Class II

IEC 60255-21-1

Vibration endurance test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-1

Shock response test

Class II

IEC 60255-21-2

Shock withstand test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-2

Bump test

Class I

IEC 60255-21-2

Seismic test

Class II

IEC 60255-21-3

1107
Technical reference manual

1108

Section 20
Labels

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 20

Labels

About this chapter

This chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them.

20.1

Labels on IED
Front view of IED

1
2
3
4
5
6
6

7
xx06000574.ep
IEC06000574 V1 EN

1109
Technical reference manual

Section 20
Labels

1MRK506312-UUS C

Product type, description and serial number

Order number, dc supply voltage and rated

frequency

Optional, customer specific information

Manufacturer

Transformer input module, rated currents and

voltages

Transformer designations

Ordering and serial number

IEC06000577-CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC V1 EN

IEC06000576-POS-NO V1 EN

1110
Technical reference manual

Section 20
Labels

1MRK506312-UUS C

Rear view of IED

1
2
3

4
en06000573.ep
IEC06000573 V1 EN

Warning label

Caution label

Class 1 laser product label

IEC06000575 V1 EN

Warning label

1111
Technical reference manual

1112

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 21

Connection diagrams

This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and optical
connector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and optical
connections to the IED.

1113
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-1-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN

1114
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-2-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN

1115
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-3-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN

1116
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-4-670-1.2-PG-ANSI V1 EN

1117
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-5-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1118
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-6-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1119
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-7-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1120
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-8-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1121
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-9-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1122
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-10-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1123
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-11-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1124
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-12-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1125
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-13-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1126
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-14-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1127
Technical reference manual

Section 21
Connection diagrams

1MRK506312-UUS C

1MRK002802-AB-15-670-1.2-ANSI V1 EN

1128
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 22

Inverse time characteristics

About this chapter

This chapter describes current and voltage dependant time functionality. Both ANSI
and IEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.

22.1

Application
In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections at different
points in the network different time delays for the different protections are normally
used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time-lag. In more sophisticated
applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Both alternatives are
shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protections operating in series.

IPickup

IPickup

IPickup

xx05000129_ansi.vsd
ANSI05000129 V1 EN

Figure 538:

Three overcurrent protections operating in series

1129
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

Stage 3
Time
Stage 2

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 1

Stage 1

Fault point
position

en05000130.vsd
IEC05000130 V1 EN

Figure 539:

Definite time overcurrent characteristics

Time

Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
IEC05000131 V1 EN

Figure 540:

Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time
and still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:

Difference between pickup time of the protections to be co-ordinated

Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault
Reset times of the protections
Margin dependent of the time delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

1130
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A1

B1

51

51

Feeder

Time axis

t=0

t=t1

t=t2

t=t3
en05000132_ansi.vsd

ANSI05000132 V1 EN

Figure 541:

Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:
t=0

is The fault occurs

t=t1

is Protection B1 trips

t=t2

is Breaker at B1 opens

t=t3

is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).
When the fault occurs the protections pickup to detect the fault current. After the time
t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts its
delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences between
the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is sent to the
B1 circuit breaker. At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts
and thus the fault current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between
different faults. The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test
protocols. Still at t2 the timer of protection A1 is active. At time t3 the protection A1 is
reset, that is the timer is stopped.
In most applications it is required that the times shall reset as fast as possible when the
current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time shall be
minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type of delayed
reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following applications:

1131
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current IED, close to the faults, picks
up and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.
Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the
release function.

22.2

Principle of operation

22.2.1

Mode of operation
The function can operate in a definite time-lag mode or in a current definite inverse
time mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC based standard
curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via the component
inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.
Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.
If current in any phase exceeds the set pickup current value (here internal signal
pickupValue), a timer, according to the selected operating mode, is started. The
component always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current
level used in timing calculations.
In case of definite time-lag mode the timer will run constantly until the time is reached
or until the current drops below the reset value (pickup value minus the hysteresis) and
the reset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve ANSI/IEEE Definite time or IEC Definite time are chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 192.

1132
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A
t [s ] =
P

Pickupn

-C

+ B td

(Equation 192)

EQUATION1640 V1 EN

where:
p, A, B, C

are constants defined for each curve type,

Pickupn

is the set pickup current for step n,

td

is set time multiplier for step n and

is the measured current.

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the set
pickup level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be seen:

( top - B td ) Pickupn

-C

= A td
(Equation 193)

EQUATION1642 V1 EN

where:
top

is the operating time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according to
equation 194, in addition to the constant time delay:
t

Pickupn
0

- C dt A td

EQUATION1643 V1 EN

(Equation 194)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.

1133
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

i ( j ) P

- C A td

Pickupn

j =1

Dt

(Equation 195)

EQUATION1644 V1 EN

where:
j=1

is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been

detected, that is, when

i
Pickupn

>1

EQUATION1646 V1 EN

Dt

is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the

protection algorithm,

is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time
equation is fulfilled, that is, when a trip is given and

i (j)

is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC
and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse time characteristics are supported.
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time-lag of operation, see
figure 542.

1134
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

Operate
time

tMin

Current

IMin

IEC05000133-3-en.vsd
IEC05000133 V2 EN

Figure 542:

Minimum time-lag operation for the IEC curves

In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be set
to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse time curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the
operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional inverse curves available; the RI curve and the RD curve.
The RI inverse time curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanical ASEA
relay RI. The curve is described by equation 197:

td
t [s ] =
0.339 - 0.235 Pickupn
i

(Equation 197)

EQUATION1647 V1 EN

where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n
td

is set time multiplier for step n

is the measured current

1135
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

The RD inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex protection
RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for sensitive residual
ground-fault current protection, with ability to detect high-resistive ground faults. The
curve is described by equation 198:

td Pickupn

[ ]

t s = 5.8 - 1.35 ln

(Equation 198)

EQUATION1648 V1 EN

where:
Pickupn is the set pickup current for step n,
td

is set time multiplier for step n and

is the measured current

If the curve type programmable is chosen, the user can make a tailor made inverse time
curve according to the general equation 199.

A
t [s ] =
P

Pickupn

-C

+ B td

EQUATION1640 V1 EN

(Equation 199)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. There is the possibility to
choose between three different reset time-lags.

Instantaneous Reset
IEC Reset
ANSI Reset.

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops
below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer will be reset after a set constant time when the current
drops below the set pickup current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the pickup current level minus the hysteresis).
The timer will reset according to equation 200.

1136
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

tr
td
t [s] =
i 2

-1
pickupn

(Equation 200)

ANSIEQUATION1197 V1 EN

where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of the

choice of time delay characteristic.
For the definite time delay characteristics the possible reset time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics
are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current dependent reset
time.
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC set constant time reset).
For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous, IEC constant time reset and ANSI current
dependent reset time. If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be
given, see equation 201:

tr
td
t [s] =
i pr

- cr
pickupn

ANSIEQUATION1198 V1 EN

(Equation 201)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous and IEC constant time reset.
When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate
time of the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set

1137
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

definite time delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is
of utmost importance to set the definite time delay for that stage to zero.

22.3

Inverse characteristics
Table 699:

ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function

Range or value

Accuracy

td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

ANSI Extremely Inverse

A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse

A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6

ANSI/IEEE C37.112, 5%
+ 40 ms

ANSI Normal Inverse

A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02,

tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse

A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02,

tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse

A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse

A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,

tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse

A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

Operating characteristic:

t =

A
P
( I - 1)

+ B td

EQUATION1651 V1 EN

Reset characteristic:
t =

(I

tr
2

td

-1

EQUATION1652 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

1138
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 700:

IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function

Range or value

Operating characteristic:

Accuracy

td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time

(0.000-60.000) s

0.5% of set time 10

ms

IEC Normal Inverse

A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse

A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC 60255-151, 5% + 40
ms

IEC Inverse

A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse

A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse

A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse

A=120, P=1.0

Programmable characteristic
Operate characteristic:

td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of
0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of
0.001
CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of
0.001

t =

A
P
td
( I - 1)

EQUATION1653 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

t =

A
P
(I - C )

+ B td

EQUATION1654 V1 EN

Reset characteristic:
t =

(I

TR
PR

- CR

td

EQUATION1655 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

1139
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 701:

RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function

Range or value

RI type inverse characteristic

1

t =

0.339 -

0.236

td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

Accuracy
IEC 60255-151, 5% + 40
ms

td

EQUATION1656 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic

t = 5.8 - 1.35 In

td = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

td
I

EQUATION1657 V1 EN

I = Imeasured/Iset

1140
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 702:

Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function

Range or value

Type A curve:
t =

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01

Accuracy
5% +40 ms

td

V - VPickup

VPickup

EQUATION1661 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:
t =

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01

td 480
V - VPickup

- 0.5
32
VPickup

2.0

- 0.035

EQUATION1662 V1 EN

Type C curve:
t =

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
td 480

V - VPickup

- 0.5
32
VPickup

3.0

- 0.035

EQUATION1663 V1 EN

Programmable curve:

t =

td A

V - VPickup
B
VPickup

EQUATION1664 V1 EN

-C

+D

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in
steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1141
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 703:

Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function

Range or value

Type A curve:

t =

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01

Accuracy
5% +40 ms

td

VPickup - V

VPickup

EQUATION1658 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:

t =

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01

td 480
VPickup - V

32
VPickup

- 0.5

2.0

+ 0.055

EQUATION1659 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured
Programmable curve:

t =

td A

VPickup - V
B
VPickup

EQUATION1660 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured

+D
P

-C

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in
steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1142
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

Table 704:

Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function

Range or value

Type A curve:
t =

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01

Accuracy
5% +40 ms

td

V - VPickup

VPickup

EQUATION1661 V1 EN

V = Vmeasured
Type B curve:
t =

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01

td 480
V - VPickup

- 0.5
32
VPickup

2.0

- 0.035

EQUATION1662 V1 EN

Type C curve:
t =

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
td 480

V - VPickup

- 0.5
32
VPickup

3.0

- 0.035

EQUATION1663 V1 EN

Programmable curve:

t =

td A

V - VPickup
B
VPickup

EQUATION1664 V1 EN

-C

+D

td = (0.05-1.10) in steps
of 0.01
A = (0.005-200.000) in
steps of 0.001
B = (0.50-100.00) in
steps of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

1143
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070750 V2 EN

Figure 543:

ANSI Extremely inverse time characteristics

1144
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070751 V2 EN

Figure 544:

ANSI Very inverse time characteristics

1145
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070752 V2 EN

Figure 545:

ANSI Normal inverse time characteristics

1146
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070753 V2 EN

Figure 546:

ANSI Moderately inverse time characteristics

1147
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070817 V2 EN

Figure 547:

ANSI Long time extremely inverse time characteristics

1148
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070818 V2 EN

Figure 548:

ANSI Long time very inverse time characteristics

1149
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070819 V2 EN

Figure 549:

ANSI Long time inverse time characteristics

1150
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070820 V2 EN

Figure 550:

IEC Normal inverse time characteristics

1151
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070821 V2 EN

Figure 551:

IEC Very inverse time characteristics

1152
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070822 V2 EN

Figure 552:

IEC Inverse time characteristics

1153
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070823 V2 EN

Figure 553:

IEC Extremely inverse time characteristics

1154
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070824 V2 EN

Figure 554:

IEC Short time inverse time characteristics

1155
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070825 V2 EN

Figure 555:

IEC Long time inverse time characteristics

1156
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070826 V2 EN

Figure 556:

RI-type inverse time characteristics

1157
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

A070827 V2 EN

Figure 557:

RD-type inverse time characteristics

1158
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6 V1 EN

Figure 558:

Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection

1159
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142 V1 EN

Figure 559:

Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection

1160
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679 V1 EN

Figure 560:

Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection

1161
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC V1 EN

Figure 561:

Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection

1162
Technical reference manual

Section 22
Inverse time characteristics

1MRK506312-UUS C

GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1 V1 EN

Figure 562:

Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection

1163
Technical reference manual

1164

Section 23
Glossary

1MRK506312-UUS C

Section 23

Glossary

About this chapter

This chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABB
technical documentation.
AC

Alternating current

ACT

Application configuration tool within PCM600

A/D converter

Analog-to-digital converter

ADBS

Amplitude deadband supervision

ADM

Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization

AI

Analog input

ANSI

American National Standards Institute

AR

Autoreclosing

AngNegRes

Setting parameter/ZD/

ArgDirAngDir

Setting parameter/ZD/

ASCT

Auxiliary summation current transformer

ASD

Adaptive signal detection

AWG

American Wire Gauge standard

BBP

Busbar protection

BFP

Breaker failure protection

BI

Binary input

BIM

Binary input module

BOM

Binary output module

BOS

Binary outputs status

BR

External bistable relay

BS

British Standards

BSR

Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks

BST

Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks

C37.94

IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals

between IEDs
1165

Technical reference manual

Section 23
Glossary

1MRK506312-UUS C

CAN

Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial

communication

CB

Circuit breaker

CBM

Combined backplane module

CCITT

Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and

Telephony. A United Nations-sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.

CCM

CAN carrier module

CCVT

Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer

Class C

Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI

CMPPS

Combined megapulses per second

CMT

Communication Management tool in PCM600

CO cycle

Close-open cycle

Codirectional

Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two

twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in
both directions

COMTRADE

Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange

format for Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI
C37.111, 1999 / IEC60255-24

Contra-directional

Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four

twisted pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in
both directions and two for transmitting clock signals

CPU

Central processor unit

CR

Carrier receive

CRC

Cyclic redundancy check

CROB

Control relay output block

CS

Carrier send

CT

Current transformer

CVT or CCVT

Capacitive voltage transformer

DAR

Delayed autoreclosing

DARPA

Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US

developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)

DBDL

Dead bus dead line

DBLL

Dead bus live line

DC

Direct current

1166
Technical reference manual

Section 23
Glossary

1MRK506312-UUS C

DFC

Data flow control

DFT

Discrete Fourier transform

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DIP-switch

Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board

DI

Digital input

DLLB

Dead line live bus

DNP

Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012

DR

Disturbance recorder

DRAM

Dynamic random access memory

DRH

Disturbance report handler

DSP

Digital signal processor

DTT

Direct transfer trip scheme

EHV network

Extra high voltage network

EIA

Electronic Industries Association

EMC

Electromagnetic compatibility

EMF

(Electromotive force)

EMI

Electromagnetic interference

EnFP

End fault protection

EPA

Enhanced performance architecture

ESD

Electrostatic discharge

FCB

Flow control bit; Frame count bit

FOX 20

Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,

data and protection signals

FOX 512/515

Access multiplexer

FOX 6Plus

Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up

to seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers

G.703

Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by

local telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced
and unbalanced lines

GCM

Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver

module

GDE

Graphical display editor within PCM600

GI

General interrogation command

1167

Technical reference manual

Section 23
Glossary

1MRK506312-UUS C

GIS

Gas-insulated switchgear

GOOSE

Generic object-oriented substation event

GPS

Global positioning system

GSAL

Generic security application

GTM

GPS Time Module

HDLC protocol

High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC

standard

HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector

HMI

Human-machine interface

HSAR

High speed autoreclosing

HV

High-voltage

HVDC

High-voltage direct current

IDBS

Integrating deadband supervision

IEC

International Electrical Committee

IEC 60044-6

IEC Standard, Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements

for protective current transformers for transient performance

IEC 60870-5-103

Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial

master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication

IEC 61850

Substation automation communication standard

IEC 6185081

Communication protocol standard

IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE 802.12

A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on

twisted-pair or optical fiber cable

IEEE P1386.1

PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.

References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common
Mezzanine Card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for
the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).

IEEE 1686

Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs)

Cyber Security Capabilities

IED

Intelligent electronic device

I-GIS

Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear

IOM

Binary input/output module

Instance

When several occurrences of the same function are available

in the IED, they are referred to as instances of that function.

1168
Technical reference manual

Section 23
Glossary

1MRK506312-UUS C

One instance of a function is identical to another of the same

kind but has a different number in the IED user interfaces.
The word "instance" is sometimes defined as an item of
information that is representative of a type. In the same way
an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type
of function.
IP

1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP

protocol suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a
connectionless, best-effort packet-switching protocol. It
provides packet routing, fragmentation and reassembly
through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC standard

IP 20

Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level

IP20- Protected against solidforeign objects of12.5mm
diameter andgreater.

IP 40

Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level IP40Protected against solid foreign objects of 1mm diameter and
greater.

IP 54

Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level

IP54-Dust-protected,protected againstsplashing water.

IRF

Internal failure signal

IRIG-B:

InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,

standard 200

ITU

International Telecommunications Union

LAN

Local area network

LIB 520

High-voltage software module

LCD

Liquid crystal display

LDCM

Line differential communication module

LDD

Local detection device

LED

Light-emitting diode

LNT

LON network tool

LON

Local operating network

MCB

Miniature circuit breaker

MCM

Mezzanine carrier module

MIM

Milli-ampere module

MPM

Main processing module

1169

Technical reference manual

Section 23
Glossary

1MRK506312-UUS C

MVB

Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally

developed for use in trains.

NCC

National Control Centre

NUM

Numerical module

OCO cycle

Open-close-open cycle

OCP

Overcurrent protection

OEM

Optical ethernet module

OLTC

On-load tap changer

OV

Over-voltage

Overreach

A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault

condition. For example, a distance relay is overreaching when
the impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, that is, the
set reach. The relay sees the fault but perhaps it should not
have seen it.

PCI

Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus

PCM

Pulse code modulation

PCM600

Protection and control IED manager

PC-MIP

Mezzanine card standard

PMC

PCI Mezzanine card

POR

Permissive overreach

POTT

Permissive overreach transfer trip

Process bus

Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near

proximity to the measured and/or controlled components

PSM

Power supply module

PST

Parameter setting tool within PCM600

PT ratio

Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio

PUTT

Permissive underreach transfer trip

RASC

Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX

RCA

Relay characteristic angle

RFPP

Resistance for phase-to-phase faults

Resistance for phase-to-ground faults

RISC

Reduced instruction set computer

RMS value

Root mean square value

1170
Technical reference manual

Section 23
Glossary

1MRK506312-UUS C

RS422

A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data

in point-to-point connections

RS485

Serial link according to EIA standard RS485

RTC

Real-time clock

RTU

Remote terminal unit

SA

Substation Automation

SBO

Select-before-operate

SC

Switch or push button to close

SCS

Station control system

SCADA

Supervision, control and data acquisition

SCT

System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850

SDU

Service data unit

SLM

Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IEC/

DNP3 communication.

SMA connector

Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant

impedance.

SMT

Signal matrix tool within PCM600

SMS

Station monitoring system

SNTP

Simple network time protocol is used to synchronize

computer clocks on local area networks. This reduces the
requirement to have accurate hardware clocks in every
embedded system in a network. Each embedded node can
instead synchronize with a remote clock, providing the
required accuracy.

SPA

Strmberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slave

protocol for point-to-point communication

SRY

Switch for CB ready condition

ST

Switch or push button to trip

Starpoint

Neutral/Wye point of transformer or generator

SVC

Static VAr compensation

TC

Trip coil

TCS

Trip circuit supervision

TCP

Transmission control protocol. The most common transport

layer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.

1171
Technical reference manual

Section 23
Glossary

1MRK506312-UUS C

TCP/IP

Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de

facto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD
Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for Internet working
and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.

TEF

Time delayed gound-fault protection function

TNC connector

Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance

version of a BNC connector

TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC

UMT

User management tool

Underreach

A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault

condition. For example, a distance relay is underreaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the
apparent impedance to the fault applied to the balance point,
that is, the set reach. The relay does not see the fault but
perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.

UTC

Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale,

maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures
(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination
of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal
Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing
the Earth's irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock, and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for
aeroplane and ship navigation, where it is also sometimes
known by the military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the
phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude
zero.

UV

Undervoltage

WEI

Weak end infeed logic

VT

Voltage transformer

X.21

A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom

equipment

1172
Technical reference manual

Section 23
Glossary

1MRK506312-UUS C

3IO

Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the

residual or the -fault current

3VO

Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as

the residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

1173
Technical reference manual

1174

1175

ABB Inc.
1021 Main Campus Drive
Raleigh, NC 27606, USA
Phone
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365,
menu option #8

ABB Inc.
3450 Harvester Road
Burlington, ON L7N 3W5, Canada
Phone
Toll Free: 1-800-HELP-365,
menu option #8

ABB Mexico S.A. de C.V.

Paseo de las Americas No. 31 Lomas
Verdes 3a secc.
53125, Naucalpan, Estado De Mexico,
MEXICO
Phone
(+1) 440-585-7804, menu
option #8

1MRK506312-UUS C Copyright 2012 ABB. All rights reserved.

Contact us